Fujitsu ETERNUS AF650 S2 Disk Shelf Manual

Setup Firewall

Setup E-Mail Notification

Download MIB File

Send SNMP Trap Test

Display SMTP Log

Setup Syslog

Setup SSH Server Key

Create Self-signed SSL Certificate

Create Key/CSR

Setup SSL Version

Event/Dump Management

Setup Event Notification

Display/Delete Event Log

Export/Delete Log

Export/Delete Panic Dump

Audit Log Management

Enable Audit Log

Disable Audit Log

Setup Audit Log

–

• Define Role

Display function

–

• Network

–

• Event/Dump

• Audit Log

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Functions in the Action area for System

Key Management

Setup Key Management Machine Name

Update SED Authentication Key

Import SSL/KMIP Certificate

Storage Migration Management

Start Storage Migration

Download Template File for Storage Migration Settings

Delete Storage Migration Path

Download Storage Migration Result

Restart Storage Migration

Suspend Storage Migration

Stop Storage Migration

External Drive Management

Create External Drive

Delete External Drive

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

Display Communication Log

Setup Remote Support

Update Customer Information

Update Communication Environment Information

Setup Log Sending Parameters

Stop/Restart Remote Support

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

Setup AIS Connect Environment

Setup Remote Session Permission

Send Log

Test Server Connectivity

Send AIS Connect Test Event

Import Root Certificate

Firmware Management

Apply Controller Firmware

Delete Controller Firmware Schedule

–

• Key Management

Display function

–

•

• Storage Migration

•

Key Group

Path Group Information Detail screen

• External Drive

• Remote Support Management (REMCS)

• Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

• Firmware Maintenance

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Initial Setup

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Initial Setup

This function performs the initial settings that must be set before operating the ETERNUS DX/AF storage systems on a series of wizard screens.

Initial Setup is divided into "Initial Setup 1" and "Initial Setup 2".

• Initial Setup 1

Performs the minimum settings required before using the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Refer to "Initial Setup 1" in "Configuration Guide (Web GUI)" for details.

The "Initial Setup 1" provides the following functions.

(1) Set Storage System Name

(2) Change User Password

(3) Set Thin Provisioning

(4) Register Advanced Copy License

(5) Register SED Authentication Key

(6) Set Network Environment

• Initial Setup 2

Makes the reporting settings for when an error occurs in the ETERNUS DX/AF. The settings can be omitted if the reporting function will not be used.

Refer to "Initial Setup 2" in "Configuration Guide (Web GUI)" for details.

The "Initial Setup 2" provides the following functions.

(1) Set Date and Time

(2) Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface

(3) Setup SNMP Manager

(4) Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View

(5) Setup SNMP Agent User

(6) Setup SNMP Agent Community

(7) Setup SNMP Agent Trap

(8) Setup E-Mail Notification

(9) Setup Syslog

If "Initial Setup 2" is not used, configure each reporting function if necessary.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Smart Setup Wizard

This function performs the initial settings that must be set to operate the ETERNUS DX/AF on a series of wizard screens.

The workflow sequence of this wizard is described below.

(1) Select Host

Select a host to connect to the ETERNUS DX/AF. Registering a new host is also available.

(2) Select Volume

Select volumes to assign to the host. Creating new volumes is also available.

(3) Set Host Affinity

Set host affinity between the selected host and volumes.

• The volume type to be used as the host connection target is "TPV". If TPPs do not exist in models other than the

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, a TPP is automatically created.

This wizard cannot be used to create volumes in RAID groups or to select arbitrary drives to configure TPPs. Use the dedicated functions provided by the ETERNUS DX/AF for these operations. Refer to

"Create Volume" (page

257)

and "Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557) for details.

• Once this wizard starts, the ETERNUS DX/AF is occupied (locked state) until it is completed. Note that other users cannot update data that is managed by the ETERNUS DX/AF during this state.

• To register a new iSCSI host, advance login to the iSCSI port of the ETERNUS DX/AF from the host is required. For more details, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection- (iSCSI)" for each OS type.

This wizard is started by the following procedure.

• For models other than the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the [Start] screen of this wizard is displayed after all the

"Initial Setup" (page 47)

operations are completed. When the [Done] button is clicked after the operation is completed, the [System] screen appears.

• Click [Smart Setup Wizard] in [Action] under the [System] navigation. When the [Done] button is clicked after the operation is completed, the wizard returns to the [System] screen.

Required conditions for using the Smart Setup Wizard

The following conditions are required when using the Smart Setup Wizard.

• The ETERNUS DX/AF and the host (server) must be connected

• The initial setup of the ETERNUS DX/AF must be completed

(Refer to

"Initial Setup" (page 47) for details.)

• The Thin Provisioning function must be enabled

• An "FC", "iSCSI", or "SAS" host interface must be registered

• A CA port with a port mode of "CA" or "CA/RA" must exist

• A CA port without the host affinity setting or a CA port with the affinity mode enabled (On) must exist

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, TPPs must be created

• If a TPP is not created in models other than the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, unused drives must be installed

The required number of drives is as follows:

For SSDs or SSD SEDs, five or more drives

For other drives, seven or more drives

• The maximum number of volumes is not registered for each model

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Operating specification of the Smart Setup Wizard

The following shows the operating specification of the Smart Setup Wizard.

• If TPPs do not exist in models other than the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, a TPP is automatically created.

The priority for selecting drive types is as follows:

SSD > SSD SED > Online > Online SED > Nearline > Nearline SED

The RAID level of RAID groups that configure the TPP is as follows:

• For SSDs or SSD SEDs, High Capacity (RAID5)

• For other drives, High Reliability (RAID6)

The drives in the RAID groups that configure the TPP are as follows:

• If the drive type is Online, Online SED, Nearline, or Nearline SED, the speed and capacity are the same

• If the drive speeds are mixed, drives with a higher speed are given priority

• If the drive capacities are mixed, drives with a larger capacity are given priority

The number of drives that configure the TPP is as follows:

• For SSDs or SSD SEDs, 5 to 48 drives

• For other drives, 7 to 48 drives

A Global Hot Spare is registered for each TPP.

The same Deduplication/Compression setting as the Deduplication/Compression mode of the ETERNUS DX/

AF is applied to the TPP.

• When this wizard is used, host affinity is automatically set by using the following hosts, ports, and LUN groups.

All hosts selected in the [Select Host] screen

All the CA ports registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF whose port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA"

(If multiple types of CAs are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF, the selected type of CA is used.)

The LUN groups to which all the volumes selected in the [Select Volume] screen belongs

• The maximum number of connectable hosts (the maximum number of Host Bus Adapters (HBAs)) per CA port is 256 (32 for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3).

• The host response "Default" is assigned to the host.

• The "Name" entered in this wizard is only the host name. If new TPPs, volumes, and LUN groups are created, the name of the host is used.

• If a host with the host affinity setting is selected, a volume (TPV) that is selected in this wizard is added to the existing LUN group. If a host without the host affinity setting is selected, a new LUN group is created.

• Note that this wizard does not create host groups or port groups. Host affinity is configured with the hosts, ports (all the CA ports or CA/RA ports of the selected CA type in the ETERNUS DX/AF), and LUN groups selected in this wizard.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Smart Setup Wizard" (page 991) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Smart Setup Wizard" (page 1288) .

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to use the Smart Setup Wizard is as follows:

Follow the procedure below when clicking [Smart Setup Wizard] in [Action] under the [System] screen. The

CA type is "iSCSI". Refer to "Configuration Guide (Basic)" for the procedure if the CA type is "FC" or "SAS".

Procedure

1 Click [Smart Setup Wizard] in [Action].

 The [Start] screen appears.

If the requirements for using this wizard are not all satisfied, the [Next >>] button cannot be clicked.

Refer to "Required conditions for using the Smart Setup Wizard" (page 48)

for details.

2 Click the [Next >>] button.

The next screen varies depending on whether multiple types of CAs are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

■ If multiple types of CAs are installed

 The [CA Type Selection] screen appears.

■ If only the "iSCSI" type CAs are installed

The next screen varies depending on whether host affinity is set.

• If host affinity is set



The [Select Host] screen appears. Proceed to Step 5

• If host affinity is not set

 The [iSCSI Port IP Address Settings] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 4 .

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

Select "iSCSI" for "CA Type" and click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The next screen varies depending on whether host affinity is set.

■ If host affinity is set



The [Select Host] screen appears. Proceed to Step 5 .

■ If host affinity is not set

 The [iSCSI Port IP Address Settings] screen appears.

Set the IP address and the subnet mask of the iSCSI port to connect to the host.

Check the "Current IP Address" and the "Current Subnet Mask" in the iSCSI port list. The procedure varies depending on whether the "Current IP Address" and the "Current Subnet Mask" are used.

■ If the "Current IP Address" and the "Current Subnet Mask" are to be used as is

(1) Click the [Cancel] button.

 The [Select Host] screen appears.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ If either or both of "Current IP Address" and "Current Subnet Mask" are not used

The procedure varies depending on whether the values are set with a single operation or individually.

• When "New IP Address" and "New Subnet Mask" are set with a single operation

(1) Enter a "New IP Address" in the "iSCSI Port IP Address Setting" field.

(2) Click the [All Refresh] button.

 New IP addresses and subnet masks are set for the number of ports in "New IP Address" and "New

Subnet Mask" of the iSCSI port list.

(3) Click the [OK] button.

 The [Select Host] screen appears.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

• When "New IP Address" or "New Subnet Mask" is set individually

(1) Directly enter a new IP address or a new subnet mask for each port.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(2) Click the [OK] button.

 The [Select Host] screen appears.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select a host to which to assign volumes.

If the [<< Back] button is clicked in the [Select Host] screen, the wizard returns to the [Start] screen. The configuration for the ETERNUS DX/AF remains.

■ When registering a new host to select it

(1) Click the [Register] button.

 The [Register Host] screen appears.

(2) Select a host to register in the ETERNUS DX/AF and enter a nickname.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Selection

Checkbox to select a host

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Setting Host NickName

Name

If the host to be registered is not displayed in the host selection list, perform the following procedure and then click the [Refresh] button.

• Make sure that there is no error in the connection environment, such as the connection between the host and the switch, and the CA port settings of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• For iSCSI hosts, check whether the login operation has been completed. For more details, refer to

"Configuration Guide -Server Connection- (iSCSI)" for each OS type.

The "Name" entered in this screen is used not only for the host name, but also for the new TPP name, volume name, and LUN group name.

(3) Click the [OK] button.



The [Select Host] screen appears. Proceed to "When selecting a host from the list"

in Step 5

■ When selecting a host from the list

(1) Select a host from the host list and click the [Next >>] button.

 The next screen varies depending on whether TPPs are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

■ If TPPs are registered and volumes are created

 The [Select Volume] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 10 .

■ If TPPs are registered but no volumes are created



The [Register Volume] screen appears. Proceed to Step 8 .

■ If no TPPs are registered

 The [Check Automatic TPP Creation] screen appears.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

Check the TPP configuration to be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The configuration of the TPPs to be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed in the "Thin Provisioning Pool Configuration" field.

• If a drive that is not in the normal state exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF, the operation cannot be continued. Click the [Cancel] button to end this wizard. After repairing the drive, re-execute this wizard.

• To change the TPP configuration or the Deduplication/Compression setting, click the [Cancel] button to end this wizard.

7 Click the [OK] button.

 The [Register Volume] screen appears.

Enter the volume capacity and number of volumes to be created.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Capacity

• Number of Volumes

• Radio button to select a TPP

Click the [OK] button.

 The [Select Volume] screen appears.

The name specified in the [Register Host] screen is used as the volume name.

Select a volume to assign to the host.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When adding a new volume, click the [Add] button. The [Register Volume] screen appears. Return to

Step 8

• If the [<< Back] button is clicked in the [Select Volume] screen, the wizard returns to the [Select Host] screen. The configuration for the ETERNUS DX/AF remains.

11 Click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Review Summary] screen appears.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Smart Setup Wizard

Check the setting contents and click the [Next >>] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

13 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The host affinity setting starts.

• Host affinity is set with the configuration displayed in the [Review Summary] screen.

A new LUN group is created with the volumes displayed in "Selected Volume (LUN Group : LUN Group

Name [Create])".

The name specified in the [Register Host] screen is used as the LUN group name.

The existing LUN group is changed with the volumes displayed in "Selected Volume (LUN Group :

LUN Group Name [Modify])".

Configure host affinity using the selected host, all the CA ports or CA/RA ports of the selected CA type, and the LUN groups.

• The specified paths between the hosts and ports can be edited. Refer to

"Modify Host Affinity" (page

361) for details.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [System] screen.

• Confirm that the volume assigned with this wizard can be successfully accessed from the host.

• To assign volumes to other hosts, click the [Restart] button to re-execute this wizard.

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Change User Password

This function changes the current user's (your) password.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When RADIUS Authentication is used for login, the password cannot be changed.

• If one of the following information appears in the "Days To Password Change" field in "User Information", the password cannot be changed during that period.

Number of days

Less than 24 hours

If a date and time is displayed for the "Last Password Setting Date" field in "User Information", "Password Policy" for the relevant user account is enabled. Check the "Password Policy" setting before changing the password. Refer to

"Modify User Policy" (page 118)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Change User Password" (page 996) .

The procedure to change the password is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Change User Password] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Password Setting

• Old Password

• New Password

• Confirm New Password

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Change User Password

Click the [Change] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the user password starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Set SSH Public Key

This function registers, changes, or deletes the current user's (your) Secure Shell (SSH) client public key.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When using the SSH Client Key authentication, create a pair of the SSH client public key and the SSH client secret key in advance, using the creation tool. One public key can be registered per user account. When this function is executed, the public key is registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The following types (formats) of public keys can be used:

IETF style DSA for SSH v2

IETF style RSA for SSH v2

The maximum of encryption strength of the supported public key is 4096-bit.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set SSH Public Key" (page 998) .

The procedure to set the SSH public key is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set SSH Public Key] in [Action].

2 Specify the SSH Public Key.

The main setting item is as follows.

● SSH Public Key Setting

• SSH Public Key

To delete the SSH client public key, select the "Delete" checkbox and click the [Set] button.

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The registration of the SSH public key starts.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Set SSH Public Key

Click the [Done] button to return to the [System] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Set Deduplication/Compression Mode

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Deduplication/Compression Mode

This function enables Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF.

If Deduplication/Compression is enabled, the duplicated data blocks in TPP are deleted and compressed to reduce the used area of the drive.

• The Deduplication/Compression function is not available for the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3 1CM model because the Thin Provisioning function is not provided.

• In a Unified Storage environment, the Deduplication/Compression setting cannot be set for both NAS user volumes (TPVs) and SAN volumes (TPVs).

• If this function is enabled, the performance may be reduced depending on the I/O environment. For notes on using this function, refer to "Design Guide (Basic)" for each model.

• Only Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the same TPP are the targets of Deduplication/Compression. TPVs that are not Deduplication/Compression Volumes, and NAS volumes are not supported.

• Checking for duplications across multiple TPPs is not supported.

• To use this function with the ETERNUS DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX200 S3 and the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, install "Memory Extension" in advance.

• When this function is enabled, the cache mode is temporarily changed to "Write Through Mode". The workload

I/O performance of the entire ETERNUS DX/AF is lowered when the cache mode is transitioning to "Write

Through Mode". Therefore, it is recommended to use this function when workload I/O is low. This process may take up to several tens of minutes.

• If this function is changed from "Enable" to "Disable", reboot the ETERNUS DX/AF. Note that rebooting the

ETERNUS DX/AF is not required if this function is changed from "Disable" to "Enable".

• If the Deduplication/Compression Volume is used as a copy source volume, the copy process is performed after the data is decompressed. If the Deduplication/Compression Volume is used as a copy destination volume, the data that is transferred from the copy source is deduplicated and compressed. Because of that, the copy performance is affected.

• This function cannot be used when the storage system status is "Not Ready".

• This function cannot be enabled under the following conditions:

The ETERNUS DX is used in a Unified Storage environment

The memory size for each CM is less than 32GB when using the ETERNUS DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500

S4, the ETERNUS DX200 S3, or the ETERNUS DX500 S3

The memory size for each CM is less than 64GB when using the ETERNUS DX600 S4 or the ETERNUS DX600

• This function cannot be disabled under the following conditions:

TPPs that have Deduplication, Compression, or both enabled exist

The current user does not have the "Maintenance Operation" policy

• Check "Deduplication/Compression" in the [System] screen. If "Enable" is displayed for "Deduplication/Compression", skip this function. Refer to

"System (Basic Information)" (page 657) for details.

• For details on the preparations and settings of this function, refer to "Deduplication/Compression Function Settings" in "Configuration Guide (Web GUI)".

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Deduplication/Compression Mode" (page 1289)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Set Deduplication/Compression Mode

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Configuration procedure for the Deduplication/Compression function

(1) Install "Memory Extension" in the ETERNUS DX (only if it is not installed).

Note that the [Add Memory] function can be performed by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance

Operation" policy.

(2) Use this function to enable Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX.

(3) Enable the Thin Provisioning function and then select the maximum pool capacity. Refer to "Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554)

for details.

(4) Select "Automatic" for "Create Mode" and create a TPP with "Deduplication", "Compression", or both enabled.

Refer to "Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557)

for details.

(Deduplication/Compression System Volumes (or the DEDUP_SYS Volume and the DEDUP_MAP Volume) are automatically created in the relevant TPP.)

(5) Expand the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume.

The logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume must be expanded to a size that is larger than the capacity that is to be written. This is because the data for all Deduplication/Compression Volumes (or TPVs) in the TPP are written to the DEDUP_SYS Volume after the Deduplication/Compression. If the capacity that is to be written cannot be estimated, expand the DEDUP_SYS Volume to a size larger than the total capacity of all Deduplication/

Compression Volumes (or TPVs) in the TPP.

The following shows an example when creating ten 10TB Deduplication/Compression Volumes (or TPVs) in the same TPP.

When the estimated data reduction rate is 2:1, expand the DEDUP_SYS Volume capacity to 50TB

When the estimated data reduction rate is 4:1, expand the DEDUP_SYS Volume capacity to 25TB

Refer to "Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 292)

for details.

(6) Create the Deduplication/Compression Volumes (or TPVs) in the TPP that was created in Step (4)

. Refer to

"Creating Deduplication/Compression Volumes" (page 274)

for details.

If "Manual" is selected in the

Step (4) , create a TPP using the following procedure.

(1) Create a TPP of which the chunk size is "21 MB". Refer to

"Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557) for details.

(In order to distribute the load for the Deduplication/Compression process, make sure to create multiple RAID groups in the TPP.)

(2) After configuring the environment to use the Deduplication/Compression function, enable "Deduplication",

"Compression", or both for the TPP that was created in

Step (1)

. Refer to "Set Deduplication/Compression" (page

575) for details.

(Deduplication/Compression System Volumes (or the DEDUP_SYS Volume and the DEDUP_MAP Volume) are automatically created in the relevant TPP.)

(3) Return to

Step (5)

of the Configuration procedure.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Set Deduplication/Compression Mode

The procedure to enable Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set Deduplication/Compression Mode] in [Action].

2 Click the [Set] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Deduplication/Compression mode setting starts.

4 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System] screen.

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Register Non-disruptive Storage Migration License

This function registers the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License.

By registering this license, the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function can be used.

For the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function, the volume information of the external storage system is inherited by the local storage system and the data is migrated without stopping operations in the local storage system.

This license is registered in the local storage system.

This function is displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has not been registered.

• By registering this license, the shared area in the cache memory is assigned for controlling the Non-disruptive

Storage Migration function.

The shared area in the cache memory is not only used for the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function, but also used for copy tables, REC Buffers, the Thin Provisioning function (*1), and the Storage Cluster function

(*1). Note that this license cannot be registered if the maximum value is specified for each parameter described below.

Memory capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF

Copy table size

REC Buffer size

Maximum pool capacity

Total TFOV capacity (*2)

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, a registration error for this license due to insufficient memory capacity does not occur because the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3 uses an area other than the shared area in the cache memory.

*1: The shared area in the cache memory is used for the following conditions.

• The maximum pool capacity for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 is expanded to "1.5 PB" or larger

• The maximum pool capacity for the ETERNUS DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, or the ETER-

NUS AF650 is expanded to "1024 TB" or larger

• The total TFOV capacity (*2) has been expanded from the default capacity

Refer to "Default TFOV capacity for each model" (page 555)

for details.

*2: The total TFOV capacity indicates the total capacity of the volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function in an

ETERNUS DX/AF. To change the total TFOV capacity, use ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• Delete this license immediately after the data migration is completed successfully. Deleting this license releases the shared area in the cache memory that is acquired for controlling the Non-disruptive Storage

Migration function. Refer to

"Delete Non-disruptive Storage Migration License" (page 70)

for details.

•

The registration status of this license can be checked. Refer to "System (Basic Information)" (page 657)

for details.

• Because the RAID Migration function is used for migrating data, the maximum number of simultaneous processes is 32 and the total capacity of the simultaneous processes is 128TB.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to

"A. Register Non-disruptive Storage Migration License"

(page 998) .

The procedure to register the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Register Non-disruptive Storage Migration License] in [Action].

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Input the license key.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● License Settings

• License Key

Click the [Register] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Non-disruptive Storage Migration License registration starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System] screen.

If this license is successfully registered, the actions and items related to the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function are displayed. Perform a data migration. Refer to

"Data migration flow using the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function" (page 68) for details.

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Data migration flow using the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function

The workflow sequence for Non-disruptive Storage Migration is described below.

(1) Use this function to register the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License and then change the mode of the FC port used for migration in the local storage system to "Initiator" (

"Modify Port Mode" (page 446)

(2) Set port parameters to the FC-Initiator port (

(4) Create External Drives ( "Create External Drive" (page 203) ).

(3) Connect the external storage system and the local storage system with either of the following.

FC cable

Via a switch

a Confirm that the "Inherit" checkbox for "External LU Information" is selected.

b Select the external storage system (source storage system) for migrating the data.

c Select the migration target volume from the external storage system.

d Have the local storage system inherit the volume information of the migration target volume in the external storage system.

The volume that inherits the volume information is called "External Drive" in the local storage system.

(5) Create External RAID Groups from External Drives (

"Create External RAID Group" (page 549) ).

(6) Create a volume in the External RAID Group (

"Creating Standard Type Volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs" (page 259) ).

a Select "Standard" for "Type" and select the "Enable" checkbox for "Use External Drive".

b Select an External RAID Group for creating a volume.

c Create a volume in the External RAID Group.

The created volume is called "External Volume" in the local storage system (destination storage system).

(7) Set host affinity to allow the host to recognize the volume that is created in Step (6)

(

"Create Host Affinity"

(page 350)

• If a LUN group is created, the host LUN to be allocated to the External Volume must be the same as the

host LUN that is allocated to the relevant volume in the external storage system. Refer to "Add LUN Group"

(page 450) for details.

• The host response setting for the host group must be the same as the host response setting of the external

storage system. Refer to "Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 372)

"Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 379) , or

"Add

SAS Host Group" (page 384)

for details.

(8) From the host, create a path between the host and the local storage system.

Confirm that a multipath is configured from the host to the migration target volume.

(9) Disconnect the path between the host and the external storage system.

(10)Confirm that the multipath from the host to the migration target volume is disconnected.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(11)Migrate the data in the volume that is created in

Step (6)

to the destination volume. Refer to "Start RAID

Migration" (page 307)

for details.

When starting a RAID migration, select automatic or manual for "Data Sync after Migration".

Automatic Stop

The procedure continues to the next step after all the RAID migrations are successfully completed.

Manual Stop

Manually stop the data synchronization between the migration source volume and the migration destina-

tion volume after all the RAID migrations are successfully completed. Refer to "Stop External Volume Data

Synchronization" (page 322)

for details.

• Select one of the following depending on whether the data must be synchronized between the migration source and migration destination volumes until all data migrations of the Non-disruptive Storage

Migration are completed.

If the data must be synchronized until all data migrations are completed

Select "Manual Stop" for "Data Sync after Migration"

If the data synchronization can be stopped every time a data migration is completed

Select "Automatic Stop" for "Data Sync after Migration"

• Up to 32 RAID migration processes can be performed simultaneously. If "Manual Stop" is selected, the total number of External Volumes to be migrated must be 32 or less.

Progress of migration can be checked on the [Volume] screen. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page

799) for details.

(12)Delete the External RAID Group (

"Delete External RAID Group" (page 551) ).

(13)Delete the External Drive that was used to create the External RAID Group ( "Delete External Drive" (page

206) ).

The number of volumes that can migrate the data in the single operation described in

Step (4)

to Step (13)

512 volumes per external storage system. Perform the operation again from Step (4)

for the following conditions.

• 513 or more volumes are migrated from a single external storage system

• Volumes are migrated from multiple external storage systems (if the information can be obtained from the

FC-Initiator port)

(14)Delete this license (

"Delete Non-disruptive Storage Migration License" (page 70) ).

Deleting this license releases the shared area in the cache memory that is acquired for controlling the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function.

(15)Delete the External LU Information that is inherited to the volume after completing a data migration only if

Non-disruptive Storage Migration is performed from a storage system other than the ETERNUS storage system to the ETERNUS DX/AF (

"Delete External LU Information" (page 346) ).

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Delete Non-disruptive Storage Migration License

This function deletes the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

This function is available only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Delete all the External Drives before using this function. The registration status of the External Drives can be

checked in the [External Drives] screen. Refer to "External Drives" (page 690) for details.

• Delete this license immediately after the data migration completes successfully. Deleting this license releases the shared area in the cache memory that is acquired for controlling the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function.

The registration status of this license can be checked. Refer to "System (Basic Information)" (page 657)

for details.

The procedure to delete the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Delete Non-disruptive Storage Migration License] in [Action].

If External Drives are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Non-disruptive Storage Migration License deletion starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System] screen.

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

This section describes system management.

System management provides the following functions:

•

Modify Storage System Name

•

Modify Date and Time

•

Change Box ID

•

Setup Subsystem Parameters

•

Setup Encryption Mode

•

Setup SMI-S Environment

•

Setup Power Management

•

Setup Extreme Cache

•

Setup Exclusive Read Cache

•

Setup Disk Drive Patrol

•

Setup Debug Mode

Modify Storage System Name

This function registers the name, administrator, and the installation site of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Information registered in this screen is used for the following functions and screens:

• Network management using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

• Storage system name displayed in the login screen and the operation screens

Once the storage system name has been specified, it cannot be deleted (it can be changed).

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Storage System Name" (page 998) .

The procedure to change the storage system name is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify Storage Name] in [Action].

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Set the Name of this Storage System

• Name

• Installation Location

• Administrator

• Description

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the storage system name starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Date and Time

This function sets the date/time and time zone (storage system location) of the internal clock in the ETERNUS DX/

AF.

The clock is used for checking the internal log of the ETERNUS DX/AF and in the Eco-mode, etc. The time zone setting is used for the Remote Support function.

This function is used when moving the ETERNUS DX/AF to a new installation site, and/or changing the system date/ time.

It is possible to setup the NTP server to automatically set the time. If the NTP server cannot be used, resetting the time once a month is recommended.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When the network environment is set to the factory default, the NTP function cannot be used. To perform the

network environment settings, refer to "Setup Network Environment" (page 125) .

• When using Eco-mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly.

If the date/time of the ETERNUS DX is wrong, processes for stopping and starting the disk motor cannot be performed in accordance with the Eco-mode schedule.

• The [Modify Date and Time] function cannot be used while time synchronization with the NTP server is being performed.

• When using the NTP server, the time modification method is the step mode (modify immediately).

• When using the NTP server, the ETERNUS DX/AF is synchronized with the NTP server every three hours.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Date and Time" (page 999) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Date and Time" (page 1289) .

The procedure to set the date and time is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify Date and Time] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Date/Time Information

• Date

● Time Zone Settings

• Time Zone

• Time Zone (time difference setting)

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Daylight Saving Time Settings

• Set

• Range (By day of the week)

• Range (By Date)

● NTP Settings

• Synchronize with NTP Server

• NTP server

• LAN Port used for NTP

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• A non-existent date has been specified for the date/time setting or the daylight saving time

• The start day/time and the end day/time for the daylight saving time setting are the same

• "Yes" is selected for "Synchronize with NTP Server", the LAN port that is used for the NTP server is "MNT", and the IPv4 address of the NTP server and the broadcast address of the MNT port are the same

• "Yes" is selected for "Synchronize with NTP Server", the LAN port that is used for the NTP server is "RMT", and the IPv4 address of the NTP server and the broadcast address of the RMT port are the same

• "Yes" is selected for "Synchronize with NTP Server" and one of the following conditions applies:

The domain or IP address for the primary NTP server and the secondary NTP server are the same

The IPv4 address for the NTP server and the local host address are the same

The IP address (IPv4 address or IPv6 address) for the NTP server and the network address are the same

The IP address (IPv4 address or IPv6 address) for the NTP server and the IP address for the MNT port are the same

The IP address (IPv4 address or IPv6 address) for the NTP server and the IP address for the RMT port are the same

The IP address (IPv4 address) for the NTP server and the IP address for the FST port are the same (for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/

DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650)

• When "By day of the week" is selected for the range of daylight saving time, "Last" can be selected to specify the start or end week.

• When "By Date" is selected for the range of daylight saving time, "Last Day" can be selected to specify the start or end date.

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

If "Yes" is selected for "Synchronize with NTP Server" when there is no NTP server connection or when communication with the NTP server is unstable, the required time for the date and time setting may take longer. Wait until the screen is updated. Even if a connection to the NTP server fails, the date and time setting appears to complete successfully. To confirm that the ETERNUS DX/AF is successfully connected to the NTP server, start this function again and check "Access Status" in the "NTP Settings" field.

 Date/time information is specified.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Change Box ID

This function changes the Box ID that identifies an ETERNUS DX/AF in the user system.

Box ID is used as information to identify the ETERNUS DX/AF from applications connected to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The initial Box ID is a device ID that is created by combining device information (series name, model, serial number, etc.).

If upgrading or replacing the ETERNUS DX/AF, the existing Box ID will change with the ETERNUS DX/AF change.

Therefore, there is a risk that the backup data saved in the previous ETERNUS DX/AF cannot be used, so it is necessary to reconfigure the user system after the ETERNUS DX/AF is upgraded or replaced. This function changes the device BOX ID to the same ID as that of the previous ETERNUS DX/AF in order to avoid any problems and also use the same backup data in the new storage system.

• A Box ID is a unique name in the user system. Make the Box ID different from that of other ETERNUS storage systems in the user system. If the Box ID is not changed, the device ID is used as a Box ID.

• If the ETERNUS DX/AF Box ID is changed after setting the Advanced Copy path information, Remote Advanced

Copy (REC) will no longer run. After recreating the Advanced Copy path information with the new Box ID, reconfigure the Advanced Copy path information on all ETERNUS storage systems that are set with a path to the ETERNUS DX/AF that had the Box ID changed.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

An Advanced Copy session (except an Offloaded Data Transfer (ODX) session, an Extended Copy (XCOPY) session, and a Virtual Volume session) exists

A volume that is used for the Storage Cluster function exists

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Change Box ID" (page 1002) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Change Box ID" (page 1290) .

The procedure to set the Box ID is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Change Box ID] in [Action].

The current Box ID setting appears. To change the value, enter a new Box ID.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Change Box ID

• Box ID

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The specified Box ID is registered.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

If the Box ID entered is less than 40 characters, a "#" hash key character is appended to the Box ID for each character short. Then, the 40-digit Box ID is registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

End of procedure

Setup Subsystem Parameters

This function specifies the subsystem parameters.

Subsystem parameters are the information which controls the ETERNUS DX/AF operation when it is connected to hosts. The ETERNUS DX/AF operates according to the specified subsystem parameters, for all the hosts to be connected.

• If a change to subsystem parameters is required, the recommended time is when the load is low in the

ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Some subsystem parameters may require rebooting of the server or the ETERNUS DX/AF after changes have been made. Refer to

"Conditions for changing subsystem parameters" (page 76) for details.

Conditions for changing subsystem parameters

Category Subsystem parameter

Setup Subsystem

Parameters

Setup Host

Setup Disk Drive

Thin Provisioning

Allocation Mode

Flexible Write Through

Turbo Mode

Writeback Limit Count

Expand Volume Mode

Load Balance

Reject INQUIRY from

Unauthorized Host

Optimize for

Advanced Format SSD

Expand Host Mode

Checkcode Enforcement

Copybackless

Changing parameters while accessing the host

N/A

Rebooting

ETERNUS DX/AF Server

–

Required

–

Required

–

Required

–

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Category Subsystem parameter Changing parameters while accessing the host

Rebooting

ETERNUS DX/AF

–

Server

– Web GUI Settings Function to Add Host OK

Deduplication/Compression Settings

Data Compare when hash collision occurs

Changing parameters while accessing the host

OK: Parameters can be changed.

N/A: Parameters cannot be changed.

Server reboot

Required: The server must be rebooted after a parameter change.

–: The server does not require a reboot.

–

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 1003)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 1290) .

The procedure to set the subsystem parameters is as follows:

–

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Subsystem Parameters] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

■ For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650

■ For the other models

The main setting items are as follows.

● Setup Subsystem Parameters

• Thin Provisioning Allocation Mode

• Expand Volume Mode (for the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3)

● Setup Host

• Load Balance

• Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host

• Expand Host Mode (for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETER-

NUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650)

● Setup Disk Drive

• Copybackless

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Web GUI Settings

• Function to Add Host

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the subsystem parameter starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Setup Encryption Mode

This function sets the encryption mode to encrypt volumes by using the CM.

There are two methods to encrypt a volume.

• Encryption by firmware (CM)

To encrypt volumes by the CM, use this function to enable the encryption mode (*1). After the encryption mode

is enabled, create volumes of which "Encryption by CM" is set to "On". Refer to "Create Volume" (page 257)

for details.

*1: The encryption mode is enabled by selecting "Fujitsu Original Encryption", "AES" (Advanced Encryption Standard),

"AES-128", or "AES-256".

• Encryption by drive (SED)

To encrypt volumes by the self encrypting drive (SED), create volumes in RAID groups or TPPs that are config-

ured with SEDs. Refer to "Create Volume" (page 257) for details. In this case, encrypted volumes can be created

even when "Encryption Mode" is set to "Disable".

Note that ETERNUS Web GUI cannot be used to create volumes in FTRPs. To create volumes in FTRPs, use ETER-

NUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

Use either "Encryption by CM" or "Encryption by SED" for each volume. Note that because "Encryption by CM" reduces the volume access performance, using "Encryption by SED" is recommended.

• Encryption related functions are only available after the encryption mode is enabled.

• When disabling the encryption mode, reboot the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Once a volume has been encrypted, it cannot be changed back to an unencrypted volume.

• The encryption mode cannot be changed for volumes or pools with the following conditions.

Volumes that are already encrypted by CM

Pools (TPPs and FTRPs) that are already encrypted by CM

Volumes that are being encrypted by CM

• When using the encryption function in a Unified Storage environment, set the "Encryption Mode" as described below.

For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

Select "Fujitsu Original Encryption" for the encryption mode. If "AES", "AES-128", or "AES-256" is selected, the performance of the NAS function is reduced.

For the other models

Selecting "Fujitsu Original Encryption" for the encryption mode is recommended.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The encryption mode can be changed even if volumes or pools (TPPs or FTRPs) in the ETERNUS DX/AF are already encrypted by the SED.

• If the encryption mode is enabled with this function (*1), existing unencrypted volumes (or "Standard", "WSV", and "SDV" type volumes) can be encrypted. Refer to

"Encrypt Volume" (page 290) for details.

• The encryption mode setting can be checked. Refer to

"System Settings" (page 694)

for details.

*1: The encryption mode is enabled by selecting "Fujitsu Original Encryption", "AES", "AES-128", or "AES-256".

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Encryption Mode" (page 1011) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Encryption Mode" (page 1291) .

The procedure to set the encryption mode is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Encryption Mode] in [Action].

2 Select the encryption mode.

■ For controller firmware versions "V10L50-3000", "V10L52-3000", and "V10L53" and later

■ For controller firmware versions other than the above

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Encryption Mode Setting

• Encryption Mode

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The encryption mode setting is performed.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

When the encryption mode is disabled, reboot the ETERNUS DX/AF.

End of procedure

Setup SMI-S Environment

This function enables or disables the Storage Management Initiative - Specification (SMI-S).

SMI-S is a standard specification concerning storage management technologies by Storage Networking Industry

Association (SNIA).

When enabling the SMI-S setting, the ETERNUS DX/AF can be managed from general storage management applications that support the SMI-S.

• To continue using SMI-S when a warning message related to the change of the SSL certificate appears, disable

SMI-S and then enable it again.

• When enabling or disabling of the SMI-S is being performed, the [Setup SMI-S Environment] action cannot be clicked.

• The SMI-S settings and performance information settings cannot be changed for the following conditions.

The storage system status is "Not Ready"

A CM that is not in the "Normal" state exists

• The available SMI-S setting varies depending on the active controller firmware version. Refer to "ETERNUS SMI-

S Server SMI-S API Reference" for details.

•

The current SMI-S setting can be checked. Refer to "System Settings" (page 694) for details.

• The parameter settings for "SSL Certificate" and "Performance Information" are retained even when the "SMI-S" setting is changed from "Enable" to "Disable".

•

To enable the SMI-S performance information response, start the performance monitoring. Refer to "Start/Stop

Performance Monitoring" (page 101) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 1012)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 1291) .

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to enable or disable the SMI-S function and the performance information response is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup SMI-S Environment] in [Action].

2 Select the parameters.

The main setting item is as follows.

● SMI-S Settings

• SMI-S

• SSL Certificate

• Performance Information

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 SMI-S setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Register SED Authentication Key

This function registers the SED authentication key (common key) that is managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

SEDs are used to prevent the leakage of the stored data when physically removed disks are stolen or lost.

• Register the SED authentication key before installing SEDs in the ETERNUS DX/AF. If an SED is installed without registering the SED authentication key, data leakage in an SED that is removed may occur.

• If an SED is installed before registering the SED authentication key, register the SED authentication key and reboot the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The SED authentication key can only be set once in the ETERNUS DX/AF. The SED authentication key cannot be changed or deleted after being set.

• Registering a common key is also required when the SED authentication key that is managed in the key server is used.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• After this function is executed, the SED authentication key is automatically generated and registered in the

SED.

•

The registration status of the SED authentication key can be checked. Refer to "System Settings" (page 694) for

details.

The procedure to register SED authentication key is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Register SED Key] in [Action].

2 Click the [Register] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The SED authentication key registration starts.

4 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Setup Power Management

This function connects the external device and controls the ETERNUS DX/AF power.

If this function is enabled by mistake, the ETERNUS DX/AF may shut down unexpectedly. Make sure to check setting contents before performing settings.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Power Management" (page 1012) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Power Management" (page 1291) .

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

The procedure to perform power management setting is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Power Management] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For the other models

The main setting items are as follows.

● Power Control by External Device

• RCIL

• Auto Power

• Power Resume

● Connection Module Settings (for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3)

• PWC

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● PWC Connection Settings

• Connection CM (for ETERNUS DX/AF storage systems other than the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3)

• Delay until Shutdown

• Set management unit interface

• Power Failure Signal

• Low Battery Signal

• UPS Shutdown Signal

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the power management starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Setup Extreme Cache

This function is used to perform the following operations for Extreme Cache.

• Select the cache to be used (Extreme Cache (EXC) or EXCP)

• Set the cache memory size to be used

• Set the tuning parameters

To use an EXC, PCIe Flash Modules (PFMs) installed in the CM are required.

To use an EXCP, SSDs installed in the CE or Drive Enclosure (DE) are required.

• PFMs can be installed in the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, and the ETER-

NUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• The available operations with this function depend on the installation status of the PFMs. For the ETERNUS

DX500 S4/DX600 S4 and the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the same number of PFMs must be installed in each CM. Refer to

"Availability of the EXC setting according to the number of installed PFMs" (page 1016) for

details.

• EXC or EXCP cannot be enabled under the following conditions:

The storage system status is "Not Ready"

Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX

A CM that is not in the " Normal" state exists

A PFM that is not in the " Normal" or " Warning" state exists (when "Extreme Cache" is selected)

All of the following conditions are satisfied.

• The ETERNUS DX8700 S3 is used

• "GS License" has been registered in the ETERNUS DX (*1)

• The usable memory size is 8GB/CM

(or "Cache expansion License for DX8700 S3 GS(16GB to 32GB)" has not been registered (*1))

*1: The registration status of "GS License" and "Cache expansion License" can be checked when logged in using a user account with the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

• If an EXCP includes a RAID group without an " Available" state, the setting values and set state of the tuning parameter cannot be changed (when "Extreme Cache Pool" or "Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)" is selected).

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Note the following points:

The cache to be used, the cache memory size, and the tuning parameters can be changed during business operations.

When "Not Used" is selected for "Cache Used", the cache memory size for EXC or EXCP changes to "0 GB".

The selected state of the "Cache Used" (the set state of EXC for the ETERNUS DX), and the set states of EXC and EXCP for each volume do not cooperate. Regardless of the selected state of the "Cache Used", the default state of EXC and EXCP for each volume is "Enable".

Regardless of whether the EXC or EXCP setting is enabled (or disabled), External Volumes do not use the

EXC and EXCP.

EXC and EXCP for each volume is not changed regardless of whether "Cache Used" is changed by using this function.

The current EXC or EXCP setting can be checked. Refer to "System Settings" (page 694) for details.

The cache hit rate of EXC or EXCP for each volume can be checked in the [Performance Information] screen.

Refer to "Performance (Host I/O)" (page 806)

"Performance (Advanced Copy)" (page 812)

for details.

• Furthermore, when using EXC, note the following points:

In either of the following conditions, the EXC memory size that can be used for the relevant CM is reduced to the smallest capacity.

• The PFM capacity in each CM for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 does not match

• The PFM capacity in each CM for the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3 does not match

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, installing the same number of PFMs for each CM is not required.

By clicking the [Set] button, the PFM capacity that is installed in each CM is set as the available EXC memory size.

When the performance monitoring process is started, the current PFM busy rate can be checked. Refer to

"Performance (PCIe Flash Module)" (page 714) for details.

To enable or disable EXC for each volume, use ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

EXCs can only be used when "Extreme Cache" is selected for "Cache Used" and EXC is enabled for the volume.

• Furthermore, when using EXCP, note the following points:

Enabling or disabling EXCP for each volume can be performed with ETERNUS Web GUI. Refer to

"Modify

Cache Parameters" (page 326)

for details.

EXCPs can only be used when "Extreme Cache Pool" or "Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)" is selected for

"Cache Used" and EXCP is enabled for the volume.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Extreme Cache" (page 1015)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Extreme Cache" (page 1292)

The procedure for selecting the cache to be used and setting the cache memory size to be used is as follows.

■ When Setting the EXC

The target of the EXC setting is the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, and the ETER-

NUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Extreme Cache] in [Action].

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

Select "Extreme Cache" for "Cache Used" and input the detailed information.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For the other models

The main setting item is as follows.

● Extreme Cache Memory Size Settings

• New Memory Size (for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 and the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3)

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the EXC size that is currently set in the target CM is displayed in

"Current Size". In "Total PFM Size", the total capacity of the PFMs that are installed in the target CM is displayed.

If "Current Size" and "Total PFM Size" in each CM are not matched for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, setting the EXC memory size is required. By clicking the [Set] button, EXC memory size is automatically set to the same size as the "Total PFM Size".

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 and if the EXC memory size is not set after adding the

PFM, the "Current Size" (or EXC memory size) of the target CM is not updated. To use EXC, use this function to set the EXC memory size. Adding the PFM must be performed by a maintenance engineer with a user account that has the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

• When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 and if the EXC memory size is not set after removing the PFM, the "Current Size" (or EXC memory size) of all the CMs is changed to "0 GB". To use EXC, use this function to set the EXC memory size. Removing the PFM must be performed by a maintenance engineer with a user account that has the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The EXC setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

■ When Setting the EXCP

RAID groups that are used as EXCPs are configured with RAID0 including at least one drive.

• EXCP does not work when operating in an environment with a high cache hit rate.

• It is recommended that "Extreme Cache" is used instead of "Extreme Cache Pool" for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/

DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, and the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3. "Extreme Cache" operates faster than "Extreme Cache Pool".

Requirements for selecting drives

• The drive requirements for creating RAID groups are listed below.

The drive status is " Present"

The drives are not registered in any RAID group, TPP, FTRP, REC Disk Buffer, or EXCP

The drives are not registered as hot spares

When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the drives that are installed in the DE that is connected to the CE with the CM where the EXCP memory size is to be set must be selected

• Drive recommendations for creating RAID groups are listed below.

Select drives with the same capacity. If drives of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes the standard, and all other drives are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest drive. In this case, the remaining drive space is not used.

Select SSDs with the same type (SSD-M/SSD). If different types of SSDs exist in a RAID group, the access performance for all SSDs in the RAID group is adjusted to the SSD of the lowest interface speed.

Note that Value SSDs are not supported for configuring an EXCP.

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Extreme Cache] in [Action].

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

Select "Extreme Cache Pool" or "Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)" for "Cache Used".

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4

■ For the other models

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

Click the [Memory Size] link for the CM to set an EXCP.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For the other models (when "Extreme Cache Pool" is selected)

 The [Extreme Cache Pool Memory Size Settings] screen appears.

4 Select SSDs from the list or the installation image to configure an EXCP.

SSDs with an interface speed of 12Gbit/s (SSD-Ms) must be installed in a high-density drive enclosure with the same interface speed. When these SSDs are installed in a high-density drive enclosure with an interface speed of 6Gbit/s, the SSDs operate at 6Gbit/s.

■ Select SSDs from the list

Click the [Tabular] tab to select SSDs from the list.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, only unused SSDs in the DE that is connected to the CE with the CM where the EXCP memory size is to be set are displayed. For the other models, unused SSDs in the ETERNUS

DX are displayed.

The main setting items are as follows.

• Checkbox to select drives

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Select SSDs from the installation image

Click the [Graphic] tab to select SSDs from the drive installation image.

The installation images of all the drives installed in the ETERNUS DX are displayed. Checkboxes are displayed for unused SSDs.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

• For the other models (when "Extreme Cache Pool" is selected)

The main setting items are as follows.

• DE selection list box

• Checkbox to select drives

5 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the [Extreme Cache Settings] screen.

To set EXCP memory sizes in multiple CMs, repeat

Step 3

through

Step 5 .

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

Check the EXCP memory size, and click the [Set] button.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For the other models (when "Extreme Cache Pool" is selected)

• The RAID group capacity that is configured with selected SSDs is displayed in the "Memory Size" field.

"0GB" is displayed when no SSD is selected. When the maximum number of SSDs has already been selected, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

The number of selectable SSDs and the available capacity are described below:

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4

1 or 2 (*1) (0GB / 400GB / 800GB)

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 and ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

1 - 4 (0GB / 400GB / 800GB / 1200GB / 1600GB)

ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

1 (0GB / 400GB)

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

1 - 4 (0GB / 400GB / 800GB / 1200GB / 1600GB)

Refer to "Available EXCP memory size (per CM)" (page 1016) for details.

*1: Two SSDs can be selected only if an ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 is being used and "Extreme Cache Pool

(Expanded)" is selected for "Cache Used".

• For the EXCP memory size, the value assumed that "1TB = 1000GB" is displayed.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The EXC setting starts.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Setup Exclusive Read Cache

This function sets the ratio for an exclusive read cache area in the CM cache memory.

By setting the exclusive read cache area, the read I/O performance may be maintained regardless of the write I/O when the ETERNUS DX/AF is in a high-load state.

• If exclusive read cache is specified, the I/O performance may be reduced depending on the operating environment. Do not change the default setting ("0%") for normal use.

• Using this function when the ETERNUS DX/AF load is low is recommended. This function can be used during system operations, but the cache mode is temporarily changed to "Write Through Mode" during a configuration.

• The same exclusive read cache area size is secured in all CMs.

• If "0%" is set for "Exclusive Read Cache" or if the calculated value is less than "64MB", "64MB" is secured for each CM.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Exclusive Read Cache" (page 1020) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Exclusive Read Cache" (page 1292) .

The procedure to set the exclusive read cache is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Exclusive Read Cache] in [Action].

Select the exclusive read cache.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Cache Size Settings

• Exclusive Read Cache

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The exclusive read cache setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Setup Disk Drive Patrol

This function periodically monitors the operating condition of each drive that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF. By performing disk drive patrol, abnormal status can be detected at an early stage and potential drive failures can be averted.

This function is effective for diagnosing the state of drives and hot spares that are not often used. Set this function to detect any drive failures at an early stage.

When drive "Error" is detected by this function, the error is dealt in the same way as usual drive failure.

• This function is performed without any relation to Host I/O.

• The current setting for the disk drive patrol can be checked from the [System Settings] screen. Refer to

"System

Settings" (page 694)

for details.

• The progress of the disk drive patrol can be checked from the [Drive Detail] screen. Refer to

"Drive Detail"

(page 772) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Disk Drive Patrol" (page 1020)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Disk Drive Patrol" (page 1292) .

The procedure to enable or disable the disk patrol function is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Disk Patrol] in [Action].

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

Specify whether to enable or disable the disk patrol function.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Disk Drive Patrol Settings

• Disk Drive Patrol

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The disk drive patrol starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Setup Debug Mode

This function sets the trace level to store the storage system information and the collection mode for panic dumps when errors occur.

If you need to change the debug mode settings, follow the Support Department instructions.

• Trace information is included in the panic dump.

•

To collect a panic dump, use the [Export/Delete Panic Dump] function. Refer to "Export/Delete Panic Dump"

(page 174) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Debug Mode" (page 1021)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Debug Mode" (page 1292) .

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

System Management

The procedure to set the collection conditions for the storage system information is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Debug Mode] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The debug mode is set.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [System Settings] screen.

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

This section describes utility management.

Utility management provides the following functions:

•

Shutdown/Restart Storage System

•

Backup Configuration

•

Export Configuration

•

Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

•

Clear Cache

Shutdown/Restart Storage System

When the ETERNUS DX/AF cannot be shut down directly, perform the shutdown or restart on the screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function can be used regardless of whether the "Setup Power Management" is enabled or disabled.

• Note that the ETERNUS DX/AF may reboot automatically when "Setup Power Management" is enabled. For example, an ETERNUS DX/AF that is turned off reboots when receiving a power on request from a server during turning off the power.

• This function cannot be used when the ETERNUS DX/AF is in the machine down status. Restart the browser after completion of the process, and then access the login screen after rebooting of the ETERNUS DX/AF is complete.

■ Shutdown the ETERNUS DX/AF

The procedure to shut down the ETERNUS DX/AF is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Shutdown/Restart] in [Action].

Click the [Shutdown] button.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The ETERNUS DX/AF shuts down after 30 seconds.

Note that the ETERNUS DX/AF may reboot automatically when "Setup Power Management" is enabled.

End of procedure

■ Restart the ETERNUS DX/AF

The procedure to restart the ETERNUS DX/AF is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Shutdown/Restart] in [Action].

2 Click the [Restart] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The ETERNUS DX/AF shuts down after 30 seconds. After shutdown, the ETERNUS DX/AF restarts.

End of procedure

Backup Configuration

This function backs up the configuration definition data to the Bootup and Utility Device (BUD) in the CM. Up to four generations of configuration definition data can be stored.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Backup Configuration" (page 1022) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Backup Configuration" (page 1292) .

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

The procedure to backup configuration definition file is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Backup Configuration] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Select Configuration Definition

• Configuration Definition Data

• Note (text box)

● Select Backup Slot

• Configuration Definition Data

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• No data exists in the configuration definition data file

• An error exists with the configuration definition data file size

• An error exists in the configuration definition data file

3 Click the [Backup] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The configuration definition data is backed up.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Utility] screen.

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Export Configuration

This function exports the configuration data from the ETERNUS DX/AF as a configuration file and stores it in the local PC, or other medium.

• The obtained configuration files may be required to restore the ETERNUS DX/AF if an error occurs. When altering the ETERNUS DX/AF configuration information, it is recommended to backup the configuration file before making any changes.

• When exporting of the configuration information has been completed, save the file immediately. The extension of the file to be saved must be ". cfg".

• Applying configuration information must be performed by a maintenance engineer with a user account that has the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

The procedure to export configuration definition file is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Export Configuration] in [Action].

2 Click the [Download] button to save the setup information.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

The extension of the file to be saved must be ".cfg".

The default file name is "Conf_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.cfg".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen ( Step 2

) is displayed.)

 The configuration information is exported.

4 Click the [Cancel] button to return to the [Utility] screen.

When exporting of the configuration information has been completed, save the log immediately.

End of procedure

100

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

This function acquires performance information and displays the result.

The Start/Stop Performance Monitoring function is used to start or stop acquiring the ETERNUS DX/AF performance information. Acquired information can be checked using the [Performance] function.

When the ETERNUS DX/AF is rebooted, the performance monitoring process is stopped.

• If performance monitoring is started from a monitoring software other than ETERNUS CLI, the process cannot be stopped by ETERNUS Web GUI.

• If performance monitoring is started from ETERNUS Web GUI, the process can be stopped from other monitoring software.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 1022) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 1292) .

The procedure to start or stop performance monitoring is as follows:

■ Starting performance monitoring

The [Start] button is displayed when the "Monitoring State" is "Stopped".

Procedure

1 Click [Start/Stop Perfmon] in [Action].

2 Specify the interval.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Performance Monitoring

• Interval (sec.)

3 Click the [Start] button.

101

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Acquisition of performance information starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Utility] screen.

End of procedure

■ Stopping performance monitoring

The [Stop] button is displayed when "Monitoring State" is "Active".

Procedure

1 Click [Start/Stop Perfmon] in [Action].

If the [Stop] button is clicked after starting performance monitoring from other monitoring software, an error screen is displayed.

2 Click the [Stop] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Acquisition of performance information stops.

4 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Utility] screen.

End of procedure

Clear Cache

This function clears all of the data on the CM cache memory, data on the EXC, and data on the EXCP (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cache data").

This function is used when monitoring the system performance.

102

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Cache data to be cleared

• Read data on the CM, EXC (*1), and EXCP (*1)

• Multiple cache data to be cleared can be selected from "CM", "EXC (*1)", and "EXCP" (*1).

*1: Among the "EXC" and "EXCP", only the enabled cache can be the target for clearing.

• Stopping all host access is recommended before using this function.

• If this function is used during operation, system performance may be temporarily reduced due to clearing the cache data. Make sure to check the access status to the ETERNUS DX/AF before using this function.

• Stop the performance monitoring before using this function. If this function is used during a performance monitoring, the system performance (IOPS, throughput, response time, and cache hit rate) may temporarily and significantly be increased or decreased.

• This function is not available in a Unified Storage environment.

• If Dirty data (cache data that is not written back to the drive) exists in the cache memory, this function cannot be used. In this case, stop the host access. After the Dirty data is written back to the drive (the Cache LED turns off), execute this function.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

The storage system status is "Not Ready"

The CM status is not " Normal"

The PFM status is not " Normal" (when selecting "Extreme Cache")

The status of RAID groups registered as EXCPs is not " Available" (when selecting "Extreme Cache Pool")

• This function deletes the cache data for Read, however the same data is stored in the drive so there is no data loss.

• Cache data in the EXC can only be cleared when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, or the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3

PFMs are installed in all of the CMs (for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 or the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600

S3)

PFMs are installed in the CMs (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3)

The EXC is enabled

The EXC memory size has been specified (other than "0GB")

• Cache data in the EXCP can only be cleared when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

The EXCP is enabled

The EXCP memory size has been specified (other than "0GB")

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Clear Cache" (page 1023)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Clear Cache" (page 1293)

The procedure to clear all of the cache data is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Clear Cache] in [Action].

103

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Utility Management

Select the cache to clear.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Target Cache Settings

• Target Cache

3 Click the [Clear] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The system or CM status is not normal

• The PFM status is not normal (when selecting "Extreme Cache")

• The status of RAID groups registered as EXCPs is not normal (when selecting "Extreme Cache Pool")

• Dirty data exists in the cache memory

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The cache data is cleared.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Utility] screen.

End of procedure

104

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Eco-mode Management

This section describes Eco-mode management.

Eco-mode management provides the following functions.

•

Modify Eco-mode General Setting

•

Create Eco-mode Schedule

•

Delete Eco-mode Schedule

•

Modify Eco-mode Schedule

Modify Eco-mode General Setting

This function enables or disables the Eco-mode setting for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

Eco-mode is not available for the following drives:

• Hot Spares (except Dedicated Hot Spares)

• SSDs and SSD SEDs

• A drive that is in a RAID group that satisfies the following conditions:

A RAID group where no volumes are registered

A RAID group where SDPVs are registered

A RAID group that is registered as an REC Disk Buffer

A RAID group where ODX Buffer volumes are registered

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

To create a new Eco-mode schedule, refer to

"Create Eco-mode Schedule" (page 106)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page 1023) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page 1293) .

The procedure to set the Eco-mode schedule for a RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Modify Eco-mode Setting] in [Action].

105

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Eco-mode Management

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Eco-mode General Settings

• Eco-mode

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The application of the Eco-mode general settings starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Eco-mode] screen.

End of procedure

Create Eco-mode Schedule

This function specifies the disk operating time (term for activating disk motor constantly) as an Eco-mode schedule.

• Up to 64 Eco-mode schedules can be created for each storage system.

• Up to eight events can be specified for a single Eco-mode schedule.

• To perform schedule operations using this function, the Eco-mode setting for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series must be enabled.

• Disk operation time varies depending on the Eco-mode schedule settings and disk access. A disk is spun up even if it is outside of disk operation time in the following conditions:

If disk access occurs while the disk motor is stopped:

The disk is immediately spun up and can be accessed within 1 - 5 minutes.

If a disk is activated more than a set amount of times in a day:

A state of increased access frequency is assumed and the Eco-mode will cease stopping the disk motor.

106

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Eco-mode Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• To apply the created Eco-mode schedule to each RAID group, refer to the procedure in

"Assign Eco-mode

Schedule (RAID Group)" (page 542)

•

To apply the created Eco-mode schedule to each Thin Provisioning Pool, refer to the procedure in "Assign Ecomode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 583) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Eco-mode Schedule" (page 1023) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Eco-mode Schedule" (page 1294) .

The procedure to create an Eco-mode schedule is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create Schedule] in [Action].

2 Specify the "Schedule Name".

The main setting item is as follows.

● Schedule

• Schedule Name

3 Click the [Add Event] button.

107

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Eco-mode Management

Select an event type and set the event details.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Set Event

• Event Type

• When deleting the added event, select the event, and click the [Delete Event] button.

• When changing the added event, select the event, and click the [Edit Event] button.

5 Click the [Apply] button.

 The event is added to the "Event List".

Step 5 to configure multiple events.

through

7 After adding all the events, click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Creation of the Eco-mode schedule starts.

108

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Eco-mode Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Eco-mode] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Eco-mode Schedule

This function deletes the Eco-mode schedule.

• An Eco-mode schedule that is allocated to a RAID group cannot be deleted.

• An Eco-mode schedule that is allocated to a Thin Provisioning Pool cannot be deleted.

The procedure to delete an Eco-mode schedule is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the schedule that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete

Schedule] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the Eco-mode schedule starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Eco-mode] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Eco-mode Schedule

This function modifies the Eco-mode schedule.

Up to eight events can be specified for a single Eco-mode schedule.

Disk operation time varies depending on the Eco-mode schedule settings and disk access.

A disk is spun up even if it is outside of disk operation time in the following conditions:

• If disk access occurs while the disk motor is stopped:

The disk is immediately spun up and can be accessed within 1 - 5 minutes.

• If a disk is activated more than a set amount of times in a day:

A state of increased access frequency is assumed and the Eco-mode will cease stopping the disk motor.

• To apply the modified Eco-mode schedule to each RAID group, refer to the procedure in

"Assign Eco-mode

Schedule (RAID Group)" (page 542)

•

To apply the modified Eco-mode schedule to each Thin Provisioning Pool, refer to the procedure in "Assign Ecomode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 583) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Eco-mode Schedule" (page 1025) .

109

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Eco-mode Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to modify an Eco-mode schedule is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the Eco-mode schedule that is to be edited and click [Modify Schedule] in [Action].

2 Select the event that is to be modified and click the [Edit Event] button.

3 Modify the event content.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Set Event

• Event Type

• When adding an event, click the [Add Event] button.

• When deleting the event, select the target event(s) that is to be deleted, and click the [Delete Event] button.

4 Click the [Apply] button.

 The "Event List" is updated.

110

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

Step 4 to edit multiple events.

through

6 After editing all the events, click the [Set] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the Eco-mode schedule starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Eco-mode] screen.

User Management

This section describes user management.

User management provides the following functions:

•

Setup User Account

•

Initialize User Account

•

•

•

•

•

End of procedure

111

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup User Account

This function adds, edits, and deletes the user account.

Up to 60 user accounts can be set.

• The current user’s (your) account cannot be changed or deleted.

• The following types (formats) of public keys can be used:

IETF style DSA for SSH v2

IETF style RSA for SSH v2

The supported maximum encryption strength for the public key is 4096-bit.

• To improve the security level of the password, specify a user policy (password policy and lockout policy). Refer to

"Modify User Policy" (page 118) for details. Use this function to set whether to enable or disable a user pol-

icy for each user account.

• When a user account is deleted, the SSH client public key registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF is also deleted.

• When a user account is initialized, the following settings are initialized. Refer to

"Initialize User Account"

(page 117) for details.

The password for the default account is restored to the default password.

The user policy for the default account is disabled.

• To change the current user's (your) password, use the procedure in

"Change User Password" (page 59)

• To change the current user's (your) SSH public key, use the procedure in

"Set SSH Public Key" (page 61)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup User Account" (page 1026) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup User Account" (page 1294) .

■ Add User Account

The procedure to add a user accounts is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup User Account] in [Action].

112

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

Click the [Add] button.

3 Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Add New User Account

• User ID

• New Password

• Confirm New Password

• Role

• Account

• SSH Public Key

• Password Policy

• Lockout Policy

4 Click the [Apply] button.

113

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Addition of the user account starts.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

■ Edit User Account

• Any user account information other than the following parameters can be changed.

User ID

The "Password Policy" and "Lockout Policy" that are applied to a user account set with the "Software" role

• Changed user accounts become available at the next login.

The procedure to edit a user accounts is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup User Account] in [Action].

2 Select the user account to be modified.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Registered User Account List

• Checkbox

3 Click the [Edit] button.

114

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

Change the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Edit User Account

• Change Password

• New Password

• Confirm New Password

• Role

• Account

• SSH Public Key

• Password Policy

• Lockout Policy

• To change the password, select the "Change Password" checkbox.

• To delete an SSH client public key, select the "Delete" checkbox and click the [Apply] button. The

"Delete" checkbox appears only if the SSH client public key has already been registered.

Click the [Apply] button.

6 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The user account setup starts.

7 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

■ Delete User Account

• The last user account with administrator privileges (role of "Admin") assigned cannot be deleted.

• Deleted user accounts become available at the next login.

115

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

The procedure to delete a user accounts is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup User Account] in [Action].

2 Select the deletion target user accounts (multiple selections can be made).

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Registered User Account List

• Checkbox to select a user account

3 Click the [Delete] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The user account deletion starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

116

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Initialize User Account

This function initializes the user accounts to the factory default status.

• By using this function, all the registered user accounts are deleted and only the factory default account remains.

• The password for the default account is restored to the default password.

• The user accounts deleted by this function will be unavailable for the next login.

• When the user accounts are initialized, the SSH client public keys for all the users registered in the ETERNUS

DX/AF are also deleted.

• When user accounts are initialized, the user policy (Password Policy and Lockout Policy) for the default account is disabled.

The procedure to initialize user accounts is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Initialize User Account] in [Action].

2 Click the [Initialize] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The user account initialization starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

117

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify User Policy

This function specifies a user policy (Password Policy and Lockout Policy) for user accounts to be registered in the

ETERNUS DX/AF.

"Password Policy" indicates the creation guidelines for a password such as the complexity and lifetime. This setting is applied when the password for the new user account is registered or when the password for an existing user account is changed. "Lockout Policy" indicates the guidelines for a lockout when the authentication fails. This setting is used when users log in to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Use this function to improve the Internal Authentication (*1) security. Set whether to enable or disable a user policy for each user account.

*1: This is the standard authentication type. Internal Authentication uses user account information stored in the ETERNUS DX/

AF to verify the input user account.

• A user policy cannot be applied for the following user accounts.

User accounts with the "Software" role that is used for external software

User accounts used for RADIUS authentications

• The specified contents of this function are applied to the ETERNUS DX/AF immediately after the settings are complete. Note that the "Lockout Policy" is applied the next time the relevant user logs in.

• If a user account with the "Password Policy" setting enabled is used to log in and the "Maximum Password Age" of the relevant user account has expired, the [Change Password] screen appears. Users cannot log in until the password is changed.

• If a user account with the "Lockout Policy" setting enabled is used to log in and the number of failed authentications exceeds the "Lockout Threshold", the relevant user account is locked out. The lockout is not released until the specified "Lockout Duration" passes.

• One user policy can be specified in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Select whether to enable or disable the user policy for each user account when creating new user accounts or when editing existing user accounts. A user policy can

also be set for the default user IDs ("root" and "f.ce"). Refer to "Setup User Account" (page 112) for details.

•

When a user account is initialized, the user policy for the default account is changed to "Disable". Refer to "Initialize User Account" (page 117) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify User Policy" (page 1030)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify User Policy" (page 1295)

The procedure to modify the user policy is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify User Policy] in [Action].

118

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Password Policy

• Minimum Password Length

• Password Complexity

• Password History

• Minimum Password Age

• Maximum Password Age

● Lockout Policy

• Lockout Threshold

• Lockout Duration

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The user policy setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

119

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify RADIUS

This function specifies the external server (RADIUS server) that is used for authentication when logging in.

Up to two RADIUS Authentication servers can be registered.

• Enable or disable RADIUS Authentication for each storage system.

• If RADIUS Authentication fails when "No" has been selected for "Recovery Mode" in the RADIUS Setting field, logging in to ETERNUS Web GUI will not be available.

• RADIUS Authentication cannot be used when logging in to the Slave CM.

• When "Yes (Communication error)" has been selected for "Recovery Mode" in the RADIUS Setting field, Internal

Authentication (*1) is performed if authentication fails in both the primary and the secondary servers due to a network error in either or both of the servers.

*1: This is the standard authentication type. Internal Authentication uses user account information stored in the storage system to verify the input user account.

•

There are supplementary notes when using RADIUS Authentication. Refer to "H. Using RADIUS Authentication"

(page 1395) for details.

• When using RADIUS Authentication, registering user account information (user ID, password, and role) in

RADIUS server is required. For details, refer to the manuals provided with the server.

• Even if the RADIUS Authentication function has been changed to "Disable", RADIUS setting information in the

ETERNUS DX/AF is maintained.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify RADIUS" (page 1032) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify RADIUS" (page 1295)

The procedure to modify RADIUS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify RADIUS] in [Action].

Specify the parameters.

120

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● RADIUS Setting

• RADIUS Authentication

• Recovery Mode

● Primary Server (required) / Secondary Server

• Domain Name / IP Address

• Port No.

• LAN Port

• Authentication Mode

• Shared Secret

• Retry Out Time

Click the [Modify] button.

An error screen appears if the specified IP address of the RADIUS server conflicts with the internal IP address of the ETERNUS DX/AF. If this occurs, check the parameter settings.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the RADIUS Authentication starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

Add Role

This function combines several user policies and creates a user-specific role (custom role).

Up to 20 roles can be created per storage system.

Policy

The 16 types of access privileges shown below are available.

Status Display

Policies

RAID Group Management

Volume - Create / Modify

Volume - Delete / Format

Host Interface Management

NAS Management (*1)

Advanced Copy Management

Copy Session Management

Storage Migration Management

Description

Status display functions (storage system status, RAID group list, volume list, copy session list, etc.)

RAID group, Thin Provisioning Pool, Eco-mode, hot spare disk setting functions, etc.

Volume setting functions (register/modify/expand), etc.

Volume setting functions (delete/format), etc.

Host interface management functions (host group settings, Channel Adapter (CA) port group settings, Logical Unit Number (LUN) group settings, host affinity settings), etc.

NAS setting functions (create NAS interface, create NAS shared folders), etc.

Local Advanced Copy setting functions, Remote Advanced Copy setting functions, etc.

Advanced Copy session management functions (start/stop/delete), etc.

Storage Migration setting functions (start/suspend/stop/restart/delete path), etc.

121

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Policies

Storage Management

User Management

Authentication / Role

Security Setting

Description

Configuration setting functions of the ETERNUS DX/AF (date and time, network, remote support), etc.

User account setting functions (create/change/delete), etc.

External authentication and role setting functions (create/change/delete), etc.

Encryption setting functions of drives, etc.

Maintenance Information Exporting and deleting functions of maintenance information (performance information, configuration information, events, storage system logs, panic dumps), etc.

Firmware Management

Maintenance Operation

Firmware management functions (for users without the "Maintenance Operation" policy who need to set the controller firmware)

Maintenance operation/preventive maintenance operation of hardware and firmware

*1: This policy is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

A role without any user policies cannot be created.

• The ETERNUS DX/AF has default roles. Refer to

"Default Role" (page 1332) for details.

• Multiple policies can be allocated to one role.

•

A role that is created can be allocated to a user account by using the procedure in "Setup User Account" (page

112)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Role" (page 1034)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Role" (page 1295)

The procedure to add a user role is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Role] in [Action].

Input the role name and select the policies for the role.

122

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Role Setting

• Name

● Target Policy

• Policies

Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Application of the role settings starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Role

This function deletes the user role (custom role) which was registered by a user.

• The existing role (default role) cannot be deleted.

• The user role which is allocated to a user account cannot be deleted.

The procedure to delete a role is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the user role to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete Role] in

[Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The user role is deleted.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Role

This function modifies the policies of the user-specific role (custom role).

This function can be used when a custom role is created.

• Policies of the existing role (default role) cannot be changed.

• A role without any policies cannot be created.

123

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

User Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Multiple policies can be allocated to one role.

• Policies which have been granted to the user account while logged in, can also be modified. Note that the modifications become valid only after the next login.

•

The modified role can be granted to the user account using the procedure in "Setup User Account" (page 112)

• Refer to

"Policy" (page 121)

for available policies.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Role" (page 1035)

The procedure to modify a user role is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the role to be modified, and click [Modify Role] in [Action].

2 Change the role settings.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Target Role

• Policies

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the role settings starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Define Role] screen.

End of procedure

124

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Network Management

This section describes the network environment settings.

The following functions are available for the network environment settings:

•

•

Setup Firewall

•

•

•

•

•

•

Setup E-Mail Notification

•

Download MIB File

•

Send SNMP Trap Test

•

Display SMTP Log

•

•

Setup Syslog

•

Setup SSH Server Key

•

Create Self-signed SSL Certificate

•

Create Key/CSR

•

Setup SSL Version

Setup Network Environment

This function sets up an the environment for the ETERNUS DX/AF to communicate with an external network. Configuration is required for each MNT, RMT and FST port.

• MNT port

The MNT port is used for general communication between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the external hosts.

• RMT port

The RMT port is used when the line must be separated from the MNT port.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250

S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F, this port is also used for maintenance of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• FST port

The FST port is used for maintenance of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650, this port must be configured.

• If the message "Currently Network Configuration is set to factory default." is displayed in the system message field, the network environment settings must be performed. Some functions are not available if the network

environment settings for the MNT port are incomplete. Refer to "Functions that cannot be performed in a factory default network environment" (page 126)

for details.

• Logging in again may be required after the settings are complete.

125

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• MNT ports and RMT ports support both "IPv4" and "IPv6". FST ports only support "IPv4".

• Both or either "IPv4 address" and "IPv6 address" can be set for a port.

• When the network environment settings are the same as the factory default, all the input items in the [IPv4

Settings] tab for the MNT port are cleared. Information that is configured in the ETERNUS DX/AF is not displayed. Note that in the [IPv6 Settings] tab, the information that is configured in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• When SNMP Manager exists in a different subnetwork from the ETERNUS DX/AF, specify the IP address or the network address of SNMP Manager in "Allowable IP Address" of this function.

• Available operations vary depending on the models and ports. Refer to

"Available port operations for each model" (page 126)

for details.

•

To enable or disable each service (such as HTTP and HTTPS), use the procedure in "Setup Firewall" (page 134) .

Functions that cannot be performed in a factory default network environment

• All of the [Network] navigation functions (except the [Setup Network Environment] and [Setup Firewall] functions)

• All of the [Remote Support] navigation functions (all of the REMCS / AIS Connect functions)

• All of the [Key Management] navigation functions

• Modify RADIUS

• All of the [Audit Log] navigation functions

• Setup SMI-S Environment

• Modify Date and Time (NTP settings)

• Hot controller firmware upgrade (cold controller firmware upgrade is available)

• Add Memory

• Add Channel Adapter and Remove Channel Adapter

Available port operations for each model

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4

ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2

ETERNUS AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2

ETERNUS AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

Setting

MNT port

Modification

Deletion Setting

RMT port

Modification

Deletion Setting

FST port

Modification

Deletion

OK OK OK (*1) OK OK OK (*1) N/A – –

OK (*1)

N/A

–

N/A

–

N/A

–

OK: Port operation is available

N/A: Port operation is not available

–: Not supported

*1: If no other ports are available, this cannot be deleted.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Network Environment" (page 1036) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Network Environment" (page 1296)

126

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When using IPv4

The procedure to set network environment using IPv4 address is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which port to set the network environment for, and click [Setup Network Environment] in

[Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

If the gateway is specified, the information of the remote storage systems for which network access will be allowed can be input.

The main setting items are as follows.

● LAN

• Speed and Duplex

• Wake on LAN

● Interface

• Master IP Address

• Slave IP Address

• Subnet Mask

• Gateway

● DNS

• Primary DNS

• Secondary DNS

127

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

To allow access from a different subnetwork to the ETERNUS DX/AF, click the [Add] button.

 The [Add Allowable IP Address] screen appears.

4 Input the IP address and the subnet mask.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Allowable IP Address Settings

• IP Address

• Subnet Mask

5 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the [Setup Network Environment] screen.

128

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Step 5 when registering multiple allowable IP addresses.

through

• When specifying the IP address or the subnet mask, note the following points:

IP addresses must be specified with the IPv4 format.

The IP address of the RMT port must be in a different subnetwork from the MNT port.

Specify the IP address of the Slave CM when connecting to the Slave CM. The IP address of the Slave

CM must be in the same subnetwork as the Master CM.

Specify the IP address of "Gateway" when allowing access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must be in the same subnetwork as the port.

For "Allowable IP Address", specify the IP address or the network address that allows access to the

ETERNUS DX/AF. These settings are not required for access from the network address (same subnetwork) which the ETERNUS DX/AF belongs to.

• Click the [Clear] button to delete setting parameters. Note that the parameters cannot be deleted if no other ports are available.

7 After registering the allowable IP addresses is complete, click the [Set] button.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The network environment setting starts.

9 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

Device management operation cannot be continued if the IP address of the ETERNUS DX/AF has been changed. Logging in again with the new IP address is required.

End of procedure

129

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When using IPv6

The procedure to set network environment using IPv6 address is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which port to set the network environment for, and click [Setup Network Environment] in

[Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

If the gateway is specified, the information of the remote storage systems for which network access will be allowed can be input.

The main setting items are as follows.

● LAN

• Speed and Duplex

• Wake on LAN

● Interface

• Master IP Link Local Address

• Master Connect IP Address

• Slave IP Link Local Address

• Slave Connect IP Address

• Length of Subnet Prefix

• Gateway

● DNS

• Primary DNS

• Secondary DNS

Click the [Automatic discovery] button to automatically obtain "Master IP Link Local Address", "Master Connect IP Address", "Slave IP Link Local Address", "Slave Connect IP Address", "Length of Subnet Prefix", and

"Gateway". Input the IPv6 address of the Domain Name System (DNS) server if required.

130

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

To allow access from a different subnetwork to the ETERNUS DX/AF, click the [Add] button.

 The [Add Allowable IP Address] screen appears.

4 Input "Connect IP Address" and "Length of Subnet Prefix".

The main setting items are as follows.

● Allowable IP Address Settings

• Connect IP Address

• Length of Subnet Prefix

5 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the [Setup Network Environment] screen.

131

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Step 5 when registering multiple allowable IP addresses.

through

• Note the following points when specifying an IP address:

IP addresses must be specified with the IPv6 format. Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network

Environment)" (page 133) for details.

The connect IP address of the RMT port must be in a different subnetwork from the MNT port

Specify the connect IP address of the Slave CM when connecting to the Slave CM. The connect IP address of the Slave CM must be in the same subnetwork as the Master CM.

Specify the IP address of "Gateway" when allowing access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must be in the same subnetwork as the port.

For "Allowable IP Address", specify the IP address or the network address that allows access to the

ETERNUS DX/AF. These settings are not required for access from the network address (same subnetwork) which the ETERNUS DX/AF belongs to.

• Click the [Clear] button to delete setting parameters. Note that the parameters cannot be deleted if no other ports are available.

7 After registering the allowable IP addresses is complete, click the [Set] button.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The network environment setting starts.

9 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

Device management operation cannot be continued if the IP address of the ETERNUS DX/AF has been changed. Logging in again with the new IP address is required.

End of procedure

132

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Available IPv6 Address

No.

Allocated addresses

Global address

Unique local address

Link local address

6to4 address

Settable range for addresses

2000::1 - 3fff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff fc00::1 - fdff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff fe80::1 - fe80::ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

2002:<IPv4 address in hexadecimal>::1 - 2002:<IPv4 address in hexadecimal>::ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

Length of subnet prefix

3 - 128

7 - 128

64-bit static IP address

48 - 128

● IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)

Since the IPv6 address is 128-bit and extremely long, this address is displayed using "xxxx", which describes 16-bit in hexadecimals as being one block that is separated by colons (":").

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

Use 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters) for inputting an IPv6 address.

The current setting is displayed with 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Up to 128-bit

The first 64-bit (prefix) of the link local address is fixed to "fe80::".

The following three abbreviation methods are available for IPv6 addresses:

(1) Omission of the first "0" of a block that follows consecutive zeros.

[Example] 2001:1000:0120:0000:0000:0123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

(2) Replacement of "0000" blocks with "0".

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

(3) Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is performed only once.

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

2001:1000:120::123:0:0 is OK

2001:1000:120::123:: is not allowed

(Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is allowed only once.)

The following IP addresses cannot be specified:

• Link local addresses for which all of the values for the low 64-bit are "0"

• Connect IP addresses (*1) for which the first 3-bit are not "001" or the first 7-bit are not "1111110"

*1: The connect IP address indicates a "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address".

• The first 64-bit of the gateway is "fe80::" and all of the values for low 64-bit are "0"

• Network addresses for which the first 3-bit of the gateway are "001"

• Network addresses for which the first 7-bit of the gateway are "1111110"

• DNS server IP addresses for which the first 3-bit are not "001" or the first 7-bit are not "1111110"

133

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Supplementary Information

When accessing of the ETERNUS DX/AF from a different subnetwork is not allowed

Specify "IP Address" and "Subnet Mask" of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Only accessing from the same subnetwork is allowed.

When accessing of the ETERNUS DX/AF from a different subnetwork is allowed (*1)

Specify "Gateway" and "Allowable IP Address ("IP Address" (or the network address) and "Subnet Mask")".

*1: Allowing access from a different subnetwork is required when using ETERNUS Web GUI or ETERNUS CLI of PCs in a different network to log in to the ETERNUS DX/AF. Allowing access from a different subnetwork is also required when using Systemwalker Centric Manager or SNMP Manager that is connected to a different subnetwork to monitor the ETERNUS DX/AF.

[Example] Allowable IP Address (for IPv4)

• When accessing of the ETERNUS DX/AF from a specific client outside the subnetwork is allowed, specify

"IP Address" and "Subnet Mask".

IP Address: 10.20.30.40

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255

• When accessing of the ETERNUS DX/AF from a specific subnetwork outside the subnetwork is allowed, specify "Network Address" and "Subnet Mask".

IP Address: 10.20.30.0

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

For IPv6, "IP Address" corresponds to "Connect IP Address", and "Subnet Mask" corresponds to "Length of Subnet Prefix".

Setup Firewall

This function configures a firewall for each service.

Configuration is required for each MNT, RMT and FST port.

• MNT port

The MNT port is used for general communication between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the external hosts.

• RMT port

The RMT port is used when the line must be separated from the MNT port.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250

S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F, this port is also used for maintenance of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• FST port

The FST port is used for maintenance of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650, this port must be configured.

• If both the HTTP connection and the HTTPS connection have been disabled, ETERNUS Web GUI cannot access the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If both the Telnet connection and the SSH connection have been disabled, ETERNUS CLI cannot access the

ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If ports of all the services are disabled, access to the ETERNUS DX/AF is not allowed.

• When the firewall setting is changed, it takes approximately 10 seconds to update the storage system information. To display the most recently updated screen, wait at least 10 seconds and click the [ ] icon in the

[Network] screen or click [Network] in the category.

134

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

•

To configure the network environment of the ETERNUS DX/AF, use the procedure in "Setup Network Environment" (page 125) .

• The following table shows the protocols, the port numbers, and the direction for each service.

Service tcp/udp

ETERNUS Web GUI

ETERNUS CLI

Ping

Maintenance-Secure

SNMP

(excluding SNMP trap)

RCIL

ETERNUS DX Discovery

Protocol

HTTP

HTTPS

Telnet

SSH

ICMP

Unique protocol

SNMP

IPMI

Unique protocol tcp tcp

– tcp udp udp udp

Port number

443

–

1372

161

623 / 664

9686

Direction (*1) from from from from from from from from from

*1: The direction of the first communication. "From" indicates that the first communication is performed from an external server or an external client to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Firewall" (page 1040) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Firewall" (page 1297) .

The procedure to set a firewall is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which port to set the firewall for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Setup Firewall] in [Action].

2 Specify whether to enable or disable the connection of each service.

■ For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

135

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

■ For the other models

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Firewall Settings

• HTTP

• HTTPS

• Telnet

• SSH

• ICMP

• Maintenance-Secure

• SNMP

• RCIL

• ETERNUS DX Discovery

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the firewall starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface

This function sets up the SNMP Agent basic interface in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

SNMP is a standard protocol used for network management.

• When SNMP Manager exists in a different subnetwork from where the ETERNUS DX/AF belongs, specify the IP address or the network address of SNMP Manager in "Allowable IP Address" using the procedure in

"Setup Network Environment" (page 125) .

• Before enabling the SNMP function, use the procedure in

"Setup Firewall" (page 134)

to allow the "SNMP" for the setting target LAN port.

136

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

•

By using "Initial Setup" (page 47) , the SNMP Agent environment can be configured with the wizard. Refer to

"Initial Setup" in "Configuration Guide (Web GUI)". When the [Initial Setup] function is not used, configure the

SNMP Agent environment in the following order:

When using SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c for SNMP communication

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

When using SNMPv3 for SNMP communication

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface" (page 1041)

• The parameter settings specified using this function remain even when the "SNMP Function" setting is changed from "Enable" to "Disable".

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface" (page 1297)

The procedure to set the basic information of SNMP Agent is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup SNMP Interface] in [Action].

Specify the parameters.

137

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Basic Interface

• SNMP Function

• LAN Port used for SNMP

• Authentication Failure

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the SNMP Agent basic interface starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Setup SNMP Manager

This function specifies the IP address of the SNMP Manager.

The SNMP Manager is used when accessing the ETERNUS DX/AF using the community name or the user name, or when sending a trap from the ETERNUS DX/AF to the SNMP Manager.

Up to ten SNMP Managers can be specified for each ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If the "SNMP Function" is disabled, this function cannot be used.

•

The IP address of the SNMP Manager that is used in the settings in "Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page

144)

"Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 146)

cannot be changed or deleted.

"Setup Network Environment" (page 125) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SNMP Manager" (page 1043)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Manager" (page 1297)

The procedure to set the SNMP Manager is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup SNMP Manager] in [Action].

138

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When adding a Manager IP address, click the [Add] button. Click the [Manager] link to edit the

Manager IP address.

To delete the existing Manager IP address, click the [Delete] button for the target IP address.

 The [Manager] screen appears.

Add or edit the Manager IP address.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Manager

• IP Version

• Manager IP Address (IPv4)

• Manager IP Address (IPv6)

4 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the original screen.

139

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

Step 4 when registering multiple Manager IP addresses.

through

6 After adding or editing the Manager IP address, click the [Set] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the SNMP Manager starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View

This function sets up the SNMP Agent MIB View.

MIB View is used for defining the accessible area in the Management Information Base (MIB) database, with a tree type structure. Use this item when defining the accessible area in the MIB database.

Up to ten MIB Views, including the default view, can be created for each ETERNUS DX/AF.

There are three types of default views: "ViewALL", "View-mib2", and "View-exmib".

• If the "SNMP Function" is disabled, this function cannot be used.

• The view name that is used in the settings in

"Setup SNMP Agent User" (page 142) or

"Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page 144) cannot be changed or deleted. However, note that the MIB View (Subtree) can be

changed.

• The default view can be changed or deleted.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page 1043)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page 1298) .

The procedure to change the SNMP Agent MIB view is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Setup SNMP MIB View] in [Action].

140

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When adding an MIB View, click the [Add] button. Click the [View Name] link to edit the MIB

View.

To delete the existing MIB View, click the [Delete] button for the target MIB View.

 The [MIB Access View] screen appears.

Add or edit the MIB View

The main setting items are as follows.

● MIB Access View

• View Name

• Subtree1 - Subtree10

Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the original screen.

Step 4 to configure multiple MIB Views.

through

141

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

After adding or editing the MIB View, click the [Set] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the SNMP Agent MIB View starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Setup SNMP Agent User

This function sets up the user which accesses the SNMP Agent.

The security level and the MIB access range are configured for each user.

Up to ten users can be specified for each ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If the "SNMP Function" is disabled, this function cannot be used.

•

The user name that is used in the settings in "Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 146) cannot be changed or

deleted. However, note that some of the user information (MIB View Setting, Authentication, and Encryption) can be changed.

• This function must be used when using SNMPv3 in SNMP communication between the SNMP Agent and the

SNMP Manager. This setting is not necessary when SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is used for SNMP communication.

The authentication and encryption can be enabled/disabled, and also the MIB access range can be specified, for each user.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SNMP Agent User" (page 1044) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent User" (page 1298)

The procedure to set the user to access the SNMP Agent is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup SNMP User] in [Action].

142

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

When adding a user, click the [Add] button. Click the [User Name] link to edit the user.

To delete the existing user, click the [Delete] button for the target user.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Setup SNMP Agent User] screen appears.

3 Add or edit the user.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Setup SNMP Agent User

• User Name

• MIB View Setting

• Authentication

• Authentication Method

• Authentication Password

• Retype Authentication Password

• Encryption

143

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

• Encryption Method

• Encryption Password

• Retype Encryption Password

Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the original screen.

Step 4 to configure multiple users.

through

6 After adding or editing the user, click the [Set] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the SNMP Agent user starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Setup SNMP Agent Community

This function sets up the SNMP Agent Community.

The Community is a range of available networks for SNMP.

The setting value is used as the password for SNMP Manager to access the SNMP Agent of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The SNMP Agent only accepts a request from SNMP Manager if the specified community names for SNMP Manager and SNMP Agent are the same.

Up to ten communities can be specified for each ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If the "SNMP Function" is disabled, this function cannot be used.

•

The community name that is used in the settings in "Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 146)

cannot be changed or deleted.

• This function must be used when using SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c in SNMP communication between the SNMP

Agent and the SNMP Manager. This setting is not necessary when using SNMPv3 only.

The SNMP Managers which are allowed to access, and the MIB access range, can be specified for each community.

144

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page 1046) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page 1298) .

The procedure to set the SNMP Agent community is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup SNMP Community] in [Action].

2 When adding a community, click the [Add] button. Click the [Community Name] link to edit the community.

To delete the existing community, click the [Delete] button for the target community.

 The [Setup SNMP Agent Community] screen appears.

3 Add or edit the community.

145

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

The main setting items are as follows.

● Setup SNMP Agent Community

• Community Name

• View Name

• Allowed SNMP Manager List

Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the original screen.

Step 4 to configure multiple communities.

through

6 After adding or editing the community, click the [Set] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the SNMP Agent Community starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Setup SNMP Agent Trap

This function notifies events that occur in the ETERNUS DX/AF to the SNMP Manager by an SNMP Trap.

This function configures the trap destination, the trap version, etc.

Up to ten traps can be specified for each ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If the "SNMP Function" is disabled, this function cannot be used.

• When SNMP Manager exists in a different subnetwork from where the ETERNUS DX/AF belongs, specify the IP

address or the network address of SNMP Manager in the "Allowable IP Address" using the procedure in "Setup

Network Environment" (page 125) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 1047)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 1298) .

146

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

The procedure to set the SNMP Agent trap is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup SNMP Trap] in [Action].

2 When adding a trap, click the [Add] button. Click the [Trap No.] link to edit the trap.

To delete the existing trap, click the [Delete] button for the target trap.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Setup SNMP Agent Trap] screen appears.

3 Add or edit the trap information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Setup SNMP Agent Trap

• Manager No.

• SNMP Version

• Community Name

147

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

• User Name

• Port No.

4 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the original screen.

Step 4 to configure multiple traps.

through

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When "Manager No. " or "Community Name/User Name" is not input

• When a trap with the same parameters (except the "Trap No. ") exists

• When a trap with the same parameters (except the "Trap No. " and the "Port No. ") exists

6 After adding or editing traps, click the [Set] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the SNMP Agent Trap starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Download MIB File

This function downloads the MIB definition file in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

MIB is the information for managing SNMP Agent that is transferred by using SNMP Manager with the SNMP.

The MIB definition file is used by the application which uses SNMP (SNMP Manager).

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Download MIB File" (page 1048) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Download MIB File" (page 1298) .

The procedure to download an MIB file as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Download MIB File] in [Action].

148

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Download MIB File

• Option

• Version

3 Click the [Download] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

Save the downloaded file.

The default file name is as follows.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

FJDARY-E152.MIB

• For the other models

FJDARY-E150.MIB

 The downloaded file is saved.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

Send SNMP Trap Test

This function transmits the test trap from the SNMP Agent to the SNMP Manager.

The SNMP Trap is the event information reported by the ETERNUS DX/AF (SNMP Agent).

Perform SNMP Agent and SNMP Manager settings before executing this test.

End of procedure

149

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Perform the following settings before executing this test. If the SNMP function is disabled, the trap test cannot be performed.

address or the network address of SNMP Manager in the "Allowable IP Address" using the procedure in "Setup

• This function transmits a test trap.

• When SNMP Manager exists in a different subnetwork from where the ETERNUS DX/AF belongs, specify the IP

Network Environment" (page 125) .

The procedure to perform the SNMP Trap test is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Send SNMP Trap] in [Action].

2 Click the [Send] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The SNMP Trap test is performed.

4 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

Confirm that the trap has been successfully received by SNMP Manager after the SNMP Trap test has been performed.

End of procedure

150

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Display SMTP Log

This function displays the E-Mail communication log between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the E-Mail server. If the E-

Mail communication is not operated properly, this function may identify the cause of problem.

The E-Mail communication log contains requests from the ETERNUS DX/AF to the server and responses from the server to the ETERNUS DX/AF. Only the E-Mail communication log for the last executed event is displayed.

Server connection related settings for the server is required in advance. Refer to "Setup E-Mail Notification" (page

152) for details.

The procedure to display SMTP log is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Display SMTP Log] in [Action].

2 Check the displayed "Event Type" and the "Communication Log".

Click the [Refresh] button to update to the latest screen.

3 Click the [Cancel] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

151

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup E-Mail Notification

This function is used to configure the mail notification settings for the various events detected by the ETERNUS DX/

AF.

To specify event notification, refer to

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166) .

When stopping the event notification via E-Mail, perform one of the following procedures.

• Disable the "Notification E-Mail"

•

Clear the E-Mail checkbox of the notification method using the procedure in "Setup Event Notification" (page

166)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 1048)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 1299)

The procedure to set a E-Mail notification is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup E-Mail Notification] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Notification E-Mail Settings

• Notification E-Mail

• Destination E-Mail Address

• Comment

● Mail Server Settings

• LAN Port used for SMTP Connection

• SMTP Server

• SNMP Port No.

• Sender E-Mail Address

• SMTP over SSL

152

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

• SMTP requires authentication

• Authentication Method

• User Name

• Password

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The specified E-mail notification setting is performed.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

Perform the following operations to confirm that an E-Mail can be sent to the specified address.

1. Select "Yes" for "Notification E-Mail", and click the [Set] button to save the changes. (Even if "Yes" is already selected for

"Notification E-Mail", the settings must be saved when settings such as the destination E-Mail address are changed.)

2. Restart this function and then click the [Send Test E-Mail] button.

Setup Syslog

This function sets up external servers (Syslog server) for sending logs of events that are detected by the ETERNUS

DX/AF.

Up to two Syslog servers can be registered.

The following events are sent as Syslogs:

•

All the notification target events that are configured using the procedure in "Setup Event Notification" (page

166)

• Logins and logouts from ETERNUS Web GUI and ETERNUS CLI

• Select whether to send ("on") or not send ("off") Syslogs for each ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Confirm that the Syslog has been successfully sent to the Syslog server by logging in and out from ETERNUS

Web GUI or ETERNUS CLI and performing a transmission test to the Syslog server.

• Even if a communication error occurs between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the Syslog server, the Syslog is not sent again.

• Use the procedure in

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166) for specifying events to be notified as a Syslog.

• Syslogs are sent to both Syslog servers at the same time.

• If the wrong Syslog settings information is specified, an error message appears during configuration.

• The parameter settings for Syslog remain even when the "Send Log" setting is changed to "off".

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Syslog" (page 1051)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Syslog" (page 1299)

153

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

The procedure to set up the Syslog is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Syslog] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Syslog Server

• Send Log

• Domain Name / IP Address

• Port No.

• LAN Port

An error screen appears if the specified IP address of the Syslog server conflicts with the internal IP address of the ETERNUS DX/AF. If this occurs, check the parameter settings.

Up to two Syslog servers can be configured. When configuring a second Syslog server, specify the required parameters in "Syslog Server2".

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the Syslog starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

154

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup SSH Server Key

This function sets up the SSH server key that is used when encrypting communication using SSH.

SSH is used when accessing from ETERNUS CLI.

After the SSH server key setting has been changed, the information must be updated in the storage system before accessing from ETERNUS CLI via the SSH connection. Log out from ETERNUS CLI and wait a few minutes before logging in again.

• The SSH server key is specified in the factory settings (Key Length: 2048 bits).

• Even if the SSH server key setting has been changed, the setting PC, which has logged into ETERNUS CLI via the Telnet connection, will not be affected.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SSH Server Key" (page 1052)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SSH Server Key" (page 1299) .

The procedure to set SSH server key is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Setup SSH Server Key] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

The main setting item is as follows.

● SSH Server Key Setting

• Key Length

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the SSH server key starts.

155

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

After setting the SSH server key, the information must be updated in the ETERNUS DX/AF before being accessed from ETERNUS CLI via the SSH connection. Log out from ETERNUS CLI and wait a few minutes before logging in again.

End of procedure

Create Self-signed SSL Certificate

This function performs settings for creating the SSL server key and the self-signed SSL certificate to be used when encrypting communication using Secure Socket Layer (SSL).

SSL is used when accessing from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection.

• The HTTPS connection from ETERNUS Web GUI is disabled in the factory settings.

• After the SSL server key and the self-signed SSL certificate have been created, the information must be updated in the storage system before accessing from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection. Log out from ETERNUS Web GUI and wait a few minutes before logging in again.

• The self-signed SSL certificate must be registered on the browser in the setting PC. Until the registration has been completed, a warning message is displayed when accessing from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection.

• If this function is executed while the following conditions are all satisfied, a message requesting the reboot of

SMI-S appears in the result screen. Refer to "Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 81)

for details.

"Enable" is selected for "SMI-S"

"Web GUI SSL Certificate" is selected for "SSL Certificate"

• There are two types of SSL certificates: the "self-signed SSL certificate" that is created by this function and the "SSL server certificate". Register one of the certificates in the ETERNUS DX/AF when using the HTTPS connection. To use the "SSL server certificate", refer to

"Create Key/CSR" (page 157) and

"Register SSL Certificate" (page 159)

• When using the key server to manage the SED authentication key, a trusted SSL certificate (a self-signed

SSL certificate or an SSL server certificate) is required to establish communication between the ETERNUS

DX/AF and the key server. When using the key management server linkage function to manage the key, register the SSL certificate for the ETERNUS DX/AF. The SSL certificate is transferred to the key server from the ETERNUS DX/AF when the key is updated. Refer to

"Update SED Authentication Key" (page 188)

for details.

• Refer to "Installing the Security Certificate" in "Configuration Guide (Web GUI)" for procedure to install the self-signed SSL certificate.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" (page 1052)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" (page 1299)

The procedures to create SSL server key and the self-signed SSL certificate are as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create SSL Certificate] in [Action].

156

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Create Self-signed SSL Certificate Setting

• Key Length

• Common Name

• Subject Alt Name

Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Creation of the self-signed SSL certificate starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

• After the SSL server key or the self-signed SSL certificate is created, the information must be updated in the ETERNUS DX/AF before being accessed from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection. Log out from ETERNUS Web GUI and wait a few minutes before logging in again.

• If SMI-S is enabled, a message requesting the reboot of SMI-S appears. Refer to

"Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 81)

for details.

End of procedure

Create Key/CSR

This function performs settings for creating and exporting the SSL server key and the Certificate Signing Request

(CSR) which are used to acquire a SSL server certificate.

CSR is a certificate application form to submit to the certification authority.

Check the necessary items for authentication beforehand.

157

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When using the key server to manage the SED authentication key, a trusted SSL certificate (a self-signed SSL certificate or an SSL server certificate) is required to establish communication between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the key server. When using the key management server linkage function to manage the key, register the

SSL certificate for the ETERNUS DX/AF. The SSL certificate is transferred to the key server from the ETERNUS DX/

AF when the key is updated. Refer to "Update SED Authentication Key" (page 188) for details.

• Refer to

"Register SSL Certificate" (page 159) for detailed procedure to register the SSL server key and SSL

server certificate.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Key/CSR" (page 1054) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Key/CSR" (page 1299)

The procedure to create a CSR is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create Key/CSR] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Create Key/CSR Setting

• Key Length

• Country Name

• State or Province Name

• Locality Name

• Organization Name

• Organization Unit Name

• Common Name

• Subject Alt Name

3 Click the [Create] button.

158

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The creation of the CSR starts. When the creation of the CSR is complete, the screen for downloading the file is displayed.

5 Select the file that is to be downloaded.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Select Export File

• File Name

6 Click the [Export] button.

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

7 Save both the key file and the CSR file.

The default key file name is "ServerKey_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.txt".

The default CSR file name is "ServerCsr_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.txt".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen ( Step 5

) is displayed.)

 The files are saved.

Perform

Step 5 and Step 7 for each server key file and CSR file that is to exported.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

Register SSL Certificate

This function registers the SSL server key and the SSL server certificate which was obtained from the certification authority.

The following two methods are available for obtaining an "SSL server key" and an "SSL server certificate".

• Using the [Create Key/CSR] function of the ETERNUS DX/AF (

"Create Key/CSR" (page 157)

)

Create an "SSL server key" and a "CSR" using the [Create Key/CSR] function and send them to the certification authority to obtain an "SSL server certificate".

159

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Using a tool or website other than the ETERNUS DX/AF

Use a publicly available tool or website to obtain an "SSL server key" and an "SSL server certificate" issued from the certification authority.

• The HTTPS connection from ETERNUS Web GUI is disabled in the factory settings.

• The "SSL server certificate" in the PFX format must be converted to the Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format in

advance. This function does not support "SSL server certificates" in the PFX format. Refer to "How to convert and register "SSL server certificates" in the PFX format" (page 160)

for details.

• Register the SSL server key and the SSL server certificate as a pair in the ETERNUS DX/AF. If the combination of the SSL server key and the SSL server certificate is incorrect, accessing from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection is not possible.

• After the SSL server key and the SSL server certificate have been created, the information must be updated in the storage system before accessing from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection. Log out from ETERNUS

Web GUI and wait a few minutes before logging in again.

• When the SSL server key and the SSL server certificate have been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, the setting

PC, which has accessed from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection, will be forced to disconnect.

• If this function is executed while the following conditions are all satisfied, a message requesting the reboot of

SMI-S appears in the result screen. Refer to "Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 81)

for details.

"Enable" is selected for "SMI-S"

"Web GUI SSL Certificate" is selected for "SSL Certificate"

There are two types of SSL certificate: the "SSL server certificate" and the "self-signed SSL certificate". Register either of the certificates in the ETERNUS DX/AF when using the HTTPS connection. To use the "self-signed SSL cer-

tificate", refer to "Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" (page 156) .

How to convert and register "SSL server certificates" in the PFX format

The ETERNUS DX/AF supports the registration of certificates in the Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format, but does not support certificates in the PFX format. Use software such as OpenSSL to convert certificates in the PFX format to the PEM format, and then register the "secret key (key file)" and the "SSL server certificate (crt file)" in the ETERNUS

DX/AF.

The following shows an example when OpenSSL is used.

customer.pfx: Files in the PFX format before the conversion customer.key: Files in the PEM format after the conversion (secret keys) customer.crt: Files in the PEM format after the conversion (SSL server certificates)

(1) Confirm that the PFX formatted "SSL server certificate" includes the secret key and the SSL server certificate.

openssl pkcs12 -nodes -info -in customer.pfx

(2) Convert the PFX formatted "SSL server certificate" to the PEM formatted "secret key (key file)".

openssl pkcs12 -in customer.pfx -out customer.key -nodes -nocerts

(3) Convert the PFX formatted "SSL server certificate" to the PEM formatted "SSL server certificate (crt file)".

openssl pkcs12 -in customer.pfx -out customer.crt -nodes -nokeys

160

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(4) Register the PEM formatted "secret key (key file)" and "SSL server certificate (crt file)" in the ETERNUS DX/AF by using this function.

Depending on the version of the software that is used for conversions, registration of the converted files may fail. Use the latest version of the software and confirm that the conversion is performed successfully.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Register SSL Certificate" (page 1055)

The procedures to create SSL server key and the SSL server certificate are as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Register SSL Certificate] in [Action].

Either of the following items must be obtained in advance:

• The "SSL server key" downloaded using the procedure in

"Create Key/CSR" (page 157)

and the "SSL server certificate" obtained from the certification authority

• An "SSL server certificate" that is created with a tool or website other than the ETERNUS DX/AF and is obtained from a certification authority

If the "SSL server certificate" (including the "secret key" and the "SSL server certificate" pair) is in the PFX format, convert it to the PEM format and then register the converted files in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Refer to

"How to convert and register "SSL server certificates" in the PFX format" (page 160) for details.

2 Click the [Browse...] button to specify the path to the "SSL Server Key File".

The main setting item is as follows.

● Register SSL Certificate Setting

• SSL Server Key File

161

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

Click the [Import] button.

 "Imported" is displayed.

4 Click the [Browse...] button to specify the path to the "SSL Server Certificate File".

The main setting item is as follows.

● Register SSL Certificate Setting

• SSL Server Certificate File

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

162

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

Click the [Import] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 "Imported" is displayed.

6 Confirm that the "SSL Server Key File" and the "SSL Server Certificate File" have been imported, and click the [Register] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the imported file was not the "SSL server key file"

• When the imported file was not the "SSL server certificate file"

• When the imported "SSL server certificate file" was not the certificate which corresponds to the SSL server key

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The registration of the SSL server key and SSL server certificate starts.

163

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

• After registering the SSL server key or SSL server certificate, the information must be updated in the

ETERNUS DX/AF before being accessed from ETERNUS Web GUI via the HTTPS connection. Log out from

ETERNUS Web GUI and wait a few minutes before logging in again.

• If SMI-S is enabled, a message requesting the reboot of SMI-S appears. Refer to

"Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 81)

for details.

End of procedure

Setup SSL Version

This function sets the SSL version (TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2) of the ETERNUS DX/AF for each of the following protocols to realize more secure communication.

• HTTPS (GUI)

• HTTPS (SMI-S)

• Maintenance-Secure

• Enable the SSL version for HTTPS (GUI) that is used for communication between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the setting PC. If the enabled SSL version setting used for communication is different between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the setting PC (web browser), access to the ETERNUS DX/AF from Web GUI is not allowed.

• At least one SSL version (TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2) must be enabled for HTTPS (GUI).

• After the SSL version for HTTPS (GUI) is specified, the new SSL session is applied from the next access (screen transition).

• The SSL version that is specified with this function is applied to all LAN ports (MNT/RMT/FST).

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup SSL Version" (page 1056) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SSL Version" (page 1300) .

The procedures to set the SSL version are as follows:

Procedure

Click [Setup SSL Version] in [Action].

164

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Network Management

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" for each protocol.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● SSL Version Settings

• HTTPS (GUI)

• HTTPS (SMI-S)

• Maintenance-Secure

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The SSL version setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Network] screen.

End of procedure

165

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Event/Dump Management

This section describes event/dump management.

Event/dump management provides the following functions:

•

Setup Event Notification

•

Display/Delete Event Log

•

Export/Delete Log

•

Export/Delete Panic Dump

Setup Event Notification

This function specifies whether to report events that are detected in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

There are six methods for event notification: Host Sense Key Code Qualifier, SNMP Trap, E-Mail, syslog, REMCS, and

AIS Connect.

A notification setting can be selected for each type of event.

• For SNMP Trap notification, performing procedures in the following sections is required.

"Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface" (page 136)

"Setup SNMP Manager" (page 138)

"Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page 140)

"Setup SNMP Agent User" (page 142)

"Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page 144)

"Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 146)

•

For E-Mail notification, performing procedure in "Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 152)

is required.

•

For syslog notification, performing procedure in "Setup Syslog" (page 153) is required.

•

For REMCS notification, performing procedure in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209) is required.

• For AIS Connect notification, performing procedure in

"Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220) is required.

• If ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser is used and configured to automatically obtain the ETERNUS DX/AF component

status, event notifications by SNMP traps for some events are automatically enabled. Refer to "A. Setup Event

Notification" (page 1056) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Event Notification" (page 1056)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Event Notification" (page 1300) .

The procedure to set the event notification is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Event Notification] in [Action].

166

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Specify whether to notify each event.

• The events are classified into three levels: "Error Severity Level", "Warning Level", and "Informational

Level".

Click the [Setting based on Severity] tab, [Error Severity Level] tab, [Warning Level] tab or [Informational Level] tab to display the setting fields for each level.

• Event notifications can be reset to the default state. Click the [System Defaults] button to display the default state and click the [Set] button. For the settings, refer to

"Initial setting list" (page 1071) .

• When setting the REMCS recommended pattern, click the [REMCS Defaults] button to display the

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the notification methods that are specified in this function determine whether to display the LCD message on the Overview screen and the Operation Panel.

■ Setting based on Severity (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3)

■ Setting based on Severity (for the other models)

167

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

The main setting items are as follows.

● Setting based on Severity

• All Error Events

• All Warning Events

• All Informational Events

■ Error Severity Level

■ Warning Level

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

168

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

■ Informational Level

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the event notification starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Event/Dump] screen.

End of procedure

Display/Delete Event Log

This function displays the event history of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The event log is one of the internal logs stored in the ETERNUS DX/AF. The event log contains a history of events that are related to configuration information changes, such as module failures and volume creation.

Up to 400 per CM event logs can be displayed. If the number of event logs exceeds the maximum number, the oldest event log is overwritten. Once the recorded event log is no longer required, it can also be deleted.

Even after deleting the event log using the [Delete Event Log] function, the maintenance information log remains stored in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

All event logs are deleted in a single operation.

■ Display event logs

The procedure to display event logs is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Display/Delete Event Log] in [Action].

169

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

Check the displayed event logs.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Click the [ ] icon or the [Refresh] button to display the latest screen.

• The event types are displayed using the following symbols.

Error level

• Messages that start with "P" are displayed when components fail or degrade, or when a temperature error is detected.

• Messages that start with "M" are displayed when an event that requires maintenance occurs.

• Messages that start with "E" are displayed when an error-level event occurs.

Warning level

• Messages that start with "J" are displayed when components require maintenance or preventive maintenance, or unusual temperatures occur.

• Messages that start with "W" are displayed when a warning-level event occurs.

Informational level

• Messages that start with "I" are displayed when an information-level event occurs.

• Messages that start with "R" are displayed when error or warning level events are restored to a normal state.

Messages that start with "O" are displayed when any other events that are not described above occur.

3 Click the [Cancel] button to return to the [Event/Dump] screen.

End of procedure

■ Delete event logs

The procedure to delete event logs is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Display/Delete Event Log] in [Action].

170

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

Click the [Delete] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of event logs starts.

4 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Event/Dump] screen.

End of procedure

Export/Delete Log

This function exports and saves the ETERNUS DX/AF maintenance information (log) in accordance with user-specified time settings.

An exported log can be stored on a floppy disk or hard disk, or sent by E-mail.

Also, users can select a log segment size to suit the destination it is to be saved.

• Exported Maintenance Information

The storage system log includes "internal log" and "configuration information".

• Internal log

Detected errors, warnings, and traces

• Configuration definition information

Configuration information exported from the ETERNUS DX/AF

When an ETERNUS DX in a Unified Storage environment, the storage system log and the NAS Engine log

(CM#0/CM#1) are stored in the same file.

• The internal log and configuration information cannot be exported separately.

• When exporting the log is complete, save the log file immediately.

• The various pieces of maintenance information are combined together, compressed, and then segmented into the user specified segment size before being exported.

Special tools to read these logs are required.

• In a Unified Storage environment, when log files are exported while the ETERNUS DX is in a high-load state, an error may occur due to a timeout. If an error occurs and exporting fails, perform the log export again in a lowload state.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Export/Delete Log" (page 1077)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Export/Delete Log" (page 1300) .

171

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

The procedure to export logs in the SAN environment is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Export/Delete Log] in [Action].

2 Set the detailed information for exporting a log.

■ For a SAN environment

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For a Unified Storage environment

The main setting items are as follows.

● Export Option

• Export Mode

• Specify Time Range

• Start Time

• End Time

• Include I/O Module log

172

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Include NAS Engine log (only for a Unified Storage environment)

• Log File Size

• Delete of Customer Information

• Even if a time range is specified for NAS Engine logs, all of the NAS Engine logs in the ETERNUS DX are exported.

• The customer information in the NAS Engine logs cannot be deleted. If "Yes" is selected for this item, the NAS Engine logs are not exported.

• If the NAS Engine logs are exported, it may take a long time to export the logs.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

When the input date and/or time are not valid (For example: February 31st)

When the end time is earlier than the start time

3 Click the [Export] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Log export starts. The progress screen is displayed.

After the log export is finished, a screen to execute downloading the file is displayed.

5 Click the [Download] button to save the exported log.

When exporting the log is complete, save the log file immediately.

If "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Log File Size" field, the [Download] button becomes inactive after

the log file has been saved. Proceed to Step 6

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

173

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Save the log file.

The default file name is "Log_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss_serial number for log file.zlg". (YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen (

Step 5 ) is dis-

played. When a log file is segmented, the segmented log files are given the same name and numbered serially (01 -).)

When exporting segmented log files, make sure to export the segment within five minutes. If five minutes pass before exporting the next segment, the log export fails. After finishing saving each segment, save the following segment immediately.

 If the log file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all the segmented files).

7 Click the [Finish] button to return to the [Event/Dump] screen.

 Exporting log has been completed.

When exporting the log is complete, make sure to export a panic dump.

End of procedure

Export/Delete Panic Dump

"Panic Dump" is the action of outputting (dump) memory information when an error (panic) occurs, and also the name of the output information itself. This function exports and saves the memory information of the Controller

Module that is stored in the panic dump data, in a segment size specified by the user. An exported panic dump can be stored on a floppy disk or hard disk, or sent by E-mail.

Panic dump is used to analyze the cause of a firmware abnormality or hardware error.

• This function cannot be used when there is no panic dump to be exported in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If one user performs any settings while another user is downloading a panic dump, a timeout occurs and the setting operation may be stopped due to an error.

• Up to two panic dumps can be stored in a single CM.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Export/Delete Panic Dump" (page 1079) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Export/Delete Panic Dump" (page 1300) .

The procedure to export the panic dump is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Export/Delete Panic Dump] in [Action].

174

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

Specify the panic dump to be exported and the segment file size.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Panic Dumps

• Panic Dumps

● Option

• Dump File Segment Size

Click the [Export] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Exporting of the panic dump starts. The progress screen is displayed. After the panic dump export is finished, a screen to execute downloading the file is displayed.

175

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

Click the [Download] button to save the exported panic dump.

When exporting of the panic dump has been completed, save the panic dump immediately.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Dump File Segment Size" field, the [Download] button becomes

inactive after the log file has been saved. Proceed to Step 6

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

6 Save the panic dump.

The default file name is as follows.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

"Panic_serial number for the ETERNUS DX_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss_CExCMy_serial number for panic dump file.zlg"

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the panic has occurred. x: CE number in which the panic has occurred. y: CM number in which the panic has occurred. When a panic dump file is segmented, the segmented panic dump files are given the same name and numbered serially

(01 -).)

• For the other models

"Panic_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss_CMy_serial number for panic dump file.zlg"

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the panic has occurred. y: CM number in which the panic has occurred. When a panic dump file is segmented, the segmented panic dump files are given the same name and numbered serially (01 -).)

When saving segmented panic dump files, make sure to save the segment within five minutes. If five minutes pass before exporting the next segment, the panic dump export fails. After finishing saving each segment, save the following segment immediately.

 If the panic dump file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all the segmented files).

176

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Event/Dump Management

Click the [Finish] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button to return to the [Event/Dump] screen.

End of procedure

177

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Audit Log Management

This section describes audit log management.

The following functions are available with Audit log management:

•

Enable Audit Log

•

Disable Audit Log

•

Setup Audit Log

Enable Audit Log

This function enables the audit log function.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Enable the "Audit Log" setting, and then specify the destination external server. Refer to

"Setup Audit Log"

(page 179) for details. Audit logs are sent after the external server is specified.

• Note that the ETERNUS DX/AF does not save the audit log. The audit log is only sent to the specified external server.

The conditions for collecting audit logs are as follows:

• The interface must be ETERNUS Web GUI, ETERNUS CLI, or software (via ETERNUS CLI or SMI-S)

• The user who logs in or is newly logged in when the external server is set after the "Audit Log" is enabled

• Audit log collection target operations (*1)

*1: Refer to

"Audit Log" (page 682) for details about log collection target operations.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Audit Log" (page 1300) .

The procedure to enable the audit log function is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Enable Audit Log] in [Action].

If the audit log function has already been enabled, [Enable Audit Log] cannot be clicked.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Enabling of the audit log starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Audit Log] screen.

End of procedure

Disable Audit Log

This function disables the audit log function.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Audit Log" (page 1300) .

178

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Audit Log Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to disable the audit log function is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Disable Audit Log] in [Action].

If the audit log function has already been disabled, [Disable Audit Log] cannot be clicked.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Disabling of the audit log starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Audit Log] screen.

End of procedure

Setup Audit Log

This function sets up external servers (Syslog servers) for sending audit logs that are detected by the ETERNUS DX/

AF.

Up to two Syslog servers can be registered.

• Enable the "Audit Log" setting, and then configure the destination Syslog server. Audit logs are sent after the

Syslog server is specified.

• Confirm that the audit log has been successfully sent to the Syslog server by logging in and out from ETERNUS

Web GUI or ETERNUS CLI and performing a transmission test to the Syslog server.

• Even if a communication error occurs between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the Syslog server, the audit log is not sent again.

• Changing the Syslog server setting is only available when the "Audit Log" setting is "Enable". Note that once

"on" is selected for the "Send Audit Log" setting, the "Send Audit Log" setting cannot be changed to "off" for both of the Syslog servers (at least one Syslog server must be "on").

• The audit log function uses the destination server that has the same interface as the Syslog server. The same server as the Syslog server is also available.

• The audit logs are sent to both Syslog servers at the same time.

• Even if the "Audit Log" setting changed to "Disable", the audit log setting information in the ETERNUS DX/AF is maintained.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Audit Log" (page 1079)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Audit Log" (page 1301) .

The procedure to set up the servers for sending audit logs is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Audit Log] in [Action].

179

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Audit Log Management

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Syslog Server1, Syslog Server2

• Send Audit Log

• Domain Name / IP Address

• Port No.

• LAN Port

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the "Audit Log" setting is "Disable"

• When the specified IP address of the Syslog server conflicts with the internal IP address of the ETERNUS

DX/AF.

Up to two Syslog servers can be configured. When configuring a second Syslog server, specify the required parameters in "Syslog Server2".

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the audit log starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Audit Log] screen.

End of procedure

180

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Key Management

This section describes key management.

In this section, the SED authentication key is referred to as "key".

Key management provides the following functions:

•

Setup Key Management Machine Name

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Update SED Authentication Key

•

Import SSL/KMIP Certificate

Setup Key Management Machine Name

This function specifies the name of the key management device (Key Management Machine).

The key management device name is used for the device that is to be used to connect to the key server.

The key management device name cannot be specified when a common key (*1) is not registered. Refer to "Register SED Authentication Key" (page 82)

for details.

*1: The common key for SEDs that are managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Key Management Machine Name" (page 1080)

The procedure to set the key management device name is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Setup Key Machine Name] in [Action].

2 Specify the key management device name.

181

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Key Management Machine Name Setting

• Key Management Machine Name

Do not change the key management device name after the key status changes to "Normal". The key status can be checked on the [Key Group] screen. Refer to

"Key Group" (page 675) for details.

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the key management device name starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Management] screen.

End of procedure

Add Key Server

This function adds a key server.

A key server is an external server that manages the key. By using the key server to obtain and update the key via

SSL to establish secure communication with the ETERNUS DX/AF, an environment in which the key can be managed more safely can be created. Up to two key servers can be registered.

For the key server, use a server in which the key management software "ETERNUS SF KM" is installed. Note that

"IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager" is also available as the key management software.

• The key server cannot be added when the common key (*1) is not registered. Refer to

"Register SED Authentication Key" (page 82)

for details.

*1: The common key for SEDs that are managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• By using a key server to manage the key, the ETERNUS DX/AF can obtain the key from the key server when required. For example, the key is obtained when RAID groups are added to the key group or when maintenance is performed for SEDs that configure a RAID group in the key group. Make sure that communication is always maintained between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the key server. To obtain the key from a key server, the key server must respond to the ETERNUS DX/AF within 30 seconds. Do not use the key server function in an environment in which a network timeout may occur.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Key Server" (page 1081)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Key Server" (page 1301)

The procedure to add a key server is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Key Server] in [Action].

182

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Key Server Setting

• Domain Name / IP Address

• Port No.

• LAN Port

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When inputting a domain name or an IP address that is already used for another key server

• When the IP address that was input and the IP address of the LAN port (MNT or RMT) are the same

• When the IP address that was input and the network address of the LAN port (MNT or RMT)are the same

3 Click the [Add] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Adding of the key server starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Management] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Key Server

This function deletes key servers.

A key server that is allocated to a key group cannot be deleted. Refer to the "Master Server" field and the "Slave

Server" field in the [Key Group] screen to check whether the key server is allocated to the key group. Refer to

"Key

Group" (page 675) for details.

183

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to delete key servers is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the key server that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete

Key Server] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deleting of the key server starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Management] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Key Server

This function changes the key server settings.

• Key server settings that are allocated to a key group can be changed.

• This function can be used to change "Domain Name / IP Address", "Port No.", and "LAN Port".

• This function can be used even when operations are being performed for the volumes that configures a key management target RAID group.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Key Server" (page 1081)

The procedure to change the key server settings is as follows:

Procedure

Select the key server that is to be changed and click [Modify Key Server] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

184

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Key Server Setting

• Domain Name / IP Address

• Port No.

• LAN Port

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When inputting a domain name or an IP address that is already used for another key server

• When the IP address that was input and the IP address of the LAN port (MNT or RMT) are the same

• When the IP address that was input and the network address for the LAN port (MNT or RMT) are the same

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the key server settings starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Management] screen.

End of procedure

Create Key Group

This function creates a key group.

The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same key. One key group can be created in the

ETERNUS DX/AF.

The key group cannot be created when a common key (*1) is not registered. Refer to "Register SED Authentication

Key" (page 82) for details.

*1: The common key for SEDs that are managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The key group can be created even when the key server is not registered.

• The key group can be created even when communication with the key server is not available.

• Register RAID groups that use the same key in the key group. Refer to

"Set Key Group (RAID Group)" (page

546)

for details.

• The RAID groups that are registered in the key group can be checked by using the [SED Key Group] screen.

Refer to

"SED Key Group" (page 908) for details.

• There are two types of SED keys: a common key and a key that is managed in the key server. RAID groups that use the common key and RAID groups that use the key managed in the key server (RAID groups that are registered in the key group) can be created in the same storage system.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Key Group" (page 1082)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Key Group" (page 1301)

185

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

The procedure to create a key group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create Key Group] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Key Group Setting

• Name

• Storage System Group Name

• Security Level

• Recovery Mode

• Key Valid Period

• Key Server

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Key group creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Key Group

This function deletes the key group.

A key group in which RAID groups are registered cannot be deleted. Use the [SED Key Group] screen to check

whether RAID groups are registered in the key group. Refer to "SED Key Group" (page 908)

for details.

186

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to delete a key group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Delete Key Group] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deleting of the key group starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Group] screen.

Modify Key Group

This function changes the key group settings.

The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same key.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Key Group" (page 1084) .

The procedure to change the key group settings is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify Key Group] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

End of procedure

The main setting items are as follows.

● Key Group Setting

• Name

• Storage System Group Name

• Security Level

• Recovery Mode

• Key Valid Period

• Key Server

187

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the key group settings starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

Update SED Authentication Key

This function updates the key in the key group. Updating of the key is performed in the following ways:

• When no key is registered in the key group, a key that has not expired is obtained from the key server.

• When the key is valid and has not expired, this key is replaced with a new key from the key server.

The ETERNUS DX/AF monitors the key on a regular basis and automatically replaces an expired key with a new key.

This function is used when a new key is required before the key expiration date has been reached because the user loses the SEDs that were disconnected for maintenance. This function asks whether to use the current key again when replacing the key.

• Replacing a key is only available when the master server is registered. Check the registration status of the master server in the [Key Group] screen. To replace the key, register the master server in advance. Refer to

"Modify Key Group" (page 187)

for details.

• The key is updated only when communication with the master server is normal.

• If no key is registered in the key group, an error occurs when the first update of the key is performed. In this case, register the SSL certificate of the ETERNUS DX/AF in the key server, accept access from the ETERNUS DX/

AF, and then update the key again. The key status changes to "Normal". An SSL certificate of the ETERNUS DX/

AF indicates a "self-signed SSL certificate" or an "SSL server certificate".

• The key can only be updated when the SEDs that configure the RAID groups in the key group are in the normal status. If there are SEDs without normal status in the RAID group, make sure to perform maintenance for these

SEDs in advance. If the key is updated before required maintenance is performed for the SEDs, the RAID group status changes to " Exposed" and updating of the key for the RAID group is not complete (the key status of the key group is not changed from "Modifying"). Updating of the key is complete after performing the SED maintenance and the status of all the RAID groups has returned to " Available" (the key status of the key group has changed to "Normal").

• If the RAID groups in the key group are blocked (the status is " SED Locked"), the RAID group status is not changed to " Available" even after the key is updated. Make sure to recover SEDs before updating the key.

Refer to

"Recovery SED" (page 548) for details.

• When "Disabled Key" is selected for "Current Key", make sure to compromise (*1) the key in the key server by using CLI for the key server. Note that GUI for the key server does not support the key compromising function.

*1: The key becomes unavailable in the key server.

• This function can be used to replace a key when the expiration date of the key is set to "Unlimited".

• This function can also be used to update the key in a key group in which no RAID groups are registered.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Update SED Authentication Key" (page 1084) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Update SED Authentication Key" (page 1301) .

188

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

The procedure to update a key in the key group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Update SED Key] in [Action].

2 Select whether to use the current key again.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Current SED Authentication Key Setting

• Current Key

3 Click the [Update] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the master server for the key group is not registered

• When one of the following statuses applies to the key in the key group:

Unregistered Server Certificate

Expired Server Certificate

No SSL Certificate

Network Error

Key Server Error

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Updating of the SED Authentication Key starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

189

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Import SSL/KMIP Certificate

This function registers the SSL/KMIP certificate in the ETERNUS DX/AF. The SSL/KMIP certificate is used for communication with the key server.

When performing management of the SED authentication key (hereinafter referred to as "key") in the key server, communication between the key server and the ETERNUS DX/AF is required. To establish communication, register the "SSL/KMIP certificate" (a trusted certificate of the key server) in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Export the SSL/KMIP certificate from the key server and register this certificate in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• To establish communication between the key server and the ETERNUS DX/AF, the SSL certificate of the storage system is also required. Refer to

"Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" (page 156)

"Create Key/CSR" (page 157)

for details.

• The SSL/KMIP certificate can be registered even when the key server is not specified.

• The SSL/KMIP certificate can be registered even when the key group is not created.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Import SSL/KMIP Certificate" (page 1085)

The procedure to register the SSL/KMIP certificate is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Import SSL/KMIP Certificate] in [Action].

2 Click the [Browse...] button to specify the path to the "SSL/KMIP Certificate File".

The main setting item is as follows.

● SSL/KMIP Certificate Setting

• SSL/KMIP Certificate File

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When reading of the "SSL / KMIP Certificate" failed

• When the "SSL / KMIP Certificate" file is larger than 4096 bytes

190

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Import] button.

When the imported file was not the "SSL/KMIP Certificate File", an error screen appears. If this occurs, check the parameter settings.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Importing of the SSL/KMIP certificate starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

191

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Storage Migration Management

This section describes Storage Migration management.

Storage Migration management provides the following functions:

•

Start Storage Migration

•

Download Template File for Storage Migration Settings

•

Delete Storage Migration Path

•

Download Storage Migration Result

•

Restart Storage Migration

•

Suspend Storage Migration

•

Stop Storage Migration

Start Storage Migration

This function loads the Storage Migration setting file and starts migration.

Storage Migration is the function for migrating data by connecting other storage systems (migration source) and the ETERNUS DX/AF (migration destination). Data migration is possible regardless of the server and the OS, and without using server resources.

• Data migration is performed in volume units.

• Up to 16 storage systems can be specified as migration source storage systems.

• Up to 8 migration paths can be specified per migration source storage system.

• Up to 512 data migration LUNs can be specified per migration path.

• There are two methods for migrating the data: "offline Storage Migration" and "online Storage Migration".

Both the online Storage Migration and the offline Storage Migration (hereinafter collectively referred to as "Storage Migration") require temporarily stopping the operation. To perform a Storage Migration without stopping

operations, use the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function. Refer to "Register Non-disruptive Storage Migration

License" (page 66)

for details.

To perform Storage Migration, the destination storage systems, the source storage systems, and the destination volumes must satisfy the conditions below.

Requirements for a source storage system and a source LUN:

• An FC interface is available as the host interface

• The storage system is in the normal state

• The source LUN is a type that is accessible from the host (Standard, TPV, Snap Data Volume (SDV), etc.)

• Storage Migration is not yet started

Requirements for a destination storage system and a destination volume:

• An FC interface is available as the host interface

• The storage system is in normal status

• The CA port used for migration is in normal status

• The destination volume is in normal status

(The status of the migration destination volume is not " Readying", " Partially Exposed",

" Exposed", " Not Ready", " Broken", " Data Lost", or " Unknown")

• The type of the destination volume is "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", or "Flexible Tier Volume (FTV)"

192

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• A storage system or volume cannot be specified as the destination in the following cases:

Hot controller firmware upgrade is being performed in the destination storage system

An ODX Buffer volume is selected as a migration destination volume

A NAS volume (NAS user volume and NAS backup volume) is selected as a migration destination volume

A NAS system volume is selected as a migration destination volume

A Deduplication/Compression System Volume is selected as a migration destination volume

An External Volume is selected as a migration destination volume

The RAID group to which the destination volume belongs to has an Eco-mode schedule configured

The TPP to which the destination volume belongs has an Eco-mode schedule configured

The destination volume is specified as a RAID migration source or destination (*1)

The capacity of the RAID group to which the destination volume belongs is being expanded

Encryption is in progress for the destination volume

The capacity of the destination volume is being expanded

The destination volume is specified as the destination for another Storage Migration operation

The mirroring reservation attribute (*2) is added to the destination volume

The migration destination volume is used for the Virtual Volume function

An Advanced Copy or an XCOPY session is configured for a migration destination volume (*3)

A migration using the Flexible Tier is being performed for a migration destination volume (*1)

Capacity optimization is being performed for a migration destination volume (*1)

*1: If "Operation Mode" is "Migration & Host IO", "Migration Status" is changed to "Stop". After the copy sessions are deleted, manually restart the migration.

*2: The mirroring reservation attribute is added to the volumes that are being created as a Remote Equivalent Copy (REC) path by the Dynamic LUN Mirroring function. Volumes that are not successfully created may have this attribute. Volumes that have the mirroring reservation attribute can be checked in the "Forbid Advanced Copy" field on the [Volume] screen. Refer to

A started Storage Migration can be suspended, restarted, and stopped in volume units. Refer to "Suspend Storage

for details.

*3: If "Operation Mode" is "Migration & Host IO", "Migration Status" is changed to "Stop". After the process has completed, manually restart the migration.

Requirements for a destination volume and a source LUN:

• The destination volume has the same or larger capacity than the source LUN

Note that if "Operation Mode" is "Migration & Host IO", the migration destination volume must be the same size as the source LUN.

• To perform a Storage Migration, stop access from the host to the source LUN.

• The requirements for stopping access from the host to the destination volume varies depending on the operation mode.

For "Migration & Host IO", access from the host to the destination volume does not need to be stopped after the migration is started.

For "Migration", "Migration + Quick Compare", or "Quick Compare", stop access from the host to the destination volume.

For "Migration + Full Compare" or "Full Compare", stop access from the host to all the volumes in the destination storage system.

• Do not specify a volume that has copy sessions as a source or destination.

• Do not specify a volume as the source when formatting is in progress.

• Do not execute the [Start RAID Group Diagnosis] function or the [Start Disk Diagnosis] function on the destination storage system.

• When "Migration + Full Compare" or "Full Compare" is specified for the operation mode, the time to complete the operation after data migration is increased significantly.

193

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Migration" (page 200)

"Restart Storage Migration" (page 199)

, or

"Stop Storage Migration" (page 201) for

details.

Data migration flow using the Storage Migration function

The workflow sequence for Storage Migration is described below.

The host environment must be confirmed and saved before performing the Storage Migration. Ask the system administrator to do it.

(1) Preparation a Check and save the host environment so that the ETERNUS DX/AF can be used in the same environment after migration.

b Check the status of the source and destination storage systems and clear any sense information that has not been reported (*1).

c When migrating data with multipath, make the configuration so that the same affinity group (LUN group) can be accessed from the multiple FC ports used for migration at the source storage system.

d Create a destination volume in the destination storage system, or format an existing volume for use as the destination volume.

*1: Operations that can be performed when logged in using a user account with the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

(2) Download a template for the Storage Migration setting file (

"Download Template File for Storage Migration Settings" (page 197)

(3) Create the Storage Migration setting file. Refer to "I. Storage Migration Setting Files" (page 1398)

for details.

(4) Stop access from the host to the source LUN.

(5) Stop access from the host to the destination volume.

If the operation mode is "Migration + Full Compare" or "Full Compare", stop the access from the host to all the volumes in the destination storage system.

(6) Change the mode of the FC port used for migration in the destination storage system to "Initiator" (

"Modify Port

Mode" (page 446)

(7) Set port parameters to the FC-Initiator port (

"Start Storage Migration" (page 192) ).

(8) Connect the source and destination storage systems using an FC cable, or use a switch to connect the source and destination storage systems.

(9) Load "Storage Migration setting file" that was created in

Step (3)

in the destination storage system to start Storage Migration (

(10)The following procedure varies depending on the operation mode.

■ If the operation mode is "Migration & Host IO"

(1) Perform the following procedure with an FC port that is not used for migrations in the destination storage system.

a Set port parameters to the FC-CA port (

b Set host affinity to the FC-CA port (

or "Modify Host Affinity" (page

361)

c Use the FC-CA port to confirm that the destination storage system and the destination volumes can be accessed correctly from the host.

d Use the FC-CA port to resume access from the host to the destination volume.

194

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(2) Check the progress of Storage Migration.

(3) After the Storage Migration is successfully completed, perform the following procedure in the destination storage system.

a Delete the migration path (

"Delete Storage Migration Path" (page 198)

b Change the FC-Initiator port mode that was used for the migration from "Initiator" to "CA" ( "Modify Port

Mode" (page 446) ).

■ If the operation mode is not "Migration & Host IO"

(1) Check the progress of Storage Migration.

(2) After the Storage Migration is successfully completed, perform the following procedure in the destination storage system.

a Delete the migration path (

"Delete Storage Migration Path" (page 198)

b Change the FC-Initiator port mode that was used for the migration from "Initiator" to "CA" ( "Modify Port

Mode" (page 446) ).

c Set port parameters to the FC-CA port (

d Set host affinity to the FC-CA port (

or "Modify Host Affinity" (page

361)

e Use the FC-CA port to confirm that the destination storage system and the destination volumes can be accessed correctly from the host.

f Use the FC-CA port to resume access from the host to the destination volume (if the operation mode is

"Migration + Full Compare" or "Full Compare", resume access from the host to the destination storage system).

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Start Storage Migration" (page 1085) .

The procedure to start Storage Migration is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Start] in [Action].

2 Click the [Browse...] button to select a Storage Migration setting file.

195

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Storage Migration

• Storage migration setting file

• An error screen is displayed if a timeout occurs during the retrieval of source device information.

• An error screen is displayed if the Storage Migration setting file does not satisfy the required conditions.

Check the parameter settings. Refer to

"I. Storage Migration Setting Files" (page 1398)

for details.

• When an error is detected in the script analysis

• An error screen is displayed when the obtained source storage system information is in the following conditions:

Two or more source storage systems are specified in single "GROUP"

The source storage system has other Storage Migration instance already started

The source storage system status is not normal

The source WWN being set for "PATH" does not exist

The source LUN is in the following conditions:

• The source LUN does not exist.

• An unusable status is detected.

• The capacity exceeds that of the destination volume.

3 Click the [Next >>] button.

Check the path group, and click the [Start] button.

•

Click the [Path Group] link to display "Path Group Detail Information" (page 686) .

• If a CE number is not specified for the migration path in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, "CE#0" is assumed as specified. To change the CE number, cancel the process, edit the Storage Migration setting file, and then restart this function.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Storage Migration starts.

196

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Storage Migration] screen.

•

Refer to "Storage Migration" (page 684) for progress status of Storage Migration.

•

Click the [Path Group] link to display "Path Group Detail Information" (page 686) .

End of procedure

Download Template File for Storage Migration Settings

This function downloads the template of the Storage Migration setting file.

In the Storage Migration setting file, specify the destination CA port, source WWN, source LUN, and destination volumes.

Refer to "I. Storage Migration Setting Files" (page 1398)

for details about the Storage Migration setting files.

The procedure to download the template is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Download Template] in [Action].

Click the [Download] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 A dialog box to download file appears.

Save the template file.

The default file name is "StMigTemplate.txt".

 Downloading of the template file starts.

5 Click the [Close] button to return to the [Storage Migration] screen.

197

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete Storage Migration Path

This function deletes path groups for Storage Migration.

The path groups must be deleted after the data migration is complete. The following operations are not available before path groups are deleted:

• Hot controller firmware upgrade is being performed in the destination storage system

• Eco-mode schedule setting of the RAID group to which the destination volume belongs

• Eco-mode schedule setting of the TPP to which the destination volume belongs

• Capacity expansion of the RAID group to which the destination volume belongs

• RAID migration of the destination volume

• Encryption of the destination volume

• Capacity expansion of the destination volume

• Deletion of the destination volume

• Port mode modification of the destination FC-Initiator port

• Port parameter setting of the destination FC-Initiator port

• Reduction of the CA to which the destination FC-Initiator port belongs

The path group can be deleted if all configured paths are in any of the following states:

• "Source LUN Status" of the Storage Migration Volume List is " Not Exist".

• "Migration Status" of the Storage Migration is "Normal End", "Stop", "Initial", or "Waiting".

The procedure to delete the Storage Migration path is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the path group that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete

Path] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the Storage Migration path starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Storage Migration] screen.

End of procedure

Download Storage Migration Result

This function downloads the execution result of the Storage Migration.

• Download of Storage Migration results is made in path group units.

• Storage Migration results can be downloaded not only after completion of data migration but also during data migration.

• The Storage Migration results are text files. The template is the same as the [Path Group Detail Information]

screen. Refer to "Path Group Detail Information" (page 686)

for details.

198

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

The procedure to download the Storage Migration result is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Download Result] in [Action].

2 Click the [Download] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 A dialog box to download file appears.

Save the Storage Migration result file.

The default file name is "StMigResult_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.txt".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen ( Step 2

) is displayed.)

 Downloading of the Storage Migration result file starts.

5 Click the [Close] button to return to the [Path Group Detail Information] screen.

End of procedure

Restart Storage Migration

This function restarts Storage Migration when it is waiting, suspended, stopped, or error-stopped.

• Storage Migration is restarted in volume units.

• Storage Migration can be restarted when its "Migration Status" is "Waiting", "Suspend", "Stop" or "Error".

• If Storage Migration is restarted when its "Migration Status" is "Suspend" or "Error", data migration is started from the point of LUN suspension.

• If Storage Migration is restarted when its "Migration Status" is "Waiting" or "Stop", data migration of the LUN is started over from scratch.

199

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to restart the Storage Migration is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the source LUN from which Storage Migration is to be restarted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Restart] in [Action].

[Restart] cannot be clicked if one or more source LUNs are selected for which the migration status is unavailable for restarting.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

Note that if the migration status of some LUNs changes to unavailable status after clicking [Restart], only the available LUNs among the selected LUNs are restarted. If LUNs for which the migration status is not unavailable for restarting exist, a message that indicates that the restarting process for these LUNs failed is displayed.

 Storage Migration restarts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Path Group Detail Information] screen.

End of procedure

Suspend Storage Migration

This function suspends Storage Migration that is running.

If the Storage Migration is suspended when the operation mode is "Migration & Host IO", the host IO stops. Check the host IO status before suspending the Storage Migration.

• Storage Migration is suspended in volume units.

• Storage Migration can be suspended when its "Migration Status" is "Running".

•

A suspended Storage Migration can be restarted. Refer to "Restart Storage Migration" (page 199) for details.

The procedure to suspend the Storage Migration is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the source LUN for which Storage Migration is to be suspended (multiple selections can be made) and click [Suspend] in [Action].

200

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

[Suspend] cannot be clicked if one or more source LUNs are selected for which the migration status is unavailable for suspending.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

Note that if the migration status of some LUNs changes to unavailable status after clicking [Suspend], only the available LUNs among the selected LUNs are suspended. If LUNs for which the migration status is not unavailable for suspending exist, a message that indicates that the suspending process for these LUNs failed is displayed.

 Storage Migration suspends.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Path Group Detail Information] screen.

End of procedure

Stop Storage Migration

This function stops Storage Migration when it is migrating, suspended, or error-stopped.

If the Storage Migration is stopped when the operation mode is "Migration & Host IO", the host IO stops. Check the host IO status before stopping the Storage Migration.

• Storage Migration is stopped in volume units.

• Storage Migration can be stopped when its "Migration Status" is "Running", "Suspend" or "Error".

• A stopped Storage Migration can be restarted. Refer to

"Restart Storage Migration" (page 199)

for details.

The procedure to stop the Storage Migration is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the source LUN for which Storage Migration is to be stopped (multiple selections can be made) and click [Stop] in [Action].

[Stop] cannot be clicked if one or more source LUNs are selected for which the migration status is unavailable for stopping.

201

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Storage Migration Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

Note that if the migration status of some LUNs changes to unavailable status after clicking [Stop], only the available LUNs among the selected LUNs are stopped. If LUNs for which the migration status is not unavailable for stopping exist, a message that indicates that the stopping process for these LUNs failed is displayed.

 Storage Migration stops.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Path Group Detail Information] screen.

End of procedure

202

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

External Drive Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External Drive Management

This section describes External Drive management.

External Drive management provides the following functions:

•

Create External Drive

•

Delete External Drive

Create External Drive

This function creates External Drives by transferring the volume information in the external storage system to the local storage system.

This function is available only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

The maximum number of External Drives for each model

The maximum number of External Drives varies depending on each model. The following table shows the maximum number of External Drives that can be created for each model.

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

The maximum number of External Drives (*1)

512

2048

4096

8192

16384

4096

8192

4096

*1: Up to 512 volumes can be migrated per external storage system in a single operation.

• External Drives that inherit the "External LU Information" cannot be used for the Storage Cluster function.

• The following operations are not available for the created External Drives:

Using External Drives as hot spare disks (Global Hot Spares or Dedicated Hot Spares)

Creating REC Disk Buffers with the External Drives

Setting disk patrol for the External Drives

Diagnosing the External Drives

Performing the External Drive maintenance operations (or using the [Hot Preventive Maintenance] function, the [Force Enable Module] function, the [Force Disable Module] function, and the [Remove Disk

Drive] function)

• External Drives that inherit volume information are displayed in the [External Drives] screen. Refer to

"External Drives" (page 690)

for details.

•

External Drives can be deleted. Refer to "Delete External Drive" (page 206) for details.

203

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

External Drive Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create External Drives" (page 1085) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create External Drive" (page 1301) .

The procedure to create External Drives is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

2 Select whether the volume information (External LU Information) of the external storage system is inherited and click the [Browse...] button for the "Select External Storage" field.

• To inherit the External LU Information, select the "Inherit" checkbox.

• For volumes to be used for the Storage Cluster function, clear the "Inherit" checkbox.

 The [Select External Storage] screen appears.

3 Select the external storage system for the migration source and click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the original screen. The information for the selected external storage system is displayed.

204

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

External Drive Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If the "Inherit" checkbox is selected, add volumes in the external storage system that transfer the

External LU Information to the local storage system.

(1) Click the [Add] button on the bottom right of the "Select LUs of the External Storage" field.

 The [Select LUs of the External Storage] screen appears.

(2) Select the volume that transfers the External LU Information to the local storage system (multiple selections can be made) and click the [OK] button.

Select the checkbox to the left of "LUN" in the [Select LUs of the External Storage] screen to select all the displayed volumes.

 Returns to the original screen. The information of the selected volumes is displayed.

205

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

External Drive Management

(3) Repeat Step (1) and Step (2) when adding multiple volumes.

Up to 512 volumes are displayed in the "Select LUs of the External Storage" field.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The External LU Information failed to be inherited

• The created External Drive is not in the normal state

• The number of External Drives that can be created for each model has exceeded the maximum number

Click the [Create] button.

6 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 External Drive creation starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [External Drives] screen.

End of procedure

Delete External Drive

This function deletes the registered External Drives.

This function is available only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

The External Drives that configure the External RAID Groups cannot be deleted. Delete the External RAID Groups

before starting this function. Refer to "Delete External RAID Group" (page 551) for details.

206

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

External Drive Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

•

External Drives are displayed in the [External Drives] screen. Refer to "External Drives" (page 690) for details.

• The External Drives that configure the External RAID Groups can be checked in the "Status" field of the [External Drives] screen. External Drives in the " Available" or " Available" state are used for the External RAID

Groups. External Drives in the "

Present" state are not used (can be deleted). Refer to "External Drives"

(page 690) for details.

• Refer to the [External RAID Group] screen ([External Drives] tab) to check which External RAID Group is using the relevant External Drive. Refer to

"External RAID Group Detail (External Drives)" (page 919) for details.

The procedure to delete the External Drive is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the External Drive that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Delete] in [Action].

If the External Drives that configure the External RAID Group are selected, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The External Drive deletion starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [External Drives] screen.

End of procedure

207

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

This section describes remote support management (by REMCS).

Remote support management (by REMCS) provides the following functions:

•

Display Communication Log

•

Setup Remote Support

•

Update Customer Information

•

Update Communication Environment Information

•

Setup Log Sending Parameters

•

Stop/Restart Remote Support

Display Communication Log

This function displays the communication log between the ETERNUS DX/AF and REMCS center using the Remote

Support function.

When the Remote Support function cannot be operated properly, for example, cannot be connected to the REMCS center, use this log to identify the cause of the problem.

The communication log includes requests from the ETERNUS DX/AF to the server, and responses from the server to the ETERNUS DX/AF. Only the communication log of the last executed event is displayed.

If the settings in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

has not been completed in advance, this function cannot be used.

The procedure to display communication log is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Display Communication Log] in [Action].

Check the displayed "Event Type" and the "Communication Log".

Click the [Refresh] button to update to the latest screen.

208

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Cancel] button to return to the screen when starting this function in

Step 1

End of procedure

Setup Remote Support

This function registers the customer information and communication environment information required to receive

Remote Support from the REMote Customer Support system (REMCS) center.

"REMCS" is a unique remote maintenance system offered by Fujitsu. REMCS provides maintenance functions as follows:

• Failure Notice

This function reports various failures that occur in the ETERNUS DX/AF to the REMCS center. The maintenance engineer is notified of a failure immediately.

• Information Transfer

This function sends information such as logs and configuration information to be used when checking a failure.

It reduces the time required to collect information that is to be transferred to the REMCS center.

• Firmware Download

The latest firmware in the REMCS center is automatically registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF. This function ensures that the latest firmware is registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, and prevents known errors from occurring. Firmware can also be registered manually.

• REMCS cannot be used when the AIS Connect function is being used. Disable the AIS Connect function, and

then set the remote support (REMCS) parameters. Refer to "Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220)

for details.

• Use the IPv4 addresses for the IP addresses of the proxy server, the SMTP server, the POP server, and the HTTP server. IPv6 addresses cannot be used.

•

When changing the registered information, use the procedure in "Update Customer Information" (page 211)

and the

"Update Communication Environment Information" (page 213) .

• The information files (customer information file and communication environment information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the storage system, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each storage system.

Only the common device information can be imported from the information file. The individual device information is required to be specified after importing the information file.

Just importing the information file will not automatically update the information in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

After specifying all the necessary information, click the [Set] button.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Remote Support" (page 1086)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Remote Support" (page 1302)

The procedure to specify the Remote Support settings is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Remote Support] in [Action].

209

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Information File

• Customer Information File

• Communication Environment Information File

● Customer Information

"Update Customer Information" (page 211)

in the

for setting items.

● Communication Environment Information

"Update Communication Environment Information" (page 213) for setting items.

in the

● Detailed Configuration Information

• Data Transmission Method

• Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending E-Mail

• Use S/MIME

● Result notification information

• Administrator

• Connection check operator

• Connection check operator E-Mail Address

210

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The IP address of the Proxy/SMTP/POP server is the same as the broadcast address of the MNT port or the RMT port that is specified for the "LAN Port used for Remote Support"

• The IP address of the Proxy server/SMTP server/POP server is the same as the local host address

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the remote support starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

After completing the setting, the REMCS center sends the setting confirmation result to the "Administrator

E-Mail Address" or the "Connection check operator E-Mail Address". Make sure to confirm the setting results.

End of procedure

Update Customer Information

This function updates the customer information that is registered for the REMCS center.

•

If the settings in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209) has not been completed in advance, this function cannot

be used.

• When Remote Support is "Stopped", customer information cannot be updated.

• Customer information saved in the ETERNUS DX/AF (*1) can be deleted after transmitting the information to the REMCS center. Select the "Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the 'REMCS Center'. " checkbox to delete the information. Note that selecting the checkbox requires entering customer information whenever updating the information.

*1: Customer Identity information means "Administrator Name", "Administrator E-Mail Address ", "Phone Number", "FAX

Number", and "Connection check operator E-Mail Address".

• The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file) created by using REMCS ESAT can be imported to the ETERNUS DX/AF, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each storage system.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Update Customer Information" (page 1090) .

The procedure to update customer information is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Update Customer Info] in [Action].

211

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

Set the customer information again.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Information File

• Customer Information File

If the wrong information file is selected and the [Import] button is clicked, an error screen appears.

Check the parameter settings.

● Customer Information

• Detailed Settings

Checkbox

Company Name

Department/Division

Address

Building Name

Administrator Name

Administrator E-Mail Address

Postal Code (Zip Code)

Phone Number

FAX Number

Storage System Unique Name

Country of Installation (ISO3166 A2)* Example: JP, US, DE, etc.

● Installation Location

• Address

• Building Name

● Information filled by Field Engineers

• Installation Date

• Field Engineer E-Mail Address

• Customer Code

212

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The customer information is updated.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

Update Communication Environment Information

This function updates the customer information that is registered for the REMCS center.

•

If the settings in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209) has not been completed in advance, this function cannot

be used.

• Use the IPv4 addresses for the IP addresses of the proxy server, the SMTP server, the POP server, and the HTTP server. IPv6 addresses cannot be used.

The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file) created by using REMCS ESAT can be imported to the ETERNUS DX/AF, to simplify the input operation required to be set for each storage system.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to

"A. Update Communication Environment Information"

(page 1092) .

The procedure to update communication environment information is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Update Connection Info] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

213

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Information File

• Communication Environment Information File

If the wrong information file is selected and the [Import] button is clicked, an error screen appears.

Check the parameter settings.

● Communication Environment Information

• Connection

• Service

• Proxy Server

• SMTP Server

• SMTP Authentication Information

• REMCS Center

● Detailed Configuration Information

in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

for setting items.

● Result notification information

in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

for setting items.

● Time Information

in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

for setting items.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When "MNT" is specified for the "LAN Port used for Remote Support" and when the IP Address of the

Proxy server/SMTP server/POP server is the same as the broadcast address of the MNT port

• When "RMT" is specified for the "LAN Port used for Remote Support" and the IP Address of the Proxy server/SMTP server/POP server is the same as the broadcast address of the RMT port

• The IP address of the Proxy server/SMTP server/POP server is the same as the local host address

3 Click the [Set] button.

214

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the communication environment information starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

After completing the setting, the REMCS center sends the setting confirmation result to the "Administrator

E-Mail Address" or the "Connection check operator E-Mail Address". Make sure to confirm the setting results.

End of procedure

Setup Log Sending Parameters

This function transfers the internal log of the ETERNUS DX/AF to the REMCS center.

There are two log sending methods: "Automatic" and "Manual".

• Configure Automatic Log Transmission

The ETERNUS DX/AF sends log periodically or when an event occurs.

• Immediately Send Log Manually

The log is sent manually.

This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

• When the procedure in

"Setup Remote Support" (page 209) is not performed.

• When a problem is detected in the Remote Support settings

• When the "Receiver E-Mail Address" (REMCS center) is not specified for the Remote Support

• The Remote Support is stopped

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Log Sending Parameters" (page 1097) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Log Sending Parameters" (page 1303) .

The procedure to send log is as follows:

■ Configure Automatic Log Transmission

The ETERNUS DX/AF sends log periodically or when an event occurs.

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Log Sending Parameters] in [Action].

215

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Send Log based on Events

• Send Log when Errors Occur

● Send Log Periodically

• Periodical Transmission of Log

• Time

• Period

• Day of the Week

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The parameter settings of log transmission (Automatic Log Transmission) are updated in the storage system.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

■ Immediately Send Log Manually

In this screen, send log manually and immediately.

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Log Sending Parameters] in [Action].

216

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

Click the [Immediately Send Log Manually] tab to change the screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

3 Specify the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Manual Transmission

• Incident Number

• Include I/O Module log

• Time Range Specified

• Start Time

• End Time

4 Click the [Run] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Log transmission (Immediately Send Log Manually) is executed.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

217

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Stop/Restart Remote Support

This function temporarily stops the Remote Support function and starts again.

This function is used when the ETERNUS DX/AF is stopped for a prolonged period such as for relocation.

This function switches the support status from "Operating" to "Stopped" or from "Stopped" to "Operating". In

"Stopped", all the Remote Support functions, such as automatic notification of the ETERNUS DX/AF errors to the

REMCS center, are stopped.

• REMCS cannot be used when the AIS Connect function is being used. Disable the AIS Connect function, and then restart the remote support (REMCS). Refer to

"Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220)

for details.

•

If the settings in "Setup Remote Support" (page 209) has not been completed in advance, this function cannot

be used.

• This function is not available when the ETERNUS DX/AF is in "Maintenance Mode". The "Maintenance Mode" indicates that "Maintenance in Progress" is displayed as the Remote Support status.

• The event of temporary stopping or restarting of the Remote Support function is transferred from the ETERNUS

DX/AF to the REMCS center.

■ Stopping Remote Support

This function temporarily stops the Remote Support. The Remote Support can be stopped only when it is "Operating". The procedure to stop Remote Support is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Stop/Restart Remote Support] in [Action].

 The current Remote Support status is displayed.

Click the [Stop] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Remote Support is stopped.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

218

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (REMCS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Restarting Remote Support

This function restarts the Remote Support. The Remote Support can be restarted only when it is "Stopped". The procedure to restart Remote Support is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Stop/Restart Remote Support] in [Action].

 The current Remote Support status is displayed.

2 Click the [Restart] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Remote Support is restarted.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

219

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

This section describes remote support management (by AIS Connect).

Remote support management (by AIS Connect) provides the following functions:

•

Setup AIS Connect Environment

•

Setup Remote Session Permission

•

Send Log

•

Test Server Connectivity

•

Send AIS Connect Test Event

•

Import Root Certificate

Setup AIS Connect Environment

This function sets up the basic information for AIS Connect.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• AIS Connect is not available when REMCS is being used. Suspend REMCS and then enable AIS Connect. Refer to

"Stop/Restart Remote Support" (page 218)

for details (for regions other than EMEA).

• Before using AIS Connect, make sure to read the terms and conditions regarding the handling of personal information with extreme caution. To agree with the terms and conditions, click the [I agree] button. Agreement is required only once before setting "Country of Installation (Country Code : Country Name)".

• Note that setting parameters for AIS Connect is applied only when "Enable" is selected for "AIS Connect".

Even if the "AIS Connect" setting is changed to "Disable", the basic AIS Connect information in the ETERNUS DX/AF is retained.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 1099) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 1303) .

The procedure to set the AIS Connect information is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Setup AIS Connect Environment] in [Action].

2 Check the terms and conditions regarding the handling of personal information.

• The terms and conditions regarding the handling of personal information are displayed only when

"Country of Installation (Country Code : Country Name)" is not specified.

• To print the terms and conditions regarding the handling of personal information, click the [Print] button.

220

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When the [I agree] button is clicked



The [Setup AIS Connect Environment] screen appears. Proceed to Step 3

■ When the [I decline] button is clicked



Returns to the screen when starting this function in Step 1

3 Specify the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● AIS Connect Environment Setting

• AIS Connect

• Country of Installation (Country Code : Country Name)

• Use LAN Port

• SSL Server Certification

• Automatic Log Transmission

• Proxy Server

• Port No.

• Connection Type

• User Name

221

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Change Password

• Password

• Confirm Password

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions (when "Enable" is selected for the AIS Connect function and a proxy server is specified), check the parameter settings:

The specified "Proxy Server" does not satisfy the input conditions

The same IP address is specified for "Proxy Server" and the MNT port or the RMT port

The IP address for "Proxy Server" and the network address for the MNT port or the RMT port are the same

The IP address for "Proxy Server" and the broadcast address for the MNT port or the RMT port are the same

The same IP address is specified for "Proxy Server" and "AIS Connect Server"

• When "Enable" is selected for "AIS Connect" and "Country of Installation (Country Code : Country Name)" is not specified, an error screen appears. If this occurs, check the parameter settings.

4 Click the [Set] button.

5 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 AIS Connect setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

Setup Remote Session Permission

This function performs permission settings for remote sessions with the AIS Connect function. If a remote session is permitted, remotely controlling the ETERNUS DX/AF from a remote server (AIS Connect server) becomes available.

•

Settings can be changed when "AIS Connect" is enabled. Refer to "Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220)

for details.

• The permission setting of a remote session is released if one of the following conditions applies:

When a remote session is not detected before the timeout period that is specified for the timeout setting

When this function forbids remote sessions

When "AIS Connect" is disabled

• The permission settings are retained even if the ETERNUS DX/AF is rebooted or after recovery from a power failure. Note that the timer that monitors remote session connection is reset to "0"in this case.

• If the setting of this function is changed to forbid while a remote session is being performed, operations for this remote session are permitted until the user logs out. However, once this remote session is logged out from, this remote session cannot be logged into while the remote session is forbid.

• When "AIS Connect" is disabled, all remote sessions that are currently being performed are immediately disconnected.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Setup Remote Session Permission" (page 1101)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Remote Session Permission" (page 1303)

222

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

The procedure to set the remote support permission is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Setup Remote Session Permission] in [Action].

2 Specify the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Remote Session Permission Setting

• Remote Session

• Remote Session Timeout

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The permission settings for remote session are applied.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

Send Log

This function manually sends a storage system log to the remote server (AIS Connect server) when the AIS Connect function is in operation.

•

Sending logs is only available when "AIS Connect" is enabled. Refer to "Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page

220)

for details.

• Check the connection to the AIS Connect server in advance. Refer to

"Test Server Connectivity" (page 224)

for details. If a communication error occurs and a connection to the AIS Connect server cannot be established, logs cannot be sent. A log that fails to be sent is not resent.

• If a send log request is already performed once log collection is complete, send log requests are not performed.

223

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

This function collects logs (including I/O Module logs) at the time when performing the [Send Log] function. Log files are divided into 640MB increments and sent to the AIS Connect server.

The procedure to send log is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Send Log] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Sending log starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

Test Server Connectivity

This function checks the connection status between the ETERNUS DX/AF and a remote server (AIS Connect server).

Checking the connection status is only available when "AIS Connect" is enabled. Refer to

"Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220)

for details.

This function checks the connection status of the AIS Connect server by using the AIS Connect information in the

ETERNUS DX/AF. After performing the procedure in

"Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220) , use the [Test

Server Connectivity] function to check the connection status.

The procedure to check the connection status between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the AIS Connect server is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Test Server Connectivity] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Checking of the server connection status starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

The check result of the server connection status is displayed in the [Test Server Connectivity Result] screen.

If server connection fails, the cause of the error is displayed.

End of procedure

224

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Send AIS Connect Test Event

This function sends a test event to the remote server (AIS Connect server).

•

Sending a test event is only available when "AIS Connect" is enabled. Refer to "Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220) for details.

• The [Send AIS Connect Test Event] function only sends an event. Note that this function cannot be used to check the network connection status between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the AIS Connect server. Use the [Test

Server Connectivity] function to check the connection status. After checking the connection status, use the

[Send AIS Connect Test Event] function to send a test event. Check the AIS Connect server to confirm that the event is successfully received.

The procedure to send a test event to the AIS Connect server is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Send AIS Connect Test Event] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Sending of the AIS Connect test event starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

Import Root Certificate

This function updates the root certificate that is used for SSL communication with the AIS Connect server.

A root certificate file includes multiple certificates. The maximum file size of a root certificate is 12288 byte.

• A default root certificate is already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Check the expiration date of the default root certificate from the [Root Certificate] screen. The root certificate must be updated before the expiration date. This function overwrites the root certificate. Only the latest root certificate is saved in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The root certificate cannot be updated when both the "AIS Connect" setting and the "SSL Server Certification" setting are enabled. To update the root certificate while the AIS Connect function is being used, temporarily disable the "AIS Connect" setting and then update the certificate. The current settings for "AIS Connect" and

"SSL Server Certification" can be checked from the [AIS Connect] screen. Refer to

"AIS Connect" (page 670)

for details.

• The root certificate is only used for authentication with the AIS Connect server.

• The expiration date of the updated root certificate can be checked from the [Root Certificate] screen. Refer to

"Root Certificate" (page 672)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Import Root Certificate" (page 1102)

225

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Remote Support Management (AIS Connect)

The procedure to updates the root certificate is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Import Root Certificate] in [Action].

2 Specify the root certificate file.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Root Certificate Setting

• Root Certificate File

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the imported file is not "root certificate file"

• When the imported file size exceeds 12288 bytes

• When both the "AIS Connect" setting and "SSL Server Certification" setting are enabled

Click the [Import] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Updating of the root certificate starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Root Certificate] screen.

End of procedure

226

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Firmware Management

This section describes audit firmware management.

The following functions are available with firmware management:

•

Apply Controller Firmware

•

Delete Controller Firmware Schedule

Apply Controller Firmware

This function registers and applies the controller firmware.

The applicable specifications are as follows:

• "Start/End Maintenance" operations are not required.

• Registration of the controller firmware is not required.

• Users can select whether to apply the controller firmware immediately or on a specific date.

• If the specific date option is selected, the date and time to apply the controller firmware can be selected.

• An online update or an offline update cannot be selected. If both of these update modes can be performed, an online update is performed.

• When an offline update is performed, the ETERNUS DX/AF is automatically rebooted.

• If the current controller firmware is not registered in the BUD, this function cannot be used.

• Application of the controller firmware in the online mode may not be possible if the storage system status does not allow the firmware to be applied. Check the storage system status or contact a maintenance engineer.

• The ETERNUS DX/AF may be rebooted after the controller firmware is applied. Access from hosts is not possible while rebooting is in progress. Make sure to stop any access from hosts before applying controller firmware.

• If one of the following events occurs while the controller firmware application is being reserved or during in the specified application date, the reservation schedule is canceled automatically.

The ETERNUS DX/AF is rebooted

A power failure occurs

A system setting or a maintenance operation is performed on the specified application date

Note that no message appears even if the reservation schedule for applying the controller firmware is canceled.

If this occurs, the message that indicates that the controller firmware application has been reserved disappears from the system message field in the [Overview] screen and from the information field in the [Firmware

Maintenance] screen. Refer to

"Overview" (page 24)

and "Firmware Maintenance" (page 683) for details.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

The controller firmware is being registered

The controller firmware is being applied

The disk firmware is being registered

The disk firmware is being applied

Under maintenance works (firmware maintenance or hardware maintenance)

Encryption is being performed (online update is not available)

RAID Group Expansion (LDE) is being performed (online update is not available)

A RAID group diagnosis or a disk diagnosis is being performed (online update is not available)

Storage Migration is being performed (online update is not available)

Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF (online update is not available)

The status of the batteries (for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600

S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF250

S2/AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650) is not "Full Charge" (online update is not available)

227

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The status of the SCUs (the condenser for the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F) is not " Normal" (online update is not available)

The system message "Currently Network Configuration is set to factory default." is displayed in the system message field (online update is not available) (*1)

*1: The network environment settings must be performed. Refer to "Setup Network Environment" (page 125) .

REC sessions in the following conditions exist (online update is not available)

• The blocked copy path is being used and the session status of this path is not " Suspend" or " Error

Suspend"

• The mirror status of the REC buffer that is being used is "Recovering" and the session status is not "

Suspend" or " Error Suspend"

REC sessions in which status is not " Suspend" or " Error Suspend" exist (offline update is not available)

• A controller firmware that is older than the current one can be applied. An older controller firmware is only applied to restore the controller firmware back to the previous version after applying the new one. Do not

apply an older controller firmware for normal operation. Refer to "Required conditions when applying an older controller firmware" (page 234) for details.

If the application date is specified, the application schedule for the controller firmware can be deleted. Refer to

"Delete Controller Firmware Schedule" (page 234) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Apply Controller Firmware" (page 1102)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Apply Controller Firmware" (page 1304)

The procedure to apply controller firmware is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Apply Firmware] in [Action].

2 Select the controller firmware archive that is to be applied and the application date.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Controller Firmware Archive Settings

• Controller Firmware Archive

228

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

● Schedule Settings

• Apply Date

Click the [Next >>] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The screen that is displayed varies depending on the current controller firmware and the controller firmware that is to be applied.

■ When applying a controller firmware that is newer than the current controller firmware

The screen that is displayed varies depending on the selected apply date.

• When "Apply Now" is selected

 The [Apply (Immediate Apply)] screen appears. Proceed to

• When "Set Date" is selected

 The [Apply (Specific Date)] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 9 .

■ When applying a controller firmware that is older than the current controller firmware

 A confirmation screen to apply the older controller firmware appears.

Click the [OK] button.

The screen that is displayed varies depending on the selected apply date.

■ When "Apply Now" is selected

 The [Apply (Immediate Apply)] screen appears. Proceed to

mation field. Refer to "Firmware Maintenance" (page 683)

■ When "Set Date" is selected

 The [Apply (Specific Date)] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 9 .

229

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

Check the controller firmware application information and the application mode.

■ When the application mode is "Update"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When the application mode is "Update" (for applying the older controller firmware)

■ When the application mode is "Update & Reboot"

230

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

■ When the application mode is "Update & Reboot" (for applying the older controller firmware)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Apply Mode Check

• Apply Mode

7 Click the [Apply] button.

"Update" or "Update & Reboot" is displayed as the application mode. Which one is displayed depends on the storage system status. If "Update & Reboot" is displayed and the [Apply] button is clicked, the ETERNUS

DX/AF automatically reboots after the controller firmware is applied.

Click the [Rediscovery] button to display the latest information, the application mode, and the status check result.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

Never turn off the ETERNUS DX/AF while controller firmware is being applied. Wait until the application of the controller firmware is complete.

■ When the application mode is "Update"

231

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

■ When the application mode is "Update & Reboot"

 Application of the controller firmware starts.

9 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Firmware Maintenance] screen.

■ When "Apply Now" is selected

• When the application mode is "Update"

• When the application mode is "Update & Reboot"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When "Set Date" is selected

• When the application mode is "Update"

232

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

• When the application mode is "Update" (for applying the older controller firmware)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When the application mode is "Update & Reboot"

• When the application mode is "Update & Reboot" (for applying the older controller firmware)

233

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Required conditions when applying an older controller firmware

• The following conditions must be satisfied when applying an older controller firmware.

To apply the older controller firmware, the current controller firmware for the ETERNUS DX/AF must be

V10L4x or later.

The functions that were provided by the newer controller firmware must not be used.

If these functions are used, delete all the related data.

The controller firmware that is to be applied must be one of the following versions (online update is available).

• The dedicated controller firmware for SAN must be V10L30-0000 or later

• The unified firmware (*1) must be V10L33-0000 or later

*1: Controller firmware with built-in Unified Storage functions.

For SAN systems, firmware downgrades are supported only for SAN dedicated controller firmware.

For Unified Storage systems, firmware downgrades are supported only for the unified firmware.

• Application of an older controller firmware may not be possible depending on the customer's environment that does not allow the controller firmware to be applied.

Delete Controller Firmware Schedule

This function deletes the application schedule for the controller firmware.

If any of the following conditions occur, the reservation for deleting the schedule is automatically canceled.

• The application schedule for the controller firmware is reserved

Rebooting of the ETERNUS DX/AF

Power failure or power recovery

Machine down recovery

The system time in the ETERNUS DX/AF is changed to a time that is later than the reserved time

• Start time to apply the controller firmware

Other users perform system settings

Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• The start time to apply controller firmware (when the application mode is "Update")

The storage system is not in normal status

The battery status is not "Full Charge"

REC sessions with the following conditions appear

• A blocked copy path is being used and the session status is not "Suspend" or "Error Suspend"

• The mirror status of the REC buffer that is being used is "Recovering" and the session status is not

" Suspend" or " Error Suspend"

A storage migration path exists

RAID Group Expansion (LDE) is being used

A volume is being encrypted

• When the application schedule for the controller firmware is specified, the start time is displayed in the infor-

for details.

•

When controller firmware is applied, the application schedule can be set. Refer to "Apply Controller Firmware"

(page 227) for details.

234

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

1. System Management

Firmware Management

The procedure to delete the application schedule for controller firmware is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Delete Firmware Schedule] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the application schedule for the controller firmware starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Firmware Maintenance] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

235

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

2. Component Management

This chapter describes component management.

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Component can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Component

Assign Global Hot Spare

Release Global Hot Spare

Assign Dedicated Hot Spare

Release Dedicated Hot Spare

Turn on Locator Beacon/Turn off Locator Beacon

Add Drive Enclosure

Add Channel Adapter Port

NAS Recovery Management

Force Enable Module

Recover NAS System Volume

Export Performance Information

Clear Drive Error Statistics (All Drives)

Clear Drive Error Statistics (Selected Drive)

–

• Drives

Display function

• Controller Enclosure

• Drive Enclosure

• Channel Adapter

• Controller Module

• Controller Module (Performance)

• Channel Adapter Ports (Performance)

• Drives (Performance)

• Drive Error Statistics

236

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Assign Global Hot Spare

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Assign Global Hot Spare

This function registers a drive as a Global Hot Spare.

A Global Hot Spare is a spare drive (hot spare) that is registered in the RAID group instead of the failed drive when a drive failure occurs. A Global Hot Spare, unlike a Dedicated Hot Spare, can be used by all of the RAID groups.

If a drive fails, data copy (rebuild) to a Global Hot Spare starts automatically. The processes to be performed when

a drive fails vary depending on whether the copybackless function is enabled or disabled. Refer to "Behavior of the

ETERNUS DX/AF depending on the status of the Copybackless function" (page 237) for details.

Requirements for hot spares

• Drives must satisfy the following conditions.

The drive status is " Present"

The drives are not registered in any RAID group, TPP, FTRP, REC Disk Buffer, or EXCP

• Make sure to register a hot spare with the same or a larger capacity than the data drives. If the hot spare capacity is smaller than the data drive, the drive does not work as the hot spare.

• When a mix of Online disks, Nearline disks, SSDs, Online SEDs, Nearline SEDs, and SSD SEDs is installed together in the ETERNUS DX/AF, a hot spare of each type is required. Register the hot spare with the same capacity as the maximum capacity drive for each type.

• When multiple types of SSDs (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD/SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED) are installed together in the ETERNUS

DX/AF, a hot spare for each type is required. Register the hot spare with the same capacity as the maximum capacity SSD for each type.

• Hot spares can be registered in any slots of the CEs (*1) and the DEs.

*1: Hot spares can be registered in CEs for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/

DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F.

To use hot spares on a priority basis, make sure to register the Dedicated Hot Spare for a RAID group that contains important data. Refer to

"Assign Dedicated Hot Spare" (page 240)

for details.

• If the Dedicated Hot Spare is registered for a RAID group to which a failed drive belongs, the Dedicated

Hot Spare is used before the Global Hot Spare. If there is no unused Dedicated Hot Spare and the drive fails, the Global Hot Spare is used.

• Depending on the hot spare usage status, a hot spare with a different capacity and type from the failed drive may be used.

Behavior of the ETERNUS DX/AF depending on the status of the Copybackless function

If the Copybackless function (*1) is enabled, the hot spare is registered in the RAID group after rebuilding and is used as a data drive. The failed drive in the RAID group is changed to a hot spare after the rebuilding is complete.

If the failed drive is replaced with a normal drive, the replacement drive can be used as a hot spare.

If the Copybackless function is disabled and the failed drive is replaced with a normal drive, the data is copied back to the replacement drive. The hot spare that is used instead of the failed drive then returns as a spare drive.

To use the Copybackless function, the rebuild destination hot spare must satisfy some conditions. Refer to

Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

*1: "Copybackless" is a function that mounts a hot spare in the RAID group instead of the failed drive. The replaced drive is then used as a hot spare. This function makes Copyback unnecessary.

237

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Assign Global Hot Spare

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to register a Global Hot Spare is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select a drive that is to be used as a Global Hot Spare (multiple selections can be made) and click [Assign Global HS] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the Global Hot Spare starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Drives] screen.

End of procedure

238

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Release Global Hot Spare

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Release Global Hot Spare

This function releases a drive from being a Global Hot Spare.

A drive that is released from being a Global Hot Spare can be used as a data drive or Dedicated Hot Spare for a different RAID group.

This function cannot be used when the drive is already used as a hot spare.

The procedure to release a Global Hot Spare is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select a drive (multiple selections can be made) that is to be released from being a Global Hot

Spare and click [Release Global HS] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Releasing of the Global Hot Spare starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Drives] screen.

End of procedure

239

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Assign Dedicated Hot Spare

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Assign Dedicated Hot Spare

This function registers a drive as a Dedicated Hot Spare for a RAID group.

A Dedicated Hot Spare is a spare drive (hot spare) that is registered in the RAID group instead of the failed drive when a drive failure occurs. A Dedicated Hot Spare, unlike a Global Hot Spare, is used only for the specific RAID group.

If a drive fails, data copy (rebuild) to a Dedicated Hot Spare starts automatically.

Refer to "Requirements for hot spares" (page 237) for details about drives to be used as hot spares.

• Only one RAID group can be registered for each Dedicated Hot Spare. A Dedicated Hot Spare cannot be registered to multiple RAID groups.

• The Dedicated Hot Spares cannot be registered in the following RAID groups.

RAID groups that belong to TPPs

RAID groups that belong to Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs)

RAID groups that are registered as REC Disk Buffers

RAID groups that are registered as EXCPs

• When the failed drive and the Dedicated Hot Spare are switched, a Dedicated Hot Spare with the same capacity as the failed drive is used on a priority basis. If there is no Dedicated Hot Spare with the same capacity, a

Dedicated Hot Spare with a larger capacity than the failed drive is used.

• If the Dedicated Hot Spare is registered for a RAID group to which a failed drive belongs, the Dedicated Hot

Spare is used before the Global Hot Spare. If there is no unused Dedicated Hot Spare and the drive fails, the

Global Hot Spare is used.

• The behavior of the ETERNUS DX/AF varies depending on whether the Copybackless function is enabled or dis-

abled. Refer to "Behavior of the ETERNUS DX/AF depending on the status of the Copybackless function" (page

237)

for details.

The procedure to register a Dedicated Hot Spare is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select a drive (multiple selections can be made) that is to be used as a Dedicated Hot Spare and click [Assign Dedicated HS] in [Action].

Select the same type of drives that configure the target RAID group. If multiple types of drives are selected, the [Assign Dedicated HS] is not available.

When SSDs are used to configure the target RAID group, the type of SSD can be checked from the [RAID

Group Detail] screen. Refer to

"RAID Group Detail (Drives)" (page 914)

for details.

240

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Assign Dedicated Hot Spare

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select which RAID group to use the selected drive as a Dedicated Hot Spare for and click the

[Assign] button.

For "Drive Type" in the "Assign RAID Group" field, the drive type registered in the RAID group is displayed. If multiple drive types are used in the ETERNUS DX/AF, the drive type is displayed as described below.

• If only "Online" type drives are used or if both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives are used, "Online" is displayed.

• If only "Online SED" type drives are used or if both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives are used,

"Online SED" is displayed.

• "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• "SSD SED" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED).

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the Dedicated Hot Spare starts.

4 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Drives] screen.

End of procedure

241

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Release Dedicated Hot Spare

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Release Dedicated Hot Spare

This function releases a drive from being a Dedicated Hot Spare.

A drive that is released from being a Dedicated Hot Spare can be used as a data drive, Global Hot Spare, or Dedicated Hot Spare for a different RAID group.

This function cannot be used when the drive is already used as a hot spare.

The procedure to release a Dedicated Hot Spare is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select a drive (multiple selections can be made) that is to be released from being a Dedicated

Hot Spare and click [Release Dedicated HS] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Releasing of the Dedicated Hot Spare starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Drives] screen.

End of procedure

242

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Turn on Locator Beacon/Turn off Locator Beacon

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Turn on Locator Beacon/Turn off Locator Beacon

This function blinks or turns off the locator beacon of CE, CM, DE, or Frontend Enclosure (FE) (for the ETERNUS

DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3) to identify the component that requires maintenance.

In regards to the CE, DE, or FE, when instructing the LEDs to turn on/turn off, the following "IDENTIFY LED" lamps will blink/turn off.

Controlled LEDs

Designated target component

2.5" DE

3.5" DE

3.5" high density DE

LED controlled target component

The front cover of the CE

The CM in the rear of the CE (CM#0, CM#1)

The front cover of the DE

The IOM in the rear of the DE (IOM#0, IOM#1)

The front cover of the DE

The IOM in the rear of the DE (IOM#0, IOM#1)

The FEM in the rear of the DE (FEM#0, FEM#1)

The front cover of the FE

The FRT in the rear of the FE (FRT#0 - FRT#3)

• When the LEDs in the CE are instructed to turn on/off, the LEDs on the front cover of the CE and the LEDs for the CM on the rear of the CE are blinked/turned off. Note that the option to turn on/off the LEDs for a specific component is not available. Instructing the CE LEDs to turn on/off is performed by using the [Controller Enclosure Detail] screen. Refer to

"Drive Enclosure Detail" (page 762) for

for details.

• When the LEDs in the DE are instructed to turn on/off, the LEDs on the front cover of the DE, the IOM LEDs on the rear of the DE, and the FEMs on the rear of the DE (high density DE only) are blinked/turned off. Note that the option to turn on/off the LEDs for a specific component is not available. Instructing the DE LEDs to turn on/ off is performed by using the [Drive Enclosure Detail] screen. Refer to

details.

• When the LEDs in the FE are instructed to turn on/off, the LEDs on the front cover of the FE and the LEDs for the FRT on the rear of the FE are blinked/turned off. Note that the option to turn on/off the LEDs for a specific component is not available. Instructing the FE LEDs to turn on/off is performed by using the [Frontend Enclosure] screen. Refer to

"Frontend Enclosure" (page 720) for details.

• Turning the LED of the drive on or off is instructed from ETERNUS CLI. Refer to "set led" in the "ETERNUS CLI

User’s Guide" for details.

■ Turning on the LED

The procedure to turn on an LED is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Turn on locator beacon] in [Action].

If the LED is already turned on, [Turn on locator beacon] cannot be selected.

243

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Turn on Locator Beacon/Turn off Locator Beacon

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The locator beacon is turned on.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

■ Turning off the LED

The procedure to turn off an LED is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Turn off locator beacon] in [Action].

If the LED is already turned off, [Turn off locator beacon] cannot be selected.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The locator beacon is turned off.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

244

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Drive Enclosure

When hot expansion is performed, DEs are added without stopping the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Use ETERNUS Web GUI to install any DEs that are added.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When logged in using a user account with the "Admin" default role, this function is available with the ETER-

NUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, and the

ETERNUS AF250. To use this function with the other models, a user account with the "Maintainer" default role

(or "Maintenance Operation" policy) is required.

• When DE hot expansion is performed, multiple DEs can be added with a single operation.

• 2.5" DEs, 3.5" DEs, and 3.5" high density DEs can be added to the same ETERNUS DX. Note that 3.5" high density DEs cannot be added to the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3.

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250, only 2.5" DEs can be added. Note that 3.5" DEs and 3.5" high density DEs cannot be added.

• Be sure to use authorized expansion parts. If parts other than the expansion parts are used, operation is not guaranteed.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

The general status of the ETERNUS DX/AF is not "Normal"

The maximum number of DEs for each model is already installed (and the status of the following DEs is

" Normal")

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, DE#03

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3, DE#05

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3, DE#0A

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250, DE#01

DEs can be added regardless of whether drives are installed or not.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Drive Enclosure" (page 1104)

The procedure to expand a DE is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Drive Enclosure] in [Action].

 The start screen appears.

245

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Drive Enclosure

Specify the parameters.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Target Drive Enclosure

• Type

3 Click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Place DE on the rack] screen appears.

4 Add the DE according to the installation procedure and click the [Next >>] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Enable DE] screen appears.

246

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Drive Enclosure

After the DEs are activated, isolate IOM#1.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Disable IOM#1] screen appears.

Check the status of the target components and then click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Check Disable IOM#1 Progress] screen appears.

247

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Drive Enclosure

After IOM#1 is isolated, disconnect the SAS cables.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Detach Cable] screen appears.

Disconnect the SAS cables by following the disconnection procedure and then click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Connect Cable] screen appears.

248

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Drive Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Connect the SAS cables by following the connection procedure and then click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Enable IOM#1] screen appears.

10 Activate the IOM#1 according to the installation procedure and click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Finish] screen appears.

11 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Drive Enclosure] screen.

End of procedure

249

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Channel Adapter Port

This function enables a CA port to be added without stopping the ETERNUS DX100 S3.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• CA ports can be added for FC, iSCSI, SAS, FCoE, or NAS host interfaces.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

The general status of the ETERNUS DX100 S3 is not "Normal"

The minimum port type CA (*1) is not installed in the ETERNUS DX100 S3

*1: CAs with the minimum number of ports that can be installed in the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4 and the ETERNUS

DX60 S3/DX100 S3. 1-port types and 2-port types are available.

• This function is available when the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4 and the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3 has a minimum port type CA. Input the license key for each host interface with the minimum port type, and then add the port.

•

The following examples explain how the minimum port type CAs are displayed. Refer to "Channel Adapter"

(page 707) and

"Channel Adapter Detail" (page 746) for details.

For 1-port type

"2port" is displayed as the port type in the [Channel Adapter] screen. However, only one port is displayed in the [Internal Parts] tab of the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen.

For 2-port type

"4port" is displayed as the port type in the [Channel Adapter] screen. However, only two ports are displayed in the [Internal Parts] tab of the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Channel Adapter Port" (page 1104) .

The procedure to add a CA port is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Channel Adapter Port] in [Action].

 The [Start] screen appears.

250

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Channel Adapter Port

Click the [Next >>] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The displayed screen may vary depending on whether the installation of license key is required or not.

■ When the license key is not registered



The [Register license of additional Channel Adapter Port] screen appears. Proceed to Step 3 .

■ When the license key is already registered

 The [Define additional Channel Adapter port] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 5 .

3 Input the license key.

The main setting item is as follows.

● License Key

• License Key

4 Click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Register license of additional Channel Adapter Port] screen appears. The [Define additional Channel Adapter port] screen appears after the registration of the license key is complete.

251

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Add Channel Adapter Port

Add the CA port according to the displayed procedure and click the [Next >>] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The operations and displayed screen vary depending on the host interface type that is used.

■ For FC, FCoE, 10G iSCSI, or 10G-NAS host interface:

 The installation of SFP starts and the [Check SFP Installation] screen appears. After the installation of the

SFP is complete (when the CA includes an SFP), the installation of the CA port starts and the [Status

Check] screen appears. After the installation of the CA port is complete, the [Finish] screen appears.

■ For 1G iSCSI, SAS, or 1G-NAS host interface:

 The CA port installation starts and the [Status Check] screen appears. After the installation is complete, the [Finish] screen appears.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Channel Adapter] screen.

End of procedure

252

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

NAS Recovery Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

NAS Recovery Management

This section describes NAS recovery management.

NAS recovery management provides the following functions:

•

Force Enable Module

•

Recover NAS System Volume

Force Enable Module

This function forces the component to be enabled without replacing it (called "force enable" hereinafter).

• Perform the force enable of the NAS Engine by following the instructions given by a maintenance engineer.

• Force enable can be performed only on one component at a time.

• This function cannot be used when a component whose state is other than " Error" is selected.

This function is available for "NAS-CA" and "NAS Engine".

The procedure to perform force enable is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the component to perform the force enable on, and click [Force Enable] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The force enable starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when the target component was selected in Step

End of procedure

Recover NAS System Volume

This function recovers the NAS system volumes (RootFS) that are used by the target NAS Engine and forcibly enables the NAS Engine.

A "RootFS" is a volume that stores the root file system of the NAS Engine in each CM. If a malfunction occurs in the

NAS Engine due to an inconsistency between the both RootFSs, use this function to recover the RootFS and forcibly enable the NAS Engine again.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Execute this function according to the instructions given by a maintenance engineer.

• This function is available when the following target NAS system volumes exist.

The target NAS system volume in CM#0 is $SYSVOL2

The target NAS system volume in CM#1 is $SYSVOL3

253

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Export Performance Information

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to recover the NAS system volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the NAS Engine that is to be recovered and click [Recover NAS System Volume] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Recovery of the NAS system volumes starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Controller Module] screen.

End of procedure

Export Performance Information

This function exports the following performance information in a single operation and saves it as a text file.

• Performance (Host I/O)

• Performance (Advanced Copy)

• Performance (CA)

• Performance (CM)

• Performance (Drive)

• Performance (PCIe Flash Module)

Refer to "Export Performance Information" (page 331)

for details.

254

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

2. Component Management

Clear Drive Error Statistics (All Drives)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Clear Drive Error Statistics (All Drives)

This function deletes the error information from all of the drives.

This function can be performed without selecting the drive to delete error information or without the error information that is to be deleted.

The procedure to delete error information from all the drives is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Clear All Error] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the error information from all the drives starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Drive Error Statistics] screen.

End of procedure

Clear Drive Error Statistics (Selected Drive)

This function deletes the error information from the selected drive.

This function can only be performed when an error occurs in a drive.

The procedure to delete error information from the selected drive is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the drive to delete error information from (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Clear Error] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the error information from the selected drive starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Drive Error Statistics] screen.

End of procedure

255

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

3. Volume Management

This chapter describes volume management.

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Volume can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Volume

TPV Management

Expand Thin Provisioning Volume

Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity

Cancel Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity

Start Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Stop Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Reconfigure NAS Volume

Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

SDV/SDPV Management

Force Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

Initialize Snap Data Volume

Start RAID Migration

Stop RAID Migration

Stop External Volume Data Synchronization

Forbid Advanced Copy

Permit Advanced Copy

Release Reservation

Modify Cache Parameters

Export Cache Parameters

Export Performance Information

Set ALUA

Set Volume QoS

Set Volume QoS Pattern

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

Delete External LU Information

–

Display function

• Volume (Basic Information)

•

• Volume (Basic Information)

•

• Snapshot

•

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Volume (Basic Information)

Reservation

Performance Information (Host I/O)

Performance Information (QoS)

Volume (Basic Information)

256

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create Volume

This function creates new volumes.

The following types of volumes can be created.

• Standard

The most commonly used volumes that are created in RAID groups or External RAID Groups.

• Wide Striping Volume (WSV)

Volumes that are configured by multiple RAID group areas that are concatenated with striping to improve performance.

• Thin Provisioning Volume (TPV)

Volumes that are created in Thin Provisioning Pools. TPVs can also be used as the copy destination for SnapOPC or SnapOPC+.

• Snap Data Volume (SDV)

Copy destination volumes for SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ that are created in RAID groups.

• Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV)

Volumes used as expansion areas for SDV that are created in RAID groups.

• NAS Volume

Volumes used for NAS system operation (hereinafter referred to as "NAS user volume") in the Unified Storage environment that are created in TPPs.

• Deduplication/Compression Volume

Volumes that have Deduplication, Compression, or both enabled. The volumes are created in TPPs that have the same Deduplication/Compression setting.

• The ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3 does not support the encryption function.

• Volumes are formatted automatically when they are created in RAID groups or TPPs. If the error message "An internal resource is insufficient." appears after volumes are created, a format of volumes may have failed.

Check the "Status" of the created volumes in the [Volume] screen. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page

799)

for details. Volumes in the " Readying" state have not been formatted. Wait until the currently running format processes are complete and reformat the relevant volumes. Refer to

"Format Volume" (page 283) for

details.

• The maximum number of volumes that can be created is reduced in the following conditions:

When TPPs exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF

When concatenated volumes exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF

When REC Disk Buffers exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF

When EXCPs exist in the ETERNUS DX

When volumes undergoing RAID migration exist

When volumes undergoing balancing TPV exist

When the Automated Storage Tiering feature is enabled

When Deduplication, Compression, or both are enabled for the TPP

When the Veeam Storage Integration License is registered

257

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Volumes are formatted automatically when they are created in RAID groups or TPPs. Standard, WSV, TPV, and

SDV can be accessed from the host when host affinity is set after volume creation. NAS user volumes can be accessed from the host when NAS interface is set and shared folder is created after volume creation.

• External Volumes are not formatted after a volume creation. They inherit the External LU Information of the

External RAID Group (or the External Drive).

• When a volume is created manually (*1), the volume number can be specified. Note that volumes have to be created one at a time. Multiple volumes cannot be created when specifying the volume number for a new volume.

*1: Volumes can be created manually for WSVs or when drives are selected manually for Standard type volumes, SDVs,

SDPVs, TPVs, NAS volumes, or Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

Refer to the following sections for details:

•

"Manually selecting destinations to create Standard type volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs" (page 261)

•

"Manually selecting destinations to create TPVs" (page 264)

•

"Manually selecting destinations to create NAS user volumes" (page 272)

•

"Manually selecting destinations to create Deduplication/Compression Volumes" (page 276)

•

"Creating WSVs" (page 266)

• When "Automatic" is selected to create a volume or when "Manual" is selected but a volume number is not specified, the volume number is allocated when a volume is created from the smallest unused decimal number in ascending order.

• When "Manual" is selected, create the specified number of volumes by using the maximum free space that is available in the RAID group. In this case, inputting the volume capacity is not required. "Standard", "WSV", and

"SDPV" type volumes are created by using the maximum free space.

•

This function cannot be used to create an ODX Buffer volume. Refer to "Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 651)

for details.

• The EXC set state of the ETERNUS DX, and the set states of EXC and EXCP for each volume do not cooperate.

Regardless of the set state of the EXC for the ETERNUS DX, the default state of EXC and EXCP for each volume is

"Enable". Note that External Volumes do not use EXC or EXCP. Refer to

"Setup Extreme Cache" (page 85) for

details about the EXC setting for the ETERNUS DX.

•

The secondary cache (EXC or EXCP) that is being used in the ETERNUS DX can be checked. Refer to "System Settings" (page 694) for details.

• Enabling or disabling EXC for each volume can be performed with ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

•

Enabling or disabling EXCP can be performed with ETERNUS Web GUI. Refer to "Modify Cache Parameters"

(page 326) for details.

• In the following sections, "volumes" include "External Volumes" if differentiation is not specifically required.

Refer to

"External Volume specification" (page 805) for details.

• In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

258

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Creating Standard Type Volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs

This function creates Standard type volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs. Detailed information on creating Standard type volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs is provided below.

• When creating volumes in the RAID group

There are two methods to select a RAID group; "Automatic" and "Manual".

Up to 128 volumes can be created in a RAID group. Note that "The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model" (page 1111) is applied to the total number of volumes in RAID groups, External

RAID Groups, and Pools (TPPs and FTRPs).

For "RAID6-FR" type RAID groups, only "Standard" volumes can be created.

To create an SDV or SDPV, the Advanced Copy license is required.

The following shows the conditions for creating SDPVs.

• The volume capacity must be 2TB or less

• The volume capacity must be a multiple of Snap Data Pool Element (SDPE) capacity (1GB/2GB/4GB) (*1)

*1: The current SDPE capacity can be checked in the [Snap Data Pool] screen under the [Advanced Copy] navigation.

Creating SDPVs in RAID groups with the same RAID level, drive type, and number of drives is recommended.

• When creating volumes in the External RAID Group

Select the "Enable" checkbox in the "Use External Drive" field.

The only available selection method for External RAID Groups is "Manual".

For External RAID Groups, only "Standard" volumes can be created. For the created External Volumes,

"Usage" and "Usage Details" are "Migration".

The number of volumes cannot be specified when creating External Volumes in the External RAID Group.

One External Volume is created in one External RAID Group.

• For details on the setting items according to each volume type, refer to

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Automatic"" (page 1120) or

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Manual""

For general notes and remarks regarding the creation of volumes, refer to "Caution" and "Note" in "Create Volume"

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Volume" (page 1105) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Volume" (page 1305) .

■ Automatically selecting destinations to create Standard type volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

259

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select "Standard", "Snap Data Volume", or "Snap Data Pool Volume" for "Type" and select "Automatic" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection".

Specify the detailed information of new volumes.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

• Capacity of source volume only SDV

• Data Integrity

● Automatic Setting

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

• Key Group

• Number of Volumes

• Start of Suffix

• Digits of Suffix

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

260

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Manually selecting destinations to create Standard type volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs

Procedure

Click [Create] in [Action].

2 Select "Standard", "Snap Data Volume", or "Snap Data Pool Volume" for "Type" and select "Manual" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection".

Specify the detailed information of new volumes and select the RAID group or External RAID

Group in which the volumes are to be created.

■ When volumes are created in a RAID group

■ When volumes are created in an External RAID Group

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

• Capacity of source volume only SDV

261

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Use External Drive

• Data Integrity

● Manual Setting

• Use all Largest Free Space

• Start of Suffix

• Digits of Suffix

• Volume No.

• Number of Volumes (*1)

• Checkbox to select an External RAID Group

*1: Specify the value of volumes in the "Number of Volumes" field for the RAID group in which the volumes are to be created.

• When specifying the volume number, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the volume number.

• When using the maximum free space in the RAID group to create volumes without specifying the capacity, select the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space", and then input the number of volumes. This setting is available for "Standard" and "SDPV" type volumes.

• For the "Drive Type" field, the type of drive that configures the RAID group is displayed.

If multiple drive types are used in the RAID group, the drive type is displayed as described below.

If only "Online" type drives are used or if both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives are used, "Online" is displayed.

If only "Online SED" type drives are used or if both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives are used, "Online SED" is displayed.

"SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

"SSD SED" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED).

• The External RAID Group list is displayed only when all of the conditions described below are satisfied.

Select External RAID Groups for creating the volume.

"Standard" is selected for "Type"

The "Enable" checkbox in the "Use External Drive" field is selected

• Select the checkbox to the left of "RAID Group Name" to select all External RAID Groups.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• Logical Device Expansion (LDE) is being performed in the target RAID group

• The RAID group or the External RAID Group is blocked

• The status of the RAID group is " Broken"

• The status of the External RAID Group is other than " Available"

• No External RAID Groups are selected (when "Use External Drive" is enabled)

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

262

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Creating TPVs

This function creates TPVs. Detailed information on creating TPVs is provided below.

• Volumes are created in TPPs.

• There are two methods to select a TPP; "Automatic" and "Manual".

• When a TPP is created, a control volume is created for each RAID group that configures a TPP. Therefore, the maximum number of volumes that can be created in a TPP is calculated by using the following formula.

Number of volumes that can be created in a TPP =

Maximum number of volumes - Number of RAID groups that configure the relevant TPP

Note that "The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model" (page 1111)

is applied to the total number of volumes in RAID groups, External RAID Groups, and Pools (TPPs and FTRPs).

• When creating TPVs, "Enable" the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to

"Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554)

for details.

• The maximum total capacity of the TPVs that can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF depends on the maximum pool capacity that is specified with the [Set Thin Provisioning] function. The currently specified maximum pool capacity is displayed in the [Settings] screen under the [Thin Provisioning] navigation. Refer to

"Settings (Thin

Provisioning)" (page 948)

for details.

• For details on the setting items according to each volume type, refer to

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Automatic"" (page 1120) or

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Manual""

Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925) for details.

If the "Provisioned Capacity" (or the total logical capacity) of the created volumes in the TPP exceeds the total capacity of the creation destination TPP (or if the "Provisioned Rate" (or the capacity rate) exceeds "100 %"), a warning message appears in the result screen. Check the TPP used state and add drives to expand the TPP capacity as required. Check the [Thin Provisioning Pool Detail] screen for "Provisioned Rate". Refer to

"Thin Provisioning

For general notes and remarks regarding the creation of volumes, refer to "Caution" and "Note" in "Create Volume"

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Volume" (page 1105) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Volume" (page 1305) .

■ Automatically selecting destinations to create TPVs

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

263

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select "Thin Provisioning Volume" for "Type" and "Automatic" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection".

Specify the detailed information of new volumes.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

• Allocation

● Automatic Setting

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

• Number of Volumes

• Start of Suffix

• Digits of Suffix

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

■ Manually selecting destinations to create TPVs

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

End of procedure

264

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select "Thin Provisioning Volume" for "Type" and "Manual" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection".

Specify the detailed information of new volumes and select the TPP in which the volumes are to be created.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

• Allocation

● Manual Setting

• Start of Suffix

• Digits of Suffix

• Volume No.

• Number of Volumes (*1)

*1: Specify the value in the "Number of Volumes" field for the TPP in which the volumes are to be created.

• When specifying the "Volume No.", select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the number.

• For the "Drive Type" field, the type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

If multiple drive types are used in the TPP, the drive type is displayed as described below.

If only "Online" type drives are used or if both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives are used, "Online" is displayed.

If only "Online SED" type drives are used or if both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives are used, "Online SED" is displayed.

"SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

"SSD SED" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED).

• The "Encryption by CM" setting cannot be changed.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

RAID groups that configure a TPP are blocked

The status of RAID groups that configure a TPP is " Broken"

265

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Creating WSVs

This function creates WSVs.

WSVs are created by concatenating volumes that are the same size in multiple RAID groups. Input the volume information for WSVs and the selection information for RAID groups, and specify the RAID groups that are to be concatenated.

RAID group capacity expansion for RAID groups which configure WSVs is not available (LDE cannot be performed).

Detailed information on creating WSVs is provided below.

• The only available selection method for RAID groups is "Manual".

• The conditions for RAID groups to configure WSVs are as follows:

The RAID level (High Performance (RAID1+0)/High Capacity (RAID5)/High Reliability (RAID6)/Reliability

(RAID5+0)/Mirroring (RAID1)/Striping (RAID0)) must be the same

The number of member drives in the RAID group must be the same

The Stripe Depth value must be the same

The drive type (Online/Nearline/SSD/Online SED/Nearline SED/SSD SED) must be the same

(Since the access performance of WSVs is reduced, selecting the same drive type for the "Drive Type" in the

"Select RAID Group Information" field is recommended. Selecting "Online/Nearline" and "Online SED/Nearline SED" is not recommended.)

The SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD/SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED) must be the same

(Since the access performance of WSVs is reduced, using the same SSD type is recommended. The SSD type that configures a RAID group can be checked in the [RAID Group Detail] screen ([Drive] tab).)

The disk speed must be the same

(RAID groups configured with different speed drives can be selected. Note that this reduces the access performance for WSVs. It is recommended to select the same speed disks. The speed of the drives that configure a RAID group can be checked in the [RAID Group Detail] screen ([Drive] tab).)

The sector format (Advanced Format (AF) compliant/non-AF-compliant) must be the same

(Selecting RAID groups that are configured with drives of the same sector format is recommended.)

The key group setting state must be the same

(If the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", "SSD SED", or "Online SED/Nearline SED", RAID groups can be selected regardless of the key group setting (enabled or disabled). However, selecting the same key group setting state is recommended. The key group setting state can be checked with the "Encryption" field in the [Select RAID Groups] screen.)

The sequential unused area must be the same size or bigger than the capacity of the volumes that are to be concatenated

• The number of concatenated RAID groups is from 2 to 64.

• The WSV capacity is from 24MB to 128TB.

• To expand the WSV capacity, use the RAID migration function instead of the LUN concatenation function. Refer

to "Start RAID Migration" (page 307)

for details.

• For details on the setting items according to each volume type, refer to

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Manual"" (page 1121) .

266

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For general notes and remarks regarding the creation of volumes, refer to "Caution" and "Note" in "Create Volume"

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Volume" (page 1105) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Volume" (page 1305) .

The procedure to create WSVs is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

2 Select "Wide Striping Volume" for "Type".

Specify the detailed information of new volumes and selection information for RAID groups.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

● Volume Information

• Use all Largest Free Space

• Number of Volumes

• Start of Suffix (When "Automatic" is selected for "Concatenation Order")

• Digits of Suffix (When "Automatic" is selected for "Concatenation Order")

• Volume No.

● Select RAID Group Information

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

• Number of Member Drives

267

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When specifying the volume number, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the volume number.

• When using the maximum free space in the selected RAID group to create WSVs without specifying the capacity, select the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space", and then input the number of

WSVs.

3 Click the [Select RAID Groups] button.

 The [Select RAID Groups] screen appears.

Select the RAID group that is to be concatenated (multiple selections can be made).

The main setting item is as follows.

● Select RAID Groups

• Checkbox to select RAID groups

For the "Drive Type" field, the type of drive that configures the RAID group is displayed.

If multiple drive types are used in the RAID group, the drive type is displayed as described below.

• If only "Online" type drives are used or if both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives are used, "Online" is displayed.

• If only "Online SED" type drives are used or if both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives are used,

"Online SED" is displayed.

• "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• "SSD SED" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED).

268

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The "Number of Concatenation RAID Groups" field is left blank, "1" is specified, or a value that is "65" or more is specified

• The maximum free space in the selected RAID group is smaller than the volume size that is to be concatenated

• LDE is being performed in the target RAID group

• The RAID group is blocked

• The status of the RAID group is " Broken"

To change the concatenation order of the RAID groups, select "Manual" for "Concatenation Order" in the

Volume Information field. Click the [Concatenation Order] link to display the [Setting Concatenation Order] screen. The concatenation order of the RAID groups can be changed in the [Setting Concatenation Order] screen.

6 After selecting RAID groups is complete, click the [Create] button.

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Creating NAS User Volumes

This function creates NAS user volumes. Detailed information on creating NAS user volumes is provided below.

• NAS user volumes can only be created in a Unified Storage environment using the following models:

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

269

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Volumes are created in TPP.

• There are two methods to select a TPP; "Automatic" and "Manual".

• The NAS user volumes (TPVs for the NAS environment) and TPVs for the SAN environment can be created in the same TPP.

• There are two types of NAS volumes; NAS user volumes and NAS backup volumes. The NAS backup volume cannot be created with ETERNUS Web GUI. To create a NAS backup volume, use ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage

Cruiser. The number of NAS backup volumes that can be created for each model is the same as NAS user volumes.

• The maximum number and the capacity of NAS user volumes for each model are described below. The total capacity of NAS user volumes (TPVs for the NAS environment), NAS backup volumes, and NAS system volumes

(17GB) must not exceed the maximum pool capacity that is specified for the ETERNUS DX. Refer to "Settings

(Thin Provisioning)" (page 948)

for details.

Model

ETERNUS DX100 S4

ETERNUS DX200 S4

ETERNUS DX500 S4

ETERNUS DX600 S4

ETERNUS DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S3

The maximum number of

NAS user volumes

2 (*2)

4 (*2)

1 (*3)

2 (*2)

2 (*3)

4 (*2)

The NAS user volume capacity (*1)

400 GB - 128 TB (*4)

The smallest volume capacity that is available for the user is 100 GB.

When the first volume is created, an additional "17 GB" is used for the system volume.

ETERNUS DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S3

*1: 300GB of the created volume is used as the system area. The capacity that can be used is "specified capacity - 300GB".

*2: The maximum number of NAS user volumes when "Memory Extension" described below is installed.

• ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

16GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L53 or later)

• ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

32GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L33 or later)

*3: The maximum number of NAS user volumes when "Memory Extension" described below is installed.

• ETERNUS DX100 S3

8GB/CM

• ETERNUS DX200 S3

16GB/CM

*4: The maximum NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size vary depending on the specified "NAS FS Block

Size" when creating volumes. The new volume capacity must not be more than the maximum NAS user volume capacity.

Maximum NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size of each "NAS FS Block Size"

Maximum NAS user volume capacity

Maximum file size (*5)

8KB

32TB

1TB

NAS FS Block Size

32KB

128TB

4TB

256KB

128TB

32TB

*5: The file size indicates the size of the user data that is created in the shared folder.

• When the NAS user volume is created, three system volumes are automatically created per storage system in the same TPP. The following NAS system volumes are created:

Volume name

$SYSVOL1

$SYSVOL2

$SYSVOL3

System

Usage Usage Details

NAS FS Management

NAS CM#0 System

NAS CM#1 System

1GB

8GB

Capacity

270

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Only one NAS user volume can be created at a time.

• NAS volumes are displayed as "TPV" in the volume list screen. TPVs for SAN and the NAS volumes (TPVs for NAS)

can be identified by "Usage" and "Usage Details". Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799) for details.

• The NAS expanded system volumes for storing the NAS monitoring logs cannot be created from ETERNUS Web

GUI. Execute the "create volume" CLI command. NAS expanded system volumes can be checked in "Usage" and

"Usage Details". Refer to

"Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827) for details.

• For details on the setting items according to each volume type, refer to

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Automatic"" (page 1120) or

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Manual""

The ETERNUS DX general status (detail) can be checked in the [Storage] screen. Refer to "Storage (Basic

• When the NAS user volume creation is not completed successfully, perform the following actions.

Procedures for when the NAS user volume creation is not completed successfully

(1) Confirm that the general status (detail) of the ETERNUS DX and the status of the NAS Engine are both

" Normal". If the status is not " Normal", the ETERNUS DX/AF requires maintenance.

Information)" (page 698) for details.

The NAS Engine status can be checked in the [Internal Parts] tab of the [Controller Module Detail]

screen. Refer to "Controller Module Detail" (page 742)

for details.

(2) If the NAS user volume was created, delete the relevant volume. If the NAS user volume cannot be deleted, the ETERNUS DX requires maintenance.

For the NAS user volume, "File" is displayed as the usage in the volume list screen ("NAS Data" is dis-

played as the usage details of the volume detailed information screen). Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

and "Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

for details.

(3) Create the NAS user volume again. Confirm that the volume creation was successfully completed.

• If the "Provisioned Capacity" (or the total logical capacity) of the created volumes in the TPP exceeds the total capacity of the creation destination TPP (or if the "Provisioned Rate" (or the capacity rate) exceeds "100 %"), a warning message appears in the result screen. Check the TPP used state and add drives to expand the TPP capacity as required. Check the [Thin Provisioning Pool Detail] screen for "Provisioned Rate". Refer to

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925)

for details.

For general notes and remarks regarding the creation of volumes, refer to "Caution" and "Note" in "Create Volume"

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Volume" (page 1105) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Volume" (page 1305) .

■ Automatically selecting destinations to create NAS user volumes

Procedure

Click [Create] in [Action].

271

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

Select "NAS Volume" for "Type" and "Automatic" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection".

Specify the detailed information of new volumes.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

• Allocation

• NAS FS Block Size

● Automatic Setting

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

If the NAS user volume creation fails, refer to

"Procedures for when the NAS user volume creation is not completed successfully" (page 271) .

End of procedure

■ Manually selecting destinations to create NAS user volumes

Procedure

Click [Create] in [Action].

272

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select "NAS Volume" for "Type" and "Manual" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection".

Specify the detailed information of new volumes and select the TPP in which the volumes are to be created.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

• Allocation

• NAS FS Block Size

● Manual Setting

• Volume No.

• Radio button to select a TPP

• When specifying the volume number, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the volume number.

• For the "Drive Type" field, the type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

If multiple drive types are used in the TPP, the drive type is displayed as described below.

If only "Online" type drives are used or if both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives are used, "Online" is displayed.

If only "Online SED" type drives are used or if both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives are used, "Online SED" is displayed.

"SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

"SSD SED" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED).

• The "Encryption by CM" setting cannot be changed.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

RAID groups that configure a TPP are blocked

The status of RAID groups that configure a TPP is " Broken"

Click the [Create] button.

273

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

If the NAS user volume creation fails, refer to

"Procedures for when the NAS user volume creation is not completed successfully" (page 271) .

End of procedure

Creating Deduplication/Compression Volumes

This function creates Deduplication/Compression Volumes. Detailed information on creating Deduplication/Compression Volumes is provided below.

• Deduplication/Compression Volumes can be created if all of the following conditions are satisfied.

The ETERNUS DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX200 S3, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/

DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, or the ETERNUS AF250/AF650 is used

The Thin Provisioning function is enabled

The Thin Provisioning Pool capacity is not in a depleted state

Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled

The Deduplication, Compression, or both (hereinafter referred to as "Deduplication/Compression setting of the TPP") are enabled for the TPP where the Deduplication/Compression Volumes are to be created

The DEDUP_SYS Volume status in the TPP where the Deduplication/Compression Volumes are to be created is not " Readying", " Not Ready", " Broken", or " Data Lost".

• Deduplication/Compression Volumes are TPVs for SAN that have Deduplication, Compression, or both enabled.

The volumes are created in TPPs that have the same Deduplication/Compression setting.

• There are two methods to select a TPP; "Automatic" and "Manual".

• Deduplication, Compression, or both for data are performed synchronously with the host I/O.

• For the Deduplication/Compression Volume, a physical capacity as large as the chunk size is used for each volume regardless of the host I/O when the volume is created. Make sure to check the free space in the TPP before creating the volume.

• The total logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes that can be created by customers is limited to the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the TPP (*1).

*1: If the efficiency of the Deduplication/Compression function cannot be estimated, setting the total logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes smaller than the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume is recommended.

If the efficiency of the Deduplication/Compression function can be estimated, the total logical capacity of the

Deduplication/Compression Volumes in a TPP varies depending on the number of RAID groups created in that TPP.

• If the TPP is configured with two or more RAID groups, the maximum logical volume capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes must be equal to or less than ten times the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the relevant TPP.

• If the TPP is configured with one RAID group, the maximum logical volume capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes must be equal to or less than five times the logical capacity of the

DEDUP_SYS Volume in the relevant TPP.

• If the Deduplication/Compression setting for TPPs is enabled, the following volumes can be created in the same

TPP.

Deduplication/Compression target volumes

Volumes that have the same Deduplication/Compression setting as the TPP

Non-Deduplication/Compression target volumes

TPVs that have Deduplication and Compression disabled

274

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If both volumes exist, the performance of the non-Deduplication/Compression target volumes (TPVs) may be degraded. To reduce performance degradation of non-Deduplication/Compression target volumes (TPVs), do not create these volumes in the same TPP.

• If Deduplication/Compression Volumes larger than the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume are deleted or formatted repeatedly, creation of the Deduplication/Compression Volume may fail due to a temporary capacity shortage. If this error occurs, wait a few minutes before starting this function.

• Non-Deduplication/Compression target volumes (TPVs) can be changed to Deduplication/Compression target volumes (Deduplication/Compression Volumes). Also, Deduplication/Compression target volumes (Deduplication/Compression Volumes) can be changed to non-Deduplication/Compression target volumes. Refer to

"Start

RAID Migration" (page 307) for details.

• "Provisioned Capacity" for TPVs that are created in the ETERNUS DX/AF does not include the Deduplication/Compression Volume capacity. Refer to

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925) for details.

• "Data Reduction Rate" for TPPs where the Deduplication/Compression Volumes are created can be checked.

Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922)

for details.

• For details on the setting items according to each volume type, refer to

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Automatic"" (page 1120) or

"Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Manual""

For general notes and remarks regarding the creation of volumes, refer to "Caution" and "Note" in "Create Volume"

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Volume" (page 1105) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Volume" (page 1305) .

■ Automatically selecting destinations to create Deduplication/Compression Volumes

Procedure

Click [Create] in [Action].

2 Select the following items to specify the detailed information of new volumes.

• "Thin Provisioning Volume" for "Type"

• "Enable" for "Deduplication", "Compression", or both

• "Automatic" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection"

275

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

● Automatic Setting

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

• Number of Volumes

• Start of Suffix

• Digits of Suffix

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The Deduplication status of the TPP where volumes are to be created is "Disable", "Error", or a "-"

(hyphen)

• The Compression status of the TPP where volumes are to be created is "Disable", "Error", or a "-"

(hyphen)

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

■ Manually selecting destinations to create Deduplication/Compression Volumes

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

276

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select the following items to specify the detailed information of new volumes and select the TPP in which the volumes are to be created.

• "Thin Provisioning Volume" for "Type"

• "Enable" for "Deduplication", "Compression", or both

• "Manual" for "RAID Group / TPP Selection"

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Volume

• Name

• Capacity

● Manual Setting

• Start of Suffix

• Digits of Suffix

• Volume No.

• Number of Volumes (*1)

*1: Specify the value in the "Number of Volumes" field for the TPP in which the volumes are to be created.

When specifying the volume number, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the volume number.

• The "Encryption by CM" setting cannot be changed.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

The Deduplication status of the selected TPP is "Disable", "Error", or a "-" (hyphen)

The Compression status of the selected TPP is "Disable", "Error", or a "-" (hyphen)

RAID groups that configure a TPP are blocked

The status of RAID groups that configure a TPP is " Broken"

277

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Create Volume

Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Volume creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

278

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Delete Volume

This function deletes volumes.

Standard type volumes, WSVs, TPVs, and SDVs can be deleted.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When a volume is deleted, access to data in the target volume is not allowed.

• When NAS user volumes are deleted, Quota information is also deleted.

• This function cannot be used if the control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 while TPVs are being deleted. (*1)

• If NAS volumes (NAS user volumes or NAS backup volumes) are deleted while a meta cache redistribution is being performed, the process for this function may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes.

• The following volumes cannot be deleted:

Volumes that are registered in a LUN group

Volumes that are mapped with applications other than ETERNUS Web GUI

Volumes (migration source volumes or migration destination volumes) undergoing RAID migration

Volumes (copy source volumes or copy destination volumes) undergoing Advanced Copy (*1)

*1: If the data merge process has not been performed, Veeam Snapshot Volumes can be deleted even if the Advanced

Copy is being executed.

Volumes undergoing TPV balancing (work volumes and target TPVs for balancing)

Volumes undergoing FTRP balancing (work volumes)

Volumes with a Storage Migration path

ODX Buffer volumes undergoing ODX

NAS user volumes that contain shared folders

NAS user volumes with snapshot settings

Snapshot destination SDV

Volumes used for the Storage Cluster function

Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the TPP that includes the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the

" Readying", " Not Ready", " Broken", or " Data Lost" state

• By repeating creation and deletion of volumes, free space may be dispersed in the RAID group.

• Up to 128 volumes can be deleted at once.

• Multiple volumes whose "Usage" is "Veeam" cannot be selected with a single operation. In this case, delete one "Veeam" volume at a time.

• When deleting SDPVs, refer to

"Delete Snap Data Pool Volume" (page 304)

or "Force Delete Snap Data Pool

Volume" (page 305)

• This function can be used to delete an ODX Buffer volume.

• This function can be used to delete an External Volume that is created in the External RAID Group. If External

Volumes are deleted, the External LU Information that is inherited from the external storage system is also deleted.

• If External Volumes are deleted, delete the following items. Refer to

"Delete External RAID Group" (page 551)

and "Delete External Drive" (page 206) for details.

External RAID Group that was used to create the External Volume

External Drive that was used to create the External RAID Group

• This function can delete NAS user volumes, NAS backup volumes, and snapshot destination SDVs. The NAS system volumes must be deleted by ETERNUS CLI.

279

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Delete Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When the Deduplication/Compression setting for the TPP is disabled, Deduplication/Compression System Volumes in the relevant TPP are automatically deleted. Refer to

"Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 575)

for details.

• Use the [Volume] screen to check whether the volume is used for the Storage Cluster function. Refer to

LUN Group] screen in Step (3)

for details.

• When volumes are registered in LUN groups, or a message "The specified volumes have already been mapped.

They cannot be deleted." is displayed, use the following procedure to delete the volumes from LUN groups.

(1) Check all the LUN groups in which volumes are registered in the [LUN Group] screen under the [Volume] navigation.

(2) Select a LUN group in which the volume is registered in the [LUN Group] screen under the [Connectivity] navigation, and then click [Modify LUN Group] in [Action].

(3) Delete "allocation information of host LUN and volume number" in the [Modify LUN Group] screen.

(4) When a volume is registered in multiple LUN groups, repeat

Step (2) and Step (3)

(LUN groups in which a volume is registered can be checked with the [LUN Group] field in the [Modify

(5) If the location information of the port ("CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w" or "CM#y CA#z Port#w") is displayed in the [LUN Group] field in

Step (1)

Step (3)

, the volume is mapped with applications other than ETER-

NUS Web GUI. Use the relevant application to delete the volume from the port mapping information.

(6) Confirm that "LUN Group Count" is "0" in the [LUN Group] field under the [Volume] navigation.

(7) Use this function to delete volumes.

It is not necessary to delete a host affinity when deleting volumes with the host affinity setting from a LUN group. If all of the volumes in a LUN group are not needed, delete the host affinity, and then click the [Delete

LUN Group] button to delete the LUN group with volumes in

Step (2) .

The procedure to delete a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete] in [Action].

[Delete] cannot be clicked under the following conditions:

• The type of the selected volume is "FTV"

• NAS system volumes are selected

• The Deduplication/Compression System Volumes are selected

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of a volume starts.

When a TPV is deleted, the physical allocating capacity of the relevant TPV is formatted. The physical allocating capacity is released after formatting is complete.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

280

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Rename Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Rename Volume

This function changes the volume name.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, up to 1024 volumes can be renamed at a time. Note that this limitation does not apply to other models.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Rename Volume" (page 1125) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Rename Volume" (page 1306) .

The procedure to rename a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume that is to be renamed (multiple selections can be made) and click [Rename] in [Action].

[Rename] cannot be clicked under the following conditions:

• The usage of the selected volume is "System"

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the number of selected volumes exceeds 1024

Specify the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Rename Setting

• Name

• Start of Suffix

• Digits of Suffix

3 Click the [Rename] button.

281

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Rename Volume

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Renaming of the volume starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

282

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Format Volume

This function formats the selected volume. The data stored in the volume will be deleted by formatting.

Standard type volumes, WSVs, SDVs, SDPVs, TPVs, and FTVs can be formatted.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When formatting a TPV where the allocation method is "Thin", the physical allocation area that is used by the target TPV is released.

• When formatting a TPV where the allocation method is "Thick", the physical allocation area that is used by the target TPV is not released. The physical allocation area that is used by the target TPV is released when the TPV is deleted.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

A RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

A disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX

Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 while TPVs or FTVs are being formatted. (*1)

• The following volumes cannot be formatted:

Volumes for which "Status" is " Broken", " Data Lost", or " Not Ready"

Volumes undergoing RAID migration

A copy source volume or a copy destination volume of an Advanced Copy (local/remote) that is being performed

Volumes registered in a RAID group undergoing LDE

ODX Buffer volumes undergoing ODX

NAS user volumes that contain shared folders

Volumes used for the Storage Cluster function

Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the TPP that includes the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the

" Readying", " Not Ready", " Broken", or " Data Lost" state

DEDUP_SYS Volume that belongs to the TPP where Advanced Copy or RAID Migration is being performed for the created Deduplication/Compression Volumes

Deduplication/Compression Volumes and DEDUP_SYS Volume that belong to the TPP where the capacity is insufficient

• Do not format the volumes with Storage Migration paths.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, up to 1024 volumes can be formatted at a time. Note that this limitation does not apply to other models.

• If a DEDUP_SYS Volume format is stopped due to a hardware error or drive error, restart the volume format.

• If Deduplication/Compression Volumes belonging to a TPP with an insufficient capacity are formatted, an error occurs. In this case, the data and the used physical allocation area are released, but the target Deduplication/

Compression Volumes cannot be used normally. Expand the TPP capacity and try again.

• If the error message "An internal resource is insufficient." appears after volumes are formatted, a format of vol-

umes may have failed. Check the "Status" of the formatted volumes in the [Volume] screen. Refer to "Volume

(Basic Information)" (page 799) for details. Volumes in the "

Readying" state have not been formatted.

Wait until the currently running format processes are complete and reformat the relevant volumes.

283

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Format Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Formatting newly created volumes is not required since these volumes are formatted automatically.

• To format NAS system volumes and DEDUP_SYS Volumes, "Maintenance Operation" policy is required. Note that when the DEDUP_SYS Volumes are formatted, the DEDUP_MAP Volumes are also formatted.

•

The allocation method for the volume can be checked in the [Volume] screen. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

for details.

The procedure to format a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume to be formatted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Format] in

[Action].

• [Format] cannot be clicked under the following conditions:

The selected volume is used for the Virtual Volume function

The usage of the selected FTV is "System"

NAS expanded system volumes are selected

The DEDUP_MAP Volume is selected

External Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration") are selected

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the number of selected volumes exceeds 1024

• If the format target TPV fulfills all of the following conditions, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

Allocation method is "Thick"

The volume status is " Readying"

The free space in the TPP to which the TPV belongs is insufficient

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Formatting of a volume starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

284

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Expand Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Expand Volume

This function concatenates a new volume to the selected volume by using the LUN Concatenation function to expand the volume capacity that can be used from the server.

Volume expansion provides the following features:

• Volume capacity can be expanded by using the free space in an existing RAID group.

• Free space that is 1GB or larger can be concatenated.

• A volume with a maximum capacity of 128TB can be created (the maximum capacity of an ODX Buffer volume is 1TB)

• Concatenation can be performed among multiple RAID groups.

• Any RAID level can be applied for a concatenation source volume and a concatenation destination volume. Concatenation can be performed regardless of the RAID level for the concatenation source volume and the concatenation destination volume.

• Data can be accessed from the host in the same way regardless of the concatenation status (before, during, or after concatenation).

• When the number of volumes in a concatenated volume is 15 or less, volumes can be added to the existing concatenated volume.

Requirements for concatenating a volume

• The "Type" is "Standard"

• The volume capacity is 1GB or larger

• When the concatenation source volume is a concatenated volume, the volume must satisfy the following requirements:

The number of volumes in the concatenated volume must be 15 or less

The capacity of the concatenated volume must be less than 128TB

(If the concatenated volume is configured with an ODX Buffer volume, the volume must be less than 1TB)

• The "Status" is not " Broken", " Data Lost", " Not Ready", or " Readying"

• RAID migration is not being performed (the target volume is not used as a migration source or a migration destination)

• There are no Advanced Copy sessions (local or remote) for which the copy range is "Totally" (*1)

• LDE is not being performed for the RAID group to which the target volume belongs

• Encryption is not being performed for the target volume

• A Storage Migration path is not created in the target volume

• "Cache Page Capacity" must not be limited (*2)

• Volumes are not used for the Storage Cluster function

• Data protection by "T10-DIF (Data Integrity Field)" is not enabled

• The volume is not an External Volume

*1: "Totally" is specified for the copy range in the following conditions:

• When performing a LUN to LUN copy session with the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Copy Control Module

(CCM)

• When performing a copy session with ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Adapter for VMware Site Recovery Manager

• When performing a copy session with ETERNUS VSS Hardware Provider

• When performing a SnapOPC+ session that is specified with ETERNUS Web GUI or ETERNUS CLI

*2: A "-" (hyphen) is specified for "Cache Page Capacity" by using the procedure in

"Modify Cache Parameters" (page 326) .

Note that "-" (hyphen) is the default value.

Requirements to obtain free space from RAID groups

• The "Status" is not " Broken"

• The RAID group is not blocked

• LDE is not being performed in the target RAID group

285

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Expand Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The RAID group is not an External RAID Group

• The RAID group must satisfy the following requirements:

The RAID group must contain Standard type volumes, WSVs, SDVs, or SDPVs

If this is not the case, the RAID group must not contain any volumes

The RAID group must not belong to a TPP

The RAID group must not belong to an FTRP

The RAID group must not be registered as an REC Disk Buffer

The RAID group must not be registered as an EXCP

• The number of volumes registered in the target RAID group is less than 128

• The free space for the RAID group is 1GB or larger

• The drive type for configuring the RAID group where the concatenation source volume belongs and the drive type for configuring the concatenation destination RAID group must be the following combination of drive types

Online

Concatenation destination drive type

Nearline SSD Online SED Nearline SED SSD SED

NG NG NG NG Not recommended

OK NG NG NG NG

Nearline

Not recommended

Concatenation source drive type

SSD

Online

SED (*1)

Nearline

SED

SSD SED

Not recommended

NG NG NG NG OK

OK: Concatenation is available, Not recommended: Concatenation is available, but not a recommended configuration,

NG: Concatenation is not available

*1: In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

Recommended conditions to obtain free space from RAID groups

• Set the same values for the following items to RAID groups where the concatenation source volume belongs and to RAID groups that will be concatenated.

RAID level

Drive speed

Drive type (Online/Nearline)

Drive type (Online SED/Nearline SED)

SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD/SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED)

Drive sector format (AF-compliant/non-AF-compliant)

Key group setting status (SED (Enabled Key Group)/SED (Disabled Key Group))

The speed of the drive and SSD type that configures RAID groups can be checked in the [RAID Group Detail] screen ([Drive] tab).

• Backing up the data before performing volume expansion is recommended.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

The maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The hot controller firmware upgrade is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

A RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

A disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX

• Expanded volume capacity must be recognized by server.

286

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Expand Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The encryption status of volumes after concatenation is the same as the concatenation source volume.

• Concatenated volumes are formatted automatically. Refer to the [Volume Detail] screen for format progress.

Refer to

"Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

for details.

•

To expand the TPV capacity, refer to "Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 292) .

• Volume expansion (LUN concatenation) can be performed even when the concatenation source volume is being formatted.

• If a volume capacity expansion fails, a work volume (or a "Temporary" type volume) is displayed in the volume list. Delete the work volume and perform this function again.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Expand Volume" (page 1126)

The procedure to expand volume capacity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume to be expanded and click [Expand Volume] in [Action].

[Expand Volume] cannot be clicked when External Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration") are selected.

2 Click the [Add] button.

 The [Add Capacity] screen is displayed.

287

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Expand Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select the RAID group to obtain the free space from, and specify the capacity to be concatenated.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Capacity

• Capacity

• Select RAID Group

For the "Drive Type" field, the type of drive that configures the RAID group is displayed.

If multiple drive types are used in the RAID group, the drive type is displayed as described below.

• If only "Online" type drives are used or if both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives are used, "Online" is displayed.

• If only "Online SED" type drives are used or if both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives are used,

"Online SED" is displayed.

• "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

4 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the [Expand Volume] screen.

288

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Expand Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Step 4 to select RAID groups and specify the capacity. After completing

through

these settings, click the [Expand] button.

6 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Expansion of a volume starts.

7 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

289

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Encrypt Volume

This function encrypts existing volumes.

"Standard", "WSV", and "SDV" type volumes can be encrypted.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When using this function, enable the encryption mode. Refer to

"Setup Encryption Mode" (page 79) for

details.

• This function is used to prevent data leakage due to removal of drives, and cannot prevent data leakage caused by server access.

• Encrypted volumes cannot be changed to non-encrypted volumes.

• Canceling volume encryption is not possible.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

A RAID group diagnosis is being performed

A disk diagnosis is being performed

The hot controller firmware upgrade is being performed

The disk firmware is being applied

The status of the ETERNUS DX/AF is other than "Normal"

• The following volumes cannot be encrypted:

Volumes without " Available" state

Volumes undergoing RAID migration

Volumes undergoing encryption

Volumes undergoing formatting or LUN Concatenation

Volumes registered in a RAID group undergoing LDE

Volumes in which the drives that configure the RAID group are undergoing rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy

Volumes in which the drives that configure the RAID group are "Online SEDs", "Nearline SEDs", or "SSD

SEDs"

Volumes that belong to a RAID group where the RAID level is "RAID6-FR"

Volumes with Storage Migration paths

Volumes used for the Storage Cluster function

• The following performance may be reduced for encrypted volumes compared with non-encrypted volumes:

Access to the encrypted volumes

Copy transfer of encrypted volumes

• Up to 64 volumes can be encrypted at the same time. Note that if concatenated volumes are selected, the maximum number of volumes that can be encrypted is less than 64.

TPVs cannot be encrypted with this function. TPVs that are created in an encrypted TPP are encrypted.

290

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Encrypt Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to encrypt a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume to be encrypted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Encrypt Volume] in [Action].

[Encrypt Volume] cannot be clicked under the following conditions:

• External Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration") are selected

• Volumes which belong to a RAID group for which the Stripe Depth value is changed (*1) are selected

*1: A RAID group for which the Stripe Depth value is 128KB or more in the [RAID Group Detail] screen of [RAID Group

(Basic Information)]. Note that the Stripe Depth value for RAID1 cannot be changed. Refer to

"Advanced Setting"

(page 1230) in

"Create RAID Group" (page 1223) for details.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Encryption of the volume starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

291

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

TPV Management

This section describes TPV management.

TPV management provides the following functions:

•

Expand Thin Provisioning Volume

•

Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity

•

•

Cancel Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity

•

Start Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

•

Stop Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

•

Reconfigure NAS Volume

•

"The maximum NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size of each "NAS FS

Expand Thin Provisioning Volume

This function expands the capacity of a Thin Provisioning Volume.

Requirements for expanding a TPV

• TPVs that are to be expanded must be one of the following volumes:

TPVs for SAN

ODX Buffer volumes (TPV)

NAS user volumes

Deduplication/Compression Volumes

DEDUP_SYS Volumes

• The capacity is not 128TB or more

For ODX Buffer volumes, the capacity must not be more than 1TB

For NAS user volumes, the capacity must not be more than the maximum volume capacity of each "NAS FS

Block Size". (Refer to

Block Size"" (page 293) for details.)

• Volumes that are not Veeam Snapshot Volumes

• There are no Advanced Copy sessions for which the copy range is "Totally" (*1)

*1: "Totally" is specified for the copy range in the following conditions:

• When performing a LUN to LUN copy session with the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Copy Control Module

(CCM)

• When performing a copy session with ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Adapter for VMware Site Recovery Manager

• When performing a copy session with ETERNUS VSS Hardware Provider

• When performing a SnapOPC+ session that is specified with ETERNUS Web GUI or ETERNUS CLI

• Balancing is not being performed in the TPV

• RAID migration is not being performed in the TPV

• A Storage Migration path is not created in the TPV

• Not used for the Storage Cluster function

• Copy sessions are not set for NAS user volumes

• Snapshots are not set for NAS user volumes

• For DEDUP_SYS Volumes, the volumes must not be in the " Readying", " Not Available",

" Not Ready", " Broken", or " Data Lost" state

• For Deduplication/Compression Volumes, the volumes must belong to a TPP that does not include a DEDUP_SYS

Volume in the " Readying", " Not Available", " Not Ready", " Broken", or " Data Lost" state

292

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function cannot be performed when there is no TPV in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The total capacity of TPVs in a TPP must be smaller than the total capacity that can be used to expand the TPP.

The value of "total capacity that can be used to expand the TPP" is displayed in the "Total Capacity after

expand" field of the [Expand Thin Provisioning Pool] screen. Refer to "Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page

567)

for details.

• This function cannot be performed when there is no free space for expansion in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Expanded TPV capacity must be recognized by the server.

• When the file system format for the NAS user volume does not support a capacity expansion, a message appears. Convert the file system format and perform this function again. Refer to

"Reconfigure NAS Volume"

(page 300) for details.

• If the NAS user volume capacity is expanded while an automatic meta cache redistribution is being performed, the process may be delayed for a maximum of five minutes. If the redistribution process is not complete within five minutes, an error occurs for this function.

• If the total logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression target volumes (Deduplication/Compression Volumes) that are to be created in the same TPP is 8TB or larger, the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the relevant TPP must be expanded.

• If the efficiency of the Deduplication/Compression function cannot be estimated, setting the total logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes smaller than the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume is recommended. Use this function to expand the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume before starting the Deduplication/Compression process (or before creating Deduplication/Compression Volumes).

• To expand DEDUP_SYS Volumes, stop or suspend the Advanced Copy session for all the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the TPP to which the target DEDUP_SYS Volume belongs.

• The maximum total capacity of TPVs depends on the maximum pool capacity that is specified with the [Set

Thin Provisioning] function. The currently specified maximum pool capacity is displayed in the [Settings]

screen under the [Thin Provisioning] navigation. Refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)" (page 948) for details.

Note that the total logical capacity of TPVs does not include the Deduplication/Compression Volume capacity.

•

The allocation method for the TPV can be checked in the [Volume] screen. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

for details.

•

The "NAS FS Block Size" for the NAS user volume can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to "Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827) for details.

The maximum NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size of each "NAS FS Block Size"

Maximum NAS user volume capacity

NAS FS Version

(*1)

1 or 2

8KB

–

4TB

NAS FS Block Size

32KB

–

16TB

256KB

128TB

–

Remarks

NAS FS block size is fixed to "256KB".

For a NAS user volume created with a

"256KB" NAS FS block size, NAS FS version is

"2".

4 or 5

Maximum file size (*2) 1 or 2

3, 4, or 5

32TB

1TB

–

128TB

4TB

–

128TB

32TB

NAS FS block size is fixed to "256KB".

*1: NAS file system (NAS user volume) version. For the details, refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 1127) .

*2: The file size indicates the size of the user data that is created in the shared folder.

293

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to expand Thin Provisioning Volume capacity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPV to be expanded and click [Expand TPV] in [Action].

If NAS system volumes, NAS backup volumes, or DEDUP_MAP Volumes are selected, [Expand TPV] cannot be clicked.

2 Input the TPV capacity after expansion.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Volume Setting

• Volume Capacity after expand

3 Click the [Expand] button.

When expanding the TPV where the allocation method is "Thick" and the free space in the TPP is insufficient, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Expansion of a TPV starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

If the "Provisioned Capacity" (or the total logical capacity) of the volumes that exist within the TPP exceeds the total capacity of the TPP (or if the "Provisioned Rate" (or the capacity rate) exceeds "100 %") after the volume capacity expansion, a warning message appears in the result screen. Check the TPP used state and add drives to expand the TPP capacity as required. Check the [Thin Provisioning Pool Detail] screen for

"Provisioned Rate". Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925)

for details.

End of procedure

294

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Thin Provisioning Volume Threshold

This function changes the threshold for monitoring the usage ratio of TPV. The usage ratio is the ratio of used capacity (physically allocated capacity) to the logical TPV capacity.

• This function changes the threshold of a TPV that is created by using the

"Create Volume" (page 257)

• The same threshold can be applied for multiple TPVs in a single operation.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to

"A. Modify Thin Provisioning Volume Threshold" (page

1127)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Modify Thin Provisioning Volume Threshold" (page

1306)

The procedure to change the threshold of Thin Provisioning Volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPV for which the threshold is to be changed (multiple selections can be made) and click [Modify TPV Threshold] in [Action].

If NAS expanded system volumes, Deduplication/Compression Volumes, or Deduplication/Compression System Volumes are selected, [Modify TPV Threshold] cannot be clicked.

2 Specify the new threshold.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Threshold Setting

• New Threshold

Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the TPV threshold starts.

295

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity

The optimizing capacity (Zero Reclamation) function releases the physical area when data in the block (*1) that is allocated to a TPV or an FTV is filled with zeros.

This function optimizes TPV or FTV capacity.

*1: Volume allocation unit

Volume requirements for optimizing TPV/FTV capacity:

• Volumes for which "Type" is "TPV" or "FTV"

• Volumes without " Readying" state, " Not Ready" state, or " Broken" state

• Volumes that are not undergoing TPV/FTV capacity optimization or volumes that are not reserved for optimization

• Volumes that are not ODX Buffer volumes

• Volumes that are not undergoing RAID migration

• Volumes that are not undergoing TPV balancing

• FTVs that are not undergoing FTRP balancing

• Volumes where the allocation method is not "Thick"

• This function cannot be performed when the storage system status is "Not Ready".

• Do not execute capacity optimization for NAS user volumes, NAS backup volumes, and NAS system volumes.

• The Thin Provisioning function and the Flexible Tier (Automated Storage Tiering) function can be effectively used by using the Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity function when system configurations or system environment modifications are performed. Examples of when to use the Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity function are as follows:

After the initialization of the OS or the file system (such as writing 0 data to all the volumes) is complete

After RAID migration from "Standard" to "TPV" is complete

After RAID migration from "Standard" to "FTV" is complete

• The progress of the optimizing can be checked with "Optimizing Capacity Progress" on the [Volume Detail]

screen (Basic). Refer to "Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

for details.

•

The optimizing capacity can be reserved for the source volume of the RAID migration. Refer to "Start RAID

Migration" (page 307) for details.

296

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to start optimizing TPV/FTV capacity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which volumes to start optimization for (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity] in [Action].

• [Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity] cannot be clicked under the following conditions.

Even if the selected volume type is "FTV", the usage is "System"

NAS expanded system volumes are selected

The Deduplication/Compression Volumes are selected

• If the controller firmware is being applied, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The optimization of the TPV capacity or the FTV capacity starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Cancel Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity

This function stops optimizing TPV/FTV capacity.

• TPV/FTV capacity optimization cannot be suspended and restarted (restarting capacity optimization from where it was stopped). If TPV/FTV capacity optimization is stopped and then started again, the TPV/FTV capacity optimization process starts from the first volume at the top again.

• This function cannot release the volumes that are reserved for TPV/FTV capacity optimization. The reservation status of TPV/FTV capacity optimization is released only when RAID migration is stopped.

• This function cannot be performed when the storage system status is "Not Ready".

The progress of TPV/FTV capacity optimization can be checked with "Process" on the [Volume] screen. Refer to

"Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool" (page 585)

for details.

The procedure to stop TPV/FTV capacity optimization is as follows:

Procedure

Select the volume to stop optimization (multiple selections can be made), and click [Cancel

Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Optimization of the TPV capacity or the FTV capacity stops.

297

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Start Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

This function relocates the physical allocating area of the TPV to make the physical area of TPV is allocated equally among the RAID Groups that configure the TPP.

When multiple TPVs in the same TPP are accessed, the physical area is allocated by using the RAID groups of the

TPP one by one in the access order. Therefore the physical area of TPVs may be unequally allocated among the

RAID groups. This phenomenon also occurs when expanding the capacity of a TPP. In this case, the physical area is allocated unevenly among the newly added and existing RAID groups. This function is to solve the unequal allocation among RAID groups, and balance the physical allocating area in each RAID group. I/O load is dispersed among the RAID groups in the TPP and access performance may be improved.

Requirements for a TPV to be balanced:

• The "Type" is "TPV"

• The "Status" is " Available"

• RAID migration is not being performed (the target volume is not used as a migration source or a migration destination)

• An Advanced Copy is not being performed (the target volume is not being used as a copy source or a copy destination)

• A Remote Advanced Copy is not being performed (the target volume is not being used as a copy source or a copy destination)

• ODX is not being performed

• TPV balancing is not being performed

• Capacity optimization for TPV is not being performed

• Not used as Deduplication/Compression Volumes

• Not used as Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

Requirements for a TPP in which the target TPV is registered:

• The "Status" is " Available"

• The free space in the TPP is the same or larger than the capacity of the TPV that is to be balanced

• When the allocation mode for the TPV is "Thick", the free physical capacity for allocating the whole area exists

298

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The TPV balancing cannot be performed in the following conditions:

When the maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

When the total number of TPV balancing, RAID migration, and FTV balancing (*1) processes that are performed at the same time is 32

When the total capacity for the TPV balancing, RAID migration, and FTV balancing (*1) processes that are performed at the same time is 128TB

When the TPP capacity that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF is insufficient

The control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

(*2)

The sum of the total logical capacity for all the volumes in the pool and the capacity of the work volume exceeds the maximum pool capacity (*3)

*1: When the FTRP balancing is performed, the FTV balancing process starts in the FTSP. Refer to

for details.

*2: If the system message indicates a re-configuration, the control information for Thin Provisioning is being synchronized in each CM. Wait at least five minutes before performing this function again. If a work volume that has failed to be deleted is displayed in the volume list, delete the relevant volume.

*3: When a TPV balancing is performed, an area for a work volume (or the migration destination TPV with the same capacity as the migration source) is temporarily acquired in the TPP to which the target TPV belongs. Therefore, if the sum of the work volume capacity and the total logical capacity of the volumes (TPVs and FTVs) in all the existing pools (TPPs and FTRPs) exceeds the maximum pool capacity, a work volume cannot be created, and this function becomes unavailable.

• This function balances the physical allocating area of the TPV among RAID groups of the TPP to which the TPV belongs. It is not able to balance TPV by RAID migration of the TPV to other TPPs.

• TPV balancing can be performed during the workload I/O.

•

To check the balancing progress of a TPV, refer to "Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 821)

•

The allocation method for the TPV can be checked in the [Volume] screen. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

The procedure to start balancing TPVs is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPV to be balanced and click [Start Balancing] in [Action].

[Start Balancing] cannot be clicked if NAS expanded system volumes are selected.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 TPV balancing starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume] screen.

End of procedure

299

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

Stop Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

This function stops TPV balancing.

• This function cannot be used when the TPV balancing is not being performed.

• This function cannot be used when the specified TPV balancing is already complete.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When TPV balancing is stopped, data in volumes that are not balanced yet can be accessed normally.

The procedure to stop balancing of the Thin Provisioning Volume is as follows:

Procedure

Select the volume for which balancing is to be stopped and click [Stop Balancing] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 TPV balancing stops.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Reconfigure NAS Volume

This function reconfigures the file system format for the NAS user volume to support volume expansion.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• Some NAS user volumes require a reconfiguration of the file system format to be compatible with volume expansion. For volumes that must be reconfigured, a message appears and volume expansion is not possible.

Volume expansion can be performed for volumes that do not require a reconfiguration and volumes that have

already been reconfigured. Refer to "Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 292)

for details.

• Perform the following operations before reconfiguring the NAS user volume.

Perform a CIFS unmount and an NFS unmount from the client. In addition, if the controller firmware version is V10L31 or earlier, stop the operation for all file systems because the file lock state is released. A file system format conversion process takes a maximum of 15 minutes. Wait until the complete screen is displayed.

Backup data in the NAS user volume to a different area in advance (if reconfiguration fails, data cannot be recovered from the original NAS user volume). Data can be recovered from the backed up data.

300

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function converts the file system format of the NAS user volume. Conversion targets are volumes of which

the "Usage Details" are "NAS Data". Refer to "Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

for details.

• If the following conditions are all satisfied, the maximum NAS user volume capacity can be expanded by converting the file system format with this function. The version and the block size of the NAS file system (or the

NAS user volume) are displayed in the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to "Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

for details.

NAS file system version is "3"

The block size of the NAS file system is "8KB" or "32KB"

The procedure to reconfigure the file system format for NAS user volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the NAS user volume (TPV) that is to be reconfigured and click [Reconfigure NAS Volume] in [Action].

If the NAS user volume has been accessed, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

A confirmation message that indicates the NAS file system version is updated to "5" is displayed.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Reconfiguration of the NAS volume starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Set Allocation

This function changes the allocation method for the existing TPVs and FTVs.

There are two allocation modes. The default setting is "Thin".

• Thin

Physical area is allocated to the target area of the volume when a write I/O is received.

This method virtualizes and allocates the storage capacity to reduce the physical capacity of the storage.

• Thick

Physical area is allocated to the whole area of the volume when volumes are created.

This method is used for volumes such as those allocated for the system area to prevent system halts due to pool exhaustion during operations.

301

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function is available for "TPV" or "FTV" type volumes. Note that this function cannot be used for "TPV" type volumes that are used as Deduplication/Compression Volumes and Deduplication/Compression System Volumes.

• If the allocation method is changed from "Thick" to "Thin", optimize the capacity. If a capacity optimization is not performed, the used capacity (the physical capacity that is allocated to volumes in the entire TPP) is not reduced. Refer to [Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity] for details.

• This function cannot be used if the allocation method is changed from "Thin" to "Thick" when the free space in the TPP or FTRP has been insufficient.

• This function cannot be used when the capacity releasing from the server is being performed.

• This function cannot be used if one of the following conditions is true for the selected volume:

A capacity optimization is being performed or a capacity optimization is being reserved when the allocation method is changed to "Thick"

RAID migration is being performed

TPV balancing is being performed

FTRP balancing is being performed

The selected volume belongs to a TPP with a " Broken" state

The selected volume belongs to an FTRP with a " Broken" state

The selected volume is a work volume that is created during a RAID migration

• The volume allocation method can be selected when creating a "TPV" or a "NAS Volume". The default value is

"Thin". Refer to "Create Volume" (page 257) for details.

• For "TPV" type ODX Buffer volumes, the volume allocation method can be selected during volume creation.

Refer to

"Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 651)

for details.

• For "FTV" type volumes and for "FTV" type ODX Buffer volumes, the volume allocation method is specified during volume creation with ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• The volume allocation method can also be changed when performing a RAID migration. Refer to

"Start RAID

Migration" (page 307) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Allocation" (page 1128)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Allocation" (page 1306) .

The procedure to change the allocation method is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which volume to change the allocation method for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Set Allocation] in [Action].

[Set Allocation] cannot be clicked in the following conditions.

• Even if the selected volume type is "FTV", the usage is "System"

• NAS expanded system volumes are selected

• The Deduplication/Compression Volumes are selected

• The Deduplication/Compression System Volumes are selected

302

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

TPV Management

Select the allocation method.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Allocation Settings

• Allocation

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the allocation method starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

303

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

SDV/SDPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

SDV/SDPV Management

This section describes SDV/SDPV management.

SDV/SDPV management provides the following functions:

•

Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

•

Force Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

•

Initialize Snap Data Volume

Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

An SDPV is a logical volume that is created in the SDP.

This function deletes an SDPV to reduce SDP capacity.

Registering a license for the Advanced Copy function or the Unified Storage environment is required to use this function.

If the target SDPV is currently being used, it will be deleted after the SDPV is released.

The procedure to delete an SDPV is as follows:

Procedure

Select the SDPV to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete SDPV] in

[Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

If the SDPV is currently being used, the target SDPV status is changed to "Reserved Deletion". The "Reserved

Deletion" state can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to "Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

 Deletion of SDPV starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

304

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

SDV/SDPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Force Delete Snap Data Pool Volume

An SDPV is a logical volume that is created in the SDP.

This function forcibly deletes an SDPV regardless of whether it being used or not to reduce SDP capacity.

• Registering a license for the Advanced Copy function or the Unified Storage environment is required to use this function.

• If the currently used SDPV is deleted, an error occurs for the SnapOPC session or the SnapOPC+ session that is using the relevant SDPV.

An SDPV that is in the "Reserved Deletion" state can be deleted.

The procedure to forcibly delete an SDPV is as follows:

Procedure

Select the SDPV to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Force Delete SDPV] in

[Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of SDPV starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

Initialize Snap Data Volume

This function initializes an SDV.

An SDV is a copy destination volume for SnapOPC and SnapOPC+ that includes a data area and a copy control information area. SDV initialization is performed when the capacity that can be used for the data area is insufficient due to a large amount of writing being requested from the host to an SDV for any reason (such as an operation mistake). SDV initialization is also performed when no more writing is allowed due to a notification being reported to the host for a writing request that exceeds the SDV capacity.

• After initializing an SDV, any data that is stored in the SDV cannot be accessed. Make sure to backup the required data.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

The target volume status is not " Available"

Advanced Copy is being performed in the target volume

Snapshot is set for the target volume

When an SDV is initialized, the area that is allocated from the SDPV to the SDV is released.

305

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

SDV/SDPV Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to initialize an SDV is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the SDV to be initialized (multiple selections can be made) and click [Initialize SDV] in

[Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Initialization of the SDV starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

306

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Start RAID Migration

RAID migration (hereinafter also referred to as migration) moves an existing volume in a RAID group, TPP, or FTRP to a free space in another RAID group, TPP, or FTRP. After migration is complete, the migration source volume is automatically deleted. This function can also be used to change the number of concatenations for WSV.

Migration provides the following features:

• Load balancing of host access.

• Volume types can be changed during a volume migration.

(Except for volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function.)

• Volume capacity expansion is available when migrating volumes.

(Only when the volume type is "Standard" or "WSV". Except for volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function.)

• The RAID level of the volume can be changed.

• The number of concatenations for WSVs can be increased or reduced.

• The Wide Stripe Size for WSVs can be changed.

• Deduplication or Compression can be changed (enabled or disabled).

• Data migration can be performed for the External Volumes (Non-disruptive Storage Migration).

• Because creation and format of new volumes and host interface establishment are automatically performed, users are allowed to access the data anytime without being affected by the migration.

Migration type

The combinations of volume types that can be migrated are shown below.

For ODX Buffer volumes, the available combinations are dependent on the volume type.

Migration source volume

Standard

(LUN Concatenation)

Standard

(External) (*1)

WSV

TPV (*3)

Standard

Available

Standard

(LUN

Concatenation)

N/A

Migration destination volume

Standard

(External)

(*1)

WSV

N/A

Available

N/A Available

TPV FTV

Available (*2) Available (*2)

Available

Available (*4)

N/A

Available

Available (*4)

Available (*2) Available (*2)

Available Available

FTV (*5) Available (*4) N/A N/A Available (*4) Available Available

Available: Migration is available,

N/A: Migration is not available

*1: This indicates the External Volumes. It is referred to as "Standard (External)" in this section. As a "Standard" volume, it can be migrated to "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", or "FTV" type volumes. However, this volume cannot be used as a migration destination.

*2: When migration from "Standard" or "WSV" to "TPV" or "FTV" is performed, 100% of the logical capacity of the "Standard" or

"WSV" is allocated as the physical capacity for the "TPV" or "FTV". When "Start Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity after migration" is enabled, the physical area that is filled with zeros can be released after the migration is complete.

*3: Only "TPV" can be selected as the migration destination when the migration source TPV is a NAS user volume, a NAS backup volume, or a NAS system volume.

*4: When migration from "TPV" or "FTV" to "Standard" or "WSV" is performed, 100% of the logical capacity of the "TPV" or "FTV" is allocated as the logical capacity for "Standard" or "WSV".

*5: If the migration source FTV usage is "System", only "FTV" can be selected as the migration destination. (A migration is not allowed for Virtual Volumes (VVOLs). However, "$VVOL_META" can be migrated. "$VVOL_META" is a system volume that is used for storing the management information (metadata) of the Virtual Volume function.)

307

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Combinations of volume types for which capacity expansion is available

The combinations of volume types for which capacity expansion can be performed are shown below.

For ODX Buffer volumes, the available combinations are dependent on the volume type.

Migration source volume

Standard

(LUN Concatenation)

Standard

(External)

WSV

TPV

FTV

Standard

Available (*1)

Available

(Not recommended)

(*2)

Available

N/A

Standard

(LUN

Concatenation)

Migration destination volume

Standard

(External)

WSV

–

N/A

Available

–

N/A

Available

(Not recommended)

(*2)

Available

N/A

TPV

N/A

FTV

N/A

Available: Capacity expansion is available

Available (Not recommended): Capacity expansion is available, but not recommended

N/A: Capacity expansion is not available

– : Migration is not available

*1: The capacity of the ODX Buffer volume can be expanded to 1TB.

*2: For migrations where the migration source volume is an External Volume (Standard (External)), setting the same capacity as the migration source volume for the migration destination volume is recommended.

308

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Combinations of the Deduplication and Compression settings for which migration is available

The combinations of migration source volumes and migration destination volumes when "Deduplication" and

"Compression" are enabled or disabled for the migration destination volume are shown below.

For "ODX Buffer Volumes", the available combinations are dependent on the volume type.

Migration source volume

Deduplication or Compression settings for migration destination volume

Migration destination (*1)

Deduplication

Compression

RAID

Group

Only Deduplication is enabled

Only Compression is enabled

TPP

Deduplication and

Compression are enabled

Deduplication and

Compression are disabled

FTRP

• Standard

• Standard(LUN

Concatenation)

• Standard

(External)

• WSV

• TPV (Only

Deduplication is enabled)

• TPV (Only

Compression is enabled)

• TPV (Deduplication and Compression are enabled)

• TPV (Deduplication and Compression are disabled)

• FTV

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

TPV (NAS volume)

Disable

(*2)

Disable

(*2)

– – – – Available –

Available: Migration is available

N/A: Migration is not available

– : Not displayed or not available

*1: "Wide Striping Volume" can be selected as the migration destination. If "Wide Striping Volume" is selected, "Deduplication" and "Compression" are fixed to "Disable". For the available migration combinations when "Wide Striping Volume" is

selected, refer to "Migration type" (page 307)

*2: If the migration source TPV is a NAS volume (NAS user volume, NAS backup volume, or NAS system volume), "Deduplication" and "Compression" are fixed to "Disable" because the Deduplication/Compression function is not supported.

309

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Combinations of encryption conditions for which migration is available

The combinations of encryption conditions for which migration can be performed are shown in the following table.

Security priority

Yes

No (*4)

Encryption setting for the migration source volume

None by CM use SED

(Disabled Key Group) use SED

(Enabled Key Group)

None by CM use SED

(Disabled Key Group) use SED

(Enabled Key Group)

None

Available

N/A

Encryption setting for the migration destination volume by CM (*1) use SED (Disabled Key

Group) (*2) use SED (Enabled Key

Group) (*3)

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

Available: Migration is available

N/A: Migration is not available

*1: When the encryption mode is disabled, "by CM" cannot be selected.

*2: Online SEDs, Nearline SEDs, and SSD SEDs that are managed by the common key (the RAID groups are not registered in the key group).

*3: Online SEDs, Nearline SEDs, and SSD SEDs for which the SED authentication key is managed by the key server (the RAID groups are registered in the key group). In this case, only RAID groups can be selected as the migration destination. Note that TPPs and FTRPs cannot be selected.

*4: If a user without the "Security Setting" policy logs into ETERNUS Web GUI, migration to reduce the security level cannot be performed.

Requirements for a migration source volume

• The "Type" is "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", or "FTV"

• The "Status" is not " Broken"

• Formatting is not being performed (when the volume type is "Standard" or "WSV")

• Migration is not being performed (the target volume is not used as a migration source or a migration destination)

• TPV balancing is not being performed

• FTRP balancing is not being performed (*1)

• LDE is not being performed for the RAID group to which the target volume belongs

• Encryption is not being performed for the target volume

• A Storage Migration path is not created in the target volume

• For Deduplication/Compression Volumes, the volumes must belong to a TPP that does not include a DEDUP_SYS

Volume in the " Readying", " Not Available", " Not Ready", " Broken", or " Data Lost" state

*1: When the FTRP balancing is performed, the FTV balancing process starts in the FTSP. Refer to

"Start Balancing Flexible

Tier Pool" (page 585) for details.

310

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Requirements for a migration destination RAID group

• The maximum number of volumes is not set in the destination RAID group

Migration creates new volumes. The maximum number of volumes that can be created depends on the ETER-

NUS DX/AF model.

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

The maximum number of volumes per RAID group per ETERNUS DX/AF

1024

128

2048 (4096) (*1)

4096 (8192) (*1)

16384

65535

3072

12288

1536

*1: Values in parentheses indicate the maximum number of volumes when "Expand Volume Mode" is "Enable".

• "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", or "SDPV" is registered in the RAID group or the RAID group is not being used

• The RAID group does not belong to a TPP

• The RAID group does not belong to an FTRP

• The RAID group is not registered as an REC Disk Buffer

• The RAID group is not registered as an EXCP

• The "Status" of the RAID group is " Available"

• The RAID group is not blocked

• The free space of the RAID group is more than the capacity of the migration source volume (*1)

• The RAID group is not the same RAID group as the RAID group to which the migration source volume belongs

• LDE is not being performed in the target RAID group

*1: If the migration source is a TPV or an FTV, the capacity of the migration source volume indicates the logical capacity of the TPV or the FTV.

If the migration source is a Deduplication/Compression Volume and "Disable" is selected for "Deduplication" and "Compression", the capacity of the migration source volume indicates the logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volume.

Requirements for RAID groups that configure a migration destination WSV

• "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", or "SDPV" is registered in the RAID group or the RAID group is not being used

• The "Status" of the RAID group is " Available"

• The maximum number of volumes is not created in the RAID group (*1)

• The RAID group does not belong to a TPP

• The RAID group does not belong to an FTRP

• The RAID group is not registered as an REC Disk Buffer

• The RAID group is not registered as an EXCP

• The RAID group is not blocked

• LDE is not being performed in the target RAID group

311

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When using existing RAID groups (RAID groups configure the migration source WSV) to increase the number of concatenations, the RAID groups that are added must satisfy the following conditions:

The RAID group is the same RAID level as the existing RAID groups

The number of member drives in the RAID group is the same as the existing RAID groups

The Stripe Depth value is the same as the existing RAID groups

The drive type is the same as the existing RAID groups

The disk speed is the same as the existing RAID groups (recommended)

The SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD/SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED) is the same as the existing RAID groups (recommended)

The key group setting is the same as the existing RAID groups (recommended)

• When using existing RAID groups to increase the number of concatenations, all of the RAID groups, including the existing RAID groups, must have sequential free area to migrate volumes (*2)

• When reducing the number of concatenations, all of the RAID groups that configure a WSV must have sequential free area to migrate volumes (*2)

• The number of concatenations for RAID group must be 2 - 64

*1: When the migration destination is a WSV, one volume for each RAID group that configures striping is required (the same number of volumes as the number of RAID groups in total).

*2: Because the volume (a part of the WSV that is striped by each RAID group) is moved into the free area in the same

RAID group when migration is performed, another sequential free area is required as a migration destination in addition to the currently used area in the RAID group.

Requirements for a migration destination TPP

• The "Status" is " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

• The TPP capacity is equal to or larger than the capacity of the migration source volume (*1)

• The sum of the total logical capacity for all the volumes in the pool and the capacity of the work volume (*2) is smaller than the maximum pool capacity (*3)

• The TPP is not the same as the TPP to which the migration source volume belongs (*4)

• The TPP does not include the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the " Readying", " Not Available",

" Not Ready", " Broken", or " Data Lost" state if "Deduplication", "Compression", or both for the TPP are enabled

• The capacity of the migration destination TPP is not exhausted (*5)

*1: If the migration source is a TPV or an FTV, the capacity indicates the used capacity (physical capacity that is allocated from a TPP or an FTRP).

*2: When a RAID migration is performed, an area for a work volume (or the migration destination TPV with the same capacity as the migration source) is temporarily acquired in the migration destination TPP. Therefore, if the sum of the work volume capacity and the total logical capacity of the volumes (TPVs and FTVs) in all the existing pools (TPPs and

FTRPs) exceeds the maximum pool capacity, a work volume cannot be created, and this function becomes unavailable.

*3: The maximum pool capacity is the maximum total capacity for TPPs and FTRPs that can be created in the ETERNUS DX/

AF. Refer to "Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557) for details.

*4: Note that the same TPP as the migration source volume can be selected for the following conditions.

• A migration from a Deduplication/Compression Volume to a TPV

(when the "Deduplication" and "Compression" settings for the migration destination are both disabled)

• A migration from a TPV to a Deduplication/Compression Volume

(when the "Deduplication" and "Compression" settings for the migration destination are same as the TPP to which the migration source volume belongs)

*5: If "Deduplication" or "Compression" for the migration destination volume is enabled and the migration destination

TPP capacity is exhausted, an error occurs. Start the migration after expanding the TPP capacity.

312

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Requirements for a migration destination FTRP

• The "Status" is " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

• The capacity of the FTRP is more than the capacity of the migration source volume (*1)

• The capacity of the migration source volume is less than the maximum pool capacity (*2) for each model

• The FTRP is not the same as the FTRP to which the migration source volume belongs

*1: When the migration source is a TPV or an FTV, the capacity of the migration source volume indicates used capacity

(the physical capacity that is allocated from a TPP or an FTRP).

*2: The maximum pool capacity is the maximum total capacity for TPPs and FTRPs that can be created in the ETERNUS DX/

AF. Refer to "Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557) for details.

• The encryption function cannot be used for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3.

• To change the data protection method (Default/T10-DIF) for the migration destination, perform the following procedure.

Stop host access in advance.

Reboot the server after the migration is complete.

• After the migration of the External Volume is successfully completed, the migration source External Volume is deleted. Delete the "External RAID Groups", "External Drives", and "Non-disruptive Storage Migration License"

after the migration is complete. Refer to "Delete External RAID Group" (page 551) ,

"Delete External Drive"

(page 206) , and

"Delete Non-disruptive Storage Migration License" (page 70)

for details.

• Migration cannot be performed under the following conditions:

The maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

A RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

A disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX

The RAID group to which the migration source volume belongs is blocked or failed

Advanced Copy is being performed by specifying the whole volume in the migration source volume and the settings for the volume capacity that is to be expanded are performed before and after migration

The total number of migration sessions, TPV balancing sessions, and FTV balancing sessions (*1) that are running in the ETERNUS DX/AF at the same time is 32

The total capacity for migration processes, TPV balancing processes, and FTV balancing processes (*1) that are running in the ETERNUS DX/AF at the same time is 128TB

The total logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the single TPP has exceeded the limit capacity (*2)

The control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

(*3)

The migration source volume is the data migration destination of Storage Migration

The migration source and the migration destination are in the following conditions.

• The migration source is either of the following.

TPVs that are used as copy destination volumes of SnapOPC or SnapOPC+

FTVs that are used as copy destination volumes of SnapOPC or SnapOPC+

• The migration destination is either of the following.

RAID groups

TPPs that have Deduplication, Compression, or both enabled

• When performing migration for volumes for which "Cache Page Capacity" is changed using the procedure in

"Modify Cache Parameters" (page 326) , the "Cache Page Capacity" setting is reset to the initial value (Unlim-

ited).

313

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When the destination volume capacity is expanded by migration, the expanded volume capacity must be recognized by the server after migration. Refer to the manuals of each OS or file system for information about server operation.

• When " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in the "Used Status" field for the migration destination TPP after migration, the used capacity of the relevant TPP is exceeding the threshold. In this case, expand TPP capacity by using the procedure in

"Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 567)

. Refer to "Thin Provisioning

Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922) for TPP usage.

• When " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in the "Used Status" field for the migration destination

FTRP after migration, the used capacity of the relevant FTRP is exceeding the threshold. Use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser to expand the capacity of the appropriate FTSP (for which expansion is determined to be necessary

based upon the performance and usage). Refer to "Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 935)

for FTRP usage.

*1: When the FTRP balancing is performed, the FTV balancing process starts in the FTSP. Refer to

"Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool" (page 585)

for details.

*2: The limit capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes according to the TPP configuration is described below.

Volume in the relevant TPP.

• If the TPP is configured with one RAID group, the maximum logical volume capacity of the Deduplication/

Compression Volumes must be equal to or less than five times the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the relevant TPP.

If the efficiency of the Deduplication/Compression function cannot be estimated, setting the total logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes smaller than the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume is recommended.

*3: If the system message indicates a re-configuration, the control information for Thin Provisioning is being synchronized in each CM. Wait at least five minutes before performing this function again. If a work volume that has failed to be deleted is displayed in the volume list, delete the relevant volume.

• By using this function, External Volumes are migrated to the volumes in the local storage system. After the migration is completed, the migrated volumes can be handled equivalently to normal volumes.

•

Progress of migration can be checked on the [Volume Detail] screen (Basic). Refer to "Volume Detail (Basic)"

(page 827) for details.

• If the migration source and migration destination are both "WSV", not only can the migration of a WSV to other multiple RAID groups be performed, but also the number of concatenations for the existing RAID group can be changed.

• When Optimize TPV/FTV Capacity is reserved after migrating from "Standard" to "TPV" or from "Standard" to

"FTV", the physical area that is filled with zeros is released and the Thin Provisioning function can be used efficiently. For volumes that are reserved for optimizing capacity, "Reserved Optimizing Capacity" is displayed in the "Process" field on the [Volume] screen. When the capacity optimization is performed after the migration is complete, the progress of capacity optimization can be checked with "Optimizing Capacity Progress" on the

[Volume Detail] screen (Basic). Refer to

"Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

for details.

• In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Start RAID Migration" (page 1128)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Start RAID Migration" (page 1307)

314

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When the migration destination volume type is "Standard", "TPV", or "FTV"

The procedure to start a migration is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume that to be migrated and click [Start RAID Migration] in [Action].

[Start RAID Migration] cannot be clicked if one of the following volumes is selected.

• Volumes that are used for the Virtual Volume function (excluding "$VVOL_META")

• NAS expanded system volumes

• Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

2 Select "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool" for "Migration Destination". Set the volume information after migration, select the destination RAID group, the TPP, or the FTRP.

■ When migrating an External Volume

■ When migrating the other volumes

315

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Setting Volume

• Volume Capacity

• FTSP Priority

• Encryption

• Deduplication

• Compression

• Allocation

• Data Sync after Migration

• Start Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity after migration

• Data Integrity

● Select Migration Destination

• Select Migration Destination

If the migration source is an ODX Buffer volume, select "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier

Pool" for "Migration Destination".

When a RAID group or a TPP is configured with SSDs, "SSD" is displayed for the "Drive Type" field regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

3 Click the [Start] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Migration starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

If the "Provisioned Capacity" (or the total logical capacity) of the volumes in the migration destination TPP exceeds the total capacity of the migration destination TPP (or if the "Provisioned Rate" (or the capacity rate) exceeds "100 %") after the migration was started, a warning message appears in the result screen.

Check the TPP used state and add drives to expand the TPP capacity as required. Check the [Thin Provisioning Pool Detail] screen for "Provisioned Rate". Refer to

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925)

for details.

End of procedure

316

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

■ When the migration destination volume is "WSV"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, check "Wide Stripe Size" for the WSV, the specifications of the existing RAID groups (RAID level, Stripe Depth, drive type, disk speed, and number of member drives), and the RAID group number of all the concatenated RAID groups. The following describes how to check the specifications.

(1) Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link of the migration source WSV in the volume list.

(2) A detailed information screen for the WSV is displayed. Check "Wide Stripe Size" in the [Basic] tab screen.

(3) Click the [Used RAID Group] tab to display the concatenation information of the WSV. Check "RAID Group

No." and "Concatenation Order" that are configured for the WSV. The display order of the RAID group information indicates the "Concatenation Order".

(4) Filter the RAID group list by the RAID group number that configures a WSV, and then click the [No.] link or the [Name] link of the RAID group. Any RAID group can be specified because the RAID groups in the

WSV have the same specifications.

(5) A detailed information screen for the RAID group is displayed. Check "RAID Level" and "Stripe Depth" in the [Basic] tab screen.

(6) Click the [Drive] tab to display the information of the drives that are configured for the RAID group.

Check "Type", "Speed", and "Number of Member Drives". For "Number of Member Drives", use the displayed number of drives.

The procedure to start a migration is as follows:

Procedure

Select the volume that to be migrated and click [Start RAID Migration] in [Action].

[Start RAID Migration] cannot be clicked if one of the following volumes is selected.

• Volumes that are used for the Virtual Volume function (excluding "$VVOL_META")

• NAS expanded system volumes

• Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

317

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select "Wide Striping Volume" for "Migration Destination". Input the volume capacity, the encryption status, the detailed information of volumes, and the selection information for the RAID groups.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Setting Volume

• Volume Capacity

• Encryption

● Wide Striping Volume Setting

WSVs are created by concatenating volumes that are the same size in multiple RAID groups. Input the volume information for the migration destination WSV and the selection information for the RAID groups, and then specify the RAID groups that are to be concatenated. For detailed information about

creating WSVs, refer to "Creating WSVs" (page 266)

When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, specifying the existing RAID groups is required. For details, refer to "Remarks" in

"When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page

317) .

• Select RAID Group Information

When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, select the same "Drive Type", "RAID Level",

"Number of Member Drives", and "Stripe Depth" as the migration source WSV. Refer to "Remarks" in

"When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page 317) for the procedure to check the specifica-

tions of an existing RAID group.

Drive Type

RAID Level

Number of Member Drives

3 Click the [Select RAID Groups] button.

 The [Select RAID Groups screen] screen appears.

318

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

Select the RAID group that is to be concatenated (multiple selections can be made).

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Select RAID Groups

• Checkbox to select RAID groups

• When increasing the number of concatenations for a WSV, select all of the existing RAID groups for concatenation and the new RAID groups. When reducing the number of concatenations for a WSV, select the RAID groups that will remain for concatenation from the existing RAID group list. For details, refer to "Remarks" in

"When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page 317)

• When the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED", setting the same "Encryption" settings (the set state of the key group) is recommended for all of the RAID groups that configure the WSV.

5 Click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The "Number of Concatenation RAID Groups" field is left blank, "1" is specified, or a value that is "65" or more is specified

• The maximum free space in the selected RAID group is smaller than the volume size that is to be concatenated

• LDE is being performed in the selected RAID group

• An ODX Buffer volume is selected as a migration source volume

To change the concatenation order of the RAID groups, select "Manual" for "Concatenation Order" in the

319

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Start RAID Migration

After selecting RAID groups is complete, click the [Start] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Migration starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

320

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Stop RAID Migration

This function stops migration.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function stops the migration currently in progress. Therefore, this function cannot be executed when migration is not being performed for the selected volume.

• Do not use this function to stop a data synchronization after the migration is completed. Refer to

"Stop External Volume Data Synchronization" (page 322) for details. If "Manual Stop" is selected for "Data Sync after

Migration" when a data migration is started for the Non-disruptive Storage Migration using the [Start RAID

Migration] function, the data synchronization state occurs.

• If migration is canceled, the reservation for FTV/TPV capacity optimization is released.

• When migration is stopped, data in the migration source volume can be accessed normally.

• This function can stop migrations whose migration source is an External Volume.

The procedure to stop migration is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume for which migration is to be stopped (multiple selections can be made) and click [Stop RAID Migration] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The RAID migration stops.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

321

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Stop External Volume Data Synchronization

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Stop External Volume Data Synchronization

This function stops the data synchronization between the migration source volume and the migration destination volume after the migration is completed and deletes the migration source volume.

This function is available only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

Volume Requirements for This Function

• Volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration" (or External Volumes)

• Volumes whose "Process" is "Migrating : Manual Stop"

• Volumes whose "Migration Status" in the [Volume Detail] screen is "Active" and whose "Progress" is "100 %" (or migration is completed)

After this function is executed, the volume number and the volume name of the migration destination are changed to the volume number and the volume name of the migration source.

The procedure to stop the data synchronization of the External Volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the migration source volume of the Non-disruptive Storage Migration whose data synchronization is to be stopped (multiple selections can be made) and click [Stop External Volume

Data Synchronization] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The data synchronization of the External Volume is stopped.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

322

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Forbid Advanced Copy

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Forbid Advanced Copy

This function protects a volume so that the volume cannot be registered as the copy destination volume of

Advanced Copy.

The [Forbid Advanced Copy] is a function that protects the data in the selected volumes by forbidding the volume to be the copy destination of the Advanced Copy sessions or restoration setting. When the Advanced Copy function is used by multiple software, the same volumes may be used by multiple software, resulting in unexpected data corruption. This function is available to protect the data in the copy source from being deleted.

"Standard", "WSV", "TPV", and "FTV" type volumes can be protected.

• If an Advanced Copy license is not registered, volume protection cannot be enabled.

• Do not protect the External Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration").

• The following volumes cannot be protected:

ODX Buffer volumes

NAS system volumes

Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

Veeam Snapshot Volumes

Volumes that are already protected

Volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function

Volumes that are already being used as the copy destination volumes can also be protected.

The procedure to protect a volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volume to be protected (multiple selections can be made) and click [Forbid Advanced

Copy] in [Action].

[Forbid Advanced Copy] cannot be clicked if one of the following volumes is selected.

• The volume type is not "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", or "FTV"

• The volume usage is "System" or "Veeam"

• The "Forbid Advanced Copy" setting for the volume is "Yes" or "ODX"

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the copy destination protect starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

323

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Permit Advanced Copy

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Permit Advanced Copy

This function releases the protected volumes.

Released volumes can be used as the copy destination volume.

The procedure to release a volume protection is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the protected volume to be released (multiple selections can be made) and click [Permit

Advanced Copy] in [Action].

[Permit Advanced Copy] cannot be clicked if one of the following volumes is selected.

• The volume type is not "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", or "FTV"

• The volume usage is "System" or "Veeam"

• The "Forbid Advanced Copy" setting for the volume is "No" or "ODX"

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Releasing copy destination protect starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

324

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Release Reservation

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Release Reservation

This function releases the reservation status of volumes that are specified by the host.

Reservation and release reservation of a volume is normally performed from the host. This function must be used only when a reservation of a volume cannot be released due to errors in the host.

This function provides the following features:

• Releasing the volume reservation status

• Releasing the volume persistent reservation status

• Deleting all the reservation keys that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Be sure to pay attention when releasing reserve status as it may cause data corruption. Check the status of the target volume before using this function.

• This function does not support Deduplication/Compression System Volumes.

The procedure to release the reservation status is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the volumes to release the reservation (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Release Reservation] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Releasing volume reservation status starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

325

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Modify Cache Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Cache Parameters

This function changes the cache parameters of each volume.

Performance of the storage system varies depending on the cache hit rate. The ETERNUS DX/AF detects sequentiality when a host requests Read/Write. If sequentiality is detected when a Read request is issued, the cache hit rate is improved by reading the sequential data into the cache memory in advance. The characteristics of Read/Write requests from the host depends on the system. Performance of the storage system may improve by specifying a cache parameter that is suitable for the system that is being used.

The following parameters can be specified:

• Cache Page Capacity

Specify the cache capacity that is used by volumes.

• Prefetch Limit (PL)

Specify the value to calculate the amount of data that is to be read from the drive in advance (amount of data to prefetch from the disk) when the cache detects the sequentiality of data access (Read IO).

• Force Prefetch Mode (FP)

Specify whether to perform prefetch even if the sequentiality of data access (Read IO) is not detected.

• Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Specify the number of processes that can be written back at the same time.

• Prefetch Sequential Detect Count (PSDC)

Specify the number of times for sequential data detection to determine the sequentiality of data access (Read

IO).

• Sequential Dirty Detect Count (SDDC)

Specify the number of times for sequential data detection to determine the sequentiality of data access (Write I/

O).

• Sequential Slope (SS)

A parameter to determine the sequentiality of data access (Read I/O). Specify the number of Logical Block

Addresses (LBAs) by which the previous I/O and the current I/O are considered as sequential data.

• Sequential Dirty Slope (SDS)

A parameter to determine the sequentiality of data access (Write I/O). Specify the number of LBAs by which the previous I/O and the current I/O are considered as sequential data.

• Sequential Parallel Multi I/O Count (SPMC)

A parameter to determine the sequentiality of data access (Read I/O and Write I/O). Specify the number of I/Os by which the previous I/O and the current I/O are considered as sequential data.

• Extreme Cache Pool

Specify whether to "Enable" or "Disable" EXCP for the volumes.

• For TPVs, specify the MWC for each TPP. Refer to

"Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page

581)

for details.

• Cache parameters cannot be changed when pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Cache parameters for Deduplication/Compression Volumes cannot be specified.

• Do not set the cache parameters for the External Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration").

The same cache parameter can be applied for multiple volumes in a single operation.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Cache Parameters" (page 1137)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Cache Parameters" (page 1307) .

326

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Modify Cache Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to modify cache parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which volume to change the cache parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Modify Cache Parameters] in [Action].

[Modify Cache Parameters] cannot be clicked if NAS expanded system volumes are selected.

Change the cache parameters.

Refer to "Volume types for which Cache Parameters are available" (page 328)

for the volume types for which the parameters can be specified.

If the [Default] button is clicked before the [Modify] button, the default cache parameters are restored.

If EXCP for the ETERNUS DX is enabled and the general status of the ETERNUS DX is "Not Ready", an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The cache parameter modification starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

327

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Modify Cache Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volume types for which Cache Parameters are available

Item

Cache Page Capacity

Prefetch Limit (PL)

Force Prefetch Mode

(FP)

Multi Writeback Count

(MWC)

Prefetch Sequential

Detect Count (PSDC)

Sequential Dirty Detect

Count (SDDC)

Sequential Slope (SS)

Sequential Dirty Slope

(SDS)

Sequential Parallel Multi

I/O Count (SPMC)

Extreme Cache Pool

Standard SDV SDPV

Available Available Available

Volume type

Standard (LUN concatenation)

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

TPV

N/A

Available

(*1)

Available

FTV

N/A

WSV

N/A

Available

Available N/A N/A Available Available N/A Available

Available: The parameter can be specified.

N/A: The parameter cannot be specified.

*1:

The cache parameter is specified for each TPP. Refer to "Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 581) for

details.

The cache parameters for FTVs cannot be set with ETERNUS Web GUI. Use ETERNUS CLI to set the parameters.

328

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Export Cache Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Export Cache Parameters

This function downloads the setting information of the cache parameters for all the volumes at the same time.

• Cache parameters that are specified with

"Modify Cache Parameters" (page 326) and

"Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 581) are exported.

• Cache parameters can be exported from "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", "FTV", "SDV", and "SDPV" type volumes. Note that "Cache Page Capacity" cannot be exported from "WSV", "TPV", and "FTV" type volumes. Note that "Extreme

Cache Pool" cannot be exported from "SDV" and "SDPV" type volumes.

• Cache parameters for Deduplication/Compression Volumes cannot be exported.

The procedure to export cache parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Export Cache Parameters] in [Action].

Click the [Export] button.

 Exporting of the cache parameters is executed.

After the cache parameters are exported, a dialog box to download the file appears.

3 Click the [Download] button.

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

329

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Export Cache Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Save the setting information file of the cache parameter.

The default file name is "CacheParam_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.txt".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen ( Step 3

) is displayed.)

 The cache parameter download starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

330

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Export Performance Information

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Export Performance Information

This function exports the following performance information in a single operation and saves it as a text file.

• Performance (Host I/O)

• Performance (Advanced Copy)

• Performance (CA)

• Performance (CM)

• Performance (Drive)

• Performance (PCIe Flash Module)

• If the performance monitoring is stopped, "0" is output for all the performance information.

• Note that the dedicated information for the NAS system performance (such as operations per second (OPS) and memory size for storing cache data) cannot be obtained with the ETERNUS Web GUI. Use ETERNUS CLI to obtain this information.

• "Performance (Host I/O)" is the performance information of volumes for Host I/O. Note that the performance information for Deduplication/Compression System Volumes cannot be obtained.

• "Performance (Advanced Copy)" is the performance information of volumes for the Advanced Copy function.

Note that the performance information for Deduplication/Compression System Volumes cannot be obtained.

• The target CA for exporting information of "Performance (CA)" is FC, iSCSI, FCoE, and SAS. The performance information for CAs that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is exported. Note that performance information for FC port which port mode is "Initiator" cannot be obtained.

• "Performance (Drive)" is the drive usage. Note that the performance information for External Drives cannot be obtained.

• "Performance (PCIe Flash Module)" is obtained only when PFMs are installed in the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600

S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, and the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• The "Extreme Cache Cache Hit Rate" is obtained only when EXC or EXCP is enabled for the ETERNUS DX. Note that a "-" (hyphen) is output for volumes where Extreme Cache and Extreme Cache Pool are disabled. Refer to

"Performance (Host I/O)" (page 806)

and

"Performance (Advanced Copy)" (page 812)

for details.

The procedure to download the performance information is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Export Performance Info] in [Action].

331

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Export Performance Information

Click the [Export] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The registered performance information in the ETERNUS DX/AF is exported.

After the performance information export is finished, a screen to execute downloading the file is displayed.

3 Click the [Download] button.

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

4 Save the downloaded performance information file.

The default file name is "Perform_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.txt".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen ( Step 3

) is displayed.)

 Downloading the performance information file starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

332

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Set ALUA

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set ALUA

This function sets Asymmetric Logical Unit Access (ALUA) for volumes.

ALUA can be set for "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", "TPV", and "FTV" type volumes that are to be mapped.

Use this function only when controlling paths for each volume. For normal operation, paths for all the volumes in the LUN group with the host affinity setting are controlled according to the "Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit

Access" setting of the host response that is allocated to the host group or the host.

• Rebooting the server is required after changing the ALUA settings.

• The ALUA setting is enabled when all of the following conditions are satisfied.

The target volume is registered in a LUN group.

The host affinity is set for the relevant LUN group.

The TPGS mode for the relevant host affinity setting of the host group or the TPGS mode for the host response that is assigned to the host is "Enable (Default)".

• When ALUA for the volume is not "Follow Host Response", ALUA is given priority over the "Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access" setting that is specified for the host group with the host affinity setting or for the host response that is assigned to the host.

• For volumes that are used for the Virtual Volume function, ALUA cannot be set.

•

For the ALUA setting of each volume, refer to "Performance (Host I/O)" (page 806)

• If the ALUA setting is not changed by using this function, "Follow Host Response" is specified for all of the volumes that can be mapped.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set ALUA" (page 1141)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set ALUA" (page 1308)

The procedure to set ALUA for volumes is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which volumes to set ALUA for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Set ALUA] in

[Action].

If a volume that cannot be mapped is selected, [Set ALUA] cannot be clicked. Conditions for volumes that cannot be mapped are as follows.

• "SDPV" or "Temporary" type volumes

• ODX Buffer volumes

• "Usage" is "File", "System", or "Migration"

333

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Set ALUA

Select a new ALUA.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● ALUA Settings

• New ALUA

3 Click the [Set] button

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of ALUA starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Performance (Host I/O)] screen.

End of procedure

334

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Set Volume QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Volume QoS

This function sets the bandwidth limit (maximum performance limit) for the volume.

By setting the volume QoS, the total performance from multiple CA ports to the target volume can be limited.

• The target volume types for this function are Standard, SDV, WSV, TPV (including NAS user volumes and Deduplication/Compression Volumes), and FTV. Note that a volume QoS cannot be set for ODX Buffer volumes, NAS backup volumes, NAS system volumes, and Deduplication/Compression System Volumes.

• Do not set a bandwidth limit for NAS user volumes and snapshot destination SDVs.

• Do not set the bandwidth limit for External Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration").

• This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled. If the QoS mode has been disabled, the host starts the operation within the configured bandwidth limit after the QoS mode is enabled.

• To set a bandwidth limit for the volumes that are used for the Virtual Volume function, use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• To check whether the QoS mode is enabled or disabled, check the "Action" field of the [Host-LU QoS] screen

under the [Connectivity] navigation. Refer to "Enable/Disable QoS" (page 465)

for details.

•

To limit the performance from a specific CA port to the target volume, set the Host-LU QoS. Refer to "Set Host-

LU QoS" (page 467) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Volume QoS" (page 1141)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Volume QoS" (page 1308)

The procedure to set bandwidth limit for each volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which volumes to set the bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made) and click [Set

QoS] in [Action].

2 Select a new bandwidth limit.

335

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Set Volume QoS

The main setting item is as follows.

● Volume QoS Setting

• New Bandwidth Limit

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the volume QoS starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Performance (QoS)] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

336

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Set Volume QoS Pattern

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Volume QoS Pattern

This function sets the QoS patterns of the volume.

The maximum bandwidth limit of the volume QoS can be changed by setting a volume QoS pattern.

If the Automated QoS function of ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser is used, set the IOPS and throughput values that correspond to the bandwidth limit (No.1 to No.15) in descending order. If values are not in descending order, the

Automated QoS function may not operate as expected.

• This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled.

• The volume QoS patterns set with this function are applied to the options of the volume QoS bandwidth limit.

Refer to

"Set Volume QoS" (page 335)

for details.

• The following QoS patterns can be set.

Host QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 472)

Port QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 473)

Host LUN QoS patterns

Refer to "Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 475) .

• The bandwidth limit can also be changed with the "set qos-bandwidth-limit" ETERNUS CLI command. If the bandwidth limit is changed by using ETERNUS CLI, that value is also applied to the bandwidth limit that is specified with ETERNUS Web GUI.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 1142) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 1308) .

The procedure to set the volume QoS pattern is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set Volume QoS Pattern] in [Action].

2 Specify parameters.

337

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Set Volume QoS Pattern

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● QoS Pattern Settings

• IOPS

• Throughput (MB/s)

3 Click the [Set] button.

The QoS patterns (No.1 - No.15) can be reset to the default state. Click the [Default] button to display the default state and click the [Set] button. Refer to

"The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings"" (page 1309)

for the settings content. Note that initializing a specific QoS pattern is not available.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The volume QoS pattern setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Performance (QoS)] screen.

End of procedure

338

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

This section describes snapshot management for NAS volumes.

Snapshot management for NAS volumes provides the following functions:

•

•

•

•

Set Snapshot

This function creates a snapshot destination SDV for a NAS user volume and sets an acquisition schedule.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

Snapshot acquisition methods

There are two methods to acquire a snapshot depending on the usage.

• Snapshots for file servers

The snapshot is set from ETERNUS Web GUI, ETERNUS CLI, or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser. Use this function to set the snapshot from ETERNUS Web GUI. In this case, "Automatic" is displayed in the "Mode" field of the [Snapshot] screen.

• Snapshots for virtual machines

The snapshot is set from VMware vSphere Web Client. Refer to "ETERNUS vCenter Plug-in User's Guide" for details. In this case, "Manual" is displayed in the "Mode" field of the [Snapshot] screen.

Initial Snapshot setting (*1)

• SDVs are automatically created in proportion to the specified number of generations.

• The logical capacity of SDVs is the same as the NAS user volumes. (*2)

• The base name for SDVs can be specified.

• The RAID group to store SDVs can be selected. (*3)

• If the collection mode is "Automatic", the acquisition schedule (day of the week and time) can be set.

• If the collection mode is "Automatic" and the snapshot setting is successfully completed, a snapshot is automatically acquired.

*1: "Initial snapshot setting" is when the snapshot is first configured from a non-configured state, or the first time a configuration is performed after the [Delete Snapshot] function has been executed.

*2: SDVs in proportion to the specified number of generations all have the same capacity.

*3: SDVs in proportion to the specified number of generations are stored in the selected RAID group.

Snapshot setting modification

• The number of generations can be changed.

• When increasing the number of generations, unused SDVs are automatically created.

• If the collection mode is "Automatic", the number of generations can be smaller than the number of snapshot sessions.

In this case, SDVs are deleted from the unused SDVs first, and then older generation SDVs.

• If the collection mode is "Automatic", the acquisition schedule (day of the week and time) can be changed.

• When the snapshot is "Active", the snapshot start state is continued.

339

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Requirements for RAID groups that store the snapshot destination SDVs

• The RAID group status is not " Broken", " No Drive Path", or " SED Locked"

• The maximum number of volumes or the maximum volume capacity that can be registered in a RAID group has not been reached

(SDVs are created in proportion to the specified number of generations in the same RAID group in each NAS user volume.)

• RAID groups where volumes are already created or are unused

(Snapshot destination SDVs for multiple NAS user volumes can be created in the same RAID group.)

• The RAID group must not belong to a TPP

• The RAID group must not belong to an FTRP

• The RAID group that is not registered as an REC Disk Buffer

• The RAID group that is not registered as an EXCP

Number of snapshot generation

The following table shows the maximum number of NAS user volumes and the maximum number of generations for each model.

Model

ETERNUS DX100 S4 (*2)

ETERNUS DX200 S4 (*2)

ETERNUS DX500 S4

ETERNUS DX600 S4

ETERNUS DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S3

With memory expansion (*3)

With memory expansion (*2)

With memory expansion (*3)

With memory expansion (*2)

ETERNUS DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S3

Maximum number of

NAS user volumes

Maximum number of generations

(per NAS user volume)

128

Maximum number of generations (*1)

(per ETERNUS DX)

128

256

128

256

*1: The total number of generations in the ETERNUS DX (or the total number of generations for the "Automatic" and "Manual" modes). For example, when the ETERNUS DX500 S4 is used and 64 generations of snapshots are created for two NAS user volumes, snapshots cannot be configured for the third NAS user volume.

*2: The maximum number of NAS user volumes and generations when "Memory Extension" described below is installed. For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3, "Memory Extension" is used in the Unified Storage environment. For the ETERNUS

DX200 S4/DX200 S3, "Memory Extension" is used in the Unified Storage environment or for the Deduplication/Compression function.

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

16GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L53 or later)

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

32GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L33 or later)

*3: The maximum number of NAS user volumes and generations when "Memory Extension" described below is installed.

ETERNUS DX100 S3

8GB/CM

ETERNUS DX200 S3

16GB/CM

340

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function cannot be used for a NAS user volume if the status is " Not Ready", " Broken", or

" Data Lost".

• If a meta cache redistribution is being performed at the scheduled time for a snapshot acquisition, the start time of the snapshot acquisition may be delayed.

• This function uses the same copy tables, SDP, and SnapOPC+ sessions as the Advanced Copy function. If the

SDP capacity becomes insufficient while the snapshot is being used, the snapshot acquisition may fail. To monitor the SDP capacity in advance, enabling the "SDP Usage Rate Over (Lv1, LV2, LV3)" event notifications is recommended. Refer to

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166)

for details.

• If the NAS user volume is updated and insufficient capacity cannot be supplemented with SDPVs, the

SnapOPC+ session that is used with snapshot is in an Error Suspend state.

• A copy table size according to the number of snapshot generations is required. For a (rough estimate of) NAS user volume capacity where the snapshot setting is available, refer to "Configuration Guide (NAS)".

• Because this function uses SnapOPC+ generation management, the copy table size must be set in advance.

The copy table size can be calculated using the formula (The table size for EC/REC and for OPC/QuickOPC/

SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC Restoration (S1)) described in "How to calculate the copy table size". The

number of generations is equivalent to the number of SnapOPC+ sessions. Refer to "How to calculate the copy table size" (page 1258)

for details.

• To set snapshots, SDPVs must be created in advance. Create encrypted SDPVs if the snapshot is acquired from the encrypted NAS user volumes. Create unencrypted SDPVs if the snapshot is acquired from the unencrypted

NAS user volumes. SDPVs with different encryption methods (encryption by CM or encryption by SED) from the

NAS user volumes can also be used.

• If the NAS user volumes created in the encrypted TPP are selected and this function is executed, SDVs encrypted by the CM are created as snapshot destinations.

• To change the snapshot destination SDV name or the storage destination RAID group, execute the [Delete

Snapshot] function and then use the [Set Snapshot] function again. If the [Delete Snapshot] function is executed, snapshots (SnapOPC+ sessions for all the generations), acquisition schedules for snapshots, and snap-

shot destination SDVs for all the generations are deleted. Refer to "Delete Snapshot" (page 343)

for details.

• For snapshot destination SDVs, "File" is displayed for the usage of the volume list and "NAS Snapshot" is dis-

played for the usage details. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

for details.

• Snapshot settings can be checked. Refer to

"Snapshot" (page 824)

for details.

•

The snapshot status (SnapOPC+ session status) can be checked. Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)"

(page 953) for details.

• The snapshot can be stopped. Refer to

"Stop Snapshot" (page 345) for details.

• After stopping the process, the snapshot process can be restarted. Refer to

"Start Snapshot" (page 344)

for details.

• The snapshot settings can be deleted. Refer to

"Delete Snapshot" (page 343) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Snapshot" (page 1143) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Snapshot" (page 1309)

The procedure to set snapshot is as follows:

■ Initial snapshot setting

Procedure

1 Select which NAS user volumes to set snapshot for and click [Set Snapshot] in [Action].

341

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

Input the snapshot information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Snapshot Setting

• Name

• Number of Generations

• Schedule

● Select RAID Group

• Radio buttons to select a RAID group

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• Encrypted SDPVs are not created when the NAS user volumes are encrypted (or when the total capacity of the encrypted area in the SDP is "0" (*1))

• Unencrypted SDPVs are not created when the NAS user volumes are not encrypted (or when the total capacity of the unencrypted area in the SDP is "0" (*1))

*1: Refer to "Snap Data Pool" (page 972)

for details about the total capacity of encrypted and unencrypted areas in the SDP.

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the snapshot starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Snapshot] screen.

End of procedure

■ Snapshot setting modification

Procedure

1 Select which NAS user volumes to set snapshot for and click [Set Snapshot] in [Action].

342

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

Input the snapshot information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Snapshot Setting

• Number of Generations

• Schedule

• If the number of generations is reduced when changing the settings, a warning message appears.

Check the parameter settings.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

SDVs for additional generations cannot be created (the maximum number of volumes has already been created)

SDVs for additional generations cannot be created (insufficient capacity)

The number of generations is smaller than the number of snapshot sessions (when "Manual" is selected for "Mode")

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the snapshot starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Snapshot] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Snapshot

This function deletes the snapshot configuration information.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

The following snapshot configuration information is deleted:

• Snapshot (SnapOPC+ sessions for all the generations)

• Snapshot acquisition schedule (number of generations, day of the week, and time)

• Snapshot destination SDVs for all the generations

343

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Requirements for Deleting Snapshot Configuration Information

• No copy sessions other than snapshots are set in the snapshot destination SDVs

• This function is available only when the snapshot status is "Active" or "Inactive" for the selected NAS user vol-

ume. Refer to "Snapshot" (page 824) for details about snapshot status.

• When acquiring the snapshot again after executing this function, register the snapshot configuration information. Refer to

"Set Snapshot" (page 339) for details.

The procedure to delete snapshot configuration information is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which NAS user volumes to delete snapshot for and click [Delete Snapshot] in [Action].

If the controller firmware version is V10L33 or later, multiple NAS user volumes cannot be selected at the same time. To delete snapshots in multiple NAS user volumes, select the volumes one at a time and then delete the snapshots.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The snapshot deletion starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Snapshot] screen.

End of procedure

Start Snapshot

This function restarts the snapshot acquisition.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

To acquire the snapshot again after deleting the snapshot settings, registration of the snapshot configuration

information is required. Refer to "Set Snapshot" (page 339)

for details.

The procedure to restart the snapshot acquisition is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which NAS user volumes to start snapshot for (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Start Snapshot] in [Action].

344

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Snapshot Management for NAS Volumes

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

[Start Snapshot] cannot be clicked if one of the following NAS user volumes is selected.

• Snapshot is not set

• Snapshot has already started

• The collection mode for snapshot is set to "Manual" (or the "Mode" setting for the selected snapshot is

"Manual")

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The snapshot starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Snapshot] screen.

End of procedure

Stop Snapshot

This function suspends the snapshot acquisition.

The snapshot that is being stopped cannot be acquired, but snapshots that have already been acquired before stopping the schedule are saved.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• This function stops snapshots (SnapOPC+ sessions for all generations).

• After stopping the process, the snapshot process can be restarted. Refer to

"Start Snapshot" (page 344)

for details.

The procedure to suspend the snapshot acquisition is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which NAS user volumes to stop snapshot for (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Stop Snapshot] in [Action].

[Stop Snapshot] cannot be clicked if one of the following NAS user volumes is selected.

• Snapshot is not set

• Snapshot is being stopped

• The collection mode for snapshot is set to "Manual" (or the "Mode" setting for the selected snapshot is

"Manual")

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The snapshot stops.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Snapshot] screen.

End of procedure

345

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

3. Volume Management

Delete External LU Information

This function deletes the External LU Information.

Use this function after the data migration is complete.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function must be performed after a Non-disruptive Storage Migration from a storage system other than the ETERNUS storage system to the ETERNUS DX/AF is complete. Do not use this function if the Non-disruptive

Storage Migration has been performed from the ETERNUS storage system to the ETERNUS DX/AF. If this function is used, the External LU Information is deleted and host access to the migration destination volume becomes unavailable.

• Before starting this function, stop the host access to the migration destination volume.

• After this function is performed, the server must be rebooted and the migration destination volume must be re-recognized.

• This function can be performed regardless of whether the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

• Performing this function changes the following.

The External LU Information (such as the UID, the vendor ID, and the product ID) of the volume is restored to the LU information of the local storage system

The value of "UID Mode" in the [Volume] screen is changed from "External" to "Default"

The procedure to delete the External LU Information is as follows:

Procedure

Select the volume to delete the External LU Information (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete External LU Info] in [Action].

[Delete External LU Info] cannot be clicked under the following conditions:

• A volume whose "Usage" is "Migration" (or an External Volume before or during a data migration) is selected

• A volume whose "UID Mode" is not "External" is selected

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the External LU Information starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Volume] screen.

End of procedure

346

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

4. Connectivity Management

This chapter describes connectivity management.

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Connectivity can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Connectivity

Host Affinity Management

Create Host Affinity

Display function

–

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

• Host Group

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

Delete Host Affinity

Modify Host Affinity

Host Group Management

Add FC/FCoE Host Group

Add iSCSI Host Group

Add SAS Host Group

–

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

• Host Group

• FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

• Host Group

• iSCSI Host in Host Group

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

• Host Group

• SAS Host in Host Group

• Host Group

Delete Host Group

Modify Host Group

Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)

Modify Host Group (iSCSI)

Modify Host Group (SAS)

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

• FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

• iSCSI Host in Host Group

• Connectivity (Basic Information)

• SAS Host in Host Group

• FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

• iSCSI Host in Host Group

• SAS Host in Host Group

• FC/FCoE Host in Host Group

• iSCSI Host in Host Group

• SAS Host in Host Group

347

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Functions in the Action area for Connectivity

CA Port Group Management

Create FC Port Group

Create iSCSI Port Group

Create SAS Port Group

Create FCoE Port Group

Delete CA Port Group

Modify CA Port Group

Modify FC Port Parameters

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters

Modify SAS Port Parameters

Modify FCoE Port Parameters

LUN Group Management

Host Response Management

Add Host Response

Delete Host Response

Modify Host Response

Modify CA Reset Group

Host-LU QoS Management

Start Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

Stop Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

348

–

• CA Port Group

Display function

• FC Port in Port Group

• iSCSI Port in Port Group

• SAS Port in Port Group

• FCoE Port in Port Group

–

• FC Port in Port Group

• iSCSI Port in Port Group

• LUN Group

–

• Host Response

–

• CA Reset Group

• Host-LU QoS

• FC/FCoE Host QoS in Host QoS

• iSCSI Host QoS in Host QoS

• SAS Host QoS in Host QoS

• FC Port QoS in Host QoS

• iSCSI Port QoS in Host QoS

• SAS Port QoS in Host QoS

• FCoE Port QoS in Host QoS

• LU QoS Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Functions in the Action area for Connectivity

NAS Management

Change NAS Server Name

Set DNS Server

Set Authentication Server

Initialize Meta Cache Distribution

Enable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

Disable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

–

• NAS

•

Display function

NAS Interface in NAS

Environment Settings in NAS

Quota Management in NAS

Meta Cache Distribution in NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

349

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host Affinity Management

This section describes host affinity management.

Host Affinity management provides the following functions:

•

Create Host Affinity

•

Delete Host Affinity

•

Modify Host Affinity

Create Host Affinity

This function creates a new host affinity configuration.

The following two methods are available for configuring host affinity depending on the connection target.

• "Host Group - CA Port Group"

• "Host - CA Port"

When host affinity is configured, the volumes that are referenced by host or CA port can be specified. The number of hosts that can be associated with the CA port using this function is determined based on the total number of hosts described below. Note that the maximum number of hosts is 256 (32 for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3).

• The number of member hosts in each host group that is associated with the CA port

• The number of hosts that do not belong to the host group that is associated with the CA port

• If a host group has been specified in the "Host Group" field of host affinity, all the member ports of the assigned "CA Port Group" have the affinity mode configured "ON".

• If "All" (any host) has been specified in the "Host Group" field of host affinity, all the member ports of the assigned "CA Port Group" have the affinity mode configured "OFF".

• When one CA port is registered in multiple CA port groups, and the host affinity setting has been configured on one of the CA port groups including the corresponding port, the same affinity mode is applied to all the CA port groups, which include the corresponding port, and also on the member ports.

• CA port groups or CA ports without a host affinity setting can be used for creating a host affinity regardless of whether the affinity mode is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).

• A host can be a member of multiple host groups. In addition, a CA port can be a member of multiple CA port groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

•

To change the settings of the host affinities, refer to "Modify Host Affinity" (page 361) .

• FC/FCoE host groups can configure host affinity with CA port groups with CA types "FC" or "FCoE".

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Host Affinity" (page 1146)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Host Affinity" (page 1310)

350

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

■ When "Host Group - CA Port Group" is selected for "Target Connection"

The procedure to create a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create Host Affinity] in [Action].

2 Click the [Browse...] button for the host group.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Select Host Group] screen appears.

3 Select the connection target.

■ When "Host Group" is selected

(1) Select a host group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

351

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When "All" is selected

(1) Select a host response, and click the [OK] button.

Select "All" when assigning CA port groups to any host instead of a specific host. If "All" is specified, a host response for the CA port group must be selected. In this case, "All" is displayed in the "All (host response name)" format.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

4 Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port group.

 The [Select CA Port Group] screen appears.

352

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Select a CA port group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• If a specific host group has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups for which the affinity mode is "OFF" are not displayed.

• If "All" has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups with any of the following conditions are not displayed:

The affinity mode is "ON"

Member CA ports that used in other CA port groups

CA port groups that are being used by other host affinities

6 Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

 The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

353

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• When "All" is selected for "Host Group", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512 onward are not displayed.

• LUN groups including volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function are not displayed.

8 To edit the path between a host and a CA port, click the [Edit] button for the path to be edited.

 The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

354

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Select whether to enable or disable the path between a host and a CA port.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● CA Port Group

• Checkbox to select paths

10 Click the [OK] button.

11 Confirm the host affinity setting and the path between the host and the CA port, click the [Create] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the host interface type of the host group and the CA type of the CA port group do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

• When the number of host affinities exceeds the maximum number per ETERNUS DX/AF

• When the number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

• When there are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the host

355

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The host affinity creation starts.

13 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

■ When "Host - CA Port" is selected for "Target Connection"

The procedure to create a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create Host Affinity] in [Action].

2 Click the [Browse...] button for the host.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

 The [Select Host] screen appears.

356

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Select the connection target.

■ When "Host" is selected

(1) Select a host to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The display returns to the initial screen.

■ When "All" is selected

(1) Select a host response, and click the [OK] button.

Select "All" when assigning CA ports to any host instead of a specific host. If "All" is specified, a host response for the CA port must be selected. In this case, "All" is displayed in the "All (host response name)" format.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

357

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port.

 The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

5 Select a CA port to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• If a specific host has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports for which the affinity mode is "OFF" are not displayed.

• If "All" has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports with any of the following conditions are not displayed:

The affinity mode is "ON"

The CA ports are used in the CA port group

The CA port is used by another host affinity

• CA ports that are used for the Storage Cluster function are not displayed.

358

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

7 Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• When "All" is selected for "Host", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512 onward are not displayed.

• LUN groups including volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function are not displayed.

359

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

After confirming the host affinity settings, click the [Create] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the host interface type of the host and the CA type of the CA port do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

• When the number of host affinities exceeds the maximum number per ETERNUS DX/AF

• When the number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

• When there are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the host

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

9 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The host affinity creation starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Host Affinity

This function deletes the registered host affinity in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

When a host affinity is deleted, the paths between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group" or the paths between "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group" are also deleted.

• When deleting host affinity, make sure to stop access from the host used in the deletion target host affinity setting.

• The following host affinities cannot be deleted. When deleting, use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

The CA port with the host affinity setting is used for the Storage Cluster function

The LUN group with the host affinity setting is used for the Storage Cluster function

The host with the host affinity setting is used for the Virtual Volume function

360

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to delete a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the host affinity to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete Host

Affinity] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The deletion of the host affinity starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Host Affinity

This function is used to perform the following modifications to the existing host affinity.

• Changing the "CA Port Group" allocation

• Changing the "CA Port" allocation

• Changing the "LUN Group" allocation

• Changing the path between the host and the port in "CA Port Group"

• Changing the "Host Response" allocation (only when "Host Group" or "Host" is "All")

The number of hosts that can be associated with the CA port using this function is determined based on the total number of hosts described below. Note that the maximum number of hosts is 256 (32 for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/

DX60 S3).

• The number of member hosts in each host group that is associated with the CA port

• The number of hosts that does not belong to the host group that is associated with the CA port

Refer to each sections for the following each operation.

• Adding or deleting hosts from the host group (

"Modify Host Group" (page 389) )

•

Adding or deleting member ports from the CA port group ( "Modify CA Port Group" (page 429)

)

• Adding, changing, or deleting volume allocation from the LUN group (

"Modify LUN Group" (page 454) )

•

Changing the host response that is specified for the host group ( "Modify Host Group" (page 389)

)

• Changing the host response that is specified for the host (

"Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 416)

, "Modify iSCSI Host"

(page 418)

"Modify SAS Host" (page 419) )

361

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When modifying an active host affinity, make sure to stop the access of the host which has been associated with the host affinity to be modified. The server must be rebooted after the host response is changed. The host response can be changed only if the host group or host is "All".

• CA port groups or CA ports without a host affinity setting can be used for creating a host affinity regardless of whether the affinity mode is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).

• A host affinity that is used for the Storage Cluster function cannot be modified with this function. When modifying, use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• Host affinities of which the Virtual Volume function is enabled cannot be modified by using ETERNUS Web GUI.

To change host affinities, use the ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• When the procedure in

"Modify Host Group" (page 389) is used to add a host to a host group, the paths

between the added host and all of the ports that are in the associated CA port group are configured.

•

When the procedure in "Modify CA Port Group" (page 429) is used to add a port to a CA port group, the paths

between all of the hosts in the host group and the added port are configured.

• FC/FCoE host groups can configure host affinity with CA port groups with CA types "FC" or "FCoE".

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Host Affinity" (page 1149) .

■ When selecting a host affinity for "Host Group - CA Port Group"

The procedure to modify a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the host affinity to be modified, and click [Modify Host Affinity] in [Action].

362

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Check the display contents of the host group.

The next step that needs to be performed depends on the display contents of the host group.

■ When the selected host group is "All (host response name)"

(1) Click the [Browse...] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0



The [Select Host Group] screen appears. Proceed to Step 3

■ When the host group is not "All (host response name)"

 Proceed to

Step 4 .

3 Select the host response that is to be assigned to any host, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

363

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port group.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Select CA Port Group] screen appears.

5 Select a CA port group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• If a specific host group has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups with any of the following conditions are not displayed:

The affinity mode is "OFF"

The CA port group is used by another host affinity

• If "All" has been selected in the "Host Group" field, CA port groups with any of the following conditions are not displayed:

The CA port group is used by another host affinity

Member CA ports that used in other CA port groups

364

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

7 Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• When "All" is selected for "Host Group", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512 onward are not displayed.

• LUN groups including volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function are not displayed.

365

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

To edit the path between a host and a CA port, click the [Edit] button for the path to be edited.

 The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

9 Select whether to enable or disable the path between a host and a CA port.

The main setting item is as follows.

● CA Port Group

• Checkbox to select paths

10 Click the [OK] button.

366

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Confirm the modified host affinity setting and the path between the host and the CA port, click the [Modify] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the host interface type of the host group and the CA type of the CA port group do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

• When the number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

• When there are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the host

12 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The modification of the host affinity starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

■ When selecting a host affinity for "Host - CA Port"

The procedure to modify a host affinity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the host affinity to be modified, and click [Modify Host Affinity] in [Action].

367

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Check the display contents of the host.

The next step that needs to be performed depends on the display contents of the host.

■ When the selected host is "All (host response name)"

(1) Click the [Browse...] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0



The [Select Host] screen appears. Proceed to Step 3 .

■ When the host is not "All (host response name)"

 Proceed to

Step 4 .

3 Select the host response that is to be assigned to any host, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

368

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Click the [Browse...] button for the CA port.

 The [Select CA Port] screen appears.

5 Select a CA port to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• If a specific host has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports with any of the following conditions are not displayed:

The affinity mode is "OFF"

The CA port is used by another host affinity

• If "All" has been selected in the "Host" field, CA ports with any of the following conditions are not displayed:

The CA port is used by another host affinity

The CA port is used in the CA port group

• CA ports that are used for the Storage Cluster function are not displayed.

369

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

Click the [Browse...] button for the LUN group.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Select LUN Group] screen appears.

7 Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• When "All" is selected for "Host", the LUN groups in which LUNs are specified from LUN#512 onward are not displayed.

• LUN groups including volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function are not displayed.

370

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Affinity Management

After confirming the host affinity settings, click the [Modify] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The host interface type of the host and the CA type of the CA port do not match

Note that the CA types of "FCoE" and "FC" are regarded as the same CA type.

• The number of hosts exceeds the maximum number per CA port

• There are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the host.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

9 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The modification of the host affinity starts.

10 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Connectivity] screen.

End of procedure

371

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host Group Management

This section describes host group management.

Host group management provides the following functions:

•

Add FC/FCoE Host Group

•

•

•

•

•

Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)

•

Modify Host Group (iSCSI)

•

Modify Host Group (SAS)

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Add FC/FCoE Host Group

This function creates a new FC host group and registers which hosts are members of this group.

A host group is a group of hosts (HBAs) that is allowed to access the volume (LUN group). The Host Affinity is specified for each host group.

The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered

Model Number of host groups (*1) per storage system

Number of hosts

(HBAs) (*2) per storage system

128 ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

512

1536

512

1024

1024 (4096) (*3)

1024

8192

1024

1024 (4096) (*3)

1024

Number of hosts

(HBAs) per CA port

256

Number of hosts

(HBAs) per host group

*1: The total number of host groups irrespective of the interface types.

*2: The total number of hosts irrespective of the interface types.

*3: Values in parentheses indicate the number of hosts when "Expand Host Mode" is "Enable". Refer to

"Setup Subsystem

Parameters" (page 76)

for details.

372

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. Create a new host group when registering a host with ETERNUS Web GUI by using this function.

• A host can be a member of multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

• Refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type to assign an appropriate host response to the created host group. A host response has a recommended pattern which has been prepared for each OS

type. Refer to "Recommended patterns of host responses" (page 458) for details. If an appropriate host

response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• The host response that is specified for a host group is applied to all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups to

which the target host belongs. Refer to "Changing the host response when adding a host to multiple host groups" (page 377)

for details.

• If a single host belongs to multiple host groups, pay attention to the changes in the host response.

• When creating the host group that is used for the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function, allocate the same host response as the host group that accesses the migration source volume in the external storage system.

•

To perform the following operations, refer to "Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)" (page 389) .

Changing the host group settings

Adding a host to an existing host group

• To change the host name or WWN, use the procedure in

"Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 416) .

• An FC host and an FCoE host can be members of the same host group. Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 1150)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 1311) .

The procedure to create an FC host group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add FC/FCoE Host Group] in [Action].

373

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input a host group name to be created, and select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

• Host Response

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

(2) Select a host that is to be registered from the FC host list.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

374

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

Filter setting

Filter

WWN

Host Group

Host Response

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Description

Input the WWN of the FC/FCoE host that is to be displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the host group to which the FC/FCoE host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the host response that is assigned to the FC/FCoE host that is to be displayed.

• If the WWN is not displayed when clicking the [Rediscover] button, make sure that there is no error in the connection environment, such as the connection between the host and the switch, and the CA port settings of the ETERNUS DX/AF. If there is no error in the connection environment, contact the Support

Department, or specify the WWN manually.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

The total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(3) Click the [Add] button.

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

 The [Add FC/FCoE Host] screen appears.

375

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

(3) Manually specify the WWN of the host that is to be registered.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Setting

• WWN

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

(5)

Repeat Step (2)

through Step (4)

to set more WWNs.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

• The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(6) After adding the FC host is complete, click the [Add] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the FC host group starts.

376

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

Click the [Continue] button to continue registering FC host groups.

End of procedure

■ Changing the host response when adding a host to multiple host groups

When a host that already belongs to an existing host group is added to a newly created host group, the host response of the new host group is applied to the host. The host response of the existing host group to which the target host belongs is also changed. Refer to the following for details.

[Example 1] When hosts are added to a newly created host group

When a new host group "Host_G3" (host response: HR_1) is created and "Host-3" and "Host-4" are added to that host group

• Configuration before the hosts are added

Host group (Host response)

Host_G1 (Default)

Host_G2 (Default)

Host-1

Host-2

Host-3

Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Default

• Configuration after the hosts are added

After the hosts are added, the same host response is applied to Host_G1, Host_G2, and Host_G3.

Host group (Host response) Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Host_G1 (HR_1)

Host_G2 (HR_1)

Host_G3 (HR_1)

Host-1

Host-2

Host-3

Host-4

HR_1

• Details

The details on how the host response that is applied to the host is changed are as follows.

The host response for Host-3 is changed from "Default" to "HR_1" (the host response for Host_G3).

Since the host response for Host-3 is changed, the host response for Host_G2 to which Host-3 belongs is also changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_2, which is the member host of Host_G2, is changed from "Default" to

"HR_1".)

Since the host response for Host-2 is changed, the host response for Host_G1 to which Host-2 belongs is also changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_1, which is the member host of Host_G1, is changed from "Default" to

"HR_1".)

377

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

[Example 2] When a host is added to an existing host group

When "Host-3" is added to the existing host group "Host_G3" (host response: HR_1)

• Configuration before the host is added

Host group (Host response)

Host_G1 (Default)

Host_G2 (Default)

Host-1

Host-2

Host-3

Host-4

Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Default

HR_1 Host_G3 (HR_1)

• Configuration after the host is added

After the host is added, the same host response is applied to Host_G1, Host_G2, and Host_G3.

Host group (Host response) Member host Host response that is allocated to the host

Host_G1 (HR_1)

Host_G2 (HR_1)

Host_G3 (HR_1)

Host-1

Host-2

Host-3

Host-4

HR_1

• Details

The details on how the host response that is applied to the host is changed are as follows.

The host response for Host-3 is changed from "Default" to "HR_1" (the host response for Host_G3).

Since the host response for Host-3 is changed, the host response for Host_G2 to which Host-3 belongs is also changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_2, which is the member host of Host_G2, is changed from "Default" to

"HR_1".)

Since the host response for Host-2 is changed, the host response for Host_G1 to which Host-2 belongs is also changed from "Default" to "HR_1".

(The host response for Host_1, which is the member host of Host_G1, is changed from "Default" to

"HR_1".)

378

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add iSCSI Host Group

This function creates a new iSCSI host group and registers which hosts are members of this group.

A host group is a group of hosts (HBAs) that is allowed to access the volume (LUN group). The Host Affinity is specified for each host group.

The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF varies depending on the model.

Refer to "The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered" (page 372)

for details.

• Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. Create a new host group when registering a host with ETERNUS Web GUI by using this function.

• A host can be a member of multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

type. Refer to "Recommended patterns of host responses" (page 458) for details. If an appropriate host

response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• The host response that is specified for a host group is applied to all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups to

which the target host belongs. Refer to "Changing the host response when adding a host to multiple host groups" (page 377)

for details.

• If a single host belongs to multiple host groups, pay attention to the changes in the host response.

• Unlike ETERNUS Web GUI, ETERNUS CLI can register two iSCSI hosts that have the same iSCSI name by setting an IP address for one of these iSCSI hosts and by not setting an IP address for the other iSCSI host. However, if iSCSI hosts are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF in this way, iSCSI hosts cannot be added using ETERNUS Web

GUI. Avoid this configuration when using ETERNUS Web GUI and ETERNUS CLI together. If both iSCSI hosts already exist, use ETERNUS CLI to specify an IP address for the iSCSI host without the IP address.

•

To perform the following operations, refer to "Modify Host Group (iSCSI)" (page 393) .

Changing the host group settings

Adding a host to an existing host group

•

To change the iSCSI host information, use the procedure in "Modify iSCSI Host" (page 418) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 1152) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 1311) .

The procedure to create an iSCSI host group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add iSCSI Host Group] in [Action].

379

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input a host group name to be created, and select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

• Host Response

3 Register a host in a host group in the following procedures, and click the [Add] button.

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

The following hosts are displayed in the [Now Connected] tab:

Hosts that are connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA but are not registered in the ETERNUS DX/

AF (*1)

*1: "Host that is not registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF" indicates that a host with the same iSCSI name, IP version, and Alias Name as the target host is not registered in the storage system. The host is regarded as unregistered host even if a host with the same iSCSI name, IP version, Alias Name, and different IP address is already registered. The obtained "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP Address", and "Alias Name" are displayed.

Hosts that are connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA and registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

Hosts that are not connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA but are registered in the ETERNUS DX/

Click the [Rediscover] button to update the iSCSI host list.

380

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(2) Select a host to be registered from the iSCSI host list and register the iSCSI host information (the IP address and the Alias name, etc.) to the selected host.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

• IP Version

• IP Address

• Alias Name

• CHAP User ID

• Change CHAP Password

• CHAP Password

• Confirm CHAP Password

Filter setting

Filter iSCSI Name

Host Group

Host Response

Description

Input the iSCSI name of the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

When not using the iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the host group to which the iSCSI host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the host response that is assigned to the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

• If the iSCSI host information is not displayed when clicking the [Rediscover] button, make sure that there is no error in the connection environment, such as the connection between the host and the switch, and the CA port settings of the ETERNUS DX/AF. If there is no error in the connection environment, contact the Support Department or manually specify the iSCSI host information.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

The "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is already registered

The "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Version" is already registered

The total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

381

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

(3) Click the [Add] button.

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Add iSCSI Host] screen appears.

(3) Specify the iSCSI host information of the host to be registered.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Setting

• iSCSI Name

Refer to Step (2)

"When registering a host by selecting from the host list" (page 380)

for other settings.

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

382

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(5)

Refer to "The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered" (page 372)

to set more iSCSI hosts.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is already registered

• The "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Version" is already registered

• The total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

• The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(6) After adding the iSCSI host is complete, click the [Add] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the iSCSI host group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

Click the [Continue] button to continue registering iSCSI host groups.

End of procedure

383

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ IPv6 Address Notation

Since the IPv6 address is 128-bit and extremely long, this address is displayed using "xxxx", which describes 16-bit in hexadecimals as being one block that is separated by colons (":").

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

• Use 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters) for inputting an IPv6 address.

• The current setting is displayed with 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

• Up to 128-bit

• The first 64-bit (prefix) of the link local address is fixed to "fe80::"

The following three abbreviation methods are available for IPv6 addresses:

(1) Omission of the first "0" of a block that follows consecutive zeros.

[Example] 2001:1000:0120:0000:0000:0123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

(2) Replacement of "0000" blocks with "0".

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

(3) Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is performed only once.

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

2001:1000:120::123:0:0 is OK

2001:1000:120::123:: is not allowed

(Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is allowed only once.)

The following IP addresses cannot be specified:

• Link local addresses (the address starts with "fe80::") for which all of the values for the low 64-bit are "0"

• Connect IP addresses (*1) for which the first 3-bit are not "001" or the first 7-bit are not "1111110"

*1: The connect IP address indicates either a "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address".

• The first 64-bit of the gateway is "fe80::" and all of the values for low 64-bit are "0"

• Network addresses for which the first 3-bit of the gateway are "001"

• Network addresses for which the first 7-bit of the gateway are "1111110"

• DNS server IP addresses for which the first 3-bit are not "001" or the first 7-bit are not "1111110"

Add SAS Host Group

This function creates a new SAS host group and registers which hosts are members of this group.

A host group is a group of hosts (HBAs) that is allowed to access the volume (LUN group). The Host Affinity is specified for each host group.

The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX varies depending on the model.

for details.

384

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. If this function is used to register a host to the

ETERNUS DX from ETERNUS Web GUI, a new host group is also created.

• A host can be a member of multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

type. Refer to "Recommended patterns of host responses" (page 458) for details. If an appropriate host

response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• The host response that is specified for a host group is applied to all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups to

which the target host belongs. Refer to "Changing the host response when adding a host to multiple host groups" (page 377)

for details.

• If a single host belongs to multiple host groups, pay attention to the changes in the host response.

•

To perform the following operations, refer to "Modify Host Group (SAS)" (page 398)

Changing the host group settings

Adding a host to an existing host group

•

To change the host name or SAS address, use the procedure in "Modify SAS Host" (page 419)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add SAS Host Group" (page 1155) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add SAS Host Group" (page 1311)

The procedure to create a SAS host group is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Add SAS Host Group] in [Action].

2 Input a host group name to be created, and select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

385

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

• Host Response

3 Register a host in a host group in the following procedures.

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

(2) Select a host that is to be registered from the SAS host list.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

Filter setting

Filter

SAS Address

Host Group

Host Response

Description

Input the SAS address of the SAS host that is to be displayed.

When not using the SAS address for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the host group to which the SAS host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the host response that is assigned to the SAS host that is to be displayed.

• If the SAS address is not displayed when clicking the [Rediscover] button, make sure that there is no error in the connection environment, such as the connection between the host and the switch, and the

CA port settings of the ETERNUS DX. If there is no error in the connection environment, contact the Support Department or manually specify the SAS address.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

The total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

(3) Click the [Add] button.

386

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Add SAS Host] screen appears.

(3) Manually specify the SAS address of the host that is to be registered.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Setting

• SAS Address

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

(5)

Refer to "Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)" (page 389) to modify FC/FCoE host groups.

to set more SAS addresses.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The total number of host groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

• The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

387

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

(6) After adding the SAS host is complete, click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the SAS host group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

Click the [Continue] button to continue registering SAS host groups.

End of procedure

Delete Host Group

This function deletes a host group. When a host group is deleted, the hosts, which belong to the host group, are also deleted.

The host group, of which host affinity settings have been configured, cannot be deleted.

The procedure to delete a host group is as follows:

Procedure

Select the host group to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete Host

Group] in [Action].

The host group, of which host affinity settings have been configured (the status of the host group is

"Active"), cannot be deleted.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the host group starts.

388

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Host Group

This function performs the following modifications to the existing host group.

• Changing the "Host Group Name" settings

• Changing the "Host Response" allocation

• Changing the "Host" settings (including addition and deletion of member hosts in a host group)

Operation screens for modifying host groups vary with the interface types.

•

•

Refer to "Modify Host Group (iSCSI)" (page 393) to modify iSCSI host groups.

•

Refer to "Modify Host Group (SAS)" (page 398)

to modify SAS host groups.

Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)

This function performs the following modifications to the existing FC/FCoE host group.

• Changing the "Host Group Name" settings

• Changing the "Host Response" allocation

• Changing the "Host" settings (including addition and deletion of member hosts in a host group)

Hosts can be added to host groups which the host affinity setting has been already configured, or deleted from host groups.

If a host is added, the host affinity setting is automatically configured to the host, as a host group member.

If a host is deleted, the host affinity setting is cleared from the corresponding host.

The number of hosts that can be registered varies depending on each model. Refer to "The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered" (page 372)

for details.

• To perform the following operations, stop the host access that is associated with host affinity.

Changing the "Host Response" allocation

The server must be rebooted after the host response allocation is changed. Refer to

"Requirements for changing parameters" (page 460)

for details.

Deleting "Host" from the host group

• To perform the following operations, stopping the host access that is associated with host affinity is not required.

Changing "Host Group Name"

Adding "Host" to the host group

• Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. It is not possible to delete all hosts from a host group.

• A host that has been registered with ETERNUS Web GUI by using this function belongs to one of the host groups.

• A host can be a member of multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

389

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type to assign an appropriate host response to the host group. A host response has a recommended pattern which has been prepared for each OS type. Refer to

for details. If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• The host response that is specified for a host group is applied to all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups to

which the target host belongs. Refer to "Changing the host response when adding a host to multiple host groups" (page 377)

for details.

• When changing the host response for the host group, the host responses of the other host groups to which the target host belongs are also changed.

• If a single host belongs to multiple host groups, pay attention to the changes in the host response.

• When a host was added to a host group, of which the host affinity setting has been configured, paths between all the ports with the host affinity setting and the added host will be configured. To modify the path between a host and a port, refer to

"Modify Host Affinity" (page 361) .

• When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the path from the host to the port is also deleted.

• To change the host name or WWN, use the procedure in

"Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 416) .

•

To create a new host group and register hosts, use the procedure in "Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 372)

• An FC host and an FCoE host can be members of the same host group. Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)" (page 1156) .

The procedure to modify an FC host group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the FC host group to be changed, and click [Modify Host Group] in [Action].

2 Input a new host group name, or re-select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

390

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

• Host Response

• Before changing a host response, check the LUN setting state. If LUNs that are LUN#256 onward are used, the referable LUN setting cannot be changed to a "256 LUN" host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

• When hosts are to be added in an existing host group and the relevant host already belongs to another host group, the host response setting is also changed for that host group. If a LUN group belongs to a host affinity setting for another host group and this LUN group uses LUNs from LUN#256 onward, the host response setting cannot be changed to "256 LUN".

3 Add or delete a host in a host group in the following procedures.

■ When adding or deleting a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Registered And Now Connected] tab.

(2) Add or delete hosts.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

Filter setting

WWN

Filter

Other Host Group

Host Response

Description

Input the WWN of the FC/FCoE host that is to be displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the other host group to which the FC/FCoE host that is to be displayed belongs.

"Other Host Group" indicates the host groups to which the FC/FCoE host belongs other than the one that is selected when this function is started.

When not using the other host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the host response that is assigned to the FC/FCoE host that is to be displayed.

391

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Department or manually specify the WWN.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

A host cannot see some LUNs

The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(3) Click the [Modify] button.

■ When adding a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

 The [Add FC/FCoE Host] screen appears.

(3) Manually specify the WWN of the host to be added.

392

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Setting

• WWN

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

(5)

Repeat Step (2)

through Step (4)

to set more WWNs.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• A host cannot see some LUNs

• The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(6) After adding or deleting FC hosts is complete, click the [Modify] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the FC host group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Host Group (iSCSI)

This function performs the following modifications to the existing iSCSI host group.

• Changing the "Host Group Name" settings

• Changing the "Host Response" allocation

• Changing the "Host" settings (including addition and deletion of member hosts in a host group)

Hosts can be added to host groups which the host affinity setting has been already configured, or deleted from host groups.

If a host is added, the host affinity setting is automatically configured to the host, as a host group member.

If a host is deleted, the host affinity setting is cleared from the corresponding host.

The number of hosts that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF varies depending on the model. Refer to

"The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered" (page 372)

for details.

393

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• To perform the following operations, stop the host access that is associated with host affinity.

Changing the "Host Response" allocation

The server must be rebooted after the host response allocation is changed. Refer to

"Requirements for changing parameters" (page 460)

for details.

Deleting "Host" from the host group

• To perform the following operations, stopping the host access that is associated with host affinity is not required.

Changing "Host Group Name"

Adding "Host" to the host group

• Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. It is not possible to delete all hosts from a host group.

• A host that has been registered with ETERNUS Web GUI by using this function belongs to one of the host groups.

• A host can be a member of multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

for details. If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• The host response that is specified for a host group is applied to all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups to

which the target host belongs. Refer to "Changing the host response when adding a host to multiple host groups" (page 377)

for details.

• When changing the host response for the host group, the host responses of the other host groups to which the target host belongs are also changed.

• If a single host belongs to multiple host groups, pay attention to the changes in the host response.

NUS Web GUI. Avoid this configuration when using ETERNUS Web GUI and ETERNUS CLI together. If both iSCSI hosts already exist, use ETERNUS CLI to specify an IP address for the iSCSI host without the IP address.

"Modify Host Affinity" (page 361) .

• When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the path from the host to the port is also deleted.

•

To change the iSCSI host information, use the procedure in "Modify iSCSI Host" (page 418) .

•

To create a new host group and register hosts, use the procedure in "Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 379)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Host Group (iSCSI)" (page 1156)

The procedure to modify an iSCSI host group is as follows:

Procedure

Select the iSCSI host group to be changed, and click [Modify Host Group] in [Action].

394

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input a new host group name, or re-select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

• Host Response

• Before changing a host response, check the LUN setting state. If LUNs that are LUN#256 onward are used, the referable LUN setting cannot be changed to a "256 LUN" host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

3 Add or delete a host in a host group in the following procedures.

■ When adding or deleting a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Registered And Now Connected] tab.

The following hosts are displayed in the [Registered And Now Connected] tab:

Hosts that belong to the selected host group

Hosts that are connected to an iSCSI-CA or an iSCSI-CA/RA but are not registered in the ETERNUS DX/

AF (*1)

Hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF but do not belong to the host group

Hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF and belong to the host group

Click the [Rediscover] button to update the iSCSI host list.

395

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(2) Add or delete iSCSI hosts and register the iSCSI host information (the IP address and the Alias name, etc.) to the added host.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

• IP Version

• IP Address

• Alias Name

• CHAP User ID

• Change CHAP Password

• CHAP Password

• Confirm CHAP Password

Filter setting

Filter iSCSI Name

Other Host Group

Host Response

Description

Input the iSCSI name of the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

When not using the iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the other host group to which the iSCSI host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the other host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the host response that is assigned to the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

When the "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is already registered

When the "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Version" is already registered

A host cannot see some LUNs

The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

396

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

(3) Click the [Modify] button.

■ When adding a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Add iSCSI Host] screen appears.

(3) Manually specify the iSCSI host information of the host to be added.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Setting

• iSCSI Name

Refer to Step (2)

"When adding or deleting a host by selecting from the host list" (page 395)

for other settings.

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

397

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(5)

"The number of host groups and hosts that can be registered" (page 372) for details.

to set more iSCSI hosts.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is already registered

• When the "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Version" is already registered

• A host cannot see some LUNs

• The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(6) After adding or deleting iSCSI hosts is complete, click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the iSCSI host group starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Host Group (SAS)

This function performs the following modifications to the existing SAS host group.

• Changing the "Host Group Name" settings

• Changing the "Host Response" allocation

• Changing the "Host" settings (including addition and deletion of member hosts in a host group)

Hosts can be added to host groups which the host affinity setting has been already configured, or deleted from host groups.

If a host is added, the host affinity setting is automatically configured to the host, as a host group member.

If a host is deleted, the host affinity setting is cleared from the corresponding host.

The number of hosts that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX varies depending on the model. Refer to

398

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• To perform the following operations, stop the host access that is associated with host affinity.

Changing the "Host Response" allocation

The server must be rebooted after the host response allocation is changed. Refer to

"Requirements for changing parameters" (page 460)

for details.

Deleting "Host" from the host group

• To perform the following operations, stopping the host access that is associated with host affinity is not required.

Changing "Host Group Name"

Adding "Host" to the host group

• Registration of the host is necessary to create a host group. It is not possible to delete all hosts from a host group.

• A host that has been registered with ETERNUS Web GUI by using this function belongs to one of the host groups.

• A host can be a member of multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

for details. If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host group, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• The host response that is specified for a host group is applied to all the member hosts in the target group.

When a host belongs to multiple host groups, the same host response must be applied for all the groups to

which the target host belongs. Refer to "Changing the host response when adding a host to multiple host groups" (page 377)

for details.

• When changing the host response for the host group, the host responses of the other host groups to which the target host belongs are also changed.

• If a single host belongs to multiple host groups, pay attention to the changes in the host response.

"Modify Host Affinity" (page 361) .

• When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the path from the host to the port is also deleted.

•

To change the host name or SAS address, use the procedure in "Modify SAS Host" (page 419)

•

To create a new host group and register hosts, use the procedure in "Add SAS Host Group" (page 384)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Host Group (SAS)" (page 1157)

The procedure to modify a SAS host group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the SAS host group to be changed, and click [Modify Host Group] in [Action].

399

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input a new host group name, or re-select a host response to be assigned to the host group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

• Host Response

• Before changing a host response, check the LUN setting state. If LUNs that are LUN#256 onward are used, the referable LUN setting cannot be changed to a "256 LUN" host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

3 Add or delete a host in a host group in the following procedures.

■ When adding or deleting a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Registered And Now Connected] tab.

(2) Add or delete hosts.

400

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Group Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

Filter setting

Filter

SAS Address

Other Host Group

Host Response

Description

Input the SAS address of the SAS host that is to be displayed.

When not using the SAS address for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the other host group to which the SAS host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the other host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the host response that is assigned to the SAS host that is to be displayed.

CA port settings of the ETERNUS DX. If there is no error in the connection environment, contact the Support Department or manually specify the SAS address.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

A host cannot see some LUNs

The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

(3) Click the [Modify] button.

■ When adding a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

 The [Add SAS Host] screen appears.

401

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

(3) Manually specify the SAS address of the host to be added.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Setting

• SAS Address

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

(5)

Repeat Step (2)

through Step (4)

to set more SAS addresses.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• A host cannot see some LUNs

• The total number of hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

(6) After adding or deleting SAS hosts is complete, click the [Modify] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the SAS host group starts.

402

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Group] screen.

End of procedure

Add FC/FCoE Host

This function registers a new FC/FCoE host (HBA).

The following list shows the maximum number of hosts (*1) that can be registered for each ETERNUS DX/AF model.

The maximum number of hosts that can be registered

• ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

128

• ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3 and ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

1024

• ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

1024 (4096) (*2)

• ETERNUS DX8100 S3

1024

• ETERNUS DX8700 S3 and ETERNUS DX8900 S3

8192

• ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

1024

• ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

1024 (4096) (*2)

• ETERNUS DX200F

1024

*1: The total number of hosts irrespective of the interface types.

*2: Values in parentheses indicate the number of hosts when "Expand Host Mode" is "Enable". Refer to

"Setup Subsystem

Parameters" (page 76)

for details.

• This function is only displayed when the "Use "Add Host"" checkbox is selected for the "Function to Add Host" field in "Web GUI Settings". This checkbox is not selected (this function is not displayed) by default. Refer to

"Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

• Note that this function does not create a host group. The ETERNUS DX/AF also has a function that creates new host groups to register hosts as its members. Refer to

"Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 372) for details.

• Hosts that are registered with this function can belong to multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

• Refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type to assign an appropriate host response to the host that is to be registered. A host response has a recommended pattern which has been prepared for

each OS type. Refer to "Recommended patterns of host responses" (page 458) for details.

If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• To change the FC host information, use the [Modify FC/FCoE Host] function. Refer to

"Modify FC/FCoE Host"

(page 416) for details.

• The host affinity setting can be specified for each FC host. Refer to

"Create Host Affinity" (page 350) for details.

• Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add FC/FCoE Host" (page 1157) .

403

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add FC/FCoE Host" (page 1311) .

The procedure to register an FC host is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add FC/FCoE Host] in [Action].

2 Add a host in the ETERNUS DX/AF in the following procedures.

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

(2) Select the host that is to be registered from the FC host list and input the FC host information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

• Name

• Host Response

Filter setting

WWN

Filter Description

Input the WWN of the FC/FCoE host that is to be displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

Department, or specify the WWN manually.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

The number of hosts that are to be registered is "0"

The number of registered hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(3) Click the [Add] button.

404

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Add FC/FCoE Host] screen appears.

(3) Specify the host information of the FC host that is to be registered.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Setting

• Name

• WWN

• Host Response

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

405

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(5)

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

when registering multiple FC hosts.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The number of hosts that are to be registered is "0"

• The number of registered hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(6) After registering the FC host is complete, click the [Add] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the FC host starts.

Click the [Continue] button to continue registering FC hosts.

End of procedure

Add iSCSI Host

This function registers a new iSCSI host (HBA).

The following list shows the maximum number of hosts (*1) that can be registered for each ETERNUS DX/AF model.

The number of hosts that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF varies depending on the model. Refer to

"The maximum number of hosts that can be registered" (page 403)

for details.

406

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

"Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

• Note that this function does not create a host group. The ETERNUS DX/AF also has a function that creates new host groups to register hosts as its members. Refer to

"Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 379) for details.

• Hosts that are registered with this function can belong to multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

each OS type. Refer to "Recommended patterns of host responses" (page 458) for details.

If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• To change the iSCSI host information, use the [Modify iSCSI Host] function. Refer to

"Modify iSCSI Host" (page

418)

for details.

•

The host affinity setting can be specified for each iSCSI host. Refer to "Create Host Affinity" (page 350) for

details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add iSCSI Host" (page 1158) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add iSCSI Host" (page 1311) .

The procedure to register an iSCSI host is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add iSCSI Host] in [Action].

2 Add a host in the ETERNUS DX/AF in the following procedures.

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

All of the unregistered hosts that are connected to the iSCSI-CAs or the iSCSI-CA/RAs and that can be recognized by the ETERNUS DX/AF (*1) are displayed. Select the hosts that are to be registered in the ETER-

NUS DX/AF and specify the iSCSI host information.

407

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(2) Select the host that is to be registered from the iSCSI host list and input the iSCSI host information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

• Name

• Host Response

• IP Version

• IP Address

• Alias Name

• CHAP User ID

• CHAP Password

• Confirm CHAP Password

Filter setting

Filter iSCSI Name

Description

Input the iSCSI name of the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

When not using the iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is already registered

• The "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Version" is already registered

• The number of hosts that are to be registered is "0"

• The number of registered hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(3) Click the [Add] button.

408

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Add iSCSI Host] screen appears.

(3) Specify the host information of the iSCSI host that is to be registered.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Host Setting

• iSCSI Name

Refer to Step (2)

"When registering a host by selecting from the host list" (page 407)

for other settings.

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

409

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(5)

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

when registering multiple iSCSI hosts.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The "IP Address" is specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Address" is already registered

• The "IP Address" is not specified and an iSCSI host with the same "iSCSI Name" and "IP Version" is already registered

• The number of hosts that are to be registered is "0"

• The number of registered hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF

(6) After registering the iSCSI host is complete, click the [Add] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the iSCSI host starts.

Click the [Continue] button to continue registering iSCSI hosts.

End of procedure

410

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add SAS Host

This function registers a new SAS host (HBA).

The total number of all the interface type hosts that can be registered in the ETERNUS DX is 1024 (128 for the

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3).

"Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

• Note that this function does not create a host group. The ETERNUS DX also has a function that creates new host groups to register hosts as its members. Refer to

"Add SAS Host Group" (page 384)

for details.

• Hosts that are registered with this function can belong to multiple host groups. However, only one LUN group can be allocated to host and port combinations when configuring host affinity.

each OS type. Refer to "Recommended patterns of host responses" (page 458) for details.

If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• To change the SAS host information, use the [Modify SAS Host] function. Refer to

"Modify SAS Host" (page

419)

for details.

• The host affinity setting can be specified for each SAS host. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add SAS Host" (page 1160)

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add SAS Host" (page 1311)

The procedure to register a SAS host is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Add SAS Host] in [Action].

411

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add a host in the ETERNUS DX in the following procedures.

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

(1) Click the [Now Connected] tab.

(2) Select the host that is to be registered from the SAS host list and input the SAS host information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

• Name

• Host Response

Filter setting

Filter

SAS Address

Description

Input the SAS address of the SAS host that is to be displayed.

When not using the SAS address for filtering, leave this item blank.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The number of hosts that are to be registered is "0"

• The number of registered hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

(3) Click the [Add] button.

412

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

(1) Click the [Manual Input] tab.

(2) Click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Add SAS Host] screen appears.

(3) Specify the host information of the SAS host that is to be registered.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Setting

• Name

• SAS Address

• Host Response

(4) Click the [OK] button

 Returns to the [Manual Input] screen.

413

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(5)

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

when registering multiple SAS hosts.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The number of hosts that are to be registered is "0"

• The number of registered hosts has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX

(6) After registering the SAS host is complete, click the [Add] button.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the SAS host starts.

Click the [Continue] button to continue registering SAS hosts.

End of procedure

Delete FC/FCoE Host

This function deletes an FC/FCoE host.

When an FC/FCoE host belongs to a host group, the FC/FCoE host can be deleted, irrespective of its host affinity settings.

• Not all of the hosts can be deleted from a host group.

• When an FC host does not belong to a host group, the FC host, of which host affinity settings have been configured, cannot de deleted.

414

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the path from the host to the port is also deleted.

• The "FCoE" host interface is regarded as "FC". Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

The procedure to delete an FC host is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the FC host to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete FC/FCoE

Host] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the FC host starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [FC/FCoE Host] screen.

End of procedure

Delete iSCSI Host

This function deletes an iSCSI host.

When an iSCSI host belongs to a host group, the iSCSI host can be deleted, irrespective of its host affinity settings.

• Not all of the hosts can be deleted from a host group.

• When an iSCSI host does not belong to a host group, the iSCSI host, of which host affinity settings have been configured, cannot de deleted.

When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the path from the host to the port is also deleted.

The procedure to delete an iSCSI host is as follows:

Procedure

Select the iSCSI host to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete iSCSI

Host] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the iSCSI host starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [iSCSI Host] screen.

End of procedure

415

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete SAS Host

This function deletes a SAS host.

When a SAS host belongs to a host group, the SAS host can be deleted, irrespective of its host affinity settings.

• Not all of the hosts can be deleted from a host group.

• When a SAS host does not belong to a host group, the SAS host, of which host affinity settings have been configured, cannot de deleted.

When a host in the host group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the path from the host to the port is also deleted.

The procedure to delete a SAS host is as follows:

Procedure

Select the SAS host to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete SAS Host] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the SAS host starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [SAS Host] screen.

End of procedure

Modify FC/FCoE Host

This function changes the FC/FCoE host information.

• When no FC/FCoE hosts are registered, the [Modify FC/FCoE Host] function cannot be used.

• When changing the WWN or the host response of an FC/FCoE host that is currently being used, make sure to stop access to that FC/FCoE host. The server must be rebooted after the host response is changed.

• This function can change the following FC/FCoE host information; "Name" and "WWN". When the FC host is not registered in a host group, the "Host Response" setting can also be changed.

• When the FC host is registered in a host group, use the [Modify Host Group] function to change the host response. Refer to

"Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)" (page 389)

for details.

• Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 1160) .

416

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to change the FC host information is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the FC host to change the host information for, and click [Modify FC/FCoE Host] in

[Action].

2 Input new host information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● FC/FCoE Host Setting

• Name

• WWN

• Host Response

• Before changing a host response, check the LUN setting state. If LUNs that are LUN#256 onward are used, the referable LUN setting cannot be changed to a "256 LUN" host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

• If there are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the FC host because the "Host Response" setting has been changed (only for FC hosts that are not registered to a host group), an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

3 Click the [Modify] button

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the FC host information starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [FC/FCoE Host] screen.

End of procedure

417

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

Modify iSCSI Host

This function changes the iSCSI host information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When no iSCSI hosts are registered, the [Modify iSCSI Host] function cannot be used.

• When changing the information or the host response of an iSCSI host that is currently being used, make sure to stop access to that iSCSI host. The server must be rebooted after the host response is changed.

• This function can change the following iSCSI host information; "Name", "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP Address",

"Alias Name", "CHAP User ID", and "CHAP Password". When the iSCSI host is not registered in a host group, the

"Host Response" setting can also be changed.

• When the iSCSI host is registered in a host group, use the [Modify Host Group] function to change the host response. Refer to

"Modify Host Group (iSCSI)" (page 393)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify iSCSI Host" (page 1161) .

The procedure to change the iSCSI information is as follows:

Procedure

Select the iSCSI host to change the host information for, and click [Modify iSCSI Host] in [Action].

2 Input new iSCSI host information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● iSCSI Host Setting

• Name

• iSCSI Name

• Host Response

• IP Version

• IP Address

• Alias Name

• CHAP User ID

418

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Change CHAP Password

• CHAP Password

• Confirm CHAP Password

• Before changing a host response, check the LUN setting state. If LUNs that are LUN#256 onward are used, the referable LUN setting cannot be changed to a "256 LUN" host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

An iSCSI host with the same "IP Address" and "iSCSI Name" is already configured

An iSCSI host without any entered IP addresses is specified with the same "iSCSI Name"

There are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the iSCSI host because the "Host Response" setting has been changed (only for iSCSI hosts that are not registered to a host group)

3 Click the [Modify] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the iSCSI host information starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [iSCSI Host] screen.

End of procedure

Modify SAS Host

This function changes the SAS host information.

• When no SAS hosts are registered, the [Modify SAS Host] function cannot be used.

• When changing the SAS address or the host response of a SAS host that is currently being used, make sure to stop access to that SAS host. The server must be rebooted after the host response is changed.

• This function can change the following SAS host information; "Name" and "SAS Address". When the SAS host is not registered in a host group, the "Host Response" setting can also be changed.

• When the SAS host is registered in a host group, use the [Modify Host Group] function to change the host response. Refer to

"Modify Host Group (SAS)" (page 398) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify SAS Host" (page 1164)

The procedure to change the SAS host information is as follows:

Procedure

Select the SAS host to change the host information for, and click [Modify SAS Host] in [Action].

419

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Group Management

Input new host information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● SAS Host Setting

• Name

• SAS Address

• Host Response

• Before changing a host response, check the LUN setting state. If LUNs that are LUN#256 onward are used, the referable LUN setting cannot be changed to a "256 LUN" host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

• If there are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the SAS host because the "Host Response" setting has been changed (only for SAS hosts that are not registered to a host group), an error screen appears.

Check the parameter settings.

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the SAS host information starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [SAS Host] screen.

End of procedure

420

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

CA Port Group Management

This section describes CA port group management.

CA Port Group management provides the following functions:

•

Create FC Port Group

•

Create iSCSI Port Group

•

Create SAS Port Group

•

Create FCoE Port Group

•

Delete CA Port Group

•

Modify CA Port Group

•

Modify FC Port Parameters

•

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters

•

Modify SAS Port Parameters

•

Modify FCoE Port Parameters

•

Modify Port Mode

Create FC Port Group

This function creates a new FC port group, and registers the port to be a member.

A port group is a group of host interface ports that can access the volume (LUN group). The Host Affinity is specified for each port group.

• The maximum number of port groups per storage system is 128 (with a maximum number of 384 for the ETER-

NUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3), irrespective of the CA types.

• The maximum number of ports per port group is 8.

• A port can be a member of multiple port groups.

• Registration of the port is necessary to create a port group. A port group cannot be created if the port to be a member has not been registered from ETERNUS Web GUI.

• Only ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode can be added to a port group. Ports with other port modes cannot be added to a port group.

• Ports that are used for the Storage Cluster function cannot be registered in the port group.

• A port in the affinity mode enabled (On) and a port in the affinity mode disabled (Off) cannot exist together in a port group.

The affinity mode (On/Off) of a port group is decided when the host affinity setting has been configured on the corresponding port group. All of the member ports in a port group have the same affinity mode.

The affinity mode (On/Off) of a port group is not changed until the host affinity setting has been released from the corresponding port group.

When one port is registered in multiple port groups, and the affinity setting has been configured on one of the port groups including the corresponding port, the affinity setting is configured on all the port groups, which include the corresponding port, and also on the member ports.

Ports without the host affinity setting can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

421

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

•

To perform the following operations, refer to "Modify CA Port Group" (page 429)

Changing the port group settings

Adding a port to an existing port group

•

To change the port mode from "RA" or "Initiator" to "CA" or "CA/RA", refer to "Modify Port Mode" (page 446) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create FC Port Group" (page 1165) .

The procedure to create an FC port group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create FC Port Group] in [Action].

2 Specify the name of the port group to be created and select all the ports to be registered in the port group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● CA Port Group Setting

• Name

• Checkbox to select ports

If the total number of port groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

422

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• FC ports that satisfy all of the following conditions are displayed.

Ports which port mode are "CA" or "CA/RA"

Not used for the Storage Cluster function

• For the following ports, "Affinity" is blank. These ports can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

Ports that are not registered to a port group

Ports that are registered to port groups and the host affinity setting is not set for all the port groups to which the relevant ports belong

3 Click the [Create] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the FC port group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Port Group] screen.

End of procedure

Create iSCSI Port Group

This function creates a new iSCSI port group, and registers the port to be a member.

A port group is a group of host interface ports that can access the volume (LUN group). The Host Affinity is specified for each port group.

• The maximum number of port groups per storage system is 128 (with a maximum number of 384 for the ETER-

NUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3), irrespective of the CA types.

• The maximum number of ports per port group is 8.

• A port can be a member of multiple port groups.

• Registration of the port is necessary to create a port group. A port group cannot be created if the port to be a member has not been registered from ETERNUS Web GUI.

• Only ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode can be added to a port group. Ports with "RA" as the port mode cannot be added to a port group.

• A port in the affinity mode enabled (On) and a port in the affinity mode disabled (Off) cannot exist together in a port group.

The affinity mode (On/Off) of a port group is not changed until the host affinity setting has been released from the corresponding port group.

Ports without the host affinity setting can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

423

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

•

To perform the following operations, refer to "Modify CA Port Group" (page 429)

Changing the port group settings

Adding a port to an existing port group

•

To change the port mode from "RA" to "CA" or "CA/RA", refer to "Modify Port Mode" (page 446) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create iSCSI Port Group" (page 1165) .

The procedure to create an iSCSI port group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create iSCSI Port Group] in [Action].

2 Specify the name of the port group to be created and select all the ports to be registered in the port group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● CA Port Group Setting

• Name

• Checkbox to select ports

If the total number of port groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX/AF, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

424

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• iSCSI ports that satisfy all of the following conditions are displayed.

Ports which port mode are "CA" or "CA/RA"

Not used for the Storage Cluster function

• For the following ports, "Affinity" is blank. These ports can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

Ports that are not registered to a port group

Ports that are registered to port groups and the host affinity setting is not set for all the port groups to which the relevant ports belong

3 Click the [Create] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the iSCSI port group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Port Group] screen.

End of procedure

Create SAS Port Group

This function creates a new SAS port group, and registers the port to be a member.

A port group is a group of host interface ports that can access the volume (LUN group). The Host Affinity is specified for each port group.

• The maximum number of port groups per storage system is 128, irrespective of the CA types.

• The maximum number of ports per port group is 8.

• A port can be a member of multiple port groups.

• Registration of the port is necessary to create a port group. A port group cannot be created if the port to be a member has not been registered from ETERNUS Web GUI.

• A port in the affinity mode enabled (On) and a port in the affinity mode disabled (Off) cannot exist together in a port group.

The affinity mode (On/Off) of a port group is not changed until the host affinity setting has been released from the corresponding port group.

Ports without the host affinity setting can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

To perform the following operations, refer to

"Modify CA Port Group" (page 429) .

• Changing the port group settings

• Adding a port to an existing port group

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create SAS Port Group" (page 1165)

425

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to create a SAS port group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create SAS Port Group] in [Action].

2 Specify the name of the port group to be created and select all the ports to be registered in the port group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● CA Port Group Setting

• Name

• Checkbox to select ports

If the total number of port groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

For the following ports, "Affinity" is blank. These ports can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

• Ports that are not registered to a port group

• Ports that are registered to port groups and the host affinity setting is not set for all the port groups to which the relevant ports belong

Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the SAS port group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Port Group] screen.

End of procedure

426

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create FCoE Port Group

This function creates a new FCoE port group, and registers the port to be a member.

A port group is a group of host interface ports that can access the volume (LUN group). The Host Affinity is specified for each port group.

• The maximum number of port groups per storage system is 128 (with a maximum number of 384 for the ETER-

NUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3), irrespective of the CA types.

• The maximum number of ports per port group is 8.

• A port can be a member of multiple port groups.

• Registration of the port is necessary to create a port group. A port group cannot be created if the port to be a member has not been registered from ETERNUS Web GUI.

• A port with the affinity mode enabled ("On") and a port with the affinity mode disabled ("Off") cannot exist together in a port group.

The affinity mode ("On" or "Off") of a port group is decided when the host affinity setting has been configured on the corresponding port group. All of the member ports in a port group have the same affinity mode.

The affinity mode ("On" or "Off") of a port group is not changed until the host affinity setting has been released from the corresponding port group.

When one port is registered in multiple port groups, and the host affinity setting has been configured on one of the port groups including the corresponding port, the same affinity setting is configured on all the port groups, which include the corresponding port, and also on the member ports.

Ports without the host affinity setting can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled ("On") or disabled ("Off").

To perform the following operations, refer to

"Modify CA Port Group" (page 429) .

• Changing the port group settings

• Adding a port to an existing port group

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create FCoE Port Group" (page 1165)

The procedure to create an FCoE port group is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Create FCoE Port Group] in [Action].

427

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Specify the name of the port group to be created, select all the ports to be registered in the port group.

The main setting items are as follows.

● CA Port Group Setting

• Name

• Checkbox to select ports

If the total number of port groups has exceeded the maximum number for the ETERNUS DX, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

For the following ports, "Affinity" is blank. These ports can be members of a port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the group is enabled (On) or disabled (Off).

• Ports that are not registered to a port group

• Ports that are registered to port groups and the host affinity setting is not set for all the port groups to which the relevant ports belong

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Registration of the FCoE port group starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Port Group] screen.

End of procedure

428

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete CA Port Group

This function deletes a CA port group.

CA port groups that are being used for the host affinity settings (or the CA port groups whose status is "Active" in the CA port group list) cannot be deleted.

The procedure to delete a CA port group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the CA port group to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete Port

Group] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the CA port group starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Port Group] screen.

End of procedure

Modify CA Port Group

This function performs the following modifications for existing CA port groups:

• CA Port Group Name

• Port (Add and delete member ports in a CA port group)

Ports can be added to CA port groups for which the host affinity setting is already configured and ports can also be deleted from CA port groups.

If a port has been added, the host affinity setting is automatically configured to the corresponding port as a CA port group member.

If a port has been deleted, the host affinity setting is cleared from the corresponding port.

• The maximum number of CA port groups per storage system is 128 (with a maximum number of 384 for the

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3), irrespective of the CA types.

• The maximum number of ports per CA port group is 8.

• Ports with the same CA type as the member ports of the CA port group can be added.

• A port can be a member of multiple CA port groups.

429

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Registration of the port is necessary to create a CA port group. Not all of the ports can be deleted from a CA port group.

• Only ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode can be added to a CA port group. Ports with other port modes cannot be added to a CA port group.

• Ports that are used for the Storage Cluster function cannot be added to the port group.

• A port with the affinity mode enabled ("On") and a port with the affinity mode disabled ("Off") cannot exist together in a CA port group.

The affinity mode ("On" or "Off") of a CA port group is decided when the host affinity setting has been configured on the corresponding CA port group. All of the member ports in a CA port group have the same affinity mode.

The affinity mode ("On" or "Off") of a CA port group is not changed until the host affinity setting has been released from the corresponding CA port group.

When one port is registered in multiple CA port groups, and the host affinity setting has been configured on one of the CA port groups including the corresponding port, the same affinity setting is configured on all the CA port groups, which include the corresponding port, and also on the member ports.

Ports without the host affinity setting can be members of a CA port group, regardless of whether the affinity mode for the host group is enabled ("On") or disabled ("Off").

• Host access does not need to be stopped when adding or deleting ports from the CA port group where the host affinity setting has been configured.

• When a port was added to a CA port group, of which the host affinity setting has been configured, paths between all the hosts with the host affinity setting and the added port will be configured. To modify the path between a host and a port, refer to

"Modify Host Affinity" (page 361)

• When a port in the CA port group for which the host affinity settings are already configured is deleted, the path from the host to the port is also deleted.

• When creating a new CA port group and registering a port in the CA port group, refer to the following sections depending on the CA port type.

"Create FC Port Group" (page 421)

"Create iSCSI Port Group" (page 423)

"Create SAS Port Group" (page 425)

"Create FCoE Port Group" (page 427)

• To change the CA port mode to "CA" or "CA/RA", refer to

"Modify Port Mode" (page 446) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify CA Port Group" (page 1166)

The procedure to modify a CA port group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the CA port group to be changed, and click [Modify Port Group] in [Action].

430

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Specify the new name and add a port to the CA port group (select the checkbox) or delete a port from the CA port group (clear the checkbox).

The main setting items are as follows.

● CA Port Group Setting

• Name

• Checkbox to select ports

Ports that satisfy all of the following conditions are displayed.

• "FC", "iSCSI", "SAS", or "FCoE" type CA ports (the same type as the selected CA port group)

• The port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA (when the type is FC or iSCSI)"

• Not used for the Storage Cluster function

Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the CA port group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Port Group] screen.

End of procedure

Modify FC Port Parameters

This function sets the parameters for the FC host interface port that connects between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the host, or connects between the storage systems for REC or Storage Migration.

• When changing port parameters during operation, stop access from the server that is connected to the target port. Host access does not need to be stopped to change the port parameters of newly added CA ports.

• Port parameters cannot be changed for FC-Initiator ports that have online Storage Migration paths or offline

Storage Migration paths.

431

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• There are four types of port modes for FC ports; CA, RA, CA/RA, and Initiator. CA is used for connecting to a server, RA is used for REC, CA/RA is used for connecting to a server and for REC, and Initiator is used for Storage

Migration. To change the port mode, refer to "Modify Port Mode" (page 446) . The default value is "CA".

• For more details on the parameter settings of FC-CA, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type.

• When changing the port parameters for FC-Initiator port, delete the path group specified in the target port.

Refer to

"Delete Storage Migration Path" (page 198) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify FC Port Parameters" (page 1166) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to the following sections.

•

"B. Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")" (page 1311)

•

"B. Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA")" (page 1312)

•

"B. Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "Initiator")" (page 1312)

■ Setting FC Port Parameters Manually

The procedure to set FC port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which FC port to set the parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Configure FC Port] in [Action].

• Multiple selections can be made from FC ports that have the same SFP type and port mode. Note that multiple FC ports can also be selected if the SFP types are one of the following combinations.

A mix of "16G SFP+(SMF)" and "16G SFP+(MMF)"

A mix of "SFP+(SMF)", "SFP+(MMF)", "Unknown", and "Unmount"

• Multiple ports can be set with the same or with different parameters in a single operation. To set parameters to multiple ports, select the target ports and specify the parameters for each port. After the specification is complete, click the [Modify] button.

2 Set the parameters for all of the selected ports.

The settings of port parameters vary depending on the port mode ( "When the port mode is "CA"" (page 433)

"When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA"" (page 433)

, or

"When the port mode is "Initiator"" (page 434) ).

432

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

■ When the port mode is "CA"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Port Settings

• Port

• Connection

• Set Loop ID

• Loop ID

• Transfer Rate

■ When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA"

The main setting items are as follows.

● Port Settings

• Port

• Connection

• Set Loop ID

433

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

• Loop ID

• Transfer Rate

■ When the port mode is "Initiator"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Port Settings

• Port

• Connection

• Set Loop ID

• Loop ID

• Transfer Rate

• WWN (Port Name)

• WWN (Node Name)

3 Click the [Modify] button.

If the Loop ID is changed while a server is operating, reboot the server immediately. If the server is operated without being rebooted, a warning message may appear or a system failure may occur.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the FC port parameters starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [FC Port] screen.

End of procedure

434

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Copying FC Port Parameters

The procedure to copy FC port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the copy source port of parameters and all the copy destination ports, and click [Configure

FC Port] in [Action].

• Multiple selections can be made from FC ports that have the same SFP type and port mode. Note that multiple FC ports can also be selected if the SFP types are one of the following combinations.

A mix of "16G SFP+(SMF)" and "16G SFP+(MMF)"

A mix of "SFP+(SMF)", "SFP+(MMF)", "Unknown", and "Unmount"

• Setting and copying the FC port parameters can be performed with a single operation.

Set the copy source port parameters and then click the [Copy] button.

 The [Copy Settings] screen appears.

435

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

Select all of the copy destination ports.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Destination

• Checkbox to select copy destination port

Click the [Copy] button.

 Returns to the [Modify FC Port Parameters] screen.

5 Specify the parameter that is not to be copied and click the [Set] button.

• The "parameter that is not to be copied" indicates the "Loop ID" setting for "Set Loop ID (Manual)".

When the connection type is "FC-AL" and the Loop ID setting is "Manual", specify the "Loop ID" value after copying of the parameters is complete.

• If the Loop ID is changed while a server is operating, reboot the server immediately. If the server is operated without being rebooted, a warning message may appear or a system failure may occur.

6 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the FC port parameters starts.

7 Click the [Done] button to return to the [FC Port] screen.

End of procedure

436

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters

This function sets the parameters for the iSCSI host interface port that connects between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the host, or connects between the storage systems for REC.

• When changing port parameters during operation, stop access from the server that is allocated to the target port. Host access does not need to be stopped to change the port parameters of newly added CA ports.

• Multiple VLAN can be set for ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode. For "CA/RA" ports, IP addresses that are added (15 addresses in maximum) can be used as "CA" type ports.

• When the Multiple VLAN setting is enabled and the port mode for the relevant iSCSI ports is changed from "CA" or "CA/RA" to "RA", all of the added IP address information is deleted. Refer to

"Modify Port Mode" (page 446)

for details.

• There are three port modes for an iSCSI port; CA, RA, and CA/RA. CA is used for connecting to a server, RA is used for REC, and CA/RA is used for connecting to a server and for REC. To switch the port mode, refer to

"Modify Port Mode" (page 446)

. The default value is "CA".

• For more details on iSCSI-CA parameter settings, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters" (page 1171) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to the following sections.

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")" (page 1313)

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA")" (page 1314)

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA/RA")" (page 1315)

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters ([Send Ping] screen)" (page 1316)

The procedure to set iSCSI port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which iSCSI port to set the parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Configure iSCSI Port] in [Action].

• Multiple "1G iSCSI", "10G iSCSI", or "10G Base-T iSCSI" type iSCSI ports with the same port mode can be selected.

2 Set the parameters for all of the selected ports.

The settings of port parameters vary depending on the port type and the port mode (

"When the port mode is "CA"" (page 438)

"When the port mode is "RA"" (page 439)

, or

"When the port mode is "CA/RA"" (page

440) ).

437

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

■ When the port mode is "CA"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Select Port

• Port

● General Information

• iSCSI Settings

iSCSI Name

Alias Name

• TCP/IP Settings

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale

VLAN ID

Jumbo Frame

• Security Settings

CHAP

CHAP User ID

New Password

Confirm new Password

• General Settings

Transfer Rate (This item is displayed only when the port type is "10G Base-T iSCSI")

● Additional IP Address Information

• Additional IP Address Settings

Multiple VLAN

VLAN ID

438

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale

Jumbo Frame

■ When the port mode is "RA"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Select Port

• Port

● General Information

• iSCSI Settings

iSCSI Name

Alias Name

• TCP/IP Settings

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale

VLAN ID

MTU

• Security Settings

CHAP

439

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

CHAP User ID

New Password

Confirm new Password

• General Settings

Transfer Rate (This item is displayed only when the port type is "10G Base-T iSCSI")

■ When the port mode is "CA/RA"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Select Port

• Port

● General Information

• iSCSI Settings

iSCSI Name

Alias Name

• TCP/IP Settings

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale

VLAN ID

MTU

• Security Settings

CHAP (CA)

CHAP User ID (CA)

New Password (CA)

Confirm new Password (CA)

CHAP (RA)

CHAP User ID (RA)

440

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

New Password (RA)

Confirm new Password (RA)

• General Settings

Transfer Rate (This item is displayed only when the port type is "10G Base-T iSCSI")

● Additional IP Address Information

• Additional IP Address Settings

Multiple VLAN

VLAN ID

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale

iSNS Server

iSNS Server Port No.

Jumbo Frame

■ [Send ping] Screen

Check the connection status between the target port and the destination storage system.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Send ping (IP address)

• IP Address

• Send Number

• Result

441

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• "255.255.255.255" is input for the IP address, the subnet mask, or the gateway

• The IP address and the network address are the same

• The IP address and the broadcast address are the same

• The gateway is set and the IP address and the gateway are the same

• The gateway is set and the IP Address and the gateway are not in the same subnet

• The gateway is set and the gateway and the network address are the same

• The gateway is set and the gateway and the broadcast address are the same

• When the [Discovery] button is clicked for "IPv6 Connect IP Address", the IPv6 connect IP address can be created automatically from the prefix value that is obtained from the router that is connected to the

ETERNUS DX/AF and the input IPv6 link local address.

• When the [Discovery] button is clicked for "IPv6 Gateway", the gateway information can be obtained from the connected router.

• When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" and Multiple VLAN is enabled, click the [Add] button to register up to 15 IP address information for each port.

• To check whether the IP address is allocated correctly and the connection status for the remote device, click the [Test Connection (ping)] button for "IP Address", "IPv6 Link Local Address", or "IPv6 Connect IP

Address".

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the iSCSI port parameters starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [iSCSI Port] screen.

End of procedure

Modify SAS Port Parameters

This function sets the parameters for the SAS host interface port that connects between the ETERNUS DX and the host.

• "12G SAS" is supported in the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4.

For more details on SAS parameter settings, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify SAS Port Parameters" (page 1184)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify SAS Port Parameters" (page 1316)

442

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to set SAS port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the SAS port to set the parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Configure SAS Port] in [Action].

Multiple ports can be set with the same or with different parameters in a single operation. To set parameters to multiple ports, select the target ports and specify the parameters for each port. After the specification is complete, click the [Modify] button.

Set the parameters for all of the selected ports.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Port Settings

• Port

• Transfer Rate

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the SAS port parameters starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [SAS Port] screen.

End of procedure

443

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify FCoE Port Parameters

This function sets the parameters for the FCoE host interface port that connects between the ETERNUS DX and the host.

When changing port parameters during operation, stop access from the server that is allocated to the target port.

Host access does not need to be stopped to change the port parameters of newly added CA ports.

For more details on FCoE parameter settings, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify FCoE Port Parameters" (page 1185)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify FCoE Port Parameters" (page 1316)

■ Setting FCoE Port Parameters Manually

The procedure to set FCoE port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

Select the FCoE port to set the parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Configure FCoE Port] in [Action].

2 Set the parameters for all of the selected ports.

444

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Port Settings

• Port

• Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)

• Set VLAN ID

• VLAN ID

• Set Fabric Name

• Fabric Name

• Frame Size

Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the FCoE port parameters starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [FCoE Port] screen.

End of procedure

■ Copying FCoE Port Parameters

The procedure to copy FCoE port parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the copy source port of parameters and all the copy destination ports, and click [Configure

FCoE Port] in [Action].

Setting and copying the FCoE port parameters can be performed with a single operation.

2 Set the copy source port parameters and then click the [Copy] button.

 The [Copy Settings] screen appears.

445

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

Select all of the copy destination ports.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Destination

• Checkbox to select copy destination port

4 Click the [Copy] button.

 Returns to the [Modify FCoE Port Parameters] screen.

5 Check the FCoE port parameters, and click the [Set] button.

6 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the FCoE port parameters starts.

7 Click the [Done] button to return to the [FCoE Port] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Port Mode

This function changes the port mode of each port among CA, Remote Adapter (RA), CA/RA, and Initiator.

The port modes of the FC port and the iSCSI port can be changed.

Switchable port mode

FC Port

Port iSCSI Port

Port Mode

CA/RA

Initiator

CA/RA

Usage

CA is used for connecting to the host.

RA is used for performing REC.

CA/RA is used for connecting the host and for performing REC.

Initiator is used for performing Storage Migration.

CA is used for connecting to the host.

RA is used for performing REC.

CA/RA is used for connecting the host and for performing REC.

446

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The mapping information or the Advanced Copy path information may be deleted from the currently used port. Refer to

"Retained and deleted information when changing the port mode" (page 447)

for details.

If the mapping information is to be deleted due to the change of the port mode, stop access from the host that is connected to the target CA port in advance.

If the Advanced Copy path information is to be deleted due to the change of the port mode, perform this function when no sessions exist in the target port.

• When the Multiple VLAN setting is enabled and the port mode for the relevant iSCSI ports are changed from

"CA" or "CA/RA" to "RA", all of the specified IP address information is deleted. If this occurs, only the IP address that is specified in the general information remains for the iSCSI port.

• When the Advanced Copy license has been registered or the Storage Cluster function is "Enable", the port mode can be changed to "RA" or "CA/RA".

• Whether the port mode can be changed varies depending on the status of the Storage Cluster function (used/ unused). Refer to

"The Storage Cluster function and port mode modification" (page 448) for details.

• The port mode cannot be changed in the following conditions:

When the port type is "SAS" or "FCoE"

When selecting an FC-Initiator port with a Storage Migration path

• If the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3 is used with iSCSI or SAS host interfaces, this function is not displayed in

[Action].

Retained and deleted information when changing the port mode

Port mode before modification

CA/

–

Advanced Copy path information is deleted

• Mapping information is retained

• Advanced Copy path information is deleted

Mapping information is deleted

–

Port mode after modification

RA CA/RA

Mapping information is retained

• Advanced Copy path information is retained

• REC Line No. is retained

• REC Transfer Mode is retained

– • Mapping information is deleted

• Advanced Copy path information is retained

• REC Line No. is retained

• REC Transfer Mode is retained

Initiator

Mapping information is deleted

Advanced Copy path information is deleted

• Mapping information is deleted

• Advanced Copy path information is deleted

447

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The Storage Cluster function and port mode modification

Port mode before modification

The Storage Cluster's usage of the port

The Storage Cluster function is not used

WWN is not changed

WWN is changed (*1)

The Storage Cluster function is used

OK: The port mode can be changed

N/A: The port mode cannot be changed

*1: The port is being used for the Storage Cluster function, but the port is not used currently.

Port mode after modification

CA/RA

Initiator

N/A

• If the port mode has been changed, the port parameter returns to the default setting. Note that the port parameters are retained if the port mode is changed from "RA" to "CA/RA" or from "CA/RA" to "RA, and host access does not need to be stopped when the port mode is changed between "RA" and "CA/RA".

• When changing the port mode for FC-Initiator port, delete the path group specified in the target port. Refer to

"Delete Storage Migration Path" (page 198)

for details.

• To check whether or not the WWN for the target port has been changed, use the [FC Port] screen. Refer to

"FC

Port" (page 858)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Port Mode" (page 1186) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Port Mode" (page 1316)

The procedure to change the port mode is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify Port Mode] in [Action].

Select the port mode to be changed over to.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Port List

• Port Mode (After)

448

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

CA Port Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Set] button.

"RA" and "CA/RA" are displayed as options only for the models that support REC.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Port mode changeover starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Port] screen.

End of procedure

449

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

LUN Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

LUN Group Management

This section describes LUN group management.

LUN group management provides the following functions:

•

Add LUN Group

•

Delete LUN Group

•

Modify LUN Group

Add LUN Group

This function creates a new LUN group, and allocates a volume number in the ETERNUS DX/AF to the host LUN, which can be referenced by the host.

The following list shows the maximum number of LUN groups that can be created for each model.

• ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

128

• ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

1024

• ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

1024 (2048) (*1)

• ETERNUS DX8100 S3

1024

• ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

6144

• ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

1024

• ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

1024 (2048) (*1)

• ETERNUS DX200F

1024

*1:

Values in parentheses indicate the number of LUN groups when "Expand Host Mode" is "Enable". Refer to "Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

450

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

LUN Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Only the volumes with "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", "FTV", or "SDV" volume types can be registered in the LUN group.

• A LUN group cannot be created when no volumes have been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Up to 4096 LUNs can be created. If the host affinity setting is performed for the host groups or hosts to which the host response setting has been allocated, the number of LUNs that can be referenced by the host vary depending on the host response setting. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

• Note that if a LUN group to which volumes are mapped from LUN#512 onward exists, the maximum number of LUN groups cannot be created. This is because when volumes are mapped for LUN#512 onward, an additional LUN group is created as an internal resource for every 512 LUNs.

• The following volumes cannot be registered in the LUN group. These volumes are not displayed as selectable volumes.

"SDPV" type volumes

Volumes with the mirroring reservation attribute (*1)

ODX Buffer volumes

NAS volumes and NAS system volumes that are used in a Unified Storage environment

Volumes that are used for the Virtual Volume function (including "$VVOL_META")

Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

Veeam Snapshot Volumes

*1: An attribute to be set to a volume being created as the REC copy destination by the Dynamic LUN Mirroring function.

The volumes with this attribute may have been left in the storage system due to unsuccessful creation. Volumes that have the mirroring reservation attribute can be checked in the "Forbid Advanced Copy" field on the [Volume] screen.

Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add LUN Group" (page 1187)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add LUN Group" (page 1316)

The procedure to create a LUN group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add LUN Group] in [Action].

Specify the LUN group name.

451

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

LUN Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● LUN Group Setting

• Name

Click the [Add] button.

 The [Add LUN] screen is displayed.

To delete the volume allocation information of LUNs from the LUN group, select the checkbox for allocation information to delete and click the [Delete] button.

Specify the LUN and the number of LUNs for volume allocation, select the volume numbers to start the allocation to the corresponding LUNs from.

The main setting items are as follows.

● LUN Setting

• Start Host LUNs

• Number of LUNs

• Select Volume

If the required number of LUNs, which are specified in "Number of LUNs", cannot be allocated to volumes, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

5 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the [Add LUN Group] screen.

452

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

LUN Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Step 5 to set multiple allocation information between the LUNs and the

through

volumes.

If the total number of LUN groups has reached the maximum number of storage systems, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

7 Check the volume allocation information of LUNs to be registered in the LUN group, and then click the [Create] button.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Adding LUN group starts.

9 Click the [Done] button to return to the [LUN Group] screen.

End of procedure

Delete LUN Group

This function deletes LUN groups.

The following LUN groups cannot be deleted:

• The LUN group is used for the host affinity settings

• The LUN group includes a volume that is used for the Storage Cluster function

The procedure to delete a LUN group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the LUN group that is to be deleted, and click [Delete LUN Group] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 LUN group deletion starts.

453

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

LUN Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [LUN Group] screen.

End of procedure

Modify LUN Group

This function modifies LUN groups.

• When changing or deleting the volume allocation of a LUN group in the "Active" state, stop access from the associated host.

• When adding LUNs or volume allocations to a LUN group in the "Active" state, stopping access from the associated host is not necessary.

• Only the volumes with "Standard", "WSV", "TPV", "FTV", or "SDV" volume types can be registered in the LUN group.

• To change a LUN group that has host affinity settings, the number of LUNs which can be referenced from the host depends on the host response setting that is allocated to the host group or the host. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150) for details. When adding LUNs to a LUN group, check

the host response.

• The following volumes cannot be registered in the LUN group. These volumes are not displayed as selectable volumes.

"SDPV" type volumes

Volumes with the mirroring reservation attribute

ODX Buffer volumes

NAS volumes and NAS system volumes that are used in a Unified Storage environment

Volumes that are used for the Virtual Volume function (including "$VVOL_META")

Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

Veeam Snapshot Volumes (if the LUN group is not used for Veeam Storage Integration)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify LUN Group" (page 1188)

The procedure to modify a LUN group is as follows:

Procedure

Select the LUN group that is to be changed, and click [Modify LUN Group] in [Action].

454

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

LUN Group Management

Specify the LUN group name (if required).

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● LUN Group Setting

• Name

3 Click the [Add] button

 The [Add LUN] screen is displayed.

• To delete the volume allocation information of LUNs from the LUN group, select the checkbox for allocation information to delete and click the [Delete] button.

• To change the volume allocation information of LUNs, delete the allocation information to be changed.

Restart this function to add a new volume allocation of LUNs in the LUN group.

4 Specify the LUN and the number of LUNs for volume allocation, select the volume numbers to start the allocation to the corresponding LUNs from.

455

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

LUN Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● LUN Setting

• Start Host LUNs

• Number of LUNs

● Select Volume

• Select Volume

If the required number of LUNs, which are specified in "Number of LUNs", cannot be allocated to volumes, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

5 Click the [OK] button.

 Returns to the [Modify LUN Group] screen.

Step 5 to set multiple allocation information between the LUNs and the

through

volumes.

If there are LUNs that cannot be referenced from the host, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

7 Check the volume allocation information of LUNs to be registered in the LUN group, and then click the [Modify] button.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modifying LUN group starts.

9 Click the [Done] button to return to the [LUN Group] screen.

End of procedure

456

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Response Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host Response Management

This section describes host response management.

Host Response management provides the following functions:

•

Add Host Response

•

Delete Host Response

•

Modify Host Response

Add Host Response

The host response setting can be customized. This function creates a new host response.

Up to 256 host responses, which include the recommended patterns, can be created for each storage system.

For more details on setting the host response parameters, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type.

• If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host affinity, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• When customizing the host response, make sure to understand the setting parameters and create the host response with careful attention.

• When ALUA is set for the volume, ALUA is given priority over the "Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access"

setting that is specified in this function. Refer to "Set ALUA" (page 333) for details.

• Assign a host response when adding or changing a host group. Refer to the following functions:

"Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 372)

"Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 379)

"Add SAS Host Group" (page 384)

"Modify Host Group" (page 389)

• Assign a host response when adding or changing a host. Refer to the following functions:

"Add FC/FCoE Host" (page 403)

"Add iSCSI Host" (page 406)

"Add SAS Host" (page 411)

"Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 416)

"Modify iSCSI Host" (page 418)

"Modify SAS Host" (page 419)

• Assign a host response to the CA port when "All" is specified with host affinity for the host group or the host

Refer to

or "Modify Host Affinity" (page 361) for details.

•

To change a host response, refer to "Modify Host Response" (page 460)

457

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Response Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Recommended patterns of host responses

Host Response Name

Solaris MPxIO

HP-UX

AIX

AIX VxVM

VS850/SVC

BS2000

Default

Connection Environment

Set this parameter to connect to an Oracle Solaris host and to use the OS standard Multipath

Driver (MPxIO).

Set this parameter to connect to an HP-UX host.

Set this parameter to connect to an AIX host.

Set this parameter to connect to an AIX host and to use Veritas Volume Manager (VxVM).

Set this parameter to connect to an ETERNUS VS850 Virtualization Storage or an IBM SAN Volume Controller (SVC).

Set this parameter to connect to a BS2000 host.

Set this parameter for any host connection environments that are not listed above.

For the setting values, refer to

"Default values for recommended patterns of host responses" (page 1194) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Host Response" (page 1189)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Host Response" (page 1316)

The procedure to add a host response is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Host Response] in [Action].

2 Specify the host response name and set each parameter.

• A host response has a recommended pattern which has been prepared for each OS type.

Refer to "Recommended patterns of host responses" (page 458) for details.

Select "Default" in other host connection environments.

• The host response setting can be customized. Use this function to create a new host response.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Response Name

• Name

458

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Response Management

● ALUA Settings

• Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access

• TPGS Mode

• TPG Referrals Mode

Click the [Add] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Addition of the host response starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Response] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

Delete Host Response

This function deletes a host response.

• A host response that is being used cannot be deleted. In this case, release the assignment from the host groups or the hosts before performing this function.

• The recommended pattern and the default setting of the host response cannot be deleted.

The procedure to delete a host response is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the host response to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete Host

Response] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the host response starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Response] screen.

End of procedure

459

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Response Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Host Response

This function modifies host response settings.

For more details on setting the host response parameters, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type.

• The server may need to be rebooted after host response parameters are changed. Refer to

"Requirements for changing parameters" (page 460) for details.

• If an appropriate host response is not configured to the host affinity, the path may not be switched correctly or the volume may not be recognized correctly.

• When customizing the host response, make sure to understand the setting parameters and create the host response with careful attention.

• The recommended pattern and the default setting of the host response cannot be modified.

• When ALUA is set for the volume, ALUA is given priority over the "Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access"

setting that is specified in this function. Refer to "Set ALUA" (page 333) for details.

• Assign a host response when adding or changing a host group. Refer to the following functions:

"Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 372)

"Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 379)

"Add SAS Host Group" (page 384)

"Modify Host Group" (page 389)

• Assign a host response when adding or changing a host. Refer to the following functions:

"Add FC/FCoE Host" (page 403)

"Add iSCSI Host" (page 406)

"Add SAS Host" (page 411)

"Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 416)

"Modify iSCSI Host" (page 418)

"Modify SAS Host" (page 419)

• Refer to

"Add Host Response" (page 457)

to add a new host response.

Requirements for changing parameters

Some parameters that allow online modification can be changed during operation. If parameters that do not allow online modifications are changed, the server may need to be rebooted after these parameters are changed.

Category

Host Response Name

Parameter Online modification is available

Available

N/A

Online modification is not available

N/A

Available

LUN Settings

ALUA Settings

Name

LUN Addressing

LUN Expand Mode

(Peripheral Device Addressing)

Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit

Access

TPGS Mode

TPG Referrals Mode

N/A

Available

460

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Response Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Category Parameter Online modification is available

Online modification is not available

Inquiry Command Settings

Peripheral Device Type

(Peripheral Device Addressing)

Peripheral Device Type

(Flat Space Addressing)

SCSI Version

NACA

Device ID Type

Product ID

Reservation Conflict Response

N/A

Test Unit Ready Command

Settings

Available

Sense Settings

Mode Sense Command Settings

Other Settings

Notify Change of Volume Mapping

Notify Change of Volume Expansion

Notify Vendor Unique Sense

Sense Data Conversion

Reservation Conflict Response (Write

Exclusive)

Command Monitor Time

Load Balance Response Status iSCSI Discovery Reply Mode iSCSI Reservation Range

Available

N/A

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Host Response" (page 1195)

The procedure to modify a host response is as follows:

Available

N/A

Available

Procedure

1 Select the host response to be modified, and click [Modify Host Response] in [Action].

Modify the host response name or each item.

461

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host Response Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Host Response Name

• Name

● ALUA Settings

• Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access

• TPGS Mode

• TPG Referrals Mode

If there are LUNs that cannot be referenced, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the host response starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host Response] screen.

End of procedure

462

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Modify CA Reset Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify CA Reset Group

This function edits a CA reset group.

All of the ports are configured to be members of one CA reset group on the initial setting. This function can create a CA reset group with only specific ports or change the member ports of an existing CA reset group.

The maximum number of CA reset groups is equal to the number of ports.

• This function configures a CA reset group to release the volumes reserved by the port that became inaccessible without affecting other ports that do not belong to the CA reset group.

• If a port is shared by multiple servers using the host affinity function, only volumes that are included in the

LUN group, where host affinity with the target server is configured, can be released with instructions by the target server.

• One port cannot be registered in multiple CA reset groups.

• Only the ports with the "CA" or "CA/RA" port mode can be registered in a CA reset group.

• If some ports have been removed from the modification target CA reset group, a different group is created using those ports. For instance, if ports (Port#2 and Port#3) have been removed from the modification target

CA reset group A (Port#0, Port#1, Port#2 and Port#3), a CA reset group A (Port#0 and Port#1) and a CA reset group B (Port#2 and Port#3) are created after modification. The minimum number of ports per CA reset group is one port.

• CA reset groups are required for certain servers to switch clusters correctly.

• Ports with different CA types can be members of the same CA reset group.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify CA Reset Group" (page 1317)

The procedure to modify a reset group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the CA reset group to be modified, and click [Modify Reset Group] in [Action].

2 Modify the member ports in a CA reset group, and click the [Modify] button.

463

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Modify CA Reset Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Checkboxes of the member ports of the specified CA reset group are selected. Select the checkbox of the port to be added in the corresponding CA reset group. Clear the checkbox of the port to be deleted from the corresponding CA reset group.

One port cannot be registered in multiple CA reset groups. If a member port of another CA reset group has been selected, the member port is deleted from the existing CA reset group.

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the CA reset group starts.

4 Click the [Done] button to return to the [CA Reset Group] screen.

End of procedure

464

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

This section describes Host-LU QoS management.

Host-LU QoS management provides the following functions:

•

•

•

•

•

Start Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

•

Stop Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Enable/Disable QoS

This function enables or disables the QoS mode.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• If the QoS mode is changed from "Enable" to "Disable", the configured bandwidth limit is saved.

• If the QoS mode is changed from "Disable" to "Enable", the QoS operates within the saved bandwidth limit.

• If the bandwidth limit is not specified when the QoS mode is changed to "Enable", "Unlimited" is applied to all the bandwidth limit settings for hosts, ports, LUNs, and volumes (the setting value is not changed).

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. QoS" (page 1317)

■ Enabling QoS mode

The procedure to enable the QoS mode is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Enable QoS] in [Action].

If the QoS mode has already been enabled, [Enable QoS] cannot be clicked.

465

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Enabling of QoS starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

■ Disabling QoS mode

The procedure to disable the QoS mode is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Disable QoS] in [Action].

If the QoS mode has already been disabled, [Disable QoS] cannot be clicked.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Disabling of QoS starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

Initialize QoS

This function initializes all the QoS settings (e.g. Host-LU QoS, volume QoS, and QoS patterns).

This function changes the bandwidth limit for hosts, ports, host LUNs, and volumes to the default value ("Unlimited") and deletes all the LU QoS groups.

Note that the following settings are not initialized.

• QoS mode (enable/disable)

• Host-LU QoS performance information acquisition state (started/stopped)

The procedure to initialize QoS settings is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Initialize QoS] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The QoS initialization starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

466

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Host-LU QoS

This function assigns an LU QoS group to a "host - CA port - LUN group" on which the host affinity setting has been configured. A bandwidth limit (the maximum performance limit) is configured to each host LUN in an LU QoS group.

• When assigning an LU QoS group to the "Host - CA Port - LUN Group", check the number of host LUNs and the current usage for the LUN group, and assign the appropriate LU QoS group.

• Before executing the [Set Host-LU QoS] function, configure a bandwidth limit on each host LUN. Refer to

"Add

LU QoS Group" (page 485)

for details.

• When checking the number of host LUNs and the bandwidth limit of each LUN in the LU QoS group, refer to

"Modify LU QoS Group" (page 486) .

• Configure the host bandwidth limit on each host. Refer to the following sections for details:

• Configure the CA port bandwidth limit on each CA port. Refer to the following sections for details:

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Host-LU QoS" (page 1196)

The procedure to set the Host-LU QoS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the "Host - CA Port - LUN Group" to set the Host-LU QoS (multiple selections can be made) and click [Set Host-LU QoS] in [Action].

467

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

Click the [Browse...] button in the "LUN Group: LUN QoS Group No." field.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Select LU QoS Group] screen is displayed.

3 Select a LUN QoS group.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Select LU QoS Group

• Select LU QoS Group

4 Click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

468

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

After confirming the association between "Host", "CA Port", and "LUN Group : LU QoS Group No.", click the [Set] button.

6 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Host-LU QoS setting starts.

7 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

Release Host-LU QoS

This function releases the LU QoS groups that are assigned to a "Host - CA Port - LUN Group" with host affinity settings.

The procedure to release Host-LU QoS is as follows:

Procedure

Select the "Host - CA Port - LUN Group" for which the Host-LU QoS is to be released (multiple selections can be made) and click [Release Host-LU QoS] in [Action].

[Release Host-LU QoS] cannot be clicked if a "Host - CA Port - LUN Group" for which a LU QoS group is not assigned is selected.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Releasing of the Host-LU QoS starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

469

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Start Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

This function starts performance monitoring of Host-LU QoS.

Target ports for monitoring performance

• If this function is started from the [Host-LU QoS] screen, this function starts performance monitoring of the ports that satisfy all the following conditions.

All FC, iSCSI, SAS, and FCoE ports that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

Ports which port mode are "CA" or "CA/RA"

Ports without " Undefined" state or " Undefined (Error)" state

• If this function is started from each [Port QoS] screen of the FC, iSCSI, SAS, or FCoE, this function starts performance monitoring of the selected port (multiple selections can be made).

When this function is started after port selection, ports with different host interfaces cannot be selected at the same time.

• This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled.

• Performance monitoring can be started even if other performance information is being obtained. If performance monitoring is restarted, the performance information that is already obtained is deleted and the collection of performance starts again. The start time is changed to the last time when performance monitoring was restarted.

The procedure to start the Host-LU QoS performance monitoring is as follows:

■ When this function is selected in the [Host-LU QoS] screen

Procedure

1 Click [Start Perfmon] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Acquisition of Host-LU QoS performance information starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

■ When this function is selected in the [Port QoS] screen for each host interface

Procedure

1 Select the port to start the Host-LU QoS performance monitoring for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Start Perfmon] in [Action].

470

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Acquisition of Host-LU QoS performance information starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

Stop Host-LU QoS Performance Monitoring

This function stops performance monitoring of Host-LU QoS.

When this function is started after port selection, ports with different host interfaces cannot be selected at the same time.

The procedure to stop the Host-LU QoS performance monitoring is as follows:

■ When this function is selected in the [Host-LU QoS] screen

Procedure

Click [Stop Perfmon] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Acquisition of Host-LU QoS performance information stops.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

■ When this function is selected in the [Port QoS] screen for each host interface

Procedure

1 Select the port to stop the Host-LU QoS performance monitoring for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Stop Perfmon] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Acquisition of Host-LU QoS performance information stops.

Click the [Done] button to return to the screen when starting this function in Step 1 .

End of procedure

471

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Host QoS Pattern

This function sets the QoS patterns of the host.

The maximum bandwidth limit of the host QoS can be changed by setting a host QoS pattern.

Automated QoS function may not operate as expected.

• This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled.

• The host QoS patterns set with this function are applied to the options of the host QoS bandwidth limit. Refer to

"Set iSCSI Host QoS" (page 477) , or

Refer to "Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 473)

for details.

• The following QoS patterns can be set.

Port QoS patterns

Host LUN QoS patterns

Refer to "Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 475) .

Volume QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 337)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 1197) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 1317) .

The procedure to set the host QoS pattern is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set Host QoS Pattern] in [Action].

2 Specify parameters.

472

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● QoS Pattern Settings

• IOPS

• Throughput (MB/s)

3 Click the [Set] button.

The QoS patterns (No.1 - No.15) can be reset to the default state. Click the [Default] button to display the default state and click the [Set] button. Refer to

"The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

(page 1309) for the settings content. Note that initializing a specific QoS pattern is not available.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The host QoS pattern setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

Set Port QoS Pattern

This function sets the QoS patterns of the port.

The maximum bandwidth limit of the port QoS can be changed by setting a port QoS pattern.

Automated QoS function may not operate as expected.

• This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled.

• The port QoS patterns set with this function are applied to the options of the port QoS bandwidth limit. Refer to

Port QoS" (page 483) for details.

, or "Set FCoE

• The following QoS patterns can be set.

Host QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 472)

Host LUN QoS patterns

Refer to "Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 475) .

Volume QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 337)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 1197) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 1318) .

473

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

The procedure to set the port QoS pattern is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set Port QoS Pattern] in [Action].

2 Specify parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● QoS Pattern Settings

• IOPS

• Throughput (MB/s)

3 Click the [Set] button.

The QoS patterns (No.1 - No.15) can be reset to the default state. Click the [Default] button to display

the default state and click the [Set] button. Refer to "The default value for "Port QoS Pattern Settings""

(page 1318) for the settings content. Note that initializing a specific QoS pattern is not available.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The port QoS pattern setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

474

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set LU QoS Pattern

This function sets the QoS patterns of the host LUN.

The maximum bandwidth limit of the host LUN can be changed by setting a host LUN QoS pattern.

Automated QoS function may not operate as expected.

• This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled.

• The LU QoS patterns set with this function are applied to the options of the LU QoS group bandwidth limit.

Refer to

"Add LU QoS Group" (page 485) or

"Modify LU QoS Group" (page 486)

for details.

• The following QoS patterns can be set.

Host QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 472)

Port QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 473)

Volume QoS patterns

Refer to "Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 337)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 1197)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 1318)

The procedure to set the host LU QoS pattern is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set LU QoS Pattern] in [Action].

2 Specify parameters.

475

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● QoS Pattern Settings

• IOPS

• Throughput (MB/s)

3 Click the [Set] button.

The QoS patterns (No.1 - No.15) can be reset to the default state. Click the [Default] button to display the default state and click the [Set] button. Refer to

"The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

(page 1309) for the settings content. Note that initializing a specific QoS pattern is not available.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The LU QoS pattern setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Host-LU QoS] screen.

End of procedure

Set FC/FCoE Host QoS

This function configures the bandwidth limit (the maximum performance limit) of the FC/FCoE host.

This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled. If the QoS mode has been disabled, the host starts the operation within the configured bandwidth limit after the QoS mode is enabled.

• Configure the port bandwidth limit on each port. Refer to the following sections for details:

• The host LUN bandwidth limit can be configured in the LU QoS group. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set FC/FCoE Host QoS" (page 1198) .

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set FC/FCoE Host QoS" (page 1318) .

The procedure to set the FC/FCoE host QoS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the FC/FCoE host to set the bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Set FC/FCoE Host QoS] in [Action].

476

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

Select the FC/FCoE host bandwidth limit.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● FC/FCoE Host QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The FC/FCoE host QoS setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [FC/FCoE Host QoS] screen.

End of procedure

Set iSCSI Host QoS

This function configures the bandwidth limit (the maximum performance limit) of the iSCSI host.

• Configure the port bandwidth limit on each port. Refer to the following sections for details:

• The host LUN bandwidth limit can be configured in the LU QoS group. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set iSCSI Host QoS" (page 1198) .

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set iSCSI Host QoS" (page 1318) .

477

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to set the iSCSI host QoS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the iSCSI host to set the bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made), and click [Set iSCSI Host QoS] in [Action].

2 Select the iSCSI host bandwidth limit.

The main setting item is as follows.

● iSCSI Host QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The iSCSI host QoS setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [iSCSI Host QoS] screen.

End of procedure

Set SAS Host QoS

This function configures the bandwidth limit (the maximum performance limit) of the SAS host.

478

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Configure the port bandwidth limit on each port. Refer to the following sections for details:

• The host LUN bandwidth limit can be configured in the LU QoS group. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set SAS Host QoS" (page 1199)

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set SAS Host QoS" (page 1318)

The procedure to set the SAS host QoS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the SAS host to configure a bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Set SAS Host QoS] in [Action].

Select the SAS host bandwidth limit.

The main setting item is as follows.

● SAS Host QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The SAS host QoS setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [SAS Host QoS] screen.

End of procedure

479

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set FC Port QoS

This function specifies the bandwidth limit (maximum performance limit) for the FC port.

• The bandwidth limit can be configured only for the ports in the port mode of "CA" or "CA/RA". For ports of other port modes, the bandwidth limit cannot be configured.

• If the port mode has been changed from "CA" or "CA/RA" to other port modes, the bandwidth limit returns to the default value.

• This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled. If the QoS mode has been disabled, the port starts the operation within the configured bandwidth limit after the QoS mode is enabled.

• Configure the host bandwidth limit on each host. Refer to the following sections for details:

• The host LUN bandwidth limit can be configured in the LU QoS group. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set FC Port QoS" (page 1199) .

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set FC Port QoS" (page 1319) .

The procedure to set the FC port QoS is as follows:

Procedure

Select the FC port to set the bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made), and click [Set FC

Port QoS] in [Action].

2 Select the FC port bandwidth limit.

480

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● FC Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The FC port QoS setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [FC Port QoS] screen.

Set iSCSI Port QoS

This function specifies the bandwidth limit (maximum performance limit) for the iSCSI port.

End of procedure

• The bandwidth limit can be configured only for the ports in the port mode of "CA" or "CA/RA". For the ports in the port mode of "RA", the bandwidth limit cannot be specified.

• If the port mode has been changed from "CA" or "CA/RA" to "RA", the bandwidth limit returns to the default value.

• Configure the host bandwidth limit on each host. Refer to the following sections for details:

• The host LUN bandwidth limit can be configured in the LU QoS group. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set iSCSI Port QoS" (page 1200) .

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set iSCSI Port QoS" (page 1319) .

The procedure to set the iSCSI port QoS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the iSCSI port to set the bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made), and click [Set iSCSI Port QoS] in [Action].

481

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

Select the iSCSI port bandwidth limit.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● iSCSI Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The iSCSI port QoS setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [iSCSI Port QoS] screen.

End of procedure

Set SAS Port QoS

This function configures the bandwidth limit (the maximum performance limit) of the SAS port.

This function can be used, irrespective of whether the QoS mode has been enabled or disabled. If the QoS mode has been disabled, the port starts the operation within the configured bandwidth limit after the QoS mode is enabled.

• Configure the host bandwidth limit on each host. Refer to the following sections for details:

• The host LUN bandwidth limit can be configured in the LU QoS group. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set SAS Port QoS" (page 1200)

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set SAS Port QoS" (page 1319)

482

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to set the SAS port QoS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the SAS port to configure the bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made), and click

[Set SAS Port QoS] in [Action].

2 Select the SAS port bandwidth limit.

The main setting item is as follows.

● SAS Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The SAS port QoS setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [SAS Port QoS] screen.

Set FCoE Port QoS

This function specifies the bandwidth limit (maximum performance limit) for the FCoE port.

End of procedure

483

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Configure the host bandwidth limit on each host. Refer to the following sections for details:

• The host LUN bandwidth limit can be configured in the LU QoS group. Refer to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set FCoE Port QoS" (page 1200)

for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set FCoE Port QoS" (page 1319)

The procedure to set the FCoE port QoS is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the FCoE port to set the bandwidth limit (multiple selections can be made), and click [Set

FCoE Port QoS] in [Action].

2 Select the FCoE port bandwidth limit.

The main setting item is as follows.

● FCoE Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The FCoE port QoS setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [FCoE Port QoS] screen.

End of procedure

484

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add LU QoS Group

This function adds LU QoS groups with bandwidth limit (the maximum performance limit) settings to each host

LUN.

• Use one LU QoS group number per 512 Host LUNs as an internal resource. When there are LU QoS groups with a bandwidth limit other than "Unlimited" from Host LUN#512 onward, the maximum number of LU QoS groups cannot be created.

• Host-LU QoS does not support from LUN#1024 onward. Even if volumes are mapped from LUN#1024 onward, only up to 1024 LUNs (LUN#0 - LUN#1023) can be specified for the bandwidth limit.

Assigning an LU QoS group to a LUN group with host affinity set, the bandwidth limit can be configured for each host LUN. Refer to

"Set Host-LU QoS" (page 467) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add LU QoS Group" (page 1201)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add LU QoS Group" (page 1319)

The procedure to set the bandwidth limit for host LUN is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Add LU QoS Group] in [Action].

2 Select a host LUN bandwidth limit.

The main setting item is as follows.

● LU QoS Group Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Click the [Add] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Addition of LU QoS group starts.

485

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [LU QoS Group] screen.

End of procedure

Delete LU QoS Group

This function deletes LU QoS groups.

An LU QoS group in the "Active" state cannot be deleted.

The procedure to delete LU QoS groups is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the LU QoS group that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete

LU QoS Group] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of LU QoS group starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [LU QoS Group] screen.

End of procedure

Modify LU QoS Group

This function changes the bandwidth limit (the maximum performance limit) settings of each host LUN.

• Host-LU QoS does not support from LUN#1024 onward. Even if volumes are mapped from LUN#1024 onward, only up to 1024 LUNs (LUN#0 - LUN#1023) can be specified for the bandwidth limit.

Assigning an LU QoS group to a LUN group with host affinity set, the bandwidth limit can be configured for each host LUN. Refer to

"Set Host-LU QoS" (page 467) for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify LU QoS Group" (page 1201)

The procedure to change the bandwidth limit for host LUN is as follows:

Procedure

Select the LU QoS group to modify the bandwidth limit, and click [Modify LU QoS Group] in

[Action].

486

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

Host-LU QoS Management

Select a host LUN bandwidth limit.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● LU QoS Group Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of LU QoS group setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [LU QoS Group] screen.

End of procedure

487

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

NAS Management

This section describes NAS management.

NAS management provides the following functions:

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Change NAS Server Name

•

Set DNS Server

•

Set Authentication Server

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Initialize Meta Cache Distribution

•

Enable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

•

Disable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

Create Shared Folder

This function creates shared folders.

Specify the access protocols, hosts which are allowed or denied access, and CIFS access permissions to each shared folder.

This function also creates home directories.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

Number of shared folders that can be registered

Protocol

Windows CIFS

UNIX NFS

Total number of Windows CIFS and UNIX NFS

Number of shared folders per ETERNUS DX (*1)

256

*1: The maximum number of shared folders may be less in some operating environments.

488

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The following settings must be performed before creating shared folders.

Create the TPPs that are to be used in the Unified Storage environment. Refer to

"Create Thin Provisioning

Pool" (page 557)

for details.

Create NAS user volumes. Refer to

"Create Volume" (page 257)

for details.

• Confirm that the authentication server setup is complete in advance. To set the authentication server, use the procedure in

"Set Authentication Server" (page 504)

• An error occurs when the total number of input characters exceeds the maximum (5120 characters). Confirm the used characters when this error occurs even if the total of input characters does not exceed the maximum.

Note that a double quotation (0x22) and a single quotation (0x27) are regarded as being two characters.

• If the shared folder creation has not been completed successfully, wait for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series status to return to normal and then try again.

• If shared folders are created in the NAS user volume where a meta cache redistribution is being performed, the process for this function may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes.

• The CIFS access permission is enabled from the next CIFS access session that is established after the permission is set.

• When a new shared folder is created, the following setup items are automatically specified for the created shared folder.

"Yes (Writable)" is specified for "Writable"

"Disable (Not use)" is specified for "Oplocks"

Note that the "Writable" and the "Oplocks" settings can be changed. Refer to "Modify Shared Folder" (page

494)

for details.

• "Home directory" is created for each user and is used as a dedicated folder that can be used freely by the user.

Home directories can be used by users that are authenticated by the Active Directory authentication server or the local user authentication. Users use the home directory with a CIFS connection.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Shared Folder" (page 1202) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Shared Folder" (page 1319) .

The procedure to create shared folders as follows:

■ When "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS" is selected as the protocol

Procedure

1 Click [Create Shared Folder] in [Action].

489

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

Specify parameters.

■ When "File Sharing" is selected for "Usage"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage"

The main setting items are as follows.

● Shared Folder Settings

• Usage

• Shared Folder Name

• Protocol

• Owner

• Group

• SMB Encryption of Data Access

• Access Based Enumeration

• CIFS Allowed Hosts

• CIFS Denied Hosts

• NFS Allowed Hosts

● CIFS Permissions

• Checkbox to permit CIFS access

● Select Volume

• Radio button to select a volume

490

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

"CIFS Permissions" is displayed when "File Sharing" is selected for "Usage".

3 When adding a CIFS access permission, click the [Add] button in the "CIFS Permissions" field.

If no CIFS access permissions are added, proceed to

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Shared Folder" (page 1208) .

 The [Add CIFS Permission] screen appears.

4 Enter each item of the CIFS access permissions.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Add CIFS Permission

• Type

• Name

• Authority

To change CIFS access permissions, delete the relevant "CIFS Permissions" and then add it again using this function.

5 Click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

491

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

After confirming the settings, click the [Create] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Shared folder creation starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS] screen.

■ When "NFS" is selected as the protocol

Procedure

1 Click [Create Shared Folder] in [Action].

2 Specify parameters.

End of procedure

The main setting items are as follows.

● Shared Folder Settings

• Shared Folder Name

• Protocol

• Owner

• Group

• SMB Encryption of Data Access

492

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Access Based Enumeration

• NFS Allowed Hosts

● Select Volume

• Radio button to select a volume

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Shared folder creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Shared Folder

This function deletes shared folders.

This function can also delete home directories.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• Before deleting the shared folders, all user data and directories in the relevant shared folder must be deleted in advance. Shared folders cannot be deleted if user data or directories exist. Refer to

"Clear NAS Data" (page

498)

to forcibly delete user data and directories.

• Shared folders cannot be deleted if they are connected from a client via CIFS (or if client sessions exist).

• When deleting shared folders, quota setting information assigned to that shared folder are also deleted at the same time.

• If shared folders are deleted from the NAS user volume where a meta cache redistribution is being performed, the process for this function may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes.

The procedure to delete shared folders is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the shared folder that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete

Shared Folder] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of shared folder starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS] screen.

End of procedure

493

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Shared Folder

This function changes the shared folder settings.

Set the write privileges, Oplocks, hosts which are allowed or denied access, and CIFS access permissions to each shared folder.

This function can also change the home directory settings.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

Note that a double quotation (0x22) and a single quotation (0x27) are regarded as being two characters.

• If the shared folder modification has not been completed successfully, wait for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series status to return to normal and then try again.

• If the settings for shared folders in the NAS user volume where a meta cache redistribution is being performed are changed, the process for this function may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes.

• The CIFS access permission is enabled from the next CIFS access session that is established after the permission is set. Note that if the CIFS access session is established before the CIFS access permission is set, the session operates with authority when this function is started.

The procedure to change the shared folder settings is as follows:

■ When the protocol of the shared folder that is to be modified is "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS"

Procedure

1 Select the shared folder that is to be changed and click [Modify Shared Folder] in [Action].

2 Change the parameters.

■ When "File Sharing" is selected for "Usage"

494

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

■ When "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage"

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Shared Folder Settings

• Writable

• Oplocks

• Owner

• Group

• SMB Encryption of Data Access

• Access Based Enumeration

• CIFS Allowed Hosts

• CIFS Denied Hosts

• NFS Allowed Hosts

● CIFS Permissions

• Checkbox to permit CIFS access

If this function is used, all the existing "CIFS Permissions" settings are overwritten. Do not delete the "CIFS

Permissions" settings that are to be used.

• When deleting a CIFS access permission, select "CIFS Permissions" that is to be deleted and click the

[Delete] button. Proceed to

• If no CIFS access permissions are changed, proceed to

• "CIFS Permissions" is displayed when "Usage" is "File Sharing".

3 When adding a CIFS access permission, click the [Add] button in the "CIFS Permissions" field.

If no CIFS access permissions are added, proceed to

Use the [NAS] screen to check whether the NAS data is being deleted. Refer to "NAS" (page 889)

 The [Add CIFS Permission] screen appears.

495

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

Enter each item of the CIFS access permissions.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Add CIFS Permission

• Type

• Name

• Authority

To change CIFS access permissions, delete the relevant "CIFS Permissions" and then add it again using this function.

Click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

6 After confirming the settings, click the [Modify] button.

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of shared folder setting starts.

496

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS] screen.

End of procedure

■ When the protocol of the shared folder that is to be modified is "NFS"

Procedure

1 Select the shared folder that is to be changed and click [Modify Shared Folder] in [Action].

2 Change the parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Shared Folder Settings

• Writable

• Oplocks

• Owner

• Group

• SMB Encryption of Data Access

• Access Based Enumeration

• NFS Allowed Hosts

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of shared folder setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS] screen.

End of procedure

497

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Clear NAS Data

This function deletes all user data and directories in the shared folder.

This function can also delete user data in the home directory.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• If shared folders cannot be deleted, use this function to delete NAS data in the shared folders (including home directories).

•

for details.

The procedure to clear NAS data is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the shared folder where the NAS data to be deleted exists (multiple selections can be made) and click [Clear NAS Data] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the NAS data starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS] screen.

End of procedure

Create NAS Interface

This function creates NAS interfaces. Up to 160 NAS interfaces can be created.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

If the NAS interface creation has not been completed successfully, wait for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series status to return to normal and then try again.

To use the Active-Active connection, specify different IP addresses on the same subnetwork for the ports of each

CM that will be duplicated.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create NAS Interface" (page 1210) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create NAS Interface" (page 1320)

The procedure to create a NAS interface is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Create] in [Action].

498

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

Specify parameters for the NAS interface.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● NAS Interface Settings

• Port

• RIP Setting

• Redundant Port

• IP Address

• Subnet Mask

• Gateway

• IPv6 Link Local Address

• IPv6 Connect IP Address

• IPv6 Gateway

• IPv6 Prefix length

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The IP address and the network address are the same

• The IP address and the broadcast address are the same

• The gateway is set and the gateway and the network address are the same

• The gateway is set and the gateway and the broadcast address are the same

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The NAS interface creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS Interface] screen.

End of procedure

499

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete NAS Interface

This function deletes the NAS interfaces.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

If a NAS interface is deleted, the multipath settings of the relevant ports are released.

The procedure to delete NAS interfaces is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the NAS interface that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Delete] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of NAS interface starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS Interface] screen.

End of procedure

Modify NAS Interface

This function changes the NAS interface settings.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

If the NAS interface modification has not been completed successfully, wait for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series status to return to normal and then try again.

To use the Active-Active connection, specify different IP addresses on the same subnetwork for the ports of each

CM that will be duplicated.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify NAS Interface" (page 1212) .

The procedure to modify the NAS interface settings is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the NAS interface that is to be changed, and click [Modify] in [Action].

500

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

Change the parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● NAS Interface Settings

• RIP Setting

• Redundant Port

• IP Address

• Subnet Mask

• Gateway

• IPv6 Link Local Address

• IPv6 Connect IP Address

• IPv6 Gateway

• IPv6 Prefix length

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The IP address and the network address are the same

• The IP address and the broadcast address are the same

• The gateway is set and the gateway and the network address are the same

• The gateway is set and the gateway and the broadcast address are the same

3 Click the [Modify] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of NAS interface settings starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [NAS Interface] screen.

End of procedure

501

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Change NAS Server Name

This function changes the server name (host name) for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series that is used for the NAS system.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• When performing Active Directory authentication, the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series' NAS Engine uses the NAS server name as the NetBIOS name. If the NAS server name is changed, the Active Directory authentication server must be reconfigured.

• If the Active Directory authentication server has already been registered before changing the NAS server name, perform the following operations.

(1) Delete the setup information for the Active Directory authentication server before starting this function.

(2) Execute this function to change the NAS server name and then register the Active Directory authentication server again.

Refer to

"Set Authentication Server" (page 504) for procedures on how to delete and re-register the Active

Directory authentication server setup information.

• As a factory default NAS server name, "DXyyyyyyyyyy" ("DX" is fixed and "yyyyyyyyyy" indicates the serial number of the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series) is specified for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

• To revert back to the default NAS server name, clear the "Name" field and click the [Change] button.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Change NAS Server Name" (page 1212)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Change NAS Server Name" (page 1320)

The procedure to change the server name that is used for the NAS system is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Change NAS Server Name] in [Action].

2 Enter the name.

502

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● NAS Server Settings

• Name

Click the [Change] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the NAS server name starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

Set DNS Server

This function sets the DNS server that is used for the NAS system.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

The DNS server settings must be performed before configuring the authentication server.

End of procedure

To delete the DNS server settings, clear the setting fields and complete the setup.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set DNS Server" (page 1212) .

The procedure to set the DNS server that is used for the NAS system is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set DNS Server] in [Action].

2 Specify parameters.

503

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● DNS Server Settings

• Primary IP Address

• Secondary IP Address

• IPv6 Primary IP Address

• IPv6 Secondary IP Address

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 DNS server setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Set Authentication Server

This function sets the Active Directory authentication server and the LDAP authentication server that are used for the NAS function.

By setting the Active Directory authentication server, access to the directories and files for users can be managed with the CIFS protocol.

By setting the LDAP authentication server, access to the directories and files for users can be managed with the

NFS protocol.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

•

The NAS interface settings must be performed before configuring the authentication server. Refer to "Create

NAS Interface" (page 498) for details.

• Make sure to access the authentication server from both CMs (CM#0 and CM#1) to enable communications in advance.

"Enable communication" indicates that both CMs satisfy all of the following conditions.

An IP address is assigned to at least one port (*1)

Communication between the port assigned with an IP address and the authentication server is enabled

(the port is in a Link up status) (*2)

*1: Refer to

"Create NAS Interface" (page 498)

for details.

*2: To check the link status, refer to

"Port Detail" (page 781) .

• To set a new authentication server, the following information must also be specified; the domain name, the domain administrator, and one or more servers among the three authentication servers.

• Specify the authentication server with an IP address or an FQDN. To specify an authentication server with an

FQDN, a DNS server for name resolution is required. The DNS server settings must be performed in advance.

Refer to

"Set DNS Server" (page 503)

for details. Note that the DNS server must be set up to use the Active

Directory authentication server.

• To use the Active Directory authentication server, time synchronization is required between the ETERNUS DX

S4/S3 series and the Active Directory authentication server. Using NTP for automatic time correction is recommended. Refer to

"Modify Date and Time" (page 72)

for details.

• If the authentication server setup has not been completed successfully, wait for the system status to return to normal and then try again.

• This function cannot be executed if the local user authentication is used. Delete all the local users and local groups before using this function. However, there is no need to delete the BUILTIN groups (or "BUILTIN_Administrators", "BUILTIN_Users", and "BUILTIN_BackupOperators").

504

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• To use the CIFS protocol, set the Active Directory authentication server.

• To use the NFS protocol, set the LDAP authentication server.

• To use both the CIFS protocol and the NFS protocol, refer to "Configuration Guide (NAS)" for details.

• To delete the Active Directory authentication settings, clear all of the setting fields and complete the setup.

• To delete the LDAP authentication settings, clear all of the setting fields and complete the setup.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Authentication Server" (page 1213) .

The procedure to set an authentication server is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set Authentication Server] in [Action].

Specify parameters.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Active Directory Authentication Settings, LDAP Authentication Settings

• Domain Name

• Domain Administrator

• Change Password

• Domain Administrator's Password

• Confirm Password

• Authentication Server (1) – (3)

If the authentication server information cannot be obtained, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Authentication server setting starts.

505

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Add Local User

This function adds local users that are used for the local user authentication.

For added local users, CIFS access, NFS access, and FTP access to the shared folders are available on a per user basis.

Up to 100 local users can be added in the ETERNUS DX.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• This function cannot be executed if an Active Directory authentication server or an LDAP authentication server is used. Remove all the authentication servers before using this function.

• This function cannot be executed if the port for changing the local user authentication password is in the open state.

Use the "set nas-port" ETERNUS CLI command to open and close the port for changing the local user authentication password. Use the "show nas-port" ETERNUS CLI command to check the port status. Refer to "ETERNUS

CLI User's Guide" for details about each command.

• If the controller firmware version is V10L51 or earlier and the authentication servers are not being used, all users share the fixed user account. In this case, the local user "shareuser$" is automatically created when the existing controller firmware version is updated to V10L53 or later. The local user "shareuser$" can be deleted or created again with ETERNUS Web GUI or ETERNUS CLI in the same way as local users that are added with

ETERNUS Web GUI.

• Local users can be deleted. Refer to

"Delete Local User" (page 508) for details.

• The password for a local user and the groups (primary and secondary groups) to which the local user belongs

can be changed. Refer to "Modify Local User" (page 508)

for details.

• Create local groups to which local users belong. Refer to

"Add Local Group" (page 510)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Local User" (page 1215)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Local User" (page 1320)

The procedure to add a local user is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Local User] in [Action].

506

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

Specify parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Local User Settings

• Name

• User ID

• Password

• Confirm Password

● Member group selection ([Primary Group] tab)

• Radio button to select a primary group

● Member group selection ([Secondary Group] tab)

• Checkbox to select a secondary group

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The number of selected secondary groups exceeds the maximum number per local user

• The total number of local users has reached the maximum number of local users for the ETERNUS DX

For details about the group IDs and group names of the local groups that are automatically created in the

ETERNUS DX, refer to "Special group" (page 1216) .

3 Click the [Add] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Addition of the local user starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

End of procedure

507

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete Local User

This function deletes the local user.

One local user can be deleted at a time.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• A local user that is currently accessing the shared folder cannot be deleted.

• This function cannot be used to delete a home directory that belongs to the deletion target local user. To

delete home directories, use the procedure in "Delete Shared Folder" (page 493)

• This function cannot be executed if the port for changing the local user authentication password is in the open state.

If all the local users that belong to the local group "sharegroup$" (group ID: 451) are deleted by using this function, "sharegroup$" is automatically deleted. Note that local groups other than "sharegroup$" are not automatically deleted even if all local users belonging to them are deleted.

The procedure to delete a local user is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the local user that is to be deleted, and click [Delete Local User] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the local user starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Local User

This function changes the password and groups of the local user.

One local user can be modified at a time.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• "Name" and "User ID" of the existing local users cannot be changed. To change "Name" or "User ID", delete the relevant local user and then create it again.

• This function cannot be executed if the port for changing the local user authentication password is in the open state.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Local User" (page 1217)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Local User" (page 1320)

508

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

The procedure to modify a local user is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the local user that is to be modified, and click [Modify Local User] in [Action].

2 Specify parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Local User Settings

• Change Password

• Password

• Confirm Password

● Member group selection ([Primary Group] tab)

• Radio button to select a primary group

● Member group selection ([Secondary Group] tab)

• Checkbox to select a secondary group

If the number of selected secondary groups exceeds the maximum number per local user, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

For details about the group IDs and group names of the local groups that are automatically created in the

ETERNUS DX, refer to "Special group" (page 1216) .

Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modification of the local user settings starts.

509

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Add Local Group

This function adds local groups to which the local users belong.

For added local groups, CIFS access, NFS access, and FTP access to the shared folders are available on a per group basis.

Up to 100 local groups can be added in the ETERNUS DX.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• This function cannot be executed if an Active Directory authentication server or an LDAP authentication server is used. Remove all the authentication servers before using this function.

• "Name" and "Group ID" of the existing local groups cannot be changed. To change "Name" or "Group ID", delete the relevant local group and then create it again.

• Note that this function cannot be used to create the following special groups because these groups are automatically created by the ETERNUS DX.

sharegroup$

BUILTIN_Administrators

BUILTIN_Users

BUILTIN_BackupOperators

Special groups are included in the maximum number of groups.

• This function cannot be executed if the port for changing the local user authentication password is in the open state.

CLI User's Guide" for details about each command.

• If the controller firmware version is V10L51 or earlier and the authentication servers are not being used, all users share the fixed user account. In this case, the local group "shareuser$" is automatically created when the existing controller firmware version is updated to V10L53 or later. The local group "shareuser$" can be deleted or created again with ETERNUS Web GUI or ETERNUS CLI in the same way as local groups that are added with

ETERNUS Web GUI.

•

Local groups can be deleted. Refer to "Delete Local Group" (page 512)

for details.

•

Local users are registered to the local group. Refer to "Add Local User" (page 506)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Local Group" (page 1218) .

The procedure to add a local group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Local Group] in [Action].

510

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

Specify parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Local Group Settings

• Name

• Group ID

If the total number of local groups has reached the maximum number of local groups for the ETERNUS DX, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

For details about the group IDs and group names of the local groups that are automatically created in the

ETERNUS DX, refer to "Special group" (page 1216) .

3 Click the [Add] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Addition of the local group starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

End of procedure

511

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete Local Group

This function deletes the local group.

One local group can be deleted at a time.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

• This function cannot be executed if the port for changing the local user authentication password is in the open state.

• The following local groups cannot be deleted.

A local group that is specified as the primary group of a local user

sharegroup$

BUILTIN_Administrators

BUILTIN_Users

BUILTIN_BackupOperators

• If all the local users that belong to the local group "sharegroup$" (group ID: 451) are deleted by using the

[Delete Local User] function, "sharegroup$" is automatically deleted. Note that local groups other than "sharegroup$" are not automatically deleted even if all local users belonging to them are deleted.

• If a local group is used as a secondary group for the local users, that local group is deleted from the secondary group.

The procedure to delete a local group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the local group that is to be deleted, and click [Delete Local Group] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the local group starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Environment Settings] screen.

End of procedure

512

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add Quota Setting

This function adds a new quota setting information. Drive space and file count thresholds (Warning and Limit) can be set.

Quota is a function that limits drive space or the number of files used on a NAS user volume or a shared folder to prevent the depletion of resources in the ETERNUS DX.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

Maximum Quota Setting Information for Each Model

Model

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

Maximum quota setting information (*1)

5000

10000

15000

20000

*1: The maximum number of quota setting information for this function may be less in some operating environments.

• Quotas for NAS user volumes are set for users or groups that are registered in the authentication server. When using this function, registering the users or groups in the authentication server in advance is necessary.

• Quotas for shared folders are set for shared folders that are registered in the ETERNUS DX. Create the shared

folders in advance. Refer to "Create Shared Folder" (page 488)

for details.

• To configure the quota information for each shared folder to which the NAS user volume belongs where the

NAS FS version is "2", "3", or "4", updating the file system version and reconfiguring the file system information are required. Perform the following procedure before setting the quota using this function.

(1) Unmount CIFS and NFS from the client.

(2) Use the [Reconfigure NAS Volume] function to reconfigure the relevant NAS user volume. The NAS FS version is changed to "5".

(3) Unmount the relevant NAS user volume with the "forced nas-fsunmount" ETERNUS CLI command.

(4) Create quota information on the file system with the "start nas-fsck" ETERNUS CLI command. (Select

"repair" or "force-repair" for the "mode" parameter.)

(5) Mount the relevant NAS user volume again with the "forced nas-fsmount" ETERNUS CLI command.

Refer to "ETERNUS CLI User's Guide" for details about each command.

• When inconsistencies in the quota information occur, restore the quota information by executing the "start nas-fsck" ETERNUS CLI command. Refer to "ETERNUS CLI User's Guide" for details.

• This function sets two thresholds (Warning and Limit) for the drive space or the file count.

When exceeding the warning threshold

This is a predictive notification and writing to the relevant NAS user volume is not prohibited.

When exceeding the limit threshold

Writing to the relevant NAS user volume is prohibited.

• In each NAS user volume, add a quota setting information to multiple users, groups, and shared folders. Note that the maximum number of quota setting information that can be added in a single operation (by clicking the [Add] button on the bottom of the screen) is 100 regardless of the operating environment.

• When deleting NAS user volumes, quota setting information assigned to that volume are also deleted at the same time.

• When deleting shared folders, quota setting information assigned to that shared folder are also deleted at the same time.

513

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Event notifications for the conditions described below can be sent using the specified method. Refer to

Event Notification" (page 166)

for details.

The drive space or the file count has exceeded the threshold

The drive space or the file count has returned to a normal state below the threshold value

•

The quota setting information in the ETERNUS DX can be checked. Refer to "Quota Management" (page 897)

for details.

•

The quota setting information in the ETERNUS DX can be changed. Refer to "Modify Quota Setting" (page 517)

for details.

•

The quota setting information in the ETERNUS DX can be deleted. Refer to "Delete Quota Setting" (page 517)

for details.

• The "NAS FS Version" for the NAS user volume can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to

"Volume

Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

for details.

• Shared folders include home directories.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Quota Setting" (page 1219) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Quota Setting" (page 1320) .

The procedure to add quota settings is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Add Quota Setting] in [Action].

When performing a quota setting for the shared folder, if the NAS user volume to which the relevant shared folder belongs is unknown, proceed to

Step 3 .

Select a NAS user volume to add a quota setting information.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Select Volume

• Radio button to select a NAS user volume

514

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add a quota setting information.

3-1 Click the [Add] button on the bottom right of the quota target list.

• The [Add] button cannot be clicked under the following conditions. Check the parameter settings.

The total number of quota setting information to be added exceeds 100 lines

The total number of existing quota setting information and quota setting information to be added exceeds the maximum number of information for each model

• The [Delete] button cannot be clicked If no quota setting information is added.

 The [Add Quota Target] screen appears.

3-2 Input or edit the Quota setting information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Add Quota Target

Type

Name

Drive Space

File Count

515

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A total of four threshold values can be set (two for the drive space and two for the file count) in a single quota setting information (for each line in the quota target list). However, specifying "0" for all the thresholds (which includes changing the drive space value to "Not Specified") is not allowed. At least one threshold must have a valid value.

When a NAS user volume is not selected in the initial screen and "Share" is selected for "Type" in the

[Add Quota Target] screen, all the shared folders that are registered in the ETERNUS DX are displayed as options for "Name".

3-3 Click the [OK] button

 The display returns to the initial screen.

• In the initial screen, by re-clicking the [Add] button on the bottom right of the quota target list, the quota setting information that was previously specified in the [Add Quota Target] screen is displayed.

• If the [Type] link for the added quota setting information is clicked, the [Edit Quota Target] screen is displayed. The quota setting information can be edited in the displayed screen.

• When deleting the added quota setting information from the quota target list, select the relevant quota setting information, and click the [Delete] button.

3-4 To set multiple quota settings for the selected NAS user volume, repeat

Step 3-1 through

Step 3-3

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• Quota targets do not exist

• A quota setting information with the same "NAS user volume", the same "Type" of quota target, and the same "Name" of the quota target already exists

4 Click the [Add] button.

5 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Adding of the quota setting starts.

516

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Quota Management] screen.

End of procedure

Delete Quota Setting

This function deletes the quota setting information.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

This function can also delete the quota setting information for home directories.

The procedure to delete the quota setting is as follows:

Procedure

Select the quota setting information that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete Quota Setting] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of the quota setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Quota Management] screen.

End of procedure

Modify Quota Setting

This function changes the quota setting information. Drive space and file count thresholds (Warning and Limit) can be changed.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Quotas for shared folders are set for shared folders that are registered in the ETERNUS DX. Create the shared

folders in advance. Refer to "Create Shared Folder" (page 488)

for details.

• This function sets two thresholds (Warning and Limit) for the drive space or the file count.

When exceeding the warning threshold

This is a predictive notification and writing to the relevant NAS user volume is not prohibited.

When exceeding the limit threshold

Writing to the relevant NAS user volume is prohibited.

• The type (of User/Group/Share) and name (of the User/Group/Shared folder) of the quota setting target information cannot be changed. To change the "Type" or "Name", delete the relevant quota setting information and add the setting again.

517

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Event notifications for the conditions described below can be sent using the specified method. Refer to

Event Notification" (page 166)

for details.

The drive space or the file count has exceeded the threshold

The drive space or the file count has returned to a normal state below the threshold value

• The quota setting information can be added. Refer to

"Add Quota Setting" (page 513)

for details.

•

The quota setting information in the ETERNUS DX can be deleted. Refer to "Delete Quota Setting" (page 517)

for details.

•

The quota setting information in the ETERNUS DX can be checked. Refer to "Quota Management" (page 897)

for details.

• Shared folders include home directories.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Quota Setting" (page 1221) .

The procedure to change the quota settings is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the quota setting information that is to be changed and click [Modify Quota Setting] in

[Action].

2 Edit the quota setting information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Quota Settings

• Drive Space

• File Count

A total of four threshold values can be set (two for the drive space and two for the file count) in a single quota setting information. However, specifying "0" for all the thresholds (which includes changing the drive space value to "Not Specified") is not allowed. At least one threshold must have a valid value.

518

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

Click the [Modify] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

In the following conditions, a warning message indicates that writing to the drive is prohibited appears.

• The modified limit value of the drive space is less than the currently used drive space

• The modified limit value of the file count is less than the currently used file count

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing of the quota setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Quota Management] screen.

End of procedure

Initialize Meta Cache Distribution

This function restores the meta cache to the initial location manually.

"Meta cache" is a cache area in NAS for storing the management information of the file system. The meta cache is distributed (or initially located) between CMs (CM#0 and CM#1) when NAS volumes (NAS user volumes and NAS backup volumes) are created. If the NAS volume is blocked or an unmount occurs, a failover of the meta cache to the other CM is performed. If the distribution of the meta cache becomes uneven, the memory of the CM with the larger meta cache may become insufficient or the access performance to the NAS volumes from the other CM may be reduced.

There are two methods to restore the meta cache to the initial location.

• Initialize meta cache distribution

Manually restores the meta cache.

This function restores the meta cache of the selected NAS volumes in the ETERNUS DX to the initial location at any time.

• Automatic meta cache distribution

Automatically restores the meta cache to the initial location.

Refer to "Enable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution" (page 521)

for details.

To redistribute the meta cache, using this function is recommended. If the [Enable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution] function is used, a meta cache redistribution is performed every hour on the half hour regardless of the host

I/O and the processes that are related to NAS may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

519

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Redistributing the meta cache (or the process of restoring the initial location) may take a maximum of two minutes for each NAS volume (or NAS user volume and NAS backup volume).

• If the meta cache is being redistributed at the scheduled start time of the snapshot acquisition, the start time of the snapshot acquisition may be delayed. Make sure to execute this function while snapshot acquisitions are not reserved.

• If the following operations are executed for NAS volumes where a meta cache redistribution is being performed, the operation may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes in each NAS volume until the redistribution is complete.

Deletion of the NAS volumes

Displaying the NAS volume status

Displaying the shared folder list

Creation of the shared folders

Deletion of the shared folders

Modification of the shared folder settings

• The meta cache cannot be redistributed for the following conditions.

Automatic meta cache distribution is being executed

A snapshot is being acquired (and the snapshot acquisition is not complete within a certain period of time)

The ETERNUS DX is in the high-load state (*1)

*1: If the message indicates that the meta cache distribution cannot be initialized due to the ETERNUS DX being overloaded, wait at least 30 minutes and then try again.

•

The current and the initial meta cache locations can be checked. Refer to "Meta Cache Distribution" (page 900)

for details.

• This function can be used even if "Automatic Meta Cache Distribution" is "Enable".

The procedure to restore the meta cache to the initial location manually is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the NAS volume (multiple selections can be made) to redistribute the meta cache and click [Initialize Distribution] in [Action].

For NAS volumes that are targets of a meta cache redistribution, "Current Location" is different from "Initial

Location" in the [Meta Cache Distribution] screen. If NAS volumes with the same "Current Location" and

"Initial Location" are selected and [Initialize Distribution] is clicked, the process is completed normally without any changes.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Initialization of the meta cache distribution starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Meta Cache Distribution] screen.

End of procedure

520

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Enable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

This function enables the automatic meta cache distribution.

If "Current Location" of the meta cache is different from "Initial Location", the meta cache of every NAS volume in the ETERNUS DX is automatically returned to the initial location for the following times.

• When the NAS Engine or the CM is activated

• Every hour on the half hour

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

Deletion of the NAS volumes

Displaying the NAS volume status

Displaying the shared folder list

Creation of the shared folders

Deletion of the shared folders

Modification of the shared folder settings

• If the following operations conflict with the execution time of the automatic meta cache distribution, the process that was started earlier is given priority.

Expanding the NAS user volume capacity

Backing up of the NAS user volume

Acquiring snapshots

If the process that was started earlier is not complete within five minutes, an error occurs for the process that was started later.

• Automatic meta cache distribution is executed when all of the following processes are complete.

Application of the controller firmware

Matching the controller firmware versions of both CMs (CM#0 and CM#1)

Activation of the CM

The current and the initial meta cache locations can be checked. Refer to

"Meta Cache Distribution" (page 900) for

details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Automatic Meta Cache Distribution" (page 1321) .

The procedure to enable the automatic meta cache distribution is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Enable Automatic Distribution] in [Action].

[Enable Automatic Distribution] cannot be clicked if "Automatic Meta Cache Distribution" is "Enable".

521

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

4. Connectivity Management

NAS Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Enabling of the automatic meta cache distribution starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Meta Cache Distribution] screen.

End of procedure

Disable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

This function disables the automatic meta cache distribution.

This function is used in a Unified Storage environment.

The procedure to disable the automatic meta cache distribution is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Disable Automatic Distribution] in [Action].

[Disable Automatic Distribution] cannot be clicked if "Automatic Meta Cache Distribution" is "Disable".

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Disabling of the automatic meta cache distribution starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Meta Cache Distribution] screen.

End of procedure

522

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

5. RAID Group Management

This chapter describes RAID group management.

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for RAID group can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for RAID Group

Create RAID Group

Delete RAID Group

Rename RAID Group

Change Controlling CM

Expand RAID Group

Modify RAID Group Parameters

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

Set Key Group (RAID Group)

Recovery SED

External RAID Group Management

Create External RAID Group

Delete External RAID Group

Recover External RAID Group

–

Display function

• RAID Group (Basic Information)

•

Tuning

Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

SED Key Group

• External RAID Group

523

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create RAID Group

This function creates RAID groups.

A RAID group is a group of drives that configure a RAID level.

For RAID groups that configure Thin Provisioning Pools, the required RAID levels and number of member drives that can be used are different. Refer to

"Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557)

for details.

Features and required number of drives for each RAID level

The following table shows the features and the required number of drives for each RAID level.

Actual RAID group configurations (or the number of available drives) vary depending on the maximum number of drives that can be installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Note that "Striping (RAID0)" has no data redundancy.

RAID level

High Performance

(RAID1+0)

High Capacity

(RAID5)

High Reliability

(RAID6)

Feature

The high I/O performance of RAID0 (striping) is combined with the reliability of RAID1 (mirroring).

Data divided into units of blocks and parity information that is created from the data are allocated across multiple drives to allow data redundancy.

The use of double parity allows the full recovery of lost data even in the event that two of the drives fail.

Required number of drives (*1)

2D+2M – 16D+16M

2D+1P – 15D+1P

3D+2P – 14D+2P

High Reliability

(RAID6-FR)

Configure a single RAID group with multiple RAID redundant sets and reserved areas equivalent to a hot spare. Distributing data in RAID groups allows high-speed rebuilding when the first drive fails. A recovery can be performed with up to two drive failures, however when the second drive fails, the rebuild is operated at a normal speed. Several restrictions apply to the RAID groups and

volumes of this RAID level. For the details, refer to "Restrictions for RAID6-FR" (page 524)

(3D+2P)x2+1HS

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(9D+2P)x2+1HS

(12D+2P)x2+1HS

(5D+2P)x4+1HS

(13D+2P)x2+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

(3D+2P)x6+1HS

Reliability

(RAID5+0)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

Multiple RAID5 volumes are RAID0 striped. For large capacity configurations, use of RAID5+0 instead of RAID5 results in enhanced performance, improved reliability, and shorter rebuilding times. Several restrictions apply to the RAID groups of this

RAID level. For the details, refer to

"Restrictions for RAID5+0"

(page 525)

Data is mirrored to two drives.

If one drive fails, the other drive continues operation (mirroring).

Data is split in unit of blocks and stored across multiple drives

(striping).

RAID0 has no data redundancy.

*1: D: Data drives, M: Mirror drives, P: Parity drives, HS: Hot Spares

(2D+1P)x2 – (15D+1P)x2

1D+1M

2D – 16D

Restrictions for RAID6-FR

The following restrictions apply to RAID groups (hereinafter referred to as "Fast Recovery RAID groups") that were created with RAID6-FR and volumes created in those RAID groups.

• The following operations that use LDE cannot be performed for Fast Recovery RAID groups.

Changing the RAID level to "RAID6-FR"

Changing the RAID level from "RAID6-FR"

Expanding the RAID group capacity by adding drives

524

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• "Standard (including concatenation volumes by means of LUN Concatenation)" and ODX Buffer volumes can be created in the Fast Recovery RAID group.

• Encrypted volumes can be created in the Fast Recovery RAID groups. However, encrypting volumes that exist in

Fast Recovery RAID groups is not allowed.

• The Stripe Depth for a new Fast Recovery RAID group is fixed at "64KB".

• The Copybackless function is not performed when the first drive fails in a Fast Recovery RAID group. A highspeed rebuild is performed in a hot spare area within the RAID group, and when the failed drive is exchanged for a normal drive, copyback is performed.

Restrictions for RAID5+0

The following restrictions apply to RAID groups that are created with "RAID5+0".

• The following operations that use LDE cannot be performed.

Changing the RAID level to "RAID5+0"

Changing the RAID level from "RAID5+0"

Expanding the RAID group capacity by adding drives

• The Stripe Depth for a new RAID group is fixed at "64KB".

Conditions for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout

The drive layout to configure RAID groups in the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 must satisfy the conditions described below.

RAID groups cannot be created if the required conditions are not satisfied.

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

RAID level

Mirroring (RAID1)

High Performance

(RAID1+0)

Required

Drive layout conditions

Allocate mirroring pair drives to different DEs.

Required Allocate mirroring pair drives to different DEs.

Recommended Allocate striping drives to as many DEs as possible.

Recommended Distribute member drives to as many DEs as possible.

High Capacity (RAID5)

Reliability (RAID5+0)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

RAID level

Mirroring (RAID1)

High Performance

(RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

Reliability (RAID5+0)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Drive layout conditions

Required Allocate mirroring pair drives to different DEs.

Recommended Allocate mirroring pair drives to DEs (*1) under different CEs when possible.

Allocate mirroring pair drives to different SAS cascades (*2) when possible.

Required Allocate mirroring pair drives to different DEs.

Recommended Allocate striping drives to DEs under as many CEs as possible.

Allocate striping drives to as many SAS cascades (*2) as possible.

Required

Allocate member drives to different DEs.

Recommended Distribute member drives to DEs under as many CEs as possible.

Distribute member drives to as many SAS cascades (*2) as possible.

Allocate two or less member drives to the same DE.

Member drives in the same DE must belong to different redundant groups.

Recommended Distribute member drives to DEs under as many CEs as possible.

Distribute member drives to as many SAS cascades (*2) as possible.

Required Allocate two or less member drives to the same DE.

Recommended Distribute member drives to DEs under as many CEs as possible.

Distribute member drives to as many SAS cascades (*2) as possible.

525

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

*1: "DEs under the different CEs" can be found by checking the DE number. DEs under different CEs have different numbers as the first digit of the DE number.

*2: "SAS cascade" for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 refers to DEs that are attached to one drive interface port. The DEs that are allocated to the same SAS cascade configuration are as follows:

• DE#x0, DE#x1, DE#x2, and DE#x3 that are connected to CE#x/DI Port#0 (x: 0 - B)

• DE#x4, DE#x5, DE#x6, and DE#x7 that are connected to CE#x/DI Port#1 (x: 0 - B)

• DE#x8, DE#x9, DE#xA, and DE#xB that are connected to CE#x/DI Port#2 (x: 0 - B)

• DE#xC, DE#xD, DE#xE, and DE#xF that are connected to CE#x/DI Port#3 (x: 0 - B)

(Example) DE#00, DE#01, DE#02, and DE#03 that are connected to CE#0/DI Port#0 are on the same SAS cascade.

The maximum number of RAID groups for each model

The maximum number of RAID groups varies depending on each model. The following table shows the maximum number of RAID groups for each model.

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

The maximum number of RAID groups

132

264

528

768

2304

Drive combinations that can configure a RAID group

The following table shows the drive combinations that can configure a RAID group.

Online

Online Nearline

Not recommended

SSD Online SED

Nearline SED

NG NG

SSD SED

Nearline

SSD

Online SED (*1)

Not recommended

Nearline SED

NG NG NG Not recommended

SSD SED NG NG NG NG NG OK

OK: RAID groups can be created, Not recommended: RAID groups can be created, but not a recommended configuration,

NG: RAID groups cannot be created

*1: In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, SEDs cannot be used for configuring a RAID group.

• "Striping (RAID0)" has no data redundancy. The use of "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity

(RAID5)", "High Reliability (RAID6)", "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)", "Reliability (RAID5+0)", or "Mirroring

(RAID1)" is recommended.

526

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create RAID Group" (page 1223) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create RAID Group" (page 1322) .

There are two methods to create a volume: automatic drive selection and manual drive selection.

■ Automatically selecting drives to create RAID groups

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The drives must be selected manually for the following cases.

• SSDs with an interface speed of 12Gbit/s (SSD-M/SSD-L) are installed in a high-density drive enclosure with an interface speed of 6Gbit/s.

If drives are automatically selected, all the SSDs operate at 6Gbit/s for any of the following conditions.

SSDs in the 6Gbit/s high-density drive enclosures are selected

SSDs in both the 6Gbit/s high-density drive enclosures and other drive enclosures are selected

• Drives that satisfy all of the following conditions are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The drive types are the same

The drive capacities are the same

The sector format (AF-compliant/non-AF-compliant) is different

The procedure to create a RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

2 Select "Automatic" for "Create Mode" and specify the detailed information of new RAID groups.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New RAID Group

• Name

● Automatic Setting

• Number of RAID Group

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

527

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Select Drives

• RAID Group Capacity

• When using SSDs, the SSD types (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD) cannot be specified. SSDs that are the same type and have the necessary capacity are selected. If SSDs with the same type are not available, RAID groups cannot be created. Note that if multiple RAID groups are created at once, different SSD types may be used for each RAID group. SSD types have no order of priority.

When using SSD SEDs, the SSD types (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED) cannot be specified. If "SSD SED" is selected for the drive type, drives are operated in the same way as SSDs.

• If "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity (RAID5)", or "Reliability (RAID5+0)" is selected for the

RAID level, RAID groups cannot be created with drives that are 6TB or larger (except SSDs and SSD

SEDs).

• If RAID groups cannot be created by using the drives that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

3 Click the [Create] button

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 RAID group creation starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

■ Manually selecting drives to create RAID groups

Requirements for selecting drives

• The drive requirements for creating RAID groups are listed below.

The drive status is " Present"

The drives are not registered in any RAID group, TPP, FTRP, REC Disk Buffer, or EXCP

The drives are not registered as hot spares

The drive type (Online/Nearline/SSD/Online SED/Nearline SED/SSD SED) must be the same

(Although "Online" type drives and "Nearline" type drives can be used in the same RAID group, using only

"Online" type drives or using only "Nearline" type drives is recommended. Also, "Online SED" type drives and

"Nearline SED" type drives can be used in the same RAID group, but using only "Online SED" type drives or using only "Nearline SED" type drives is recommended. This is because the available capacity and the access performance may be reduced when these drives are used in the same RAID group.)

If "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity (RAID5)", or "Reliability (RAID5+0)" is selected for the RAID level, drives that are 6TB or larger (except SSDs and SSD SEDs) cannot be specified.

• Drive recommendations for creating RAID groups are listed below.

Select drives that are the same size and the same speed. If drives of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest capacity becomes the standard, and all other drives are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest drive. In this case, the remaining drive space is not used. In addition, if drives of different speeds exist in a RAID group, the access performance of the RAID group is reduced by the slower drives.

Select the same SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD /SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED). If different types of SSDs exist in a RAID group, the access performance for all SSDs in the RAID group is adjusted to the SSD of the lowest interface speed.

Select the same sector format of drives (AF-compliant/non-AF-compliant).

528

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If the host connection environment does not support AF, select non-AF-compliant drives (*1). If AF-compliant drives (*2) are selected, a data format conversion occurs and the drive access performance is reduced.

When the host to be connected supports AF, both AF-compliant and non-AF-compliant drives can be selected.

*1: Drives (such as 2.5" Online, 2.5" Nearline) where "AF" is not displayed for the type.

*2: Drives (such as 2.5" Online AF, 2.5" Nearline AF) where "AF" is displayed for the type.

When "High Performance (RAID1+0)" or "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected for the RAID level, allocate the drives

(mirroring pair drives) by dividing them into two or more connection lines (for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/

DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650).

When "High Capacity (RAID5)", "High Reliability (RAID6)", or "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)" is selected for the

RAID level, allocate the drives (multiple drives configuring a striping) by dividing them into two or more connection lines (for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS

AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650).

If "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected for the RAID level, using drives other than SSD is recommended.

• There are conditions for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout. Refer to

ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout" (page 525)

for details.

Note that these conditions are not applied to other models.

The procedure to create a RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

2 Select "Manual" for "Create Mode" and specify the detailed information of new RAID groups.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New RAID Group

• Name

● Manual Setting

• RAID Level

• Fast Recovery Configuration

• RAID Group Capacity

529

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select drives using a list of the drives or the installation location image.

• SSDs with an interface speed of 12Gbit/s (SSD-M/SSD-L) must be installed in a high-density drive enclosure with the same interface speed. When these SSDs are installed in a high-density drive enclosure with an interface speed of 6Gbit/s, the SSDs operate at 6Gbit/s.

• The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

• When the number of drives for each RAID level and the number of selected drives does not match, the

[Create] button cannot be clicked.

• When SSDs are selected manually, the SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD/SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED) must be the same. If different types of SSDs exist in a RAID group, the access performance for all SSDs in the RAID group is adjusted to the SSD of the lowest interface speed.

■ Selecting drives from a list of the drives

Click the [Tabular] tab to select drives from the list.

Only unused drives are displayed on the list.

The main setting items are as follows.

• Checkbox to select drives

■ Selecting drives from the installation location image

Click the [Graphic] tab to select drives from the drive installation image.

The installation images of all the drives installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed. Checkboxes are displayed for unused drives.

The main setting items are as follows.

• DE selection list box

• Checkbox to select drives

4 Click the [Create] button

5 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 RAID group creation starts.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

530

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Delete RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete RAID Group

This function deletes the registered RAID groups in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

When a RAID group is deleted, the status of the drives that configured the RAID group change to data drives that are not used by any RAID group.

• The following RAID groups cannot be deleted:

RAID groups in which volumes are registered

RAID groups that are registered in TPPs or FTRPs (*1)

RAID groups that are registered as REC Disk Buffers

RAID groups that are registered as EXCPs

*1: Use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser to delete the RAID groups that are registered in the FTRPs.

• When deleting a RAID group where volumes are registered, delete the volumes in advance.

• Up to 128 RAID groups can be deleted at once.

The procedure to delete a RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the RAID group that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 RAID group deletion starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

531

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Rename RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Rename RAID Group

This function changes the name of RAID groups that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Multiple RAID groups can be renamed with a single operation.

The following RAID groups cannot be renamed:

• RAID groups that configure FTRPs

• RAID groups that are registered as EXCPs

• RAID group which "Usage" is "Temporary"

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Rename RAID Group" (page 1231) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Rename RAID Group" (page 1322) .

The procedure to rename RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the RAID group that is to be renamed (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Rename] in [Action].

2 Input the new "Name" and the "Start of Suffix".

The main setting items are as follows.

● Rename Setting

• Name

• Start of Suffix

Click the [Rename] button

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing RAID group name starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

532

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Change Controlling CM

This function changes the Controlling CM that is allocated to the RAID group.

Unequal loading between the CMs can be resolved by changing the Controlling CM.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• While changing the Controlling CM, the storage system status is changed from Write Back mode to Write

Through mode, reducing the I/O performance for the ETERNUS DX/AF. Perform this function when there are not many I/O operations. Changing the Controlling CM may take up to 20 or 30 minutes.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

A CE that is not in the " Normal" or " Undefined" state exists

A CM that is not in the " Normal" or " Warning" state exists

A BBU (Battery Unit (BTU)/Battery Charger Unit (BCU)) that is not in the " Normal" state exists

Formatting is being performed in the volumes that are registered in the target RAID group

Encryption is being performed in the target RAID group

The target RAID group status is not " Available"

The rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy is being performed in the target RAID group

The target RAID group belongs to a TPP that has Deduplication, Compression, or both enabled and the

DEDUP_SYS Volume in that TPP is in the " Readying", " Not Available", " Not Ready",

" Broken", or " Data Lost" state

The cache mode of the ETERNUS DX/AF is "Write Through Mode"

LDE is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

LUN Concatenation is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The RAID migration is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX

The TPV balancing is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The FTRP balancing is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF

This function can also be used for changing the Controlling CM of the RAID groups that configure a TPP.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Change Controlling CM" (page 1232)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Change Controlling CM" (page 1322)

The procedure to change Controlling CM of the RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the RAID group to change the Controlling CM (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Change Controlling CM] in [Action].

[Change Controlling CM] cannot be clicked under the following conditions:

• The usage for the selected RAID group is "Extreme Cache Pool"

• The selected RAID groups are used for configuring FTRPs

533

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Change Controlling CM

Select the Controlling CM after changing.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Change Controlling CM Setting

• New Controlling CM

3 Click the [Change] button

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Changing Controlling CM starts.

During Controlling CM change, the storage system status is changed from Write Back mode to Write

Through mode.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

534

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Expand RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Expand RAID Group

This function adds drives to the existing RAID group by using the Logical Device Expansion (LDE) function to dynamically expand the RAID group capacity. This function can also dynamically change the RAID level of an existing RAID group.

RAID Group Expansion provides the following features without stopping the ETERNUS DX/AF operation:

• RAID Group Expansion adds disks to the existing RAID group in units of one drive. This enables capacity expansion of RAID groups with smaller number of drive expansion.

• RAID groups can be expanded and any existing data in these RAID groups is retained.

Requirements for RAID groups to expand capacity

• The "Status" is " Available"

• Standard volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs are registered

• WSVs are not registered

• Not registered in the TPP

• Not registered in the FTRP

• Not registered as an REC Disk Buffer

• Not registered as an EXCP

• RAID level is not "Reliability (RAID5+0)" or "Reliability (RAID6-FR)"

• The RAID group is not blocked

• Rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy is not being performed

• The Controlling CM is not being changed

• One of the following functions is not being performed for the volume that is registered in the RAID group

Format volume

Expand volume

RAID migration

Encrypt volume

• Storage Migration paths are not created in the volume that is registered in the RAID group

• The stripe size of the RAID group is not expanded (*1)

*1: A RAID group for which the Stripe Depth value in the [RAID Group (Basic)] screen of the [RAID Group (Basic Information)] screen is 128KB or more. Note that the Stripe Depth value for RAID1 cannot be changed. Refer to

"Advanced Setting" (page 1230)

in "Create RAID Group" (page 1223)

for details.

Requirements for the ETERNUS DX/AF to expand capacity

• The cache mode is "Write Back Mode"

• All the CMs are in the normal state

• LDE is not being performed

• RAID group diagnosis is not being performed

• Disk diagnosis is not being performed

• Application of controller firmware is not being performed

• Application of disk firmware is not being performed

535

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Expand RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Before expanding the RAID group, back up data in all the logical volumes in the target RAID group to a different location. If not, data cannot be recovered when expansion fails. If expansion fails, data can be recovered from the backed up data.

• RAID Group Expansion can only be performed for one RAID group at a time.

• RAID Group Expansion cannot be suspended.

• The following functions cannot be used for RAID groups in which RAID Group Expansion is being performed:

Format volume

Create volume

Encrypt volume

RAID migration for the volume

Expand volume

Preventive maintenance

Diagnosis for RAID group

Diagnosis for disks

•

For some combinations of RAID levels, LDE cannot be used. Refer to "Availability of LDE for each combination of RAID levels" (page 536)

for details.

• RAID groups can be expanded when the RAID group capacity after performing expansion is the same or larger than the current RAID group capacity.

•

When expanding the drive capacity that configures a RAID group, use the procedure in "Start RAID Migration"

(page 307) instead of this function.

• In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

Availability of LDE for each combination of RAID levels

The following table shows availability of LDE functions (changing RAID levels or capacity expansion by adding drives).

RAID level before changing

RAID0

RAID1

RAID1+0

RAID5

RAID5+0

RAID6

RAID6-FR

RAID0

N/A

OK: LDE is available, N/A: LDE is not available

RAID1

N/A

RAID level after changing

RAID1+0

RAID5

RAID5+0

N/A

RAID6

N/A

RAID6-FR

N/A

536

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Expand RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Requirements for selecting drives

• The drive requirements for adding to RAID groups are listed below.

The drive selection requirements is the same as when manually creating RAID groups. Refer to

"Requirements for selecting drives" (page 528)

in "Create RAID Group"

for details.

Drives that have the same or larger capacity than the drive with the smallest capacity in the expansion target RAID group

If "High Performance (RAID1+0)" or "High Capacity (RAID5)" is selected for the RAID Level after an expansion, drives that are 6TB or larger (except SSDs and SSD SEDs) cannot be specified.

(Note that when drives that are 6TB or larger (except SSDs and SSD SEDs) already exist in the RAID group before the expansion, these drives can be used after changing the RAID level.)

• Drive recommendations for the expansion target RAID groups are listed below.

The recommended drive condition is the same as when manually creating RAID groups. Also, the drive layout conditions related to the RAID level after an expansion is the same as when manually creating RAID

groups. Refer to "Requirements for selecting drives" (page 528)

"Create RAID Group"

for details.

When the Dedicated Hot Spare is registered for the expansion target RAID group, use the drive smaller than the Dedicated Hot Spare capacity.

• There are conditions for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout. Refer to

ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout" (page 525)

for details. These conditions apply when the RAID level after expansion is "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity (RAID5)", and "High Reliability

(RAID6)".

Note that these conditions are not applied to other models.

Drive selection requirements for changing the RAID level

The following conditions are also required when changing the RAID level.

• When the RAID level before and after LDE is not changed:

The drives that are used in the RAID group before LDE was performed cannot be deleted.

• When the RAID level is changed after LDE:

The number of RAID group data drives (*1) after LDE cannot be less than the number before LDE.

RAID1+0

RAID5

RAID level

RAID6

RAID1

RAID0

Drive configuration (*2) nD+nM nD+1P nD+2P

1D+1M nD n

1 n n n

Number of data drives

*1: "Number of data drives" indicates the number of logical drives in RAID groups that contain user data. This number is different for each RAID level.

*2: D: Data drives, M: Mirror drives, P: Parity drives

Drives that are not used after changing the RAID level can be deleted from the RAID group. However, not all of the drives can be deleted from a RAID group.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Expand RAID Group" (page 1232) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Expand RAID Group" (page 1322) .

537

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Expand RAID Group

The procedure to expand RAID group capacity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the RAID group that is to be expanded and click [Expand] in [Action].

[Expand] cannot be clicked when the following RAID group is selected.

• The RAID level is "RAID5+0" or "RAID6-FR"

• The usage is "Extreme Cache Pool"

• WSVs are registered

• The stripe size is not "64KB"

2 Select the RAID level after expansion.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Manual Setting

• RAID Level after expand

If the selected number of drives exceeds the maximum, an error screen appears. If this occurs, check the parameter settings.

3 Select drives using a list of the drives or the installation location image.

• The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

538

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Expand RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Selecting drives from a list of the drives

Click the [Tabular] tab to select drives from the list.

The drives that are being used in the selected RAID group and the unused drives that can be used for expansion are displayed in the list.

The main setting items are as follows.

• Checkbox to select drives

■ Selecting drives from the installation location image

Click the [Graphic] tab to select drives from the drive installation image.

The installation images of all the drives installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

The main setting items are as follows.

• DE selection list box

• Checkbox to select drives

4 Click the [Expand] button.

5 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 RAID Group Expansion starts.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

539

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Modify RAID Group Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify RAID Group Parameters

This function tunes the following parameters of each RAID group.

• Parameters Setting

Rebuild Priority

Specify the level to give priority to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy instead of host access. Specifying a larger "Rebuild Priority" value may improve rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy performance.

• Advanced Settings

DCMF

DCMF is a coefficient for the command issuance amount of the drive. Specify this parameter to improve the sequential writing access performance. The bigger the value is, the more commands issue.

Drive Access Priority

This mode controls the command issuance order during drive access. Changing the command issuance order improves the throughput for all of the drives.

Throttle

Throttle is the proportion of the number of commands that are issued to a drive at the same time to the maximum number of commands that can be issued. By limiting the number of commands that are issued at the same time to the drive, the load on the specific RAID group (drive) is reduced.

Ordered Cut

Ordered Cut is the number of commands for optimizing drive access processing (priority control). By performing the priority control of commands in increments of the specified number, a long queue time for lowpriority commands can be eliminated.

• For normal use, it is not necessary to change the default setting of the RAID group parameters.

• When the "Rebuild Priority" setting is changed, the priority is changed not only for a rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy that will be performed after the setting is changed, but also for any rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy operations that are currently being performed.

• When the target RAID group is registered as an REC Disk Buffer, do not select "High" for the "Rebuild Priority" setting. Even if "High" is selected, rebuilding, copyback, and redundant copy are performed with "Middle" priority during host access.

• Specify the same RAID group parameters for all of the RAID groups that configure a WSV. If different RAID group parameters are specified, the host access performance may be reduced.

• If "Usage" for the selected RAID group is "Extreme Cache Pool", then "Rebuild Priority", "Drive Access Priority", and "Ordered Cut" cannot be specified.

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

LDE is being performed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The target RAID group belongs to an FTSP

• When specifying "Throttle " or "Ordered Cut", select "Enable" for "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting" in advance.

• RAID groups that configure a WSV can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen ([Used RAID Group] tab).

Refer to

"Volume Detail (Used RAID Group)" (page 840)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify RAID Group Parameters" (page 1233)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify RAID Group Parameters" (page 1323)

540

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Modify RAID Group Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to change the RAID group parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which RAID groups to change the RAID group parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and click [Modify RAID Group Parameters] in [Action].

2 Specify the RAID group parameters.

3 Click the [Modify] button

The response performance to the server may be affected by changing RAID group parameters.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The RAID group parameter modification starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

541

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

This function assigns the Eco-mode schedule to the RAID groups and sets the Eco-mode action.

Refer to "Specifications of the Eco-mode function" (page 542) for details about the Eco-mode function.

Specifications of the Eco-mode function

Eco-mode is a function to reduce power consumption by stopping the drive motors or turning off the drives that configure the RAID group or TPP while the RAID group or TPP is not accessed from the host. There are three Ecomode actions; "Drive motor off", "Drive power off", and "Drive always on".

To enable the Eco-mode, assign the Eco-mode schedule to a RAID group or TPP and select "Drive motor off" or

"Drive power off" as the Eco-mode action. When Eco-mode is enabled, the drives are activated during the scheduled event period. In the time periods outside the scheduled event, the drive status is changed according to the specified Eco-mode actions. Refer to

"Drive status when Eco-mode action is configured" (page 542) for details.

If the RAID group or TPP is accessed from the host while the drives are turned off or the drive motors are stopped, the drives are activated and can be accessed within 1 - 5 minutes.

Drive status when Eco-mode action is configured

Eco-mode Schedule Setting

Eco-mode Action

Drive power off

Drive motor off

During scheduled event term

Times other than scheduled event term (*1)

During scheduled event term

Times other than scheduled event term (*1)

Drive power

Eco-mode General Setting

Enabled

Drive motor

Drive power is on

Drive power is off

Drive power is on

Drive motor is activated

Drive motor is stopped

Drive motor is activated

Drive motor is stopped

Drive always on

Eco-mode schedule is not assigned

Drives not registered in the RAID groups or TPP

Drive power is on

Drive motor is always activated

Drive motors are always stopped

*1: If the RAID group is accessed, the drives are activated and can be accessed within 1 - 5 minutes.

Disabled

Drive power is on or the drive motor runs regardless of the schedule.

542

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Eco-mode is not available for the following RAID groups:

No volumes are created

Volumes other than Standard, WSV, SDV, or SDPV types are registered

A Storage Migration path is created in the volume

Configured by SSDs or SSD SEDs

Registered as an REC Disk Buffer

Registered as an EXCP

• RAID groups to which the SDPVs belong cannot be selected as the target for drive motor management by the

Eco-mode.

• When using Eco-mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly. If the time/date of the ETERNUS DX is wrong, processes used for stopping and starting the drive motor cannot be performed per the Eco-mode schedule.

• When the "External" (drive motor management by the Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF) is selected, it can be changed to the Eco-mode schedule. But when the Eco-mode schedule is selected, it cannot be changed to "External".

• If any of the following conditions occur when drive motors are stopped, the drive will be started even when the drive motor is inactive. The Eco-mode schedule is re-enabled when the conditions listed have finished. (*1)

The status of the RAID group is other than " Available"

Functions that change the RAID group or the volume configuration are being performed

Rebuild or copyback is being performed in the target RAID group

LDE is being performed in the target RAID group

Formatting is being performed in the volumes registered in the RAID group

RAID migration is being performed in the volumes registered in the RAID group

Advanced Copy is being performed in the volume registered in the RAID group (copy session status is not

"Suspend" or the phase is not "Tracking")

Encryption is being performed in the volumes registered in the RAID group

ODX Buffer volumes exist in the RAID group

During maintenance

A disk diagnosis or a RAID group diagnosis is being performed or G-List is being exported

A module error related to the access paths of the controller modules and drives is detected

• Specify the same Eco-mode schedule for all of the RAID groups that configure a WSV. If a different Eco-mode schedule is specified, activation of a stopped drive is required to accept the host access, and the performance of the response may be reduced.

• If the server OS or software periodically accesses the ETERNUS DX, the drive motor may not stop even when the

Eco-mode is enabled.(*1)

*1: This does not only affect the motor stoppage, but includes the cutting of the drives power as well.

543

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Before applying Eco-mode for RAID groups, use the procedure in

"Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page

105)

to enable the Eco-mode setting for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

•

Set the Eco-mode schedule using the procedure in "Modify Eco-mode Schedule" (page 109) .

• When selecting multiple RAID groups as the target of the Eco-mode, the same Eco-mode schedule can be specified for all the selected RAID groups.

•

RAID groups that configure a WSV can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to "Volume Detail (Used

RAID Group)" (page 840)

for details.

• To use Eco-mode for RAID groups registered in Thin Provisioning Pools, assign the Eco-mode schedule to the

Thin Provisioning Pools. Refer to

"Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 583) for details.

• Note that Eco-mode cannot be set to RAID groups registered in the FTSP.

• Dedicated Hot Spares are operated according to the Eco-mode schedule of the assigned RAID groups even if they are not included in the relevant RAID group.

• Global Hot Spares are operated according to the Eco-mode schedule of the assigned RAID groups only when they are included in the RAID groups.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" (page 1236)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" (page 1323)

The procedure to set Eco-mode schedule for the RAID group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the RAID group to assign the Eco-mode schedule (multiple selections can be made) to and click [Assign Eco-mode] in [Action].

Select the Eco-mode schedule that is to be assigned and select the Eco-mode action.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Eco-mode Schedule Setting

• Eco-mode Schedule

• Eco-mode Action

544

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

Click the [Assign] button

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Assigning of the Eco-mode schedule starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Eco-mode Schedule] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

545

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Set Key Group (RAID Group)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Key Group (RAID Group)

This function registers or deletes any RAID groups that are configured with SEDs in the key group.

The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same SED authentication key.

RAID groups in the key group are managed by the SED authentication key that is obtained from the key server. One key group can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

If a RAID group is not registered in the key group, the RAID group is managed by the common key.

• Before registering RAID groups in the key group, perform the following settings:

(1) Create a key group.

(2) Allocate the master server or the slave server to the key group.

(3) Set the key for the key group and confirm that the key status is "Normal".

Refer to

"Create Key Group" (page 185)

and "Update SED Authentication Key" (page 188) for details.

• RAID groups cannot be added to the key group when the RAID groups are configured by SEDs for which the common key is not registered.

• RAID groups with a status other than " Available" cannot be added to the key group.

• Information on the RAID groups that are configured by SEDs and registration status to the key group can be

checked in the [SED Key Group] screen. Refer to "SED Key Group" (page 908)

for details.

• Use the [Key Group] screen to check the SED authentication key information and the SSL/KMIP certificate

information that is used for the key group. Refer to "Key Group" (page 675) for details.

• Even when operations are being performed for volumes that configure a key management target RAID group, this RAID group can be added to or deleted from the key group.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Key Group (RAID Group)" (page 1236) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Key Group (RAID Group)" (page 1323) .

The procedure to register or delete the RAID groups in the key group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which RAID group to add to or delete from the key group (multiple selections can be made), and click [Set Key Group] in [Action].

Settings for the selected RAID groups are applied in a single process. To add or delete multiple RAID groups, only select the RAID groups that are to be added or deleted (do not select all of the RAID groups).

546

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Set Key Group (RAID Group)

Select the key group setting state.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Key Group Setting

• Key Group

3 Click the [Set] button

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• If there is a RAID group with a status other than " Available"

• If the status of the key in the key group is not "Normal", "Expiration", or "Modifying"

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Key group setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [SED Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

547

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

Recovery SED

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Recovery SED

This function recovers the RAID groups that are in locked status.

"Locked status" indicates that the RAID group is blocked because the SED authentication key could not be obtained from the key server.

Conditions that can be recovered by using the "Recovery SED" function

• Locked status when enabling or forcibly enabling a disk

• Locked status when forcibly recovering or forcibly enabling a RAID group

• Locked status when recovering from DE failure

• Locked status when applying disk firmware

• Locked status when starting an operation after a disk has been stopped by the Eco-mode

• Locked status when communication with the key server failed when starting or rebooting the ETERNUS DX/AF

This function can only be used to recover locked RAID groups. This function cannot be used for recovering blocked

RAID groups that occur due to errors that are not listed above. Recovery operation of RAID groups for which the status is " Broken" can be performed by using the [Recover RAID Group] function. Note that the [Recover RAID

Group] function can be performed by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

• SED recovery from locked status is performed according to the "Recovery Mode" setting of the key group. The

"Recovery Mode" setting can be checked in the [Key Group] screen. Refer to

"Key Group" (page 675) for details.

When "Recovery Mode" is "Automatic", the ETERNUS DX/AF monitors the RAID group periodically. If a locked

RAID group is detected, recovery is performed on the RAID group by the ETERNUS DX/AF automatically.

When "Recovery Mode" is "Manual", use this function to manually recover the locked RAID group.

• "Recovery Mode" can be specified when creating a key group. Refer to

"Create Key Group" (page 185) for

details.

• This function can be used even if a key group is not created or no locked RAID groups are exist. If there are no locked RAID groups that can be recovered, this function completes successfully.

The procedure to recover RAID groups that are in the locked status is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Recovery SED] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Recovery of the SED starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [SED Key Group] screen.

End of procedure

548

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

External RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External RAID Group Management

This section describes External RAID Group management.

External RAID Group management provides the following functions:

•

Create External RAID Group

•

Delete External RAID Group

•

Recover External RAID Group

Create External RAID Group

This function creates External RAID Groups from External Drives.

This function is available only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

The maximum number of External RAID Groups for each model

The maximum number of External RAID Groups that can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF varies depending on each model. The following table shows the maximum number of External RAID Groups that can be created for each model.

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

The maximum number of External RAID Groups

512

2048

4096

8192

16384

4096

8192

4096

• Creating an External Drive is required in advance. Refer to

"Create External Drive" (page 203)

for details.

• The Controlling CM of the External RAID Group is automatically allocated.

• The following operations are not available for the created External RAID Groups:

Changing the External RAID Group information (rename, change Controlling CM, expand capacity, modify parameters, and assign Eco-mode schedule)

Diagnosing External RAID Groups

Creating TPPs using External RAID Groups

• One External RAID Group consists of one External Drive. If multiple External Drives are selected, the same number of External RAID Groups are created with a single operation.

• Created External RAID Groups are displayed in the [External RAID Group] screen. Refer to

"External RAID

Group" (page 916) for details.

• External RAID Groups can be deleted. Refer to

"Delete External RAID Group" (page 551)

for details.

• External RAID Groups can be recovered. Refer to

"Recover External RAID Group" (page 551)

for details.

549

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

External RAID Group Management

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create External RAID Group" (page 1237)

The procedure to create External RAID Groups is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

2 Specify the External RAID Group detailed information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● New External RAID Group

• Name

● External Drive List

• Checkbox to select External Drives

• Select the checkbox to the left of "No." to create External RAID Groups from all External Drives.

• If no External Drives are selected, the [Create] button cannot be clicked.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The status of the selected External Drive is not " Present"

• The number of External RAID Groups for each model exceeds the maximum number

3 Click the [Create] button

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 External RAID Group creation starts.

550

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

External RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [External RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

Delete External RAID Group

This function deletes the registered External RAID Groups.

This function is available only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

External RAID Groups where External Volumes are registered cannot be deleted. Delete the External Volumes

before starting this function. Refer to "Delete Volume" (page 279) for details.

•

The list of External RAID Groups is displayed in the [External RAID Group] screen. Refer to "External RAID

Group" (page 916) for details.

• Use the [Volume] screen to check the External RAID Groups where External Volumes are registered. Refer to

the "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799) for details.

The procedure to delete External RAID Groups is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the External RAID Group that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Delete] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The External RAID Group deletion starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [External RAID Group] screen.

End of procedure

Recover External RAID Group

This function recovers the External RAID Groups in the error response state.

This function is available only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

The procedure to recover an External RAID Group is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the External RAID Group that is to be recovered and click [Recover] in [Action].

• [Recover] cannot be clicked if the selected External RAID Group is not in the " Broken" state.

• If an error occurs in the access path to the External RAID Group, an error screen appears. Check the access path settings.

551

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

5. RAID Group Management

External RAID Group Management

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Recovery of the External RAID Group starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [External RAID Group] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

552

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

This chapter describes Thin Provisioning Pool management.

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Thin Provisioning can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Thin Provisioning

Set Thin Provisioning

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

Delete Thin Provisioning Pool

Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (All Area)

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (Unformatted Area)

Set Deduplication/Compression

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

Stop Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

Display function

• Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)

•

Threshold (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

• Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)

• Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)

• Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)

553

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Set Thin Provisioning

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Thin Provisioning

This function enables or disables the use of the Thin Provisioning function and sets the maximum pool capacity.

The maximum pool capacity is the maximum total capacity for TPPs and FTRPs that can be created in the ETERNUS

DX/AF. The chunk size is determined by the specified maximum pool capacity.

Refer to

"The maximum number of pools, maximum pool capacity, and determined chunk size for each model"

(page 557) for details.

• Note that the Thin Provisioning function is not provided for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4 1CM model and the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3 1CM model. In addition, the [Thin Provisioning] navigation is not displayed for these models.

• If the maximum pool capacity is already being used with the controller firmware version earlier than V10L70, even if the maximum pool capacity is expanded with a controller firmware upgrade, additional pools cannot be created.

For example, if the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 is used and the total capacity of the existing pools is "2 PB"

(chunk size = 21 MB), even if this function is used to expand the maximum pool capacity from "2 PB" (chunk size = 21 MB) to "4 PB" (chunk size = 42 MB), the capacity that can be used to create new pools is fixed to "0".

If the controller firmware version is earlier than V10L70 and the use of the Thin Provisioning Pool capacity is expected to be larger than the current maximum pool capacity, update the controller firmware version to

V10L70 or later, and then expand the maximum pool capacity as soon as possible. The capacity for pools that can be newly created in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed in the [Create Thin Provisioning Pool] screen. Refer to

"Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557)

for details.

• If the Virtual Volume function is enabled, the current state (enabled or disabled) of the Thin Provisioning function cannot be changed. To check whether the Virtual Volume function is enabled or disabled, use the [Sys-

tem] screen. Refer to "System (Basic Information)" (page 657) for details.

•

The FTRP capacity that can be used for VVOLs is different from the maximum pool capacity. Refer to "The maximum FTRP capacity that can be used as VVOLs" (page 555) for details.

• The Thin Provisioning function cannot be disabled in the following conditions:

TPPs exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF

"TPV balancing" is selected for the Thin Provisioning allocation mode

The Automated Storage Tiering feature is enabled (*1)

*1: Enabling or disabling the Automated Storage Tiering feature is performed by using ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• If the following conditions are all satisfied, the Thin Provisioning function cannot be enabled.

The ETERNUS DX8700 S3 is used

"GS License" has been registered in the ETERNUS DX (*1)

The usable memory size is 8GB/CM

(or "Cache expansion License for DX8700 S3 GS(16GB to 32GB)" has not been registered (*1))

*1: The registration status of "GS License" and "Cache expansion License" can be checked when logged in using a user account with the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

• Note that the following pool capacity may not be available depending on the copy table size, the REC Buffer size, the total TFOV capacity (*1), and the registration of the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

1.5 PB or larger

For the ETERNUS DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650

1024 TB or larger

*1: The total TFOV capacity indicates the total capacity of the volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function in an

ETERNUS DX/AF. When the total TFOV capacity is expanded from the default capacity, the shared area in the cache

memory is used. Refer to "Default TFOV capacity for each model" (page 555)

for details.

554

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Set Thin Provisioning

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If "Disable" is selected for the Thin Provisioning function, make sure to change the Thin Provisioning allocation

mode from "TPV balancing" to the default "TPP balancing" setting. Refer to "Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page

76)

for details.

The maximum FTRP capacity that can be used as VVOLs

Model

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

The maximum FTRP capacity that can be used as VVOLs

256 TB

384 TB

1024 TB

128 TB

2 PB

256 TB

1024 TB

256 TB

The actual available capacity that can be used as a VVOL is limited depending on whichever is smaller, the maximum FTRP capacity or the maximum pool capacity. For example, if the ETERNUS DX600 S3 is used and the maximum pool capacity is "128 TB", the actual capacity that can be used for VVOLs is 128 TB even if the maximum

FTRP capacity that can be used for VVOLs is "1024 TB".

Default TFOV capacity for each model

Model

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

Default capacity

256 TB

384 TB

768 TB

128 TB

1 PB

256 TB

768 TB

256 TB

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Thin Provisioning" (page 1238) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Thin Provisioning" (page 1324) .

The procedure to switch between "Enable" or "Disable" for the Thin Provisioning function and set the maximum pool capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF are as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Set Thin Provisioning] in [Action].

555

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Set Thin Provisioning

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select whether to enable or disable the Thin Provisioning function and specify the maximum pool capacity.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Thin Provisioning Settings

• Thin Provisioning

• Maximum Pool Capacity

If the Virtual Volume function is being used and the chunk size is changed as a result of a maximum pool capacity expansion, a warning message related to the Virtual Volume function appears. Check the parameter settings.

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Thin Provisioning setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

End of procedure

556

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

This function creates a Thin Provisioning Pool.

The maximum number of pools, maximum pool capacity, and determined chunk size for each model

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

Determined chunk size (*3)

Maximum Number of Pools (*1)

132

256

Maximum Pool Capacity (*2)

32 TB, 64 TB, 128 TB

32 TB, 64 TB, 128 TB,

256 TB

64 TB, 128 TB, 256 TB,

384 TB

128 TB, 256 TB, 512 TB,

768 TB, 1024 TB

64 TB, 128 TB

256 TB, 512 TB, 768 TB,

1024 TB, 1.5 PB, 2 PB

32 TB, 64 TB, 128 TB,

256 TB

128 TB, 256 TB, 512 TB,

768 TB, 1024 TB

32 TB, 64 TB, 128 TB,

256 TB

21 MB

256 TB

512 TB

768 TB

2 PB

256 TB

4 PB

512 TB

2 PB

512 TB

42 MB

512 TB

1024 TB

1.5 PB

4 PB

512 TB

8 PB

1024 TB

4 PB

1024 TB

84 MB

1024 TB

2 PB

3 PB

8 PB

1024 TB

16 PB

2 PB

8 PB

2 PB

168 MB

*1: Up to 256 pools can be created. When the maximum installation number of drives of a model is 512 or less, the maximum number of pools is half the maximum installation number of drives. The maximum pool number is the maximum total number of TPPs and FTSPs that can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

*2: The maximum pool capacity is specified when "Enable" is selected for the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to

"Set Thin

Provisioning" (page 554)

for details. The maximum pool capacity is the maximum total capacity for TPPs and FTRPs that can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

*3: Chunk size is a physical capacity that is assigned to virtual logical volumes created in TPPs and FTRPs when a write occurs from the host. The chunk size is determined according to the "Maximum Pool Capacity" of the ETERNUS DX/AF when a new

TPP is created. The chunk size for the created TPP cannot be changed. The chunk size for each pool is displayed in the TPP list and the FTRP list.

If the controller firmware for the ETERNUS DX/AF is upgraded to V10L70 or later, the default chunk size (21 MB) is set.

The number of member drives in each RAID group

The number of member drives for each RAID level is listed in the following table.

RAID level

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

Number of member drives

4, 8, 16, 24

4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 13

6, 8, 9, 10

13, 17, 31

557

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

•

When creating TPPs, enable the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to "Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554)

for details.

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, SEDs cannot be used for configuring a TPP.

• The encryption function cannot be used for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3.

• When encryption mode is disabled, TPP encrypted by CM cannot be created.

• Once a TPP has been created, the encryption status cannot be changed.

• The chunk size is determined according to the "Maximum Pool Capacity" of the ETERNUS DX/AF when a new

TPP is created. If TPPs with different chunk sizes exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF, the maximum pool capacity might not be used to create TPPs. Refer to

"Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554)

for details.

• If the error message "The process was aborted because it exceeds executable format size." appears, TPPs cannot be created. Reduce the "Thin Provisioning Pool Total Capacity" and re-execute this function.

• TPPs cannot be created in the following conditions:

When the maximum number of pools are already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

When the maximum capacity of pools are already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

When the resources for creating TPPs (such as the number of RAID groups and volumes) are insufficient

(When the maximum number of RAID groups or volumes already exists, TPPs cannot be created)

The control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

(*1)

• After a TPP is created, the TPP is formatted automatically. To check the progress of formatting ("Progress",

"Estimated Time Left", and "Remaining Size"), refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925)

. Click the TPP name to display the basic information.

•

To expand the TPP capacity after a TPP is created, refer to "Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 567)

•

To rename the TPP after a TPP is created, refer to "Rename Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 566)

• To change the TPP threshold after a TPP is created, refer to

"Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool" (page

579)

• Deduplication, Compression, or both Deduplication and Compression can be enabled for a TPP when it is cre-

ated. Refer to "Deduplication/Compression setting for TPPs" (page 558) for details.

•

To check the current maximum pool capacity, refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)" (page 948)

• In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

Deduplication/Compression setting for TPPs

The following two methods are available to set Deduplication/Compression for the TPPs.

• Setting Deduplication/Compression during a TPP creation (recommended)

Create TPPs and perform the Deduplication/Compression setting with a single operation.

Set the following parameters when creating TPPs.

Select "Automatic" for "Create Mode".

Enable "Deduplication", "Compression", or both.

To set Deduplication/Compression during the creation of a TPP, a system configuration (including drives and internal resources) that allows the creation of at least two RAID groups in a TPP is required. An error occurs for this function if two RAID groups cannot be created. Refer to

"Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 575) for

other required conditions.

558

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Setting Deduplication/Compression after a TPP creation

With this method, users can create TPPs according to the customer environment. (For example, a user can specify RAID groups that configure the target TPP.)

Set the following parameters when creating TPPs.

Select "Manual" for "Create Mode".

If the chunk size of the TPPs is not "21 MB", select the "Deduplication/Compression Ready" checkbox in the

"Chunk Size" field

Perform the Deduplication/Compression setting after a TPP is created.

(Refer to "Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 575)

for details.)

The creation of at least two RAID groups in the TPP is recommended for setting Deduplication/Compression after the TPP is created.

To create a Deduplication/Compression target TPP, using the method described in "Setting Deduplication/Compression during a TPP creation" is recommended because the TPP creation and the Deduplication/Compression setting can both be performed with a single operation.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1240) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1325) .

There are two methods to create a TPP: automatic drive selection and manual drive selection.

■ Automatically selecting drives to create TPPs

To create a new TPP automatically, select Drive Type and RAID Level, and input TPP capacity. The Controlling CM of the RAID groups that configure the TPP is determined automatically.

The drives must be selected manually for the following cases.

• SSDs with an interface speed of 12Gbit/s (SSD-M/SSD-L) are installed in a high-density drive enclosure with an interface speed of 6Gbit/s.

If drives are automatically selected, all the SSDs operate at 6Gbit/s for any of the following conditions.

SSDs in the 6Gbit/s high-density drive enclosures are selected

SSDs in both the 6Gbit/s high-density drive enclosures and other drive enclosures are selected

• Drives that satisfy all of the following conditions are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The drive types are the same

The drive capacities are the same

The sector format (AF-compliant/non-AF-compliant) is different

The procedure to create a TPP by selecting drives automatically is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

559

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

Select "Automatic" for "Create Mode" and specify the other parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Thin Provisioning Pool

• Name

● Automatic Setting

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

• Select Drives

• Thin Provisioning Pool Total Capacity

• Alarm

• Deduplication

• Compression

• When using SSDs, the SSD types (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD) cannot be specified. SSDs that are the same type and have the necessary capacity in a RAID group to create TPPs are selected. If the number of SSDs with the same type is insufficient for configuring a RAID group, a TPP is not created. In this case, reduce the total capacity of the TPP. If multiple RAID groups are created in a TPP, different SSD types may be used for the RAID groups. SSD types have no order of priority.

When using SSD SEDs, the SSD types (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED) cannot be specified. If "SSD SED" is selected, drives are operated in the same way as SSDs.

• If "High Performance (RAID1+0)" or "High Capacity (RAID5)" is selected for the RAID level, RAID groups cannot be created with drives that are 6TB or larger (except SSDs and SSD SEDs).

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

When the total value of TPP capacity to be created and existing pool capacity exceeds the maximum pool capacity for each model

When a TPP that meets the specified conditions (drive type, RAID level, and capacity that is equal to or larger than the specified value) cannot be created with the installed drives in the ETERNUS DX/AF

560

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The maximum capacity that can be used to create new TPPs is displayed to the right of the setting field for

"Thin Provisioning Pool Total Capacity" in the "Max: xx.xx [PB/TB/GB/MB]" format.

3 Click the [Create] button

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Create Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

■ Manually selecting drives to create TPPs

To create a new TPP manually, select Drive Type, RAID Level, and the drive that configures the TPP.

Requirements for selecting drives

• The conditions for RAID groups in the TPP are as follows:

The RAID level (High Performance (RAID1+0) / High Capacity (RAID5) / High Reliability (RAID6) / High Reliability (RAID6-FR) / Mirroring (RAID1) / Striping (RAID0)) must be the same

The number of member drives in the RAID group must be the same

The drive type (Online/Nearline/SSD/Online SED/Nearline SED/SSD SED) must be the same

(If "Online" is selected for the drive type, "Online" type drives and "Nearline" type drives can be used in the same RAID group. However, using only "Online" type drives is recommended. If "Online SED" is selected for the drive type, "Online SED" type drives and "Nearline SED" type drives can be used in the same RAID group.

However, using only "Online SED" type drives is recommended. This is because the available capacity and the access performance may be reduced when these drives are used in the same RAID group.)

When the RAID level is "High Performance (RAID1+0)" or "High Capacity (RAID5)", the drive must be smaller than 6TB (except SSDs and SSD SEDs)

• The recommended drive configuration of the RAID group in the TPP is the same as when manually creating

RAID groups. Also, the drive layout conditions related to the RAID level is the same as when manually creating

RAID groups. Refer to "Requirements for selecting drives" (page 528)

"Create RAID Group" for details.

• There are conditions for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout. Refer to

ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout" (page 525)

for details. These conditions apply when the RAID level is "Mirroring (RAID1)", "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity (RAID5)", "High Reliability

(RAID6)", and "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)".

Note that these conditions are not applied to other models.

The procedure to create a TPP by selecting drives manually is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create] in [Action].

561

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

Select "Manual" for "Create Mode" and specify the other parameters.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● New Thin Provisioning Pool

• Name

● Manual Setting

• Drive Type

• RAID Level

• Fast Recovery Configuration

• Alarm

• Chunk Size

The maximum capacity that can be used to create new TPPs is displayed in the "Thin Provisioning Pool

Total Capacity" field in the "Max: xx.xx [PB/TB/GB/MB]" format.

562

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

Click the [Add] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Add RAID Group] screen is displayed.

4 Select the Controlling CM of the RAID group and select all the drives to be registered in the RAID group from the list or from the installation image.

■ Selecting drives from a list of the drives

Click the [Tabular] tab to select drives from the list. Only unused drives are displayed on the list.

The main setting items are as follows.

• Checkbox to select drives

■ Selecting drives from the installation location image

Click the [Graphic] tab to select drives from the drive installation image. The installation images of all the drives installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed. Checkboxes are displayed for unused drives.

The main setting items are as follows.

• DE selection list box

• Checkbox to select RAID groups

563

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

5 Click the [OK] button.

 The screen returns to the previous screen. The created RAID group is displayed in the RAID group list.

• Click the [RAID Level] link in the RAID group list for the existing RAID group to perform the following operations.

The number of member drives can be checked. The drives with the checkbox selected in the displayed screen are the member of the RAID group.

The Controlling CM and configuration drives of the RAID group can be changed.

• Click the [Delete] button of the target RAID group area in the RAID group list to delete the newly added RAID group.

6 When creating multiple RAID groups that configure a TPP, repeat

Step 3

through

Step 5 .

If the total value of TPP capacity to be created and existing pool capacity exceeds the maximum pool capacity for each model, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

7 After creating a RAID group that configures the TPP, click the [Create] button.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Create Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

564

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Delete Thin Provisioning Pool

This function deletes a Thin Provisioning Pool.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• TPPs that have volumes registered cannot be deleted. When deleting a TPP, delete the volumes in advance. To delete a volume, refer to

"Delete Volume" (page 279) .

• TPPs cannot be deleted if Deduplication or Compression is enabled. When deleting TPPs, disable Deduplica-

tion and Compression for the relevant TPPs in advance. Refer to "Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 575)

for details.

• After deleting a TPP, all the RAID groups that configure the TPP are also deleted.

• Use the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen to check whether Deduplication or Compression is set for the relevant

TPP. Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922) for details.

The procedure to delete a Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

Select the TPP to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Delete] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Delete Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

565

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

This function changes a Thin Provisioning Pool name.

Multiple TPPs can be renamed with a single operation.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Rename Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1248) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Rename Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1325) .

The procedure to rename TPP is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPP that is to be renamed (multiple selections can be made) and click [Rename] in

[Action].

2 Input the new TPP name and the suffix starting number (only when multiple TPPs are selected).

The main setting items are as follows.

● Rename Setting

• Name

• Start of Suffix

3 Click the [Rename] button

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Rename Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

566

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

This function expands the capacity of a Thin Provisioning Pool.

Refer to

"The maximum number of pools, maximum pool capacity, and determined chunk size for each model"

(page 557) for details about the maximum number and capacity of pools for each model.

• TPP capacity is expanded in units of RAID groups. The specifications for a RAID group (such as the RAID level, the drive type, and the number of member drives) that is to be added are the same as the existing RAID group.

• The chunk size is determined according to the "Maximum Pool Capacity" of the ETERNUS DX/AF when a new

TPP is created. If TPPs with different chunk sizes exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF, the maximum pool capacity

might not be used to expand TPPs. Refer to "Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554) for details.

• If the error message "The process was aborted because it exceeds executable format size." appears, TPPs cannot be expanded. Reduce the "Total Capacity after expand" and re-execute this function.

• TPP capacity cannot be expanded in the following conditions:

When the maximum capacity of pools are already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

When resources for creating TPPs (such as the number of RAID groups and volumes) are insufficient

(When the maximum number of RAID groups or volumes already exists, TPP cannot be expanded)

The control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

(*1)

• After a TPP capacity is expanded, the expanded area of TPP is formatted automatically. To check the progress of formatting ("Progress", "Estimated Time Left", and "Remaining Size"), refer to

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail

(Basic)" (page 925)

. Click the TPP name to display the basic information.

• If the RAID groups in the TPP are managed using the SED authentication key, register the RAID groups that are added to the relevant TPP in the key group of the same SED authentication key. Refer to

"Set Key Group (RAID

Group)" (page 546) for details.

•

To check the current maximum pool capacity, refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)" (page 948)

• In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1249) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1325) .

There are two methods to expand a TPP: automatic drive selection and manual drive selection.

567

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

■ Automatically selecting drives to expand a TPP

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The drives must be selected manually for the following cases.

• SSDs with an interface speed of 12Gbit/s (SSD-M/SSD-L) are installed in a high-density drive enclosure with an interface speed of 6Gbit/s.

If drives are automatically selected, all the SSDs operate at 6Gbit/s for any of the following conditions.

SSDs in the 6Gbit/s high-density drive enclosures are selected

SSDs in both the 6Gbit/s high-density drive enclosures and other drive enclosures are selected

• Drives that satisfy all of the following conditions are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The drive types are the same

The drive capacities are the same

The sector format (AF-compliant/non-AF-compliant) is different

The procedure to expand a TPP by selecting drives automatically is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPP to be expanded and click [Expand] in [Action].

2 Select "Automatic" for "Expand Mode" and specify the TPP capacity after expansion.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Automatic Setting

• Total Capacity after expand

568

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When the TPP is configured with a drive type of SSD, SSDs with the same type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD) as the existing drives are selected. If RAID groups cannot be configured with SSDs of a relevant type, RAID groups are created in the ETERNUS DX/AF by selecting the most installed type among the SSDs with the same capacity. In this case, RAID groups with different SSD types exist in a TPP. Note that SSD types have no order of priority. If RAID groups cannot be created with any type of SSDs, TPP expansion is not available.

When the TPP is configured with a drive type of SSD SED, SSD SEDs with the same type (SSD-M SED/SSD-

L SED) as the existing drives are selected. "SSD SEDs" are operated in the same way as SSDs.

• When the RAID level is "High Performance (RAID1+0)" or "High Capacity (RAID5)", drives that are 6TB or larger (except SSDs and SSD SEDs) are not selected.

• If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

The total value of TPP capacity to be expanded and existing pool capacity exceeds the maximum pool capacity for each model

The TPP cannot be expanded over the specified capacity in the drive installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF

The maximum capacity that can be used to expand the TPP is displayed to the right of the setting field for

"Total Capacity after expand" in the "Max: xx.xx [PB/TB/GB/MB]" format. "Total Capacity after expand" includes the current TPP capacity.

3 Click the [Expand] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Expand Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

■ Manually selecting drives to expand a TPP

Select drives manually to expand the TPP. For the required conditions, refer to "Requirements for selecting drives"

(page 561)

"Create Thin Provisioning Pool"

. For the recommended conditions, refer to "Requirements for selecting drives" (page 528) in

"Create RAID Group" .

Check the specifications of the existing RAID groups (number of member drives and drive type) in the TPP in

advance. For details on how to check the specifications, refer to "Check the RAID group specification" (page 569)

The same Stripe Depth value as the existing RAID groups is applied for the newly added RAID group.

Check the RAID group specification

(1) From the TPP list in the [Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)] screen, click the [No.] link or the [Name]

link for the TPP to be expanded. Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922)

for details.

(2) The basic information of the TPP is displayed. Click the [RAID Group] tab to switch the display.

(3) The list of RAID groups that configure the TPP is displayed. Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link for the RAID group. Any RAID group can be specified because the RAID groups in the TPP have the same specifications.

569

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

(4) Click the [Drive] tab in the RAID group detail screen. Check the drive type and the number of member drives that configure the RAID group.

The procedure to expand a TPP by selecting drives manually is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPP to be expanded and click [Expand] in [Action].

Select "Manual" for "Expand Mode".

3 Click the [Add] button.

The maximum capacity that can be used to expand the TPP is displayed in the "Total Capacity after expand" field in the "Max: xx.xx [PB/TB/GB/MB]" format. "Total Capacity after expand" includes the current TPP capacity.

 The [Add RAID Group] screen is displayed.

570

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select the Controlling CM of the RAID group and select all the drives to be registered in the RAID group from the list or from the installation image.

■ Selecting drives from a list of the drives

Click the [Tabular] tab to select drives from the list. Only unused drives are displayed on the list.

The main setting items are as follows.

• Checkbox to select drives

■ Selecting drives from the installation location image

The main setting items are as follows.

• DE selection list box

• Checkbox to select drives

• The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

5 Click the [OK] button.

 The screen returns to the previous screen. The added RAID group is displayed in the RAID group list.

• Click the [RAID Level] link in the RAID group list to change the Controlling CM and configuration drives of the newly added RAID group.

• Click the [Delete] button of the target RAID group area in the RAID group list to delete the newly added

RAID group.

571

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When creating multiple RAID groups, repeat Step 3

through Step 5

If the total value of TPP capacity after expansion and existing pool capacity exceeds the maximum pool capacity for each model, an error screen appears. Check the parameter settings.

7 After creating a RAID group to be added, click the [Expand] button.

8 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Expand Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

9 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

572

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (All Area)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (All Area)

This function formats all of the areas in the Thin Provisioning Pool.

• When formatting all area in the TPPs, data stored in the TPV in TPP will be deleted. Format TPV to use them again, after deleting data.

• If the target TPP includes a TPV that is performing one of the following operations, an error will stop the operation. Stop the relevant operation or wait until the operation is completed, and then format the TPP.

RAID migration

Balancing TPV

• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

No TPPs can be formatted

The TPP includes a volume that is used for the Storage Cluster function

The control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

(*1)

• TPPs in the " Available", " Partially Readying", " Readying", or " Exposed" state can be formatted.

•

To check the progress of formatting ("Progress", "Estimated Time Left", and "Remaining Size"), refer to "Thin

Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925) . Click the TPP name to display the basic information.

•

To format a TPV, refer to "Format Volume" (page 283)

•

When a TPP is created using the procedure in "Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557)

, the TPP is formatted automatically. In this case, it is not necessary to format the TPP by using this function.

The procedure to format all of the areas in the Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

Select the TPP that is to be formatted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Format All

Area] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Formatting of all area in the Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

To use a TPV in the TPP again after formatted with "All Area" selected for the mode, format the TPV.

End of procedure

573

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (Unformatted Area)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Format Thin Provisioning Pool (Unformatted Area)

This function formats unformatted area in the Thin Provisioning Pool.

This function cannot be used under the following conditions:

• No TPPs can be formatted

• The status of the TPPs that are to be formatted is " Available".

• The TPP includes a volume that is used for the Storage Cluster function

• The control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3 (*1)

• TPPs in the " Partially Readying" or " Readying" state can be formatted. Data stored in the TPVs of the target TPP are not deleted. The "Unformatted area" is a new area that is added to a TPP by the capacity expansion function.

• This function is only used when an error occurs during TPP capacity expansion and the expanded area cannot be formatted. When TPP capacity is successfully expanded, the TPP is automatically formatted. In this case, it is not necessary to format the TPP by using this function.

•

To check the progress of formatting ("Progress", "Estimated Time Left", and "Remaining Size"), refer to "Thin

Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925) . Click the TPP name to display the basic information.

The procedure to format an unformatted area in the Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPP that is to be formatted (multiple selections can be made) and click [Format Unformatted Area] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Formatting of unformatted area in the Thin Provisioning Pool starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

574

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Set Deduplication/Compression

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Deduplication/Compression

This function enables or disables Deduplication/Compression for TPPs.

Deduplication and Compression can be set separately.

If Deduplication is enabled, the duplicated data blocks in a TPP are deleted. If Compression is enabled, the data blocks in a TPP are compressed.

Using this function can reduce the used area of the drive.

The following two methods are available to set Deduplication/Compression for the TPPs.

• Setting Deduplication/Compression during a TPP creation

Create TPPs and perform the Deduplication/Compression setting with a single operation. Refer to "Create Thin

Provisioning Pool" (page 557)

for details.

Using this procedure is recommended because the TPP creation and the Deduplication/Compression setting can be performed with a single operation.

• Setting Deduplication/Compression after a TPP creation

Create TPPs for Deduplication/Compression (of which the chunk size is "21 MB") and then use this function to set Deduplication/Compression for the TPPs.

The maximum number of TPPs where Deduplication or Compression can be enabled

Model

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

Maximum number of TPPs

• The following settings are required before executing this function. Note that this function is not displayed if the following settings are not performed.

Enable the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to

"Set Deduplication/Compression Mode"

Enable Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF. Refer to

(page 63) for details.

• To enable Deduplication or Compression for TPPs, configuring the target TPPs with two or more RAID groups is recommended. If the target TPP only has one RAID group, expand the TPP so that it is configured with two or more RAID groups in advance. Refer to

"Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 567) for details.

• If the I/O load in the ETERNUS DX/AF is high when the setting for Deduplication, Compression, or both (hereinafter referred to as "Deduplication/Compression setting") are enabled for the TPPs, changing the setting may take time. In this case, enabling the Deduplication/Compression setting on one TPP at a time is recommended.

• To enable the Deduplication/Compression setting for the TPP, the free space within the TPP must be 4GB or larger.

• If the Deduplication/Compression setting for the TPP fails (or "Error" is displayed in the "Current Deduplication" field and/or the "Current Compression" field), the setting may be corrected by disabling the Deduplication/

Compression setting and then re-enabling it.

• The Deduplication/Compression setting cannot be enabled or disabled when the TPP status is not

" Available" or " Exposed".

575

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Set Deduplication/Compression

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The Deduplication/Compression setting cannot be enabled for the selected TPPs in the following conditions.

The total number of existing TPPs where the Deduplication/Compression setting has already been enabled

and the selected TPPs exceeds "The maximum number of TPPs where Deduplication or Compression can be enabled" (page 575) .

The total number of existing volumes and Deduplication/Compression System Volumes (or a DEDUP_SYS

Volume and DEDUP_MAP Volumes) that are to be created in the selected TPP exceeds the maximum number of volumes for each model.

(Refer to

"Creating Deduplication/Compression Volumes" (page 274)

for details.)

The total capacity of existing volumes and the capacity of Deduplication/Compression System Volumes that are to be created in the selected TPP exceed the maximum pool capacity for each model. Refer to

"Settings

(Thin Provisioning)" (page 948)

for details.

Eco-mode schedule is assigned to the selected TPPs.

• The Deduplication/Compression setting cannot be disabled for the selected TPPs in the following conditions.

Deduplication/Compression Volumes exist in the selected TPP.

(To disable the setting, delete all the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the relevant TPP in advance.)

The DEDUP_SYS Volume status in the relevant TPP is " Readying", " Not Ready", " Broken", or "

Data Lost".

• If Deduplication or Compression is enabled when a TPP is created, skip this function.

• When the Deduplication/Compression setting for the TPP is enabled, Deduplication/Compression System Volumes are automatically created in the relevant TPP. Refer to

"Volumes automatically created by enabling the

Deduplication/Compression setting for TPPs" (page 576) for details.

• When the Deduplication/Compression setting for the TPP is disabled, Deduplication/Compression System Volumes are automatically deleted from the relevant TPP.

• Set a volume (or TPV) as a Deduplication/Compression target or as a non-Deduplication/Compression target during a volume creation. Refer to

"Creating Deduplication/Compression Volumes" (page 274) for details.

• Use the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen to check whether the Deduplication/Compression setting is enabled

for the relevant TPP. Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922)

for details.

Volumes automatically created by enabling the Deduplication/Compression setting for TPPs

When the Deduplication/Compression setting for the TPP is enabled, the following volumes are automatically created in the relevant TPP.

• DEDUP_SYS Volume

A volume to store data and meta data after the Deduplication/Compression process is complete. Refer to

"Deduplication/Compression System Volume specifications" (page 577) for details.

• DEDUP_MAP Volume

A volume to store the mapping tables for obtaining the physical location information of the DEDUP_SYS Volume

from the volume numbers for Deduplication/Compression Volumes and the LBA. Refer to "Deduplication/Compression System Volume specifications" (page 577)

for details.

576

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Set Deduplication/Compression

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Deduplication/Compression System Volume specifications

Item

Volume Type

Usage

Usage Details

Number of Volumes

DEDUP_SYS Volumes

TPV

System

Dedup System

One per TPP

Volume Capacity (per volume) 8 TB (Default)

Volume Expansion Available (up to 128 TB)

Volume Name Fixed to "$DEDUP_SYSx"

(x: TPP number)

DEDUP_MAP Volumes

Dedup Map

The number of volumes that are to be created varies depending on the number of RAID groups in the TPP (*1)

5.38 TB

N/A

Fixed to "$DEDUP_x_y"

(x: TPP number, y: serial number in the TPP (0 -))

*1: The following number of volumes are created for each TPP that has the Deduplication/Compression setting enabled.

If one RAID group exists in the TPP, one volume is created.

(Volumes are not added even if RAID groups are added in the TPP.)

If two or more RAID groups exist in the TPP, two volumes are created.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 1250) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 1326) .

The procedure to enable Deduplication/Compression for TPPs is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPP (multiple selections can be made) to configure the Deduplication/Compression setting and click [Set Deduplication/Compression] in [Action].

[Set Deduplication/Compression] cannot be clicked under the following conditions.

• The number of selected TPPs exceeds the maximum number that can be set with Deduplication or

Compression

• TPPs of which the chunk size is not "21 MB" are selected

2 Select whether to enable or disable "Deduplication" and "Compression".

577

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Set Deduplication/Compression

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The set number of TPPs for Deduplication/Compression exceeds the maximum value (when "Enable" is selected)

• The total number of volumes exceeds the maximum value (when "Enable" is selected)

• The total capacity of TPVs exceeds the maximum pool capacity (when "Enable" is selected)

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Deduplication/Compression setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

End of procedure

578

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

This function changes the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of Thin Provisioning Pool. There are two types of threshold: "Warning" and "Attention".

•

This function changes the threshold of a TPP that is created by using the procedure in "Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557) .

• Using this function enables setting the same threshold to multiple TPPs with a single operation.

• Changes in the usage status of a TPP can be notified. The following statuses can be notified. Refer to

Event Notification" (page 166)

for details.

From " Normal" to " Attention"

From " Normal" or " Attention" to " Warning"

The TPP capacity is exhausted

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1251)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1326)

The procedure to change the threshold of a TPP is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPP for which the threshold is to be changed (multiple selections can be made) and click [Modify Threshold] in [Action].

2 Select a new threshold.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Threshold Setting

• Warning

• Attention

• When changing a "Attention" threshold, select the checkbox and then specify a new threshold.

• When omitting a "Attention" threshold, clear the checkbox.

579

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Modify Threshold starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Threshold] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

580

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

This function changes the cache parameters of each TPP. Performance of the storage system varies depending on the cache hit rate. The ETERNUS DX/AF detects sequentiality when a host requests Read/Write. If sequentiality is detected when a Read request is issued, the cache hit rate is improved by reading the sequential data into the cache memory in advance. The characteristics of Read/Write requests from the host depends on the system. Performance of the storage system may improve by specifying a cache parameter that is suitable for the system that is being used.

The following parameter can be specified:

• Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Specify the number of processes that can be written back at the same time.

If pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF, MWC cannot be configured.

• The same cache parameter can be applied for multiple TPPs in a single operation.

•

Cache parameters other than MWC are specified for each TPV. Refer to "Modify Cache Parameters" (page 326)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to

"A. Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

(page 1252) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

This function assigns the Eco-mode schedule to the TPPs and sets the Eco-mode action. Refer to "Specifications of the Eco-mode function" (page 542)

The procedure to modify cache parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select which TPP to change the cache parameters for (multiple selections can be made) and click

[Modify Cache Parameters] in [Action].

2 Change the cache parameters.

581

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Parameters Setting

• Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

If the [Default] button is clicked before the [Modify] button, the default cache parameters are restored.

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The cache parameter modification starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Threshold] screen.

End of procedure

582

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

for details about Eco-mode.

• This function cannot be used for TPPs under the following conditions:

No volumes are created

Configured by SSDs or SSD SEDs

Deduplication/Compression is enabled

• When using Eco-mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly. If the time/date of the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series is wrong, processes used for stopping and starting the drive motor cannot be performed per the Ecomode schedule.

• If any of the following conditions occur during the Eco-mode scheduled time, the drive will be started even when the drive motor is inactive. The Eco-mode schedule is re-enabled when the conditions listed have finished. (*1)

The RAID group status in the TPP is not " Available"

Functions that change the TPP or the volume configuration is being performed

Rebuild or copyback is being performed in the RAID groups that configure the target TPP

Formatting is being performed in the TPP

Formatting is being performed in the volumes registered in the TPP

RAID migration is being performed in the volumes registered in the TPP

Advanced Copy is being performed in the volume registered in the TPP (copy session status is not "Suspend" or the phase is not "Tracking")

NAS system volumes exist in the TPP

ODX Buffer volumes exist in the TPP

During maintenance

Disk diagnosis or RAID group diagnosis (diagnosing the RAID groups that configure the TPP) is being performed, or G-List is being exported

A module error related to the access paths of the controller modules and drive is detected

• If the server OS or software periodically accesses the ETERNUS DX, the drive motor may not stop even when the

Eco-mode is enabled.(*1)

*1: This not only affects the motor stoppage, but includes the cutting of the drives power as well.

•

Before applying Eco-mode for TPPs, use the procedure in "Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page 105) to

enable the Eco-mode setting for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

•

Set the Eco-mode schedule using the procedure in "Create Eco-mode Schedule" (page 106) .

• When the Eco-mode is set to TPP, the same Eco-mode schedule is assigned for all the RAID groups configuring the TPP.

• When selecting multiple TPPs as the target of the Eco-mode, the same Eco-mode schedule can be assigned for all the selected TPPs.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to

"A. Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

(page 1252) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

"Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 943) for details.

583

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The procedure to set the Eco-mode for Thin Provisioning Pool is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the TPP to assign the Eco-mode schedule (multiple selections can be made) to and click

[Assign Eco-mode] in [Action].

2 Select the Eco-mode schedule that is to be assigned and select the Eco-mode action.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Eco-mode Schedule Setting

• Eco-mode Schedule

• Eco-mode Action

3 Click the [Assign] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Assigning of the Eco-mode schedule starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Eco-mode Schedule] screen.

End of procedure

584

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

This function starts Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) balancing sessions.

The FTRP balancing function equalizes unevenly allocated physical area in the Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs) that configure an FTRP. By using this function, the physical allocated areas are reallocated equally among the RAID groups in the FTSPs. The I/O access to the FTV is distributed almost equally to the RAID groups in the FTSP.

Requirements for an FTRP to be balanced

• The status of the FTRP is " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

• Balancing of the selected FTRP is not being performed

• Free space, which can be used for balancing, exists in the FTSPs in the target FTRP

• Before balancing the FTRP, make sure that "Used Capacity" for all the FTSPs in the target FTRP is less than 50% of "Total Capacity". If this requirement is not satisfied and the capacity runs out, the FTRP balancing may not be complete. "Used Capacity" and "Total Capacity" for FTSP can be checked from the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] screen ([Flexible Tier Sub Pool] tab).

Refer to

• Even after the FTRP balancing session is performed, the physical allocation between the FTVs and the FTSPs does not change.

• The FTRP balancing function extracts up to 32 balanceable FTVs (*1) that have a low balancing level from the selected FTRP and performs balancing sessions in the FTSPs. Note that FTVs are not extracted as balancing targets in certain conditions. For example, FTVs with a high balancing level, FTVs that are undergoing RAID migration, or FTVs that are undergoing capacity optimization.

*1: Up to 32 sessions, which include FTV balancing sessions, TPV balancing sessions, and RAID migration sessions, can be performed at the same time. An FTRP balancing session is performed in each FTRP. Note that the number of FTV balancing sessions that are performed at the same time cannot be specified.

• Balancing of FTVs in the following conditions is not available:

FTVs which capacity is less than 20GB

FTVs which used capacity is less than 10GB

The FTV capacity can be checked in the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Volume)] screen. Refer to

"Flexible Tier Pool

Detail (Volume)" (page 942)

for details.

• FTRP balancing cannot be started in the following conditions:

The Thin Provisioning function is disabled

The Automated Storage Tiering feature is disabled

The maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX

The total number of TPV balancing sessions and RAID migration sessions that are running in the ETERNUS

DX is 32

The total capacity for the TPV balancing sessions and the RAID migration sessions that are running in the

ETERNUS DX is 128TB

The RAID group diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX

The disk diagnosis is being performed in the ETERNUS DX

Capacity optimization is being performed for all of the balancing target FTVs in the FTRP

ODX is being performed for all of the balancing target FTVs in the FTRP

• When FTRP balancing is performed, the used FTRP capacity may temporarily exceed the threshold. If the used capacity exceeds the threshold, " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in the "Used Status" field for the

FTRP. The usage of the FTRPs is displayed in the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen. Refer to

"Flexible Tier Pool (Basic

Information)" (page 935) for details.

585

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Start Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function cannot be used if the control information for Thin Provisioning is being re-configured in the

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3. (*1)

*1: If the system message indicates a re-configuration, the control information for Thin Provisioning is being synchronized in each CM. Wait at least five minutes before performing this function again. If a work volume that has failed to be deleted is displayed in the volume list, delete the relevant volume.

• FTRP balancing can be performed during the workload I/O.

• The balancing levels of FTRPs and FTSPs, and the progress of the FTRP balancing sessions can be checked.

Refer to "Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 935)

, "Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 938) , and

"Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)" (page 940)

for details.

• The progress of a balancing FTV can be checked in the [Volume Detail] screen. Refer to

"Start Balancing Flexible Tier

for details.

The procedure to start balancing FTRP is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the FTRP for which balancing is to be started and click [Start Balancing FTRP] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 FTRP balancing starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen.

End of procedure

586

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

6. Thin Provisioning Pool Management

Stop Balancing Flexible Tier Pool

This function stops Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) balancing sessions.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function cannot be used when no FTRPs are undergoing balancing or when no FTRP balancing that has stopped due to an error exists.

• This function cannot be used when the specified FTRP balancing is already complete.

If FTRP balancing has stopped, the following conditions apply.

• All of the balancing sessions that are currently being performed (*1) for the FTVs registered in the target FTRP are stopped. Even when balancing sessions are being stopped, FTVs that are not being balanced can be accessed normally.

• Note that completed balancing processes for the FTVs in the target FTRP (*1) cannot be stopped (the physical allocation after the balancing process cannot be changed). FTVs that are balanced can be accessed normally.

*1: When an FTRP balancing session is started, FTV balancing starts in the FTSPs. Refer to

Pool" (page 585)

for details.

The procedure to stop balancing FTRP is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the FTRP for which balancing is to be stopped and click [Stop Balancing FTRP] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 FTRP balancing stops.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen.

End of procedure

587

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

7. Advanced Copy Management

This chapter describes Advanced Copy management.

When using functions in the Action area, select the desired function from the Action area that is displayed in the status display screen.

The functions in the Action area for Advanced Copy can be performed from the following display functions:

Functions in the Action area for Advanced Copy

Start SnapOPC+

Stop Copy Session

Display function

• Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

• Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

• SnapOPC+ in Local Copy

• Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

• Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

• EC in Local Copy

• OPC in Local Copy

• QuickOPC in Local Copy

• SnapOPC in Local Copy

• SnapOPC+ in Local Copy

• Monitor in Local Copy

• Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

• REC in Remote Copy

• Settings (Advanced Copy)

Delete Advanced Copy License

Delete Veeam Storage Integration License

Modify EC/OPC Priority

Modify Copy Table Size

Modify Copy Parameters

REC Management

Export Storage Information

Delete All Copy Path

Export All Copy Path

Measure Round Trip Time

Assign REC Disk Buffer

Delete REC Disk Buffer

Format REC Disk Buffer

ODX Management

Enable ODX

Disable ODX

Values in parentheses indicate the number of sessions when "Expand Volume Mode" is "Enable". Refer to "Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

• Snap Data Pool in Settings (Advanced Copy)

•

Copy Path in Settings (Advanced Copy)

REC Buffer in Settings (Advanced Copy)

• REC Disk Buffer in Settings (Advanced Copy)

• REC Buffer in Settings (Advanced Copy)

• REC Disk Buffer in Settings (Advanced Copy)

Copy Path in Settings (Advanced Copy)

• Settings (Advanced Copy)

588

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Start SnapOPC+

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Start SnapOPC+

This function is used to select the copy source volume and copy destination volume, and start a new SnapOPC+ copy session.

The maximum number of sessions and the maximum number of generations for each model

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

The maximum number of sessions

(per storage system)

1024

1024 (2048) (*2)

2048 (4096) (*2)

8192

32768

2048

8192

2048

The maximum number of generations (*1)

512

*1: The maximum number of generations for a SnapOPC+ from a single copy source volume.

*2:

Preparing copy destination volumes

To use SnapOPC+, the same number of volumes as there are generations is required for the copy destination. Create any of the following types of volumes in advance.

• SDV (SDPVs must be created as expansion areas)

• TPV

• FTV

If the volume type of the copy destination is SDV, SDVs must be used for all generations. If the volume type of the copy destination is TPV or FTV, a mixture of TPVs and FTVs is available. Use TPV or FTV for each generation.

To create SDVs, SDPVs, or TPVs, use the procedure in "Create Volume" (page 257)

. To create FTVs, use ETERNUS SF

Storage Cruiser.

• Registering the license for the Advanced Copy function is required to start a SnapOPC+ session.

• Only SnapOPC+ copy sessions that are performed in units of volumes can be created using ETERNUS Web GUI.

To create Equivalent Copy (EC), One Point Copy (OPC), QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+ sessions using range selection, and REC sessions, use copy management software.

• ODX Buffer volumes and Deduplication/Compression System Volumes cannot be specified as the copy source.

• External Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration") cannot be specified as the copy source or copy destination.

• SnapOPC+ cannot be started if the copy destination is a TPV for which Deduplication, Compression, or both are enabled.

589

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Start SnapOPC+

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the number of sessions can be increased by selecting "Enable" for "Expand Volume Mode". The "Expand Volume Mode" setting is available in the [Setup Subsystem Parameters] function. If the setting is changed, reboot the ETERNUS DX. If the ETER-

NUS DX is not rebooted after the setting is changed, SnapOPC+ cannot be started with the increased number

of sessions. Refer to "Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76)

for details.

In addition, if the ETERNUS DX has not been rebooted, a system message appears in the [Overview] screen.

Refer to "Overview" (page 24) for details.

The procedure to start the SnapOPC+ session is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Start SnapOPC+] in [Action].

2 Click the [Browse...] button in the "Source Volume" field.

3 Select the radio button for the copy source volume to be used, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

590

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Start SnapOPC+

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• In a Unified Storage environment, volumes that are used for the SAN and backup volumes that are used in the NAS are displayed in the copy source volume list.

• Volumes whose usage is "System", "Migration", or "Veeam" are not displayed in the copy source volume list.

4 Click the [Browse...] button in the "Destination Volume" field.

Select the radio button for the copy destination volume to be used, and click the [OK] button.

 The display returns to the initial screen.

Volumes whose usage is "Migration" or "Veeam" are not displayed in the copy destination volume list.

591

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Start SnapOPC+

Check the displayed contents, and click the [Start] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• When the SnapOPC+ started in the copy source volume exceeds the maximum number of generations per volume

• When the SnapOPC+ started in the copy source volume exceeds the maximum number of copy sessions for the entire ETERNUS DX/AF

7 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The SnapOPC+ session starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Advanced Copy] screen.

End of procedure

592

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Stop Copy Session

This function stops the selected copy session.

This function is used when a session cannot be stopped due to a host error or other causes.

This function can stop the following copy sessions.

• Advanced Copy sessions (EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, Monitor, and REC)

• ODX sessions

• XCOPY sessions

• Virtual Volume sessions

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• If one SnapOPC+ session is stopped, all the sessions started earlier than that session are also stopped.

• If one SnapOPC+ session is stopped, an error occurs in all of the Restore OPC sessions that started earlier than the stopped session and these sessions are also stopped.

• If a SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ session is stopped during a Restore OPC session, an error occurs in the Restore OPC session and the session is stopped.

• Before stopping snapshot sessions or Fastclone sessions for VVOL, all the Virtual Volume sessions and

Advanced Copy sessions that are specified for copy destination volumes of the target session must be deleted.

The procedure to stop a copy session is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the copy session to be stopped (multiple selections can be made) and click [Stop Session] in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The selected copy session is stopped.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Advanced Copy] screen.

End of procedure

593

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Register Advanced Copy License

This function registers the Advanced Copy license for EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, and REC.

When this registration is complete successfully, the customer can use the Advanced Copy functions.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When using ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager or ETERNUS SF Express, perform the required settings described in the documents that are supplied with ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager or ETERNUS SF

Express.

• The registration status of the Advanced Copy license can be checked. Refer to

"Settings (Advanced Copy)"

(page 970) for details.

• Registering an Advanced Copy license is not required when using the ODX or XCOPY function, or when using copy functions with VVOLs.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Register Advanced Copy License" (page 1253) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Register Advanced Copy License" (page 1327) .

The procedure to register an Advanced Copy license is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Register License] in [Action].

Select a registration method and input a license key.

■ For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

594

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

■ For the other models

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● License Settings

• Registration Method

(for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F)

• License key

Only when registering a paid license, the license key entry is required.

3 Click the [Register] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Advanced Copy license registration is executed.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

End of procedure

595

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Delete Advanced Copy License

This function deletes all of the Advanced Copy licenses registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Do not delete the Advanced Copy license when the Storage Cluster function is being used.

• An Advanced Copy license cannot be deleted in the following conditions:

The CM status is not normal

A port with the RA mode or CA/RA mode exists

SDVs or SDPVs are registered

A volume with Advanced Copy protected exists

An Advanced Copy session (except for an ODX session, an XCOPY session, or a Virtual Volume session) exists

An Advanced Copy table size has been configured

An Advanced Copy path has been configured

An REC Buffer has been configured

An REC Disk Buffer has been created

The Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered

• If the Storage Cluster function is enabled but is not being used, the Advanced Copy license can be deleted under the following conditions.

An Advanced Copy path has been configured

A port with the RA mode or CA/RA mode exists

• If the Unified Storage is enabled, the Advanced Copy license can also be deleted under the following conditions.

A SnapOPC+ session for the snapshot function exists

SDVs (only the snapshot destination SDVs) are registered

• Rebooting the ETERNUS DX/AF is required after deleting an Advanced Copy license.

To check whether the Storage Cluster function is enabled or disabled, use the [System] screen. Refer to

"System

(Basic Information)" (page 657) for details.

The procedure to delete an Advanced Copy license is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Delete License] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of an Advanced Copy license is executed.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

Rebooting the ETERNUS DX/AF is required after deleting an Advanced Copy license.

End of procedure

596

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Register Veeam Storage Integration License

This function registers the Veeam Storage Integration License.

Registration of this license enables the use of Veeam Storage Integration.

Veeam Storage Integration is a function that enables flexible and high-speed backups, restorations, and replications by linking Veeam Backup & Replication (hereinafter referred to as Veeam B&R) with the snapshot function of the storage system.

• The Advanced Copy License (Full) must be registered in advance to register this license.

• For the conditions required to use Veeam Storage Integration, refer to "Design Guide (Basic)".

• For the configuration procedure when installing Veeam Storage Integration, refer to " Configuration Guide

(Basic)" and "ETERNUS CLI User's Guide".

The registration status of this license can be checked in the [Settings] screen. Refer to

"Settings (Advanced Copy)"

(page 970)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to

"A. Register Veeam Storage Integration License" (page

1254)

The procedure to register a Veeam Storage Integration License is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Register Veeam License] in [Action].

If a Veeam Storage Integration License is already registered, [Register Veeam License] cannot be clicked.

2 Input a license key.

597

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

The main setting item is as follows.

● License Settings

• License Key

3 Click the [Register] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Veeam Storage Integration License registration starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

598

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Delete Veeam Storage Integration License

This function deletes the Veeam Storage Integration License registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The registration status of this license can be checked in the [Settings] screen. Refer to

"Settings (Advanced

Copy)" (page 970)

for details.

• Perform the following procedure to delete the Veeam Storage Integration License.

(1) Delete the relevant storage system from the server node where the Veeam Storage Integration is running.

(2) Extract all the LUN groups used for Veeam Storage Integration. Refer to the [LUN Group Detailed Information] screen to check whether the LUN group is used for Veeam Storage Integration. Refer to

"LUN

Group" (page 868) under the [Connectivity] navigation for details.

(3) Change the setting for all the LUN groups extracted in Step (2) so that they are not used for Veeam Stor-

age Integration. Refer to the "set lun-group" ETERNUS CLI command for details.

(4) Check that there are no LUN groups that are being used for Veeam Storage Integration. Refer to the [LUN

Group Detailed Information] screen for all the LUN groups extracted in

Step (2)

(5) Delete all Veeam Snapshot Volumes (or volumes whose "Usage" is "Veeam") registered in the ETERNUS

DX/AF from the [Volume] screen. Refer to "Delete Volume" (page 279) for details.

(6) Use this function to delete the Veeam Storage Integration License.

The procedure to delete a Veeam Storage Integration License is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Delete Veeam License] in [Action].

If the Veeam Storage Integration License is already deleted, [Delete Veeam License] cannot be clicked.

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The Veeam Storage Integration License deletion starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

End of procedure

599

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify EC/OPC Priority

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify EC/OPC Priority

This function sets the copy speed when using EC and OPC.

The EC/OPC speed is usually set in consideration of the host's I/O load and copy processing load. The set EC/OPC speed is applied not only for the next sessions, but also for existing sessions.

Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license (*1) is required to use this function.

*1: The Storage Cluster function license must be registered using ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• EC includes both EC and REC.

Even though the REC priority is specified using the procedure in "Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 647) , the EC/

OPC priority values specified with this function are applied only when the REC satisfies both of the following conditions:

When the connection method is "Direct"

When the priority level is "Automatic"

Refer to

"Set Copy Path" (page 610)

for connection type settings.

Refer to

"Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 647)

for priority level settings.

• OPC includes OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+.

• When "Automatic Priority" is selected for "EC/OPC Priority", the current priority level can be checked. Refer to

"Settings (Advanced Copy)" (page 970)

for details.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 1254) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 1327) .

The procedure to modify the EC/OPC priority is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify EC/OPC Priority] in [Action].

2 Select the EC/OPC priority.

600

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify EC/OPC Priority

The main setting item is as follows.

● EC/OPC Priority

• EC/OPC Priority

Click [Advanced Setting] to specify the copy schedule mode.

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The selected EC/OPC priority is set.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

601

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify Copy Table Size

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Copy Table Size

This function sets the copy table size, which is used by the firmware for the ETERNUS DX/AF, on the CM cache memory. When the EC, OPC or REC function is in use, this copy table is used as the area that manages the progress of the copy.

• Registering a license for the Advanced Copy function or the Unified Storage environment is required to use this function.

• When the copy table size is equal to 0MB, copy functions cannot be used. The initial (factory default) copy table size setting for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS

DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650 is 0MB. Modify the copy table size before using the copy function.

• Make sure to stop the copy session before reducing the copy table size. To check the copy session, refer to

"Advanced Copy (Basic Information)" (page 950) .

• Cache memory is not only used for copy tables, but also used for REC Buffers, the Thin Provisioning function

(*1), the Storage Cluster function (*1), and the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function. Note that a copy table with the maximum capacity for each model cannot always be created depending on the following conditions.

Memory capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF

REC Buffer size

Maximum pool capacity

Total TFOV capacity (*2)

License registration for the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function

*1: The shared area in the cache memory is used for the following conditions.

The maximum pool capacity for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 is expanded to "1.5 PB" or larger

The maximum pool capacity for the ETERNUS DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650

S2, or the ETERNUS AF650 is expanded to "1024 TB" or larger

The total TFOV capacity (*2) has been expanded from the default capacity

Refer to "Default TFOV capacity for each model" (page 555)

for details.

*2: The total TFOV capacity indicates the total capacity of the volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function in an

ETERNUS DX/AF. To change the total TFOV capacity, use ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• If the copy table size is insufficient, an error occurs in the copy session. Make sure to specify the "Table Size

Threshold" value to monitor the usage of the copy table in advance. The ETERNUS DX/AF reports the notification using the method specified in

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166) . When reporting, select the notifica-

tion method in advance.

• Set the resolution as small as possible. When a large value is specified, the performance may be reduced.

When unsure about whether the copy target area might be increased in future use, specify the maximum resolution.

• The same resolution must be used by both the copy source and copy destination storage systems for REC. If the resolution settings for the copy source and copy destination storage systems are different, REC cannot be performed. Note that the copy table sizes do not need to be the same. If different recommended resolutions are calculated for the copy source and copy destination storage systems, use whichever resolution is greater for both storage systems. If the resolution is changed, recalculate the copy table size setting for the storage system with the new resolution.

602

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify Copy Table Size

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Changes to the resolution setting are applied from the next session. For a copy session that is currently being performed, data is copied with the resolution that was specified when the session was started. To change the resolution of a copy session that is currently being performed, cancel the copy session and start again.

• When the table size or the table size threshold is changed, the new value is applied immediately.

•

The current copy table size can be checked. Refer to "Settings (Advanced Copy)" (page 970) for details.

• Setting the copy table size is not required when using the ODX or XCOPY function, or when using copy functions with VVOLs.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Copy Table Size" (page 1255)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Copy Table Size" (page 1328)

There are two methods to set the copy table size: manually and automatically.

The procedure to set the copy table size is as follows:

■ Manually setting the copy table size

Specify the copy table size manually.

Procedure

1 Click [Modify Copy Table Size] in [Action].

Specify each items.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Advanced Copy Table Size Setting

• Resolution

• Table Size (MB)

• Table Size Threshold (%)

Refer to "How to calculate the copy table size" (page 1258) for the setting parameters of "Resolution"

and "Table Size".

603

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify Copy Table Size

Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the copy table size starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

■ Automatically setting the copy table size

Specify the copy table size automatically.

Procedure

Click [Modify Copy Table Size] in [Action].

2 Click the [Calculation of recommended values] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

 The [Calculation of recommended values] dialog box appears.

3 Input the necessary information.

604

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify Copy Table Size

The main setting items are as follows.

● Calculation Parameters

• Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is not used)

• Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is used)

• Sessions (Restore OPC is not used)

• Sessions (Restore OPC is used)

4 Click the [Calculation] button.

 "Resolution" and "Table Size" are automatically calculated.

5 Click the [OK] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The calculated values are reflected to "Resolution" and "Table Size" in the "Advanced Copy Table Size Setting" field.

6 Click the [Set] button.

605

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify Copy Table Size

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the copy table size starts.

8 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

End of procedure

606

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify Copy Parameters

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Copy Parameters

This function specifies the threshold for the SDP usage ratio and sets an SDPE. If the SDP capacity is insufficient during a SnapOPC+ session, an error occurs and the relevant copy session and all the copy sessions that started earlier than the relevant session are stopped. This function is used to change the threshold and the SDPE.

Registering a license for the Advanced Copy function or the Unified Storage environment is required to use this function.

• Threshold setting for the SDP

Automatically notifying the user when the SDP usage ratio exceeds the threshold can be set. To notify events, specify the notification method in advance. Refer to

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166) for

details.

If the threshold for multiple policies is satisfied at the same time, the ETERNUS DX/AF notifies of the highest policy level.

Notification of the shortage of SDP capacity is sent only once for each policy level. Even if the threshold is exceeded again within the 24 hours from the first notification, the ETERNUS DX/AF does not report that effect. After 24 hours has passed, the device sends a notification again.

• SDPE settings

The current capacities of the SDPEs and the SDP can be checked. Refer to "Snap Data Pool" (page 972) for

details.

The maximum SDP capacity is determined by the SDPE. The maximum SDP capacity for each SDPE is described below. Note that the maximum SDP capacity varies depending on the maximum physical capacity of the drives in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The maximum SDP capacity for each SDPE

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4

ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

SDPE

1 GB

2 GB

4 GB

1 GB

2 GB

4 GB

1 GB

2 GB

4 GB

The maximum SDP capacity

32 TB

64 TB

128 TB

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

ETERNUS AF250 S2

ETERNUS AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2

ETERNUS AF650

1 GB

2 GB

4 GB

1 GB

32 TB

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

32 TB ETERNUS DX200F

When an SDPE is changed during operation, the changed value is applied to the SDPEs for the SDPVs that are created. Note that values of the SDPEs for SDPVs that are already created and being used do not change. Determining the SDPEs before starting operations and not changing the SDPEs once operations start are recommended.

607

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

Modify Copy Parameters

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify Copy Parameters" (page 1260)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Copy Parameters" (page 1329)

The procedure to modify copy parameters is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Modify Copy Parameters] in [Action].

2 Specify the threshold for each policy level.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Policy of Snap Data Pool

• Policy Level 1 (Informational) Threshold

• Policy Level 2 (Warning) Threshold

• Policy Level 3 (Error) Threshold

● SDPE Setting

• SDPE

If the magnitude relation is not "Threshold for a policy level 1" < "Threshold for policy level 2" < "Threshold for policy level 3", an error screen appears. If this occurs, check the parameter settings.

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The specified copy parameters are registered.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Snap Data Pool] screen.

End of procedure

608

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

REC Management

This section describes REC management.

REC management provides the following functions:

•

Export Storage Information

•

•

Delete All Copy Path

•

Export All Copy Path

•

Measure Round Trip Time

•

•

•

Assign REC Disk Buffer

•

Delete REC Disk Buffer

•

Format REC Disk Buffer

•

•

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen ( Step 3

Export Storage Information

This function exports the storage system information, and saves the information in a file.

The saved file can be used as storage system information when creating a copy path, so that manual registration of the storage system information will not be required.

• Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license is required to use this function.

• The bandwidth limit for a copy path cannot be exported.

The procedure to export the REC device information is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Export Storage Info] in [Action].

609

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Click the [Export] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The storage system information, which has been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, is exported.

After the storage system information export has been finished, a screen to execute downloading the file is displayed.

3 Click the [Download] button.

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

4 Save the storage system information file.

The default file name is "RecRAInfo_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.bin".

) is displayed.)

5 Click the [Close] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

Set Copy Path

This function sets copy path information between the ETERNUS storage systems required for performing REC using the wizard screen. Copy path information indicates the path (copy path and the storage system where the copy path is set) used for performing REC. Not only copy path information of the local storage system but also the information between remote storage systems can be created.

610

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Storage systems that can be used as remote storage systems

• ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4

• ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

• ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

• ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

• ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

• ETERNUS AF250 S2

• ETERNUS AF650 S2

• ETERNUS AF250

• ETERNUS AF650

• ETERNUS DX200F

• ETERNUS DX90 S2

• ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2

• ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

• ETERNUS DX90

• ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

• ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000

• ETERNUS6000

The maximum number of remote storage systems, paths, and ports

• Up to 16 remote storage systems can be connected from one storage system.

• Up to 8 copy paths can be created between a pair of storage systems.

• Up to 32 destination ports (FC-RA) can be connected from one port.

• Up to 16 destination ports (iSCSI-RA) can be connected from one port.

In this section, the storage system that is used to create copy paths is referred to as "local storage system" and the storage system that is connected to is referred to as a "remote storage system".

This function provides the following functions:

(1) Register Storage System Information

(2) Create Copy Path

(3) Apply Copy Path

(4) Save

(5) Set Bandwidth Limit

(6) Measure Round Trip Time

• Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license is required to use this function.

• Creating copy paths in the ETERNUS DX100 S3 is only available when the local storage system (the storage system where copy paths are created) is purchased outside Japan.

• To create copy path information between different generations of ETERNUS storage systems (such as ETERNUS

DX600 S3 and ETERNUS DX440 S2), be sure to create the information on the newer model of ETERNUS storage system (ETERNUS DX600 S3 in the above example). The copy path creating function on an older model may not have a function to add the storage system information for newer models or the created path information file cannot be applied to newer models.

611

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When creating a copy path between the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series (*1) with a controller firmware version

V10L40 or later and the ETERNUS DX S3 series with the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L40, make sure to create the copy paths using the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series that has a controller firmware version V10L40 or later.

• If the created path information and the path information in the ETERNUS storage system do not match and some of the copy paths to the ETERNUS storage system are not selected to be applied, the actual path infor-

mation after the application does not correspond to the backed up path information file. Refer to "Specification for applying result" (page 1273) for details. Note that the backup path file corresponds to the

downloaded path information file in the setting PC.

• Furthermore, note the following points for modifying the copy path information.

When adding new copy paths in the ETERNUS storage system where copy paths already exist, create path information files for all the copy paths including the existing paths. Refer to

"Adding new copy paths"

(page 1273) for details.

If the Box ID is changed after the copy path is set, REC will no longer run. After creating the copy path information with the new Box ID, apply the new copy path information to all the ETERNUS storage systems that have copy paths to the ETERNUS storage system for which the Box ID was changed.

Modifying copy path information in use may stop or otherwise affect operations. Confirm that REC is not in use before modifying the information. To check whether REC is in use, refer to the copy session list of

Remote Copy.

• An REC between the following models is not supported.

When FC ports are used

• ETERNUS DX S4 series (*2) and ETERNUS DX90

• ETERNUS DX S4 series (*2) and ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

• ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series (*1) and ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000

When iSCSI ports are used

• ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series (*1) and ETERNUS DX90

• ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series (*1) and ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

*1: Except the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3.

*2: The target storage systems are the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, and the ETERNUS

AF250 S2/AF650 S2.

• Only copy path information files created/saved with this function can be loaded with this function.

• The storage system information file that can be loaded by using this function is the file that can be obtained

and downloaded from "Storage systems that can be used as remote storage systems" (page 611)

• Use the procedure in

"Delete All Copy Path" (page 632)

to delete the copy path information in the local storage system. The copy path information of the local storage system is initialized.

• The round trip time can be measured only between the local storage system and a remote storage system that has a physical path to the local storage system. When a copy path is created between remote storage systems, apply a copy path information file to the applicable storage system before measuring the round trip time.

• The round trip time can be measured only when the connection type is "Remote".

• To change the measured round trip time, use the procedure in

"Measure Round Trip Time" (page 634) .

• When the link speed is changed, use this function to create new copy paths with the changed link speed. After creating copy paths with the new link speed, apply the copy path information to both the copy source and the copy destination storage systems for which the link speed was changed.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set Copy Path" (page 1261)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Copy Path" (page 1329)

612

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

The procedure to set an REC copy path is as follows:

Operation Mode Selection

In this screen, select the operation mode.

Procedure

1 Click [Set Copy Path] in [Action].

2 Select the operation mode.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Operation Mode Selection

• Operation Mode

3 Click the [Next >>] button.

The displayed screen is different depending on the selected operation.

■ When selecting "Create Copy Path"

The [Base Information Selection] screen appears. Proceed to "Register Storage System Information" (page

614) .

■ When selecting "Apply Copy Path"

The [Copy Path Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to "Select Copy Path Information" (page

622) .

End of procedure

613

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

In this screen, register the storage system information to which the copy path is created.

Procedure

1 Select a storage system information selection method in the [Base Information Selection] screen.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Base Information Selection

• Base Information

2 Click the [Next >>] button.

The displayed screen is different depending on the selected item.

■ When selecting "Backup Path File"



The [Check Registered Storage System Information] screen appears. Proceed to Step 5

■ When selecting "Path File"

 The [Copy Path Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 3 .

■ When selecting "Not use"

 The [Storage System Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 12 .

614

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Input the location where the copy path information file that to be used.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Copy Path Information File Selection

• Copy Path Information File

Click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Check Registered Storage System Information] screen appears.

5 Select a storage system to register the information (multiple selections can be made).

The main setting item is as follows.

● Registered Storage System List

• Checkboxes for selecting a storage system

6 Click the [Next >>] button.

615

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

When no storage system to register the information is selected, the [Storage System Information File

Selection] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 12 .

 The [Storage System Configuration Setting] screen appears.

Perform the RA port and CA-RA port settings.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Storage System Configuration Settings

• Port Type

• Check to use as RA

• Initiator / Target Setting

Regardless whether a copy path is applied or not, set all of the RA ports and CA/RA ports.

9 Click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Port Settings] screen appears.

616

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Perform the port settings.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Port Settings

• WWN

• IP Version

• IP Address

• IPv6 Link Local Address

• IPv6 Connect IP Address

• iSCSI Name

• Alias Name

• User Name

• Password

11 Click the [Next >>] button.

The displayed screen is different depending on the port setting state.

■ When a storage system for which port setting is not completed exists



The [Storage System Configuration Setting] screen appears again. Proceed to Step 8

■ When port setting is completed for all the selected storage systems

 The [Storage System Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 12 .

617

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Specify whether to use the storage system information file.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Operation Method Selection

• Operation Method

● Storage System Information File Selection

• Storage System Information File

Click the [Next >>] button.

The displayed screen is different depending on the port setting state.

■ When selecting "Registration from File"



The [Storage System Configuration Setting] screen appears. Proceed to Step 8

■ When selecting "Finish of Registration by File Reading"

 The [Storage System Information File Selection] screen appears. Proceed to

Step 14 .

618

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Select whether to continue registration of storage system information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Operation Method Selection

• Operation Method

● Storage System Information Setting

• Storage System Type

• Box ID

• WWN

15 Click the [Next >>] button.

The displayed screen is different depending on the port setting state.

■ When selecting "Registration by manual operation"



The [Storage System Configuration Setting] screen appears again. Proceed to Step 8

■ When selecting "Finish of Registration by File Reading"



The [Check Registered Storage System Information] screen appears. Proceed to Step 16

16 Check the storage system information and click the [Next >>] button.



The [Copy Path Creation Storage System Selection] screen appears. Proceed to "Create Copy Path" (page

620)

End of procedure

619

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create Copy Path

In this screen, set a copy path. Specify the Box ID of the target storage system in which the copy path is created, and set the line information between storage systems.

Procedure

1 Click the [Remote Storage System Box ID] link to create a copy path.

 The [Copy Path Setting] dialog box appears.

2 Set a copy path in the [Copy Path Setting] dialog box.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Copy Path Setting

• Line Setting

● Line Setting

• Connection Type

• Link Speed

620

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [OK] button.

 The [Copy Path Creation Storage System Selection] screen appears.

Repeat Step 1

through

Step 3

the same number of times as the number of storage systems to set copy paths.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The number of remote storage systems exceeds the maximum

• The number of paths per port exceeds the maximum

5 When setting a copy path is completed for all the storage systems, click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Storage System Connection List] screen appears. Proceed to

"Apply Copy Path Information" (page

623)

• Click the [Box ID] link in the [Storage System Connection List] screen to display the [Check Copy Path

Information Setting] dialog box. Confirm the path information that is to be applied to the storage system.

• If a path with normal status exists, the [Skip] button is displayed. Click the button to display the [Download File] screen. Proceed to

"Select Copy Path Information" (page 622) .

621

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select Copy Path Information

In this screen, select the copy path information file to be used.

This setting is required only when "Apply Copy Path" is selected for "Operation Mode Selection" (page 613) .

Procedure

1 Input the location where the copy path information file to be used is stored.

The main setting item is as follows.

● Copy Path Information File Selection

• Copy Path Information File

2 Click the [Next >>] button.

 The [Storage System Connection List] screen appears. Proceed to

"Apply Copy Path Information" (page

623)

622

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Box ID] link in the [Storage System Connection List] screen to display the [Check Copy Path Information Setting] dialog box. Confirm the path information that is to be applied to the storage system.

End of procedure

Apply Copy Path Information

In this screen, apply the copy path information.

Procedure

1 Confirm that the copy path is set between the storage systems.

The checkbox is only displayed when the path information that is created by this function does not match the path information that is already applied. Select the checkbox for path information that is to be applied.

When no paths that can be applied to the storage system exist, the [Download File] screen appears. Proceed to

"Save" (page 625)

623

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Remote Device Information

• Checkbox to select a Box ID

If one of the following information does not match the local storage system configuration and the configuration in the copy path information file, the cause of the error is displayed in the [Result of applying] screen.

• Port mode (when the local storage system is "CA" and the copy path information file is "RA")

• Port type (FC, iSCSI, and iSCSI RA)

• When the port type is "FC", the WWN information

• When the port type is "iSCSI" or "iSCSI RA", the IP address information

• When the port type is "iSCSI" or "iSCSI RA", the iSCSI name information

2 Click the [Next >>] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Application of the copy path information starts. After application is complete, the [Result of applying] screen appears

Check the message and click the [Next >>] button.

Displayed screen varies depending on the operation mode that is selected in [Start] screen.

■ When "Create Copy Path" is selected

 The [Download File] screen appears. Proceed to

"Save" (page 625)

■ When "Apply Copy Path" is selected

• When the copy path information file is successfully applied

 The [Set Bandwidth Limit] screen appears. Proceed to

"Set Bandwidth Limit" (page 627) .

• When application of the copy path information file fails

 The [End Confirmation] screen appears. Click the [OK] button to display the [Finish Display] screen.

Proceed to

"Finish" (page 631) .

End of procedure

624

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Save

In this screen, save the copy path information that is created in the procedure in "Create Copy Path" (page 620)

• The saved copy path information file can be applied to other ETERNUS storage systems.

• Only the models in the path information that is created by this function are displayed in the following file format units. Click the [Save] button to save the copy path information file.

ETERNUS DX S4 series ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : V10L40 and later)

ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : earlier than V10L40)

ETERNUS DX90 S2

ETERNUS DX400 S2 series

ETERNUS DX8000 S2 series

ETERNUS DX90

ETERNUS DX400 series

ETERNUS DX8000 series

ETERNUS4000

ETERNUS8000

ETERNUS6000

Procedure

Click the [Save] button to save the copy path information.

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

625

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• If all the controller firmware versions for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series in the copy path information file are "V10L40 and later", save the copy path information file of "ETERNUS DX S4 series ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : V10L40 and later)". If all the controller firmware versions for the ETERNUS DX S3 series in the copy path information file are "earlier than V10L40", save the copy path information file of "ETER-

NUS DX S3 series (Target : earlier than V10L40)". If the controller firmware versions in the copy path information file are both "V10L40 and later" and "earlier than V10L40", save both the copy path information files of "ETERNUS DX S4 series ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : V10L40 and later)" and "ETERNUS

DX S3 series (Target : earlier than V10L40)".

For the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series with the controller firmware versions V10L40 and later, the copy path information file that is saved in the "ETERNUS DX S4 series ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : V10L40 and later)" format must be applied. Similarly, for the ETERNUS DX S3 series with the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L40, the copy path information file that is saved in the "ETERNUS DX S3 series

(Target : earlier than V10L40)" format must be applied.

• To edit the copy path information file for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series using this function, use the copy path information file that was saved in the "ETERNUS DX S4 series ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target :

V10L40 and later)" format. Note that this function cannot edit the copy path information file that is saved in the "ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : earlier than V10L40)" format.

If the local storage system is an ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series, the following information is displayed even if there is no copy path information for the ETERNUS DX S4 series or the ETERNUS DX S3 series.

• ETERNUS DX S4 series ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : V10L40 and later)

• ETERNUS DX S3 series (Target : earlier than V10L40)

2 Save the copy path information for each model.

The default file name depends on the model.

• For the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series, the ETERNUS AF series, and the ETERNUS DX200F (V10L40 or later)

The default file name is "RecPath_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss_copy path information file number (*1).bin". (YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the save screen (

Step 1 ) is displayed.)

• For the ETERNUS DX S3 series or the ETERNUS DX200F (earlier than V10L40)

The default file name is "RecPath_V10L30_serial number for the ETERNUS DX_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss_ copy path information file number (*1).bin". (YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the save screen (

Step 1 ) is displayed.)

• For the other ETERNUS storage systems

The default file name is "RecPathConvt_serial number for the ETERNUS storage system_YYYY-MM-DD_hhmm- ss_copy path information file number (*1).bin". (YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when

the save screen ( Step 1

) is displayed.)

*1: Copy path information file numbers are assigned in ascending order according to the [Save] button on the screen.

For example, "1" is assigned for the path information file, which is downloaded by clicking the first button in the list.

626

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Save the copy path information files for all of the models and click the [Next >>] button.

If the [Finish] button is clicked, the created copy path information file is deleted even when the copy path information files for some of the models are not saved. Make sure to save all of the copy path information files.

When the created copy path information has not been applied or when the [Finish] button is clicked, the

[End Confirmation] screen appears. Click the [OK] button to display the [Finish Display] screen. Proceed to

"Finish" (page 631) .

 If the created path information has already been applied, the [Set Bandwidth Limit] screen appears. Pro-

ceed to "Set Bandwidth Limit" (page 627)

End of procedure

Set Bandwidth Limit

In this screen, set the bandwidth limit between the local and the remote storage systems.

If the bandwidth limit setting is not required, click the [Next >>] button. The [Measure Round Trip Time] screen appears. Proceed to

"Measure Round Trip Time" (page 629)

627

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Procedure

1 Select the remote storage system to set the bandwidth limit, and click the [Bandwidth Limit] link.

 The [Set REC Bandwidth Limit] screen appears.

Set the detailed bandwidth limit information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● Bandwidth Limit Settings

• Setting Mode

• Bandwidth Limit

● Advanced Copy Path

• Bandwidth Limit

628

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Click the [Set] button

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The REC bandwidth limit setting starts.

5 Click the [Done] button.

 Return to the [Set Bandwidth Limit] screen.

Click the [Next >>] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The [Measure Round Trip Time] screen. Proceed to

"Measure Round Trip Time" (page 629) .

End of procedure

Measure Round Trip Time

In this screen, measure the round trip time between the local and remote storage systems.

• Round trip times must be measured from a static state without sending data through the line.

• Before measuring the round trip time, set a physical line properly between the ETERNUS storage systems.

When a line has an error, the round trip time cannot be measured correctly.

• Round trip times must be set for copy source and copy destination storage systems. Refer to

"Measure Round

Trip Time" (page 634) for details.

• It takes a maximum of 160 seconds to measure the round trip time.

629

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Procedure

1 Select a remote storage system to measure the round trip time in the [Measure Round Trip Time] screen (multiple selections can be made).

The main setting item is as follows.

● Remote Device Information

• Checkboxes for selecting a remote storage system

If there are no remote storage systems that can measure the round trip time or when the connection type

for all of the copy paths is "Direct", the [Finish Display] screen appears. Proceed to "Finish" (page 631) .

2 Click the [Next >>] button

3 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Measurement of the round trip time starts. After measurement completes, the [Measure Round Trip Time

Result] screen appears.

630

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Check the measured round trip time, and click the [Next >>] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Setting of the round trip time starts. After completing the settings, the [Finish Display] screen appears.

Proceed to

"Finish" (page 631) .

End of procedure

Finish

The procedure to finish the copy path setting is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click the [Done] button.

 Returns to the [Copy Path] screen.

631

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete All Copy Path

This function deletes all of the copy path information registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license is required to use this function.

• If an REC path, which is being used in an REC, was deleted, it may affect operations, such as the REC being stopped. Confirm that REC is not in use before modifying the information. To check if the REC is active, use the

[Advanced Copy] screen. Refer to "Advanced Copy (Basic Information)" (page 950) for details.

• When deleting copy paths that are allocated with REC Buffers, make sure to delete the relevant REC Buffers and REC Disk Buffers.

• This function deletes all of the copy paths configured in the ETERNUS DX/AF. To delete some of the copy paths,

refer to "Set Copy Path" (page 610) .

The bandwidth limit for the path is also deleted when the copy path has been deleted.

The procedure to delete all of the copy paths is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Delete All Copy Path] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of all the copy paths starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

Export All Copy Path

This function exports the copy path information registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, and saves the information in a file.

The saved file can be used as path information when creating or changing a copy path, so that manual registration of the path information will not be required.

• Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license is required to use this function.

• A copy path information cannot be exported when it has not been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The bandwidth limit for a copy path cannot be exported.

The procedure to export the copy path information is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Export All Copy Path] in [Action].

632

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Click the [Export] button.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

 The copy path information, which has been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, is exported.

After the copy path information export has been finished, a screen to execute downloading the file is displayed.

3 Click the [Download] button.

 A dialog box to download the file appears.

4 Save the copy path information file.

The default file name is "RecPath_serial number for the ETERNUS DX/AF_YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss.bin".

(YYYY-MM-DD_hh-mm-ss: the date and time when the download screen ( Step 3

) is displayed.)

5 Click the [Close] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

633

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Measure Round Trip Time

This function measures the round trip time between the local and the remote storage systems.

"Round trip time" is the time taken to make a communication between two storage systems.

Only one remote storage system can be measured at a time.

• Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license is required to use this function.

• Round trip time can be measured only when the connection type is "Remote". Round trip time cannot be measured when the connection type is "Direct".

• Round trip times must be set for copy source and copy destination storage systems. Measure the round trip time after applying the copy path information to both the copy source and copy destination storage systems, and then set the results (measured value).

• Round trip time must be measured from a static state without sending data through the line. For example, if

REC sessions exist between storage systems, set the REC session status to " Suspend" before measuring.

• Make sure that the physical line is correctly configured between storage systems before measuring. When a line has an error, the round trip time cannot be measured correctly.

• If the path between storage systems is changed, measure the round trip time again.

• Round trip time measurement requires a maximum of 160 seconds.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Measure Round Trip Time" (page 1277) .

The procedure to measure the REC round trip time is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the remote storage system that is connected by remote connection to measure the round trip time, and click [Get Round Trip Time] in [Action].

2 Click the [Measure] button.

 Measurement of round trip time starts.

634

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Change the "Round Trip Time (msec)" value if necessary.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting item is as follows.

● Measure Round Trip Time

• Round Trip Time (msec)

If the round trip time has not been entered, the [Modify] button cannot be clicked.

4 Click the [Modify] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The round trip time measurement result is updated in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

Modify REC Buffer

This function sets parameters of the REC Buffer for copying data via the REC in Consistency mode.

The "Consistency mode" secures the order of data transfer to the remote device for all of the specified REC sessions.

This mode requires constant securement of the dedicated REC Buffer in the cache memory. Copying via REC Buffer stores multiple REC session I/Os in the REC Buffer for a certain period of time, and copies in blocks.

REC Buffer specifications for each model

Model

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

Total size of all of the REC Buffers (per CM)

128 MB

512 MB

8192 MB

512 MB

The maximum number of

REC Buffers

The maximum size of a single REC Buffer

128 MB

512 MB

2048 MB

512 MB

635

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Model

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

Total size of all of the REC Buffers (per CM)

8192 MB

512 MB

The maximum number of

REC Buffers

The maximum size of a single REC Buffer

2048 MB

512 MB

• Registering the license for the Advanced Copy function is required to set the REC Buffer.

• This function can only be used when the local storage system (the storage system that creates REC Buffers) supports REC.

• Perform REC Buffer settings in both the REC copy source and destination storage systems.

• When changing REC Buffers, suspend the sessions using the target REC Buffers.

• When deleting REC Buffers, stop the sessions using the target REC Buffers.

• This function cannot be used when the remote device and/or copy path have not been configured.

• Cache memory is not only used for REC Buffers, but also used for copy tables, the Thin Provisioning function

(*1), the Storage Cluster function (*1), and the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function. Note that an REC

Buffer with the maximum capacity for each model cannot always be created depending on the following conditions.

Memory capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF

Copy table size

Maximum pool capacity

Total TFOV capacity (*2)

License registration for the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function

*1: The shared area in the cache memory is used for the following conditions.

The maximum pool capacity for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 is expanded to "1.5 PB" or larger

The maximum pool capacity for the ETERNUS DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650

S2, or the ETERNUS AF650 is expanded to "1024 TB" or larger

The total TFOV capacity (*2) has been expanded from the default capacity

Refer to "Default TFOV capacity for each model" (page 555) for details.

*2: The total TFOV capacity indicates the total capacity of the volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function in an

ETERNUS DX/AF. To change the total TFOV capacity, use ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• Because REC Buffers are duplicated between the CMs, the actual memory capacity is twice as large as the selected REC Buffer capacity.

• Take REC reverse operation into consideration and specify the same values for the REC Buffers ("Forwarding

Interval", "Monitoring Time", "HALT Wait Timer", "I/O Priority Mode", "Immediate HALT Mode", and "High Bandwidth Mode") in the copy source storage system and the copy destination storage system.

• When performing bidirectional data transfer, settings for "Send" and "Receive" REC Buffers in the ETERNUS DX/

AF are required.

• If the usage of the REC Buffer to which the REC Disk Buffer has already been assigned is changed to "Unused", the REC Disk Buffer assignment will be cleared (the REC Disk Buffer itself will not be deleted)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify REC Buffer" (page 1277)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify REC Buffer" (page 1330)

636

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Adding a new REC Buffer

The procedure to add a new REC Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

Select the target REC Buffers to be added (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Modify REC Buffer] in [Action].

2 Change the REC Buffer configurations.

The main setting items are as follows.

● REC Buffer Setting List

• Usage

• Remote Box ID

• Size

• Forwarding Interval

• Monitoring Time

• HALT Wait Timer

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The total size of REC Buffers is larger than the maximum capacity for each model

• The same remote Box ID has been selected both for "Send " and for "Receive" as its usage

• The usage of an REC Buffer is "Send" or "Receive", and its path to the remote Box ID has been deleted

• An REC Buffer, which has already been deleted ("???" is displayed in the "Remote Box ID" field), still exists

• The usage of an REC Buffer to which an REC Disk Buffer has already been assigned is changed to

"Receive"

• When the setting contents of the REC Buffer has not been changed

637

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The remote Box ID cannot be changed. To change the remote Box ID, first delete the corresponding group. Then, click [Modify REC Buffer] again to specify a new remote Box ID and other information in the corresponding group.

• To change "I/O Priority Mode", "Immediate HALT Mode", or "High Bandwidth Mode", click "Advanced Setting".

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The REC Buffer settings starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

■ Deleting an REC Buffer

The procedure to delete an REC Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the target REC Buffers to be deleted (multiple selections can be made), and click the

[Modify REC Buffer] in [Action].

2 Select "Unused" for the usage of the REC Buffer.

3 Click the [Set] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of an REC Buffer starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Buffer] screen.

638

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create REC Disk Buffer

This function creates an REC Disk Buffer.

When using the REC Consistency mode, REC Buffer shortage may occur due to errors (such as a bad line). Note that the copy session status changes to " Halt" if the REC Buffer shortage extends past a certain period of time. The

REC Disk Buffer is used for temporarily saving copy data to avoid these situations.

• Registering the license for the Advanced Copy feature is required to create an REC Disk Buffer.

• This function can only be used when the local storage system (the storage system that creates REC Disk Buffers) supports REC.

• When encryption mode is disabled, an encrypted REC Disk Buffer cannot be created by CM.

• In the following conditions, REC Disk Buffers cannot be created;

When multiple types of drives are combined in a single REC Disk Buffer

Refer to "Drive combinations that can configure an REC Disk Buffer" (page 639)

for details.

When resources for creating an REC Disk Buffer (such as the number of RAID groups and volumes) are insufficient.

(When the maximum number of RAID groups or volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, a new

REC Disk Buffer cannot be created.)

• When the REC Disk Buffer creation process is complete, the REC Disk Buffer will be formatted automatically.

• When assigning multiple REC Disk Buffers to an REC Buffer, each REC Buffer has different conditions. Refer to

"Assign REC Disk Buffer" (page 642) for details.

Drive combinations that can configure an REC Disk Buffer

Online

Online Nearline

Not recommended

SSD Online SED

Nearline SED

Nearline

SSD

Online SED (*1)

Not recommended

Nearline SED

NG NG NG Not recommended

SSD SED NG NG NG NG NG

OK: REC Disk Buffers can be created

Not recommended: REC Disk Buffers can be created, but not a recommended configuration

NG: REC Disk Buffers cannot be created

*1: In the controller firmware versions earlier than V10L32, "Online SED" is displayed as "SED".

Not recommended

SSD SED

639

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Requirements for selecting drives

• The requirements for a RAID group that is to be used as an REC Disk Buffer are as follows:

The number of member drives is four or eight

(The RAID level for the REC Disk Buffer is RAID1+0(2+2) for four member drives or RAID1+0(4+4) for eight member drives.)

Do not combine different drive types (Online/Nearline/SSD/Online SED /Nearline SED/SSD SED)

(Although "Online" type drives and "Nearline" type drives can be used in the same REC Disk Buffer, using only "Online" type drives or using only "Nearline" type drives is recommended. Also, "Online SED" type drives and "Nearline SED" type drives can be used in the same REC Disk Buffer, but using only "Online SED" type drives or using only "Nearline SED" type drives is recommended. This is because the available capacity and the access performance may be reduced when these drives are used in the same REC Disk Buffer.)

The drive size must be smaller than 6TB (except SSDs and SSD SEDs)

• The recommended drive configuration of the RAID group in the REC Disk Buffer is the same as when manually creating RAID groups. Also, the drive layout condition for "High Performance (RAID1+0)" is applied to the RAID group in the REC Disk Buffer. Refer to

"Requirements for selecting drives" (page 528) in

"Create RAID Group" for

details.

• There are conditions for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout. Refer to

ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 drive layout" (page 525)

for details. These conditions apply when the RAID level is "High Performance (RAID1+0)".

Note that these conditions are not applied to other models.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create REC Disk Buffer" (page 1280)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create REC Disk Buffer" (page 1330)

The procedure to create an REC Disk Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create REC Disk Buffer] in [Action].

2 Specify the REC Disk Buffer detailed information.

The main setting items are as follows.

● New RAID Group

• Name

640

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Select drives from the list or the installation image.

■ When selecting drives from the list

Click the [Tabular] tab to select drives from the list.

Only unused drives are displayed on the list.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

• Checkbox to select drives

■ When selecting drives from the installation image

The main setting items are as follows.

• DE selection list box

• Checkbox to select drives

• The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

641

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Create] button.

5 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Creation of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Disk Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

Assign REC Disk Buffer

This function assigns an REC Disk Buffer to an REC Buffer. This function also deletes the assignment of the REC Disk

Buffers.

Requirements for REC Buffers to assign REC Disk Buffers

• The usage of the REC Buffer must be "Send"

• The number of REC Disk Buffers that are to be assigned to a single REC Buffer must be one of the following numbers.

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

One or two (but less than or equal to the number of CMs that are installed)

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

One or two

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

One or two

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

One or two

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

One, two, or four (*1)

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

One, two, four, or six (*1)

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

One or two

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

One or two

ETERNUS DX200F

One or two

*1: The number of REC Disk Buffers must be less than or equal to the number of CMs that are installed.

• Requirements to assign multiple REC Disk Buffers to a single REC Buffer

The drive type (Online/Nearline/SSD/Online SED/Nearline SED/SSD SED) must be the same (*1)

The assigned REC Disk Buffers have the same number of drives (four or eight)

The assigned REC Disk Buffers have the same encryption status ("CM", "-", or "SED")

• Recommended conditions for assigning multiple REC Disk Buffers to a single REC Buffer

The assigned REC Disk Buffers have the same Stripe Depth (*2)

The assigned REC Disk Buffers have the same capacity (*3)

The SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD/SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED) must be the same

*1: Only assigning either "Online" or "Nearline" REC Disk Buffers is recommended. Also, only assigning either an "Online SED" or a "Nearline SED" REC Disk Buffers is recommended. This is because the available capacity and the access performance may be reduced when these REC Disk Buffers are assigned in the same REC Buffer.

*2: If the Stripe Depth is different for the used REC Disk Buffers, access performance of the REC Disk Buffer may be affected.

*3: When using REC Disk Buffers of different capacities, the smallest becomes the standard, and all other REC Disk Buffers are regarded as having the same capacity as the smallest REC Disk Buffer. In this case, the remaining REC Disk Buffer space will NOT be used.

642

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function can only be used when the local storage system (the storage system that assigns REC Disk Buffers) supports REC.

• A single REC Disk Buffer cannot be assigned to multiple REC Buffers.

• When an REC that uses an REC Buffer is being performed, make sure to suspend the relevant REC session in advance.

• When assigning REC Disk Buffers to REC Buffers, an REC Disk Buffer must be created in advance. Refer to

"Create REC Disk Buffer" (page 639) for details.

• The Stripe Depth for REC Disk Buffers can be checked from the [REC Disk Buffer Detail] screen. Refer to

"REC

Disk Buffer" (page 978)

for details.

■ Assigning an additional REC Disk Buffer

The procedure to assign additional REC Disk Buffers to an REC Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the REC Buffer, to which the REC Disk Buffer is to be assigned, and click [Assign REC Disk

Buffer] in [Action].

2 Click the [Add] button.

 The [Select REC Disk Buffer] screen appears.

3 Select the checkbox for the additional REC Disk Buffer to be assigned, and click the [OK] button.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• No REC Disk Buffers, which satisfy the assignment requirements, are registered to the ETERNUS DX/AF

• The number of REC Disk Buffers, which are assigned to an REC Buffer, exceeds the maximum number which the storage system model supports

643

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For the "Drive Type" field, the drive type of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed.

If multiple drive types are used in the REC Disk Buffer, the drive type is displayed as described below.

• If only "Online" type drives are used or if both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives are used, "Online" is displayed.

• If only "Online SED" type drives are used or if both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives are used,

"Online SED" is displayed.

• "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• "SSD SED" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED).

 The selected REC Disk Buffer is added.

4 When the REC Disk Buffer assignment has been completed, click the [Modify] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The REC Disk Buffer assignment starts.

6 Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Buffer] screen.

644

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Deleting an REC Disk Buffer assignment

The procedure to delete the assignment of the REC Disk Buffers from the REC Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

Select the REC Buffer to delete the assignment of the REC Disk Buffer, and click [Assign REC Disk

Buffer] in [Action].

2 To delete the assignment of the REC Disk Buffer, click the [Delete] button for the target REC Disk

Buffer (RAID group).

 The selected REC Disk Buffer is deleted from the list.

3 Click the [Modify] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Buffer] screen.

645

End of procedure

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Delete REC Disk Buffer

This function deletes an REC Disk Buffer.

REC Disk Buffers that have been assigned to the REC Buffer cannot be deleted.

The procedure to delete an REC Disk Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the REC Disk Buffer that is to be deleted (multiple selections can be made) and click the

[Delete REC Disk Buffer] button in [Action].

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Deletion of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Disk Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

Format REC Disk Buffer

This function formats an REC Disk Buffer.

• If an in-use REC Disk Buffer is formatted, the data stored in the REC Disk Buffer will be deleted.

• The following REC Disk Buffers cannot be formatted:

The REC Disk Buffers without " Available" or " Readying" status

The REC Disk Buffer is blocked

The newly created REC Disk Buffer will be formatted automatically. In this case, it is not necessary to format the

REC Disk Buffer by using this function.

The procedure to format an REC Disk Buffer is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the REC Disk Buffers to be formatted (multiple selections can be made), and click the

[Format REC Disk Buffer] button in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Formatting of an REC Disk Buffer starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [REC Disk Buffer] screen.

End of procedure

646

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify REC Multiplicity

This function specifies multiplicity or priority level when performing REC.

It is not necessary to change the default setting (Automatic) for normal use. This function can adjust the copy performance to give priority to REC over workload I/O or to reduce the affect on workload I/O.

When the local storage system and the remote storage system are connected by remote connection

• If "Automatic" is selected for the specification mode, REC is performed with the recommended multiplicity that is calculated by the obtained round trip time.

If the round trip time is not measured, "***" is displayed in the "Recommended Multiplicity" field.

To display the recommended multiplicity, use the procedure in

"Measure Round Trip Time" (page 634)

• If "Manual" is selected for the specification mode, REC will be performed with the specified multiplicity.

When the local storage system and the remote storage system are connected by remote connection

• When the priority level is "Automatic", REC is performed using the priority level that is specified using the procedure in

"Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 600) .

• When the priority level is from "1" to "8", REC is performed using the specified priority level.

• Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license is required to use this function.

• If "***" is displayed in the "Recommended Multiplicity" field of the Remote Box ID List, and "Automatic" has been selected for the specification mode, REC will not be performed with the appropriate multiplicity. To select

"Automatic", measure the round trip time using the procedure in "Measure Round Trip Time" (page 634) .

• If the path between local and remote storage systems has been changed, measure the round trip time and set the multiplicity again.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 1282) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 1330)

The procedure to modify REC multiplicity is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click the [Modify REC Multiplicity] in [Action].

Specify the multiplicity.

647

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Remote Box ID List

• Priority Level

• Specification Mode

• Multiplicity

Click [Advanced Setting] to specify the copy schedule mode.

3 Click the [Set] button.

A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The REC multiplicity settings starts.

5 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

Set REC Bandwidth Limit

This function sets the bandwidth limit for the Remote Copy path.

Registering the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license is required to use this function.

• This function enables the Initiator (copy source) to limit the bandwidth for sending data in the copy path. The bandwidth limit can be set for each path.

• The bandwidth limit setting is not included in the copy path information. Therefore, a bandwidth limit setting for the unchanged path remains even when a copy path was created after the copy path information had been changed.

• The bandwidth limit for the path is also deleted when the copy path has been deleted.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Set REC Bandwidth Limit" (page 1283) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set REC Bandwidth Limit" (page 1331) .

The procedure to set the REC bandwidth is as follows:

Procedure

1 Select the remote storage system to set the bandwidth limit, and click [Set REC Bandwidth Limit] in [Action].

648

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

REC Management

Set the detailed bandwidth limit information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The main setting items are as follows.

● Bandwidth Limit Settings

• Setting Mode

• Bandwidth Limit

● Advanced Copy Path

• Bandwidth Limit

3 Click the [Set] button

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 The REC bandwidth limit setting starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Copy Path] screen.

End of procedure

649

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

ODX Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ODX Management

This section describes ODX management.

ODX management provides the following functions:

•

Enable ODX

•

Disable ODX

•

can be created after ODX is enabled. Refer to "Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 651)

Enable ODX

This function enables the ODX function.

This function supports ODX, which is provided for servers with "Windows Server 2012" or later. ODX is a function that offloads the load from data copying and migration to the storage system.

• To start using the ODX function, the server must recognize that ODX is enabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF. After enabling ODX with this function, reboot the server.

• ODX requires dedicated volumes (ODX Buffer volumes) to save data before updating. An ODX Buffer volume

for details.

• The ETERNUS DX/AF does not support an Advanced Copy when the copy destination is a volume that is being used by the ODX function.

• The ODX function only supports copying within the same ETERNUS DX/AF. Copying to other storage systems is not supported.

ODX does not require the registration of an Advanced Copy license and copy table size settings.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. ODX" (page 1331) .

The procedure to enable the ODX function is as follows:

Procedure

Click [Enable ODX] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Enabling of ODX starts.

3 Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

End of procedure

650

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

ODX Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Disable ODX

This function disables the ODX function.

• To stop using the ODX function, the server must recognize that ODX is disabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF. After disabling ODX with this function, reboot the server.

• The ODX function cannot be disabled when an ODX Buffer volume exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Delete the ODX

Buffer volume in advance. Refer to

"Delete Volume" (page 279) for details.

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. ODX" (page 1331) .

The procedure to disable the ODX function is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Disable ODX] in [Action].

2 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 Disabling of ODX starts.

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

End of procedure

Create ODX Buffer Volume

This function creates a dedicated volume for the ODX function.

ODX is a function that offloads the load from data copying and migration to the storage system. ODX copies data at the time when a copy request is received. If a Write command is issued for the copy source data, this function backs up the previous data in the area that is to be overwritten. An ODX Buffer volume is used to store the backup data at this time.

The ODX function is supported by "Windows Server 2012" or later.

ODX Buffer volume specification

• One ODX Buffer volume can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The type of the ODX Buffer volume is "Standard", "TPV", or "FTV".

• The capacity of an ODX Buffer volume is 1GB - 1TB.

651

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

ODX Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• An ODX Buffer volume can be created when the ODX function is enabled.

• The ODX Buffer volume must be created with the ODX function.

• If the Thin Provisioning function is enabled, a "TPV" type ODX Buffer volume can be created.

• When creating an "FTV" type ODX Buffer volume, use ETERNUS CLI. ETERNUS Web GUI cannot be used to create an "FTV" type ODX Buffer volume.

• When encryption mode is disabled, an ODX Buffer volume encrypted by CM cannot be created. Note that when

SEDs are not installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF, an ODX Buffer volume encrypted by SEDs cannot be created.

• If the maximum number of volumes is already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, an ODX Buffer volume cannot

be created. Refer to "Create Volume" (page 257) to check the maximum number of volumes for the ETERNUS

DX/AF.

• If the maximum capacity for TPVs or FTVs is already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, a "TPV" type ODX Buffer

volume cannot be created. For the maximum capacity, refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)" (page 948) for

details. The maximum capacity is the same as the maximum pool capacity.

• Only one ODX Buffer volume can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Use the [Settings] screen to check whether

an ODX Buffer volume is already created. Refer to "Settings (Advanced Copy)" (page 970)

for details.

• An existing ODX Buffer volume can be checked by using the "Forbid Advanced Copy" field in the [Volume]

screen. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799) for details.

• There are three types of ODX Buffer volumes: "Standard", "TPV", and "FTV". When creating an ODX Buffer volume in a RAID group, select "Standard" for the volume type. When creating an ODX Buffer volume in a TPP, select "Thin Provisioning" for the volume type. When creating an ODX Buffer volume in an FTRP, use ETERNUS

CLI. The ODX Buffer volume type is independent of the copy source volume type or the copy destination volume type.

• Even when the ODX Buffer volume capacity is insufficient, no error occurs in an ODX session that is already started. Windows Server suspends the use of ODX, and starts a normal copy process that uses Read and Write processes.

• Monitoring the usage of an ODX Buffer volume is available. If insufficient capacity is detected, the ETERNUS

DX/AF sends a notification. Refer to

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166) for details. If the ODX Buffer volume

capacity is frequently insufficient, the benefit of using the ODX function is lost. Expand the ODX Buffer volume capacity as required. Refer to

"Expand Volume" (page 285)

"Start RAID Migration" (page 307) , or

"Expand Thin

Provisioning Volume" (page 292) for details.

• An ODX Buffer volume can be deleted by using the same procedure as "Standard" and "TPV" type volumes if the

ODX function is not used. Refer to "Delete Volume" (page 279) for details. To delete an "FTV" type ODX Buffer

volume, use ETERNUS CLI.

• The volume capacity that is required for an ODX Buffer volume varies depending on the server system configuration and the applications that are being used. When using the ODX function for normal file copying or file migration with Microsoft Windows Server, creating a 10GB ODX Buffer volume is recommended.

• An ODX Buffer volume can be created by using the maximum free space that is available in a RAID group.

Inputting the volume capacity is not required. "Standard" type volumes can be created using the maximum free space.

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 1284) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 1331)

The procedure to create an ODX Buffer volume is as follows:

Procedure

1 Click [Create ODX Buffer Volume] in [Action].

652

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

ODX Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Specify the detailed information of the ODX Buffer volume and select the RAID group or TPP in which the ODX Buffer volume is to be created.

The main setting items are as follows.

● ODX Buffer Volume

• Name

• Capacity

• Type

• Use all Largest Free Space

• Allocation

● Target RAID Group/Thin Provisioning Pool

• Radio button to select a RAID group (when "Type" is "Standard")

• Radio button to select a TPP (when "Type" is "Thin Provisioning")

When using the maximum free space in the RAID group to create an ODX Buffer volume without specifying the capacity, select the "Enable" checkbox for "Use all Largest Free Space". A "Standard" type volume can be created using the maximum free space.

If an error screen appears under the following conditions, check the parameter settings.

• The maximum number of volumes that can be created is exceeded

• Free space in the RAID group is insufficient

• LDE is being performed in the RAID group to which the ODX Buffer volume belongs

• When the allocation mode is "Thick" and the free space in the TPP is insufficient

3 Click the [Create] button.

4 A confirmation screen appears. Click the [OK] button.

 ODX Buffer volume creation starts.

653

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

7. Advanced Copy Management

ODX Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Click the [Done] button to return to the [Settings] screen.

Buffer volumes (TPVs) are created, a warning message appears in the result screen. Check the TPP used state and add drives to expand the TPP capacity as required. Check the [Thin Provisioning Pool Detail]

screen for "Provisioned Rate". Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925)

for details.

End of procedure

654

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

Part 2 Operation

655

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

This chapter describes system management.

System status displays the status information of volumes.

System status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Category

Storage system name

Network

Remote Support

Root Certificate

Key Management

Key Group

User Settings

Eco-mode

Event/Dump

Audit Log

Firmware Maintenance

Storage Migration

External Drives

Utility

System Settings

System status screen

System (Basic Information)

Detailed information of the system settings can be displayed from the following screen:

•

Eco-mode Schedule Detail

•

Path Group Detail Information

•

External Drives Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

656

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

System (Basic Information)

This function displays the system information and a list of users who are currently logged in.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• If the message "Currently Network Configuration is set to factory default." is displayed in the system message field, the network environment settings for the MNT port must be performed. Use the [Setup Network Environment] function in the [Network] screen under the [System] navigation. Some functions are not available if the network environment settings are incomplete.

• If the message "Configuration was applied to storage system." is displayed in the system message field, the

ETERNUS DX/AF must be rebooted. Any setting processes cannot be performed until the applied configuration information is enabled by rebooting the storage system.

• The "Login User" list is displayed only when a user account with the "User Management" policy is used to log in.

• The following login users are displayed:

Users who are logged in to the Master CM from ETERNUS Web GUI

Users who are logged in to the Slave CM from ETERNUS Web GUI

Users who are logged in to the Master CM from ETERNUS CLI or other software

(Users who are logged in to the Slave CM from ETERNUS CLI or other software are not displayed.)

• The storage system name is displayed at the top of the [System] navigation category.

The "Storage System Name" is specified using the [Modify Storage System Name] function. Refer to

"Modify

Storage System Name" (page 71)

• Click the "Storage System Name" in the category again to display the latest information in the screen.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

657

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

System (Basic Information)

■ For the other models

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● System Information

• Storage System Name

The name for the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

By clicking this item, the [Storage] screen in the [Component] navigation is displayed.

• Model Name

The model name of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Unified Storage

The support status of the unified storage function is displayed. Refer to

"Unified Storage" (page 28)

"Overview"

for details.

• Deduplication/Compression

Whether the Deduplication/Compression function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3, this item is not displayed.

• Storage Cluster

If a license for the Storage Cluster function has already been registered, "Enable" is displayed. If the license is not registered, "Disable" is displayed.

If this item is enabled, the total TFOV capacity per storage system (or the total capacity of volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function in an ETERNUS DX/AF) is displayed in the "Enable (total TFOV capacity)" format.

Enable (128 TB)

Enable (256 TB)

Enable (384 TB)

Enable (768 TB)

Enable (1 PB)

Enable (2 PB)

Enable (3 PB)

Enable (4 PB)

Enable (8 PB)

Enable (16 PB)

Disable

658

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

System (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Note that ETERNUS Web GUI cannot be used to register a Storage Cluster license or to change the total TFOV capacity. To register the license, use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser. To change the total TFOV capacity, use ETER-

NUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser (*1).

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

*1: To change the total TFOV capacity with ETERNUS CLI, use the "max-tfo-capacity" parameter for the ETERNUS CLI command "set storage-cluster-license". To change the total TFOV capacity with ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser, refer to the manuals provided with ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• Virtual Volume

Whether the Virtual Volume function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

The Virtual Volume function cannot be set with ETERNUS Web GUI. To set the Virtual Volume function, use ETER-

NUS SF Storage Cruiser.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

• Non-disruptive Storage Migration License

The registration status of the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License is displayed.

Registered

Unregistered

• Serial Number

The serial number of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• WWN

The WWN of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Firmware Version

The current controller firmware version is displayed.

VxxLyy-zzzz (Vxx: Version, Lyy: Level, zzzz: Release number)

• Status

General status (detail) of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. Refer to

"Storage System General Status" (page

1411) for details.

• Cache Mode

The current status and the factor of the cache are displayed. The normal status is "Write Back Mode".

Refer to "Cache Mode" (page 29)

in "Overview"

for details.

Write Back Mode

Write Through (Pinned Data)

Write Through (Battery)

Write Through (Maintenance)

Write Through (1CM)

• Remote Support

The Remote Support status (REMCS or AIS Connect) is displayed. If the Remote Support is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. Refer to

"Remote Support" (page 29)

in "Overview"

for details.

Operating

Maintenance in Progress

Stopped

• Operation Mode

The operation mode is displayed.

Normal

The ETERNUS DX/AF is in operation.

Maintenance Mode

The ETERNUS DX/AF is under maintenance.

• Connecting Module

The CM to which ETERNUS Web GUI is connected is displayed.

659

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

System (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Login User

• Interface

The interface type for users who are logged in is displayed.

GUI

Users logged in via ETERNUS Web GUI or users logged in via ETERNUS Web GUI from the AIS Connect server

CLI

Users logged in via ETERNUS CLI or users logged in via ETERNUS CLI from the AIS Connect server

SOFT

Users logged in from software.

"SOFT" is displayed in the following conditions:

• When users log in from software with the default "Software" role via CLI

• When users log in using SMI-S via software

• When users log in from software using Dynamic LUN Mirroring (DLM) via CLI

• Session ID

An identification number for users who are logged in is displayed. A session ID is obtained for each login and released with each logout. Because the session ID is obtained discretely, the same session ID is not used even if the same user logs in again. ETERNUS Web GUI uses session IDs between 1 - 999 and ETERNUS CLI (including when the interface is "SOFT") uses session IDs from 10001 onwards. In a Unified Storage environment, ETERNUS

Web GUI uses session IDs from 10001 onwards for internal processes in the same way as ETERNUS CLI. An "*"

(asterisk) is added on top of the current user's (your) session ID.

0 - 65535

For the current user's (your) session: * xxxxx (xxxxx: 0 - 65535)

• User ID

The user name (user ID) for a user who is logged in is displayed. When the interface is "SOFT" (SMI-S or DLM), a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is also displayed for internal process sessions of ETERNUS Web GUI in a

Unified Storage environment.

• Role

The user role for a user who is logged in is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for internal process sessions of

ETERNUS Web GUI in a Unified Storage environment.

Monitor

Admin

StorageAdmin

AccountAdmin

SecurityAdmin

Maintainer

Software

Custom role

• Login Date

The login date and time are displayed.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (2001 - 2037), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 -

23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Lock

If a logged in user is updating data that is managed by the ETERNUS DX/AF, "Yes" is displayed. If a user is not updating data, "No" is displayed. When "Yes" is displayed for a user, other users with "No" displayed cannot update data.

Note that multiple users cannot update data that is managed by the ETERNUS DX/AF at the same time. The storage system is exclusively used by a user who is updating the data. The exclusion is released when the updating is complete.

660

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

System (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• IP Address

The IP address for a user who is logged in is displayed. If an AIS Connect server is used to log in, "AIS Connect

Server" is displayed. When the interface is "SOFT" (SMI-S or DLM), a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is also displayed for internal process sessions of ETERNUS Web GUI in a Unified Storage environment.

For IPv4 address

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 (decimal)

For IPv6 address

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

incomplete. Refer to "Setup Network Environment" (page 125)

661

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Network

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Network

This function displays the network environment of each port in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Environment] function in [Action]. Some functions are not available if the network environment settings are

for details.

• Click the [ ] icon to display the latest screen. Note that after changing the firewall setting and returning to this screen, it takes approximately 10 seconds to update the display contents. Wait at least 10 seconds and click the [ ] icon or click [Network] in the category to display the [Network] screen again.

■ IPv4 Settings

The network setting information is displayed.

The SNMP Information, the E-Mail Information, and the SSL Version Information are displayed under the network setting information.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The port type is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS

AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

MNT and RMT

For the other models

MNT, RMT, and FST

• Speed and Duplex

The transfer speed and the communication method are displayed.

Auto-negotiation

1Gbit/s

100Mbit/s Half

100Mbit/s Full

10Mbit/s Half

10Mbit/s Full

662

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Network

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Master IP Address

The IP address of the Master CM, which has been specified to the port, is displayed.

If not specified, the field is blank.

• Slave IP Address

The IP address of the Slave CM, which has been specified to the port, is displayed.

This item is not displayed for the 1CM model.

If not specified, the field is blank.

• Subnet Mask

The Subnet Mask, which has been specified to the port, is displayed.

If not specified, the field is blank.

● SNMP Information

• SNMP Function

Whether the SNMP function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

● E-Mail Information

• Notification E-Mail

Whether the E-mail notification is enabled or disabled is displayed.

● SSL Version Information

• Protocol

HTTPS (GUI)

Whether the SSL version (TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2) corresponding to the HTTPS (ETERNUS Web GUI) protocol is enabled or disabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed (*1).

The SSL version setting (enabled or disabled) is applied to all LAN ports (MNT/RMT/FST).

HTTPS (SMI-S)

Whether the SSL version (TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2) corresponding to the HTTPS (SMI-S) protocol is enabled or disabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed (*1).

The SSL version setting (enabled or disabled) is applied to all LAN ports (MNT/RMT/FST).

Maintenance-Secure

Whether the SSL version (TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2) corresponding to the Maintenance-Secure protocol is enabled or disabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed (*1).

The SSL version setting (enabled or disabled) is applied to all LAN ports (MNT/RMT/FST).

*1: When the SSL version is enabled, " " is displayed. If the SSL version is disabled, the field is blank.

663

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Network

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ IPv6 Settings

The network setting information is displayed.

The SNMP Information, the E-Mail Information, and the SSL Version Information are displayed under the network setting information.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The port type is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS

AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

MNT and RMT

For the other models

MNT, RMT, and FST

• Speed and Duplex

The transfer speed and the communication method are displayed.

Auto-negotiation

1Gbit/s

100Mbit/s Half

100Mbit/s Full

10Mbit/s Half

10Mbit/s Full

• Master IP Link Local Address

The link local address of the Master CM, which has been specified to the port, is displayed.

If not specified or when the port type is "FST", the field is blank.

• Master Connect IP Address

The connect IP address of the Master CM, which has been specified to the port, is displayed.

"Master Connect IP Address" corresponds to "Master IP Address" for IPv4.

If not specified or when the port type is "FST", the field is blank.

• Slave IP Link Local Address

The link local address of the Slave CM, which has been specified to the port, is displayed.

This item is not displayed for the 1CM model.

If not specified or when the port type is "FST", the field is blank.

664

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Network

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Slave Connect IP Address

The connect IP address of the Slave CM, which has been specified to the port, is displayed.

"Slave Connect IP Address" corresponds to "Slave IP Address" for IPv4.

This item is not displayed for the 1CM model.

If not specified or when the port type is "FST", the field is blank.

• Length of Subnet Prefix

The prefix length for the connect IP address is displayed between 3 - 128 (unit: bit).

"Length of Subnet Prefix" corresponds to "Subnet Mask" for IPv4.

If not specified or when the port type is "FST", the field is blank.

● SNMP Information

• SNMP Function

Whether the SNMP function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

● E-Mail Information

• Notification E-Mail

Whether the E-mail notification is enabled or disabled is displayed.

● SSL Version Information

• Protocol

Refer to "Protocol" (page 663) in

"IPv4 Settings" for details.

HTTPS (GUI)

HTTPS (SMI-S)

Maintenance-Secure

■ Firewall

The Firewall setting information is displayed.

The SNMP Information, the E-Mail Information, and the SSL Version Information are displayed under the Firewall setting information.

665

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Network

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The port type is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS

AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

MNT and RMT

For the other models

MNT, RMT, and FST

● Acceptable Protocol

• HTTP

Whether the HTTP connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

• HTTPS

Whether the HTTPS connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

• Telnet

Whether the Telnet connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

• SSH

Whether the SSH connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

• ICMP

Whether the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

• Maintenance-Secure

Whether the Maintenance-Secure connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

• SNMP

Whether the SNMP connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

• RCIL

Whether the Remote Cabinet Interface over LAN (RCIL) connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

Whether RCIL is enabled or disabled is only displayed for the MNT port. The RMT port and the FST port are always disabled.

• ETERNUS DX Discovery

Whether the ETERNUS DX Discovery connection is enabled or disabled is displayed. (*1)

The ETERNUS DX Discovery is a port to connect ETERNUS DX/AF storage systems in the network by using the

Remote Installation function.

Whether ETERNUS DX Discovery is enabled or disabled is only displayed for the MNT port. The RMT port and the

FST port are always disabled.

*1: When the SNMP connection is enabled, " " is displayed. If the SNMP connection is disabled, the field is blank.

● SNMP Information

• SNMP Function

Whether the SNMP function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

● E-Mail Information

• Notification E-Mail

Whether the E-mail notification is enabled or disabled is displayed.

666

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Network

● SSL Version Information

• Protocol

Refer to "Protocol" (page 663) in

"IPv4 Settings" for details.

HTTPS (GUI)

HTTPS (SMI-S)

Maintenance-Secure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

667

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Remote Support

This function displays the set state for the Remote Support function (REMCS or AIS Connect).

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When only REMCS is available, the [REMCS] screen appears. Refer to

"REMCS" (page 668) for details.

•

When only AIS Connect is available, the [AIS Connect] screen appears. Refer to "AIS Connect" (page 670) for

details.

• When both REMCS and AIS Connect are available, setting information for REMCS and AIS Connect are displayed.

Click [REMCS] in the category and display the [REMCS] screen to perform the REMCS actions. Refer to

"REMCS" (page 668)

for details.

Click [AIS Connect] in the category and display the [AIS Connect] screen to perform the AIS Connect actions.

Refer to "AIS Connect" (page 670)

for details.

REMCS

This function displays the Remote Support function settings and the operation status in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

REMCS and AIS Connect cannot be used at the same time. REMCS can be specified or restarted when AIS Connect

is disabled. Refer to "Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220) for details.

■ Support Information

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Customer Information Setup

Whether or not the customer information has been specified at the REMCS center is displayed.

• Communication Environment Setup

Whether or not the communication environment information has been specified at the REMCS center is displayed.

668

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Remote Support

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Support Status

The Remote Support status is displayed.

"-" (hyphen)

The Remote Support is not operating.

Operating

The Remote Support is operating.

Maintenance in Progress

The ETERNUS DX/AF is under maintenance. When the operation to complete maintenance is performed, the status returns to "Operating".

Stopped

The Remote Support has temporarily been stopped. Use the procedure in

"Stop/Restart Remote Support"

(page 218)

to restart the Remote Support and return to the "Operating" state.

If the support status is "Operating" or "Maintenance in Progress", one of the messages below appears in parentheses based on the Remote Support operating status.

Controller Firmware Download in Progress

Termination of Controller Firmware Download in Progress

Controller Firmware Upgrade in Progress

Log Collection in Progress

• Controller Firmware Version

The current controller firmware version is displayed.

VxxLyy-zzzz (Vxx: Version, Lyy: Level, zzzz: Release number)

• Automatic Firmware Upgrade

Whether the automatic firmware upgrade is enabled or disabled is displayed. This item is not displayed in a

Unified Storage environment.

"-" (hyphen)

The Remote Support is not operating.

Enable Download schedule

The automatic firmware upgrade is enabled. Receive controller firmware according to the download schedule.

Disable

The automatic firmware upgrade is disabled.

• Automatic Firmware upgrade (with activation on next power cycle)

Whether or not to execute the controller firmware application, after controller firmware download has been completed, is displayed. This item is not displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

"-" (hyphen)

The Remote Support is not operating.

Enable

Execute the controller firmware application after controller firmware download is complete. The downloaded controller firmware will be changed to the controller firmware which will be enabled at the next startup.

Disable

Do not execute the controller firmware application after controller firmware download is complete.

• Automatic Log Transmission

Whether the automatic log transmission is enabled or disabled when an error occurs is displayed.

"-" (hyphen)

The Remote Support is not operating.

Enable

The automatic log transmission is enabled. The internal log of the ETERNUS DX/AF is automatically sent to the REMCS center when an error occurs.

Disable

The automatic log transmission is disabled.

669

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Remote Support

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Periodic Log Transmission

Whether the periodical log transmission is enabled or disabled is displayed.

"-" (hyphen)

The Remote Support is not operating.

Enable Transmission schedule

The periodical log transmission is enabled. The internal log of the ETERNUS DX/AF is automatically sent to the REMCS center according to the transmission schedule.

Disable

The periodical log transmission is disabled.

■ Event Information

In this screen, ten latest pieces of event information are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Date

The date and time when the Remote Support events occurred, are displayed.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Event

The Remote Support event is displayed.

AIS Connect

This function displays the setting information for AIS Connect.

The AIS Connect function can be used to monitor or control multiple ETERNUS DX/AF storage systems from a remote server (AIS Connect server).

REMCS and AIS Connect cannot be used at the same time. AIS Connect can be specified or restarted when REMCS is disabled. When REMCS is used, suspend the REMCS function, and then enable the AIS Connect function. Refer to

"Stop/Restart Remote Support" (page 218) for details.

Use ETERNUS CLI to set "Service Contract Responsibility (Country Code : Country Name)". Note that the "Maintenance Operation" policy is required to set this item.

670

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Remote Support

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● AIS Connect Environment

• AIS Connect

Whether the AIS Connect function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

When "Country of Installation (Country Code : Country Name)" has been set, the [Open remote service conditions] link is displayed. Click this item to display the consent form regarding the handling of personal information.

• Country of Installation (Country Code : Country Name)

The shipment destination (storage system location) is displayed in "Country Code : Country Name" format.

If not specified, "Not Selected" is displayed.

• Service Contract Responsibility (Country Code : Country Name)

The country in which the support office for the ETERNUS DX/AF is located is displayed in "Country Code : Country

Name" format.

This item is not displayed when "Service Contract Responsibility (Country Code : Country Name)" is not specified from ETERNUS CLI.

• Use LAN Port

The LAN port that is used for communication with the AIS Connect server is displayed.

MNT

RMT

• SSL Server Certification

Whether the SSL server certification is used (Use) or not (Not Use) is displayed.

• Automatic Log Transmission

Whether the automatic log transmission is enabled or disabled when an error occurs is displayed.

When "Automatic Log Transmission" is enabled, the ETERNUS DX/AF automatically sends logs to the AIS Connect server when a fail event (error level or warning level) occurs.

671

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Remote Support

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Proxy Server

The IPv4 address or the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the proxy server is displayed. If the proxy server is not specified, the field is blank.

IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 (decimal)

FQDN

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Port No.

The port number for the proxy server is displayed. If the proxy server is not specified, the field is blank.

• Connection Type

The communication method for the proxy server is displayed. If the proxy server is not specified, the field is blank.

HTTP

SOCKS

• User Name

The user name for proxy server authentication is displayed. If the proxy server is not specified, the field is blank.

● Remote Session Permission

• Remote Session

Whether to permit or forbid a remote session from the AIS Connect server is displayed.

• Session Timeout

The timeout value for a remote session connection is displayed. If the timeout limit is not specified, "Unlimited" is displayed.

If the time exceeds the specified value without a remote session connection, remote session permission is disabled and the set state changes to "Forbid".

Root Certificate

This function displays the root certificate that is used for SSL communication with the AIS Connect server.

If multiple certificates are included in the root certificate file, up to 6 issuer names and their validity periods are displayed.

• The root certificate that is registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed by default. When the root certificate is updated, only the latest certificate is displayed. For details on how to update the root certificate, refer to

"Import Root Certificate" (page 225) .

• The root certificate is only used for authentication with the AIS Connect server.

672

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Remote Support

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Trusted Root Certification Authorities

• Issuer Name

The issuer name for the root certificate is displayed.

• Valid From

The start date and time of the root certificate validity period is displayed.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Valid To

The end date and time of the root certificate validity period is displayed.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

673

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Key Management

This function displays the setting parameters for the key server.

In this section, the SED authentication key is referred to as "key".

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Key Management Machine Name

• Key Management Machine Name

The name of the device that is connected to the key server is displayed. If the key management device name is not specified, the field is blank.

● Key Server

• Server ID

The key server ID is displayed.

• Domain Name / IP Address

The domain name (Fully Qualified Domain Name: FQDN) or the IP address for the key server is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation" (page 854) for

details.

• Port No.

The port number that is used to communicate with the key server is displayed.

• LAN Port

The LAN port that is used to communicate with the key server is displayed.

MNT

RMT

674

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Key Group

This function displays the key information that is used for a key group and the SSL/Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) certificate information.

The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same key.

The RAID groups that are registered in the key group can be checked by using the [SED Key Group] screen. Refer to

"SED Key Group" (page 908) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Key Group

• Name

The key group name is displayed. If no key groups are created, the field is blank.

The key group name corresponds to "Serial Number", which is managed in the key server.

• Storage System Group Name

The storage system group name is displayed. If no key groups are created, the field is blank.

The storage system group combines the key management device (Key Management Machine) name that is managed by the user with the key group. The storage system group name corresponds to "Device Group Name", which is managed in the key server. Note that "ETERNUS_DX" is specified as the factory default storage system group name when "ETERNUS SF KM" (key management software) is shipped.

• Key Status

The key status is displayed. If no key groups are created, the field is blank.

Refer to "Key Status" (page 1417)

for details.

675

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Security Level

The security level for the key group is displayed. If no key groups are created, the field is blank.

"Security Level" indicates the handling level when application of the SED key to the target RAID group fails. If the key for the relevant RAID group cannot be obtained from the key server due to a communication error and the SEDs that configure the RAID group are changed to hot spares or changed to new SEDs due to failure or maintenance, the ETERNUS DX/AF performs operations according to the selected security level.

High

Rebuilding to hot spares for which the key cannot be changed after SED failure is not performed. The RAID group loses its redundancy (" Exposed", " Partially Exposed" (only for High Reliability (RAID6)), "

Exposed (Fast)" (only for High Reliability (RAID6-FR)), or " Partially Exposed (Fast)" (only for High Reliability (RAID6-FR))).

When SED maintenance is being performed, replacing an SED with a new SED for which the key cannot be changed does not complete successfully. If this action is performed, the status of the new SED changes to

" Not Exist".

When communication between the key server and the ETERNUS DX/AF returns to normal and the key can be obtained, the SED status changes to normal. Rebuilding to the SED for which the status changed to normal is performed after the key is changed. Note that "Modifying" may be displayed for the key status for few minutes even though the SED key has already changed. After changing the key, maintenance of the SEDs is complete.

Low

Rebuilding or maintenance is performed by using the common key if changing of the key in the key server fails due to a network error.

Even if the security level is changed from "High" to "Low", the rebuilding process does not start immediately after the level is changed. Rebuilding processes start after the ETERNUS DX/AF recognizes that changing of the security level and the key is complete.

• Recovery Mode

The recovery mode for the key group is displayed. If no key groups are created, the field is blank.

The recovery mode is a method to recover locked (*1) RAID groups or SEDs after communication with the key server is resolved. For RAID groups in locked status, " SED Locked" is displayed. For SEDs in locked status, "

Not Exist" is displayed.

*1: A blocked status that occurs when the key of the RAID groups cannot be obtained.

Automatic

This mode recovers locked RAID groups or SEDs when the communication error with the key server is resolved.

Manual

Use the [Recovery SED] function of ETERNUS Web GUI to recover the locked RAID groups or SEDs when the communication error with the key server is resolved.

• Key Expiration Date

The following information is displayed depending on the key status.

When the status is "Modifying", the expiration date before the key was replaced is displayed.

When the status is "Unregistered Server Certificate", "Expired Server Certificate", "No SSL Certificate", "Network Error", "Not Acquired", or "Key Server Error", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

For the other statuses, the key expiration date is displayed.

• YYYY-MM-DD (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31))

If no key groups are created, the field is blank.

When the key has expired, a new key is obtained from the key server and automatically applied in place of the expired key.

676

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Key Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Master Server

Server ID

The key server ID for the master server is displayed. If no key group is created or if no master server is specified, the field is blank.

Domain Name / IP Address

The domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the master server is displayed. If no key groups are created or if no master server is specified, the field is blank.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 854)

for details.

Status

The master server status is displayed. If no key group is created or if no master server is specified, the field is

blank. Refer to "Key Server Status" (page 1417)

for details.

• Slave Server

Server ID

The key server ID of the slave server is displayed. If no key group is created or if no slave server is specified, the field is blank.

Domain Name / IP Address

The domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the slave server is displayed. If no key group is created or if no slave server is specified, the field is blank.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 854)

for details.

Status

The slave server status is displayed. If no key group is created or if no slave server is specified, the field is

blank. Refer to "Key Server Status" (page 1417)

for details.

● SSL / KMIP Certificate

• Issuer Name

The certificate authority name that issues the SSL / KMIP certificate is displayed. If the certificate is not imported, the field is blank.

• Subject Name

The name of the destination to which the SSL / KMIP certificate is issued is displayed. If the certificate is not imported, the field is blank.

• Valid From

The start date and time of the SSL / KMIP certificate validity period is displayed. If the certificate is not imported, the field is blank.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Valid To

The end date and time of the SSL / KMIP certificate validity period is displayed. If the certificate is not imported, the field is blank.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Serial Number

The serial number for the SSL / KMIP certificate is displayed. If the certificate is not imported, the field is blank.

When created, the serial number is combined with the issuer name, which is a unique number in the certificate authority.

677

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Define Role

The registered custom roles in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

A custom role is a role created by the user in combination of policies, in addition to the default roles.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Role

The custom role name is displayed.

678

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Eco-mode

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Eco-mode

A list of the Eco-mode setting state and the Eco-mode schedule that is registered in the ETERNUS DX are displayed.

The Eco-mode function schedules the drive operating time in compliance with Massive Arrays of Idle Disks (MAID).

This function saves power by stopping the drive motors or turning off the drives power outside of the scheduled operating time period.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Eco-mode General Settings

• Eco-mode

The Eco-mode setting (enabled or disabled) for all of the ETERNUS DX storage systems is displayed.

● Eco-mode Schedule

• No.

The Eco-mode schedule number is displayed.

By clicking this link,

"Eco-mode Schedule Detail" (page 680) is displayed.

If the Eco-mode is controlled with the Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Schedule Name

The Eco-mode schedule name is displayed.

If the Eco-mode is controlled with Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, "External" is displayed.

• Events

The number of events that are registered in the Eco-mode schedule is displayed.

If the Eco-mode is controlled with the Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• RAID Group

The number of RAID groups for which the Eco-mode schedule is allocated to is displayed.

• Thin Provisioning Pool

The number of Thin Provisioning Pools for which the Eco-mode schedule is allocated to is displayed.

679

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Eco-mode

Eco-mode Schedule Detail

In this screen, the detailed information of an Eco-mode schedule is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Schedule

• No.

The Eco-mode schedule number is displayed.

• Schedule Name

The Eco-mode schedule name is displayed.

● Event List

• Event

The detailed event information is displayed.

• From Time

The time at which the event application is started is displayed.

hh:mm (hh: Hour, mm: Minute)

• To Time

The time at which the event application is stopped is displayed.

hh:mm (hh: Hour, mm: Minute)

680

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Event/Dump

This function records and displays the event history of the ETERNUS DX/AF as an event log.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

681

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Audit Log

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Audit Log

This function displays the audit log information.

An audit log records not only operations that are performed by a user, but also how the ETERNUS DX/AF operates for these operations. The audit log function that is provided with the ETERNUS DX/AF transfers the following information to external servers; when an operation is performed, who performed the operation, where the operation was performed, the details of the operation, and the results of the operation.

When the [Enable Audit Log] function is executed, "Enable" is displayed for "Audit Log" in the "Audit Log Information" field even if an external server is not specified. Specify the external server to which the audit log is sent.

Refer to "Setup Audit Log" (page 179)

for details.

Except for the functions that are listed below, the audit log collects all of the information for operations (including logging in and logging out) that are performed via ETERNUS Web GUI and ETERNUS CLI (including when the interface is "SOFT" (*1)).

• Export Cache Parameters

• Export Performance Information

• Send SNMP Trap Test

• Create Key/CSR

• Download Template File for Storage Migration Settings

• Backup Configuration

• Get G-List (*2)

• All of the display functions (e.g. displaying the volume list or displaying of the RAID group list)

*1: Refer to

"System (Basic Information)" (page 657)

for details.

*2: Operations that can be performed when logged in using a user account with the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Audit Log

Whether the audit log function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

682

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Firmware Maintenance

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Firmware Maintenance

This function performs the maintenance operation for the firmware that is managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Firmware maintenance is performed to update the firmware version. The firmware can be applied after being registered in the BUD of the CM.

• When the application schedule for the controller firmware is being reserved, the following occurs.

The warning message ""Apply Controller Firmware" is scheduled." is displayed.

The [Apply Controller Firmware] function is automatically started at the date and time that are displayed in the information field according to the application mode that is used. When the application mode is

"Update & Reboot", the ETERNUS DX/AF is automatically rebooted after the controller firmware is applied.

[Apply Firmware] is not displayed in [Action].

• If an application schedule for the controller firmware is not reserved, the [Delete Firmware Schedule] function is not displayed in [Action].

• If the message which indicates that the controller firmware application has been reserved disappears before the reserved date, the reservation may be canceled automatically. In this case, reserve the application schedule for the controller firmware again. Refer to

"Apply Controller Firmware" (page 227) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Current Firmware Version

The current controller firmware version is displayed.

VxxLyy-zzzz (Vxx: Version, Lyy: Level, zzzz: Release number)

• Firmware Version after Restart

The controller firmware version after the next power on is displayed.

VxxLyy-zzzz (Vxx: Version, Lyy: Level, zzzz: Release number)

683

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Storage Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Storage Migration

This function displays the setting and progress of Storage Migration.

• When performing a Storage Migration, confirm that there is no access from the host to the migration source volume.

• The requirements for access from the host to the destination volumes vary depending on the operation mode.

For "Migration & Host IO", Storage Migration can be performed even if host access exists in the migration destination volume after a migration is started.

For "Migration", "Migration + Quick Compare", or "Quick Compare", perform a Storage Migration without access from the host to the destination volume.

For "Migration + Full Compare" or "Full Compare", perform a Storage Migration without access from the host to any volume in the destination storage system.

• The path groups must be deleted after the data migration is complete. If the operation mode is "Migration &

Host IO", the ETERNUS DX/AF is in one of the following conditions until the path groups are deleted.

The host I/O response is reduced.

If the migration path is blocked, the host I/O may stop.

• Do not perform the following operations when there are Storage Migration paths (hereinafter referred to as

"path group") established.

Configuration of an Advanced Copy destination to the migration destination volume

Configuration of an Advanced Copy destination to the migration source volume

Formatting of the destination volume

RAID diagnosis in the RAID group to which the destination volume belongs

Disk diagnosis of the disk drives in the RAID group to which the destination volume belongs

CM hot expansion on the destination storage system

Memory hot expansion on the destination storage system

• The path groups must be deleted after the data migration is complete. The following operations are not available before path groups are deleted:

Hot controller firmware upgrade is being performed in the destination storage system

Eco-mode schedule setting of the RAID group to which the destination volume belongs

Eco-mode schedule setting of the TPP to which the destination volume belongs

Capacity expansion of the RAID group to which the destination volume belongs

RAID migration of the destination volume

Encryption of the destination volume

Capacity expansion of the destination volume

Deletion of the destination volume

Port mode modification of the destination FC-Initiator port

Port parameter setting of the destination FC-Initiator port

Reduction of the CA to which the destination FC-Initiator port belongs

•

To start Storage Migration, refer to "Start Storage Migration" (page 192) .

• A started Storage Migration can be suspended, stopped, and restarted in volume units on the [Path Group

Detail Information] screen. Refer to

"Suspend Storage Migration" (page 200) ,

"Stop Storage Migration" (page

201)

, or

"Restart Storage Migration" (page 199)

for details.

684

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Storage Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Path Group

The path group number is displayed. Click this item to display

"Path Group Detail Information" (page 686)

A path group combines the paths for data migration into a group for each source storage system. The paths from a single source storage system to the local (destination) storage system constitute a path group.

• Vendor ID

The manufacturer name of the source storage system to which the path is created is displayed.

An inconvertible code is displayed as "*".

• Product ID

The product name of the source storage system to which the path is created is displayed.

An inconvertible code is displayed as "*".

• Serial Number

The serial number of the source storage system to which the path is established is displayed.

An inconvertible code is displayed as "*".

• Progress

The progress of Storage Migration for the path group is displayed.

• Status

The general status of Storage Migration for the path group is displayed.

Complete

All Storage Migration operations have completed normally.

Error

There are one or more LUNs that do not exist in the migration source volume, or there are one or more volumes for which Storage Migration failed due to error (displayed in red characters).

Stop

Storage Migration has been stopped or suspended for one or more volumes (all other volumes have completed Storage Migration normally), or Storage Migration of all the volumes has been stopped or suspended.

685

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Storage Migration

Normal

Other than above.

The status display priority order is " Error" > " Normal" > " Stop" > " Complete".

Path Group Detail Information

In this screen, the detailed information of a path group is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Items displayed in this screen vary depending on whether the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen or the [Start Storage Migration] screen. When the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen, the progress of

Storage Migration is checked. When the previous screen is the [Start Storage Migration] screen, the start status of

Storage Migration is checked.

● Storage Migration Path Information

• Path Group

The path group number is displayed.

• Vendor ID

The manufacturer name of the source storage system to which the path is created is displayed.

An inconvertible code is displayed as "*".

• Product ID

The product name of the source storage system to which the path is created is displayed.

An inconvertible code is displayed as "*".

• Serial Number

The serial number of the source storage system to which the path is established is displayed.

An inconvertible code is displayed as "*".

• Operation Mode

The operation mode for the path group is displayed.

When the operation mode setting is omitted, "Migration" is displayed.

Migration

Data migration from the source storage system to the destination storage system is performed.

686

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Storage Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Migration + Quick Compare

Data migration from the source storage system to the destination storage system and a data comparison of source LUNs and destination volumes are performed. "Quick Compare" compares data in a part of the volume area. "Migration + Quick Compare" consecutively executes "data migration" and "data comparison" for each volume.

Migration + Full Compare

Data migration from the source storage system to the destination storage system and a data comparison of source LUNs and destination volumes are performed. "Full Compare" compares data in entire volume area.

"Migration + Full Compare" consecutively executes "data migration" and "data comparison" for each volume.

Quick Compare

A data comparison of source LUNs and destination volumes is performed. "Quick Compare" compares data in a part of the volume area.

Full Compare

A data comparison of source LUNs and destination volumes is performed. "Full Compare" compares data.

Migration & Host IO

Data migration from the source storage system to the destination storage system is performed. Stop the operation only when switching the host connection to the migration destination storage system. This enables continued host access to the migration destination volume during the data migration.

• Status

The general status of Storage Migration for the path group is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen.

Complete

Error

Stop

Normal

• Progress

The progress of Storage Migration for the path group is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen.

● Migration Connection Path

• Source WWN

The WWN for the source FC-CA port is displayed.

• CA Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the destination FC-Initiator is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

● Storage Migration Volume List

• Source LUN

The source LUN is displayed in decimal number.

Source LUNs are displayed with decimal numbers if the source LUNs are specified with decimal numbers when

Storage Migration setting files are created. Source LUNs are also displayed with decimal numbers if the source

LUNs satisfy the conditions for being specified with decimal numbers. If the source LUNs do not satisfy the conditions for being specified with decimal numbers, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. Refer to

"Download Template File for Storage Migration Settings" (page 197) for details.

• Source LUN (Hex)

The source LUN is displayed in hexadecimal number.

687

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Storage Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Source LUN Status

The status of the source LUN is displayed.

Available

The source LUN can be used

Not Available

The source LUN cannot be used

Not Exist

The source LUN does not exist

• Destination Volume No.

The destination volume number is displayed in decimal number.

• Destination Volume No (Hex)

The destination volume number is displayed in hexadecimal number.

• Destination Volume Name

The destination volume name is displayed.

• Capacity

The destination volume capacity is displayed.

• Migration Status

The data migration status is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen.

Initial

Initial state

Waiting

Awaiting migration

Running

Migrating

Normal End

Normally completed

Suspend

In suspension

Stop

Stopped

Error (xxx)

(xxx) indicates the error factor.

"-" (hyphen)

Does not exist in the source LUN (the LUN status is "Not Exist").

If "Waiting" is displayed, the data migration does not start automatically. Restart the data migration manually.

• Progress

The data transfer progress is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen.

• Start Time

• End Time

The start and end times of data migration are displayed.

This item is displayed only when the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

688

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Storage Migration

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The start and end times are displayed as shown below depending on the migration status.

Migration status

Initial

Waiting

Running

Normal End

Suspend

Stop

Error (xxx)

Start time

The start time is not displayed.

The migration start time is displayed.

Blank

End time

The migration end time is displayed.

The time when migration suspends is displayed.

The time when migration stops is displayed.

The time when migration stops due to error is displayed.

• When Storage Migration is restarted when its migration status is "Suspend" or "Error", data migration restarts from the point of suspension. In this case, the start time is not changed.

• When Storage Migration is restarted when its migration status is "Stop", data migration of the LUN is started over from scratch. The start time is changed to the migration restart time.

• Error Location

The storage system in which a data migration error occurs is displayed.

If no error is occurred, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the previous screen is the [Storage Migration] screen.

Source

Migration source storage system

Destination

Local (migration destination) storage system

• Result

When the source LUN and destination volume are in normal status, the "Result" field is blank.

An error message is displayed when an error is detected in the source LUN or destination volume.

This item is displayed only when the previous screen is the [Start Storage Migration] screen.

689

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

External Drives

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External Drives

This function displays the External Drive list.

This function is displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

Creating an External Drive is required in advance. Refer to

"Create External Drive" (page 203)

for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The External Drive number is displayed. The External Drive number is allocated when an External Drive is created from the smallest unused decimal number in ascending order. Click this item to display

"External Drives

Detail" (page 691)

• Status

The External Drive status is displayed. When the status is normal, " Available" or " Available" is displayed.

Refer to "External Drive Status" (page 1416)

for details.

• Usage

The usage of the External Drive is displayed.

Migration

An External Drive that is used for data migrations.

• External LU Information

Whether the External Drive inherits the "External LU Information" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is inherited, "Inherited" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is not inherited, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Capacity

The capacity of the External Drive is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the external storage system is displayed.

• UID

The identifier (storage system name) that identifies the External Drive from the host is displayed.

• Vendor ID

The manufacturer name of the external storage system is displayed.

690

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

External Drives

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Product ID

The product name of the external storage system is displayed.

• LUN Addressing

The format type of the LUN Addressing that is set for the External Drive is displayed.

If LUN Addressing is not "PRHL" (Peripheral device addressing) or "FLAT" (Flat space addressing), a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

PRHL

FLAT

• LUN

The volume number (host LUN) of the External Drive is displayed.

If the LUN Addressing is "PRHL" or "FLAT"

0 - 4095 (decimal)

For the other conditions

Volume number (16-digit hexadecimal)

Filter setting

Status

Capacity

Filter Description

Select the External Drive status that is to be displayed.

Input the capacity of the External Drives that are to be displayed and select the units of capacity.

If the capacity of the External Drive is not used for filtering, leave this item blank or specify "0".

External Drives Detail

Click the [No.] link in the

"External Drives" (page 690) to display the detailed information of the target External

Drive.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The External Drive status is displayed. Refer to

"External Drive Status" (page 1416) for details.

When the status is normal, " Available" or " Available" is displayed.

• Usage

The usage of the External Drive is displayed.

691

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

External Drives

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• External LU Information

Whether the External Drive inherits the "External LU Information" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is inherited, "Inherited" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is not inherited, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Capacity

The capacity of the External Drive is displayed.

In addition, the capacity is displayed in "bytes" within parentheses.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the external storage system is displayed.

• UID

The identifier (storage system name) that identifies the External Drive from the host is displayed.

• Vendor ID

The manufacturer name of the external storage system is displayed.

• Product ID

The product name of the external storage system is displayed.

• LUN Addressing

The format type of the LUN Addressing that is set for the External Drive is displayed.

If LUN Addressing is not "PRHL" or "FLAT", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

PRHL

FLAT

• LUN

The volume number (host LUN) of the External Drive is displayed.

• Connection Path

Target WWN : Initiator Port

The connection path information between the external storage system and the local storage system is separated with a ":" (colon) and displayed in the "xx : yy" format.

For "xx", the WWN for the FC port in the external storage system is displayed. For "yy", the location information of the FC-Initiator port in the local storage system (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

If storage systems are connected with multiple paths, multiple connection path information is displayed.

692

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

Utility

Descriptions on the actions that can be started from the [Utility] screen are displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

693

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

System Settings

This function displays the system setting information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage System Name

The name for the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Date

The date and time when the event occurs are displayed.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Box ID

The Box ID is displayed.

Box ID is the information to be used for application software to define the remote storage system. The initial

Box ID is a device ID that is created by combining device information (series name, model, serial number, etc.).

• Encryption Mode

The encryption mode setting is displayed.

For controller firmware versions "V10L50-3000", "V10L52-3000", and "V10L53" and later

• Fujitsu Original Encryption

• AES-128

• AES-256

• Disable

For controller firmware versions other than the above

• Fujitsu Original Encryption

• AES

• Disable

• SMI-S

The current SMI-S setting is displayed.

If the SMI-S stops due to an error, "Error" is displayed for this item. In this case, the SMI-S functions are not available. Contact your maintenance engineer.

Enable

Disable

Error

694

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

8. System Status

System Settings

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When enabling or disabling of the SMI-S is being performed, the [Setup SMI-S Environment] action cannot be clicked.

• SMI-S Performance Information

The setting status for the SMI-S performance information response is displayed.

If the SMI-S stops due to an error, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed for this item.

Enable

Disable

• SED Authentication Key

Whether the SED authentication key has been "Registered" or "Not Registered" is displayed.

• Disk Drive Patrol

Whether the Disk Drive Patrol function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

• Extreme Cache Mode

The selected EXC mode is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, the ETERNUS AF250/AF650, and the ETERNUS DX200F, this item is not displayed.

Extreme Cache

Extreme Cache Pool

Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)

Not Used

• Extreme Cache Memory Size

The specified capacity (GB) of the EXC is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the Extreme Cache mode is "Not Used".

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, the ETERNUS AF250/AF650, and the ETERNUS DX200F, this item is not displayed.

The following Extreme Cache memory size is displayed according to the Extreme Cache mode.

Model

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4

ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

N/A

Extreme Cache (EXC)

Extreme Cache Mode

Extreme Cache Pool (EXCP) or

Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded) (*1)

The specified EXC memory size in the ETERNUS DX

The total value of the EXCP memory size for each CM

The total value of the EXC memory size for each CM

*1: The target of "Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)" is the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4.

695

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

9. Component Status

Component status displays the status information of volumes.

Component status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Category

Storage system name

Controller Enclosure

Controller Module

Performance

Error Statistics

Channel Adapter

Performance

Battery (BBU)

PCIe Flash Module

Performance

Bootup and Utility Device

Power Supply Unit

Battery (BTU/BCU)

Frontend Enclosure

Frontend Router

Service Controller

FE Power Supply Unit

FAN Unit

Operation Panel

Drive Enclosure

I/O Module

Error Statistics

Power Supply Unit

Fan Expander Module

Drives

Performance

Error Statistics

Component status screen

Storage (Basic Information)

Controller Enclosure

Controller Module

Performance (CM)

Port Error Statistics (for the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETER-

NUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F)

Performance (PCIe Flash Module)

Bootup and Utility Device

Power Supply Unit (CE)

Power Supply Unit (FE)

Port Error Statistics

Power Supply Unit (DE)

Fan Expander Module

Drives

Performance (Drive)

Drive Error Statistics

Detailed information of the components can be displayed from the following screens:

•

Controller Enclosure Detail

•

Controller Module Detail

•

Channel Adapter Detail

•

PCIe Flash Module Detail

•

PSU/CPSU (CE) Detail

•

Frontend Router Detail

•

Service Controller Detail

•

FE Power Supply Unit Detail

•

FAN Unit Detail

•

Drive Enclosure Detail

696

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

•

I/O Module Detail

•

Power Supply Unit (DE) Detail

•

Fan Expander Module Detail

•

Drive Detail

•

Bootup and Utility Device Detail

•

SAS Cable Detail

•

Frontend Cable Detail

•

Management Cable Detail

•

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

697

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Storage (Basic Information)

The general information for the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

■ Summary

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage System Name

The name of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Model Name

The model name of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Device Identification Number

The identification number of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

698

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Storage (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Status

The general status of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. Refer to

"Storage System General Status (Detail)" (page

1411) for details.

• Battery

The battery charge level is displayed.

When the battery charge level is 90% or more, "Full Charge" is displayed. When the battery charge level is less than 90%, "xx%" is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the lowest battery charge level among all CEs is displayed. Click this item to display the [Controller Enclosure] screen. Refer to

"Controller Enclosure" (page 703) for details.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS

DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

• Operation Mode

The operation mode is displayed.

Normal

The ETERNUS DX/AF is operating.

Maintenance Mode

The ETERNUS DX/AF is under maintenance.

• Model Upgrade

Whether the model upgrade is possible or not is displayed. When this item is not displayed, the model upgrade is not possible.

Not Upgraded

A model upgrade has not been performed yet.

Upgraded

A model upgrade has been performed.

■ View

● For the ETERNUS DX60 S4 or the ETERNUS DX60 S3

699

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Storage (Basic Information)

● For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 (DE#00 - DE#17), the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3 (DE#00 - DE#17), the ETERNUS DX8100 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, or the ETERNUS AF650

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 (DE#00 - DE#1A) or the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3 (DE#00 - DE#1A)

700

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Storage (Basic Information)

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 (CE/FE)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 (DE#xx)

● For the ETERNUS AF250 S2 or the ETERNUS AF250

701

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Storage (Basic Information)

● For the ETERNUS DX200F

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the enclosures that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. The enclosure statuses are displayed with icons. Refer to

Enclosure Detail" (page 734) .

For the ETERNUS DX/AF other than the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, click the [CE] link to display

"Controller

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, and the ETERNUS

DX8100 S3, click the [DE] link to display "Drive Enclosure Detail" (page 762)

For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETER-

NUS AF650, specify the range for the DEs and then click a DE to display

"Drive Enclosure Detail" (page 762) .

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the [CE/FE] button and the [DE#xx] button are displayed.

By clicking the [CE/FE] button, the CE#x (x: CE number) and the [FE] screen is displayed. By clicking the CE#x,

"Controller Enclosure Detail" (page 734) is displayed. By clicking the FE,

"Frontend Enclosure" (page 720)

is displayed.

By clicking the [DE#xx] button, the DEs in the relevant range are displayed. By clicking the DE#xx,

"Drive

Enclosure Detail" (page 762) is displayed.

702

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Controller Enclosure

The CE information is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

For the ETERNUS DX/AF other than the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, clicking "Controller Enclosure" in the cate-

gory displays "Controller Enclosure Detail" (page 734) .

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed. By clicking this item,

The CE status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

is displayed.

• Status

• Charge Rate

The battery charge level for CE is displayed.

When the battery charge level is 90% or more, "Full Charge" is displayed. When the battery charge level is less than 90%, "xx%" is displayed.

• Cache Mode

The current status and the factor of the cache are displayed. The normal status is "Write Back Mode".

Refer to "Cache Mode" (page 29)

in "Overview"

for details.

Write Back Mode

Write Through (Pinned Data)

Write Through (Battery)

Write Through (Maintenance)

Write Through (1CM)

703

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

Controller Module

The CM information is displayed.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed. By clicking this item,

The CM number is displayed. By clicking this item, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• CM

• Status

The CM status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for details.

704

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Performance (CM)

The CM performance information is displayed.

• Performance information is obtained when performance monitoring is operated from ETERNUS Web GUI,

ETERNUS CLI, or any other monitoring software. Refer to "Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 101)

for details on how to start performance monitoring with ETERNUS Web GUI.

• The interval for acquiring performance information can be specified when starting the monitoring. When using ETERNUS Web GUI, the default interval is 30 seconds.

• The average performance values during the specified interval are displayed.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

■ For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• CM

The CM number is displayed.

705

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Busy Rate

The CPU busy rate is displayed.

• Copy Remainder Count

The remaining capacity of the copy session is displayed.

"Copy Remainder Count" is displayed for each Controlling CM in the RAID group to which the copy source volume belongs.

Port Error Statistics (for the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F)

The total number of errors for ports is displayed.

An increasing number of errors in the information is used to notify early replacement for warning status components. This can also be used as analysis information when performance is reduced.

• This function is available for the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F. For the

other models, refer to "Port Error Statistics" (page 727)

• Errors that occur in the SAS transmission line are detected in CM and recovered by retries. Note that detecting an error is not an immediate cause of data failure.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

Controller Enclosure that has ports is displayed.

• Expander

The chip installation location that is targeted by the port error detection is displayed.

• Port No.

The port number that is targeted by the port error detection is displayed.

• Phy No.

The Phy number of the port that is targeted by the port error detection is displayed.

• Status

The Phy status is displayed.

Link Up

Link Down

N/A

706

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

• Invalid Dword

The number of Invalid Dword occurrences is displayed.

Refer to "Invalid Dword" (page 728) in

"Port Error Statistics" .

• Disparity Error

The number of Disparity Error occurrences is displayed.

Refer to "Disparity Error" (page 728)

in "Port Error Statistics"

• Loss of Dword Synchronization

The number of Loss of Dword Synchronization occurrences is displayed.

Refer to "Loss of Dword Synchronization" (page 728) in

"Port Error Statistics" .

• Phy Reset Problem

The number of Phy Reset Problem occurrences is displayed.

Refer to "Phy Reset Problem" (page 728)

"Port Error Statistics"

Filter setting

Expander

Filter Description

Select the installation location of the chip that is to be displayed.

Channel Adapter

The information of all the CAs registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

707

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

■ For the other models

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed. By clicking this item,

The CM number is displayed. By clicking this item, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• CM

• CA

The CA number is displayed. By clicking this item,

"Channel Adapter Detail" (page 746)

• Type

The CA type is displayed.

The display items in this filed vary depending on the storage system model.

32G-FC 2port, 16G-FC 4port, 16G-FC 2port, 8G-FC 4port, 8G-FC 2port

10G-iSCSI 2port, 10G Base-T iSCSI 2port, 1G-iSCSI 2port

12G-SAS 2port, 6G-SAS 2port

10G-FCoE 2port

10G-NAS 2port, 1G-NAS 4port

Note that a 1-port type CA for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4 and the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3 is displayed as "2port" (for 8G-FC, "8G-FC 2port" is displayed). Similarly, a 2-port type CA (1G-NAS) is displayed as

"1G-NAS 4port". Available ports can be checked in the [Internal Parts] tab of the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen. The [Add Channel Adapter Port] function is displayed in the action field only when a 1-port type CA or a 2-port type CA is installed in the ETERNUS DX. Refer to

for details. Note that 1-port type CAs and 2-port type CAs are not available in some regions.

• Status

The CA status is displayed. Refer to

"Performance (CM)" (page 705) for the acquisition requirements and specifications of the perfor-

for details.

708

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Performance (CA)

The CA port performance information is displayed.

Refer to "Note" in

mance information.

When the port mode is "Initiator", the CA port performance is not displayed.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

■ For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• CM

The CM number is displayed.

• CA

The CA number is displayed.

709

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Port

The port number is displayed.

• Port Mode

The port mode is displayed.

CA/RA

• Read IOPS

The number of reads per second is displayed.

• Write IOPS

The number of writes per second is displayed.

• Read Throughput

The amount of data that is read per second is displayed.

• Write Throughput

The amount of data that is written per second is displayed.

Login Host

This function displays the hosts that are currently logged in to the port.

Display target ports are FC ports, iSCSI ports, SAS ports, and FCoE ports.

• This function does not display CA ports where no hosts are logged in.

• If all of the following conditions are satisfied, the information of the remote storage system for REC is displayed as a host that is logged in to the RA port.

The Advanced Copy license has been registered

An REC path has been configured between the local and remote storage systems

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed only for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

710

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• CM

The CM number is displayed.

• CA

The CA number is displayed.

• Port

The port number is displayed.

• Type

The port type is displayed.

iSCSI

SAS

FCoE

• Port Mode

The port mode of the port is displayed.

If the port mode is "CA/RA" and the port is used as a CA port, "CA/RA (CA)" is displayed.

If the port mode is "CA/RA" and the port is used as an RA port, "CA/RA (RA)" is displayed.

• Login Host

The information of the host that is currently logged in to the port is displayed in the WWN format (16-digit hexadecimal), "IP address [iSCSI name]" format, or SAS address format (16-digit hexadecimal).

If multiple hosts are logged in to a single port, the information of each host is displayed as follows.

FC iSCSI

SAS

FCoE

Type Port mode

CA/RA (CA)

CA/RA (RA)

CA/RA (CA)

CA/RA (RA)

Host information

WWN of the currently logged in host

WWN of the remote storage system for REC

IP address (*1) and iSCSI name of the currently logged in host

IP address (*1) and iSCSI name of the remote storage system for REC

SAS address of the currently logged in host

WWN of the currently logged in host

*1: IP addresses are displayed in the IPv4 or IPv6 format.

Filter setting

Enclosure

Port

Type

Port Mode

Filter Description

Select the enclosure of the port that is to be displayed.

This item is displayed only for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Select the CM number of the port that is to be displayed.

Specify the CA number of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the port number of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the type of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the port mode of the port that is to be displayed.

Input the host information of the host that is currently logged in to the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the login host for filtering, leave this item blank.

711

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

Battery (BBU)

This function displays the Battery Backup Unit (BBU) information.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS AF250 S2.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• BBU

The BBU number is displayed.

• Status

The BBU status is displayed. Refer to

"PCIe Flash Module Detail" (page 750)

• Status Code

The BBU status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The BBU error code is displayed.

• Charge Rate

The BBU charge level is displayed.

When the battery charge level is 90% or more, "Full Charge" is displayed. When the battery charge level is less than 90%, "xx%" is displayed.

• Expiration Date

The BBU expiration date is displayed.

712

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

PCIe Flash Module

This function displays the PFM information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If a PFM is not available for reading and writing, " Error" is displayed for the status. If this occurs, replace the

PFM. Note that PFMs can be replaced by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

• PFMs can be installed in the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, and the ETER-

NUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• If the PFM capacity in each CM for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 or the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3 does not match, the EXC memory size that can be used for the CM is reduced to the smallest capacity.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the PFM capacity in each CM is used as an EXC memory size.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

■ For the other models

713

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• PFM

The PFM number is displayed. Click this item to display

• Type

The PFM type is displayed

• Capacity

The PFM capacity is displayed.

• Status

The PFM status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Health

The lifetime information of the PFM is displayed.

100% - 6%

The PFM is available.

5% - 1%

" Warning" is displayed as the status.

The PFM is approaching its end of life.

" Error" is displayed as the status.

Reading from or writing to the PFM is not available.

Performance (PCIe Flash Module)

This screen displays the performance information of the PFM.

Refer to "Note" in

"Performance (CM)" (page 705) for the acquisition requirements and specifications of the perfor-

mance information.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

714

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

■ For the other models

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• PFM

The PFM number is displayed.

• Busy Rate

When performance monitoring has started, the busy rate of the PFM is displayed with a bar and a numerical number. If performance monitoring has stopped, "0%" is displayed for the busy rate.

Bootup and Utility Device

The BUD information is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

715

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• BUD

The BUD number is displayed. Click this item to display

"Bootup and Utility Device Detail" (page 776)

• Status

The BUD status is displayed. Refer to

for details.

• Status Code

The status code of BUD is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code of BUD is displayed.

Power Supply Unit (CE)

The Power Supply Unit (PSU) information for a CE is displayed.

■ For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

716

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

■ For the other models

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The enclosure where the PSU or the Controller Enclosure Power Supply Unit (CPSU) is installed is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the CE number is displayed.

• PSU

The PSU number is displayed. Click this item to display

"PSU/CPSU (CE) Detail" (page 752) .

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F.

• CPSU

The CPSU number is displayed. Click this item to display

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS

DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

• Status

The PSU status or the CPSU status is displayed. Refer to

The BTU status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

717

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Battery (BTU/BCU)

The information of the BTU and the BCU is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS

DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

● BTU

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Component

The BTU number is displayed.

Status

Status Code

The BTU status code is displayed.

Error Code

The BTU error code is displayed.

718

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Charge Rate

The BTU charge rate is displayed.

When the battery charge level is 90% or more, "Full Charge" is displayed. When the battery charge level is less than 90%, "xx%" is displayed.

Expiration Date

The expiration date for the BTU is displayed.

● BCU

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Enclosure

The CE number is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Component

The BCU number is displayed.

Status

The BCU status is displayed. Refer to

Status" (page 1415) for details.

for details.

Status Code

The BCU status code is displayed.

Error Code

The BCU error code is displayed.

719

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Enclosure

The FE information is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The installation location of the thermal sensor is displayed.

Intake Temp

Exhaust Temp

• Status

The thermal sensor status is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code of the thermal sensor is displayed.

• Sensor 1

For the "Intake Temp" field, temperature of the SVC#0 is displayed in Celsius (C) and in Fahrenheit (F).

If the thermal information is not available due to problem such as a sensor failure, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

For the "Exhaust Temp" field, a "-" (hyphen) is usually displayed.

• Sensor 2

For the "Intake Temp" field, temperature of the SVC#1 is displayed in Celsius (C) and in Fahrenheit (F).

If the thermal information is not available due to problem such as a sensor failure, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

For the "Exhaust Temp" field, a "-" (hyphen) is usually displayed.

720

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Enclosure

■ Front View

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the FE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

The Service Controller (SVC) status and the FAN Unit (FANU) status are indicated by icons. Refer to

"Component

By clicking the SVC number, "Service Controller Detail" (page 756)

is displayed.

By clicking the FANU number,

"FAN Unit Detail" (page 760)

is displayed.

• Parts

The SVC number and the FANU number are displayed.

By clicking the SVC number, "Service Controller Detail" (page 756)

is displayed.

By clicking the FANU number,

"FAN Unit Detail" (page 760)

is displayed.

• Status

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to

• Status Code

The status code of each component is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code of each component is displayed.

■ Rear View

721

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the FE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

The Frontend Router (FRT) status and the FE Power Supply Unit (FPSU) status are indicated by icons. Refer to

"Frontend Router Detail" (page 754) is displayed.

By clicking the FRT number,

By clicking the FPSU number, "FE Power Supply Unit Detail" (page 758) is displayed.

• Parts

The FRT number and the FPSU number are displayed.

By clicking the FRT number,

"Frontend Router Detail" (page 754) is displayed.

By clicking the FPSU number, "FE Power Supply Unit Detail" (page 758) is displayed.

• Status

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to

"Frontend Router Detail" (page 754)

• Status Code

The status code of each component is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code of each component is displayed.

Frontend Router

The FRT information is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The FRT number is displayed. Click this item to display

• Status

The FRT status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for details.

722

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Enclosure

Service Controller

The SVC information is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• SVC

The SVC number is displayed. Click this item to display

"Service Controller Detail" (page 756) .

• Status

The SVC status is displayed. Refer to

"FE Power Supply Unit Detail" (page 758) .

for details.

Power Supply Unit (FE)

The information of PSU for FE is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The enclosure where the FPSU is installed is displayed.

• FPSU

The FPSU number is displayed. Click this item to display

• Status

The FPSU status is displayed. Refer to

"FAN Unit Detail" (page 760) .

for details.

723

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Enclosure

FAN Unit

The FANU information is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• FANU

The FANU number is displayed. Click this item to display

• Status

The FANU status is displayed. Click this item to display

"Component Status" (page 1415) .

Operation Panel

The Operation Panel (OPNL) information is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

■ Summary

724

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Enclosure

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The OPNL is displayed.

• Status

The OPNL status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for details.

• Status Code

The OPNL status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The OPNL error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the OPNL is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the OPNL is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the OPNL is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

725

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure

The DE information is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The DE number is displayed. Click this item to display

"Drive Enclosure Detail" (page 762) .

• Status

The DE status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for details.

• Type

The DE type is displayed.

The DE type indicates the drive size and the maximum number of drives that can be installed.

I/O Module

The I/O Module (IOM) information is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The enclosure where the IOM is installed is displayed.

726

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• IOM

The IOM number is displayed. Click this item to display

"I/O Module Detail" (page 766)

• Status

The IOM status is displayed. Refer to

"Power Supply Unit (DE) Detail" (page 768)

for details.

Filter setting

The filter setting is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Enclosure

Status

Filter Description

Select the DE that is to be displayed.

Select the IOM status that is to be displayed.

Port Error Statistics

The total number of errors for CM expander and DE IOM ports is displayed.

An increasing number of errors in the information is used to notify early replacement for warning status components. This can also be used as analysis information when performance is reduced.

Errors that occur in the SAS transmission line are detected in CM and recovered by retries. Note that detecting an error is not an immediate cause of data failure.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

Enclosures (Controller Enclosure, Drive Enclosure) that have ports are displayed.

• Expander

The chip installation location that is targeted by the port error detection is displayed.

• Port No.

The port number that is targeted by the port error detection is displayed.

• Phy No.

The Phy number of the port that is targeted by the port error detection is displayed.

727

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Status

The Phy status is displayed.

Link Up

Link Down

N/A

• Invalid Dword

The number of Invalid Dword occurrences is displayed.

"Invalid Dword" indicates an error in the SAS transmission line. The SAS interface encodes 8-bit to 10-bit to improve the transmission error ratio. This error is detected when the SAS interface fails encoding.

• Disparity Error

The number of Disparity Error occurrences is displayed.

"Disparity Error" indicates an error in the SAS transmission line. The SAS interface encodes 8-bit to 10-bit to improve the transmission error ratio. This error is detected when the SAS interface fails encoding.

• Loss of Dword Synchronization

The number of Loss of Dword Synchronization occurrences is displayed.

"Loss of Dword Synchronization" indicates that the SAS interface failed encoding and the SAS link synchronization is broken.

• Phy Reset Problem

The number of Phy Reset Problem occurrences is displayed.

"Phy Reset Problem" is detected when resetting and recovering the port in which an error occurred.

Filter setting

Expander

Filter Description

Select the installation location of the chip that is to be displayed.

Power Supply Unit (DE)

The PSU information for a DE is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The enclosure where the PSU is installed is displayed.

• PSU

The PSU number is displayed. Click this item to display

728

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure

• Status

The PSU status is displayed. Refer to

The FEM number is displayed. Click this item to display "Fan Expander Module Detail" (page 770)

for details.

Fan Expander Module

This function displays the Fan Expander Module (FEM) information.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The drive enclosure number is displayed.

• FEM

• Status

The FEM status is displayed. Refer to

The slot number of the enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed. Click this item to display "Drive Detail"

729

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drives

The drive information is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed.

• Slot No.

(page 772)

• Status

The drive status is displayed. Refer to "Drive Status" (page 1416)

for details.

• Capacity

The capacity of the drive is displayed.

The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product’s actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

• Speed

The drive speed is displayed. For SSD or SSD SED, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

15000 rpm

10000 rpm

7200 rpm

• Type

The drive type displayed for this item is a combination of the following.

Drive size

• For 2.5-inch drives

2.5"

• For 3.5-inch drives

3.5"

Drive type

• For SAS disks

Online

730

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drives

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• For Nearline SAS disks

Nearline

• For SSDs, the following items are displayed depending on the SSD type

For SSD-Ms (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-M

For SSD-Ls (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-L

For SSDs (6 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD

Note that "SED" is also displayed for self encrypting drives and "AF" is also displayed for Advanced Format compliant drives.

*1: The displayed item varies depending on the interface speed (bandwidth) or the capacity of the reserved space.

Unless otherwise specified, this manual refers to "SSD-M", "SSD-L", and "SSD" collectively as "SSD". In addition, there may be cases when "SSD SED" is used as the collective term for self encrypting SSD-Hs, SSD-Ms, and SSD-Ls.

• Usage

The usage of the drive is displayed.

For a drive that is used for user data or an unused drive

Data

For a drive that is registered as a Global Hot Spare

Global Hot Spare

For a drive that is registered as a Dedicated Hot Spare

Dedicated Hot Spare

• RAID Group

When the drive belongs to a RAID group, the RAID group number and the RAID group name are displayed. However, if the drive usage is "Dedicated Hot Spare", the RAID group number and the RAID group name are displayed even when the drive is not used as a Hot Spare. Click this item to display the [RAID Group Detail] screen.

When the usage is not "Dedicated Hot Spare" and the drive is not registered in a RAID group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Health

The drive lifetime information is displayed between 0% - 100%. As the lifetime of the drive is reduced, the health level of the drive is decreased.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

The drive is neither "SSD" nor "SSD SED"

Data sanitization is in progress

The lifetime information cannot be obtained

Filter setting

Enclosure

Slot No.

Status

Capacity

Type

Usage

Filter Description

Select the enclosure in which the target drive is installed.

Specify the slot number of the drive that is to be displayed.

When not using the slot number for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the drive status that is to be displayed.

Specify the capacity of the drive that is to be displayed.

When not using the drive capacity for filtering, specify "0".

Select the drive type that is to be displayed.

Select the usage of the drive that is to be displayed.

731

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drives

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Performance (Drive)

The drive performance information is displayed.

Refer to "Note" in

"Performance (CM)" (page 705) for the acquisition requirements and specifications of the perfor-

mance information.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed.

• Slot No.

The slot number of the enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed.

• Busy Rate

The busy rate of the drive is displayed with a bar and a numerical number. When a drive is in the " Broken" or

" Not Supported" state, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Filter setting

Enclosure

Slot No.

Filter

Minimum Busy Rate

Description

Select the enclosure in which the target drive is installed.

Specify the slot number of the drive that is to be displayed.

When not using the slot number for filtering, leave this item blank.

Specify the minimum busy rate for the drive that is to be displayed.

The drives with a busy rate that exceeds the specified minimum busy rate are displayed.

When not using the minimum busy rate for filtering, leave this item blank.

732

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drives

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Drive Error Statistics

The total number of drive errors is displayed.

An increasing number of disk errors can be used as a sign for the early replacement of warning components or as information to analyze performance when performance is reduced.

Any unnecessary drive error information can be deleted.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed.

• Slot No.

The slot number of the enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed.

• Port No.

The drive port number is displayed.

• Media Error

The number of Media Error occurrences is displayed.

• Drive Error

The number of Drive Error occurrences is displayed.

• Drive Recovered Error

The number of Drive Recovered Error occurrences is displayed.

• S.M.A.R.T. Event

The number of S.M.A.R.T. Event occurrences is displayed.

• I/O Timeout

The number of I/O Timeout occurrences is displayed.

• Link Error

The number of Link Error occurrences is displayed.

• Check Code Error

The number of Check Code Error occurrences is displayed.

733

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

The detailed CE information is displayed.

■ Summary

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Charge Rate

The battery charge level for CE is displayed.

When the battery charge level is 90% or more, "Full Charge" is displayed. When the battery charge level is less than 90%, "xx%" is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• Cache Mode

The current status and the factor of the cache are displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Write Back Mode

Write Through (Pinned Data)

Write Through (Battery)

734

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Write Through (Maintenance)

Write Through (1CM)

• Serial Number

The serial number of the CE is displayed.

• Other Information

Additional information for the CE is displayed.

• Location

The installation location of the thermal sensor is displayed.

Intake Temp

Exhaust Temp

• Status

The status of thermal sensor is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code for the thermal sensor is displayed.

• Sensor 1

The temperature of CM#0 is displayed in Celsius (C) and in Fahrenheit (F).

If the thermal information is not available due to problem such as a sensor failure, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Sensor 2

The temperature of CM#1 is displayed in Celsius (C) and in Fahrenheit (F).

If the thermal information is not available due to problem such as a sensor failure, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

■ Front View

The image that is displayed in this screen varies depending on the storage system model.

● For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Storage system image

The front view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. The number of drives that can be installed for each CE type is as follows:

• 2.5" CEs

24 drives (24 drives are lined up horizontally)

735

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• 3.5" CEs

12 drives (3 drives are lined up vertically and 4 drives are lined up horizontally)

• When no drives are installed

Blank

The drive status is displayed with an icon. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for details.

By clicking the drive image, "Drive Detail" (page 772) is displayed.

Parts

The drive number is displayed. Click this item to display

"Drive Detail" (page 772)

Status

The drive status is displayed. Refer to

"Drive Status" (page 1416)

for details.

Capacity

The capacity of the drive is displayed.

The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

Speed

The drive speed is displayed. For SSD or SSD SED, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• 15000 rpm

• 10000 rpm

• 7200 rpm

Type

The drive type displayed for this item is a combination of the following.

• For SAS disks

Online

• For Nearline SAS disks

Nearline

• For SSDs, the following items are displayed depending on the SSD type

For SSD-Ms (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-M

For SSD-Ls (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-L

For SSDs (6 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD

Note that "SED" is also displayed for self encrypting drives and "AF" is also displayed for Advanced Format compliant drives.

*1: The displayed item varies depending on the interface speed (bandwidth) or the capacity of the reserved space.

Usage

The usage of the drive is displayed.

Refer to "Usage" (page 731)

Refer to "RAID Group" (page 731) in

for details.

• Data

• Global Hot Spare

• Dedicated Hot Spare

RAID Group

When the drive belongs to a RAID group, the RAID group number and the RAID group name are displayed.

for details.

736

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Health

The drive lifetime information is displayed between 0% - 100%. Refer to

"Health" (page 731) in

"Component Status" (page 1415) for

for details.

● For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Storage system image

The front view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

The PFM status and the BBU status are indicated by icons. Refer to

details.

By clicking the PFM number, "PCIe Flash Module Detail" (page 750) is displayed.

By clicking the BBU number,

By clicking the PFM number, "PCIe Flash Module Detail" (page 750) is displayed.

is displayed.

Parts

The PFM number, the BTU number, and the BCU number are displayed.

By clicking the BTU number,

By clicking the BCU number, "Battery (BTU/BCU)" (page 718) is displayed.

is displayed.

Status

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

Status Code

The status code of each component is displayed.

Error Code

The error code of each component is displayed.

737

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

● For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Storage system image

The front view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

The BBU status is displayed with an icon. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

By clicking the BBU number,

is displayed.

Parts

The BTU number and the BCU number are displayed

By clicking the BTU number,

By clicking the BCU number, "Battery (BTU/BCU)" (page 718) is displayed.

is displayed.

Status

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

Status Code

The status code of each component is displayed.

Error Code

The error code of each component is displayed.

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

738

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Storage system image

The front view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

The PFM status, the BBU status, and the BUD status are displayed with an icon. Refer to

"Component Status"

(page 1415)

for details.

By clicking the PFM number, "PCIe Flash Module Detail" (page 750) is displayed.

By clicking the BBU number,

"Bootup and Utility Device Detail" (page 776) is displayed.

is displayed.

By clicking the BUD number,

Parts

The PFM number, the BTU number, the BCU number, and the BUD number are displayed

By clicking the PFM number, "PCIe Flash Module Detail" (page 750) is displayed.

By clicking the BTU number,

By clicking the BCU number, "Battery (BTU/BCU)" (page 718) is displayed.

is displayed.

By clicking the BUD number,

"Bootup and Utility Device Detail" (page 776) is displayed.

Status

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

Status Code

The status code of each component is displayed.

Error Code

The error code of each component is displayed.

■ Rear View

The image that is displayed in this screen varies depending on the storage system model.

● For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Storage system image

The rear view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

The CM status and the PSU status are displayed with icons.

By clicking the CM number, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

By clicking the PSU number,

By clicking the CM number, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

is displayed.

Parts

The CM number and the PSU number is displayed.

By clicking the PSU number,

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

is displayed.

739

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

Status

● For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Storage system image

The rear view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

The CM status, the CA status, and the CPSU status are displayed with icons.

By clicking the CM number, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

By clicking the CA number,

By clicking the CPSU number,

By clicking the CM number, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

is displayed.

Parts

The CM number, the CA number, and the CPSU number is displayed.

By clicking the CA number,

By clicking the CPSU number,

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

is displayed.

Status

● For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

740

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Enclosure Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

Storage system image

The rear view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

The CM status, the CA status, BUD status, and the CPSU status are displayed with icons.

By clicking the CM number, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

By clicking the CA number,

"Bootup and Utility Device Detail" (page 776) is displayed.

By clicking the BUD number,

By clicking the CPSU number,

By clicking the CM number, "Controller Module Detail" (page 742) is displayed.

is displayed.

Parts

The CM number, the CA number, the BUD number, and the CPSU number is displayed.

By clicking the CA number,

"Bootup and Utility Device Detail" (page 776) is displayed.

By clicking the BUD number,

By clicking the CPSU number,

The status of each component is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

is displayed.

Status

741

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Module Detail

The detailed CM information is displayed.

■ Summary

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The CM number is displayed.

• Status

The CM status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for details.

In the Unified Storage environment, " Maintenance" is displayed until a NAS system volume is created. The

CM status changes to " Normal" after a NAS user volume is created and the NAS system volume is generated.

742

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Module Detail

• Memory Size

The cache memory capacity of the CM is displayed.

• Part Number

The port number of the CM is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the CM is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the CM is displayed.

• MAC Address (MNT)

The MAC address of the MNT Port is displayed.

• MAC Address (RMT)

The MAC address of the RMT Port is displayed.

• MAC Address (FST)

The MAC address of the FST Port is displayed.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

• Active EC

The EC number of the currently running firmware is displayed.

• Next EC

The EC number of the firmware that is to be run at the next power-on is displayed.

• CPU Clock

The CPU clock frequency is displayed.

• CPU Status

The CPU status is displayed. Refer to

"SAS Cable Detail" (page 778) .

• CPU Status Code

The CPU status code is displayed.

• CPU Error Code

The CPU error code is displayed.

■ Internal Parts

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

743

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Module Detail

● For the other models

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Parts

The component name and the component number are displayed.

A link is displayed when the "Parts" is "SAS Cable". Click this link to display

The following items are displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

A link is displayed when the "Parts" is "Frontend Cable". Click this link to display "Frontend Cable Detail"

(page 779)

A link is displayed when the "Parts" is "Management Cable". Click this link to display

"Management Cable

Detail" (page 780) .

A link is displayed when the "Parts" is "BUD". Click this link to display

"Bootup and Utility Device Detail"

(page 776)

• Status

The component status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Error Code

The component error code is displayed.

• Notes

Remarks are displayed.

When "Parts" is "Memory", the memory capacity is displayed.

When "Parts" is "SCU", the voltage information is displayed (for the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F).

When "Parts" is "BBU", the battery charge level is displayed (for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS AF250 S2). When the battery charge level is 90% or more, "Full Charge" is displayed.

When the battery charge level is less than 90%, "xx%" is displayed.

When "Parts" is "SATA SSD Controller", the firmware version of the currently running EC is displayed (for the

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS

AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F).

744

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Controller Module Detail

■ View

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

Components that are not the target CM are grayed out.

The CM status is displayed with an icon. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for display items.

745

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Channel Adapter Detail

The detailed information for the Channel Adapter is displayed.

■ Summary

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The CA installation location is displayed.

• CA Type

The CA type is displayed.

The display items in this field vary depending on the storage system model.

32G-FC 2port, 16G-FC 4port, 16G-FC 2port, 8G-FC 4port, 8G-FC 2port

10G-iSCSI 2port, 10G Base-T iSCSI 2port, 1G-iSCSI 2port

12G-SAS 2port, 6G-SAS 2port

746

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Channel Adapter Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

10G-FCoE 2port

10G-NAS 2port, 1G-NAS 4port

"1G-NAS 4port". Available ports can be checked in the [Internal Parts] tab. Note that 1-port type CAs and 2port type CAs are not available in some regions.

• Status

The CA status is displayed. Refer to

The status of Chip#0 or Chip#1 is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

for details.

• Status Code

The CA status code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the CA is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the CA is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the CA is displayed.

• Chip#n Status

• Chip#n Status Code

The status code of Chip#0 or Chip#1 is displayed.

• Chip#n Error Code

The error code of Chip#0 or Chip#1 is displayed.

• Chip#n Active EC

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Chip#n Next EC

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

● CM#x CA#y Port Information

The detailed information of all the ports is displayed. Refer to

"FC port" (page 781)

"iSCSI port" (page 786)

, "SAS

Port" (page 790) ,

"FCoE port" (page 791)

, or "NAS port" (page 793)

for display contents.

747

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Channel Adapter Detail

■ Internal Parts

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The CA port number is displayed. Click this item to display "Port Detail" (page 781) .

• Status

The CA port status is displayed. Refer to

for details.

• Error Code

The CA port error code is displayed.

748

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Channel Adapter Detail

■ View

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

Components that are not the target CA are grayed out.

The CA status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

The PFM status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

for details.

749

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

PCIe Flash Module Detail

The detailed information for the PFM is displayed.

■ Summary

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The installation location of the PFM is displayed.

• Type

The PFM type is displayed.

• Capacity

The PFM capacity is displayed.

• Status

• Health

The lifetime information of the PFM is displayed.

750

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

PCIe Flash Module Detail

• Status Code

The PFM status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The PFM error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the PFM is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the PFM is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the PFM is displayed.

■ View

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the CEs (CMs) that are installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

Components that are not the target PFM are grayed out.

The PFM status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

751

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

PSU/CPSU (CE) Detail

The detailed information for the PSU or the CPSU is displayed.

■ Summary

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The installation location of the PSU or the CPSU is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the CE number is displayed.

• Status

The PSU status or the CPSU status is displayed. Refer to

• Status Code

The status code of PSU or CPSU is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code of PSU or CPSU is displayed.

752

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

PSU/CPSU (CE) Detail

• Part Number

The part number of PSU or CPSU is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of PSU or CPSU is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of PSU or CPSU is displayed.

■ View

● For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● For the other models

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

Components that are not the target PSU or CPSU are grayed out.

The PSU status or the CPSU status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

The FRT status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415)

for details.

753

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Router Detail

The detailed information for the FRT is displayed.

■ Summary

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The FRT number is displayed.

• Status

for details.

• Status Code

The FRT status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The FRT error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the FRT is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the FRT is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the FRT is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

754

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Router Detail

■ Internal Parts

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Parts

Information for the Frontend cable that connects between the CM and FRT is displayed. Click this item to display

"Frontend Cable Detail" (page 779) .

• Status

The Frontend cable status is displayed. Refer to

The FRT status is displayed with an icon. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Error Code

The Frontend cable error code is displayed.

• Type

The Frontend cable type is displayed.

"Cu" is displayed when the connection cable between CM and FRT is a Frontend electric cable.

"AOC (Active Optical Cable)" is displayed when the connection cable between CM and FRT is a Frontend optical cable.

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the FE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

Components that are not the target FRT are grayed out.

755

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Service Controller Detail

The detailed information for the SVC is displayed.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The SVC number is displayed.

• Status

The SVC status is displayed. Refer to

"Management Cable Detail" (page 780) .

for details.

• Status Code

The SVC status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The SVC error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the SVC is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the SVC is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the SVC is displayed.

• Active EC

The EC number of the current controller firmware is displayed.

• Next EC

The EC number of the controller firmware that is to be run at the next power-on is displayed.

• Firmware Version

The current controller firmware version is displayed.

756

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Service Controller Detail

■ Internal Parts

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Parts

Information for the Management cable that connects between the CM and SVC is displayed. Click this item to display

• Status

The Management cable status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Error Code

The Management cable error code is displayed.

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the FE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

Components that are not the target SVC are grayed out.

The SVC status is displayed with an icon. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

757

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

FE Power Supply Unit Detail

The detailed information for the FPSU is displayed.

■ Summary

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The installation location of the FPSU is displayed.

• Status

The FPSU status is displayed. Refer to

for details.

• Status Code

The FPSU status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The FPSU error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the FPSU is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the FPSU is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the FPSU is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

758

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

FE Power Supply Unit Detail

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the FE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

Components that are not the target FPSU are grayed out.

The FPSU status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

for details.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

759

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

FAN Unit Detail

The detailed information for the FANU is displayed.

■ Summary

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The FANU number is displayed.

• Status

The FANU status is displayed. Refer to

The FANU status is displayed with an icon. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

for details.

• Status Code

The FANU status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The FANU error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the FANU is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the FANU is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the FANU is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

760

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

FAN Unit Detail

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the FE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

Components that are not the target FANU are grayed out.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

761

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure Detail

The detailed information of the DE is displayed.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Serial Number

The serial number of the DE is displayed.

• Other Information

Additional information for the DE is displayed.

• Location

The installation location of the thermal sensor is displayed.

Intake Temp

Exhaust Temp

• Status

The thermal sensor status is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code for the thermal sensor is displayed.

• Sensor 1

For the "Intake Temp" field, temperature of the IOM#0 is displayed in Celsius (C) and in Fahrenheit (F). If the thermal information is not available due to problem such as a sensor failure, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

For the "Exhaust Temp" field, a "-" (hyphen) is usually displayed.

• Sensor 2

For the "Intake Temp" field, temperature of the IOM#1 is displayed in Celsius (C) and in Fahrenheit (F). If the thermal information is not available due to problem such as a sensor failure, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

For the "Exhaust Temp" field, a "-" (hyphen) is usually displayed.

This item is not displayed when the ETERNUS DX is a 1CM model.

762

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure Detail

■ Front View

● For 2.5" DEs

● For 3.5" DEs

● For 3.5" high density DEs

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

763

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the DEs that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. The number of drives that can be installed for each DE type is as follows:

2.5" DEs

24 drives (24drives are lined up horizontally)

3.5" DEs

12 drives (3 drives are lined up vertically and 4 drives are lined up horizontally)

3.5" high density DEs

60 drives (5 drives are lined up vertically and 12 drives are lined up horizontally)

When no drives are installed

Blank

The drive status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

"Drive Detail" (page 772)

Click this item to display

• Parts

The drive number is displayed.

By clicking this item, "Drive Detail" (page 772) is displayed.

• Status

The drive status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Capacity

The capacity of the drive is displayed.

The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

• Speed

The drive speed is displayed. For SSD or SSD SED, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

15000 rpm

10000 rpm

7200 rpm

• Type

The drive type displayed for this item is a combination of the following.

For SAS disks

Online

For Nearline SAS disks

Nearline

For SSDs, the following items are displayed depending on the SSD type

• For SSD-Ms (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-M

• For SSD-Ls (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-L

• For SSDs (6 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD

Note that "SED" is also displayed for self encrypting drives and "AF" is also displayed for Advanced Format compliant drives.

*1: The displayed item varies depending on the interface speed (bandwidth) or the capacity of the reserved space.

764

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Enclosure Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Usage

The usage of the drive is displayed. Refer to "Usage" (page 731)

"Drives" for details.

Data

Global Hot Spare

Dedicated Hot Spare

• RAID Group

When the drive belongs to a RAID group, the RAID group number and the RAID group name are displayed. Refer

to "RAID Group" (page 731) in

for details.

• Health

The drive lifetime information is displayed between 0% - 100%. Refer to

"Health" (page 731) in

"Drives" for

details.

■ Rear View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the DE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

The status of the IOM, the PSU, and the FEM are displayed with icons. Refer to

By clicking the IOM number, "I/O Module Detail" (page 766) is displayed.

for details.

By clicking the PSU number, "Power Supply Unit (DE) Detail" (page 768) is displayed.

By clicking the FEM number,

"Fan Expander Module Detail" (page 770) is displayed.

• Parts

The IOM number, the PSU number, or the FEM number is displayed.

By clicking the IOM number, "I/O Module Detail" (page 766) is displayed.

By clicking the PSU number, "Power Supply Unit (DE) Detail" (page 768) is displayed.

By clicking the FEM number,

"Fan Expander Module Detail" (page 770) is displayed.

• Status

The status of IOM, PSU, or FEM is displayed. Refer to

for details.

765

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

I/O Module Detail

The detailed information of IOM is displayed.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The IOM status is displayed. Refer to

"SAS Cable Detail" (page 778) . When the part is a high density DE, "IOM FEM Port#y" (y: 0, 1) is dis-

for details.

• Status Code

The IOM status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The IOM error code is displayed.

• WWN

The IOM WWN is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the IOM is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the IOM is displayed.

• Firmware Version

The current controller firmware version is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the IOM is displayed.

766

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

I/O Module Detail

■ Internal Parts

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Parts

The internal parts of the IOM are displayed. A link is displayed when the part is "SAS Cable". Click this item to display

played.

• Status

The internal parts status of the IOM is displayed. Refer to

• Error Code

The error code for the internal parts of the IOM is displayed.

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the DE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

Components that are not the target IOM are grayed out.

The IOM status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

for details.

767

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Power Supply Unit (DE) Detail

The detailed information of PSU is displayed.

■ Summary

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The installation location of PSU is displayed.

• Status

The PSU status is displayed. Refer to

for details.

• Status Code

The PSU status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The PSU error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the PSU is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the PSU is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the PSU is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

768

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Power Supply Unit (DE) Detail

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the DE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

Components that are not the target PSU are grayed out.

The PSU status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

for details.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

769

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Fan Expander Module Detail

The detailed information of FEM is displayed.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The location information of the FEM is displayed.

• Status

The FEM status is displayed. Refer to

The status of FEM Expander#n (n=0,1) is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Status Code

The FEM status code is displayed

• Part Number

The part number of the FEM is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the FEM is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the FEM is displayed.

• EXP#n Status

• EXP#n Status Code

The status code of FEM Expander#n (n=0,1) is displayed.

• EXP#n Error Code

The error code of FEM Expander#n (n=0,1) is displayed.

• EXP#n WWN

The WWN of FEM Expander#n (n=0,1) is displayed.

• EXP#n Active EC

The EC number of Expander#n (n=0,1) that is currently running is displayed.

• EXP#n Next EC

The EC number of FEM Expander#n (n=0,1) that is to be run after the next power-on is displayed.

770

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Fan Expander Module Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• EXP#n Firmware Version

The revision number of the firmware that is currently running in FEM Expander#n (n=0,1) is displayed.

■ Internal Parts

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Parts

The component information is displayed.

• Status

The component status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Error Code

The component error code is displayed.

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The rear view of the DE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

Components that are not the target FEM are grayed out.

The FEM status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

The drive status is displayed. Refer to "Drive Status" (page 1416)

for details.

771

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Detail

The detailed information of the drive is displayed.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The detailed information of the drive is displayed.

• Status

for details.

• Status Code

The drive status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The drive error code is displayed.

• Capacity

The capacity of the drive is displayed.

The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

• Type

The drive type is displayed. Refer to

"Type" (page 730)

The usage of the drive is displayed. Refer to "Usage" (page 731)

for details.

• Speed

The drive speed is displayed. For SSD or SSD SED, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

15000 rpm

10000 rpm

7200 rpm

• Health

The drive lifetime information is displayed between 0% - 100%. As the lifetime of the drive is reduced, the health level of the drive is decreased. This item is displayed when the drive type is "SSD" and "SSD SED".

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

Data sanitization is in progress

The lifetime information cannot be obtained

772

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Usage

"Drives" for details.

Data

Global Hot Spare

Dedicated Hot Spare

• RAID Group

When the drive belongs to a RAID group, the RAID group number and the RAID group name are displayed. Refer

to "RAID Group" (page 731) in

for details.

• Motor Status

The drive motor status is displayed.

Active

The drive motors are activated.

In the Boot Process

The drive motors are starting up.

Idle

The drive motors are stopped.

In the Stop Process

The drive motors are being stopped.

Power off

The drive power is being turned off.

• Rebuild/Copyback Progress

When rebuild or copyback is being performed, the progress rate is displayed.

When rebuild or copyback is not being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Patrol

Total completed passes

The current total number of completed disk drive patrol cycles is displayed. "Completed passes" indicates the number of times the disk patrol for all of the target drives is complete.

If the device configuration has been changed using the [Apply Configuration] function, the patrol progress information (total completed passes, progress with current pass, and completed passes since last power on) returns to the default settings.

Progress with current pass

The progress rate of the currently running disk drive patrol process is displayed.

If the patrol is not operating for reasons such as a drive failure or a drive being formatted, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Completed passes since last Power On

The current total number of completed disk drive patrol cycles since the last power on is displayed.

"Completed passes since last Power On" may be cleared when the Controller Firmware is applied, or due to a CM failure.

• Vendor ID

The drive manufacturer name is displayed.

• Product ID

The drive manufacturer name is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the drive is displayed.

773

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Detail

• WWN

The drive WWN is displayed.

• Firmware Version

The drive firmware version is displayed.

■ View

● For 2.5" DEs

● For 3.5" DEs

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

774

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Drive Detail

● For 3.5" high density DEs

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the DEs that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. The number of drives that can be installed for each DE type is as follows:

2.5" DEs

24 drives (24drives are lined up horizontally)

3.5" DEs

12 drives (3 drives are lined up vertically and 4 drives are lined up horizontally)

3.5" high density DEs

60 drives (5 drives are lined up vertically and 12 drives are lined up horizontally)

When no drives are installed

Blank

Drives that are not selected in the [Drives] screen are grayed out.

The drive status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

775

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Bootup and Utility Device Detail

The detailed information for the BUD is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Location

The BUD number is displayed.

• Status

The BUD status is displayed. Refer to

for details.

• Status Code

The BUD status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The BUD error code is displayed.

• Part Number

The part number of the BUD is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the BUD is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the BUD is displayed.

776

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Bootup and Utility Device Detail

■ View

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Storage system image

The front view of the CE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

Components that are not the target BUD are grayed out.

The BUD status is displayed with an icon. Refer to

for details.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

777

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

SAS Cable Detail

The detailed information of the SAS cable is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The SAS cable status is displayed. Refer to

• Status Code

The SAS cable status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The SAS cable error code is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

778

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Frontend Cable Detail

The detailed information of the Frontend cable is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The Frontend cable status is displayed. Refer to

The Management cable status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Status Code

The Frontend cable status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The Frontend cable error code is displayed.

• Type

The Frontend cable type is displayed.

"Cu" is displayed when the connection cable between the CM-FRT is a Frontend electric cable.

"AOC" is displayed when the connection cable between the CM-FRT is a Frontend optical cable.

• Part Number

The part number of the Frontend cable is displayed.

• Serial Number

The serial number of the Frontend cable is displayed.

• Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the Frontend cable is displayed.

If the hardware version cannot be obtained, the field is blank.

779

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Management Cable Detail

The detailed information of the Management cable is displayed.

This function is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

■ Summary

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

• Status Code

The Management cable status code is displayed.

• Error Code

The Management cable error code is displayed.

780

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Port Detail

The detailed information of the port is displayed.

Display items vary depending on the port type ( "FC port" (page 781)

, "iSCSI port" (page 786) ,

"SAS Port" (page 790)

"FCoE port" (page 791)

, or

"NAS port" (page 793) ).

■ Summary

● FC port

The detailed FC port information is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

■ CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w Information (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S/DX8900 S3) or

CM#y CA#z Port#w Information (for the other models)

Location

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the port is displayed.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

• For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

Port Mode

The port mode is displayed.

• CA

• RA

• CA/RA

• Initiator

Status

The port status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

Status Code

The port status code is displayed.

Error Code

The port error code is displayed.

781

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Type

The type of the port is displayed.

• 8G FC

• 16G FC

• 32G FC

Connection

The connection type of the port is displayed.

• Fabric

A connection type that enables simultaneous communication among multiple nodes through a Fibre

Channel switch. This connection type can also be used for a direct connection when "Transfer Rate" is "16

Gbit/s" or more.

• FC-AL

A connection type that connects multiple nodes in a loop.

Loop ID

If the connection type of the target port is "FC-AL", the Loop ID is displayed.

When the Loop ID is manually specified, the ID that is to be set for the port is displayed in hexadecimal.

When the Loop ID is automatically specified, "Ascending" or "Descending" is displayed.

When the "Connection" is "Fabric", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Class

The service class of the port (fixed to "Class3") is displayed.

Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Auto-negotiation

• 4 Gbit/s

• 8 Gbit/s

• 16 Gbit/s

• 32 Gbit/s

Link Status

The link status of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Link Down

• 4 Gbit/s Link Up

• 8 Gbit/s Link Up

• 16 Gbit/s Link Up

• 32 Gbit/s Link Up

WWN

The WWN of the port is displayed.

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA", "RA", or "CA/RA".

If the port mode is "Initiator", the display status varies according to the screen. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the CM#x CA#y port information in the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen. This item is not displayed in the

[Port Detail] screen.

WWN (Port Name)

The World Wide Port Name (WWPN) of the port is displayed.

This item is displayed when the port mode is "Initiator".

If the port mode is not "Initiator", the display status varies according to the screen. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the CM#x CA#y port information in the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen. This item is not displayed in the [Port Detail] screen.

782

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

WWN (Node Name)

The World Wide Node Name (WWNN) of the port is displayed.

This item is displayed when the port mode is "Initiator".

Affinity Mode

The affinity mode of the port is displayed.

• ON

• OFF

TFO Transfer Mode

Whether the TFO transfer mode is enabled or disabled for the target port is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "Initiator".

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

TFO WWN Mode

When the port is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Custom" is displayed if WWN has been changed, and "Default" is displayed if no changes have been made.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA", "CA/RA", or "Initiator".

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Custom

• Default

TFO Port

When the port is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Used" is displayed, and "Unused" is displayed when the port is not used.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Used

• Unused

FC Frame Size

The frame size of the port is displayed.

• 512 byte

• 1024 byte

• 2048 byte

Part Number

The part number of the port is displayed.

If the part number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Serial Number

The serial number of the port is displayed.

If the serial number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the port is displayed.

If the hardware version cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

SFP Type

The SFP type of the port is displayed.

If an SFP is not installed, "Unmount" is displayed.

• SFP+(SMF)

8G LongWave

• SFP+(MMF)

8G SFP+

• 16G SFP+(SMF)

16G LongWave

• 16G SFP+(MMF)

16G SFP+

783

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• 32G SFP+(MMF)

32G SFP+

• Unknown

SFP type other than above

Temperature

The real time temperature of the SFP in the port is displayed in Celsius (C) and in Fahrenheit (F).

When the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• x C / y F (x: -128.00 to 128.00, y: -198.40 to 262.40)

Voltage

The real time voltage of the SFP in the port is displayed.

When the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• x V (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

Current

The real time current of the SFP in the port is displayed.

When the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• x mA (x: 0.00 to 131.00)

TX Power

The real time transmission power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

When the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

RX Power

The real time received power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

When the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

"Temperature", "Voltage", "Current", "TX Power", and "RX Power" are displayed as the CM#x CA#y port information in

"Channel Adapter Detail" (page 746) . In this screen, "Sensor Information" is displayed.

■ Sensor Information

The real time and threshold values (Low/High) for the temperature, voltage, current, transmission power, and received power are displayed in the Sensor Information. The target components for this information are

FC that have SFPs from which information can be obtained. When the information cannot be obtained, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

• An SFP is regarded as being in Warning status when the real time value is lower than the Warning threshold (Low) and higher than the Alarm threshold (Low).

• An SFP is regarded as being in Warning status when the real time value is higher than the Warning threshold (High) and lower than the Alarm threshold (High).

• An SFP is regarded as being in Alarm status when the real time value is lower than the Alarm threshold

(Low) or higher than the Alarm threshold (High).

Temperature

• Present

The real time temperature of the SFP in the port is displayed.

x C / y F (x: -128.00 to 128.00, y: -198.40 to 262.40)

• Warning

Low or High

The Warning threshold (Low/High) for the temperature of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x C / y F (x: -128.00 to 128.00, y: -198.40 to 262.40)

784

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Alarm

Low or High

The Alarm threshold (Low/High) for the temperature of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x C / y F (x: -128.00 to 128.00, y: -198.40 to 262.40)

Voltage

• Present

The real time voltage of the SFP in the port is displayed.

x V (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

• Warning

Low or High

The Warning threshold (Low/High) for the voltage of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x V (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

• Alarm

Low or High

The Alarm threshold (Low/High) for the voltage of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x V (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

Current

• Present

The real time current of the SFP in the port is displayed.

x mA (x: 0.00 to 131.00)

• Warning

Low or High

The Warning threshold (Low/High) for the current of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x mA (x: 0.00 to 131.00)

• Alarm

Low or High

The Alarm threshold (Low/High) for the current of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x mA (x: 0.00 to 131.00)

TX Power

• Present

The real time transmission power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

• Warning

Low or High

The Warning threshold (Low/High) for the transmission power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

• Alarm

Low or High

The Alarm threshold (Low/High) for the transmission power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

RX Power

• Present

The real time received power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

785

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Warning

Low or High

The Warning threshold (Low/High) for the received power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

• Alarm

Low or High

The Alarm threshold (Low/High) for the received power of the SFP in the port is displayed.

• x mW (x: 0.00 to 6.55)

● iSCSI port

The detailed iSCSI port information is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

■ CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w Information (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S/DX8900 S3) or

CM#y CA#z Port#w Information (for the other models)

Location

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the port is displayed.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

• For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

Port Mode

The port mode is displayed.

• CA

• RA

• CA/RA

Status

The port status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

Status Code

The port status code is displayed.

Error Code

The port error code is displayed.

786

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Type

The type of the port is displayed.

• 1G iSCSI

• 10G iSCSI

• 10G Base-T iSCSI

Multiple VLAN

Whether the Multiple VLAN is enabled or disabled for the port is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA".

Number of IP Addresses

The number of IP addresses that are registered in the port is displayed. In this field, the total number of IP addresses (one basic IP address and the IP addresses that are specified by using Multiple VLAN (up to 15)) is displayed. "1" is displayed when the port mode is "RA" or when "Multiple VLAN" is disabled.

Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Auto-negotiation

• 100Mbit/s

• 1Gbit/s

• 10Gbit/s

Link Status

The link status of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Link Down

• 100Mbit/s Link Up

• 1Gbit/s Link Up

• 10Gbit/s Link Up

iSCSI Name

The iSCSI name is displayed.

iSCSI Alias Name

The iSCSI Alias name is displayed.

iSCSI IP Address

The IPv4 address of the iSCSI is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

iSCSI Subnet Mask

The subnet mask of the iSCSI is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

iSCSI Gateway

The IPv4 address of the iSCSI gateway is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

iSCSI IPv6 Link Local Address

The IPv6 link local address of the iSCSI is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

787

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

iSCSI IPv6 Connect IP Address

The IPv6 connect IP address of the iSCSI is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

iSCSI IPv6 Gateway

The gateway IPv6 address of the target port is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

"Sensor Information" (page 784) for details.

VLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the port is displayed.

If the VLAN ID is not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Affinity Mode

The affinity mode of the port is displayed.

• ON

• OFF

TFO Transfer Mode

Whether the TFO transfer mode is enabled or disabled for the port is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

TFO Port

When the port is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Used" is displayed, and "Unused" is displayed when the port is not used.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Used

• Unused

Bandwidth Limit

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for this item.

MTU Size

The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size for iSCSI is displayed.

When the port mode is "CA", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

CHAP

The Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) authentication status is displayed.

• When the "Port Mode" is "CA" or "RA": "ON" or "OFF"

• When the "Port Mode" is "CA/RA": x / y x: CHAP authentication status for the CA port ("ON" or "OFF") y: CHAP authentication status for the RA port ("ON" or "OFF")

MAC Address

The MAC address of the port is displayed.

Part Number

The part number of the port is displayed.

If the part number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Serial Number

The serial number of the port is displayed.

If the serial number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the port is displayed.

If the hardware version cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

788

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

SFP Type

When the "Type" is "10G iSCSI", the SFP type of the port is displayed.

If an SFP is not installed, "Unmount" is displayed.

If the "Type" is not "10G iSCSI", the display status varies according to the screen. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the CM#x CA#y port information in the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen. This item is not displayed in the

[Port Detail] screen.

• SFP+

• SFP+ Copper

• Unknown

When the "Type" is "10G iSCSI", the temperature, voltage, current, transmission power, and received power for the SFP in the port are displayed.

Refer to

"FC port" (page 781)

for display items.

■ Sensor Information

10G iSCSI that have SFPs from which information can be obtained. When the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. Refer to

■ Additional IP Address Information #x (x: 1 - 15)

When "Multiple VLAN" is enabled, the IP address information (up to 15 IP addresses) that is registered in the port is displayed.

VLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the port is displayed between 0 - 4095.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

iSCSI IP Address

The IPv4 address of the iSCSI port is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

iSCSI Subnet Mask

The subnet mask of the iSCSI port is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

iSCSI Gateway

The gateway IPv4 address of the iSCSI port is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

iSCSI IPv6 Link Local Address

The IPv6 link local address of the iSCSI port is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

iSCSI IPv6 Connect IP Address

The IPv6 connect IP address of the iSCSI port is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

789

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

iSCSI IPv6 Gateway

The gateway IPv6 address of the iSCSI port is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

The port status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

● SAS Port

The detailed SAS port information is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

■ CM#x CA#y Port#z Information

Location

The location information of the port is displayed.

• CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Status

Status Code

The port status code is displayed.

Error Code

The port error code is displayed.

Type

The type of the port is displayed.

• 6G SAS

• 12G SAS

Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Auto-negotiation

• 1.5Gbit/s

• 3Gbit/s

• 6Gbit/s

• 12Gbit/s

790

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

Link Status

The link status for each Phy is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Phy#0 - 3:x

"x" indicates one of the following statuses:

Link Down

1.5Gbit/s Link Up

3Gbit/s Link Up

6Gbit/s Link Up

12Gbit/s Link Up

SAS Address

The SAS address of the port is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Affinity Mode

The affinity mode of the port is displayed.

• ON

• OFF

Part Number

The part number of the port is displayed.

If the part number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Serial Number

The serial number of the port is displayed.

If the serial number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the port is displayed.

If the hardware version cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

SFP Type

The SFP type of the port is displayed.

If an SFP is not installed, "Unmount" is displayed.

This item is displayed when the port type is "12G SAS".

• 12G SFP

• Unknown

● FCoE port

The detailed FCoE port information is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

791

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

■ CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w Information (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S/DX8900 S3) or

CM#y CA#z Port#w Information (for the other models)

Location

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the port is displayed.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

• For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

Port Mode

The port mode (fixed to "CA") is displayed.

Status

The port status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

Status Code

The port status code is displayed.

Error Code

The port error code is displayed.

Type

The type of the port (fixed to "FCoE") is displayed.

Connection

The connection type of the port is displayed.

• Fabric

A connection type that enables simultaneous communication among multiple nodes through a Fibre

Channel switch.

• FC-AL

A connection type that connects multiple nodes in a loop.

Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the port (fixed to "10 Gbit/s") is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Link Status

The link status of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Link Down

• 10Gbit/s Link Up

WWN

The WWN of the port is displayed.

Affinity Mode

The affinity mode of the port is displayed.

• ON

• OFF

FC Frame Size

The frame size of the port is displayed.

• 512 byte

• 1024 byte

• 2048 byte

VLAN ID

The VLAN ID is displayed.

When the VLAN ID is manually specified, the VLAN ID is displayed between 0 - 4095.

When the VLAN ID is automatically specified, "Automatic" is displayed.

792

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Fabric Name

The fabric name (WWN for FCoE) is displayed.

When the fabric name is manually specified, the specified fabric name is displayed.

When the fabric name is automatically specified, "Automatic" is displayed.

MAC Address

The MAC address of the port is displayed.

Part Number

The part number of the port is displayed.

If the part number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Serial Number

The serial number of the port is displayed.

If the serial number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the port is displayed.

If the hardware version cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

SFP Type

The SFP type of the port is displayed.

If an SFP is not installed, "Unmount" is displayed.

• SFP+

• SFP+ Copper

• Unknown

The temperature, voltage, current, transmission power, and received power for the SFP in the port are displayed. Refer to

"FC port" (page 781)

for display items.

■ Sensor Information

FCoE that have SFPs from which information can be obtained. When the information cannot be obtained, a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed. Refer to

"Sensor Information" (page 784) for details.

● NAS port

The detailed NAS port information is displayed.

793

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

■ CM#x CA#y Port#z Information

Location

The location information of the port is displayed.

• CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Port Mode

The port mode (fixed to "CA") is displayed.

Status

The port status is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

Status Code

The port status code is displayed.

Error Code

The port error code is displayed.

Type

The type of the port is displayed.

• 10G NAS

• 1G NAS

Redundancy

The connection type of the port is displayed. When the connection type is "Active-Active" or "Active-

Standby", the "Redundant Port" information is displayed.

• Active-Active

Combine the ports in both of the CMs and configure the redundant ports. For this configuration, the ports of both CMs can be used at any time.

• Active-Standby

Combine the ports in both of the CMs and configure the redundant ports. For this configuration, one port remains in standby status.

• Single

Use only for the ports in the CM that are not redundant.

Redundant Port

The installation locations of the ports that are configured for redundancy with the target port are displayed.

When redundancy is configured for each bonding port, all of the related ports are displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when "Redundancy" is "Single".

• CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Failover Status

The failover status of the multipath is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the multipath is not set (or when "Redundancy" is "Single").

• Normal

The multipath setting between the "Location" port and "Redundant Port" is in a normal state.

• CM#x CA#y Port#z is currently inactive

The multipath between the "Location" port and "Redundant Port" is set, but the "CM#x CA#y Port#z" port is not used.

Port Bonding Mode

The bonding mode for the port is displayed.

• Master

The representative port among the ports that configure the bonding port. The IP address of the bonding port is assigned to the master port.

• Member

Ports that configure the bonding port.

794

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Bonding Master Port

The installation location of the master port, which is a member of the ports that configure the bonding port, is displayed.

If the bonding port is not configured, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Bonding Port

The installation locations of all the member ports that configure the bonding port is displayed.

If the bonding port is not configured, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

Number of VLAN IP Addresses

The number of VLAN IP addresses for the port is displayed.

If VLAN is not set, "0" is displayed.

Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Auto-negotiation

• 100 Mbit/s

• 1 Gbit/s

• 10 Gbit/s

Link Status

The link status of the port is displayed.

If the status is " Unknown", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Link Down

• 10Mbit/s Full Duplex Link Up

• 10Mbit/s Half Duplex Link Up

• 100Mbit/s Full Duplex Link Up

• 100Mbit/s Half Duplex Link Up

• 1Gbit/s Full Duplex Link Up

• 1Gbit/s Half Duplex Link Up

• 10Gbit/s Full Duplex Link Up

• 10Gbit/s Half Duplex Link Up

IP Address

An IPv4 address without VLAN IDs is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Subnet Mask

An IPv4 subnet mask without VLAN IDs is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Gateway Address

An IPv4 address for the gateway without VLAN IDs is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

IPv6 Link Local Address

An IPv6 link local address without VLAN IDs is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

795

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

IPv6 Connect IP Address

An IPv6 connect IP address without VLAN IDs is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

IPv6 Gateway Address

An IPv6 address for the gateway without VLAN IDs is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

Refer to "FC port" (page 781) for display items.

MTU Size

The MTU size is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the MTU size is "0".

MAC Address

The MAC address of the port is displayed.

Part Number

The part number of the port is displayed.

If the part number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Serial Number

The serial number of the port is displayed.

If the serial number cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Hardware Revision

The hardware version of the port is displayed. If the hardware version cannot be acquired, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

SFP Type

When the port type is "10G NAS", SFP type in the port is displayed.

If an SFP is not installed, "Unmount" is displayed.

If the "Type" is not "10G NAS", the display status varies according to the screen. This item is not displayed in the [Port Detail] screen.

• SFP+

• SFP+ Copper

• Unknown

When the "Type" is "10G NAS", the temperature, voltage, current, transmission power, and received power for the SFP in the port are displayed.

■ Sensor Information

10G NAS that have SFPs from which information can be obtained. When the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. Refer to

"Sensor Information" (page 784) for details.

796

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

9. Component Status

Port Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Additional VLAN IP Address

VLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the NAS port is displayed between 1 - 4094.

IP Address (*1)

The IPv4 address of the NAS port is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Subnet Mask (*1)

The subnet mask of the NAS port is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Gateway Address (*1)

The gateway IPv4 address of the NAS port is displayed.

If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

IPv6 Link Local Address (*1)

The IPv6 link local address of the NAS port is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

IPv6 Connect IP Address (*1)

The IPv6 connect IP address of the NAS port is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

IPv6 Gateway Address (*1)

The gateway IPv6 address of the NAS port is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

Volume (Basic Information)

*1: This item is displayed for all of the VLAN settings.

797

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume status displays the status information of volumes.

Volume status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Category

Volume

Performance (Host I/O)

Performance (QoS)

Performance (Advanced Copy)

LUN Group

Reservation

Pinned Data

Bad Sector

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Snapshot

Volume status screen

Performance (Host I/O)

Performance (QoS)

Performance (Advanced Copy)

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Snapshot

Detailed information of the volumes can be displayed from the following screens:

•

Volume Detail (Basic)

•

Volume Detail (Reservation)

•

Volume Detail (Pinned Data)

•

Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)

•

Volume Detail (Used RAID Group)

•

Volume Detail (Snapshot)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

798

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volume (Basic Information)

This function displays the basic information of volumes.

The display process for the volume list may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes while a meta cache redistribution is being performed for NAS volumes (NAS user volumes or NAS backup volumes).

In this section, "volumes" include "External Volumes" if differentiation is not specifically required. Refer to "External Volume specification" (page 805) for details.

■ When no External Volumes are created

■ When External Volumes are created

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed.

During volume creation, the volume number can be allocated automatically or specified manually. When the volume number is allocated automatically, the volume number is allocated from the smallest unused decimal number in ascending order. Click this item to display

"Volume Detail (Basic)" (page 827)

799

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display

Available" is displayed. Refer to "Volume Status" (page 1412)

• Status

The volume status is displayed. When the volume status is normal, "

for detailed information of volume status.

• Type

The volume type is displayed.

Standard

Standard volumes are the most commonly used volumes that are created in RAID groups or External RAID

Groups.

A standard volume is used for normal usage, such as file systems and databases. The server recognizes it as a single logical unit.

WSV

WSV is a volume that is created by concatenating distributed areas in from 2 to 64 RAID groups. Processing speed is fast because data access is distributed.

TPV

TPV is a virtual volume that is created in a Thin Provisioning Pool area. When data is being written to a TPV from the server, the drives are allocated in specified size units.

FTV

FTV is a virtual volume that is created in an FTRP. This volume is a target volume for layering. Data is automatically redistributed in small block units according to the access frequency. The FTV is created by ETERNUS

CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

SDV

SDV is an area that is used as the copy destination for a SnapOPC/SnapOPC+. For a SnapOPC, SDVs are created for each copy destination. For a SnapOPC+, SDVs are created for each generation of the copy destination.

SDPV

SDPV is a volume that is used to configure SDP areas. The SDP capacity equals the total capacity of the

SDPVs. A volume is supplied from a SDP when the amount of updates exceeds the capacity of the SDV.

Temporary

Temporary is a volume that is created when a capacity expansion using the LUN Concatenation function is performed. If the capacity expansion fails, "Temporary" is displayed in the volume list.

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

Block/Dedup

The Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

The system volumes described below. Refer to

"Usage Details" (page 832)

in "Volume Detail (Basic)" for

details.

• System volumes for the NAS system

• System volumes for the Virtual Volume function

• Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

Migration

An External Volume that is used for data migrations.

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

800

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed.

The capacity is displayed in units of "MB", "GB", or "TB". Even when volumes are created in units of "MB", if the volume capacity exceeds 1023.99MB, the capacity is displayed in units of "GB". If the volume capacity exceeds

1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off to two decimal places.

When the volume type is "SDV", the virtual capacity is displayed. The virtual capacity indicates the capacity that is secured automatically when creating SDVs (24 (MB) + copy source volume capacity x 0.1%).

• RAID Group/TPP/FRTP No.

The following number is displayed:

If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group number to which the representative volume (*1) belongs is displayed.

*1: A volume for WSV, which is created by concatenating multiple RAID groups with striping, that belongs to the RAID group that is first in the concatenation order.

If the type is "TPV"

The TPP number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "FTV"

The FTRP number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "Standard" and "Usage" is "Migration"

The External RAID Group number to which the External Volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

• RAID Group/TPP/FTRP Name

The following name is displayed:

If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group name to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "TPV"

The TPP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "FTV"

The FTRP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "Standard" and "Usage" is "Migration"

The External RAID Group name to which the External Volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

• Encryption

The encryption status is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

A volume that is encrypted by CM

"-" (hyphen)

A volume that is not encrypted (plain text volume)

SED

A volume that is encrypted by SED

• UID

The Universal Identifier (UID) is displayed.

The UID is an identifier (storage system name) to specify a volume from the open system server. The UID status is displayed in the "UID Mode" field.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression System Volume.

801

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• For External Volumes that inherit the External LU Information, the UID of the External Volumes is displayed. For External Volumes that do not inherit the External LU Information, the UID that is assigned by the ETERNUS DX/AF (local storage system) is displayed.

• If the External LU Information is deleted, the UID that is assigned by the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. Refer

to "Delete External LU Information" (page 346)

for details.

• UID Mode

The UID status is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression System Volume.

Default

This status is displayed for the following volumes.

• Volumes that are created with the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Volumes that do not inherit the External LU Information (*1)

Custom

This status is displayed for one of the following volumes.

• Volumes where the UIDs that are changed with the "set volume" ETERNUS CLI command are applied

• Volumes that are used for the Storage Cluster function

External

This status is displayed for volumes that inherit the External LU Information (*1).

*1: This status is displayed for volumes before, during, and after a data migration of the Non-disruptive Storage Migration.

If the External LU Information is deleted, this item is changed from "External" to "Default". Refer to "Delete

External LU Information" (page 346) for details.

• Process

A process that is being performed for the volume is displayed. If multiple processes are currently being performed, the processes are separated with a ":" (colon) and displayed in the "xx:yy:zz" format. "Encrypting", "Formatting", "Migrating", or "Balancing" is displayed as "xx". "Optimizing Capacity", "Reserved Optimizing Capacity",

"Automatic Stop", or "Manual Stop" is displayed as "yy". "Optimizing Capacity" or "Reserved Optimizing Capacity" is displayed as "zz".

Note that "Automatic Stop" and "Manual Stop" are displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration

License has been registered.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Encrypting

Volume encryption is being performed.

Formatting

Formatting is being performed.

Migrating

RAID migration is being performed.

Balancing

TPV balancing or FTRP balancing is being performed.

Optimizing Capacity

Capacity optimization (*1) is being performed in a TPV or an FTV.

Reserved Optimizing Capacity

Capacity optimization is being reserved (*2) for a TPV or an FTV.

Automatic Stop

The data synchronization between the migration source volume and the migration destination volume is automatically stopped.

802

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Manual Stop

The data synchronization between the migration source volume and the migration destination volume is manually stopped.

*1: "Capacity Optimization" is a function that releases the allocated physical area when data in the physical area that is allocated to a TPV or an FTV is filled with zeros.

*2: If "Start Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity after migration" is enabled for the RAID migration function, the migration source volume is reserved for capacity optimization.

If "Automatic Stop" or "Manual Stop" is selected for "Data Sync after Migration" when starting a data migration for Non-disruptive Storage Migration using the [Start RAID Migration] function, "Migrating : Automatic Stop" or "Migrating : Manual Stop" is displayed for "Process" of the migration source volume.

If "Manual Stop" is selected, "Migrating : Manual Stop" is displayed during a data synchronization between the migration source volume and the migration destination volume even if the migration has been completed.

• Forbid Advanced Copy

The protection status of the volume or the volume attribute (such as mirroring reservation) is displayed.

"No" is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression System Volume.

Yes

The volume is protected. The volume cannot be used as a copy destination volume.

The volume is not protected. The volume can be used as a copy destination volume.

DLM

An attribute that is to be set to a volume being created as the REC copy destination by the Dynamic LUN Mirroring function regardless of whether the volume is protected. If this attribute is displayed, the volume might be the one that is left in the storage system due to unsuccessful creation.

ODX

An ODX Buffer volume. ODX Buffer volumes cannot be protected.

• Storage Cluster

When the volume is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Enable" is displayed. When no volumes are used for the Storage Cluster function, "Disable" is displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Virtual Volume

When the volume is being used by the Virtual Volume function, "Enable" is displayed. When no volumes are used by the Virtual Volume function, "Disable" is displayed.

For $VVOL_META, "Disable" is displayed even if the relevant volume is being used by the Virtual Volume function. "$VVOL_META" is a system volume that is used for storing the management information (metadata) of the

Virtual Volume function.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Virtual Volume function.

• Allocation

The allocation method for the volume is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the volume type is other than "TPV" or "FTV".

Thin

Physical area is allocated to the target area of the volume when a write I/O is received.

Thick

Physical area is allocated to the whole area of the volume when volumes are created.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity (physically allocated capacity) of volume is displayed with "MB", "GB", or "TB".

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

The volume type is not "TPV" or "FTV"

Deduplication/Compression Volumes (*1)

803

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

*1: The used capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the TPP can be determined by checking the used capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume that is created in the TPP. The used capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume approximately corresponds to the total used capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the relevant TPP.

• Used Rate

The volume utilization is displayed between 0% - 100%.

Used Rate = Used Capacity / Capacity

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

The volume type is not "TPV" or "FTV"

Deduplication/Compression Volumes (*1)

*1: The used rate of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the TPP can be determined by checking the used rate of the DEDUP_SYS Volume that is created in the TPP. The used rate of the DEDUP_SYS Volume approximately corresponds to the total used rate of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the relevant TPP. Note that the data reduction rate for the TPP due to the Deduplication/Compression function can be checked in the [Thin Provisioning

Pool] screen. Refer to

"Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922) for details.

• Threshold

The threshold for monitoring the volume utilization is displayed between 1% - 100%.

If the "Used Rate" value exceeds the "Threshold", a Host Sense Key Code Qualifier is notified.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

The volume type is not "TPV" or "FTV"

Deduplication/Compression Volumes or Deduplication/Compression System Volumes

•

The threshold for TPPs can be checked in the [Threshold] screen. Refer to "Threshold (Thin Provisioning

Pool)" (page 930)

for details.

•

The threshold for FTRPs can be checked in the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen. Refer to "Flexible Tier Pool (Basic

Information)" (page 935) for details.

• External LU Information

Whether the volume inherits the External LU Information (*1) is displayed.

This item displays "Inherited" for External Volumes that inherit the External LU information while the usage is

"Migration" (if a data migration has not been performed or if a data migration is being performed).

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the following volumes.

Volumes that have inherited the External LU Information if a data migration has already been performed

External Volumes that do not inherit the External LU Information

Volumes of which the External LU Information is deleted

Volumes (or volumes created in RAID groups)

This item is displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

*1: External Drive identification information (such as UIDs, vendor IDs, and product IDs) that is used to access volumes from the host. For volumes that inherit the identification information and volumes that transfer the identification information to the relevant volumes, the host recognizes them as the same volumes.

• Veeam Snapshot Name

For volumes that can be operated from Veeam B&R, the following names are displayed.

If the volume is a copy destination of the Veeam copy session (or if the volume is a Veeam Snapshot Volume), the Veeam snapshot name is displayed. This is the name that is displayed on the operation screen of

Veeam B&R.

If the volume is a copy destination of the SnapOPC+ session, the volume name is displayed. This is the same as the "Name" that is displayed in the volume list.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the other volumes.

This item is displayed when the Veeam Storage Integration License is registered in the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100

S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, or the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2.

804

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External Volume specification

Volumes in the external storage system (External Drives) that transfer the External LU Information (*1) and are managed as volumes in the local storage system. The volume type is "Standard".

For the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function, the External Volume corresponds to the migration source volume. In the [Volume] screen, the External Volumes are displayed as volumes whose "Usage" is "Migration". The

[Delete], [Rename], and [Start RAID Migration] actions are available for External Volumes before the data migration. The following operations are not available before the data migration is complete:

• Format, expansion, and encryption of External Volumes

• Storage Migration that uses External Volumes as migration destinations (online Storage Migration/offline Storage Migration)

• Advanced Copy that uses External Volumes as copy sources or copy destinations

After the data migration is completed, External Volumes can be handled equivalently to normal volumes (or volumes created in RAID groups). However, volumes that inherit the "External LU Information" cannot be used for the

Storage Cluster function.

• Veeam Snapshot Volumes

A snapshot volume that is created by the Veeam Universal Storage Integration API in the Veeam Storage Inte-

gration environment. Refer to "Naming Conventions of Volumes" (page 1376)

for the default volume name.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

Type

Usage

Encryption

UID Mode

Process

Storage Cluster

Virtual Volume

Allocation

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the volume status that is to be displayed.

Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

Select the usage of the volume that is to be displayed.

"Migration" is displayed as an option only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

"Veeam" is displayed as an option only if the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

Select the encryption status of the volume that is to be displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

Select the UID status of the volume that is to be displayed.

Select which current process for the volume is to be displayed.

"Automatic Stop" and "Manual Stop" are displayed as options only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

Select the Storage Cluster function usage status for the volume that is to be displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

Select the Virtual Volume function usage status for the volume that is to be displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Virtual Volume function.

Select the allocation method of the volume that is to be displayed.

805

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (Host I/O)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Performance (Host I/O)

This function displays the performance information of the volumes for Host I/O.

Refer to "Note" in

"Performance (CM)" (page 705) for the acquisition requirements and specifications of the perfor-

mance information.

• When the performance monitoring function is stopped, "0" is displayed as the performance information.

• This function displays the parameters that are set in the [Modify Cache Parameters] function (Cache Page

Capacity, PL, FP, MWC, PSDC, SDDC, SS, SDS, and SPMC).

• This function displays the parameter (ALUA) that is set in the [Set ALUA] function.

• In this section, "volumes" include "External Volumes" if differentiation is not specifically required. Refer to

"External Volume specification" (page 805) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

• Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

• Type

The volume type is displayed.

Standard

WSV

TPV

FTV

SDV

SDPV

Temporary

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

Block/Dedup

The Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

806

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (Host I/O)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

GUI. Refer to "Modify Cache Parameters" (page 326)

Migration

An External Volume that is used for data migrations.

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

• Read IOPS

The read count per second is displayed.

• Write IOPS

The write count per second is displayed.

• Read Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is read per second is displayed.

• Write Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is written per second is displayed.

• Read Response Time

The average read response time per host I/O is displayed.

• Write Response Time

The average write response time per host I/O is displayed.

• Read Processing Time

The average read processing time per host I/O is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the controller firmware version V10L4x or later is used.

• Write Processing Time

The average write processing time per host I/O is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the controller firmware version V10L4x or later is used.

• Read Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for read) is displayed.

• Write Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for write) is displayed.

• Prefetch Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for prefetch) is displayed.

• Extreme Cache Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate of EXC for read I/O is displayed.

This item is displayed when EXC or EXCP is enabled for the ETERNUS DX. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for volumes where EXC and EXCP are disabled. Enabling or disabling EXC for the volume can be performed with ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser. Enabling or disabling EXCP for the volume can be performed with ETERNUS Web

for details.

The mode (Extreme Cache or Extreme Cache Pool) that is being used for the ETERNUS DX is displayed in the

[System Settings] screen. Refer to "System Settings" (page 694) for details.

A "-" (hyphen) is usually displayed for the following volumes:

• Volume type is "SDV" or "SDPV"

• Volumes that are created in a RAID group or a TPP configured with SSDs or SSD SEDs

• ODX Buffer volumes

807

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (Host I/O)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Cache Page Capacity

The cache page capacity is displayed.

When the cache page capacity is "-" (hyphen), there is no limit for the cache capacity.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the volume type is "TPV", "FTV", or "WSV". Note that a "-" (hyphen) is displayed for a "Standard" type volume that is concatenated by the LUN concatenation function.

• PL

The prefetch limit is displayed. If PL is "0", prefetch is not performed.

• FP

The selected usage for the Force Prefetch Mode, which performs forcible prefetching for cache, is displayed.

Perform prefetch even if the sequential characteristics of the data access is not detected.

OFF

Perform prefetch only when the sequential characteristics of the data access is detected.

• MWC

The value of the Multi Write back Count is displayed.

• PSDC

The number of times that sequentiality of data access (Read I/O) is detected (value of the Prefetch Sequential

Detect Count) is displayed. If any sequential data is accessed for the number of times specified for PSDC, such access is determined as sequential access and prefetch is performed.

• SDDC

The number of times that sequentiality of data access (Write I/O) is detected (value of the Sequential Dirty

Detect Count) is displayed. If any sequential data is accessed for the number of times specified for SDDC, such access is determined as sequential access and prefetch is performed.

• SS

The value of the parameter (Sequential Slope) to determine the sequentiality of data access (Read I/O) is displayed. If the difference in addresses between the end LBA of the previous I/O and the start LBA of the current I/

O is within (SS setting + 1), it is determined as sequential data.

• SDS

The value of the parameter (Sequential Dirty Slope) to determine the sequentiality of data access (Write I/O) is displayed. If the difference in addresses between the end LBA of the previous I/O and the start LBA of the current I/O is within (SDS setting + 1), it is determined as sequential data.

• SPMC

The value of the parameter (Sequential Parallel Multi I/O Count) to determine the sequentiality of data access

(Read I/O and Write I/O) is displayed. If the difference in addresses between the start address of the previous I/O and the start address of the received I/O is within (I/O size x Specified value), it is determined as sequential data.

• ALUA

The set state for ALUA is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for volumes that cannot be mapped (*1).

Follow Host Response

Use the same "Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access" setting as the host response for the host group or the host.

ACTIVE / ACTIVE

All of the paths to the volume are regarded as being recommended paths. The use of a multipath driver determines which paths are used.

ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH

There are recommended paths and non-recommended paths for each volume. By using a CA port in the Controlling CM of a RAID group in which the volume belongs for the recommended paths (other ports are regarded as non-recommended paths), data migration between CMs (cross access) can be reduced.

808

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (Host I/O)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

*1: The following volumes cannot be mapped.

• "SDPV" or "Temporary" type volumes

• ODX Buffer volumes

• "Usage" is "File" or "System"

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Type

Usage

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

Select the usage of the volume that is to be displayed.

"Migration" is displayed as an option only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

"Veeam" is displayed as an option only if the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

809

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (QoS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Performance (QoS)

This function displays the performance information of the volume QoS for Host I/O.

IOPS, throughput, and the bandwidth limit for each volume can be checked.

Refer to "Note" in

"Performance (CM)" (page 705) for the acquisition requirements and specifications of the perfor-

mance information.

• The target volume types for this function are Standard, SDV, WSV, TPV (including NAS user volumes and Deduplication/Compression Volumes), and FTV. Note that the performance information is not displayed for ODX

Buffer volumes, NAS backup volumes, NAS system volumes, and Deduplication/Compression System Volumes.

• This function displays the performance information of volume QoS regardless of whether the QoS mode is enabled or disabled. If the QoS mode is disabled, the default bandwidth limit ("Unlimited") is displayed for all items.

• In this section, "volumes" include "External Volumes" if differentiation is not specifically required. Refer to

"External Volume specification" (page 805) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed.

Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

• Name

The volume name is displayed.

Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

• Type

The volume type is displayed.

Standard

TPV

FTV

WSV

SDV

810

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (QoS)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

Block/Dedup

The Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

System

System volumes for the Virtual Volume function.

Migration

An External Volume that is used for data migrations.

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

• IOPS

IOPS, the total number of reads and writes per second, is displayed.

• Throughput

Throughput, the total amount of read data and write data transferred per second, is displayed.

• Bandwidth Limit

The bandwidth limit for the volume is displayed.

If the bandwidth limit has not been configured for the volume, the default value ("Unlimited") is displayed.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Type

Usage

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

"TPV" and "FTV" are displayed as options only when the Thin Provisioning function is enabled.

Select the usage of the volume that is to be displayed.

"Migration" is displayed as an option only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

"Veeam" is displayed as an option only if the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

811

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Performance (Advanced Copy)

This function displays the performance information of the volumes for Advanced Copy.

Refer to "Note" in

"Performance (CM)" (page 705) for the acquisition requirements and specifications of the perfor-

mance information.

• The performance information is not displayed for Deduplication/Compression System Volumes.

• When the performance monitoring function is stopped, "0" is displayed as the performance information.

• In this section, "volumes" include "External Volumes" if differentiation is not specifically required. Refer to

"External Volume specification" (page 805) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

• Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

• Type

The volume type is displayed.

Standard

WSV

TPV

FTV

SDV

SDPV

Temporary

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

Block/Dedup

The Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

812

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Performance (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

Refer to "Extreme Cache Cache Hit Rate" (page 807) in

Migration

An External Volume that is used for data migrations.

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

• Read IOPS

The read count per second is displayed.

• Write IOPS

The write count per second is displayed.

• Read Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is read per second is displayed.

• Write Throughput

The amount of transferred data that is written per second is displayed.

• Read Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for read) is displayed.

• Write Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for write) is displayed.

• Prefetch Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate (for prefetch) is displayed.

• Extreme Cache Cache Hit Rate

The cache hit rate of EXC for read I/O is displayed.

"Performance (Host I/O)"

for details.

A "-" (hyphen) is usually displayed for the following volumes:

• Volume type is "SDV" or "SDPV"

• Volumes that are created in a RAID group or a TPP configured with SSDs or SSD SEDs

• ODX Buffer volumes

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Type

Usage

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the volume type that is to be displayed.

Select the usage of the volume that is to be displayed.

"Migration" is displayed as an option only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

"Veeam" is displayed as an option only if the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

813

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

LUN Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

LUN Group

This function displays the LUN groups of each volume.

A LUN group is a group of Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs), which can be recognized by the host. The allocation information of LUNs and volumes in the ETERNUS DX/AF are configured to the LUN group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed.

• Name

The volume name is displayed.

• LUN Group Count

The total number of LUN groups for the volume and the number of ports to which the volume is allocated is displayed.

• LUN Group

The LUN group names of the volume are displayed. If the host, ports, and LUNs are allocated without specifying a host group or port group, the location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the ports is displayed.

If the volume is registered in multiple LUN groups or the volume is allocated to multiple ports, the multiple LUN group names and port locations are displayed.

When the volume does not belong to any LUN groups, or the volume is not allocated to any ports, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

LUN group name

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Storage Cluster

When the volume is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Enable" is displayed. When no volumes are used for the Storage Cluster function, "Disable" is displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

LUN Group

Storage Cluster

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the LUN group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the LUN group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the Storage Cluster function usage status for the volume that is to be displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

814

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Reservation

This function displays the reservation status of the volumes that are specified by a host.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The reservation status for volumes where the usage is "Block", "Block/Dedup", "Migration", and "Veeam" is dis-

played. Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

for details.

• In this section, "volumes" include "External Volumes" if differentiation is not specifically required. Refer to

"External Volume specification" (page 805) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Reservation)" (page 837)

for display items.

• Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Reservation)" (page 837)

for display items.

• LUN Group

When the host affinity setting is specified for a host that reserves the volume, the LUN group name is displayed.

If the host, ports, and LUNs are directly allocated (mapped), the location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the ports is displayed.

When the volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

LUN group name

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Host LUN

The host LUN, which is allocated to the volume, is displayed.

When the volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Registrant Count

The number of reservation keys registered in the volume is displayed.

815

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Reservation

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Reservation Type

When the volume is in persistent reservation status, one of the following persistent reservation types is displayed. When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, or when the volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

WE (Write Exclusive)

EA (Exclusive Access)

WE_RO (Write Exclusive-Registrants Only)

EA_RO (Exclusive Access-Registrants Only)

WE_AR (Write Exclusive-All Registrants)

EA_AR (Exclusive Access-All Registrants)

• Reservation Status

The volume reservation status is displayed.

Yes

In persistent reservation status

In reservation status, but not in persistent reservation status

"-" (hyphen)

Not in reservation status

• APTPL (*1)

Whether or not persistent reservation information is kept after the ETERNUS DX/AF has been shutdown/ rebooted is displayed. When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "No" is displayed. When the volume is not reserved, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

*1: Activate Persist Through Power Loss

Yes

The persistent reservation information is kept.

The persistent reservation information is not kept.

Filter setting

Name

LUN Group

Filter

Bottom of Registrant Count

Reservation Type

Reservation Status

APTPL

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the LUN group name or the port location information for the volume that is to be displayed.

When not using the LUN group name or port location information for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the minimum number of registrants for the volume that is to be displayed.

When not using the bottom of the registrant count, leave this item blank.

Select the reservation type of the volume that is to be displayed.

Select the reservation status of the volume that is to be displayed.

Select the APTPL of the volume that is to be displayed.

816

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Pinned Data

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Pinned Data

Volumes including pinned data are displayed.

"Pinned data" is the data left in the cache memory due to unsuccessful write-back to the volume from the cache memory.

• When a system message that indicates the detection of pinned data is displayed in the [Overview] screen, or when a "Pinned data" event is notified by Host Sense Key Code Qualifier or SNMP Trap, use this function to check the detected pinned data.

Use the [Setup Event Notification] function to specify whether to perform event notification when pinned data

is detected. Refer to "Setup Event Notification" (page 166) for details. Note that writing back, deleting, and

saving pinned data can be performed by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

• Deduplication/Compression Volumes are not displayed in the pinned data list.

• Pinned data is not created for External Volumes.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Pinned Data)" (page 838) for display items.

• Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Pinned Data)" (page 838) for display items.

• Pinned Data Count

The number of pinned data is displayed.

• Type

The volume type is displayed.

Standard

WSV

TPV

FTV

SDV

SDPV

Temporary

817

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Pinned Data

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166)

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

• RAID Group/TPP/FRTP No.

The following number is displayed:

If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group number to which the representative volume (*1) belongs is displayed.

*1: A volume for WSV, which is created by concatenating multiple RAID groups with striping, that belongs to the RAID group that is first in the concatenation order.

If the type is "TPV"

The TPP number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "FTV"

The FTRP number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

• RAID Group/TPP/FTRP Name

The following name is displayed:

If the type is "WSV"

The RAID group name to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "TPV"

The TPP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "FTV"

The FTRP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is not one of the types listed above

The RAID group name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

• Controlling CM

The Controlling CM of the RAID group to which the volume belongs is displayed.

818

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Bad Sector

The bad sector information is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When data for rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy is not read normally, bad sector information is recorded.

• When a system message that indicates the detection of bad sector is displayed in the [Overview] screen or when a "Bad data" event is notified by Host Sense Key Code Qualifier or an SNMP Trap, use this screen to check the detected bad sector.

Use the [Setup Event Notification] function to specify whether to perform event notification when a bad sector is detected. Refer to

for details. Note that the deletion of bad sector can be performed by a maintenance engineer who has the "Maintenance Operation" policy.

• Deduplication/Compression Volumes are not displayed in the bad sector list.

• A bad sector is not created for External Volumes.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed.

• Name

The volume name is displayed.

When the volume type is WSV or when the volume is concatenated by LUN concatenation, "Volume name (n/ m)" (n: nth volume in the concatenation order, m: number of concatenated volumes) is displayed.

• Type

The volume type is displayed.

Standard

WSV

TPV

FTV

SDV

SDPV

Temporary

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

819

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Bad Sector

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

catenated volumes). Refer to "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

• Error LBA

The start position of the bad sector information in the volume is displayed using the LBA.

When the volume type is WSV or when the volume is concatenated by LUN concatenation, the LBA for each volume that is concatenated (*1) is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the "Error Type" is "Dispersion".

• Error LBA Count

The number of LBAs from Error LBA of the bad sector information in the volume is displayed.

When the volume type is WSV or when the volume is concatenated by LUN concatenation, the LBA Count for each volume that is concatenated (*1) is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the "Error Type" is "Dispersion".

• Error Type

The number of bad sector information in the volume is displayed.

When one bad sector information exists in the volume: "Contiguity"

When multiple number of bad sector information exist in the volume: "Dispersion"

*1: Each volume is displayed in "volume name (n/m)" format (n: nth volume in the concatenation order, m: number of con-

for details.

820

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

This function displays the information of balancing TPVs.

When using the Thin Provisioning function, "Enable" the Thin Provisioning. Refer to "Set Thin Provisioning" (page

554) for details.

• Deduplication/Compression Volumes and Deduplication/Compression System Volumes are not displayed in the

TPV list because they are not targets for balancing.

• To check whether the Thin Provisioning function is enabled or disabled, refer to the

"Settings (Thin Provisioning)" (page 948) .

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)" (page 839) for display items.

• Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)" (page 839) for display items.

• Status

The volume status is displayed. Refer to

for detailed information of volume status.

• Type

The volume type (fixed to "TPV") is displayed.

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

Refer to "Process" (page 802) in

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

821

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

• Capacity

The total volume capacity is displayed.

• Balancing Level

The balancing level of the volume is displayed.

When the volume is balanced

High

When the volume is almost balanced

Middle

When the volume is not balancing well

Low

When the ETERNUS DX/AF is abnormal

"-" (hyphen)

• Process

A process that is being performed for the volume is displayed.

"Volume (Basic Information)"

for details.

Balancing

Formatting

Migrating

Optimizing Capacity

Reserved Optimizing Capacity

• Balancing Process

When "Process" is not "Balancing", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Status

The status of TPV balancing is displayed.

• Active

Running normally

• Error

Stopped due to an error

Progress

The progress of TPV balancing is displayed.

Work Vol. No.

The volume number undergoing TPV balancing is displayed.

Work Vol. Name

The volume name undergoing TPV balancing is displayed.

Error Code

The error code of TPV balancing is displayed when an error occurs.

Elapsed Time

The elapsed time of TPV balancing is displayed.

The displayed time is the elapsed time at the point when this screen is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

822

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Balancing Thin Provisioning Volume

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

Usage

Balancing Level

Process

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the status of the volume that is to be displayed.

Select the usage of the volume that is to be displayed.

"Migration" is displayed as an option only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

"Veeam" is displayed as an option only if the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

Select the balancing level of the volume that is to be displayed.

Select the process of the volume that is to be displayed.

823

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Snapshot

This function displays the snapshot configuration information of the NAS user volume.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The NAS user volume number is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Snapshot)" (page 841) for display items.

• Name

The NAS user volume name is displayed. Click this item to display the [Volume Detail] screen.

Refer to "Volume Detail (Snapshot)" (page 841) for display items.

• Status

The NAS user volume status is displayed.

When the volume status is normal, " Available" is displayed.

Refer to "Volume Status" (page 1412)

for detailed information of volume status.

• Capacity

The NAS user volume capacity is displayed.

• Snapshot

The snapshot information is displayed.

Mode

The collection mode for the snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Automatic

The snapshot is set from ETERNUS Web GUI, ETERNUS CLI, or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• Manual

The snapshot is set from VMware vSphere Web Client. Refer to "ETERNUS vCenter Plug-in User's Guide" for details.

Schedule

Status of the scheduled operation for snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set or if the collection mode (or the "Mode" setting) for snapshot is set to "Manual", a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Active

• Inactive

Session Status

The session status for the snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

824

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Snapshot

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Normal

Snapshot performs normally.

• Error

Some snapshots cannot be referenced due to an error.

If the session status of even one generation is error in the [Volume Detail] screen, "Error" is displayed for

this item. Refer to "Volume Detail (Snapshot)" (page 841) for details.

Schedule Day

The snapshot acquisition schedule (set day) is displayed.

If the snapshot schedule is specified for all the days of the week, "Every Day" is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set or if the collection mode (or the "Mode" setting) for snapshot is set to "Manual", a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Schedule Time

The snapshot acquisition schedule (set time) is displayed.

If the snapshot schedule is specified for all hours, "Every Hour" is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set or if the collection mode (or the "Mode" setting) for snapshot is set to "Manual", a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Number of Generations

The number of generations for the snapshot is displayed. If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• ETERNUS DX100 S4

1 - 64 (*1)

• ETERNUS DX200 S4

1 - 128 (*1)

• ETERNUS DX500 S4

1 - 128

• ETERNUS DX600 S4

1 - 128

• ETERNUS DX100 S3

1 - 16 (*2) or 1 - 64 (*1)

• ETERNUS DX200 S3

1 - 64 (*2) or 1 - 128 (*1)

• ETERNUS DX500 S3

1 - 128

• ETERNUS DX600 S3

1 - 128

*1: The maximum number of generations when "Memory Extension" described below is installed. For the ETERNUS

DX100 S4/DX100 S3, "Memory Extension" is used in the Unified Storage environment. For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/

DX200 S3, "Memory Extension" is used in the Unified Storage environment or for the Deduplication/Compression function.

• ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

16GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L53 or later)

• ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

32GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L33 or later

*2: The maximum number of generations when "Memory Extension" described below is installed.

• ETERNUS DX100 S3

8GB/CM

• ETERNUS DX200 S3

16GB/CM

RAID Group No.

The RAID group number that the snapshot destination SDV belongs to is displayed. If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

RAID Group Name

The RAID group name that the snapshot destination SDV belongs to is displayed. If the snapshot is not set, a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed.

825

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Snapshot

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

Mode

Schedule

Session Status

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the volume status that is to be displayed.

Select the snapshot collection mode of the volume that is to be displayed.

To display volumes without the snapshot setting, select "-" (hyphen).

Select the scheduled snapshot operation status of the volume that is to be displayed.

To display volumes without the snapshot setting, select "-" (hyphen).

Select the snapshot session status of the volume that is to be displayed.

To display volumes without the snapshot setting, select "-" (hyphen).

826

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volume Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link in the "Volume (Basic Information)" (page 799)

to display the detailed information of the target volume.

● Standard volume

● Standard volume (External Volume)

827

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

● TPV

● NAS user volume

● Deduplication/Compression Volume

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

828

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The volume status is displayed.

When the volume status is normal, " Available" is displayed.

Refer to

"Volume Status" (page 1412) for detailed information of RAID group status.

• Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed with a unit that is determined according to the actual volume size ("MB", "GB", or "TB").

• Capacity on RAID Group

The volume capacity is displayed with a unit that is determined according to the volume size secured in the

RAID group or External RAID Group ("MB", "GB", or "TB"). The capacity is also displayed with "KB".

While the capacity that is specified by the user when creating the volume is displayed in the "Capacity" field described above, the volume capacity that is actually secured in units of the basic volume size in the RAID group is displayed in this field. This item is displayed when the volume type is "Standard", "WSV", "SDV", "SDPV", or

"Temporary".

• Used Capacity

The used capacity (physically allocated capacity) of volume is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression Volume (*1).

This item is displayed when the volume type is "TPV" or "FTV".

• Used Rate

The volume utilization is displayed between 0% - 100%.

Used Rate = Used Capacity / Capacity

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression Volume (*1).

This item is displayed when the volume type is "TPV" or "FTV".

Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922) for details.

• Threshold

The threshold for monitoring the volume utilization is displayed between 1% - 100%.

If the "Used Rate" value exceeds the "Threshold", a Host Sense Key Code Qualifier is notified.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression Volume or the Deduplication/Compression System Volume.

This item is displayed when the volume type is "TPV" or "FTV".

•

The threshold for TPPs can be checked in the [Threshold] screen. Refer to "Threshold (Thin Provisioning

Pool)" (page 930)

for details.

•

The threshold for FTRPs can be checked in the [Flexible Tier Pool] screen. Refer to "Flexible Tier Pool (Basic

Information)" (page 935) for details.

• NAS FS Block Size

The block size of the NAS file system (NAS user volume) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the usage details of the volume is "NAS Data".

The maximum NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size vary depending on the block size of the

NAS file system. Refer to

"The maximum NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size of each "NAS FS

Block Size"" (page 293)

for details.

829

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• NAS FS Version

The NAS file system (NAS user volume) version is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the usage details of the volume is "NAS Data". For the maximum NAS user volume capacity for each "NAS FS Version", refer to

"The maximum NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size of each "NAS FS Block Size"" (page 293)

NAS FS Version Volume capacity expansion

N/A

Description

Available (*1)

The NAS user volumes that are created with the controller firmware version earlier than V10L21.

"NAS FS Block Size" is fixed to "256KB".

The NAS user volumes that are created with the controller firmware version

V10L21.

"NAS FS Block Size" is fixed to "256KB".

The NAS user volumes that are created with the controller firmware version

V10L31.

"NAS FS Block Size" is "8KB" or "32KB".

When creating a NAS user volume where the block size is "256KB", "2" is displayed for this item.

The NAS user volumes that are created with the controller firmware version

V10L33.

"NAS FS Block Size" is "8KB", "32KB", or "256KB".

The maximum NAS user volume capacity varies depending on whether the version is "3" or "4" or later.

The NAS user volumes that are created with the controller firmware versions

V10L51 and later.

"NAS FS Block Size" is "8KB", "32KB", or "256KB".

When the version is "5" or later, the quota information can be configured for each shared folder.

*1: Refer to

"Reconfigure NAS Volume" (page 300) and

"Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 292)

for details.

• If the file system format for the NAS user volume where the "NAS FS Version" is "1", "2", "3", or "4" is converted, the "NAS FS Version" is changed to "5". Refer to

"Reconfigure NAS Volume" (page 300)

for details.

Note that the "NAS FS Block Size" for the relevant NAS user volume is not changed.

• To configure the quota information for each shared folder to which the NAS user volume belongs when the

"NAS FS Version" is "2", "3", or "4", the file system must be changed. Use the [Reconfigure NAS Volume] function for Web GUI and execute the "start nas-fsck" ETERNUS CLI command to change the file system for the relevant NAS user volume. Refer to

"Add Quota Setting" (page 513)

for details.

If the "NAS FS Block Size" is "8KB" or "32KB" and the file system format for the NAS user volume where the "NAS

FS Version" is "3" is converted, the maximum capacity of the NAS user volume that can be created is expanded.

• RAID Group No.

The RAID group number or External RAID Group number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "WSV", the RAID group number to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is "TPV" or "FTV".

• RAID Group Name

The RAID group name or External RAID Group name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

If the type is "WSV", the RAID group name to which the representative volume belongs is displayed.

This item is not displayed when the volume type is "TPV" or "FTV".

• Thin Provisioning Pool No.

The TPP number to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the volume type is "TPV".

830

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Thin Provisioning Pool Name

The TPP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the volume type is "TPV".

• FTRP No.

The FTRP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the volume type is "FTV".

• FTRP Name

The FTRP name to which the volume belongs is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the volume type is "FTV".

• Encryption

The encryption status of the volume is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

"-" (hyphen)

SED

• Data Integrity

The volume protection method is displayed.

Default

Data is protected within the ETERNUS DX/AF.

T10-DIF

Data is protected with a T10-DIF compatible method in the ETERNUS DX/AF and the host paths. This method is available only when the host interface is FC.

• Wide Stripe Size

The Wide Stripe Size is displayed.

"Wide Stripe Size" is the size of the WSV Unit that is allocated to each RAID group in series. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the volume type is other than "WSV".

Normal

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID level (*1). The maximum size is 16MB or smaller.

Small

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID level (*1). The maximum size is 2MB or smaller. Note that when the basic size for a RAID group is larger than 2MB, the basic size is specified.

*1: The basic size (stripe size) when creating a volume. Refer to "Basic Size for each RAID Group" (page 1379)

for details.

• Reserved Deletion

The "Reserved Deletion" state of the SDPV is displayed.

If the SDPV is currently being used, the target SDPV status is changed to "Reserved Deletion". Refer to "Delete

Snap Data Pool Volume" (page 304)

for details.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the volume type is other than "SDPV".

Yes

SDPVs are in the "Reserved Deletion" state.

SDPVs are not in the "Reserved Deletion" state.

• UID

The UID is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression System Volume.

• If the External LU Information is deleted, the UID that is assigned by the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. Refer

to "Delete External LU Information" (page 346)

for details.

831

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• UID Mode

The UID status is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression System Volume.

Default

Custom

External

If the External LU Information is deleted, this item is changed from "External" to "Default". Refer to "Delete

External LU Information" (page 346) for details.

• Storage Cluster

When the volume is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Enable" is displayed. When no volumes are used for the Storage Cluster function, "Disable" is displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Virtual Volume

When the volume is being used by the Virtual Volume function, "Enable" is displayed. When no volumes are used by the Virtual Volume function, "Disable" is displayed.

For $VVOL_META, "Disable" is displayed even if the relevant volume is being used by the Virtual Volume function.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Virtual Volume function.

• Allocation

The allocation method for the volume is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the volume type is other than "TPV" or "FTV".

Thin

Thick

• Usage Details

The detailed usage of the volume is displayed.

When the usage is "Block"

"Block" is displayed. The volumes that are used for the SAN.

When the usage is "Block/Dedup"

"Block Dedup" is displayed. The Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

The volumes that have Deduplication, Compression, or both enabled when the volumes are created.

For this item, the Deduplication or Compression status is not displayed. The relevant volume is in one of the following conditions.

• Only Deduplication is enabled

• Only Compression is enabled

• Deduplication and Compression are enabled

To check the Deduplication or Compression status of the volume, refer to the Deduplication/ Compression status of the TPP to which the relevant volume belongs. Refer to

"Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922) for details.

When the usage is "File"

• NAS Data

The user volumes that are used for the NAS.

The NAS Data type volumes can be created by ETERNUS Web GUI.

• NAS Backup

The backup volumes that are used for the NAS.

The NAS Backup type volumes are created by ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

832

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• NAS Snapshot

The snapshot destination SDVs that are used for NAS.

NAS Snapshots are automatically created when performing the [Set Snapshot] function.

When the usage is "System"

• NAS CM#0 System (*1)

The system volumes that are used for CM#0 in the NAS system.

• NAS CM#1 System (*1)

The system volumes that are used for CM#1 in the NAS system.

• NAS FS Management (*1)

The system volumes that are used for NAS system file management.

• NAS CM#0 EX System (*2)

The NAS expanded system volume that is used to store NAS monitoring logs for CM#0 in the NAS system.

• NAS CM#1 EX System (*2)

The NAS expanded system volume that is used to store NAS monitoring logs for CM#1 in the NAS system.

• VVOL Metadata

The system volumes that are used for storing the management information (metadata) of the Virtual

Volume function.

This volume is automatically created when the Virtual Volume function is set to "Enable" and when VVOL is created from ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser for the first time.

• Dedup System (*3)

The Deduplication/Compression System Volumes (or DEDUP_SYS Volumes).

This volume is used to store data and meta data after the Deduplication/Compression process is complete.

• Dedup Map (*3)

The Deduplication/Compression System Volumes (or DEDUP_MAP Volumes).

This volume is used to store the mapping tables for obtaining the physical location information of

DEDUP_SYS Volumes from Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

*1: The volume is created automatically when NAS Data volumes are created.

*2: The volume is created by executing the "create volume" ETERNUS CLI command. Web GUI cannot be used to create these volumes. NAS volumes of which the usage is "System" is collectively referred to as "NAS system volumes" in this manual.

*3: The volume is created automatically when Deduplication/Compression (or the Deduplication/Compression function) for TPP is enabled.

When the usage is "Migration"

An External Volume that is used for data migrations.

When the usage is "Veeam"

A Veeam Snapshot Volume that is used by Veeam Storage Integration.

• Production Snapshot

A snapshot volume that is created by the backup job of Veeam B&R.

• Manual Snapshot

A snapshot volume that is created by the user from Veeam B&R at an arbitrary time.

• Auxiliary Snapshot

A volume that is temporarily created from Veeam B&R.

• Snapshot Clone

A volume that is created while restoring from Veeam B&R.

833

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Process

"Automatic Stop", or "Manual Stop" is displayed as "yy". "Optimizing Capacity" or "Reserved Optimizing Capacity" is displayed as "zz".

Note that "Automatic Stop" and "Manual Stop" are displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration

License has been registered.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Encrypting

Formatting

Migrating

Balancing

Optimizing Capacity

Reserved Optimizing Capacity

Automatic Stop

Manual Stop

Automatic Stop" or "Migrating : Manual Stop" is displayed for "Process" of the migration source volume.

The following items are displayed if "Manual Stop" is selected and a data synchronization is being performed between the migration source volumes and migration destination volumes even if the migration has been completed.

Usage Details

Item

Process

Migration Status

Progress

Migration source volume

Migration

Migrating : Manual Stop

Active

100 %

Migration destination volume

Block

Migrating

Active

100 %

• Migration Status

The RAID migration status is displayed.

This item is only displayed when using controller firmware version V10L4x or later, and when the process is

"Migrating".

Reserved

The RAID migration is in a reserved state.

Active

The RAID migration is operating normally.

Error

The RAID migration has been suspended due to an error.

"-" (hyphen)

A status other than the ones listed above.

• Progress

The progress of a process that is being performed is displayed with a bar and a rate (%). To display the latest progress, refresh the screen. If no process is being performed, or if the migration status is "Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

834

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Estimated Time Left

The estimated remaining time before formatting is complete is displayed. To display the latest estimated remaining time, refresh the screen. This item is not displayed when the process is other than "Formatting".

Calculating

The ETERNUS DX/AF is calculating the estimated remaining time.

30 days or more

The estimated remaining time is 30 days or more.

x days y h z min. (x: 1 - 29, y: 0 - 23, z: 0 - 59)

The estimated remaining time is more than one minute and less than 30 days. When the estimated remaining time is less than one day, the "days" value is omitted. When the estimated remaining time is less than one hour, the "days" and "hours" values are omitted.

Less than 1 min.

The estimated remaining time is less than one minute.

The "Estimated Time Left" value may increase or decrease due to the I/O load when displaying this item.

• Remaining Size

The remaining size of the unformatted volume is displayed. To display the latest size, refresh the screen. This item is not displayed when the process is other than "Formatting".

• Optimizing Capacity Progress

The progress of capacity optimization processes that are being performed is displayed with a bar and a ratio value. To display the latest progress for the capacity optimization, refresh the screen. When capacity optimization is not being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When the storage system status is "Not Ready", the field is blank.

• Total Device Space

The total space of the file system is displayed.

The "Total Device Space" indicates the NAS user volume capacity that is available for the user.

This item is displayed only when the usage details of the volume is "NAS Data".

• Used Device Space

The used space in the file system is displayed.

The "Used Device Space" indicates the NAS user volume capacity that has already been used by the user.

This item is displayed only when the usage details of the volume is "NAS Data".

• Free Device Space

The free space in the file system is displayed.

The "Free Device Space" indicates the NAS user volume capacity that will be available for the user.

This item is displayed only when the usage details of the volume is "NAS Data".

• File System Information

The mount state of the file system is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the usage details of the volume is "NAS Data".

• External LU Information

Whether the volume inherits the External LU Information is displayed.

This item displays "Inherited" for External Volumes that inherit the External LU information while the usage is

"Migration" (if a data migration has not been performed or if a data migration is being performed).

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the following volumes.

Volumes that have inherited the External LU Information if a data migration has already been performed

External Volumes that do not inherit the External LU Information

Volumes of which the External LU Information is deleted

Volumes (or volumes created in RAID groups)

This item is displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

835

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Veeam Snapshot Name

For volumes that can be operated from Veeam B&R, the following names are displayed.

Veeam B&R.

If the volume is a copy destination of the SnapOPC+ session, the volume name is displayed. This is the same as the "Name" that is displayed in the volume list.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the other volumes.

This item is displayed when the Veeam Storage Integration License is registered in the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100

S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, or the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2.

836

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Reservation)

The detailed information of reservation volume is displayed.

When reservation keys are registered in volumes, up to 64 host information is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Host WWN/iSCSI Name

The WWN or the iSCSI name of the host that can access the volume is displayed.

• CA Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the CA port that connects to the host is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Reservation Key

The reservation key that is used for persistent reservation of the volume is displayed.

When no reservation keys exist, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Hold Reservation

Whether the target reservation key is used for persistent reservation is displayed.

When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "No" is displayed.

Yes

In persistent reservation status

Not in persistent reservation status

837

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Pinned Data)

The detailed information of pinned data is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• LBA

The location of the pinned data in the volume is displayed using the Logical Block Address (LBA).

• RC

The reason (Reason Code) that created the pinned data is displayed.

• SK

The Sense Key (SK) part is displayed from the sense information that is output when the pinned data is created.

• ASC

Additional Sense Code (ASC) part is displayed from the sense information that is output when the pinned data is created.

• ASCQ

Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) part is displayed from the sense information that is output when the pinned data is created.

Filter setting

Filter

LBA

ASC

ASCQ

Description

Input the LBA that is to be displayed.

When not using the LBA for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the RC that is to be displayed.

When not using the RC for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the SK that is to be displayed.

When not using the SK for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the ASC that is to be displayed.

When not using the ASC for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the ASCQ that is to be displayed.

When not using the ASCQ for filtering, leave this item blank.

838

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Balancing TPV)

The detailed information of TPV balancing is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The RAID group number that configures the TPP to which the target TPV belongs is displayed.

• RAID Group

The name of the RAID group that configures the TPP to which the target TPV belongs is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The capacity of each RAID group that is currently allocated to the target TPV is displayed.

Note that it is not the capacity after re-allocating the physical capacity in the relevant TPV to the RAID groups in the TPP.

839

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Used RAID Group)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volume Detail (Used RAID Group)

The detailed information of LUN concatenation or WSV is displayed. This screen is not displayed when the volume type is "TPV" and "FTV".

The information for a RAID group that is being used is displayed in the following order. Note that sorting of the display contents is not available.

• When the volume type is "Standard", volumes are displayed in concatenation order with LUN Concatenation

• When the volume type is "WSV", volumes are displayed according to the concatenation number of the WSV Unit

(the order of allocating the WSV unit to the RAID group)

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• RAID Group No.

The RAID group number to which the concatenated volume or WSV Unit belongs is displayed.

• RAID Group Name

The RAID group name to which the concatenated volume or WSV Unit belongs is displayed.

• Capacity

The capacity of the concatenated volume or the WSV Unit is displayed. The volume capacity is displayed with

"MB", "GB", or "TB". The unit of measurement for the capacity is determined according to the actual volume size.

The capacity is also displayed with "KB".

• Capacity on RAID Group

The capacity that is secured in the RAID group by the concatenated volume or the WSV Unit is displayed. The volume capacity is displayed with "MB", "GB", or "TB". The unit of measurement for the capacity is determined according to the actual volume size. The capacity is also displayed with "KB".

840

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Snapshot)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volume Detail (Snapshot)

The detailed information of the snapshot is displayed.

This screen is displayed only for NAS user volumes (volumes of which the "Usage Details" are "NAS Data").

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Volume Information

• Status

The NAS user volume status is displayed.

Refer to "Volume Status" (page 1412)

for detailed information of volume status.

• Capacity

The NAS user volume capacity is displayed.

• Usage Details

The usage details of the NAS user volume are displayed.

• Snapshot

The snapshot information is displayed.

Mode

The collection mode for the snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Automatic

• Manual

Schedule

Status of the scheduled operation for snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set or if the collection mode (or the "Mode" setting) for snapshot is set to "Manual", a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Active

• Inactive

Session Status

The session status for the snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Normal

• Error

841

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

10. Volume Status

Volume Detail (Snapshot)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Schedule Day

The snapshot acquisition schedule (set day) is displayed.

If the snapshot schedule is specified for all the days of the week, "Every Day" is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set or if the collection mode (or the "Mode" setting) for snapshot is set to "Manual", a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Schedule Time

The snapshot acquisition schedule (set time) is displayed.

If the snapshot schedule is specified for all hours, "Every Hour" is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set or if the collection mode (or the "Mode" setting) for snapshot is set to "Manual", a

"-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Number of Generations

The number of generations for the snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

RAID Group No.

The RAID group number that the snapshot destination SDV belongs to is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

RAID Group Name

The RAID group name that the snapshot destination SDV belongs to is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

● Snapshot Information

• Snapshot Date

The date and time of when the snapshot was acquired is displayed in descending order.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (2001-2037), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 -

23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Session Status

The session status for the snapshot is displayed.

If the snapshot is not set, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Normal

Snapshot performs normally.

Error

The snapshot is stopped due to an error.

• Volume No.

The volume number for the snapshot destination SDV is displayed.

• Volume Name

The volume name for the snapshot destination SDV is displayed.

842

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Connectivity status displays the status information of volumes.

Connectivity status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Connectivity

Host Group

FC iSCSI

SAS

Port Group

FC iSCSI

SAS

FCoE

LUN Group

Host Response

CA Reset Group

Host-LU QoS

Host QoS

FC/FCoE iSCSI

SAS

Port QoS

FC iSCSI

SAS

FCoE

LU QoS Group

NAS

NAS Interface

Environment Settings

Quota Management

Meta Cache Distribution

Category Connectivity status screen

Connectivity (Basic Information)

FC/FCoE Host QoS iSCSI Host QoS

Meta Cache Distribution

Detailed information of the current settings can be displayed from the following screens:

•

Host Affinity Detail (Host Group - CA Port Group - LUN Group Setting)

•

Host Affinity Detail (Host - CA Port - LUN Group Setting)

•

Host Group Detail

•

LUN Group Detail

•

Host-LU QoS Performance Information

•

LUN Group : LU QoS Group Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

843

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Connectivity (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Connectivity (Basic Information)

The list of the host affinities is displayed.

When the target connection is "Host Group - CA Port Group", a host affinity is a group that defines an association between a "Host Group", a "CA Port Group", and a "LUN Group". When the target connection is "Host - CA Port", a host affinity is a group that defines an association between a "Host", a "CA Port", and a "LUN Group".

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Host Group

The "Host Group Name" with the host affinity setting is displayed.

Instead of specific host groups, if any host can be connected, "All" is displayed.

By clicking "Host Group Name" or "All",

"Host Affinity Detail (Host Group - CA Port Group - LUN Group Setting)"

(page 847) is displayed. Regardless of whether the host belongs to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed if

the host affinity setting is specified when selecting a host.

By clicking "-" (hyphen),

"Host Affinity Detail (Host - CA Port - LUN Group Setting)" (page 848)

is displayed.

• Host

The "Host Name" with the host affinity setting is displayed.

Instead of specific hosts, if any host can be connected, "All" is displayed.

When setting the host affinity with the host group specification, the host name that configures the host group is displayed. If "All" has been selected for the host group, "All" is displayed for the host.

• CA Port Group

The CA port group names for which the host affinity setting is configured are displayed.

Regardless of whether the CA port belongs to a CA port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed if the host affinity setting is specified for a CA port.

• CA Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the CA port with the host affinity setting is displayed.

When setting the host affinity with the CA port group specifications, the location information of the CA port that configures the CA port group is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• LUN Group

The names of the LUN groups with host affinity settings are displayed.

When LUNs are directly allocated to the CA port (when LUN mapping is created) by an application other than

ETERNUS Web GUI, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

844

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Connectivity (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Host Response

One of the following host responses is displayed.

Host response that is allocated to the host group

Host response that is allocated to the host

If any hosts can be connected ("All" is displayed in the "Host" field), the host response that was selected when setting the host affinity

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Default

• Virtual Volume

When the host affinity is being used by the Virtual Volume function, "Enable" is displayed. When the host affinity is not used for the Virtual Volume function, "Disable" is displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Virtual Volume function.

Host affinities of which the Virtual Volume function is enabled cannot be modified by using ETERNUS Web GUI.

To change host affinities, use the ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

Display Examples of Host Affinities

Display examples of host affinities are shown in the following table.

Example

No.

Example

Host

Group

Host_

Group_ xxx

Example

All

Host

Host_1

Show...

All

Display contents

CA Port

Group

CA Port

Port_

Group_ xxx

CM#0

CA#0

Port#0

Show...

Port_

Group_ yyy

LUN

Group

LUN_

Group_ xxx

CM#0

CA#1

Port#1

LUN_

Group_ yyy

Host

Response

Host_

Response1

Host_

Response2

Description

The host affinity setting has been configured in "Host_Group_xxx",

"Port_Group_xxx" and

"LUN_Group_xxx".

Member hosts in "Host_Group_xxx" reference the same LUN group

"LUN_Group_xxx".

In the host field, the name of the host that configures

"Host_Group_xxx" is displayed.

In the CA port field, the location information of the CA port that configures

"Port_Group_xxx" is displayed.

Refer to "Example 6" for display example when clicking the [Show...] link in the "Host" field or the "CA Port" field.

Any host can be the target.

All member ports in the

"Port_Group_yyy" reference the specified LUN group "LUN_Group_yyy". In the CA port field, the location information of the CA port that configures

"Port_Group_yyy" is displayed.

845

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Connectivity (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Example

No.

–

Host

Group

Example

–

Example

–

Example

Host_

Group_ xxx

Host

Host_z –

Display contents

CA Port

Group

CA Port

CM#0

CA#0

Port#0

All –

All

Host_1

Host_2

Host_3

Hide...

–

Port_

Group_ xxx

CM#1

CA#1

Port#1

CM#0

CA#1

Port#1

CM#0

CA#0

Port#0

CM#1

CA#0

Port#0

Hide...

LUN

Group

LUN_

Group_ zzz

LUN_

Group_ www

–

LUN_

Group_ xxx

Description

Host

Response

Host_

Response3

Host_

Response4

Host_

Response5

Host_

Response1

Hosts, CA ports, and LUN groups are allocated without specifying a host group or CA port group.

CA ports and LUN groups are allocated without specifying a host group or CA port group.

LUN mapping is configured to CA port

"CM#0 CA#1 Port#1" by an application other than ETERNUS Web GUI.

Display example when the [Show...] link for the "Host" field or the "CA

Port" field is clicked in Example 1. In the host field, the names of all the hosts that configure

"Host_Group_xxx" are displayed. In the CA port field, the location information of all the CA ports that configure "Port_Group_xxx" is displayed.

Refer to "Example 1" for display example when clicking the [Hide...] link in the "Host" field or the "CA Port" field.

Filter setting

Filter

Host Group

Host

CA Port Group

CA Port

LUN Group

Host Response

Virtual Volume

Description

Input the name of the host group configuring the host affinity that is to be displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the host configuring the host affinity that is to be displayed.

When not using the host name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the CA port group configuring the host affinity that is to be displayed.

When not using the CA port group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the location information of the CA port configuring the host affinity that is to be displayed.

Input the name of the LUN group configuring the host affinity that is to be displayed.

When not using the LUN group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the name of the host response for the host affinity that is to be displayed.

Select the set state of the Virtual Volume function for the host affinity that is to be displayed.

This item is only displayed when "Enable" is selected for the Virtual Volume function.

846

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Connectivity (Basic Information)

Host Affinity Detail (Host Group - CA Port Group - LUN Group Setting)

The details of the host affinity are displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Host Group - CA Port Group - LUN Group Setting

• Host Group

The selected host group name or "All" is displayed.

• CA Port Group

The CA port group that is allocated to the selected host group is displayed.

• LUN Group

The LUN group that is allocated to the selected host group is displayed.

• Veeam Storage Integration

When the LUN group that is associated with the selected host group is being used for Veeam Storage Integration, "Yes" is displayed. When that LUN group is not used for Veeam Storage Integration, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

● Host - CA Port Connection

• Host

Member hosts in the selected host group is displayed.

If "All" has been selected for the host group, "All" is also displayed for the host.

• CA Port

The location information of the CA port which has the host affinity setting with the relevant host is displayed.

847

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Connectivity (Basic Information)

Host Affinity Detail (Host - CA Port - LUN Group Setting)

The detailed information of host affinities is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Host - CA Port - LUN Group Setting

• Host

The selected host name or "All" is displayed.

• CA Port

The location information of the CA port, which is allocated with the selected host, is displayed.

• LUN Group

The LUN group that is allocated with the selected host, or a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Veeam Storage Integration

When the LUN group that is associated with the selected host is being used for Veeam Storage Integration, "Yes" is displayed. When that LUN group is not used for Veeam Storage Integration, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

848

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

The list of the host groups is displayed.

A host group is a group of hosts (HBAs) that are allowed to access the volume (LUN group).

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Name

The host group name is displayed. Click this item to display "Host Group Detail" (page 850) .

• Type

The interface type of the host registered in the host group is displayed.

• Status

Whether the host group is used ("Active") or not ("Inactive") for the host affinity settings is displayed.

"Host affinity setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group".

Active

The host group is used for the host affinity settings.

Inactive

The host group is not used for the host affinity settings.

• Host Response

The host response name that has been assigned to a host group is displayed.

• Number of Hosts

The number of hosts that have been registered in the host group is displayed.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Type

Status

Host Response

Description

Input the host group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the interface type of the host group that is to be displayed.

Select the set state of the host affinity for the host group that is to be displayed.

Select the name of the host response that is assigned to the host group that is to be displayed.

849

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

Host Group Detail

The details of the host group are displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Host Group Information

• Name

The host group name is displayed.

• Host Response

The host response, which has been assigned to a host group, is displayed.

• Status

Whether the host group is "Active" or "Inactive" in the host affinity setting is displayed.

• Number of Hosts

The number of hosts, which have been registered in the host group, is displayed.

● Host List

• Name

The host name is displayed.

• WWN

When the host interface type is "FC/FCoE", the WWN of the host is displayed.

• iSCSI Name

When the host interface type is "iSCSI", the iSCSI name of the host is displayed.

• SAS Address

When the host interface type is "SAS", the SAS address of the host is displayed.

• Other Host Group

The other host group names to which the host belongs are displayed.

If the host belongs to only one host group, the field is blank.

850

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

FC/FCoE Host

In this screen, registered FC hosts in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

The interface types "FC" and "FCoE" are both regarded as "FC". Both "FC host" and "FCoE host" are abbreviated as "FC host" in this section.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The FC host number is displayed.

• Name

The FC host name is displayed.

• WWN

The FC host WWN is displayed.

• Host Group

The host group name, to which the FC host belongs, is displayed.

If the FC host does not belong to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• CA Port Group

The name of the CA port group that has the host affinity setting with the FC host is displayed.

If no CA port group with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• CA Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the CA port that has the host affinity setting with the FC host is displayed.

If no CA port with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Host Response

The host response that is assigned to the FC host or to the host group of the FC host is displayed.

851

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Status

Whether the host affinity setting is applied to the FC host is displayed.

Active

The host affinity setting is applied to the FC host.

Inactive

The host affinity setting is not applied to the FC host.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

WWN

Host Group

CA Port Group

CA Port

Host Response

Status

Description

Input the FC host name that is to be displayed.

When not using the name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the WWN for the FC host that is to be displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the host group to which the FC host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the host group for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the CA port group that has the host affinity setting with the FC host that is to be displayed.

When not using the CA port group for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the CA port that has the host affinity setting with the FC host that is to be displayed.

Select the name of the host response that is assigned to the FC host that is to be displayed.

Select the set state of the host affinity for the FC host that is to be displayed.

iSCSI Host

In this screen, registered iSCSI hosts in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The iSCSI host number is displayed.

• Name

The iSCSI host name is displayed.

• iSCSI Name

The iSCSI name of the iSCSI host is displayed.

• Host Group

The host group name, to which the iSCSI host belongs, is displayed.

If the iSCSI host does not belong to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

852

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• CA Port Group

The name of the CA port group that has the host affinity setting with the iSCSI host is displayed.

If no CA port group with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• CA Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the CA port that has the host affinity setting with the iSCSI host is displayed.

If no CA port with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Host Response

The host response that is assigned to the iSCSI host or to the host group of the iSCSI host is displayed.

• Status

Whether the host affinity setting is applied to the iSCSI host is displayed.

Active

The host affinity setting is applied to the iSCSI host.

Inactive

The host affinity setting is not applied to the iSCSI host.

• IP Version

The IP version when the IP address was registered for the iSCSI host is displayed.

• IP Address

The IP address of the iSCSI host is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation" (page 854) for

details.

If the IP address is not specified, the field is blank.

• Alias Name

The iSCSI host Alias Name is displayed.

If the Alias Name is not set, the field is blank.

• CHAP User ID

The CHAP user name of the iSCSI host is displayed.

If the CHAP user ID is not specified, the field is blank.

Filter setting

Name iSCSI Name

Filter

Host Group

CA Port Group

CA Port

Host Response

Status

IP Version

Description

Input the iSCSI host name that is to be displayed.

When not using the name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the iSCSI name of the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

When not using the iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the host group to which the iSCSI host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the host group for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the CA port group that has the host affinity setting with the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

When not using the CA port group for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the CA port that has the host affinity setting with the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

Select the name of the host response that is assigned to the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

Select the set state of the host affinity for the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

Select the IP version for the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

853

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

IP Address

Filter

Alias Name

Description

Input the IP address for the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

The iSCSI hosts that matching the beginning of the entered IP address are displayed.

When not using the IP address for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the Alias name of the iSCSI host that is to be displayed.

When not using the Alias name for filtering, leave this item blank.

■ IPv6 Address Notation

Since the IPv6 address is 128-bit and extremely long, this address is displayed using "xxxx", which describes 16-bit in hexadecimals as being one block that is separated by colons (":").

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

• Use 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters) for inputting an IPv6 address.

• The current setting is displayed with 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

• Up to 128-bit

• The first 64-bit (prefix) of the link local address is fixed to "fe80::".

The following three abbreviation methods are available for IPv6 addresses:

(1) Omission of the first "0" of a block that follows consecutive zeros.

[Example] 2001:1000:0120:0000:0000:0123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

(2) Replacement of "0000" blocks with "0".

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0000:0000:123:0000:0000

2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

(3) Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is performed only once.

[Example] 2001:1000:120:0:0:123:0:0

2001:1000:120::123:0:0 is OK

2001:1000:120::123:: is not allowed

(Replacement of a block with consecutive zeros by "::" is allowed only once.)

854

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

SAS Host

In this screen, registered SAS hosts in the ETERNUS DX are displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The SAS host number is displayed.

• Name

The SAS host name is displayed.

• SAS Address

The SAS address of the SAS host is displayed.

• Host Group

The host group name, to which the SAS host belongs, is displayed.

If the SAS host does not belong to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• CA Port Group

The name of the CA port group that has the host affinity setting with the SAS host is displayed.

If no CA port group with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• CA Port

The location information of the CA port that has the host affinity setting with the SAS host is displayed.

If no CA port with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Host Response

The host response that is assigned to the SAS host or to the host group of the SAS host is displayed.

• Status

Whether the host affinity setting is applied to the SAS host is displayed.

Active

The host affinity setting is applied to the SAS host.

Inactive

The host affinity setting is not applied to the SAS host.

855

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Group

Filter setting

Filter

Name

SAS Address

Host Group

CA Port Group

CA Port

Host Response

Status

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Description

Input the SAS host name that is to be displayed.

When not using the name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the SAS address for the SAS host that is to be displayed.

When not using the SAS address for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the host group to which the SAS host that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the host group for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the CA port group that has the host affinity setting with the SAS host that is to be displayed.

When not using the CA port group for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the CA port that has the host affinity setting with the SAS host that is to be displayed.

Select the name of the host response that is assigned to the SAS host that is to be displayed.

Select the set state of the host affinity for the SAS host that is to be displayed.

856

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

A list of the CA port groups is displayed.

A CA port group is a group of host interface ports that are allowed to access the volume (LUN group).

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Name

The port group name is displayed.

• Type

The type of the CA port group is displayed.

iSCSI

SAS

FCoE

• CA Port Group Member

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the port, which is a CA port group member, is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Status

Whether the CA port group is used ("Active") or not ("Inactive") for the host affinity settings is displayed.

"Host affinity setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group" and "LUN Group".

Active

The CA port group is used for the host affinity settings.

Inactive

The CA port group is not used for the host affinity settings.

857

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Type

CA Port Group Member

Status

Description

Input the CA port group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the type of the CA port group that is to be displayed.

Select the location information of the member port for the CA port group that is to be displayed.

Select the set state of the host affinity for the CA port group that is to be displayed.

FC Port

Parameters of the FC ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the target port is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Type

The CA type of the target port is displayed.

8G FC

16G FC

32G FC

"32G FC" is supported in the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, and the ETERNUS

AF250 S2/AF650 S2.

858

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SFP Type

The SFP type of the target port is displayed.

If an SFP is not installed, "Unmount" is displayed.

SFP+(SMF)

An SFP (8G LongWave) that is installed in an 8Gbit/s (maximum) FC port.

SFP+(MMF)

An SFP (8G SFP+) that is installed in an 8Gbit/s (maximum) FC port.

16G SFP+(SMF)

An SFP (16G LongWave) that is installed in a 16Gbit/s (maximum) FC port.

16G SFP+(MMF)

An SFP (16G SFP+) that is installed in a 16Gbit/s (maximum) FC port.

32G SFP+(MMF)

An SFP (32G SFP+) that is installed in a 32Gbit/s (maximum) FC port.

Unknown

Other than the above SFPs.

• Status

The status of the target port is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Port Mode

The mode of the target port is displayed.

CA/RA

Initiator

• Connection

The connection type of the target port is displayed.

Fabric

A connection type that enables simultaneous communication among multiple nodes through a Fibre Channel switch. This connection type can also be used for a direct connection when "Transfer Rate" is "16 Gbit/s" or more.

FC-AL

A connection type that connects multiple nodes in a loop.

• Loop ID

If the connection type of the target port is "FC-AL", the Loop ID is displayed.

"Loop ID" is an identification number of a node in a loop.

When the Loop ID is manually specified, the ID that is to be set for the port is displayed between 0x00 to 0x7D.

When the Loop ID is automatically specified, "Ascending" or "Descending" is displayed.

When the connection type of the target port is "Fabric", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the target port is displayed.

Auto-negotiation

4 Gbit/s

8 Gbit/s

16 Gbit/s

32 Gbit/s

• FC Frame Size

The frame size of the target port is displayed.

"FC Frame Size" specifies the length of the communication information.

512 bytes

1024 bytes

2048 bytes

859

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset from the server is performed, when the target port is connected to multiple servers.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA" or "Initiator".

I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancels) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is enabled or disabled is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA" or "Initiator".

• REC Line No.

The REC line number of the target port is displayed.

The REC line number is used to switch the communication path when a line fails.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "Initiator".

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy license has been registered.

• REC Transfer Mode

Whether the REC synchronous transfer mode, the REC asynchronous stack mode, the REC asynchronous consistency mode, or the REC asynchronous through mode is enabled or disabled for the target port is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "Initiator".

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy license has been registered.

Sync

When the REC synchronous transfer mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC synchronous transfer mode path.

Async Stack

When the REC asynchronous stack mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC asynchronous stack mode path.

Async Consistency

When the REC asynchronous consistency mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC asynchronous consistency mode path.

Async Through

When the REC asynchronous through mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC asynchronous through mode path.

• TFO Transfer Mode

Whether the TFO transfer mode is enabled or disabled for the target port is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "Initiator".

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• TFO WWN Mode

When the target port is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Custom" is displayed if WWN has been changed, and "Default" is displayed if no changes have been made.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA", "CA/RA", or "Initiator".

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• TFO Port

When the target port is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Used" is displayed, and "Unused" is displayed when the target port is not used.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Host Group

The name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the target port is displayed.

If no host group with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

860

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Port Group

The name of the port group to which the target port belongs is displayed.

If the target port does not belong to a port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• WWN

WWNs of all FC/FCoE hosts that have the host affinity setting with the target port are displayed.

If the host affinity setting is not configured, the field is blank.

Filter setting

Filter

Port

Type

Status

Host Group

Port Group

WWN

Description

Select the location information of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the CA type of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the status of the port that is to be displayed.

Input the name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the port group to which the port that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the port group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the WWN of the FC/FCoE host that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

iSCSI Port

Parameters of the iSCSI ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the target port is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

861

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

1G iSCSI

1Gbit/s iSCSI. The port mode can be changed (CA, RA, or CA/RA).

10G iSCSI

10Gbit/s iSCSI. The port mode can be changed (CA, RA, or CA/RA).

10G Base-T iSCSI

10Gbit/s iSCSI. The port mode can be changed (CA, RA, or CA/RA). This port can be installed in the ETERNUS

DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, and the

ETERNUS AF250.

• Status

The status of the target port is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Port Mode

The mode of the target port is displayed.

CA/RA

• Multiple VLAN

Whether the Multiple VLAN is enabled or disabled for the target port is displayed. "Multiple VLAN" is a function that enables up to 16 pieces of VLAN information (IP address information) to be registered for each port.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA".

• Number of IP Addresses

The number of IP addresses that are used for the relevant port is displayed. When "Multiple VLAN" is enabled, the number of IP addresses that are registered in the port is displayed. When "Multiple VLAN" is disabled or "-" is displayed in the "Multiple VLAN" field, "1" is displayed.

• Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the target port is displayed. All transfers are full-duplex.

Auto-negotiation

1Gbit/s

10Gbit/s

100Mbit/s

• Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset from the server is performed, when the target port is connected to multiple servers. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA".

I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancels) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is enabled or disabled is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "RA".

• iSCSI Name

The iSCSI name of the target port is displayed.

• Alias Name

The Alias Name of the target port is displayed.

If the Alias Name is not specified, the field is blank.

862

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Bandwidth Limit

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for this item.

• MTU

The MTU size of the target port is displayed.

"Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)" is the maximum amount of data that can be transmitted at the one time over the communication network.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

• CHAP

When CHAP authentication for the target port is enabled, "ON" is displayed. If the authentication is disabled,

"OFF" is displayed.

When the "Port Mode" is "CA/RA", this item is displayed in "x / y" format.

x: The CHAP authentication status of the CA port ("ON" or "OFF") y: The CHAP authentication status of the RA port ("ON" or "OFF")

• REC Line No.

The REC line number of the target port is displayed.

The REC line number is used to switch the communication path when a line fails.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy license has been registered.

• REC Transfer Mode

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy license has been registered.

Sync

When the REC synchronous transfer mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC synchronous transfer mode path.

Async Stack

When the REC asynchronous stack mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC asynchronous stack mode path.

Async Consistency

When the REC asynchronous consistency mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC asynchronous consistency mode path.

Async Through

When the REC asynchronous through mode is enabled, the target port can be used as an REC asynchronous through mode path.

• TFO Transfer Mode

Whether the TFO transfer mode is enabled or disabled for the target port is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port mode is "CA".

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• TFO Port

When the target port is being used by the Storage Cluster function, "Used" is displayed, and "Unused" is displayed when the target port is not used.

This item is only displayed when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Host Group

The name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the target port is displayed.

If no host group with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Port Group

The name of the port group to which the target port belongs is displayed.

If the target port does not belong to a port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Host iSCSI Name iSCSI names of all iSCSI hosts that have the host affinity setting with the target port are displayed.

If the host affinity setting is not configured, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

863

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Filter setting

Filter

Port

Type

Status

Host Group

Port Group

Host iSCSI Name

Description

Select the location information of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the type of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the status of the port that is to be displayed.

Input the name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the port group to which the port that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the port group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the host iSCSI name of the iSCSI host that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the host iSCSI name for filtering, leave this item blank.

SAS Port

Parameters of the SAS ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX are displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

• Type

The CA type of the target port is displayed.

6G SAS

12G SAS

• "6G SAS" is supported in the ETERNUS DX60 S4 and the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3.

• "12G SAS" is supported in the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4.

• Status

The status of the target port is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

864

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Transfer Rate

The transfer speed of the target port is displayed.

Auto-negotiation

1.5 Gbit/s

3 Gbit/s

6 Gbit/s

12 Gbit/s

• Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the target port is connected to multiple servers.

I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is enabled or disabled is displayed.

• Host Group

The name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the target port is displayed.

If no host group with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Port Group

The name of the port group to which the target port belongs is displayed.

If the target port does not belong to a port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• SAS Address

SAS addresses of all SAS hosts that have the host affinity setting with the target port are displayed.

If the host affinity setting is not configured, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Filter setting

Filter

Port

Type

Status

Host Group

Port Group

SAS Address

Description

Select the location information of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the type of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the status of the port that is to be displayed.

Input the name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the port group to which the port that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the port group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the SAS Address of the SAS host that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the SAS address for filtering, leave this item blank.

865

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

FCoE Port

Parameters of the FCoE ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX are displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of the target port is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Type

The CA type (fixed at "FCoE") of the target port is displayed.

• Status

The status of the target port is displayed. Refer to "Component Status" (page 1415) for details.

• Port Mode

The mode (fixed at "CA") of the target port is displayed.

• Transfer Rate

The transfer speed (fixed at "10 Gbit/s") of the target port is displayed.

• FC Frame Size

The frame size of the target port is displayed.

"FC Frame Size" specifies the length of the communication information.

512 bytes

1024 bytes

2048 bytes

• VLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the target port is displayed.

When the VLAN ID is manually specified, the VLAN ID is displayed between 0 - 4095.

When the VLAN ID is automatically specified, "Automatic" is displayed.

• Fabric Name

The fabric name of the target port is displayed.

When the fabric name is manually specified, the specified fabric name is displayed.

When the fabric name is automatically specified, "Automatic" is displayed.

866

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Port Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Reset Scope

The reset scope of the target port is displayed.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset from the server is performed, when the target port is connected to multiple servers.

I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancels) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Whether the function to release the reservation status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset is enabled or disabled is displayed.

• Host Group

The name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the target port is displayed.

If no host group with the host affinity setting exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Port Group

The name of the port group to which the target port belongs is displayed.

If the target port does not belong to a port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• WWN

WWNs of all FC/FCoE hosts that have the host affinity setting with the target port are displayed.

If the host affinity setting is not configured, the field is blank.

Filter setting

Filter

Port

Type

Status

Host Group

Port Group

WWN

Description

Select the location information of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the CA type of the port that is to be displayed.

Select the status of the port that is to be displayed.

Input the name of the host group that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the host group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the name of the port group to which the port that is to be displayed belongs.

When not using the port group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the WWN of the FC/FCoE host that has the host affinity setting with the port that is to be displayed.

When not using the WWN for filtering, leave this item blank.

867

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

LUN Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

LUN Group

A list of the LUN groups is displayed.

A LUN group is a group of volumes that can be accessed from the host. The allocation information of host LUNs and volumes in the ETERNUS DX/AF are configured to the LUN group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The LUN group number is displayed. By clicking this item,

"LUN Group Detail" (page 869)

is displayed.

• Name

The LUN group name is displayed. By clicking this item, "LUN Group Detail" (page 869)

is displayed.

• Status

Whether the LUN group is used ("Active") or not ("Inactive") for the host affinity settings is displayed.

"Host Affinity Setting" is to specify association between "Host Group", "CA Port Group", and "LUN Group" or association between "Host", "CA Port", "and "LUN Group".

Active

The LUN group is used for the host affinity settings.

Inactive

The LUN group is not used for the host affinity settings.

• Number of LUNs

The number of host LUNs to which the volumes are allocated in the LUN group is displayed.

• LUN Overlap

If volumes in the LUN group satisfy one or both of the following conditions, "Yes" is displayed. For any other conditions, the field is blank.

The volumes are allocated to different LUN groups.

The volumes are included in the mapping information, which is directly allocated to the CA port without specifying the host group or the CA port group.

• Storage Cluster

If volumes in the LUN group are used for the Storage Cluster function, "Enable" is displayed. If no volumes are used for the Storage Cluster function, "Disable" is displayed.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

868

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

LUN Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

Number of LUNs

Storage Cluster

Description

Input the LUN group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the LUN group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the LUN group status that is to be displayed.

Select the number of LUNs that is to be displayed.

Using "512LUN" as the standard, "  512" or "  512" can be selected.

Select "Enable" when displaying LUN groups with volumes that are used by the Storage Cluster function exists. Select "Disable" when displaying LUN groups without volumes used by the

Storage Cluster function.

This item is displayed only when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

LUN Group Detail

The detailed information of a LUN group is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Veeam Storage Integration

If the LUN group is used for Veeam Storage Integration, "Yes" is displayed. If the LUN group is not used for

Veeam Storage Integration, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the Veeam Storage Integration License has been registered.

• Host LUN

The host LUN is displayed.

• Volume No.

The volume number allocated to the host LUN is displayed.

• Name

The volume name allocated to the host LUN is displayed.

• Type

The volume type allocated to the host LUN is displayed.

Standard

WSV

TPV

FTV

SDV

869

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

LUN Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Capacity

The volume capacity allocated to the host LUN is displayed.

When the "Type" is "SDV", the logical capacity, which can be accessed from the host, is displayed.

• LUN Group

If the volume allocated to the host LUN is included in different LUN groups, that LUN group name is displayed. If the host, ports, and LUNs are allocated without specifying a host group or CA port group, the location information of the ports is displayed.

When a volume is not allocated to different LUN groups, the field is blank.

• UID

The volume UID allocated to the host LUN is displayed.

The UID is an identifier (storage system name) to specify a volume from the open system server.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the Deduplication/Compression System Volume.

This item is displayed only when the controller firmware version V10L4x or later is used.

870

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host Response

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host Response

The registered host responses are displayed.

The host response configures the appropriate operation mode on which the host makes connection. The usual host connection uses a recommended pattern or the default setting which have been arranged in advance in accordance with each OS type.

When customizing the host response in accordance with the OS type or the operating environment, refer to

"Add

Host Response" (page 457)

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Name

All of the host response names that have been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

Solaris MPxIO

HP-UX

AIX

AIX VxVM

VS850/SVC

BS2000

Host responses registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

Default

• Status

The usage of the host response ("Active" or "Inactive") is displayed.

Active

A host response which is being used on host, host group, or host affinity.

Inactive

A host response which is not being used on host, host group, or host affinity.

871

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

CA Reset Group

A list of the registered CA reset groups is displayed.

A "CA reset group" is a group of CA ports that are affected if the volumes are reset.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• CA Reset Group Member

The location information (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) of member ports of each

CA reset group is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

872

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host-LU QoS

A list of the registered Host-LU QoS groups is displayed.

The Host-LU QoS list shows the association between "Host", "CA Port", and "LUN Group", bandwidth limit (performance limits), and performance information.

• When using ETERNUS Web GUI, schedule settings for QoS parameters and displaying scheduled QoS parameters are not available. Use ETERNUS CLI to check the scheduled QoS parameters that are specified using ETER-

NUS CLI. ETERNUS Web GUI displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information that are specified by using ETERNUS Web GUI.

• Host-LU QoS does not support from LUN#1024 onward. If volumes are mapped from LUN#1024 onward, only the first 1024 LUNs (LUN#0 - LUN#1023) are displayed.

•

Whether the QoS mode is enabled or disabled can be checked in the action field. Refer to "Enable/Disable QoS"

(page 465) for details.

• Host-LU QoS starts its operation by configuring the bandwidth limit on a "hosts", "CA ports", or "LUNs", and enabling the QoS mode.

• This function displays the performance information that is obtained during performance monitoring regardless of whether the QoS mode is enabled or disabled. When the performance information is displayed before stopping performance monitoring, the performance information that is obtained from the start time until the time when displaying the performance information is requested is displayed. This function displays the total performance information for the host and the performance information for each host LUN.

• The performance information of each CA port can also be displayed. Refer to

"Port QoS (Basic)" (page 882)

for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Host : Bandwidth Limit

Host

The host name for which the host affinity setting is configured is displayed.

If any host can be the connection target, "All" is displayed.

Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

If "All" has been selected for hosts, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Click the [Host : Bandwidth Limit] link to display the total performance information for the host and the perfor-

mance information of each LUN. Refer to "Host-LU QoS Performance Information" (page 874) for details.

873

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Host Group

If a host belongs to a host group, the host group name is displayed. If a host does not belongs to the host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If any host can be the connection target, "All" is displayed.

• CA Port : Bandwidth Limit

CA Port

The location information of the CA port with the host affinity setting is displayed.

Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

• CA Port Group

If a CA port belongs to a CA port group, the CA port group name is displayed. If a host does not belong to a CA port group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• LUN Group : LU QoS Group

LUN Group

The LUN group name is displayed.

If the host, ports, and LUNs are allocated without specifying a host group or port group by an application other than ETERNUS Web GUI, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

LU QoS Group

The LU QoS group number is displayed between 0 and 1055. If a LU QoS group number is not configured, a "- " (hyphen) is displayed.

Click the [LUN Group : LU QoS Group] link to display a bandwidth limit on each LUN. Refer to

"LUN Group : LU

QoS Group Detail" (page 879) for details.

Host-LU QoS Performance Information

When a host affinity setting with a specific host group is already configured, the total performance information for the host and the performance information of each host LUN are displayed.

If a host affinity setting with all of the host groups is configured ("All" is specified as the target host group), the performance information of each host LUN is displayed.

The monitoring status of the performance information and obtained performance information are cleared in the following conditions:

• The port mode is changed (from CA or CA/RA to other port modes)

• The ETERNUS DX/AF is rebooted

• An error is detected in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Hot maintenance of the CM is performed

• Hot controller firmware upgrade is performed

874

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Host - CA Port - LUN Group Information

• Host : Bandwidth Limit

The host name and the bandwidth limit of the selected host is displayed in "Host : Bandwidth Limit" format.

If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed as the "Bandwidth Limit". If "All" has been selected for the host, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed as the "Bandwidth

Limit".

• Host Group

The host group name, to which the selected host belongs, is displayed.

If any host can be the connection target, "All" is displayed.

If the host does not belong to a host group, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• WWN

The WWN for the selected host is displayed.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "FC" or "FCoE".

• iSCSI Name

The iSCSI name for the selected host is displayed.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "iSCSI".

• IP Version

The IP version of the iSCSI host is displayed. This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "iSCSI".

IPv4

IPv6

• IP Address

The IP address of the selected iSCSI host is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If the IP address is not specified, the field is blank.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "iSCSI".

For IPv4 address

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

For IPv6 address

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

875

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SAS Address

The SAS address of the selected host is displayed.

This item is displayed when the host affinity setting is configured and the selected host is "SAS".

• CA Port : Bandwidth Limit

The location information and the bandwidth limit of the selected CA port is displayed in "CA Port : Bandwidth

Limit" format.

If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed as the "Bandwidth Limit".

• CA Port Group

If a CA port that is connected to the selected host belongs to a CA port group as a member, the CA port group name is displayed. If a CA port does not belong as a member, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• LUN Group : LU QoS Group

The LUN group name and LU QoS group number (between 0 and 1055) are displayed in "LUN Group : LU QoS

Group" format.

If the host, ports, and LUNs are allocated without specifying a host group or port group by an application other than ETERNUS Web GUI, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If a LUN QoS group number has not been configured, a "- " (hyphen) is displayed as "LU QoS Group".

● Performance information

• Login IP Address

IP address that is logged in is displayed.

The performance information is displayed for each specified IP address. Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. If there is no IP address, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed for the iSCSI host when the host affinity setting is configured, the iSCSI name is specified, and the IP address is not specified.

For IPv4 address

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

For IPv6 address

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation" (page 854) for

● Performance Monitoring

• State

The status of performance monitoring for the host is displayed.

Active

Stopped

• Start Time

• Stop / Collect Time

The start time and the end time for performance monitoring are displayed.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm:

Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

The displayed time varies depending on how the performance monitoring is started or ended.

Before monitoring is started (*1)

"State" for performance monitoring is "Stopped". "-" (hyphens) are displayed for "Start Time" and "Stop Collect Time".

Monitoring is started

"State" for performance monitoring is changed from "Stopped" to "Active". The time when performance monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when the performance information is obtained is displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

876

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Monitoring is started while the monitoring session has already been started

"State" for performance monitoring is "Active". The last time when performance monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when the performance information is obtained is displayed for "Stop /

Collect Time".

Monitoring is stopped

"State" for performance monitoring is changed from "Active" to "Stopped". The last time when performance monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The time when performance monitoring is stopped is displayed for "Stop / Collect Time".

Monitoring is stopped while the monitoring session has already been stopped

"State" for performance monitoring is "Stopped". The last time when performance monitoring was started is displayed for "Start Time". The first time when performance monitoring was stopped is displayed for "Stop /

Collect Time".

*1: A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when performance monitoring is not being performed after the ETERNUS DX/AF is started.

In the following conditions, "-" (hyphens) are displayed for "Start Time" and "Stop / Collect Time".

When no iSCSI host with the host affinity setting is connected

When no IP address for an iSCSI host with the host affinity setting is logged in

If performance monitoring is restarted during an active performance monitoring session, the performance information that is already obtained is deleted and the collection of performance information starts again.

● Host Total Performance

When the host affinity setting is configured by a port and a specific host group, the total performance information for the specific host that is connected to the port is displayed.

If an IP address is not specified and multiple IP addresses are logged in with the iSCSI host that is connected to the target port, the performance information of each IP address is displayed.

• IOPS

The performance information from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

Ave

The average I/O count per second is displayed.

Min

The minimum I/O count per second is displayed.

Max

The maximum I/O count per second is displayed.

• Throughput

The transfer data size from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

Ave

The average data transfer size per second is displayed.

Min

The minimum data transfer size per second is displayed.

Max

The maximum data transfer size per second is displayed.

• Delay Time

Total

The total delay time for executing a command from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed. If the total delay time exceeds the maximum value, "Overflow" is displayed.

877

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Ave

The average delay time per command from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

● Host LUN Performance

The performance information of each LUN is displayed for the specific host (when "All" is specified for the host, all of the hosts) that is connected to the port.

• Host LUN

The host LUN is displayed.

0 - 1023

• Volume Name

The volume name is displayed.

• IOPS

The performance information from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

Ave

The average I/O count per second is displayed.

Min

The minimum I/O count per second is displayed.

Max

The maximum I/O count per second is displayed.

• Throughput

The transfer data size from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

Ave

The average data transfer size per second is displayed.

Min

The minimum data transfer size per second is displayed.

Max

The maximum data transfer size per second is displayed.

• Delay Time

Total

Ave

The average delay time per command from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

878

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

LUN Group : LU QoS Group Detail

The bandwidth limit for each LUN is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• LUN Group

The LUN group name is displayed. If the host, ports, and LUNs are allocated without specifying a host group or port group by an application other than ETERNUS Web GUI, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• LU QoS Group No.

The LU QoS group number is displayed between 0 and 1055. If a LU QoS group number is not configured, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

• Host LUN

The host LUN is displayed.

• Name

The volume name allocated to the host LUN is displayed.

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

Host QoS (Basic)

Follow the message in the Information area to configure a bandwidth limit on each host.

879

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

FC/FCoE Host QoS

The bandwidth limit of the FC/FCoE hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

This function displays all the hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF regardless of whether the hosts belong to host groups or not.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Name

The FC/FCoE host name is displayed.

• WWN

The FC/FCoE host WWN is displayed.

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the FC/FCoE host is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

iSCSI Host QoS

The bandwidth limit of the iSCSI hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

This function displays all the hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF regardless of whether the hosts belong to host groups or not.

880

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Name

The iSCSI host name is displayed.

• IP Version

The IP version of the iSCSI host is displayed.

• IP Address

The IP address of the iSCSI host is displayed.

Note that the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation. Refer to

details.

If the IP address is not set, the field is blank.

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the iSCSI host is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

SAS Host QoS

The bandwidth limit of the SAS hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

This function displays all the hosts that are registered in the ETERNUS DX regardless of whether the hosts belong to host groups or not.

881

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Name

The SAS host name is displayed.

• SAS Address

The SAS address of the SAS host is displayed.

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the SAS host is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

Port QoS (Basic)

Follow the message in the Information area to configure a bandwidth limit on each port.

FC Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the FC ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode that are registered by the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed regardless of whether the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

882

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

• Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

8G FC

16G FC

32G FC

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

• Performance Monitoring

State

The status of performance monitoring for the host is displayed.

• Active

• Stopped

Start Time

Stop / Collect Time

The start time and the end time for performance monitoring are displayed.

• YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

The displayed time varies depending on how the performance monitoring is started or ended.

• Before monitoring is started (*1)

"State" for performance monitoring is "Stopped". "-" (hyphens) are displayed for "Start Time" and "Stop

Collect Time".

• Monitoring is started

• Monitoring is started while the monitoring session has already been started

/ Collect Time".

883

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Monitoring is stopped

• Monitoring is stopped while the monitoring session has already been stopped

"Stop / Collect Time".

*1: When performance monitoring is not being performed after the ETERNUS DX/AF is started.

• IOPS

The performance information from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

Ave

The average I/O count per second is displayed.

Min

The minimum I/O count per second is displayed.

Max

The maximum I/O count per second is displayed.

• Throughput

The transfer data size from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

Ave

The average data transfer size per second is displayed.

Min

The minimum data transfer size per second is displayed.

Max

The maximum data transfer size per second is displayed.

• Delay Time

Total

Ave

The average delay time per command from when performance monitoring is started until performance monitoring is ended (or performance information is displayed) is displayed.

884

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

iSCSI Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the iSCSI ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• The ports with "CA" or "CA/RA" as the port mode that are registered by the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed regardless of whether the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

• Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

1G iSCSI

1Gbit/s iSCSI.

10G iSCSI

10Gbit/s iSCSI.

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

• Performance Monitoring

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• IOPS

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• Throughput

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• Delay Time

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

885

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

SAS Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the SAS ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX.

• The ports that are registered by the ETERNUS DX are displayed regardless of whether the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

• Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

6G SAS

12G SAS

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

• Performance Monitoring

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• IOPS

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• Throughput

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• Delay Time

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

886

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

FCoE Port QoS

This function displays the bandwidth limit and the performance information of the FCoE ports that are registered in the ETERNUS DX.

• The ports that are registered by the ETERNUS DX are displayed regardless of whether the ports belong to CA port groups or not.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Port

The location information of the target port is displayed.

• Type

The type of the target port is displayed.

• Bandwidth Limit

The maximum performance of the target port is displayed in IOPS (throughput value). If the bandwidth limit has not been configured (the bandwidth has not been limited), "Unlimited" is displayed.

• Performance Monitoring

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• IOPS

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• Throughput

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

• Delay Time

Refer to "Performance Monitoring" (page 883) for details.

887

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

Host-LU QoS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

LU QoS Group

A list of the registered LU QoS groups is displayed.

An LU QoS group is a group of the bandwidth limit (the maximum performance) configured for each Host LUN.

By assigning a LU QoS group to a LUN group with the host affinity setting, the bandwidth limit can be configured for each LUN. Refer to

"Set Host-LU QoS" (page 467) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• LU QoS Group No.

The LU QoS group number is displayed between 0 and 1055.

• Status

Whether a LU QoS group is assigned to a LUN group with the host affinity setting is displayed.

"Host affinity setting" is to specify association between "Host", "CA Port" and "LUN Group".

Active

The LU QoS group is assigned to a LUN group.

Inactive

The LU QoS group is not assigned to a LUN group.

888

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

NAS

This function displays a list of shared folders that are used in a NAS environment.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

The display process for the shared folder list may be delayed for a maximum of two minutes while a meta cache redistribution is being performed for NAS volumes (NAS user volumes or NAS backup volumes).

• A unified upgrade is necessary for an ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series that will be used in a Unified Storage environment if it was previously used in a SAN environment. Note that "Maintenance Operation" policy is required to perform the unified upgrade. This function is added in the category after the unified upgrade is complete.

• Shared folders include home directories.

"Home directory" is created for each user and is used as a dedicated folder that can be used freely by the user.

Users that are authenticated by the Active Directory authentication server or the local user authentication use home directories with a CIFS connection.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The shared folder number is displayed between 0 - 255.

When a NAS backup volume is restored, shared folder numbers that belong to the NAS backup volume targeted for restoration, may be changed. Use this function to check the shared folder number after restoration.

Note that a shared folder number is not changed when the folder has not been restored.

• Shared Folder Name

The shared folder name is displayed.

For the home directory, "homes" is displayed in this item. User dedicated folders are created under the "homes" folder. For home directories, the following display items are fixed.

Shared Folder Name homes

Protocol

CIFS

889

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Writable

Yes

Access Based Enumeration

Disable

NFS Allowed Hosts

Blank

CIFS Permissions

Blank

• Protocol

The protocol for the shared folder is displayed.

When the Windows CIFS protocol is used, "CIFS" is displayed

When the UNIX NFS protocol is used, "NFS" is displayed

When the Windows CIFS or the UNIX NFS protocol is used, "CIFS/NFS" is displayed

• Shared Status

The shared status is displayed.

Online

The folder is shared.

Offline

The folder is not shared.

Unknown

Other than above status.

• Process

A process that is being performed for the shared folder is displayed.

If the NAS data is being deleted, "Clearing Data" is displayed.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Oplocks

When using the Opportunistic locking (Oplocks) function to avoid conflicts between files by locking the files in the shared folder, "Enable" is displayed. When this function is not used, "Disable" is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the protocol is "NFS".

• Writable

When the write permission is specified for the shared folder, "Yes" is displayed. When the write permission is not specified, "No" is displayed.

• Volume No.

The NAS user volume number (decimal) to which the shared folder belongs is displayed.

• Volume Name

The NAS user volume name to which the shared folder belongs is displayed.

• Volume Total Capacity

The total capacity of the NAS user volume to which the shared folder belongs is displayed between 400.00 GB -

128.00 TB.

• Volume Total Free Space

The total free space in the NAS user volume to which the shared folder belongs is displayed between 0.00 MB -

128.00 TB.

• Owner

The owner of the shared folder is displayed.

• Group

The group of the shared folder is displayed.

890

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SMB Encryption of Data Access

The current SMB encryption setting (enabled or disabled) for the data access is displayed.

When SMB encryption is performed for data while accessing the shared folder, "Enable" is displayed. When data is not encrypted, "Disable" is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the protocol is "NFS".

• Access Based Enumeration

The current setting (enabled or disabled) for the enumeration based on the access permission is displayed.

When shared folders and directories that cannot be accessed are hidden according to the access control list (ACL function), "Enable" is displayed. When inaccessible shared folders and directories are not hidden, "Disable" is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the protocol is "NFS".

• CIFS Allowed Hosts

A list of CIFS Allowed Hosts is displayed.

• CIFS Denied Hosts

A list of CIFS Denied Hosts is displayed.

• NFS Allowed Hosts

A list of NFS Allowed Hosts is displayed.

• CIFS Permissions

The CIFS access permissions that are set for the shared folder is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the protocol is "NFS".

The CIFS access permissions are displayed in the following format.

User name or group name [Type, Authority]

• Type

This item shows whether the displayed name is for user or group (u: User, g: Group).

• Authority

This item shows the access permission (r: Read Only, rw: Read/Write) for the displayed name.

"Read/Write" indicates that reading from and writing to the shared folder is allowed.

"Read Only" indicates that the shared folder is read only.

• If "Everyone" is displayed as the group name, the specified authority is applied to all authorized users and groups in the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series. In this case, "Type" is omitted.

[Example]

aaa000 [u, rw]

Type is "User", name is "aaa000", and authority is "Read/Write".

group0 [g, r]

Type is "Group", name is "group0", and authority is "Read Only".

Everyone [rw]

Type is "Everyone" and authority is "Read/Write".

• User and group are user information that is managed in the Active Directory authentication server.

• "Read/Write" is given priority over "Read Only".

If "Read Only" is specified for UserA and "Read/Write" is specified for GroupA in which UserA is a part of,

"Read/Write" is set for all users in GroupA including UserA.

If "Read/Write" is specified for UserA and "Read Only" is specified for GroupA in which UserA is a part of,

"Read/Write" is set for UserA and "Read Only" is set for other users in GroupA excluding UserA.

• If "Everyone" is selected for the CIFS access permission type, the authority is set with the same conditions as when "Read/Write" or "Read Only" is set to all authorized groups in the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

891

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

NAS Interface

This function displays a list of the NAS interfaces.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The NAS interface number is displayed 0 - 159.

• IP Address

The IPv4 address of the target port is displayed.

• Subnet Mask

The subnet mask of the target port is displayed.

• Gateway

The IPv4 gateway address of the target port is displayed.

• IPv6 Link Local Address

The IPv6 link local address of the target port is displayed.

• IPv6 Connect IP Address

The IPv6 connect IP address of the target port is displayed.

• IPv6 Prefix length

The IPv6 prefix length of the target port is displayed.

• IPv6 Gateway

The IPv6 gateway address of the target port is displayed.

• RIP Setting

Whether the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) setting is enabled or disabled is displayed.

When this setting is enabled, the network settings are simplified.

• VLAN ID

The VLAN ID of the target port is displayed.

If the VLAN ID is not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Port

The location information of the port with the NAS interface setting is displayed.

• Redundant Port

The location information of the pair port, which configure multipath setting with the target port, is displayed.

If the redundant port is not specified, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

892

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Failover Status

The failover status of the multipath is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the multipath is not set (or when "Redundancy" is "Single").

Normal

The multipath setting between the "Port" and "Redundant Port" is in a normal state.

CM#x CA#y Port#z is currently inactive

The multipath between the "Port" and "Redundant Port" is set, but the "CM#x CA#y Port#z" port is not used.

• Redundancy

The connection type of the target port is displayed.

When the connection type is "Active-Active" or "Active-Standby", the "Redundant Port" information is displayed.

Active-Active

Combine the ports in both of the CMs and configure the redundant ports. For this configuration, the ports of both CMs can be used at any time.

Active - Standby

Combine the ports in both of the CMs and configure the redundant ports. For this configuration, one port remains in standby status.

Single

Use only for the ports in the CM that are not redundant.

Environment Settings

This function displays the setup information of the servers (NAS servers, DNS servers, and authentication servers) and the local user authentication that is used for the NAS system.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• The local user authentication cannot be used when an Active Directory authentication server or an LDAP authentication server is used. In this case, the setting item names are displayed in the [Local User] tab and the [Local Group] tab, but all contents are blank.

• If the local user authentication is used, an Active Directory authentication server and an LDAP authentication server cannot be used. In this case, the setting item names are displayed for the Active Directory authentication server and the LDAP authentication server, but all contents are blank.

■ When an Active Directory authentication server or an LDAP authentication server is used

893

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

■ When a local user authentication is used (Add Local User)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When a local group authentication is used (Add Local Group)

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● NAS Server

• Name

The NAS server name is displayed.

● DNS Server

• Primary IP Address

The IPv4 primary IP address of the DNS server is displayed.

If the relevant IP address is not specified, the field is blank.

• Secondary IP Address

The IPv4 secondary IP address of the DNS server is displayed.

If the relevant IP address is not specified, the field is blank.

• IPv6 Primary IP Address

The IPv6 primary IP address of the DNS server is displayed.

If the relevant IP address is not specified, the field is blank.

894

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• IPv6 Secondary IP Address

The IPv6 secondary IP address of the DNS server is displayed.

If the relevant IP address is not specified, the field is blank.

● Active Directory Authentication Server

• Domain Name

The domain name of the Active Directory authentication server is displayed.

If the authentication server is not specified, the field is blank.

• Domain Administrator

The administrator name of the Active Directory authentication server is displayed.

If the authentication server is not specified, the field is blank.

• Authentication Server (1)

The IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the FQDN of the Active Directory authentication server is displayed.

If the Authentication Server (1) is not specified, the field is blank.

• Authentication Server (2)

The IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the FQDN of the Active Directory authentication server is displayed.

If the Authentication Server (2) is not specified, the field is blank.

• Authentication Server (3)

The IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the FQDN of the Active Directory authentication server is displayed.

If the Authentication Server (3) is not specified, the field is blank.

● LDAP Authentication Server

• Domain Name

The domain name of the LDAP authentication server is displayed.

If the authentication server is not specified, the field is blank.

• Domain Administrator

The administrator name of the LDAP authentication server is displayed.

If the authentication server is not specified, the field is blank.

• Authentication Server (1)

The IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the FQDN of the LDAP authentication server is displayed.

If the Authentication Server (1) is not specified, the field is blank.

• Authentication Server (2)

The IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the FQDN of the LDAP authentication server is displayed.

If the Authentication Server (2) is not specified, the field is blank.

• Authentication Server (3)

The IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the FQDN of the LDAP authentication server is displayed.

If the Authentication Server (3) is not specified, the field is blank.

● Local User

• ID

The user ID of the local user is displayed.

If the local user authentication that has been supported by controller firmware versions V10L51 and earlier is used, "450" is displayed.

If the local user is not registered in the ETERNUS DX, the field is blank.

• Name

The local user name is displayed.

If the local user authentication that has been supported by controller firmware versions V10L51 and earlier is used, "shareuser$" is displayed.

If the local user is not registered in the ETERNUS DX, the field is blank.

895

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

896

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Primary Group

The primary group name to which the local user belongs is displayed.

If the local user is not registered in the ETERNUS DX, the field is blank.

• Secondary Group(s)

The secondary group names to which the local user belongs are displayed.

If multiple secondary groups exist, all factors are separated with a "," (comma) and displayed. If no secondary group name exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If the local user is not registered in the ETERNUS DX, the field is blank.

● Local Group

• ID

The group ID for the local group is displayed.

For details about group IDs for local groups that are automatically created in the ETERNUS DX, refer to

"Special group" (page 896) .

• Name

The local group name is displayed.

For details about group names for local groups that are automatically created in the ETERNUS DX, refer to

"Special group" (page 896) .

• User(s) who belongs to a Primary Group

The local user names that belong to the primary group are displayed.

If multiple local user names exist, all factors are separated with a "," (comma) and displayed. If no local user name exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If the local user is not registered in the ETERNUS DX, the field is blank.

• User(s) who belongs to a Secondary Group

The local user names that belong to the secondary group are displayed.

If multiple local user names exist, all factors are separated with a "," (comma) and displayed. If no local user name exists, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If the local user is not registered in the ETERNUS DX, the field is blank.

Special group

Local group ID

450

451

1002

1003

1004

Local group name shareuser$ sharegroup$

BUILTIN_Administrators

BUILTIN_Users

BUILTIN_BackupOperators

Description

The local user "shareuser$" belongs to this group.

This group is automatically created when the controller firmware is updated from controller firmware version V10L51 or earlier while the authentication server is not being used (or all users share the same fixed user account) to V10L53 or later. Regular local users can also belong to this group.

The initial primary group to which the created local users belong.

This group is automatically created when local users are created. If all local users that belong to this group are deleted, this group is automatically deleted.

If the local user "shareuser$" is deleted and then added again, the recreated "shareuser$" belongs to this group.

One of the BUILTIN groups (*1). Users who belong to this group can execute all operations for all domain controllers within the domain.

One of the BUILTIN groups (*1). Users who belong to this group can execute most of the general operations.

One of the BUILTIN groups (*1). Users who belong to this group can perform file backups and file recoveries regardless of the access permissions for all the files of domain controllers within the domain.

*1: "BUILTIN groups" are groups that are included in the ETERNUS DX as standard. If local users belong to these groups, the backup software "Arcserve Backup" can be used to back up or restore files by using the ETERNUS DX as a backup device.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Quota Management

The list of quota setting information is displayed.

Quota is a function that limits drive space or the number of files used on a NAS user volume or a shared folder to prevent the depletion of resources in the ETERNUS DX. There are two types of thresholds ("Warning" and "Limit").

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Quotas for shared folders are set for shared folders that are registered in the ETERNUS DX. Create the shared

folders in advance. Refer to "Create Shared Folder" (page 488)

for details.

Shared folders include home directories.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Volume No.

The volume number of the quota setting target volume is displayed.

• Volume Name

The name of the quota setting target volume is displayed.

• Type

The quota target type is displayed.

User

Group

• Name

The quota target user name, group name, or shared folder name is displayed.

For the home directory, "homes" is displayed for this item.

• Used Status

The use state for the quota target drive space or file count is displayed.

If the drive space use state and the file count use state do not match, the use state is displayed according to the priority.

897

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Normal

Normal status (The usage is below the warning value. If the warning value is not specified, the usage is below the limit value.)

Warning

The usage has exceeded the warning value but is below the limit value.

Exceeded

The usage has exceeded the limit value.

Unknown

Other than above.

The priority for the use state is " Unknown" > " Exceeded" > " Warning" > " Normal".

• Drive Space

The usage amount of the drive is displayed.

Used Size

The current drive usage amount is displayed.

If no quota target user or group is registered in the authentication server, or if the usage amount cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen") is displayed.

The usage amount is displayed with the largest unit (TB/GB/MB) after rounding off to two decimal places.

For example, if the usage amount in the ETERNUS DX is "1572864000 KB", "1.46 TB" is displayed.

Used Rate

The usage rate of the drive usage limit value is displayed between 0 - 100%.

Used Rate = Used Size / Limit

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

• The limit value is not specified

• No quota target user or group is registered in the authentication server

• The used size cannot be obtained

For the used rate, the result of the division is rounded up to two decimal places. If the used rate is larger than "0" but smaller than or equal to "1", "1 %" is displayed.

Warning

The drive usage warning value is displayed.

If not specified, "Not Specified" is displayed. If the warning value cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

The warning value is displayed with the largest unit (TB/GB/MB) after rounding off to two decimal places.

Refer to the Note of "Used Size" (page 898) for details.

Limit

The drive usage limit value is displayed.

If not specified, "Not Specified" is displayed. If the limit value cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

The limit value is displayed with the largest unit (TB/GB/MB) after rounding off to two decimal places. Refer

to the Note of "Used Size" (page 898) for details.

898

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• File Count

The number of used files is displayed.

Used Count

The current file count is displayed.

If no quota target user or group is registered in the authentication server, or if the used count cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen") is displayed.

Used Rate

The usage rate of the file count limit value is displayed between 0 - 100%.

Used Rate = Used Count / Limit

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

• The limit value is not specified

• No quota target user or group is registered in the authentication server

• The used count cannot be obtained

For the used rate, the result of the division is rounded up to two decimal places. If the used rate is larger than "0" but smaller than or equal to "1", "1 %" is displayed.

Warning

The file count warning value is displayed.

If not specified, "Not Specified" is displayed. If the warning value cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Limit

The file count limit value is displayed.

If not specified, "Not Specified" is displayed. If the limit value cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Filter setting

Volume Name

Name

Used Status

Filter

Drive Used Size

Drive Used Rate

File Used Count

File Used Rate

Description

Input the volume name that is to be displayed.

When not using the volume name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the user name, group name, shared folder name of the quota target that is to be displayed, or "homes".

When not using the name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the used state that is to be displayed.

Input the used size of the drive that is to be displayed.

The quota setting information is displayed if the drive used size is larger than or equal to the specified value.

When not using the drive used size for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the used rate of the drive that is to be displayed.

The quota setting information is displayed if the drive used rate is larger than or equal to the specified value.

When not using the drive used rate for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the number of used files that is to be displayed.

The quota setting information is displayed if the number of used files is greater than or equal to the specified value.

When not using the file used count for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the used rate for the file that is to be displayed.

The quota setting information is displayed if the file used rate is larger than or equal to the specified value.

When not using the file used rate for filtering, leave this item blank.

899

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

11. Connectivity Status

NAS

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Meta Cache Distribution

This function displays the setting state of the automatic meta cache distribution and the location of the meta cache.

"Meta cache" is a cache area in NAS for storing the management information of the file system. If the meta cache distribution is different from the initial location when the NAS volumes (NAS user volumes and the NAS backup volumes) are created, the meta cache is concentrated in one controller. In this case, the CM memory where the meta cache exists may become insufficient or the access performance to the NAS volumes from the CM without meta cache may be reduced.

This function is displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• To distribute the meta cache, using the [Initialize Meta Cache Distribution] function is recommended.

•

The meta cache distribution can be initialized manually. Refer to "Initialize Meta Cache Distribution" (page

519)

for details.

• The meta cache distribution can be initialized automatically. Refer to

"Enable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution" (page 521) for details.

• Automatic meta cache distribution can be disabled. Refer to

"Disable Automatic Meta Cache Distribution"

(page 522) for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

• Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

Whether the automatic meta cache distribution is enabled or not is displayed.

● Meta Cache Distribution Information

• Volume No.

The NAS volume number is displayed.

• Volume Name

The NAS volume name is displayed.

• Current Location

The current meta cache distribution is displayed.

When the distribution information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Initial Location

The location of the meta cache when the NAS volume was created is displayed.

When the distribution information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

900

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID group status displays the status information of volumes.

RAID group status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Category

RAID Group

Tuning

Eco-mode Schedule

SED Key Group

External RAID Group

RAID group status screen

RAID Group (Basic Information)

Tuning

Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

SED Key Group

External RAID Group

Detailed information of the RAID groups can be displayed from the following screens:

•

RAID Group Detail (Basic)

•

RAID Group Detail (Volume Layout)

•

RAID Group Detail (Drives)

•

External RAID Group Detail (Basic)

•

External RAID Group Detail (External Drives)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

901

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group (Basic Information)

This function displays the basic information of RAID groups.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "RAID Group Detail (Basic)" (page 910)

The RAID group number is allocated when a volume is created from the smallest unused decimal number in ascending order.

• Name

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to

"RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for detailed information of RAID

group status.

• Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed.

Standard

A RAID group that is used for creating "Standard", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

Standard / WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating the following volumes:

• "WSV" and "Standard"

• "WSV" and "SDV"

• "WSV" and "SDPV"

WSV

A RAID group that is used for creating "WSV" type volumes

TPP

A RAID group that belongs to a TPP

FTRP

A RAID group that belongs to an FTRP

RDB

A RAID group that is registered as an REC Disk Buffer

Extreme Cache Pool

A RAID group that is registered as an Extreme Cache Pool

Temporary

A RAID group that is temporarily created while LDE is being performed

"-" (hyphen)

A RAID group that is not used

902

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Reliability (RAID5+0)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

The capacity is displayed in units of "GB" or "TB". Even when volumes are created in units of "GB", if the volume capacity exceeds 1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off to two decimal places.

• Total Free Space

The total free space in the RAID group is displayed.

If the total free capacity exceeds 1023.99MB, the capacity is displayed in units of "GB". If the total free capacity exceeds 1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off to two decimal places.

"Free space" means an area in the RAID group where no volume is created, and dispersed areas which became free by creating and deleting a volume.

• Controlling CM

The Controlling CM of the RAID group is displayed (x: CE number, y: CM number).

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y

For the other models

CM#y

• Process

A process that is being performed for the RAID group is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

Recovering

Rebuild, copyback, redundant copy, or RAID group recovery is being performed.

Expanding

Expansion of the RAID group by LDE is being performed.

Formatting

Formatting of the RAID group is being performed.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

RAID Level

Minimum Total Free Space

Process

Description

Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

Select the RAID level that is to be displayed.

Input the minimum capacity of total free space for the RAID groups that are to be displayed and select the units of capacity.

When the total free space of the RAID group is not used for filtering, leave this item blank or specify "0".

Select the process that is being performed for the RAID group to be displayed.

903

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

Tuning

The RAID group tuning information is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "RAID Group Detail (Basic)" (page 910)

• Name

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to

"RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for detailed information of RAID

group status.

• Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the RAID group that is not used. Refer

to "Usage" (page 902)

"RAID Group (Basic Information)"

for details.

Standard

Standard / WSV

WSV

TPP

FTRP

RDB

Extreme Cache Pool

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Reliability (RAID5+0)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

904

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

Tuning

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Rebuild Priority

The rebuild priority of the RAID group is displayed.

When the Rebuild Priority is "Low", give priority to host access.

When the Rebuild Priority is "Middle", give the same priority as the host access to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy.

When the Rebuild Priority is "High", give priority to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the RAID group that is registered as an EXCP.

• DCMF

The Drive Command Multiplying Factor (DCMF) is displayed.

If the DCMF is changed, the number of commands issued to the drive is increased in multiples of the DCMF set value (if DCMF is "2", it is double).

• Drive Access Priority

The drive access priority is displayed.

When "Response" is specified, responses to host I/O are given priority over throughput.

When "Throughput" is specified, throughput is given priority over responses to host I/O.

When the drives that configure the target RAID group are SSDs or SSD SEDs, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Throttle

The throttle value is displayed.

Throttle is the proportion of the number of commands that are issued to a drive at the same time to the maximum number of commands that can be issued. When the throttle value is "100%", the maximum number of commands specified for each drive (the default number of commands) are issued.

When "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting" of the [Modify RAID Group Parameters] function is disabled, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

When logged in with a user account that has a default "Monitor" role, this item is not displayed.

• Ordered Cut

Ordered Cut is displayed between 0 and 65535.

Ordered Cut is the number of commands for optimizing drive access processing (priority control). When Ordered

Cut is "x", the command to perform the priority control is issued for every x commands issued, and priority control is performed for the command issued before this command.

When Ordered Cut is "0", the interval for priority control (priority control at every "x" commands) cannot be specified. All of the commands issued to the drive are processed according to their priority settings.

When "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting" of the [Modify RAID Group Parameters] function is disabled, or the configuration drive of the RAID group is SSD or SSD SED, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When logged in with a user account that has a default "Monitor" role, this item is not displayed.

RAID groups in which LDE is being performed are not displayed in the list.

Filter setting

Name

Status

RAID Level

Filter Description

Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

Select the RAID level that is to be displayed.

905

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

This function displays the set state of the Eco-mode that is applied for the RAID group.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• To use the Eco-mode, follow the procedure in

"Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page 105)

and "Create Ecomode Schedule" (page 106)

to perform the general Eco-mode setup and create an Eco-mode schedule.

•

To assign the Eco-mode to a RAID group, refer to "Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" (page 542)

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "RAID Group Detail (Basic)" (page 910)

• Name

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to

"RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for detailed information of RAID

group status.

• Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed. Refer to "Usage" (page 902) in "RAID Group (Basic Information)"

for details.

Standard

Standard / WSV

WSV

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Reliability (RAID5+0)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

906

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Eco-mode Schedule

The Eco-mode schedule name that is assigned to the RAID group is displayed. If the Eco-mode is controlled with

Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, "External" is displayed. When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, the field is blank.

• Eco-mode Action

The Eco-mode schedule action status is displayed.

When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Drive power off

The power for the drive is turned off during Eco-mode operation.

Drive motor off

The drive motor is stopped during Eco-mode operation.

Drive always on

Disable Eco-mode and the drive is always active.

• Motor Status

The drive motor status is displayed.

Active

The drive motors are activated.

In the Boot Process

The drive motors are starting up.

Idle

The drive motors are stopped.

In the Stop Process

The drive motors are being stopped.

Power off

The drive power is being turned off.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

RAID Level

Eco-mode Schedule

Eco-mode Action

Description

Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

Select the RAID level that is to be displayed.

Input the Eco-mode schedule that is to be displayed.

When not using the Eco-mode schedule name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the Eco-mode action that is to be displayed.

907

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

SED Key Group

This function displays the key group settings for the RAID groups that are configured with SEDs.

The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same SED authentication key.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• One key group can be created in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Use the [Key Group] screen to check the SED authentication key information and the SSL/KMIP certificate

information that is used for the key group. Refer to "Key Group" (page 675) for details.

• There are two types of SED keys: an SED authentication key that is managed by the key server and a common key that is stored in the ETERNUS DX/AF. If a RAID group that is configured with SEDs is registered in the key group, the relevant RAID group is managed by the SED authentication key. If the RAID group is not registered in the key group, the relevant RAID group is managed by the common key.

• RAID groups that are configured with SEDs can be added in the key group or deleted from the key group. Refer to

"Set Key Group (RAID Group)" (page 546)

for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "RAID Group Detail (Basic)" (page 910)

• Name

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to

"RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for detailed information of RAID

group status.

• Usage

The usage of the RAID group is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the RAID group that is not used.

Refer to "Usage" (page 902) in "RAID Group (Basic Information)" for details.

Standard

Standard / WSV

WSV

TPP

FTRP

RDB

Temporary

908

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

SED Key Group

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Reliability (RAID5+0)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

• Key Group

The set state of the key group for the RAID groups is displayed.

If the relevant RAID group is registered in the key group: "Enable"

If one of the following conditions applies to the relevant RAID group: "Disable"

• No common key for SEDs is registered

• The relevant RAID group is not registered in the key group

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

RAID Level

Description

Input the RAID group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the RAID group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the RAID group status that is to be displayed.

Select the RAID level that is to be displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

909

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

RAID Group Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link in the

"RAID Group (Basic Information)" (page 902) to display the detailed

information of the target RAID group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to

"RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for detailed information of RAID

group status.

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Reliability (RAID5+0)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Fast Recovery Configuration

The drive configuration in the Fast Recovery RAID group is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)".

(3D+2P)x2+1HS

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(9D+2P)x2+1HS

(12D+2P)x2+1HS

(5D+2P)x4+1HS

(13D+2P)x2+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

(3D+2P)x6+1HS

D: Data drives, P: Parity drives, HS: Hot Spares

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

• Total Free Space

The total free space in the RAID group is displayed.

910

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Controlling CM

The Controlling CM of the RAID group is displayed (x: CE number, y: CM number).

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y

For the other models

CM#y

• Eco-mode Schedule

The Eco-mode schedule name that is assigned to the RAID group is displayed.

If the Eco-mode is controlled with Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, "External" is displayed.

When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, the field is blank.

• Eco-mode Action

The Eco-mode schedule action status is displayed.

When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Eco-mode Action" (page 907) in

Refer to "Motor Status" (page 907) in

for details.

Drive power off

Drive motor off

Drive always on

• Motor Status

The drive motor status is displayed.

"Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" for details.

Active

In the Boot Process

Idle

In the Stop Process

Power Off

• Fast Recovery Drive

When the hot spare area in the Fast Recovery RAID group is used (*1), the drive number for the data recovery source drive is displayed. If Fast Recovery (*2) is not used, the field is blank.

This item is displayed only when the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)".

*1: The hot spare area is used from the beginning of high-speed rebuilding up until the copyback process (from the hot spare area to the replaced normal drive) completes successfully.

*2: High-speed rebuilding when one drive fails in the Fast Recovery RAID group.

• CE Drive#yy (for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS

AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F)

• DE#xx Drive#yy (xx: DE number, yy: Drive number)

• Process

A process that is being performed for the RAID group is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

• Progress

The progress of a process that is being performed is displayed with a bar and a rate (%). To display the latest progress, refresh the screen. If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Estimated Time Left

The estimated remaining time before recovering is complete is displayed. To display the latest estimated remaining time, refresh the screen. This item is not displayed when the process is other than "Recovering".

Calculating

The ETERNUS DX/AF is calculating the estimated remaining time.

30 days or more

The estimated remaining time is 30 days or more.

911

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

x days y h z min. (x: 1 - 29, y: 0 - 23, z: 0 - 59)

Less than 1 min.

The estimated remaining time is less than one minute.

The "Estimated Time Left" value may increase or decrease due to the I/O load when displaying this item.

• Remaining Size

The remaining size of the unrecovered RAID group is displayed. To display the latest size, refresh the screen. This item is not displayed when the process is other than "Recovering".

The remaining physical capacity in the drive that is being recovered is displayed. Note that the remaining capacity may be larger than the capacity that is currently being used by users.

• Stripe Depth

The Stripe Depth (*1) of the RAID group is displayed.

If the RAID level is "Mirroring (RAID1)", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

64 KB

128 KB

256 KB

512 KB

1024 KB

*1: The number of logical blocks that are assigned to a drive for each stripe when configuring a stripe volume in a RAID group. Normally, it is 64KB.

912

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group Detail (Volume Layout)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

RAID Group Detail (Volume Layout)

Detailed information of the volume layout is displayed. Note that the [Volume Layout] tab is not displayed for

RAID groups that are registered as EXCPs.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Start LBA

The first LBA of the volume is displayed.

• Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed.

If the volume capacity exceeds 1023.99MB, the capacity is displayed in units of "GB". If the volume capacity exceeds 1023.99GB, the capacity is displayed in units of "TB". The capacity is rounded off to two decimal places.

To check the volume capacity in units of "MB", use ETERNUS CLI.

• Volume No.

The volume number is displayed. Unused space is displayed as "Free".

• Volume Name

The volume name is displayed.

• Volume Status

The volume status is displayed. Refer to

The drive status is displayed. Refer to "Drive Status" (page 1416)

for detailed information of volume status.

• Volume Type

The volume type is displayed.

Standard

WSV

SDV

SDPV

913

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group Detail (Drives)

Detailed information of drives that configure the RAID group is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Enclosure

The number of the enclosure where the drive is installed is displayed.

• Slot No.

The number of the slot where the drive is installed is displayed.

• Status

for details.

• Type

The drive type displayed for this item is a combination of the following.

Drive size

• For 2.5-inch drives

2.5"

• For 3.5-inch drives

3.5"

Drive type

• For SAS disks

Online

• For Nearline SAS disks

Nearline

• For SSDs, the following items are displayed depending on the SSD type

For SSD-Ms (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-M

For SSD-Ls (12 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD-L

For SSDs (6 Gbit/s) (*1)

SSD

Note that "SED" is also displayed for self encrypting drives and "AF" is also displayed for Advanced Format compliant drives.

*1: The displayed item varies depending on the interface speed (bandwidth) or the capacity of the reserved space.

914

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

RAID Group Detail (Drives)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Capacity

The capacity of the drive is displayed.

The drive capacity that is displayed for the SSD-L differs from the product's actual capacity. For example, the drive capacity of a "1.92TB SSD-L" is displayed as "2.00 TB".

• Speed

The drive speed is displayed. For SSD or SSD SED, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Usage

The usage of the drive is displayed. Refer to "Usage" (page 731)

"Drives" for details.

Data

Global Hot Spare

Dedicated Hot Spare

915

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

External RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External RAID Group

This function displays the External RAID Group list.

This function is displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

Creating an External RAID Group is required in advance. Refer to "Create External RAID Group" (page 549) for

details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The External RAID Group number is displayed. Click this item to display

"External RAID Group Detail (Basic)"

(page 918)

• Name

The External RAID Group name is displayed. Click this item to display "External RAID Group Detail (Basic)" (page

918) .

• Status

The External RAID Group status is displayed. Refer to

"External RAID Group Status" (page 1414)

for details.

• Usage

The usage of the External RAID Group is displayed.

Migration

An External RAID Group that is used for data migrations.

• External LU Information

Whether the External RAID Group inherits the "External LU Information" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is inherited, "Inherited" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is not inherited, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Controlling CM

The Controlling CM of the External RAID Group is displayed (x: CE number, y: CM number).

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y

For the other models

CM#y

916

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

External RAID Group

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the External RAID Group is displayed.

• Total Free Space

The total free space in the External RAID Group is displayed.

If an External Volume is created in the External RAID Group, "0.00 MB" is displayed for this item.

If no External Volume is created in the External RAID Group, the total capacity of the External RAID Group is displayed for this item.

For example, if the total capacity of the External RAID Group is "2.00 GB", either of the following values is displayed for this item.

If an External Volume is created

"0.00 MB"

If no External Volume is created

"2.00 GB"

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

Minimum Total Free Space

Description

Input the External RAID Group name that is to be displayed.

When not using the External RAID Group name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the External RAID Group status that is to be displayed.

Input the minimum capacity of total free space for the External RAID Groups that are to be displayed and select the units of capacity.

When the total free space of the External RAID Group is not used for filtering, leave this item blank or specify "0".

917

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

External RAID Group Detail (Basic)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External RAID Group Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link in the

"External RAID Group" (page 916) to display the detailed information

of the target External RAID Group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The External RAID Group status is displayed. Refer to

"External RAID Group Status" (page 1414)

for details.

• Usage

The usage of the External RAID Group is displayed.

• External LU Information

Whether the External RAID Group inherits the "External LU Information" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is inherited, "Inherited" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is not inherited, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Controlling CM

The Controlling CM of the External RAID Group is displayed (x: CE number, y: CM number).

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y

For the other models

CM#y

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the External RAID Group is displayed.

In addition, the capacity is displayed in "bytes" within parentheses.

• Total Free Space

The total free space in the External RAID Group is displayed.

In addition, the capacity is displayed in "bytes" within parentheses.

If an External Volume is created in the External RAID Group, "0.00 MB" is displayed for this item.

If no External Volume is created in the External RAID Group, the total capacity of the External RAID Group is displayed for this item.

For example, if the total free space in the External RAID Group is "2.00 GB", either of the following values is displayed for this item.

If an External Volume is created

"0.00 MB"

If no External Volume is created

"2.00 GB"

918

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

External RAID Group Detail (External Drives)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External RAID Group Detail (External Drives)

In this screen, the detailed information of the External Drives that are used in the External RAID Group is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The External Drive number is displayed.

• Status

The External Drive status is displayed. Refer to

"External Drive Status" (page 1416) for details.

• Usage

The usage of the External Drive is displayed.

• External LU Information

Whether the External Drive inherits the "External LU Information" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is inherited, "Inherited" is displayed.

If "External LU Information" is not inherited, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Capacity

The capacity of the External Drive is displayed.

• Serial No.

The serial number of the external storage system is displayed.

• UID

The identifier (storage system name) that identifies the External Drive from the host is displayed.

• Vendor ID

The manufacturer name of the external storage system is displayed.

• Product ID

The product name of the external storage system is displayed.

• LUN Addressing

The format type of the LUN Addressing that is set for the External Drive is displayed.

If LUN Addressing is not "PRHL" or "FLAT", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

PRHL

FLAT

919

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

12. RAID Group Status

External RAID Group Detail (External Drives)

• LUN

The volume number (host LUN) of the External Drive is displayed.

If the LUN Addressing is "PRHL" or "FLAT"

0 - 4095 (decimal)

For the other conditions

Volume number (16-digit hexadecimal)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

920

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

This chapter describes Thin Provisioning Pool status.

Thin Provisioning Pool status displays the status information of Thin Provisioning Pools.

Thin Provisioning Pool status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Thin Provisioning Pools

Threshold

Eco-mode Schedule

Flexible Tier Pools

Settings

Category Thin Provisioning Pool status screen

Thin Provisioning Pools

Threshold (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Flexible Tier Pools

Settings (Thin Provisioning)

Detailed information of the Thin Provisioning Pools can be displayed from the following screen:

•

Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)

•

Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (RAID Group)

•

Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Volume)

•

Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)

•

Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)

•

Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Volume)

•

Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (Basic)

•

Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (RAID Group)

•

Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (RAID Group Detail)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

921

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

The Thin Provisioning Pools category provides the setting information for Thin Provisioning Pools.

Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)

This function shows the list of TPPs.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• When creating TPP type volumes, "Enable" the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to

"Set Thin Provisioning"

(page 554) for details.

• When the used status of the Thin Provisioning Pool is " Attention" or " Warning" in the TPP list, the TPP used capacity exceeds the threshold. Add drives immediately to expand the TPP capacity.

• This function displays the TPP basic information, a list of the RAID groups that configure the TPP, and a list of the TPVs that are registered in the TPP.

•

To check whether the Thin Provisioning function is enabled or disabled, refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)"

To check the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of a TPP, refer to "Threshold (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

•

(page 930) .

• To check the Eco-mode settings of a TPP, refer to

"Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 932) .

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The TPP number is displayed. Click this item to display "Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925)

• Name

The TPP name is displayed. Click this item to display

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)" (page 925) .

• Drive Type

The type of drive that is used to configure the TPP is displayed.

For SAS disks

Online

For Nearline SAS disks

Nearline

For SSDs

SSDs (*1)

For Online SEDs

Online SED

922

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For Nearline SEDs

Nearline SED

For SSD SEDs

SSD SED

*1: "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• RAID Level

The level of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to

"Thin Provisioning Pools" (page 922) to display the corresponding

for detailed information of TPP status.

• Used Status

The usage of TPP is displayed.

Normal

TPP usage does not exceed the "Attention" threshold.

Attention

TPP usage exceeds the "Attention" threshold but does not exceed the "Warning" threshold.

Warning

TPP usage exceeds the "Warning" threshold.

• Encryption

The TPP encryption status is displayed.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

The TPP that is encrypted by CM.

"-" (hyphen)

The TPP that is not encrypted.

SED

The TPP that is encrypted by SED.

• Chunk Size

The chunk size (*1) of the TPP is displayed.

For TPPs that are created with a controller firmware version earlier than V10L70, "21 MB" is displayed for this item.

If the chunk size information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

21 MB

42 MB

84 MB

168 MB

*1: Chunk size is a physical capacity that is assigned to virtual logical volumes created in TPPs when a write occurs from the host. The chunk size is determined according to the "Maximum Pool Capacity" of the ETERNUS DX/AF when a new

TPP is created. The chunk size for the created TPP cannot be changed.

923

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Deduplication

The Deduplication status (whether the setting is enabled and the state of the Deduplication) for the TPP is displayed.

This item is displayed only when Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

Enable

Deduplication for the TPP is enabled and Deduplication is in the normal state.

Disable

Deduplication for the TPP is disabled.

Error

Deduplication for the TPP is enabled and the information cannot be obtained.

"-" (hyphen)

Deduplication for the TPP is enabled and the information cannot be obtained.

• Compression

The Compression status (whether the setting is enabled and the state of the Compression) for the TPP is displayed.

This item is displayed only when Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

Enable

Compression for the TPP is enabled and Compression is in the normal state.

Disable

Compression for the TPP is disabled.

Error

Compression for the TPP is enabled and Compression is in the error state.

"-" (hyphen)

Compression for the TPP is enabled and the information cannot be obtained.

• Data Reduction Rate

The data reduction rate for Deduplication, Compression, or both for the TPP is displayed.

If 10 TB of data is written to 3 TB after deduplicated and compressed, "70%" is displayed.

This item is displayed only when Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

Statuses of Deduplication and Compression for the TPP are both "Disable"

Status of Deduplication or Compression for a TPP is "Error" or "-" (hyphen)

The DEDUP_SYS Volumes cannot be accessed

Filter setting

Name

Drive Type

RAID Level

Chunk Size

Filter

Deduplication

Compression

Description

Input the name of the TPP that is to be displayed.

When not using the TPP name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the drive type of the TPP that is to be displayed.

Select the RAID level of the TPP that is to be displayed.

Select the chunk size of the TPP that is to be displayed.

Select the Deduplication set state of the TPP that is to be displayed.

This item is displayed only when Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

Select the Compression set state of the TPP that is to be displayed.

This item is displayed only when Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

924

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the

Thin Provisioning Pool Details screen.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Drive Type

The type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

Online

Nearline

SSD

Online SED

Nearline SED

SSD SED

• RAID Level

The level of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Fast Recovery Configuration

The Fast Recovery configuration of the RAID group that configures TPPs is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the RAID level is "RAID6-FR".

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

D: Data drives, P: Parity drives, HS: Hot Spares

• Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to

Refer to "Eco-mode Action"

for detailed information of TPP status.

• Provisioned Capacity

The total logical capacity of the TPVs in the TPP is displayed.

925

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Provisioned Rate

The ratio (%) of the total logical capacity (*1) of TPVs in the TPP and the total capacity of the TPP is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if Deduplication or Compression for a TPP is enabled.

*1: The provisioned rate is calculated with the total logical capacity where the chunk size is taken into consideration.

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of TPP is displayed.

"Total Capacity" indicates the total capacity of the RAID groups in the TPP.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of TPP is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the TPVs in the TPP.

• Used Status

The usage of TPP is displayed.

Normal

Attention

Warning

• Warning

The TPP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the TPP warning threshold, and the threshold

(yy%) are displayed.

• Attention

The TPP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the TPP attention threshold, and the threshold

(yy%) are displayed.

When the attention threshold is omitted, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Encryption

The TPP encryption status is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the TPP that is not encrypted.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

SED

• Chunk Size

The chunk size of the TPP is displayed.

For TPPs that are created with a controller firmware version earlier than V10L70, "21 MB" is displayed for this item.

If the chunk size information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

21 MB

42 MB

84 MB

168 MB

• MWC

The Multi Writeback Count (MWC) of the TPP is displayed.

This item is displayed only when a user account with the "RAID Group Management" policy is used to log in.

• Usage

"TPV" is displayed when a TPV is registered in the TPP.

If there are no TPVs in the Thin Provisioning Pool, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Eco-mode Schedule

The Eco-mode schedule name that is assigned to the TPP is displayed. If the Eco-mode is controlled with Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, "External" is displayed.

When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, the field is blank.

926

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Eco-mode Action

The Eco-mode schedule action status is displayed. When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

in "Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" for details.

Drive power off

Drive motor off

Drive always on

• Motor Status

The drive motor status is displayed.

Refer to "Motor Status"

for details.

Active

In the Boot Process

Idle

In the Stop Process

Power Off

• Process

A process that is being performed for the TPP is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Progress

• Estimated Time Left

Calculating

The ETERNUS DX/AF is calculating the estimated remaining time.

30 days or more

The estimated remaining time is 30 days or more.

x days y h z min. (x: 1 - 29, y: 0 - 23, z: 0 - 59)

Less than 1 min.

The estimated remaining time is less than one minute.

The "Estimated Time Left" value may increase or decrease due to the I/O load when displaying this item.

• Remaining Size

The remaining size of the unformatted volume is displayed. To display the latest size, refresh the screen. This item is not displayed when the process is other than "Formatting".

• Stripe Depth

The Stripe Depth value (*1) for the RAID groups that configure the TPP is displayed.

If the RAID level is "Mirroring (RAID1)", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

*1: The number of logical blocks that are assigned to a drive for each stripe when configuring a stripe volume in a RAID group. Normally, it is 64KB.

927

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Deduplication

The Deduplication status (whether the setting is enabled and the state of the Deduplication) for the TPP is displayed. If Deduplication is enabled and the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

Enable

Disable

Error

• Compression

The Compression status (whether the setting is enabled and the state of the Compression) for the TPP is displayed. If Compression is enabled and the information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

Enable

Disable

Error

• Data Reduction Rate

The data reduction rate for Deduplication, Compression, or both for the TPP is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

Statuses of Deduplication and Compression for the TPP are both "Disable"

Status of Deduplication or Compression for a TPP is "Error" or "-" (hyphen)

The DEDUP_SYS Volumes cannot be accessed

Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (RAID Group)

In this screen, a list of the RAID groups that configure the relevant TPP is displayed. When no RAID groups are registered in the TPP, only the item name is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The RAID group number is displayed. Click this item to display

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display "RAID Group Detail (Basic)" (page 910)

• Name

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to

"RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for detailed information of RAID

group status.

928

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the TPVs in the RAID group.

Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Volume)

In this screen, the volumes that are registered in the TPP can be checked. When no volumes are registered in the

TPP, only the item name is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed. Click this item to display

• Name

The volume name is displayed. Click this item to display

• Status

The volume status is displayed. Refer to

for detailed information of volume status.

• Type

The volume type is displayed. This volume list displays only the volumes whose type is "TPV".

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

Block/Dedup

The Deduplication/Compression Volumes.

929

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

• Allocation

The allocation method for the volume is displayed.

Thin

Physical area is allocated to the target area of the volume when a write I/O is received.

Thick

Physical area is allocated to the whole area of the volume when volumes are created.

• Capacity

The volume capacity is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity (physically allocated capacity) of volume is displayed.

• Used Rate

The volume utilization is displayed between 0% - 100%.

Used Rate = Used Capacity / Capacity

• Threshold

The threshold for monitoring the volume utilization is displayed between 1% - 100%.

If the "Used Rate" value exceeds the "Threshold", a Host Sense Key Code Qualifier is reported.

• Process

A process that is being performed for the TPP is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Balancing

TPV balancing is being performed.

Formatting

Formatting is being performed.

Migrating

RAID migration is being performed.

Threshold (Thin Provisioning Pool)

This function shows the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of a Thin Provisioning Pool.

When changing threshold for TPP monitoring, "Enable" the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to

To check whether the Thin Provisioning function is enabled or disabled, refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)"

•

"Setup Event Notification" (page 166)

• If the TPP used capacity exceeds the threshold, notification is sent to the destination that was specified using the [Setup Event Notification] function. Refer to

for details.

•

To change the threshold of a TPP, follow the procedure that is provided in "Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning

Pool" (page 579)

930

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The TPP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail

(Basic)" (page 925) .

• Name

The TPP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)"

(page 925)

• Drive Type

The type of drive that is used to configure the TPP is displayed.

Online

SAS disks

Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

SSD

SSDs (*1)

Online SED

Online SEDs

Nearline SED

Nearline SEDs

SSD SED

SSD SEDs

*1: "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• RAID Level

The level of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to

for detailed information of TPP status.

931

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Used Status

The usage of TPP is displayed.

Normal

Attention

Warning

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of TPP is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of TPP is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the TPVs in the TPP.

• Warning

The warning threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity is displayed.

• Attention

The attention threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity is displayed. When the "Attention" threshold is omitted, "0%" is displayed.

• MWC

The Multi Writeback Count (MWC) of the TPP is displayed.

This item is displayed only when a user account with the "RAID Group Management" policy is used to log in.

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Drive Type

RAID Level

Description

Input the TPP name that is to be displayed.

When not using the TPP name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the drive type that is to be displayed.

Select the RAID level that is to be displayed.

Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

This function displays the Eco-mode setting state of the Thin Provisioning Pool.

When assigning Eco-mode schedule to the Thin Provisioning Pool, "Enable" the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to

To check whether the Thin Provisioning function is enabled or disabled, refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)"

•

"Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page 105)

• To use the Eco-mode, follow the procedure in

and "Create Ecomode Schedule" (page 106)

to perform the general Eco-mode setup and create an Eco-mode schedule.

• To assign the Eco-mode schedule to a TPP, refer to

"Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page

583)

932

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The TPP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail

(Basic)" (page 925) .

• Name

The TPP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)"

(page 925)

• Drive Type

The type of drive that configures the TPP is displayed.

Online

SAS disks

Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

SSD

SSDs (*1)

Online SED

Online SEDs

Nearline SED

Nearline SEDs

SSD SED

SSD SEDs

*1: "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• RAID Level

The level of RAID group that configures the TPP is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Status

The TPP status is displayed. Refer to

"Eco-mode Action" (page 907)

for detailed information of TPP status.

933

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Thin Provisioning Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Used Status

The usage of TPP is displayed.

Normal

Attention

Warning

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of TPP is displayed.

• Eco-mode Schedule

The Eco-mode schedule name that is assigned to the TPP is displayed. If the Eco-mode is controlled with Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, "External" is displayed.

When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, the field is blank.

• Eco-mode Action

The Eco-mode schedule action status is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned. Refer to

Refer to "Motor Status" (page 907) in

for details.

Drive power off

Drive motor off

Drive always on

• Motor Status

The drive motor status is displayed.

"Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" for details.

Active

In the Boot Process

Idle

In the Stop Process

Power Off

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Drive Type

RAID Level

Eco-mode Schedule

Eco-mode Action

Description

Input the TPP name that is to be displayed.

When not using the TPP name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the drive type that is to be displayed.

Select the RAID level that is to be displayed.

Select the Eco-mode schedule that is to be displayed.

Select the Eco-mode action that is to be displayed.

934

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

The Flexible Tier Pools category provides the setting information for Flexible Tier Pools.

Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)

This function shows the list of FTRPs.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• To use the Flexible Tier function (Automated Storage Tiering), the following operations are required:

Select "Enable" for the Thin Provisioning function. Refer to

To check whether the Thin Provisioning function is enabled or disabled, refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)"

To use Automated Storage Tiering with multiple layers, register the Optimization option license for ETER-

NUS SF Storage Cruiser.

Use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser to perform the following procedure.

• Enable "Automated Storage Tiering"

• Create FTRPs, FTSPs, and FTVs

• When " Attention" or " Warning" is displayed in the "Used Status" field for the FTRP list, the used capacity of the relevant FTRP has exceeded the threshold. Immediately add drives and use ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser to expand the capacity of the appropriate FTSP (for which expansion is determined to be necessary based upon the performance and used capacity).

• If the target FTRP does not exist when displaying the details screen, a message, " Target is Not Found." is displayed.

• This function displays a basic FTRP information, a list of FTSPs which belong to the FTRP, a list of RAID groups which configure the FTSP, and a list of FTVs which have been registered to the FTRP.

•

"Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)"

935

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The FTRP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in

(page 938)

• Name

The FTRP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)"

(page 938)

• Status

The FTRP status is displayed. Refer to

"Flexible Tier Pool (Basic Information)" (page 935)

for detailed information of

FTRP status.

• Used Status

The usage of FTRP is displayed.

Normal

FTRP usage does not exceed the "Attention" threshold.

Attention

FTRP usage exceeds the "Attention" threshold but does not exceed the "Warning" threshold.

Warning

FTRP usage exceeds the "Warning" threshold.

• Provisioned Capacity

The ratio (%) of the total logical capacity (*1) of FTVs in the FTRP and the total capacity of the FTRP is displayed.

*1: The provisioned rate is calculated with the total logical capacity where the chunk size is taken into consideration.

• Provisioned Rate

The ratio (%) of the total logical capacity of FTVs in the FTRP and the total capacity of the FTRP is displayed.

Capacity ratio (Provisioned Rate) = Total logical capacity of FTVs in the relevant FTRP (Provisioned Capacity) /

Total capacity of the relevant FTRP (Total Capacity)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTRP is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of the FTRP is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the FTVs in the FTRP.

• Warning

The warning threshold (%) for monitoring the FTRP used capacity is displayed.

• Attention

The attention threshold (%) for monitoring the FTRP used capacity is displayed. When the "Attention" threshold is omitted, "0%" is displayed.

• Encryption

The FTRP encryption status is displayed.

The FTRP that is encrypted by CM.

"-" (hyphen)

The FTRP that is not encrypted.

936

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Chunk Size

The chunk size (*1) of the FTRP is displayed.

For FTRPs that are created with a controller firmware version earlier than V10L70, "21 MB" is displayed for this item.

If the chunk size information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

21 MB

42 MB

84 MB

168 MB

*1: Chunk size is a physical capacity that is assigned to virtual logical volumes created in FTRPs when a write occurs from the host. The chunk size is determined according to the "Maximum Pool Capacity" of the ETERNUS DX/AF when a new

FTRP is created. The chunk size for the created FTRP cannot be changed.

• Balancing Level

The balancing level of the FTRP is displayed.

If multiple FTSPs exist in the FTRP, the lowest balancing level among the FTSPs is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the physically allocated capacity cannot be checked due to the storage system status or when the balancing level cannot be obtained due to the FTRP status (*1).

High

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is equalized.

Middle

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is slightly unequal.

Low

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups in the FTSP is significantly unequal.

• Balancing Process

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when FTRP balancing is not being performed, when the physically allocated capacity cannot be checked due to the storage system status, or when the balancing level cannot be obtained due to the

FTRP status (*1).

Status

The balancing status of the FTRP is displayed.

• Active

All of the FTVs in the FTRP are either reserved or operating normally.

• Error

An FTV in error status exists in the FTRP.

Error Code

The error code of FTRP balancing is displayed when an error occurs.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if no errors occur.

*1: The status of the FTRP is not " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

• Shrinking

The shrinking status is displayed.

Shrinking is a function that deletes specific RAID groups in the FTRP to reduce the physical capacity of the FTRP.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if the shrinking is not being performed.

Executing

The FTRP capacity is being reduced.

Error

Reducing the FTRP capacity failed.

937

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the

to display the detailed information of the corresponding FTRP.

Click the [Basic] tab on the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] screen to display the basic information of the corresponding

FTRP.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The FTRP status is displayed. Refer to

This item is not displayed when the process is other than "Formatting". Refer to "Estimated Time Left" (page

for detailed information of

FTRP status.

• Provisioned Capacity

The total logical capacity of FTVs in the FTRP is displayed.

• Provisioned Rate

The ratio (%) of the total logical capacity (*1) of FTVs in the FTRP and the total capacity of the FTRP is displayed.

*1: The provisioned rate is calculated with the total logical capacity where the chunk size is taken into consideration.

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTRP is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of the FTRP is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the FTVs in the FTRP.

• Used Status

The usage of FTRP is displayed.

Normal

Attention

Warning

• Warning

The FTRP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the FTRP warning threshold, and the threshold

(yy%) are displayed.

• Attention

The FTRP physical capacity "xxx", which is converted based on the FTRP attention threshold, and the threshold

(yy%) are displayed.

When the attention threshold is omitted, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

938

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Encryption

The FTRP encryption status is displayed. If the FTRP is not encrypted, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Chunk Size

The chunk size of the FTRP is displayed.

For FTRPs that are created with a controller firmware version earlier than V10L70, "21 MB" is displayed for this item.

If the chunk size information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

21 MB

42 MB

84 MB

168 MB

• Process

A process that is being performed for the FTRP is displayed.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Progress

The progress of a process that is being performed is displayed with a bar and a rate (%). To display the latest progress, refresh the screen.

If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Estimated Time Left

The estimated remaining time before formatting is complete is displayed. To display the latest estimated remaining time, refresh the screen.

927) in

"Thin Provisioning Pool Detail (Basic)"

for details.

Calculating

30 days or more

x days y h z min. (x: 1 - 29, y: 0 - 23, z: 0 - 59)

Less than 1 min.

The "Estimated Time Left" value may increase or decrease due to the I/O load when displaying this item.

• Remaining Size

The remaining size of the unformatted volume is displayed. To display the latest size, refresh the screen. This item is not displayed when the process is other than "Formatting".

• Balancing Level

The balancing level of the FTRP is displayed.

High

Middle

Low

939

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Balancing Process

FTRP status (*1).

Status

The balancing status of the FTRP is displayed.

• Active

• Error

Progress

The lowest progress rate among the FTV balancing sessions that are being performed in the FTRP is displayed.

Error Code

The error code of FTRP balancing is displayed when an error occurs.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if no errors occur.

*1: The status of the FTRP is not " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed".

• Shrinking

The shrinking status is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if the shrinking is not being performed.

Executing

Error

Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "Flexible Tier Pools" (page 935) to display the corresponding Flexible

Tier Pool Details screen.

Click the [Flexible Tier Sub Pool] tab on the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] screen to display a list of FTSPs that are registered in the corresponding FTRP.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The FTSP number is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in

"Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail

(Basic)" (page 943) .

• Name

The FTSP name is displayed. Click this item to display the screen shown in "Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (Basic)"

(page 943)

940

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Status

The FTSP status is displayed. Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 1414)

for detailed information of

FTSP status.

• Drive Type

The type of drive that is used to configure the FTSP is displayed.

Online

SAS disks

Nearline

Nearline SAS disks

SSD

SSDs (*1)

Online SED

Online SEDs

Nearline SED

Nearline SEDs

SSD SED

SSD SEDs

*1: "SSD" is displayed regardless of the actual SSD type (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• RAID Level

The level of RAID group that configures the FTSP is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTSP is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of the FTSP is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the FTVs in the FTSP.

• Balancing Level

The balancing level of the FTSP is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the physically allocated capacity cannot be checked due to the storage system status or when the balancing level cannot be obtained due to the FTRP status (*1).

High

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups is equalized.

Middle

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups is slightly unequal.

Low

The physically allocated capacity among the RAID groups is significantly unequal.

*1: The status of the FTRP is not " Available", " Partially Readying", or " Exposed"

• Shrinking

The shrinking status of the RAID groups in the FTSP is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if the shrinking is not being performed.

Executing

Error

941

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Volume)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "Flexible Tier Pools" (page 935) to display the corresponding Flexible

Tier Pool Details screen.

Click the [Volume] tab on the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] screen to display a list of volumes that are registered in the corresponding FTRP. When no volumes are registered in the FTRP, only the item name is displayed.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The volume number is displayed.

• Name

The volume name is displayed.

• Status

The volume status is displayed. Refer to

for detailed information of volume status.

• Type

The volume type is displayed.

This volume list displays only the volumes whose type is "FTV".

• Usage

The usage of the volume is displayed.

Block

The volumes that are used for the SAN.

File

The volumes that are used for the NAS.

System

The volumes that are used for management information.

"Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)" (page 940) to dis-

Veeam

The volumes that are used for Veeam Storage Integration.

• FTSP Priority

The FTSP number, to which a volume is assigned on a priority basis in the FTRP, is displayed. When the setting is omitted, "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Allocation

The allocation method for the volume is displayed.

Thin

Physical area is allocated to the target area of the volume when a write I/O is received.

Thick

Physical area is allocated to the whole area of the volume when volumes are created.

942

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Capacity

The total volume capacity is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity (physically allocated capacity) of volume is displayed.

• Used Rate

The volume utilization is displayed.

Used Rate = Used Capacity / Capacity

• Threshold

The threshold for monitoring the volume utilization is displayed.

If the "Used Rate" value exceeds the "Threshold", a Host Sense Key Code Qualifier is reported.

Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (Basic)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the

play the corresponding Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail screen.

Click the [Basic] tab on the [Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail] screen to display the basic information of the corresponding FTSP.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The FTSP status is displayed. Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool Status" (page 1414)

for detailed information of

FTSP status.

• Drive Type

The type of drive that configures the FTSP is displayed.

Online

Nearline

SSD

Online SED

Nearline SED

SSD SED

943

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• RAID Level

The level of RAID group that configures the FTSP is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of FTSP is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of the FTSP is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the FTVs in the FTSP.

• Shrinking

The shrinking status of the RAID groups in the FTSP is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if the shrinking is not being performed.

Executing

Error

Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (RAID Group)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the

"Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)" (page 940) to dis-

play the detailed information of the corresponding FTSP.

Click the [RAID Group] tab on the [Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail] screen to display the drive list that configures the relevant RAID group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• No.

The number of the RAID group that belongs to the FTSP is displayed. Click this item to display the [RAID Group

Detail] screen.

• Name

The RAID group name is displayed. Click this item to display the [RAID Group Detail] screen.

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to "RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for details.

944

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the FTVs in the RAID group.

• Deleting

The RAID group deletion status is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed if a RAID group deletion process is not being performed.

Executing

A RAID group deletion process is being performed or a data migration related to the deletion process is being performed.

Error

Deletion of the RAID group failed.

Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (RAID Group Detail)

Click the [No.] link or the [Name] link on the "Flexible Tier Sub Pool Detail (RAID Group)" (page 944)

to display the detailed information of the corresponding RAID group.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Status

The RAID group status is displayed. Refer to "RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for details.

945

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• RAID Level

The RAID level is displayed.

High Performance (RAID1+0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

Mirroring (RAID1)

Striping (RAID0)

• Fast Recovery Configuration

The drive configuration in the Fast Recovery RAID group is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)".

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

D: Data drives, P: Parity drives, HS: Hot Spares

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

• Used Capacity

The used capacity of the RAID groups is displayed.

"Used Capacity" indicates the total for the physically allocated capacities of the FTVs in the RAID group.

• Controlling CM

The Controlling CM of the RAID group is displayed (x: CE number, y: CM number).

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y

For the other models

CM#y

• Eco-mode Schedule

The Eco-mode schedule name that is assigned to the RAID group is displayed.

If the Eco-mode is controlled with Storage Foundation Software ETERNUS SF, "External" is displayed.

When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, the field is blank.

• Eco-mode Action

The Eco-mode schedule action status is displayed.

When no Eco-mode schedule has been assigned, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Eco-mode Action" (page 907) in

Refer to "Motor Status" (page 907) in

for details.

Drive power off

Drive motor off

Drive always on

• Motor Status

The drive motor status is displayed.

"Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" for details.

Active

In the Boot Process

Idle

In the Stop Process

Power Off

946

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Flexible Tier Pools

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Fast Recovery Drive

When the hot spare area in the Fast Recovery RAID group is used, the drive number for the data recovery source drive is displayed. If Fast Recovery (*1) is not used, the field is blank.

This item is displayed only when the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)".

*1: High-speed rebuilding when one drive fails in the Fast Recovery RAID group.

• CE Drive#yy (for the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the

ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F)

• DE#xx Drive#yy (xx: DE number, yy: Drive number)

• Process

A process that is being performed is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Progress

• Stripe Depth

The Stripe Depth (*1) of the RAID group is displayed.

If the RAID level is "Mirroring (RAID1)", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

64 KB

128 KB

256 KB

512 KB

1024 KB

*1: The number of logical blocks that are assigned to a drive for each stripe when configuring a stripe volume in a RAID group. Normally, it is 64KB.

• Deleting

The RAID group deletion status is displayed.

If a RAID group deletion process is not being performed, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Executing

Error

947

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

13. Thin Provisioning Pool Status

Settings (Thin Provisioning)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Settings (Thin Provisioning)

This function displays information on the Thin Provisioning function settings.

The parameters that are described below can be changed. Refer to "Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554) for details.

• Whether to enable or disable the Thin Provisioning function

• Maximum Pool Capacity

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Thin Provisioning

Whether the Thin Provisioning function is enabled or disabled is displayed.

• Maximum Pool Capacity

The maximum pool capacity that is specified for the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

The maximum pool capacity is the maximum total capacity for TPPs and FTRPs that can be created in the ETER-

NUS DX/AF. The chunk size for creating TPPs or FTRPs varies depending on the maximum pool capacity. Refer to

"The maximum number of pools, maximum pool capacity, and determined chunk size for each model" (page

557) for details.

This item is displayed only when the Thin Provisioning function for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

The maximum pool capacity is used as a virtual logical capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF. When the Thin Provisioning function is enabled, the ETERNUS DX/AF allocates capacity to the physical drives proportionate to the amount of data that is written to the virtual volume. Therefore, the actual available capacity is limited depending on the maximum physical capacity of the drives that can be installed in the storage system or the maximum pool capacity, whichever is smaller. For example, when using an ETERNUS AF250 S2 that is configured only with 400GB SSDs, the actual capacity that can be used is approximately 18TB even if the maximum pool capacity is "32.00TB".

• Total Physical Capacity

The total physical capacity [PB/TB/GB/MB] of the TPPs in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the Thin Provisioning function for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

948

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy status displays the status information of volumes.

Advanced Copy status screens can be displayed by clicking the following categories:

Category Advanced Copy status screen

Advanced Copy

Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

Local Copy

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

OPC

QuickOPC

SnapOPC

SnapOPC+

Monitor

Remote Copy

Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

REC

ODX

ODX Sessions

XCopy

XCOPY Sessions

Virtual Volume

Virtual Volume Sessions

Settings

Settings (Advanced Copy)

Snap Data Pool

Copy Path

REC Buffer

REC Disk Buffer

Detailed information of the Advanced Copy functions can be displayed from the following screens:

•

Advanced Copy (Property)

•

Advanced Copy (Extent information)

•

Copy Path Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

949

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

This function displays the status of all the Advanced Copy sessions.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• To display the local/remote copy session information and the Advanced Copy information, register the

Advanced Copy license. Note that the Remote Copy Sessions Information and Remote Copy related categories

(copy path, REC Buffer, and REC Disk Buffer) are displayed only when using an ETERNUS DX/AF model that supports REC.

• In the Unified Storage environment, the following items are displayed even if the Advanced Copy function license is not registered.

Local Copy Sessions Information (SnapOPC+ Session)

Advanced Copy Information (Usable Advanced Copy Size for SnapOPC+)

• Registering an Advanced Copy license is not required to display the Advanced Copy session information for

ODX sessions, XCOPY sessions, or Virtual Volume sessions.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Local / Remote Copy Sessions Information

• Session Count

The number of Advanced Copy sessions that are currently being performed for each type (EC, OPC, QuickOPC,

SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, Monitor, and REC) is displayed.

The "Session Count" is a total of copy sessions in all the statuses including " Reserved". Click the [Session

Count] link to display the list of sessions for each type.

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

0 - 1024

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

0 - 1024 (2048) (*1)

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 2048 (4096) (*1)

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

0 - 8192

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

0 - 8192

ETERNUS DX8700 S3 and ETERNUS DX8900 S3

0 - 32768

950

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

0 - 2048

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

0 - 8192

ETERNUS DX200F

0 - 2048

*1:

Values in parentheses indicate the number of sessions when "Expand Volume Mode" is "Enable". Refer to "Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

• Status

The status for each Advanced Copy session is displayed.

Normal

All the copy sessions are in the normal state.

Error

At least one copy session is not in the normal state.

● ODX Copy Sessions Information

An ODX session is created when the ODX function of Windows server 2012 is used.

• Session Count

The number of ODX sessions (0 - 4096) that are currently being performed is displayed.

The "Session Count" is a total of copy sessions in all the statuses including " Reserved". Click the [Session

Count] link to display the list of sessions.

• Status

The status for ODX sessions are displayed.

Normal

All the copy sessions are in the normal state.

Error

At least one copy session is not in the normal state.

● XCOPY Sessions Information

An XCOPY session is created when the Full Copy function of vStorage APIs for Array Integration (VMware VAAI) is used.

• Session Count

The number of XCOPY (Extended Copy) sessions (0 - 4096) (*1) that are currently being performed is displayed.

The "Session Count" is a total of copy sessions in all the statuses including " Reserved". Click the [Session

Count] link to display the list of sessions.

*1: An XCOPY session is created when the Full Copy function of VMware VAAI is used.

• Status

The status for XCOPY sessions are displayed.

Normal

All the copy sessions are in the normal state.

Error

At least one copy session is not in the normal state.

951

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Basic Information)

● Virtual Volume Sessions Information

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this session information is not displayed.

• Session Count

The number of Virtual Volume sessions that are currently running is displayed.

The "Session Count" is a total of copy sessions in all the statuses including " Reserved". Click the [Session

Count] link to display the list of sessions.

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

0 - 4096

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 4096 (8192) (*1)

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

0 - 16384

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

0 - 16384

ETERNUS DX8700 S3 and ETERNUS DX8900 S3

0 - 65535

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

0 - 1536

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

0 - 6144

ETERNUS DX200F

0 - 1536

*1:

Values in parentheses indicate the number of sessions when "Expand Volume Mode" is "Enable". Refer to "Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) for details.

• Status

The Virtual Volume session status is displayed.

Normal

All the copy sessions are in the normal state.

Error

At least one copy session is not in the normal state.

● Advanced Copy Information

• Usable Advanced Copy Size

The Advanced Copy capacity that can be added to the session is displayed.

The smallest capacity among the usable Advanced Copy sizes calculated from the unused copy table size and copy ratio for each type is displayed.

952

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

This function displays status for local copy sessions.

The following session types are available: EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, and Monitor.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Local Copy Sessions Information is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license has been registered.

• When an ETERNUS DX is used in a Unified Storage environment, the SnapOPC+ session list and SnapOPC+ session details are displayed even if the Advanced Copy function license has not been registered.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 980)

• Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed.

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed.

If the "Status" is " Reserved" or when the copy session type is "MON", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Type

The copy session type is displayed using an abbreviation.

For Equivalent Copy: EC

For One Point Copy: OPC

For QuickOPC: QOPC

For SnapOPC: SOPC

For SnapOPC+: SOPC+

For Monitor: MON

• Status

The copy session status is displayed.

Active

Operating normally

953

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Reserve

Session ID reserved

Suspend

Suspended by an instruction from the host

Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

• Phase

The copy session phase is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Copying

For OPC, EC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+: Copying

For QuickOPC: Copying the updated areas after recording of updated areas is stopped

For Monitor: Recording the updated areas

Equivalent

Maintaining equivalent status of the copy source and copy destination that are duplicated after copy is complete

Tracking

Recording only the updated area after copy is complete

Tracking & Copy

Recording the area updated during copy processing and after copy starts

Readying

Readying to start multiple copy using the Concurrent OPC.

• Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 953) for display items.

• Time Stamp

The time when backup is complete and the time when an error occurred are displayed. If the status is "

Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

The time stamp is updated in the following conditions:

OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+

The time stamp is updated when copy starts and when an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

• When "Status" is " Active", the backup time when the copy started is displayed.

• When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when the error occurred is displayed.

QuickOPC

The time stamp is updated when copy starts, restarts, and when an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

• When "Status" is " Active", the backup time when the copy started is displayed.

• When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when the error occurred is displayed.

The time stamp is updated at Suspend and when an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

• When "Status" is " Active" and the copy session is not suspended yet, "0" is displayed for all of the display items. When suspend is requested and "Status" is " Active", the backup time of the previous suspend that was requested is displayed.

• When "Status" is " Suspend", the backup time when the copy was suspended is displayed.

• When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

954

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Monitor

When "Status" is " Active", "0" is displayed for all of the display items.

• Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a copy session has started is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Copied Data Size

The size of a copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When the copy type is "SOPC" or "SOPC+", only the original data (or previous data) before update in the copy target area is copied.

When the copy type is "MON", the updated data in the area for monitoring updates is copied. This copy type performs a pseudo copy to measure the updated amount of data.

• Total Data Size

The data size of the copy target area is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When the copy type is "MON", the data size of the area for monitoring updates is displayed.

• Resolution

The copy session resolution is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Requestor

The information of the client that started the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

SCSI

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via SCSI).

LAN

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via LAN).

GUI

Copy session requested by ETERNUS Web GUI.

CLI

Copy session requested by ETERNUS CLI.

SMI-S

Copy session requested by SMI-S.

LAN (Veeam)

Copy session requested by the server that has the Veeam Storage Integration plug-in.

Unknown

Other than the above clients.

• License

The registration status of the Advanced Copy license when the copy session is started is displayed.

Regular

The copy session is started with a paid license or a free license (for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200

S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETER-

NUS DX200F).

Trial

The copy session is started with a trial license. Copy sessions that use a trial license are deleted automatically after the expiration of the trial license.

955

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

Filter setting

Filter

Status

Phase

Session ID

EC

Description

Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Select the copy session phase to be displayed.

Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

This function displays detailed information for EC sessions.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

OPC

This function displays detailed information for OPC sessions.

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 953) for display items.

956

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

QuickOPC

This function displays detailed information for QuickOPC sessions.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Modified Data Size

The differential data size when QuickOPC is executed is displayed.

The modified data size is updated in the "Tracking & Copy" and "Tracking" phases. When recopy starts, the modified data size is once changed to "0" and then the differential data size from the time when recopy started is displayed. When tracking stops, the modified data size is changed to "0". If the status is " Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 953) for the display items that are not described in this sec-

tion.

SnapOPC

This function displays detailed information for SnapOPC sessions.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• SDP No.

The Snap Data Pool number, which is used when the copy destination SDV capacity is insufficient, is displayed.

If the status is " Reserved" or when the copy destination is not an SDP, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

957

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SDP Used Capacity

The used capacity of Snap Data Pool is displayed. If the status is " Reserved" or when the copy destination is not an SDP, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 953) for the display items that are not described in this sec-

tion.

SnapOPC+

This function displays detailed information for SnapOPC+ sessions.

■ When the copy destinations are SDPs

■ When the copy destinations are TPPs

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Generation

The generation and total number of generations of the copy session are displayed.

958

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Merging

When the data merge process for a snapshot is being performed, "Yes" is displayed. If not, "No" is displayed.

The "merge process" targets deleted data of a specific generation (except the oldest generation) and copies the difference in data to the previous generation.

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• SDP No.

The Snap Data Pool number, which is used when the copy destination SDV capacity is insufficient, is displayed.

If the status is " Reserved" or when the copy destination is not an SDP, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• SDP Used Capacity

The used capacity of Snap Data Pool is displayed. If the status is " Reserved" or when the copy destination is not an SDP, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 953) for the display items that are not described in this sec-

tion.

Monitor

This function displays detailed information for Monitor sessions.

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 953) for display items.

959

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

This function displays the status for remote copy sessions.

Remote Copy Sessions Information is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license has been registered, and when using an ETERNUS DX/AF model that supports REC.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 980)

• Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Remote Session ID

The session ID for the remote storage system is displayed.

• Type

The copy session type is displayed using an abbreviation (REC).

• Status

The copy session status is displayed.

Active

Operating normally

Reserve

Session ID reserved

Suspend

Suspended by an instruction from the host

Halt

Remote copy disabled due to an error

960

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

• Phase

The copy session phase is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Copying

Equivalent

Maintaining equivalent status of the copy source and copy destination that are duplicated after copy is complete

• Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)" (page 960) for display items.

• Direction

The copy direction of the applicable session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

From Local/To Remote

Session from the local storage system (copy source) to the remote storage system (copy destination)

From Remote/To Local

Session from the remote storage system (copy source) to the local storage system (copy destination)

• Time Stamp

The time when backup has been completed, and the time when an error occurred, are displayed.

The time stamp is updated when the process is suspended, when an error occurs, and when the status is changed.

The following information is displayed for "Time Stamp".

When "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When "Status" is " Active" and the copy session is not suspended yet, "0" is displayed for all of the display items. When suspend is requested and "Status" is " Active", the backup time of the previous suspend that was requested is displayed.

When "Status" is " Suspend", the backup time when the copy was suspended is displayed.

When "Status" is " Error Suspend", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

When "Status" is " Halt", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

When the status is changed from " Halt" to " Active" or when the copy session is forcibly suspended, the time stamp information is cleared and "0" is displayed for all of the display items.

• Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a copy session starts is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Resolution

The copy session resolution is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

961

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Requestor

The information of the client that started the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

SCSI

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via SCSI).

LAN

Copy session requested by the copy management software (via LAN).

SMI-S

Copy session requested by SMI-S.

Unknown

Other than the above clients.

• License

The registration status of the Advanced Copy license when the copy session is started is displayed.

If the license information for the connection target storage system cannot be obtained due to a copy path error,

"Unknown" is displayed.

Regular

The copy session is started with a paid license.

Trial

The copy session is started with a trial license. Copy sessions that use a trial license are deleted automatically after the expiration of the trial license.

• Remote Box ID

The remote Box ID is displayed.

Filter setting

Status

Phase

Session ID

Remote Box ID

Filter Description

Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Select the copy session phase that is to be displayed.

Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

Input the remote Box ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the remote BOX ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

962

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)

REC

This function displays detailed information for REC sessions.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

963

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

ODX Sessions

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ODX Sessions

This function displays the status for ODX sessions.

ODX sessions are created when the ODX function is used for a server with "Windows Server 2012" or later. The ODX function offloads the workload for copying or migrating data from the server to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 980)

• Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Status

The copy session status is displayed.

Active

Operating normally

Reserve

Session ID reserved

Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

• Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 980)

964

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

ODX Sessions

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Time Stamp

The time when backup is complete and the time when an error occurred are displayed.

The time stamp is updated when starting a copy session or an error occurs.

The following information are displayed for this item:

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If the status is " Active", the backup time when the copy started is displayed.

If the status is " Error Suspend", the time when an error occurred is displayed.

• Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a session starts is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Filter setting

Status

Session ID

Filter Description

Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

965

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

XCOPY Sessions

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

XCOPY Sessions

This function displays the status for XCOPY sessions.

An XCOPY (Extended Copy) session is created when the Full Copy function of VMware vStorage APIs for Array Integration (VAAI) is used.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

• Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Status

The copy session status is displayed.

Active

Operating normally

Reserve

Session ID reserved

Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

• Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Click this item to display the screen shown in "Advanced Copy (Property)" (page 980)

966

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

XCOPY Sessions

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Time Stamp

The time when backup has been completed, and the time when an error occurred, are displayed.

The time stamp is updated when starting a copy session or an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If the status is " Active", the backup time when the copy started is displayed.

If the status is " Error Suspend", the time when the error occurred is displayed.

• Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a session starts is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Filter setting

Status

Session ID

Filter Description

Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

967

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Virtual Volume Sessions

This function displays the status for the Virtual Volume session.

Virtual Volume sessions are created by VMware vSphere 6.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID is displayed.

• Source Volume No.

The copy source volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume No.

The copy destination volume number is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Type

The session type is displayed.

Snapshot

VVOLs are being copied with the Copy-on-Write method (equivalent to SnapOPC+).

Write I/O for the copy destination VVOL is not allowed.

Fastclone

VVOLs are being copied with the Copy-on-Write method (equivalent to SnapOPC).

Write I/O for the copy destination VVOL is allowed, but restoring data is not allowed.

Clone

VVOLs are being copied with the Background copy method (equivalent to OPC).

Revert

Data is being restored from the snapshot destination VVOL to the snapshot source VVOL.

CopyDiffs

Comparison result (the difference of a data) between two VVOLs during a snapshot session is being copied to the third VVOL.

• Status

The copy session status is displayed.

Active

Operating normally

Reserved

Session ID reserved

968

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Virtual Volume Sessions

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Error Suspend

Copy canceled due to an error

Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

• Merging

When the data merge process for a snapshot is being performed, "Yes" is displayed.

If not, "No" is displayed. The "merge process" targets deleted data of a specific generation (except the oldest generation) and copies the difference in data to the previous generation.

When the session type is not "Snapshot" or when the copy status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Generation

The generation and total number of generations of the snapshot session are displayed.

When the session type is not "Snapshot" or when the copy status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Error Code

The error code is displayed when an error occurs. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

copy path created with the function in "Set Copy Path" is operating properly. Refer to "Set Copy Path" (page 610) .

• Time Stamp

The time when backup has been completed, and the time when an error occurred, are displayed.

The time stamp is updated when starting a copy session or an error occurs.

The following information is displayed:

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If the status is " Active", the backup time when the copy started is displayed.

If the status is " Error Suspend", the time when the error occurred is displayed.

• Elapsed Time

The elapsed time after a session starts is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Copied Data Size

The size of copy that has been completed is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Total Data Size

The total copy size is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination FTRP No.

The FTRP No. to which the copy destination FTV belongs is displayed.

When the copy session type is not "Snapshot" or "Fastclone", or when the copy status is " Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

• Used Session Capacity

The used capacity of FTRP area is displayed.

When the copy session type is not "Snapshot" or "Fastclone", or when the copy status is " Reserved", a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

Filter setting

Session ID

Type

Status

Filter Description

Input the session ID of the copy session that is to be displayed.

When not using the session ID for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the type of the copy session that is to be displayed.

Select the copy session status that is to be displayed.

969

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Settings (Advanced Copy)

This function displays the current Advanced Copy license registration status and the Advanced Copy setting state.

• When the trial license is registered, the registration date and the expiration date is displayed.

• Registering an Advanced Copy license and registering the copy table size are not required when using the ODX or XCOPY function, or when using copy functions with VVOLs.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● License Information

• State

The registration status of the Advanced Copy license for the local copy and remote copy is displayed.

"Remote Copy" is displayed only for models that support REC.

Not Registered

No license is registered.

Free

The free license is registered. Up to eight local copy sessions can be created as an Advanced Copy. This item is only displayed for the local copy functions of an ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, an ETERNUS DX60

S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, an ETERNUS AF250 S2, an ETERNUS AF250, and an ETERNUS DX200F.

Trial

A trial license is registered. All of the Advanced Copy functions can be used for a limited time.

Trial Expiration

The trial license is expired. The Advanced Copy function is not available.

Full

A paid license is registered. All of the Advanced Copy functions can be used.

If the trial license expires, the license registration status returns to the state prior to the registration of the trial license.

970

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Registration Date

The date when the trial license was registered is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

Trial license has never been registered.

A paid license or a free license is registered.

• Expiration Date

The expiration date for the trial license is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed in the following conditions:

Trial license has never been registered.

A paid license or a free license is registered.

● Veeam Storage Integration

• License

The registration status of the Veeam Storage Integration License is displayed.

Registered

Not Registered

This item is displayed only when all of the following conditions are satisfied.

A Full license (paid license) for the local copy is registered

The ETERNUS DX/AF supports Veeam Storage Integration (for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, or the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2)

● Advanced Copy Settings

• Copy Table Size

A copy table size is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license has been registered or when the Unified

Storage function is enabled.

• EC/OPC Priority

The EC/OPC priority is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license has been registered.

Automatic Priority

This mode changes the EC/OPC priority automatically in response to the operating load status.

High Priority

This mode operates by making maximum use of internal resources.

Middle Priority

This mode operates slightly slower than the High Priority mode.

Low Priority

This mode reduces the effect on host access.

Very Low Priority

This mode operates slower than the Low Priority mode.

• Current EC/OPC Priority

The current EC/OPC priority is displayed.

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license has been registered.

High Priority

Middle Priority

Low Priority

Very Low Priority

971

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• ODX Buffer Volume

The registration status of the ODX Buffer volume is displayed.

Registered

Not Registered

Snap Data Pool

This function displays the usage of SDP.

SDP is the area used when in case executing SnapOPC and SnapOPC+ increases the amount of copy data and exceeds the SDV capacity.

SDP becomes available when creating an SDPV. Created SDPV is automatically added to the SDP.

• This function is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license has been registered or when the Unified Storage function is enabled.

• Because the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3 do not support the encryption function, display items that follow

"Total Capacity" are displayed without the "Encrypted/Unencrypted" table heading.

■ For the ETERNUS DX60 S4 and the ETERNUS DX60 S3

■ For the other models

972

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• SDP No.

The SDP number (fixed as "0") is displayed.

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the SDP is displayed.

• Total Free Space

The total free space of the SDP is displayed.

• SDPE

SDPE, the allocation unit for SDV, is displayed with 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB.

• Unencrypted

Total Capacity

The total capacity of unencrypted SDP is displayed.

Total Used Capacity

The total used capacity of unencrypted SDP is displayed.

Total Used Capacity (%)

The usage rate of unencrypted SDP is displayed.

Used Host Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an unencrypted SDV where a capacity shortage caused by data writing from the host has occurred is displayed.

Used Copy Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an unencrypted SDV where a capacity shortage caused by

SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ has occurred is displayed.

• Encrypted

Total Capacity

The total capacity of encrypted SDP is displayed.

Total Used Capacity

The total used capacity of encrypted SDP is displayed.

Total Used Capacity (%)

The usage rate of encrypted SDP is displayed.

Used Host Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an encrypted SDV where a capacity shortage caused by data writing from the host has occurred is displayed.

Used Copy Capacity

The total capacity of the SDPE that is allocated for an encrypted SDV where a capacity shortage caused by

SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ has occurred is displayed.

Copy Path

This function displays the REC path status between the local and remote storage systems. It shows whether the

Select the target remote storage system. (Up to 16 storage systems can be registered.) The following items are displayed.

• Storage System

• Advanced Copy Path Status

After creating the copy paths, make sure to check the copy path status with this function.

973

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This function is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license or the Storage Cluster function license has been registered, and when using an ETERNUS DX/AF model that supports REC.

• The "Priority Level" and the "Multiplicity" settings can be specified for each remote Box ID. Refer to

"Modify REC

Multiplicity" (page 647)

for details.

• To change the "Link Speed" setting, create a copy path with a new link speed by using the [Set Copy Path]

function, and apply the created copy path to the related storage systems. Refer to "Set Copy Path" (page 610)

for details.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Local Storage System Information

• Box ID

The Box ID for the local storage system is displayed.

"Box ID" is an identifier used to identify individual storage systems. This ID is a unique name in the user system and consists of 40-digit code.

The initial Box ID is a device ID consisting of device information (such as series name, model name, and serial number).

● Remote Storage System Information

• Box ID

This is the Box ID of the remote storage system that has a path to the local storage system. Click this item to display

"Copy Path Detail" (page 987)

• Connection Type

The type of connection to the remote storage system that has a path to the local storage system is displayed.

Direct

Remote

• Priority Level

REC is performed using the priority level (Automatic Priority/High Priority/Middle Priority/Low Priority/Very Low

Priority) that is specified with the [Modify EC/OPC Priority] function (*1).

Automatic

REC is performed using the priority level (Automatic Priority/High Priority/Middle Priority/Low Priority/Very

Low Priority) that is specified using the "Modify REC Multiplicity" function (*1).

1 - 8

REC is performed with the displayed priority level. "1" corresponds to "Very Low Priority", and "8" corresponds to "High Priority" for the [Modify EC/OPC Priority] function (*1).

974

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Multiplicity

When the local storage system and the remote storage system are connected by remote connection, the multiplicity is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Automatic

REC is performed with the recommended multiplicity that is calculated by the [Measure Round Trip Time] result (*2).

1 - 1024

REC is performed with the multiplicity that is manually specified with the [Modify REC Multiplicity] function

(*3).

• Recommended Multiplicity

When the local storage system and the remote storage system are connected by remote connection, the recommended multiplicity is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

1 - 1024

The recommended multiplicity that is calculated by the [Measure Round Trip Time] result (*2).

***

The round trip time is not measured by the [Measure Round Trip Time] function (*2).

• Link Speed

When the local storage system and the remote storage system are connected by remote connection, the link speed is displayed between 1 Mbit/s - 65535 Mbit/s. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

*1: Refer to

"Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 600) for details.

*2: Refer to

"Measure Round Trip Time" (page 634) for details.

*3: Refer to

"Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 647) for details.

REC Buffer

This function displays the REC Buffer status when performing REC in "REC asynchronous consistency mode".

The "Consistency mode" secures the order of data transfer to the remote storage system for all of the specified REC sessions. This mode requires constant securement of the dedicated REC Buffer in the cache memory. Copying via

REC Buffer stores multiple REC session I/Os in the REC Buffer for a certain period of time, and copies in blocks.

This function is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license has been registered, and when using an

ETERNUS DX/AF model that supports REC.

975

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Group

The management group number of the REC Buffer is displayed.

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

0 - 7

ETERNUS DX8100 S3, ETERNUS DX8700 S3, and ETERNUS DX8900 S3

0 - 7

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

0 - 3

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

0 - 7

ETERNUS DX200F

0 - 3

• Usage

The REC Buffer usage is displayed.

Unused

Send

Receive

• Remote Box ID

The Box ID for the remote storage system is displayed.

If the copy path information is deleted after the REC Buffer creation, "???" is displayed. Note that REC Buffers with "???" cannot be used. Delete any REC Buffers with this status. Refer to

"Modify REC Buffer" (page 635)

for details.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the usage is "Unused".

• Status

The REC Buffer status is displayed.

ACTIVE

REC Buffer can transfer data.

INACTIVE

REC Buffer cannot transfer data.

• Mirror Status

The mirroring status (redundancy status) of the REC Buffer is displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. The REC Buffer is duplicated by two CMs to prevent data loss when the ETERNUS DX/

AF fails or when maintenance is performed.

Normal

Duplication of the REC Buffer was successful.

Recovering

Duplication of the REC Buffer failed.

• Size

The REC Buffer size is displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

128MB

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

128MB, 256MB, 512MB

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB

ETERNUS DX8100 S3, ETERNUS DX8700 S3, and ETERNUS DX8900 S3

128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB

976

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

128MB, 256MB, 512MB

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB

ETERNUS DX200F

128MB, 256MB, 512MB

• Forwarding Interval

The data transfer interval is displayed. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Monitoring Time

The monitoring time, before transition to the "Halt" state for a copy session when an REC Buffer shortage occurs, is displayed. When the monitoring time" is "0 min.", the ETERNUS DX/AF is not being monitored. When the REC Buffer usage is "Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• HALT Wait Timer

The maximum non-responding time is displayed. During the non-response time, the host I/O response is stopped to give priority to performing REC Buffer transfers in a high-load state. When the REC Buffer usage is

"Unused", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• I/O Priority Mode

Whether the "I/O Priority Mode" is enabled or disabled is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the usage is "Unused".

"I/O Priority Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O when an initial copy for starting, restarting, or recovering the copy function is performed.

This item is available when logged in using a user account with the "Advanced Copy Management" policy.

• Immediate HALT Mode

Whether the "Immediate HALT Mode" is enabled or disabled is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the usage is "Unused".

"Immediate HALT Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O because the REC Buffer is insufficient when "HALT Wait

Timer" is set to "0 sec.".

This item is available when logged in using a user account with the "Advanced Copy Management" policy.

• High Bandwidth Mode

Whether the "High Bandwidth Mode" is enabled or disabled is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the usage is "Unused".

"High Bandwidth Mode" reduces the number of communications by transferring control data required for buffer transfers with as little time as possible to improve the transfer speed for long distance communication.

This item is available when a user with the "Advanced Copy Management" policy is logged on an ETERNUS DX/

AF with a controller firmware version V10L4x or later.

• REC Disk Buffer Status

When the REC Buffer usage is "Send", the status of the REC Disk Buffers that are assigned to the REC Buffer is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the REC Disk Buffer is not allocated or the usage is "Receive" or

"Unused".

Active

All of the REC Disk Buffers in the REC Buffer are available.

Rebuilding

Rebuild/copyback is being performed in some of the REC Disk Buffers.

Formatting

Formatting is being performed in some of the REC Disk Buffers.

Not Supported

The copy destination storage system for REC does not support the REC Disk Buffers.

Not Mirrored

Some of the REC Disk Buffers have lost redundancy due to disk failure.

977

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Error

Some of the REC Disk Buffers cannot be used (due to RAID group failure or RAID group blockage).

If the "REC Disk Buffer Status" is "Formatting", "Not Supported", or "Error", all of the other REC Disk Buffers that belong to the same REC Buffer cannot be used.

• REC Disk Buffer Total Capacity

When the usage is "Send", the total capacity of the REC Disk Buffer, which is assigned to the REC Buffer, is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the REC Disk Buffer is not assigned or when the usage is "Receive" or

"Unused".

• Total Storage Data Size

When the REC Buffer usage is "Send", the size of the data in the REC Disk Buffer that is assigned to the REC Buffer is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the REC Disk Buffer is not assigned or when the usage is

"Receive" or "Unused".

• Free Disk Buffer Size

When the usage is "Send", the unused capacity of the REC Disk Buffer, which is assigned to the REC Buffer, is displayed. A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the REC Disk Buffer is not assigned or when the usage is "Receive" or

"Unused".

REC Disk Buffer

This function displays the existing REC Disk Buffers in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Drives are not monitored for bad sectors when the drives configure the REC Disk Buffer.

This function is displayed only when the Advanced Copy function license has been registered, and when using an

ETERNUS DX/AF model that supports REC.

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● REC Disk Buffer List

• No.

The RAID group number of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed. Click this item to display the [REC Disk Buffer Detail] screen.

978

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Settings (Advanced Copy)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Name

The REC Disk Buffer name is displayed. Click this item to display the [REC Disk Buffer Detail] screen.

• Status

The REC Disk Buffer status is displayed. Refer to

"RAID Group Status" (page 1413) for details.

• Total Capacity

The total capacity of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed.

• Controlling CM

The Controlling CM of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed (x: CE number, y: CM number).

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y

For the other models

CM#y

• REC Buffer

The management group number of the REC Buffer, to which the REC Disk Buffer is assigned, is displayed. A "-"

(hyphen) is displayed for an REC Disk Buffer that is not assigned to any REC Buffers.

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

0 - 7

ETERNUS DX8100 S3, ETERNUS DX8700 S3, and ETERNUS DX8900 S3

0 - 7

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

0 - 3

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

0 - 7

ETERNUS DX200F

0 - 3

• Encryption

The encryption status of the REC Disk Buffer is displayed.

An REC Disk Buffer that is encrypted by CM

"-" (hyphen)

An REC Disk Buffer that is not encrypted (unencrypted volume)

SED

An REC Disk Buffer that is encrypted by SED

• Process

A process that is being performed for the REC Disk Buffer is displayed. If no process is being performed, a "-"

(hyphen) is displayed.

Recovering

Rebuild, copyback, redundant copy, or recovery of the RAID group is being performed.

Formatting

Formatting is being performed.

979

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Property)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Filter setting

Filter

Name

Status

Description

Input the REC Disk Buffer name that is to be displayed.

REC Disk Buffers matching or partially matching the input name are displayed.

When not using the REC Disk Buffer name for filtering, leave this item blank.

Select the REC Disk Buffer status that is to be displayed.

When not using the REC Disk Buffer status for filtering, select "All" (all REC Disk Buffers).

Advanced Copy (Property)

Detailed information (Property) about the Advanced Copy is displayed.

■ For Local Copy

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID selected in the [Local Copy] screen is displayed.

• Source Volume Name

The copy source volume name is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume Name

The copy destination volume name is displayed. When the "Status" is " Reserved" or when the copy session type is "MON", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Copy Range

The copy range of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Totally

Whole volume

Extent

Part of volume

980

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Property)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Secondary Access Permission

If the status is " Active", accessibility from the host to the copy destination volume is displayed. This item is displayed in EC. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Read Only at Equivalency

When the "Phase" is "Equivalent", only read access to the copy destination volume is allowed

No Read/Write

No read/write access to the copy destination volume is allowed

• Concurrent Suspend Status

When an instruction to collectively and tentatively separate multiple pairs of a copy source volume and a copy destination volume (Concurrent Suspend request) is received in EC session, transition status to "Suspend" is displayed. This item is displayed in EC. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. If the Concurrent

Suspend Status cannot be obtained, "Unknown" is displayed.

Normal

Transition to the "Suspend" state is complete or Concurrent Suspend cannot be performed

Exec

Transition to the "Suspend" state in progress

Error

Transition to the "Suspend" state failed

Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

Refer to "Advanced Copy (All Local Sessions)" (page 953) for the display items that are not described in this sec-

tion.

■ For Remote Copy

981

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Property)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID selected in the [Remote Copy] screen is displayed.

• Source Volume Name

The following is displayed depending on the "Direction". If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When the "Direction" is "From Local/To Remote"

The copy source volume name is displayed.

When the "Direction" is "From Remote/To Local"

The "Remote Box ID / Copy source volume number" is displayed.

• Destination Volume Name

The following is displayed depending on the "Direction". If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

When the "Direction" is "From Local/To Remote"

The "Remote Box ID / Copy destination volume number" is displayed.

When the "Direction" is "From Remote/To Local"

The copy destination volume name is displayed.

• Copy Range

The copy range of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Totally

Whole volume

Extent

Part of volume

• Secondary Access Permission

If the status is " Active", accessibility from the host to the copy destination volume is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Read Only at Equivalency

When the "Phase" is "Equivalent", only read access to the copy destination volume is allowed

No Read/Write

No read/write access to the copy destination volume is allowed

• Sync

The operation mode of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Sync (synchronous)

Async (asynchronous)

• Transfer Mode

The transfer mode of the copy session is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If the "Sync" is "Sync", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Stack Mode (Asynchronous Stack mode)

Consistency Mode (Asynchronous Consistency mode)

Through Mode (Asynchronous Through mode)

• Recovery Mode

The recovery mode of the copy session is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Automatic Recovery

In this mode, copy automatically resumes when the copy path is recovered from error status.

Manual Recovery

In this mode, copy does not automatically resume when the copy path is recovered from error status.

982

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Property)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Split Mode

The split mode of the copy session is displayed. This item is available only for sessions in REC synchronous mode. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. If the "Transfer Mode" is "Stack Mode" or "Consistency Mode", the field is blank.

Automatic

In this mode, Write I/O access to the copy source volume is accepted when the copy path is in error status.

Manual

In this mode, Write I/O access to the copy source volume is not accepted when the copy path is in error status. Specific sense data is sent to the host.

• Change Error

The result of changing REC mode ("Transfer Mode", "Recovery Mode", or "Split Mode") and the result of REC reverse operation is displayed.

When anything other than "Normal" is displayed, the operation mode may be different between the copy source and the copy destination storage systems, or REC reverse operation may disabled due to restriction in other functions.

If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Normal

REC mode change and REC reverse operation are working normally

Mode Change Error

An error was detected while changing the REC mode change

Reverse Error

An error was detected while the REC reverse operation was being performed

• Concurrent Suspend Status

When an instruction to collectively and tentatively separate multiple pairs of a copy source volume and a copy destination volume (Concurrent Suspend request) is received in REC session, transition status to "Suspend" is displayed. If the status is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. If the Concurrent Suspend Status cannot be obtained, "Unknown" is displayed.

Normal

Transition to the " Suspend" state is complete or Concurrent Suspend cannot be performed

Exec

Transition to the " Suspend" state is in progress

Error

Transition to the " Suspend" state failed

Unknown

A status other than the ones listed above

• Remain Time

The expected time to complete transition to the "Suspend" when a Concurrent Suspend request is received.

If the "Status" is " Reserved", or if the "Remain Time" cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to

"Advanced Copy (All Remote Sessions)" (page 960) for the display items that are not described in this sec-

tion.

983

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Property)

■ For ODX

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID selected in the [ODX] screen is displayed.

• Source Volume Name

The copy source volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume Name

The copy destination volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "ODX Sessions" (page 964) for the display items that are not described in this section.

■ For XCOPY

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID selected in the [XCOPY] screen is displayed.

• Source Volume Name

The copy source volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

984

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Property)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Destination Volume Name

The copy destination volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Refer to "XCOPY Sessions" (page 966) for the display items that are not described in this section.

■ For Virtual Volume

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Session ID

The session ID selected in the [Virtual Volume] screen is displayed.

• Source Volume Name

The copy source volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination Volume Name

The copy destination volume name is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Destination FTRP Name

The FTRP name to which the copy destination FTV belongs is displayed. If the "Status" is " Reserved", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed. If the copy session type is not "Snapshot" or "Fastclone", this item is not displayed.

Refer to "Virtual Volume Sessions" (page 968) for the display items that are not described in this section.

985

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Advanced Copy (Extent information)

Detailed information (Extent information) about the Advanced Copy is displayed.

This screen is available only when the "Copy Range" is "Extent".

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

• Offset

The array number of extent information is displayed.

• Source LBA

The copy source start LBA of copy with range specification is displayed.

• Destination LBA

The copy destination start LBA of copy with range specification is displayed.

• Copy Extent Size

The data amount for copy with range specification is displayed.

986

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Copy Path Detail

Detailed information of copy path is displayed.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The following items are displayed in the Main area:

● Storage System Information

• Local Storage System Box ID

The Box ID of the local storage system is displayed.

• Remote Storage System Box ID

The Box ID of the selected remote storage system is displayed.

• Connection Type

The connection type between the local storage system and the selected remote storage system is displayed.

Direct

Remote

• Priority Level

When the local storage system and the selected remote storage system are connected by direct connection, the priority level is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Remote", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Multiplicity

When the local storage system and the selected remote storage system are connected by remote connection, the multiplicity is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Recommended Multiplicity

When the local storage system and the selected remote storage system are connected by remote connection, the recommended multiplicity is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Link Speed

When the local storage system and the selected remote storage system are connected by remote connection, the link speed is displayed. If the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

● Advanced Copy Path Status

• Local Port

The port information of the local storage system is displayed.

987

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Copy Path Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Status

The port path status between the local and remote storage systems is displayed with an icon and a character string.

Normal

The copy path is in the normal state.

Error

The copy path is in the error state.

• Remote Port WWN/iSCSI Name

The port WWN or iSCSI name of the remote storage system is displayed.

• IP Version

When the port type is iSCSI, the IP version for the destination iSCSI port of the copy path is displayed.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port type is FC.

IPv4

IPv6 (Link Local)

IPv6 (Connect IP)

"-" (hyphen)

• IP Address

When the port type is iSCSI, the IP address for the destination iSCSI port of the copy path is displayed.

The display format varies according to the IP version.

A "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the port type is FC.

For IPv4 address

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 (decimal)

For IPv6 address

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (hexadecimal, "a" - "f" are lowercase letters)

Refer to

Thin Provisioning Management

• Bandwidth Limit

The bandwidth limit for sending data from the local storage system to the path is displayed.

Unlimited

1 - 65535 Mbit/s

• Detail Information

Detailed information about the copy path is displayed.

If an error occurs in the copy path, the error details or location is displayed using the following abbreviations. If there are multiple error locations, multiple abbreviations are displayed.

Connectable

The copy path is in the normal state.

Path Unstable

The copy path between the local storage system and remote storage system is in unstable status. For example, link-down repeatedly occurs in a certain period of time or communication fails.

Bitmap Resolution Mismatched

The resolution settings are different between the local and remote storage systems.

Suspected Spot (D)

The copy path settings may be invalid.

Suspected Spot (N)

The error is suspected to have occurred in the remote storage system.

Suspected Spot (T)

The error is suspected to have occurred in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port in the remote storage system.

Suspected Spot (C)

The error is suspected to have occurred in the cable.

988

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

14. Advanced Copy Status

Copy Path Detail

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Suspected Spot (O)

The error is suspected to have occurred in the adapter other than the local storage system and the remote storage system.

Suspected Spot (S)

The error is suspected to have occurred in the switch or the switch settings.

Suspected Spot (I)

The error is suspected to have occurred in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the local storage system.

Suspected Spot (M)

The error is suspected to have occurred in the memory.

989

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

This appendix provides information on the parameters of each function.

•

System Management

•

Component Management

•

Volume Management

•

Connectivity Management

•

RAID Group Management

•

•

Advanced Copy Management

System Management

This section provides information on the parameters of the following actions for system management.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Event/Dump Management

•

Audit Log Management

•

Key Management

•

Storage Migration Management

•

External Drive Management

•

Remote Support Management

•

Firmware Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

990

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Smart Setup Wizard

For details about this function, refer to "Smart Setup Wizard" (page 48) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Smart Setup Wizard" (page 1288) .

● CA Type Selection

• CA Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a CA type to connect with the host.

This item is displayed only when multiple types of CAs are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• FC

• iSCSI

• SAS

● FC connection topology selection

• Connection

Description Select the connection topology for the FC port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL".

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is displayed only when the host affinity setting is not configured for the target port.

• Fabric

A connection type that enables simultaneous communication among multiple nodes through a Fibre Channel switch.

• FC-AL

A connection type that connects multiple nodes in a loop.

• Select "Fabric" for a direct connection when "Transfer Rate" is "16 Gbit/s" or more. Some destination Fibre Channel cards may require Fibre Channel switches. For details, refer to the Fibre Channel card specifications.

• Select "FC-AL" for a direct connection when "Transfer Rate" is "4 Gbit/s" or "8 Gbit/s". Note that there may be cases when "Fabric" must be selected depending on the Fibre Channel card of the connection destination. Refer to "Setting the To-Server Connection Type (Setting the FC Port Parameters)" in "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" (*1) for details.

*1: Configuration Guide -Server Connection- (Fibre Channel) ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series Hybrid Storage Systems,

ETERNUS AF series, ETERNUS DX200F All-Flash Arrays Settings

• For parameters other than "Connection", the following values are specified for the FC port.

If "Connection" is "Fabric", the default FC port parameters are set.

If "Connection" is "FC-AL", the default FC port parameters are set for items other than the following.

• "Automatic" for "Set Loop ID"

• "Ascending" for "Loop ID"

• FC port parameters are applied to all FC ports in the ETERNUS DX/AF (whose port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA").

991

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● iSCSI Port IP Address Setting

• New IP Address

Description Enter a new IPv4 address of the iSCSI port.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is displayed only when the host affinity setting is not configured for the target port.

• Up to three numeric characters

• 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal)

• 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• Class must be A, B, or C.

Use the IPv4 address for the iSCSI port. Note that the IPv6 address is not supported.

Enter a "New IP Address" and click the [All Refresh] button to display the new IP address in "New IP Address" under the iSCSI port list. The new subnet mask is also displayed in "New Subnet Mask".

For the new IP address, the entered value is used as the starting address and the last three digits (xxx) are set in ascending order. For the new subnet mask, the same value as the current subnet mask is set. If the current subnet mask is not specified, "255.255.255.0" is set.

● iSCSI port List

• New IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter a new IP address to change the current IP address.

If the current IP address is not changed, this item remains a "-" (hyphen). If a value is not specified, the "Current IP Address" is set for the ETERNUS DX/AF.

There are two methods available for setting a new IP address:

• Set new IP addresses in a single process

Refer to Note for "New IP Address" (page 992)

" in

"iSCSI Port IP Address Setting"

• Set a new IP address individually

Directly enter an IPv4 address of the iSCSI port.

• Up to three numeric characters

• 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal)

• 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• Class must be A, B, or C.

• For the iSCSI port whose current IP address is not specified, the "New IP Address" setting is required.

• Use the IPv4 address for the iSCSI port. Note that the IPv6 address is not supported.

• IP addresses that are duplicated in the following manner cannot be specified:

There are multiple combinations of "New IP Address" and "New Subnet Mask"

For ports without a new IP address setting, the combination of "Current IP Address" and "Current Subnet Mask" is the same as that of "New IP Address" and "New Subnet Mask"

992

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• New Subnet Mask

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter a new subnet mask to change the current subnet mask.

If the current subnet mask is not changed, this item remains a "-" (hyphen). If a value is not specified, the "Current Subnet Mask" is set for the ETERNUS DX/AF.

There are two methods available for setting a new subnet mask:

• Set a new subnet mask when setting the new IP address

Refer to Note for "New IP Address" (page 992)

" in

"iSCSI Port IP Address Setting"

• Set a new subnet mask individually

Directly enter a subnet mask of the iSCSI port.

• Numeric characters

• 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.252

For the iSCSI port whose current subnet mask is not specified, the "New Subnet Mask" setting is required.

● Host Selection (Register Host)

• Checkbox to select a host

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the hosts that are to be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

Up to 500 hosts (*1) can be registered with this wizard. If 300 hosts have already been registered, 200 hosts can be added.

*1: Total of all hosts, regardless of the interface type. For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, the maximum number of hosts is 128.

● Setting Host NickName

• Name

Description Enter the name of the host that is to be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

An existing host name cannot be specified.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Note that "%" cannot be used as the first character

• Spaces

Refer to

"Naming Conventions When Registering Hosts" (page 1378) for details.

The "Name" entered in this wizard is only the host name. If new TPPs, volumes, and LUN groups are created, the name of the host is used.

993

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Host Selection

• Checkbox to select a host

Description Select a host to which to assign volumes.

Input condition/

Display contents

The following hosts can be selected.

• Hosts that are registered with this wizard

• Hosts that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF, but host affinity is not set

• Hosts that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF and host affinity is set, but are connected to only one LUN group

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• The hosts selected in this item are connected to all the ports. Up to 256 hosts can be selected (up to 32 hosts can be selected for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3).

• Hosts that are registered with this wizard are automatically selected.

• If a host in the "Active" state is selected, hosts with the host affinity setting for the same LUN group are automatically selected.

• If a host in the "Active" state is selected, hosts with the host affinity setting for a different LUN group cannot be selected.

• The "Select All" checkbox on the top left is not displayed.

• The following hosts with the host affinity setting cannot be selected. Checkbox cannot be selected.

Hosts that are connected to multiple LUN groups

Other hosts that are connected to LUN groups that cannot be selected

Hosts that are connected to LUN groups that use LUN#256 onward

• If host affinity is set to the host, the name of the LUN group to which the volumes with the host affinity setting belong is displayed in "LUN Group".

● New Volume

• Capacity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the capacity of the volume to be created and select the unit of capacity.

Up to a 15-digit number including the "." (decimal point) can be input. Note that when "MB" is selected, the specified value is rounded down to the nearest whole number. When "GB" or "TB" is selected, the specified value is converted to "MB" and rounded down to the nearest whole number.

• 24 MB - 128 TB (numeric characters)

• TB/GB/MB

The number of entered characters includes the "." (decimal point) and the "0" before the decimal point.

(Example) 0.1234567890123 (15 characters)

994

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Number of Volumes

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the number of volumes to be created.

For details on the maximum number of volumes, refer to "The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model" (page 1111) .

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

1 - 1024

• For the other models

1 - The maximum number of volumes (*1)

*1: For details on the maximum number of volumes, refer to "The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model" (page 1111)

For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the maximum number of volumes can be increased by selecting "Enable" for "Expand Volume Mode". The "Expand Volume Mode" setting is available in

"Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76) . If the setting is changed, reboot the ETERNUS DX. If the ETERNUS DX is not rebooted, the

increased number of volumes cannot be created.

If the ETERNUS DX has not been rebooted, a system message appears in the [Overview] screen. Refer to "Overview" (page

24) for details.

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, up to 1024 volumes can be created at a time. Note that this limitation does not apply to other models.

• Radio buttons to select a TPP

Description Select a TPP to create the volume.

Input condition/

Display contents

For details on the Deduplication/Compression status of volumes, refer to "Deduplication/Compression status of the created volumes" (page 995)

TPP where the volume is created

Deduplication/Compression status of the created volumes

The Deduplication/Compression status of the volumes to be created varies depending on the Deduplication/Compression setting of the selected TPP.

Deduplication/Compression setting for the destination TPP

Deduplication Compression

Enable Enable

Volumes that are to be created

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Deduplication/Compression Volumes where both Deduplication and

Compression are enabled

Deduplication/Compression Volumes where only Deduplication is enabled

Deduplication/Compression Volumes where only Compression is enabled

TPVs for SAN where both Deduplication and Compression are disabled

995

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Volume Selection

• Checkbox to select a volume

Description Select volumes to be assigned to the host.

Input condition/

Display contents

Only TPVs that can be registered in LUN groups are displayed in the volume list.

The checkboxes for the volumes with the following conditions are selected (specified as a registration target volume in the LUN group) by default. If these volumes are not registered in the

LUN group, clear the checkbox.

• Volumes that are created with this wizard

• Volumes that are registered in the LUN group where host affinity is set with the host selected in the [Select Host] screen

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Up to 256 volumes can be selected. This is the number of volumes that can be registered in a single LUN group.

• If a volume is already assigned to the host LUN (or a volume is already registered in the LUN group), the following are displayed.

"Enable" for "Host LUN Setting"

The host LUN of the volume for "Current Host LUN"

• For volumes created with this wizard, "Yes" is displayed for "New".

• If the volume assigned to the host LUN is deleted from the LUN group (or this checkbox is cleared), "Remove" is displayed for "New Host LUN" in the [Review Summary] screen.

Change User Password

For details about this function, refer to "Change User Password" (page 59) .

● Password Setting

• Old Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the current password.

4 - 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/', '@',

'[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|', '}', '~', ':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

996

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• New Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a new password.

Entered letters are case-sensitive.

If "Password Policy" for the target user account is enabled, the following input conditions are added according to the configuration with the [Modify User Policy] function.

• Minimum Password Length

• Password Complexity

• Password History

• For user accounts in which "Password Policy" is disabled

4 - 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/

', '@', '[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|', '}', '~', ':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

• For user accounts in which "Password Policy" is enabled

When "Password Complexity" is enabled

"Minimum password length" to 64 (minimum password length: 4 - 64)

At least three of the following character types must be used

• Uppercase letters (A - Z)

• Lowercase letters (a - z)

• Numeric characters (0 - 9)

• Symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/', '@', '[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|',

'}', '~', ':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

When "Password Complexity" is disabled

"Minimum password length" to 64 (minimum password length: 4 - 64)

Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/',

'@', '[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|', '}', '~', ':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

• Passwords must be changed if "Expired" is displayed for the "Days To Expiration" field in "User Information".

• Passwords can be changed if "Changeable" is displayed for the "Days To Password Change" field in "User Information".

• An error screen appears if the password does not satisfy the input conditions described below. The following shows procedures corresponding to each error.

If "Minimum Password Length" is not satisfied

The entered password is less than the required number of characters. Check the minimum length ("x") displayed in the "x - 64" format to the right of the password input field.

If "Password Complexity" is not satisfied

The required character types have not been used in the entered password. At least three of the following character types must be used; "uppercase letters", "lowercase letters", "numeric characters", and "symbols".

If "Password History" is not satisfied

The entered password does not meet the reuse condition. The same password that was previously set (between the latest and the specified number of generations) cannot be used. Set a different password.

Refer to the "Password Policy" settings in advance for details about "Password Complexity" and "Password History". Refer to

"Modify User Policy" (page 118) for details.

• Confirm New Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the same character string as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation.

Refer to

"New Password" (page 997) in

"Password Setting" for details.

997

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set SSH Public Key

For details about this function, refer to "Set SSH Public Key" (page 61) .

● SSH Public Key Setting

• SSH Public Key

Description Register or change the SSH client public key used for login authentication from ETERNUS CLI in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button and specify the public key to be registered or to be changed.

When using the SSH client key authentication, register the SSH public key in the ETERNUS DX/

AF and prepare the SSH secret key, corresponding to the public key in the client PC in advance.

To delete the current user's (your) SSH client public key, select the checkbox.

The checkbox is displayed only when the SSH client public key has been registered.

• Delete checkbox

Selected

Cleared

• Click the [Browse...] button and specify the public key that is to be registered or to be changed.

Register Non-disruptive Storage Migration License

For details about this function, refer to "Register Non-disruptive Storage Migration License" (page 66) .

● License Settings

• License Key

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License key.

16 capital letters and numeric characters

System Settings

Modify Storage System Name

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Storage System Name" (page 71)

● Set the Name of the Storage System

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the storage system name (required).

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

998

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Installation Location

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the installation location of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• 0 to 50 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Administrator

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the administrator information (the administrator name, contact information, etc) of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• 0 to 50 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Description

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the description of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• 0 to 50 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

Modify Date and Time

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Date and Time" (page 72) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Date and Time" (page 1289) .

● Date/Time Settings

• Date

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Change the current date and time settings.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (2001 - 2037), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 - 23) , mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

● Time Zone Settings

• Time Zone

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Time Zone from the list box.

If the appropriate Time Zone does not exist, select "Manually".

• (GMT-12:00) Eniwetok, Kwajalein

• (GMT-11:00) Samoa

• (GMT-10:00) Honolulu

• (GMT-09:00) Alaska

• (GMT-08:00) Los Angeles, San Francisco, San Diego

• (GMT-07:00) Phoenix, Calgary, Denver

• (GMT-06:00) Chicago, Mexico City

• (GMT-05:00) New York, Bogota

• (GMT-04:00) Caracas

• (GMT-03:30) Newfoundland

• (GMT-03:00) Sao Paulo, Brasilia

• (GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic

• (GMT-01:00) Azores Island, Cape Verde

• (GMT+00:00) Dublin, London, Manchester, Lisbon

999

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

(Cont’d)

• (GMT+01:00) Paris, Madrid, Stockholm

• (GMT+01:00) Rome, Vienna, Berlin

• (GMT+01:00) Milan, Amsterdam

• (GMT+02:00) Athens, Helsinki, Cairo

• (GMT+02:00) Beirut, Cape Town

• (GMT+03:00) Nairobi, Moscow

• (GMT+04:00) Abu Dhabi

• (GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi

• (GMT+05:30) New Delhi

• (GMT+06:00) Dhaka

• (GMT+07:00) Bangkok, Jakarta

• (GMT+08:00) Hong Kong, Manila, Singapore

• (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Taipei, Kuala Lumpur, Perth

• (GMT+09:00) Tokyo, Osaka, Kyoto, Fukuoka, Sapporo

• (GMT+09:00) Seoul

• (GMT+09:30) Adelaide

• (GMT+10:00) Guam, Sydney, Melbourne

• (GMT+11:00) Solomon Islands, New Caledonia

• (GMT+12:00) Wellington, Auckland, Fiji

• Manually

• Time Zone (time difference setting)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When selecting "Manually" in the time zone field, specify the time difference from GMT.

• Time difference

Select "+" or "-".

• Hour

00 - 12

• Minute

00, 15, 30, 45

● Daylight Saving Time Settings

• Daylight Saving Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the Daylight Saving Time.

• Enable

• Disable

• Range (By day of the week)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If Daylight Saving Time is enabled, and "by day of the week" is selected for the range, specify the start day, end day, and start time and end time.

• Start day and end day (Month: 01 - 12 Week: 1st - 4th week and the last week of month

Day: Monday - Sunday)

• Start time and end time Hour (00 - 23)

1000

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Range(by Date)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If Daylight Saving Time is enabled, and "by Date" is selected for the range, specify the start date, end date, and start time and end time.

• Start date and end date (Month: 01 - 12 Day: 01 - 31 and the Last Date)

• Start time and end time Hour (00 - 23)

● NTP Settings

• Synchronize with NTP Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When performing the time synchronization with the NTP server, select "Enable". If the time synchronization is not used, select "Disable".

• Enable

• Disable

• Domain Name / IP Address (Primary NTP Server, Secondary NTP Server)

Description Input the domain name or the IP address of the primary or secondary NTP server.

Input condition/

Display contents

There are two methods to specify an IP address; "IPv4" and "IPv6". The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "link local address", "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details.

This item is only available when "Yes" is selected for "Synchronize with NTP Server".

• For domain name

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• LAN Port used for NTP (Primary NTP Server, Secondary NTP Server)

Description Select which port is used to connect to the primary or secondary NTP server.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is only available when "Yes" is selected for "Synchronize with NTP Server".

• MNT

• RMT

1001

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Change Box ID

For details about this function, refer to "Change Box ID" (page 75) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Change Box ID" (page 1290) .

● Set Box ID

• Box ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

The Box ID setting of the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

If the ETERNUS DX/AF is changed, correct the Box ID. The initial Box ID displayed is a 40-digit code (device ID) that is created by combining device information (series name, model, serial number, etc.).

If the Box ID entered is less than 40 characters, a "#" (hash key) is appended to the Box ID for each character short.

• Capital letters

• Numeric characters

• Spaces

• "#" (hash keys)

• Up to 40 characters

When spaces are input for the Box ID, the spaces are changed to "#" (hash keys).

1002

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup Subsystem Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 76)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Subsystem Parameters" (page 1290) .

● Setup Subsystem Parameters

• Thin Provisioning Allocation Mode

Description Select allocation mode of Thin Provisioning.

Input condition/

Display contents

This mode is applied only for Thin Provisioning pools. Note that this setting is not applied for pools that are created by the Flexible Tier (Automated Storage Tiering) function.

[Example]

Three TPVs (TPV#0, TPV#1, and TPV#2) are registered in a single TPP.

A single TPP is configured with four RAID groups (RAID group #0, RAID group #1, RAID group

#2, and RAID group #3).

• TPP balancing

Physical area is allocated in the following order regardless of the TPV in which the data is written.

RAID group#0  RAID group#1  RAID group#2  RAID group#3 

RAID group#0  ...

• TPV balancing

When data is written in TPVs that are registered in the TPP, the physical area is allocated in the following order.

TPV#0: RAID group#0  RAID group#1  RAID group#2  RAID group#3  RAID group#0  ...

TPV#1: RAID group#1  RAID group#2  RAID group#3  RAID group#0  RAID group#1  ...

TPV#2: RAID group#2  RAID group#3  RAID group#0  RAID group#1  RAID group#2  ...

• TPP balancing

Physical area is allocated almost evenly from the RAID groups that configure a TPP. Allocation is performed in order of writing to the TPV.

This is a conventional method.

• TPV balancing

Physical area is allocated almost evenly from the RAID groups that configure a TPP. Allocation is performed by distributing RAID groups evenly for each TPV.

The "Thin Provisioning Allocation Mode" is available only when the Thin Provisioning function is enabled.

• Flexible Write Through

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the Flexible Write Through.

If "Enable" is selected, the cache action is changed only for specific conditions.

• Enable

For the Flexible Write Through target I/O, by performing a special Write Through action, data is written to the drive in high speed. Therefore, duplication of the cache memory and parity is not performed.

By enabling this function in the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, the ETERNUS AF250/AF650, and the ETERNUS DX200F, CPU load reduction can be expected.

For storage systems other than the above, sequential write performance may improve if I/

O size tuning is available from the host (such as with High Performance Computing).

• Disable

Changes the cache action according to the cache mode of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

1003

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Do not change the default setting for normal use.

• If "Enable" is selected for storage systems other than the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, the ETERNUS AF250/AF650, and the ETERNUS DX200F, performance for the host I/O may improve only if all of the following conditions are satisfied. The target is the Write I/O for "Standard (including concatenation volumes by means of LUN Concatenation)" and "WSV".

Sequential write

The I/O size from the host is an integral multiple of the basic size (stripe size) for each RAID level.

Refer to "G. Basic Size and MWC Input Condition for RAID Groups" (page 1379) for details.

If any of the following RAID levels is used:

• RAID5 (2D+1P) - RAID5 (8D+1P)

• RAID6 (3D+2P) - RAID6 (8D+2P)

• RAID6-FR

(3D+2P)x2+1HS

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(5D+2P)x4+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

(3D+2P)x6+1HS

• If "Enable" is selected for the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, the ETERNUS AF250/AF650, and the ETERNUS DX200F, performance for the host I/O may improve if any of the following conditions are satisfied.

When the RAID level is "Striping (RAID0)", "High Performance (RAID1+0)", or "Mirroring (RAID1)"

The Write I/O for "Standard (including concatenation volumes by means of LUN Concatenation)" and "WSV"

When the RAID level is "High Capacity (RAID5)", "Reliability (RAID5+0)", "High Reliability (RAID6)", or "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)"

The Write I/O for "Standard (including concatenation volumes by means of LUN Concatenation)" and "WSV" where the I/O size from the host is an integral multiple of the basic size (stripe size) for each RAID group

• If the cache mode of the ETERNUS DX/AF is in "Write Through Mode", regardless of whether "Flexible Write Through" is set, all I/Os will be operated with the Write Through mode.

The cache modes for the ETERNUS DX/AF are "Write Back Mode" and "Write Through Mode". Refer to

"System (Basic Information)" (page 657) for details.

• Turbo Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the Turbo Mode.

The Turbo Mode is a function to improve performance by using processors in the CMs with an operating frequency that is higher than the specified rated value. This function is also referred to as "Intel® Turbo Boost Technology". This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX200 S4, the

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/

DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF250/AF650.

• Enable

Enable the Turbo Mode.

• Disable

Disable the Turbo Mode.

Do not change the default setting for normal use.

1004

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Writeback Limit Count

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the maximum limit for the Writeback Limit Count (WLC).

The WLC is the number of commands that are issued when writing data back to the drive.

When specifying a larger WLC, data writeback speed is increased. However, resources are used for data writeback so I/O performance may be affected.

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4 and the ETERNUS DX60 S3

128

256

512

1024

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

128

256

512

1024

2048

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

128

256

512

1024

2048

3072

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650

128

256

512

1024

2048

3072

6144

Do not change the default setting ("512") for normal use.

1005

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Expand Volume Mode

Description Select whether to enable or disable "Expand Volume Mode".

If "Expand Volume Mode" is enabled, the following parameters are expanded to the maximum value.

• Number of volumes

• Number of Advanced Copy sessions

• Number of Virtual Volume sessions

The following table shows the number of volumes and sessions according to the "Expand Volume Mode" setting.

Number of volumes

Number of Advanced

Copy sessions

Number of Virtual

Volume sessions

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3 ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

Disable

2048

1024

Enable

4096

2048

Disable

4096

2048

Enable

8192

4096

4096 4096 4096 8192

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200

S3.

• Enable

• Disable

• To change the "Expand Volume Mode" setting from "Enable" to "Disable", perform the following operations in advance.

Stop the local/remote copy sessions and the Virtual Volume sessions.

Delete all the local/remote copy sessions and the Virtual Volume sessions.

• If the existing volume number is not within the following range, the "Expand Volume Mode" setting cannot be changed from "Enable" to "Disable".

For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

0 - 2047

For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 4095

1006

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Setup Host

• Load Balance

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the load balance for the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The Load Balance function delays execution for newly received commands when the command execution time in the ETERNUS DX/AF exceeds the specific value. Select "Enable" to respond with the sense that is specified in the "Load Balance Response" field of the host response setting.

• Enable

• Disable

• When connecting the ETERNUS DX/AF and HP-UX hosts, disable the Load Balance setting. If the "Load Balance" checkbox is selected (enabled), incorrect logs may be recorded in the host.

• Load balancing by Multipath Driver is operated regardless of whether the "Load Balance" of this function is enabled/ disabled.

• Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host

Description Select whether to reject the "Inquiry" command from an unauthorized host.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the "Enable" checkbox to reject.

When the "Inquiry" command is rejected, ETERNUS DX/AF returns an Affinity Error (5/25/81) for the "Inquiry" command from the unauthorized host. When the command is not rejected, the

ETERNUS DX/AF responds normally.

• Enable

• Disable

When using the Veritas Volume Manager Dynamic Multipathing (VxVM DMP), select "Enable". When VxVM DMP is not used, the setting of this parameter does not affect the state of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Optimize for Advanced Format SSD

Description Select whether to perform a 4K byte alignment access from the host (host access that is aligned to 4K byte) to the volumes in RAID groups or TPPs configured with SSDs or SSD SEDs.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Enable" to perform a 4K byte alignment access.

• Enable

• Disable

Even when the ETERNUS DX/AF firmware is upgraded to V10L30 or later, changing the default setting ("Disable") is not required as long as there is no problem for SSD and SSD SED read/write performance.

1007

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Expand Host Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify whether to enable or disable "Expand Host Mode".

If "Expand Host Mode" is enabled, the following parameters for each storage system are expanded to the maximum value.

• Number of hosts

• Number of LUN groups

The following table shows the number of hosts and LUN groups according to the "Expand Host

Mode" setting.

Number of hosts

Number of LUN groups

Disable

1024

Enable

4096

2048

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

• Enable

• Disable

For the following conditions, the "Expand Host Mode" setting cannot be changed from "Enable" to "Disable".

• There are 1025 or more hosts in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• There is a host with a host number that is 1024 or larger.

• There is a LUN group with a LUN group number that is 1024 or larger.

● Setup Disk Drive

• Checkcode Enforcement

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the Checkcode Enforcement mode.

• Enable

Error detection function in the ETERNUS DX/AF is enhanced.

When data is duplicated, the check codes of all the data blocks are checked.

• Disable

Error detection in the ETERNUS DX/AF is performed with the normal procedure.

• Do not change the default setting ("Enable") for normal use.

• If "Disable" is selected, the detection performance when errors occur is reduced.

1008

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Copybackless

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the Copybackless function.

The Copybackless function registers the rebuilding destination hot spare in the RAID group after rebuilding is complete instead of performing a copyback operation. The failed drive in the RAID group is changed to a hot spare after the rebuilding is complete. If the failed drive is replaced with a normal drive, the replacement drive can be used as a hot spare. After the redundant copy is complete, this function is performed in the same way as the rebuilding function. Both types of hot spares (Global Hot Spares and Dedicated Hot Spares) can be the target hot spares for this function.

The Copybackless function is performed when the following hot spares are selected.

• Hot spares that are the same type as the target drive (Online/Nearline/SSD/Online SED/

Nearline SED/SSD SED)

• Hot spares that are the same type as the target SSD (SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD/SSD-M SED/SSD-L

SED)

• Hot spares with the same capacity as the target drive

• Hot spares with the same speed as the target drive

• Hot spares with the same sector format as the target drive (AF-compliant/non-AF-compliant)

• Enable

• Disable

If the Copybackless function is enabled, a normal drive that replaces the failed drive cannot return to the original RAID group configuration. This should be taken into consideration when determining whether to enable or disable the

Copybackless function.

The Copybackless function is not performed when the first drive fails in a "RAID6-FR" type RAID group. A high-speed rebuild is performed in a hot spare area within the RAID group, and when the failed drive is exchanged for a normal drive, copyback is performed. The Copybackless setting is applied when the second drive fails.

● Web GUI Settings

• Function to Add Host

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select which function for adding hosts is to be used.

• "Use "Add Host Group"" checkbox

Create a host group and register the hosts as members. When the "Use "Add Host Group"" checkbox is selected, the actions for creating host groups are displayed.

• "Use "Add Host"" checkbox

Register hosts without creating host groups. When the "Use "Add Host"" checkbox is selected, the actions for adding hosts are displayed.

• "Use "Add Host Group"" checkbox

Selected

Cleared

• "Use "Add Host"" checkbox

Selected

Cleared

1009

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Selecting either "Use "Add Host Group"" or "Use "Add Host"" is recommended. If both of these checkboxes are not selected, the [Set] button cannot be clicked.

Select "Use "Add Host"" only when using the previous procedure for registering hosts as the older storage systems (such as ETERNUS DX410/DX440 and ETERNUS DX8100/DX8400/DX8700). This checkbox is not selected by default. Both checkboxes can be selected at the same time.

● Deduplication/Compression Settings

• Data Compare when hash collision occurs

Description Select whether to compare the entire data if the same hash value is detected when using the

Deduplication/Compression function.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Hash collision" indicates that the same hash value is generated from different data. By selecting "Enable" for this setting, if the hash value matches, the entire data is compared with the existing data to determine whether it is duplicated.

This item is only displayed when Deduplication/Compression is enabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Enable

• Disable

• Do not change the default setting ("Disable") for normal use.

• Delete all the Deduplication/Compression Volumes in the ETERNUS DX/AF in advance. If Deduplication/Compression

Volumes exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF, the current setting cannot be changed.

• If "Enable" is selected, the performance is reduced.

1010

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup Encryption Mode

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Encryption Mode" (page 79) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Encryption Mode" (page 1291) .

● Encryption Mode Setting

• Encryption Mode

Description Select the encryption mode to encrypt volumes by using the CM.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is displayed when no encrypted volume and no encrypted pool (or TPP and FTRP) exist in the ETERNUS DX/AF. To enable encryption by the CM, select "Fujitsu Original Encryption", "AES", "AES-128", or "AES-256".

• Disable

The encryption function by the CM is not used.

When the encryption mode is changed to "Disable" from one of the following options, reboot the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Fujitsu Original Encryption

AES

AES-128

AES-256

• Fujitsu Original Encryption

"Fujitsu Original Encryption" is an encryption method which uses a Fujitsu proprietary algorithm.

Compared to the AES-128bit method, its practical security level is almost equal while it allows faster processing than the AES-128bit method.

• AES

"AES" is an encryption method that uses the AES 128bit method.

"Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)" (standard encryption used for information processing by the US federal government) is a standardized encryption method.

• AES-128

"AES-128" is an encryption method that uses the AES 128bit method.

• AES-256

"AES-256" is an encryption method that uses the AES 256bit method.

Compared to the AES-128bit method, the encryption strength is higher (meaning that decrypting the encrypted data is difficult), but the Read/Write access performance for the volumes is reduced.

The available options for this function vary depending on the controller firmware version.

• For controller firmware versions "V10L50-3000", "V10L52-3000", and V10L53 and later

Disable

Fujitsu Original Encryption

AES-128

AES-256

• For controller firmware versions other than the above

Disable

Fujitsu Original Encryption

AES (*1)

*1: "AES" is an encryption method that uses the AES 128bit method.

1011

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup SMI-S Environment

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 81)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SMI-S Environment" (page 1291) .

● SMI-S Settings

• SMI-S

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the SMI-S settings.

• Enable

• Disable

• SSL Certificate

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the SSL certificate that is used for access from SMI-S via HTTPS.

This item is only available if "Enable" is selected for "SMI-S". Note that "Web GUI SSL Certificate" cannot be selected if both SSL certificates ("self-signed SSL certificate" and "SSL server certificate") for ETERNUS Web GUI are not registered.

• SMI-S Self-signed SSL Certificate

An SSL certificate (self-signed SSL certificate) that is registered from SMI-S.

• Web GUI SSL Certificate

An SSL certificate ("self-signed SSL certificate" or "SSL server certificate") that is registered from ETERNUS Web GUI.

To change the "SSL Certificate" setting, disable "SMI-S" and then enable it again.

• Performance Information

Description Select whether to enable or disable the SMI-S performance information response.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item can be selected if "Enable" is specified for "SMI-S".

• Enable

• Disable

Setup Power Management

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Power Management" (page 83) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Power Management" (page 1291) .

● Power Control by External Device

• RCIL

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the RCIL connection.

• Enable

• Disable

1012

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Auto Power

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the power interlock mode (the function to automatically power on when the power is supplied).

When PMAN is connected, enable the "Auto Power".

When the power synchronized unit is connected, disable the "Auto Power".

• Enable

• Disable

• Power Resume

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the auto power recovery mode (the function to automatically power on at power recovery after a power failure).

• Enable

• Disable

● Connection Module Settings

• PWC

Description Select the checkbox for each module to enable power management by an external input device.

Input condition/

Display contents

If any checkbox is selected, set "Delay until Shutdown", "Set management unit interface",

"Power Failure Signal", "Low Battery Signal" and "UPS Shutdown Signal".

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3, checkboxes for "CM#0" and "CM#1"

Selected

Cleared

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, checkboxes for "SVC#0" and "SVC#1"

Selected

Cleared

● PWC Connection Settings

• Connection CM

Description Select the checkbox for the controller module (CM) to enable power management by an external input device (multiple selections can be made).

Input condition/

Display contents

When this item is selected, set "Delay until Shutdown", "Set management unit interface",

"Power Failure Signal", "Low Battery Signal" and "UPS Shutdown Signal".

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX/AF other than the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3.

Checkbox for CM

• Selected

• Cleared

1013

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Delay until Shutdown

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the delay time (minutes) before starting shutdown after receiving a shut down notification signal from the external input device.

When PMAN is connected, specify the delay time before starting shutdown after receiving a low battery signal. Specify a delay time longer than the time required for the server shutdown process so that the ETERNUS DX/AF is turned off after the server shutdown is complete.

0 - 15

• Set management unit interface

Description Select the external input device connected via RS232C interface.

Input condition/

Display contents

For the ETERNUS DX/AF other than the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the "Manual" setting is for particular use, thus should not be used during normal operation.

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

Power Synchronized Unit

Manual

• For the other models

Power Synchronized Unit

PMAN

Manual

• Power Failure Signal

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the signal logic for power failure signal when the power failure occurs.

When "Power Synchronized Unit" or "PMAN" is selected for the "Set management unit interface" field, this item is automatically set.

• Positive

Positive logic

• Negative

Negative logic

• Low Battery Signal

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the signal logic for a low battery signal when a low battery charge occurs.

When "Power Synchronized Unit" or "PMAN" is selected for the "Set management unit interface" field, this item is automatically set.

• Positive

Positive logic

• Negative

Negative logic

1014

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• UPS Shutdown Signal

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling the UPS shutdown signal, select the "Enable" checkbox. Also, select the signal logic for UPS shutdown signal.

To disable this item, clear the "Enable" checkbox.

"Enable" checkbox

• Selected

Enables the UPS shutdown signal.

Positive

Positive logic

Negative

Negative logic

• Cleared

Disables the UPS shutdown signal.

Setup Extreme Cache

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Extreme Cache" (page 85)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Extreme Cache" (page 1292)

● Extreme Cache Settings

• Cache Used

Description Select the cache that is to be used.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)" can be selected only for the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4.

• Extreme Cache

• Extreme Cache Pool

• Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)

• Not Used

Cache selection conditions

EXC and EXCP cannot be used at the same time.

Cache

Extreme Cache

Description

PFMs that are installed in the CM are used as secondary cache memory.

EXC can only be used for Read I/O. PFMs must be installed. Refer to "Availability of the EXC setting according to the number of installed PFMs" (page 1016)

for details. For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/

DX600 S4 and the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, set the memory size of EXC for each storage system. For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, click the [Set] button. The cache memory size of the target CM is automatically set according to the PFM capacity that is installed in each CM.

Enabling or disabling EXC for each volume can be performed with ETERNUS CLI or ETERNUS SF

Storage Cruiser.

Available models are as follows:

• ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

• ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

• ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

The maximum available cache memory size (per storage system) is "2800GB x No. of CMs".

1015

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Cache

Extreme Cache Pool

Description

Use RAID groups that are configured with SSDs installed in the CE or DE as the secondary cache memory.

EXCP must be set for each CM. A different memory size can be set for each CM. Each CM can be set with 800 GB only if an ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 is being used and "Extreme Cache Pool

(Expanded)" is selected for "Cache Used". Refer to "Available EXCP memory size (per CM)" (page

1016)

for details.

EXCP can only be used for Read I/O to a volume that is controlled by the Controlling CM of the RAID group.

Enabling or disabling EXCP for each volume can be performed with ETERNUS Web GUI. Refer to

"Modify Cache Parameters" (page 326) for details.

Available models are as follows:

• ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4

• ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

• ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

• ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

• ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

The cache memory size depends on the capacity of the SSD registered as EXCP. However, a capacity that exceeds the maximum available cache memory size cannot be set.

Availability of the EXC setting according to the number of installed PFMs

PFM installation

Enabling or disabling EXC

ETERNUS

DX500 S4/

DX600 S4,

ETERNUS

DX500 S3/

DX600 S3

Available

ETERNUS

DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3

Available

PFMs are installed in all of the CMs

The same number of PFMs is installed

The number of installed

PFMs does not match among the CMs

PFMs are not installed in some CMs

No PFMs are installed in any CMs

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available EXCP memory size (per CM)

Model

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

RAID group configuration

RAID0 (1D)

RAID0 (2D)

RAID0 (1D)

RAID0 (2D)

RAID0 (3D)

RAID0 (4D)

RAID0 (1D)

400GB

800GB

400GB

800GB

1200GB

1600GB

400GB

Changing the EXC memory size

ETERNUS

DX500 S4/

DX600 S4,

ETERNUS

DX500 S3/

DX600 S3

Available

ETERNUS

DX8700 S3/

DX8900 S3

Available

N/A Available

N/A

Available

N/A

–

SSD capacity

800GB

–

400GB

1600GB

–

400GB

1016

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Model

ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

RAID group configuration

RAID0 (1D)

RAID0 (2D)

RAID0 (3D)

RAID0 (4D)

400GB

800GB

1200GB

1600GB

● Extreme Cache Memory Size Settings (when "Extreme Cache" is selected)

SSD capacity

800GB

1600GB

For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 and the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, set the memory size of EXC.

• New Memory Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the EXC capacity that is to be set for the ETERNUS DX.

• 0GB - Maximum available memory size (unit: 100GB)

• Numeric characters

Assume that "1TB = 1000GB" and input the EXC memory size. Do not assume that "1TB = 1024GB".

To change the EXC memory size, enter the EXC memory size per ETERNUS DX in the "New memory Size" field.

For the "Current Memory Size" field, memory size that is currently set in the ETERNUS DX is displayed. For the "Maximum

Available Memory Size" field, the maximum EXC memory size that can be set for the ETERNUS DX is displayed. If the PFM capacity in each CM does not match, the total capacity of the smallest capacity (the smallest PFM capacity x the number of CMs) is displayed as the maximum available memory size.

● Extreme Cache Memory Size Settings (when "Extreme Cache Pool" or "Extreme Cache Pool (Expanded)" is selected)

• Encryption by CM

Description Select the encryption status of the EXCP area.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Off" is displayed when the memory size is "0GB". This item is available only when the encryption mode is enabled.

• On

Create an encrypted EXCP area.

• Off

Create an unencrypted EXCP area.

• If encrypted volumes are included in the volumes that are controllable for the relevant CM, encrypt the EXCP area. If the EXCP area is not encrypted, this area cannot be used as the second cache memory for the I/O to the encrypted volume.

• If no volumes are encrypted in the volumes that are controllable for the relevant CM, encrypting the EXCP area is not required.

1017

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Select Drives ([Tabular] Tab)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select checkboxes for the SSDs in RAID groups that configure EXCPs.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Select Drives ([Graphic] Tab)

• DE selection list box

Description Select the DE group.

The following DE groups are displayed as options in the list box.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the DE groups that are connected to the CE with the CM where the EXCP memory size to be set

• For the other models, the DE group with a CE or a DE that is installed in the ETERNUS DX

Input condition/

Display contents

Refer to

"Options and DE groups for each model" (page 1227) for details.

DE#Xx (X: 0 - B)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive to be used.

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkboxes are displayed for unused drives.

Refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Exclusive Read Cache" (page 93) .

for details about drive location for each DE.

Placing the mouse pointer on the icon displays the detailed information of the drive.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Tuning Parameters Settings

• Initial Caching Threshold

Description This parameter specifies the threshold that affects how frequently data is stored in EXC or

EXCP.

Input condition/

Display contents

The higher the value is, the less frequently data is stored in EXC or EXCP. The smaller the value is, the more frequently data is stored in EXC or EXCP.

If the set value is exceeded, it is assumed that the relevant data is read frequently and the data is stored in EXC or EXCP.

The threshold value that can be specified with this parameter varies depending on the controller firmware version.

• V10L20 or later

This parameter specifies the threshold value that is used until the EXC or the EXCP memory is full after EXC or EXCP is enabled.

• V10L1x or earlier

This parameter specifies the threshold value that is used until the EXC or the EXCP memory is full every time from when the ETERNUS DX is turned on.

1 - 16

1018

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

This parameter is used for performance tuning. It is not necessary to change the default setting (1) for normal use.

• Caching Threshold

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Similar to "Initial Caching Threshold", this parameter specifies the threshold that affects how frequently data is stored in EXC or EXCP.

If the set value is exceeded, it is assumed that the relevant data is read frequently and the data is stored in EXC or EXCP.

This threshold value is used after the EXC or the EXCP memory is full.

1 - 16

• This parameter is used for performance tuning. It is not necessary to change the default setting (5) for normal use.

• This item is available only when the "Not replace Cache Data" checkbox is cleared (cache data is relocated).

• "Not replace Cache Data" checkbox

Description Select or clear the "Not replace Cache Data" checkbox.

Input condition/

Display contents

If the checkbox is selected, new data is not stored (relocated) after the EXC or the EXCP memory is full.

If the checkbox is cleared, the ETERNUS DX chronologically deletes the stored data from EXC or

EXCP beginning with the oldest and stores (relocates) new data.

"Not replace Cache Data" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Caching Priority

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

This parameter specifies the concurrency for storing data in EXC or EXCP.

The greater the value is, the higher the concurrency is set for storing data in EXC or EXCP. The smaller the value is, the lower the concurrency is set for storing data in EXC or EXCP.

This item is displayed only when using the controller firmware version V10L4x or later.

10 (Fastest) - 1

This parameter is used for performance tuning. It is not necessary to change the default setting ("10 (Fastest)") for normal use.

• Monitoring I/O

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the target I/O type that is to be monitored for data storing to the cache.

This parameter affects how frequently data is stored in the EXC or EXCP.

• Read

• Read / Write

1019

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup Exclusive Read Cache

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Exclusive Read Cache" (page 1292) .

● Cache Size Settings

• Exclusive Read Cache

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the exclusive read cache ratio for the CM cache memory.

The actual capacity of the exclusive read cache varies depending on the memory size installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Exclusive read cache capacity = Cache area for user data (*1) x Exclusive read cache (%)

*1: Cache area for user data = (Memory size per CM - Active table area (such as copy table size)) / 2 (*2)

*2: To mirror the user data, divide the calculated value in half.

• 0 %

• 5 %

• 10 %

• 15 %

• 20 %

• 25 %

• 30 %

Setup Disk Drive Patrol

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Disk Drive Patrol" (page 94)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Disk Drive Patrol" (page 1292) .

● Disk Drive Patrol Settings

• Disk Drive Patrol

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the disk drive patrol function.

• Enable

• Disable

1020

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

Setup Debug Mode

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Debug Mode" (page 95)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Debug Mode" (page 1292) .

● Master Trace Level Settings

• Master Trace Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Set the master trace level.

• Off

Does not save a trace. Equivalent to level "0xFF".

• Standard

The firmware trace information is saved. Equivalent to level "0x06".

• Detail

All the firmware trace are saved. Equivalent to level "0x00".

• Specification

The firmware traces according to the user specified level are saved.

• Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

● Trace Level by Group

• Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

● Panic

• Collection Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When selecting "Specification" for the master trace level, input the trace level.

• 2-digit hexadecimal (0x00 - 0xFF)

Input the trace level for each group ID.

• 2-digit hexadecimal (0x00 - 0xFF)

Select the collection mode for panic dump.

• Nose and Tail Mode

The latest and oldest panic dumps are saved.

• Fortnight Mode

The first and second panic dumps are saved.

• Off

Does not save panic dumps.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1021

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Utility Management

Backup Configuration

For details about this function, refer to "Backup Configuration" (page 98) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Backup Configuration" (page 1292) .

● Select Configuration Definition

• Configuration Definition Data

Description Select configuration definition data that is to be backed up.

Input condition/

Display contents

If "Configuration (1 time before)", or "Configuration (2 times before)" do not exist, the corresponding configuration definition data cannot be selected.

• Configuration (Latest)

• Configuration (1 time before)

• Configuration (2 times before)

• Note (text box)

Description In the "Note" field, remarks which have been added to the selected configuration definition data to be backed up are displayed.

If no remarks exist, this field is blank. The "Note" field can be edited (input).

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?") Input condition/

Display contents

● Select Backup Slot

• Configuration Definition Data

Description Select backup destination of the configuration definition data.

Input condition/

Display contents

If a backup destination, on which configuration definition data has already been stored, is selected, the old configuration definition data will be overwritten.

• Backup #1

• Backup #2

• Backup #3

• Backup #4

Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

For details about this function, refer to "Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 101)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 1292) .

● Performance Monitoring (when starting performance monitoring)

• Interval (sec.)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the interval to acquire the performance information.

30 - 300 (units of 30 seconds)

1022

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Clear Cache

For details about this function, refer to "Clear Cache" (page 102)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Clear Cache" (page 1293)

● Target Cache Settings

• Target Cache

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the cache to clear.

Select the checkbox for the cache that is to be cleared.

• "CM" checkbox

Selected

Cleared

• "Extreme Cache" checkbox (*1)

Selected

Cleared

• "Extreme Cache Pool" checkbox (*2)

Selected

Cleared

*1: This item is only displayed when EXC is enabled.

*2: This item is only displayed when EXCP is enabled.

Eco-mode Management

Modify Eco-mode General Setting

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page 105) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Eco-mode General Setting" (page 1293) .

● Eco-mode General Setting

• Eco-mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Eco-mode for the ETERNUS DX.

• Enable

• Disable

Create Eco-mode Schedule

For details about this function, refer to "Create Eco-mode Schedule" (page 106) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Eco-mode Schedule" (page 1294) .

● Schedule

• Schedule Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the schedule name.

An existing schedule name cannot be used.

• 1 - 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

• Spaces

1023

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

● Set Event

• Event Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input condition/

Display contents

(Cont'd)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Select the event type.

The settings vary depending on the event type.

• everyday

Select this to add or edit the daily schedule.

When "everyday" is selected, enter the start time ("From Time") and the end time ("To

Time").

If the "From Time" is later than the "To Time", the end time is treated as the next day.

From Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

To Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

• Every week

Select this to add or edit the weekly schedule.

When "Every week" is selected, enter the term ("Period"), the start time ("From Time"), and the end time ("To Time").

If the "From Time" is later than the "To Time", the end time is treated as the next day.

Period (start day): Monday - Sunday

Period (end day): Monday - Sunday

From Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

To Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

• Specific days

Select this to add or edit the schedule based on specific days.

When "Specific days" is selected, enter the month ("Month"), the term ("Period"), the start time ("From Time"), and the end time ("To Time").

If the "From Time" is later than the "To Time", the end time is treated as the next day.

Month: Every Month, January - December

Period (start date): 01 - 31

Period (term): One day only, 2 days - 7 days

From Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

To Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

• Specific week

Select this to add or edit the schedule based on a specific week.

When "Specific week" is selected, enter the month ("Month"), the term ("Period"), the start time ("From Time"), and the end time ("To Time").

If the "From Time" is later than the "To Time", the end time is treated as the next day.

Month: Every Month, January - December

Period (nth week): 1st - 4th, Last

Period (start day): Monday - Sunday

Period (end day): Monday - Sunday

From Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

To Time: 00:00 - 23:30 (can be specified at intervals of 30 minutes)

1024

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

An error screen appears under the following conditions.

• "everyday" is selected for the event type when the start time and end time are the same

• When "Every week" is selected for the event type

The start day is later than the end day

The start day and the end day are the same, and the start time and the end time are also the same

The start day and the end day are the same, and the start time is later than the end time

• When "Specific days" is selected for the event type

A non-existent date (for example, February 30) is set

"One day only" is selected for the period and the start time and end time are the same

"One day only" is selected for the period and the start time is later than the end time

• When "Specific week" is selected for the event type

The start day is later than the end day

The start day and the end day are the same, and the start time and the end time are also the same

The start day and the end day are the same, and the start time is later than the end time

• The period is set to include Sunday

• The period is one week or longer (the end date is set to "7 days" when the end time is later than the start time)

Modify Eco-mode Schedule

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Eco-mode Schedule" (page 109) .

● Schedule

• Schedule Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Edit the schedule name.

The existing schedule name is displayed. An existing schedule name cannot be used.

The Eco-mode schedule name that is assigned to the RAID group or TPP can be changed.

• 1 - 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except ", (comma)" and "?")

• Spaces

● Event List

• Checkbox to select an event

Description Select the event that is to be edited.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox for the target event.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Set Event

• Event Type

Refer to "Event Type" (page 1024)

in "Create Eco-mode Schedule" for details.

1025

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

User Management

Setup User Account

For details about this function, refer to "Setup User Account" (page 112)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup User Account" (page 1294) .

● Registered User Account List

• Checkbox

Description • Edit user account

Select the checkbox for the user account that is to be modified.

Input condition/

Display contents

• Delete user account

Select the checkbox for the user account that is to be deleted.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Add User Account

• User ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a user ID.

An existing user ID cannot be used. Entered letters are case-sensitive.

1 - 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '-', '_', '.')

The number of characters that can be used for the user ID is displayed to the right of the input field.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1026

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a password.

Entered letters are case-sensitive.

If "Password Policy" for the target user account is enabled, the following input conditions are added according to the configuration with the [Modify User Policy] function.

• Minimum Password Length

• Password Complexity

• Password History

• If "Disable" is selected for "Password Policy"

4 - 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/

', '@', '[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|', '}', '~', ':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

• If "Enable" is selected for "Password Policy"

When "Password Complexity" is enabled

"Minimum password length" to 64 (minimum password length: 4 - 64)

At least three of the following character types must be used

• Uppercase letters (A - Z)

• Lowercase letters (a - z)

• Numeric characters (0 - 9)

• Symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/', '@', '[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|',

'}', '~', ':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

When "Password Complexity" is disabled

"Minimum password length" to 64 (minimum password length: 4 - 64)

Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/',

'@', '[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|', '}', '~', ':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

An error screen appears if the password does not satisfy the input conditions described below. The following shows procedures corresponding to each error.

• If "Minimum Password Length" is not satisfied

The entered password is less than the required number of characters. Check the minimum length ("x") displayed in the "x - 64" format to the right of the password input field.

• If "Password Complexity" is not satisfied

• If "Password History" is not satisfied

Refer to the "Password Policy" settings in advance for details about "Password Complexity" and "Password History". Refer to

"Modify User Policy" (page 118) for details.

• Confirm New Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the same character string as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation.

Refer to

"Password" (page 1027) in

Check the "Password Policy" setting before selecting "Enable" for this item. Refer to "Modify User Policy" (page 118)

1027

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Role

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the user role that is to be assigned to the user ID.

The default and custom roles registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed as the options.

• Monitor

• Admin

• StorageAdmin

• AccountAdmin

• SecurityAdmin

• Maintainer

• Software

• Custom role

"Software" is the role that is used for external software. A user account with the "Software" role cannot log in to ETERNUS

Web GUI.

• Account

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the user account.

If the user account is disabled, that user account is registered but cannot be used.

• Enable

• Disable

• SSH Public Key

Description Register the SSH client public key used for login authentication from ETERNUS CLI in the ETER-

NUS DX/AF.

Click the [Browse...] button and specify the public key to be registered.

When using the SSH client key authentication, register the SSH public key in the ETERNUS DX/

AF and prepare the SSH secret key, corresponding to the public key in the client PC in advance.

Click the [Browse...] button and specify the public key to be registered.

Input condition/

Display contents

• Password Policy

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the password policy.

If "Enable" is selected, the following input conditions are added according to the "Password

Policy" setting that is specified with the [Modify User Policy] function.

• Minimum Password Length

• Password Complexity

• Password History

• Enable

• Disable

The "Password Policy" is not applied to a user account with the "Software" role because it is used for external software.

Note that "Enable" cannot be selected in this case.

1028

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

for details.

• Lockout Policy

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the lockout policy.

If "Enable" is selected, the following items are applied to a user account according to the

"Lockout Policy" setting that is specified with the [Modify User Policy] function.

• Lockout Threshold

• Lockout Duration

• Enable

• Disable

The "Lockout Policy" is not applied to a user account with the "Software" role because it is used for external software. Note that "Enable" cannot be selected in this case.

Check the "Lockout Policy" setting before selecting "Enable" for this item. Refer to "Modify User Policy" (page 118) for

details.

● Edit User Account

• Change Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Only when changing the password, select the "Change Password" checkbox.

When the "Change Password" checkbox is selected, enter a new password in "New Password" and "Confirm New Password".

"Change Password" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a new password.

Entered letters are case-sensitive.

If "Password Policy" for the target user account is enabled, the following input conditions are added according to the configuration with the [Modify User Policy] function.

• Minimum Password Length

• Password Complexity

• Password History

Refer to

"Password" (page 1027) in

"Password" (page 1027) in

• Passwords must be changed for user IDs with "Expired" displayed in the "Days To Expiration" field of "Registered User

Account List".

• Passwords can be changed for user IDs with "Changeable" displayed in the "Days To Password Change" field of "Registered User Account List".

1029

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Confirm New Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the same character string as the value entered in the "New Password" field for confirmation.

Refer to

Refer to "Role" (page 1028) in

• Role

Refer to "Account" (page 1028)

• Account

in "Add User Account" for details.

• SSH Public Key

Refer to "SSH Public Key" (page 1028)

in "Add User Account"

for details.

• Password Policy

Refer to "Password Policy" (page 1028) in

Refer to "Lockout Policy" (page 1029) in

• Lockout Policy

For details about this function, refer to "Modify User Policy" (page 118)

Modify User Policy

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify User Policy" (page 1295)

● Password Policy

• Minimum Password Length

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the minimum length of the password.

4 - 64

If "Password Policy" is enabled, "Minimum Password Length" is displayed in the [Setup User Account] screen and the

[Change User Password] screen. Refer to "Setup User Account" (page 112)

"Change User Password" (page 59) for

details.

1030

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Password Complexity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the complexity setting for the password.

If "Enable" is selected, at least three of the following character types must be used for the password.

• Uppercase letters (A - Z)

• Lowercase letters (a - z)

• Numeric characters (0 - 9)

• Symbols ('!', '"', '#', '$', '%', '&', ''', '(', ')', '*', '+', ',', '-', '.', '/', '@', '[', '\', ']', '^', '_', '`', '{', '|', '}', '~',

':', ';', '<', '=', '>', '?')

• Enable

• Disable

• Password History

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the number of password generations to save in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

If the number of generations is specified, the previously set password is stored to prevent reuse.

If "0" is specified, a history of the passwords used is not managed. This means that the same password that was used in the previous generation can be reused.

• 0 (Unrestricted)

• 1 - 16

• Minimum Password Age

Description Specify the minimum number of days before the password can be changed from the last time the password was specified.

Input condition/

Display contents

The password cannot be changed during the specified days.

If "0" is specified, the password can be changed at anytime.

• 0 (Unrestricted)

• 1 - 999

The value of this item must be smaller than the value of the "Maximum Password Age".

If "Password Policy" is enabled, "Days To Password Change" is displayed in the [Setup User Account] screen and the

[Change User Password] screen. Refer to "Setup User Account" (page 112)

"Change User Password" (page 59) for

details.

• Maximum Password Age

Description Specify the maximum number of days the password can be used.

Input condition/

Display contents

The relevant password becomes unavailable when the specified number of days has been exceeded.

If "0" is specified, the password can be used indefinitely.

• 0 (Unrestricted)

• 1 - 999

1031

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• If "Password Policy" is enabled, "Days To Expiration" is displayed in the [Setup User Account] screen and the [Change

User Password] screen. Refer to "Setup User Account" (page 112) or

"Change User Password" (page 59) for details.

• If "Password Policy" is enabled, a system message appears in the [Overview] screen when the password will expire in

14 days. Refer to

"Overview" (page 24) for details.

● Lockout Policy

• Lockout Threshold

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the number of consecutive failed logins before the user account is locked out.

If "0" is specified, the lockout function for the user account is disabled.

• 0 (Unrestricted)

• 1 - 999

If "0" is specified for this item, "30" minutes is set for the "Lockout Duration" setting.

• Lockout Duration

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the time (minutes) before the user account that was locked out due to failed logins is automatically released.

After the specified time has passed, the lockout is released automatically.

If "0" is specified, lockouts are not automatically released.

• 0 (Unrestricted)

• 1 - 99999

If the lockout state of the user account cannot be released automatically, release the lockout state using one of the following operations.

• Ask the administrator who manages the user account to disable the "Lockout Policy" for the locked out user account.

(Refer to "Setup User Account" (page 112)

for details.)

• Reboot the ETERNUS DX/AF to initialize the lockout state.

Modify RADIUS

For details about this function, refer to "Modify RADIUS" (page 120) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify RADIUS" (page 1295)

● RADIUS Setting

• RADIUS Authentication

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" RADIUS Authentication.

• Enable

Use RADIUS Authentication.

• Disable

Use the internal authentication.

1032

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Recovery Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Enable" has been specified in the "RADIUS Authentication" field, select the desired operation if RADIUS Authentication fails.

If RADIUS Authentication fails when "No" has been selected for "Recovery Mode", logging on to

ETERNUS Web GUI will not be available.

Selecting "Yes" is recommended.

• Yes (Communication error / Authentication error)

When communication with the RADIUS server fails or communication with the RADIUS server succeeds but authentication fails, internal authentication is performed.

• Yes (Communication error)

When communication with the RADIUS server fails, internal authentication is performed.

• No

Even when communication with the RADIUS server fails, or communication with the

RADIUS server succeeds but authentication fails, internal authentication is not performed.

● Primary Server (required) / Secondary Server

• Domain Name / IP Address

Description Input the domain name or the IP address of the RADIUS server.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is

displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• For domain name

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

An error screen appears if the "Domain Name / IP Address" of the Primary server overlaps with that of the Secondary server.

• Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number that is used for RADIUS Authentication.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 65535

• LAN Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the LAN port number that is used for RADIUS Authentication.

• MNT

• RMT

1033

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Authentication Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the authentication mode for RADIUS Authentication.

• CHAP

• PAP

• Shared Secret

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Retry Out Time

Description

Input the same Shared Secret as the RADIUS server.

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the total time (seconds) for waiting for a response from the RADIUS server.

The ETERNUS DX/AF retries authentication during the specified time (seconds), and if there is no response in the specific time, regards the situation as a network error.

• 10

• 20

• 30

• 40

• 50

• 60

Add Role

For details about this function, refer to "Add Role" (page 121)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Role" (page 1295)

● Role Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a role name.

The role name, which has previously been used (including the default role name), cannot be used.

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

1034

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Target Policy

• Policies

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the user policies that are to be allocated to the user roles.

• Status Display

• RAID Group Management

• Volume - Create / Modify

• Volume - Delete / Format

• Host Interface Management

• NAS Management

• Advanced Copy Management

• Copy Session Management

• Storage Migration Management

• Storage Management

• User Management

• Authentication / Role

• Security Setting

• Maintenance Information

• Firmware Management

• Maintenance Operation

Checkbox

• Selected

Allocate the role

• Cleared

Do not allocate a role

Modify Role

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Role" (page 123)

● Target Policy

• Policies

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkboxes of the current user policies are selected. Set the new policies that are to be added.

Refer to

"Policies" (page 1035)

"Add Role" for details.

Checkbox

• Selected

Allocate the role

• Cleared

Do not allocate a role

1035

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Network Management

Setup Network Environment

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Network Environment" (page 125) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Network Environment" (page 1296)

■ When using IPv4

● LAN

• Speed and Duplex

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the communication speed and mode.

• Automatic

• 1 Gbit/s

• 100 Mbit/s Half

• 100 Mbit/s Full

• 10 Mbit/s Half

• 10 Mbit/s Full

• Wake on LAN

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the WOL function (*1).

*1: The WOL function starts up the ETERNUS DX/AF, which is connected to LAN, from another server or a PC via network.

• Enable

• Disable

This item is not displayed when an FST port is selected.

● Interface

• Master IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address for the Master CM of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 255

• Slave IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address for the Slave CM of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The IP address of the Slave CM is used when an error occurs in the Master CM.

This item is not displayed for the 1CM model.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 255

1036

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When two CMs are installed, a CM, to which authority to manage the ETERNUS DX/AF has been given, is called a "Master

CM". The other CM is called a "Slave CM". When an error occurs in a CM or a LAN, the Master CM is automatically switched, and the IP address of the old Master CM is passed to the new Master CM. By specifying the IP address of the Slave CM, the

Master CM can be forcibly switched to the Slave CM when an error occurs and the Master CM cannot be connected.

• Subnet Mask

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the subnet mask of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Numeric characters

• 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.252

• Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address of the gateway.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 255

This item is not displayed when an FST port is selected.

● DNS

• Primary DNS, Secondary DNS

Description Input the IP address of the DNS server that is used for the management LAN.

Input condition/

Display contents

The Secondary DNS server must be specified after the Primary DNS server.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 255

This item is not displayed when an FST port is selected.

● Allowable IP Address

• IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address (or the network address) for the remote storage system.

Up to 16 addresses can be registered.

Make sure to input the IP address (or the network address) and subnet mask in pairs.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 255

• Subnet Mask

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the subnet mask for the IP address (or the network address) of the remote storage system.

• Numeric characters

• 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.252

1037

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When using IPv6

● LAN

• Speed and Duplex

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the communication speed and mode.

• Automatic

• 1 Gbit/s

• 100 Mbit/s Half

• 100 Mbit/s Full

• 10 Mbit/s Half

• 10 Mbit/s Full

• Wake on LAN

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the WOL function (*1).

*1: The WOL function starts up the ETERNUS DX/AF, which is connected to LAN, from another server or a PC via network.

• Enable

• Disable

This item is not displayed when an FST port is selected.

● Interface

• Master IP Link Local Address

Description Input the link local address (interface ID) for the Master CM of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

Note that the link local address is only available within the same network and cannot be connected to the Internet. Connection via a router is not available.

Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

• Master Connect IP Address

Description Input the connect IP address for the Master CM of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Master Connect IP Address" corresponds to "Master IP Address" for IPv4.

"Global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address" can be input for the IP address.

Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

1038

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Slave IP Link Local Address

Description Input the link local address (interface ID) for the Slave CM of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

The link local address of the Slave CM is used when an error occurs in the Master CM.

Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

This item is not displayed for the 1CM model.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

• Slave Connect IP Address

Description Input the connect IP address for the Slave CM of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

The connect IP address of the Slave CM is used when an error occurs in the Master CM.

"Slave Connect IP Address" corresponds to "Slave IP Address" for IPv4.

"Global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address" can be input for the IP address.

Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

This item is not displayed for the 1CM model.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

• Length of Subnet Prefix

Description Input the prefix length of the connect IP address (unit: bit).

Input condition/

Display contents

"Length of Subnet Prefix" corresponds to "Subnet Mask" for IPv4.

Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133)

for details.

• Numeric characters

• 3 - 128

• Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address of the gateway.

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "link local address", "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

● DNS

• Primary DNS, Secondary DNS

Description Input the IP address of the DNS server that is used for the management LAN.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address" can be input for the IPv6 address.

Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

The Secondary DNS server must be specified after the Primary DNS server.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

1039

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Allowable IP Address

• Connect IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the connect IP address for the remote storage system.

"Global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address" can be input for the IP address.

Refer to

"IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

Make sure to input "Connect IP Address" and "Length of Subnet Prefix" together.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

• Length of Subnet Prefix

Description Input the prefix length of the connect IP address for the remote storage system (unit: bit).

Input condition/

Display contents

Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133)

for details.

• Numeric characters

• 3 - 128

Setup Firewall

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Firewall" (page 134) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Firewall" (page 1297) .

● Firewall Settings

Configure a firewall for each acceptable protocol.

The input conditions and the display contents for the firewall settings are as follows:

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkbox

• Selected

Enable

• Cleared

Disable

• HTTP

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the HTTP connection.

HTTP is used when accessing from ETERNUS Web GUI.

• HTTPS

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the HTTPS connection.

HTTPS is used when accessing from ETERNUS Web GUI. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring.

• Telnet

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the Telnet connection.

Telnet is used when accessing from ETERNUS CLI.

1040

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SSH

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the SSH connection.

SSH is used when accessing from ETERNUS CLI. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring.

• ICMP

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the ICMP connection.

ICMP is used when sending the "ping" command from a PC.

• Maintenance-Secure

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the Maintenance-Secure connection.

Maintenance-Secure is used when connecting with the monitoring software, or performing a firmware update from the peer storage system using the Remote Support function. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring.

• SNMP

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the SNMP connection.

The SNMP is used when accessing from SNMP Agent Manager.

• RCIL

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the RCIL connection.

Whether to enable or disable RCIL can only be set for the MNT port. The RCIL controls the power of the ETERNUS DX/AF from a host via Ethernet by using the Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI), which is a general protocol.

• ETERNUS DX Discovery

Description Specify whether to enable or disable the ETERNUS DX Discovery connection.

Whether to enable or disable this parameter can only be set for the MNT port. The ETERNUS

DX Discovery is a port to connect ETERNUS DX/AF storage systems in the network by using the

Remote Installation function.

Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface" (page 136)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface" (page 1297)

● Basic Interface

• SNMP Function

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SNMP function.

• Enable

• Disable

1041

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• LAN Port used for SNMP

Description When enabling the SNMP function, select the port used for SNMP.

Input condition/

Display contents

When sending a SNMPv1 trap, the agent-address of the trap sender is the Master CM IP address of the selected port.

• MNT

• RMT

• Authentication Failure

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling the SNMP function, select "Send SNMP Trap" or "Do not send SNMP Trap" when authentication fails.

• Send SNMP Trap

• Do not send SNMP Trap

• Engine ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling the SNMP function, input the engine ID of the SNMP.

The engine ID is a unique identifier used to distinguish the connection target storage system between the SNMP Agent Manager and the SNMP Agent.

It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use. The default engine ID of the

ETERNUS DX/AF is as follows:

• Octet 1 - 4

Bitwise OR between the company code (fujitsu=211) and 0x80000000

• Octet 5

0x80 (fixed)

• Octet 6 - 13

WWN of the ETERNUS DX/AF (8 bytes)

• Default

• Customize

Input condition when selecting "Customize"

Alphanumeric characters (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

Inputting only "0" or "F" for the "Engine ID" field is not allowed

10 - 64 characters (even number)

• MIB-II RFC Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling the SNMP function, select the MIB-II support RFC version.

Although it is not necessary to change the default setting ("RFC1213") for normal use, select the RFC version that is supported by the SNMP manager.

• RFC1213

This mode is used for MIB-II that supports RFC1213.

This RFC supports IPv4 addresses.

• RFC4293

This mode is used for MIB-II that supports RFC4293.

This RFC supports IPv4 addresses and IPv6 addresses. This RFC is an extended definition for RFC1213.

1042

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup SNMP Manager

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SNMP Manager" (page 138)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Manager" (page 1297)

● Manager

• IP Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the IP address of the SNMP Manager.

• IPv4

• IPv6

• Manager IP Address (IPv4)

Description Input the IP address of the SNMP Manager with the IPv4 format.

Input condition/

Display contents

The IP address which has already been used cannot be entered.

This setting is enabled when "IPv4" is selected for "IP Version".

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• Manager IP Address (IPv6)

Description Input the IP address of the SNMP Manager with the IPv6 format.

Input condition/

Display contents

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "link local address", "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to

for details.

The IP address which has already been used cannot be entered.

This setting is enabled when "IPv6" is selected for "IP Version".

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page 140)

for details.

Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page 1298) .

● MIB Access View

• View Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the MIB View name.

The view name which has already been used cannot be entered.

• Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("! (exclamation mark)", "# (hash mark)",

"& (ampersand)", "_ (underscore)", "+ (plus)", "- (hyphen)", "* (asterisk)" and "/ (slash)")

• Spaces

1043

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Subtree#1 - Subtree#10

Description Specify the MIB access range of the corresponding view in the subtree.

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the subtree in the Object ID format (*1).

Select whether to include as or exclude from each subtree as the MIB access range.

One or more subtrees are required per view.

The same subtree cannot be specified multiple times in a single view. However, the same subtree can be configured to different views.

*1: The "Object ID" is indicated by using "." (periods) in a format such as "1.3.6.1.2.1.1".

The setting range of each value that is separated using "."(periods) is 1 - 65535.

A total of up to 251 characters can be entered (including periods).

The following values cannot be entered in the ETERNUS DX/AF:

(1) Values starting with a period: ".1.3.6.1.2.1.1"

(2) Value ending with a period: "1.3. 6.1.2.1.1."

(3) Values with two consecutive periods: "1. . 3. 6. 1. 2. 1. 1"

(4) Values including "0": "1.3.6.1.2.0.1"

• Subtree

Alphabetic characters, numeric characters ("1" - "65535"), and symbols

Spaces

Up to 251 characters

• Inclusion

• Exclude

Setup SNMP Agent User

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SNMP Agent User" (page 142) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent User" (page 1298)

● Setup SNMP Agent User

• User Name

Description Input the user name which accesses the SNMP Agent.

Input condition/

Display contents

The user name which has already been used cannot be entered.

• 8 - 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("! (exclamation mark)", "# (hash mark)", "&

(ampersand)", "_ (underscore)", "+ (plus)", "- (hyphen)", "* (asterisk)" and "/ (slash)")

• Spaces

• MIB View Setting

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the view name to specify the MIB access range for the user.

A "blank" means accessing the MIB is not allowed.

• ViewALL

• View-mib2

• View-exmib

• The view name, which has been registered using the [Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View] function

If "ViewALL", "View-mib2", or "View-exmib" is deleted with the procedure in "Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page

140) , the deleted options are not displayed in the [MIB View Setting] screen.

1044

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Authentication

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the authentication.

• Enable

• Disable

• Authentication Method

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To enable the authentication, select the authentication method.

• MD5 (Message Digest 5)

• SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm)

• Authentication Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling authentication, input the authentication password.

• 8 - 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("! (exclamation mark)", "# (hash mark)", "&

(ampersand)", "_ (underscore)", "+ (plus)", "- (hyphen)", "* (asterisk)" and "/ (slash)")

• Spaces

• Retype Authentication Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling authentication, input the authentication password again.

• 8 - 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("! (exclamation mark)", "# (hash mark)", "&

(ampersand)", "_ (underscore)", "+ (plus)", "- (hyphen)", "* (asterisk)" and "/ (slash)")

• Spaces

• Encryption

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the encryption function.

If the "Authentication" setting is "Disable", the encryption setting cannot be selected.

• Enable

• Disable

• Encryption Method

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To enable encryption, select the encryption method.

• DES

Data Encryption Standard

• AES

Advanced Encryption Standard

• Encryption Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling encryption, input the encryption password.

• 8 - 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("! (exclamation mark)", "# (hash mark)", "&

(ampersand)", "_ (underscore)", "+ (plus)", "- (hyphen)", "* (asterisk)" and "/ (slash)")

• Spaces

1045

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Retype Encryption Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When enabling the encryption, input the encryption password again.

• 8 - 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("! (exclamation mark)", "# (hash mark)", "&

(ampersand)", "_ (underscore)", "+ (plus)", "- (hyphen)", "* (asterisk)" and "/ (slash)")

• Spaces

Setup SNMP Agent Community

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page 144) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page 1298) .

● Setup SNMP Agent Community

• Community Name

Description Input the community name to be used when accessing a MIB or sending a trap.

Input condition/

Display contents

The community name which has already been used cannot be entered.

• Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("! (exclamation mark)", "# (hash mark)",

"& (ampersand)", "_ (underscore)", "+ (plus)", "- (hyphen)", "* (asterisk)" and "/ (slash)")

• Spaces

• View Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the view name to specify the MIB access range for the community.

A "blank" means accessing the MIB is not allowed.

• ViewALL

• View-mib2

• View-exmib

• The view name, which has been registered using the [Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View] function

If "ViewALL", "View-mib2", or "View-exmib" is deleted with the procedure in "Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View" (page

140) , the deleted options are not displayed in "View Name".

• Allowed SNMP Manager List

Description Select the IP address of the SNMP Manager which is allowed to access in the community.

Input condition/

Display contents

Only the selected SNMP Manager is allowed to access.

However, if the Allowed SNMP Agent Manager List has been left blank, all of the SNMP Agent

Managers (*1) are allowed to access.

*1: Not only the SNMP Agent Manager which has been registered in "Setup SNMP Manager"

(page 138) , but also the other SNMP Agent Managers are allowed to access.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1046

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup SNMP Agent Trap

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 146)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SNMP Agent Trap" (page 1298) .

● Setup SNMP Agent Trap

• Manager No.

Description Select a manager number.

Input condition/

Display contents

The management number of the SNMP Agent Manager, which has been registered in "Setup

SNMP Manager" (page 138)

, is displayed as an option.

Manager01 - Manager10

• SNMP Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the trap SNMP version.

• v1

• v2c

• v3

• Community Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the community name used when sending a trap.

The community name, which has been registered in "Setup SNMP Agent Community" (page

144) , is displayed as an option.

If the SNMP version is "v1" or "v2c", the "Community Name" must be specified.

Community names that are registered by using the [Setup SNMP Agent Community] function

• User Name

Description Select the user name used when sending a trap.

The user name, which has been registered in "Setup SNMP Agent User" (page 142) , is dis-

played as an option.

If the SNMP version is "v3", the "User Name" must be specified.

User names that are registered by using the [Setup SNMP Agent User] function Input condition/

Display contents

• Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number of the trap destination.

When changing a port number, input a unique port number.

1 - 65535

1047

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Download MIB File

For details about this function, refer to "Download MIB File" (page 148)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Download MIB File" (page 1298) .

● Download MIB File

• Option

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the "The ServerView control code is added to the comment line of the MIB definition file" checkbox when downloading the MIB file used for device monitoring by ServerView.

"The ServerView control code is added to the comment line of the MIB definition file" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the SNMP version used for device monitoring.

• v1

• v2c/v3

Setup E-Mail Notification

For details about this function, refer to "Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 152)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 1299)

● Notification E-Mail Settings

• Notification E-Mail

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable ("Yes") or disable ("No") the E-Mail notification function.

• Enable

• Disable

• Destination E-Mail Address

Description Specify the E-Mail destination address.

Input condition/

Display contents

At least one address must be specified. Up to five addresses can be specified.

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Comment

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the message (comment) to be added to the E-Mail. The comment can be omitted.

• Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and spaces

• Within ten lines

● E-Mail Server Settings

• LAN Port used for SMTP Connection

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the LAN port number that is used for SMTP server.

• MNT

• RMT

1048

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SMTP Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the IP address or domain name of the SMTP server that is to be used.

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is

displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• For domain name

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• SMTP Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number used by the SMTP server.

1 - 65535

• Sender E-Mail Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the E-Mail address of the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• SMTP over SSL

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the SMTP over SSL method.

• None

• STARTTLS

• SSL/TLS

• SMTP requires authentication

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the authentication method to connect to the SMTP server.

• None

• AUTH SMTP

• Authentication Method

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP Authentication Information", select the authentication method.

• Automatic

• CRAM-MD5

• PLAIN

• LOGIN

1049

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• User Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Connection Timeout

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender user name.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender password.

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols

● Advanced Settings

• "Change following Timing Parameter items" checkbox

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To change the timing parameters, select the checkbox.

• Selected

• Cleared

Input the timeout limit for SMTP connection.

1 - 300 sec.

• Response Timeout

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Maximum Retries

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Retry Interval

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the timeout limit for SMTP response.

1 - 300 sec.

Specify the maximum retry count.

0 - 5 count

Input the interval between each retry attempt.

1 - 300 sec.

1050

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup Syslog

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Syslog" (page 153)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Syslog" (page 1299)

● Syslog Server1, Syslog Server2

• Send Log

Description Select the Syslog sending parameters.

Input condition/

Display contents

Logs are sent in the selected RFC message format.

• on (RFC3164)

• on (RFC5424)

• off

• Domain Name / IP Address

Description Input the domain name or the IP address of the Syslog server.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is

displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• For domain name

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number used to send a Syslog.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 65535

• LAN Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the LAN port number that is used to send Syslog.

• MNT

• RMT

1051

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup SSH Server Key

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SSH Server Key" (page 155)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SSH Server Key" (page 1299) .

● SSH Server Key Setting

• Key Length

Description Select the SSH server key length.

Input condition/

Display contents

The SSH server key length is equivalent to the encryption level. In general, the longer the key is, the higher the encryption level becomes (meaning that decrypting the encrypted data is difficult).

• 1024 bit

• 2048 bit

• 4096 bit

Create Self-signed SSL Certificate

For details about this function, refer to "Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" (page 156)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" (page 1299)

● Create Self-signed SSL Certificate Setting

• Key Length

Description Select the SSL server key length.

Input condition/

Display contents

The SSL server key length is equivalent to the encryption level. In general, the longer the key is, the higher the encryption level becomes (meaning that decrypting the encrypted data is difficult).

• 1024 bit

• 2048 bit

• 4096 bit

• Common Name

Description Enter the main IP address or an FQDN of the port (an MNT port, an RMT port, or an FST (*1) port) for using with HTTPS access from ETERNUS Web GUI (required).

*1: FST can be used for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETER-

NUS AF650.

There are two methods to specify the main IP address; "IPv4" and "IPv6". The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "link local address", "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is

displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

1052

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• For IPv4 address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

Class must be A, B, or C

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• For FQDN

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "<", ">", "~", "!", "@", "#", "$", "%",

"^", "\", "?", "&" and space)

• Subject Alt Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter IP addresses or FQDNs of the ports (multiple MNT ports, RMT ports, and FST (*1) ports) to use with HTTPS access from ETERNUS Web GUI. For the IP address or the FQDN, the primary

IP address or FQDN that is entered in the "Common Name" field is included.

*1: FST can be used for the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETER-

NUS AF650.

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is

displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

• For IPv4 address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

Class must be A, B, or C

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• For FQDN

Alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "<", ">", "~", "!", "@", "#", "$", "%", "^", "\",

"?", "&", and space)

1 - 511 characters (a linefeed code is also counted as one character)

Multiple IP addresses and FQDNs can be specified. Start a new line for each IP address or

FQDN when specifying multiple IP addresses and FQDNs.

If IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, and FQDNs exist in the setting field, up to 511 characters that include a "." (dot), a ":" (colon), and a linefeed code can be entered.

1053

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create Key/CSR

For details about this function, refer to "Create Key/CSR" (page 157) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Key/CSR" (page 1299)

● Create Key/CSR Setting

• Key Length

Description Select the SSL server key length.

Input condition/

Display contents

The SSL server key length is equivalent to the encryption level. In general, the longer the key is, the higher the encryption level becomes (meaning that decrypting the encrypted data is difficult).

• 1024 bit

• 2048 bit

• 4096 bit

• Country Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• State or Province Name

Description Input the prefecture where the organization is located (required).

Input condition/

Display contents

[Example] Kanagawa

• Up to 63 alphabetic characters (A - Z, a - z)

• Spaces

• Locality Name

Description

Input the country code which conforms to ISO-3166 A2 (required).

[Example] Japan: JP

• Alphabetic characters (upper case) (A - Z)

• Two fixed letters

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the municipality where the organization is located (required).

[Example] Kawasaki

• Up to 63 alphabetic characters (A - Z, a - z)

• Spaces

• Organization Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the organization name (required).

[Example] XXX LIMITED

• Up to 63 alphanumeric characters (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9)

• Spaces

1054

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Organization Unit Name

Description Input the department/division name of the organization (required).

Input condition/

Display contents

[Example] YYYYY Division

• Up to 63 alphanumeric characters (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9)

• Spaces

• Common Name

Refer to "Common Name" (page 1052) in "Create Self-signed SSL Certificate"

for details.

• Subject Alt Name

Refer to "Subject Alt Name" (page 1053) in

"Create Self-signed SSL Certificate" for details.

● Select Export File

• Select Export File

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the file that is to be downloaded.

• Key File

• CSR File

Register SSL Certificate

For details about this function, refer to "Register SSL Certificate" (page 159)

● Register SSL Certificate Setting

• SSL Server Key File

Description Click the [Browse...] button to specify the SSL server key file.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Import] button to import the SSL server key file to ETERNUS Web GUI. When importing has been completed, "Imported" is displayed.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the SSL server key file

• SSL Server Certificate File

Description Click the [Browse...] button to specify the SSL server certificate file.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Import] button to import the SSL server certificate file to ETERNUS Web GUI. When importing has been completed, "Imported" is displayed.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the SSL server certificate file

1055

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup SSL Version

For details about this function, refer to "Setup SSL Version" (page 164)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup SSL Version" (page 1300) .

● SSL Version Settings

Select the SSL version to enable for each protocol.

The input condition and the display contents for each protocol are as follows.

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• HTTPS (GUI)

Description Select the SSL version to enable for the HTTPS (ETERNUS Web GUI) protocol.

• HTTPS (SMI-S)

Description

• Maintenance-Secure

Description

Select the SSL version to enable for the HTTPS (SMI-S) protocol.

Select the SSL version to enable for the Maintenance-Secure protocol.

Event/Dump Management

Setup Event Notification

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Event Notification" (page 166)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Event Notification" (page 1300) .

• If ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser is used and configured to automatically obtain the ETERNUS DX/AF component status, event notifications by SNMP traps for the following events are automatically enabled (notified).

Remote Path Error of no Data Transfer

Recovery module

Temperature restoration

FC CA Port Link Status Changed

iSCSI CA Port Link Status Changed

Remote Path Recovery

Events whose notification is enabled by default, but is disabled manually

• If the ETERNUS DX/AF is deleted from ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser, event notifications by SNMP traps return to the default state. However, if the event notifications by SNMP traps are changed from the ETER-

NUS DX/AF after they are automatically changed, the event notification setting is not returned to the default state even if the ETERNUS DX/AF is deleted from ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

1056

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Setting based on Severity

Select whether to notify of an event by levels. Checkboxes are displayed for selectable notification methods.

• All Error Events

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to notify when an error level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

By selecting or clearing the checkbox, the same setting can be applied for all the events displayed in the [Error Severity Level] tab.

Checkbox

• Selected

Notify all the events

• Selected (lighter colored checkbox)

Some events are notified and some events are not notified

• Cleared

No events are notified

• -

Not applicable to notification

• All Warning Events

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

By selecting or clearing the checkbox, the same setting can be applied for all the events displayed in the [Warning Level] tab.

Checkbox

• Selected

Notify all the events

• Selected (lighter colored checkbox)

Some events are notified and some events are not notified

• Cleared

No events are notified

• -

Not applicable to notification

• All Informational Events

Description Select whether to notify when an informational level event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

Input condition/

Display contents

By selecting or clearing the checkbox, the same setting can be applied for all the events displayed in the [Informational Level] tab.

Checkbox

• Selected

Notify all the events

• Selected (lighter colored checkbox)

Some events are notified and some events are not notified

• Cleared

No events are notified

• -

Not applicable to notification

1057

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Individual Settings within Severity Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

"Yes" is displayed when the target notification method ("Host Sense Key Code Qualifier",

"SNMP Trap", "E-Mail", "syslog", "REMCS" or "AIS Connect") is specified for any event in "Error

Severity Level", "Warning Level", or "Informational Level", if not, "No" is displayed.

• Yes

• No

• Blink Fault LED at warning

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Enable" when setting the Fault LED in the front panel to blink while a warning level event occurs, or select "Disable" when setting the Fault LED not to blink.

• Enable

• Disable

• Turn on Fault LED when redundant copy is completed

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Enable" when setting the Fault LED of the drive to turn on when a redundant copy is complete, or select "Disable" when setting the Fault LED not to turn on.

• Enable

• Disable

If the Copybackless function is enabled, Fault LED for the failed drive is turned on regardless of this setting after the redundant copy is complete.

• Display parts (except drive) with error status on LCD

Description Select "Enable" when displaying the part (other than drive) error message on the LCD, or select "Disable" not to display the message on the LCD.

Input condition/

Display contents

This is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• Enable

• Disable

• Display parts (except drive) with warning status on LCD

Description Select "Enable" when displaying the part (other than drive) warning message on the LCD, or select "Disable" not to display the message on the LCD.

Input condition/

Display contents

This is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• Enable

• Disable

1058

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Display drives with error status on LCD

Description Select whether to display the drive error message on the LCD.

Input condition/

Display contents

This is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• Any Time

Select "Enable" when displaying the drive error message on the LCD at any time regardless of whether the hot spare disk exists, or select "Disable" if the message should not be displayed.

• when HS<0

Select "Enable" when displaying the drive error message only if a drive error occurs when the available hot spare disk is "0", or select "Disable" if the message should not be displayed. This item can be selected only when the "Display drives with error status on LCD

(Any Time)" checkbox is cleared.

• Any Time

Enable

Disable

• when HS<0

Enable

Disable

• Display drives with warning status on LCD

Description Select whether to display the drive warning message on the LCD.

Input condition/

Display contents

This is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

• Any Time

Select "Enable" when displaying the drive warning message on the LCD at any time regardless of whether the hot spare disk exists, or select "Disable" if the message should not be displayed.

• when HS<0

Select "Enable" when displaying the drive warning message only if a drive warning occurs when the available hot spare disk is "0", or select "Disable" if the message should not be displayed. This item can be selected only when the "Display drives with warning status on

LCD (Any Time)" checkbox is cleared.

• Any Time

Enable

Disable

• when HS<0

Enable

Disable

● Error Severity Level

Select whether to notify an error event for each event type.

The input conditions and the display contents for the error severity level are as follows:

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkbox

• Selected

Notify

• Cleared

Not notify

• -

Not applicable to notification

1059

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Parts Error

Description Select whether to notify when a failure occurs in a part other than the drive. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Drive Error

Description Select whether to notify when a failure occurs in a non-protected (non-shielded) drive for each condition that is described below. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Any Time

Notifies always when a drive failure occurs.

• when HS<0

Notifies only when a drive failure occurs while available hot spare disk is " 0" (*1).

*1: When rebuilding cannot be performed because there are no hot spares that can be used as a substitute for the failed drive.

• Drive Error of HDD Shield

Description Select whether to notify when a failure occurs in a protected (shielded) drive for each condition that is described below. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Any Time

Notifies always when a failure occurs in a protected (shielded) drive.

• when HS<0

Notifies only when a failure occurs in a protected (shielded) drive while available hot spare disk is " 0" (*1).

*1: When rebuilding cannot be performed because there are no hot spares that can be used as a substitute for the failed drive.

When the SNMP trap setting is changed from "OFF" to "ON", a message is displayed in the ETERNUS SF event log.

• Succeeded HDD Shield

Description Select whether to notify when a failed drive is diagnosed as being available by the protect

(shield) function and is activated in the ETERNUS DX/AF. When notifying, select the notification method.

When the SNMP trap setting is changed from "OFF" to "ON", a message is displayed in the ETERNUS SF event log.

• Temperature Error

Description Select whether to notify when a temperature error status is detected by the sensor. When notifying, select the notification method.

• End of battery life

Description Select whether to notify when a battery expires. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/

DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

1060

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Rebuild/Copyback w/ redundant

Description Select whether to notify when rebuilding or copy backing (with redundancy) (*1) is performed. When notifying, select the notification method.

*1: "Rebuilding to hot spare disk is complete", "Copyback starts" and "Copyback complete" are equivalent to "Redundancy".

• Rebuild/Copyback w/o redundant

Description Select whether to notify when rebuilding or copy backing (without redundancy) (*1) occurs for each condition shown below. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Any Time

Notifies always when rebuilding or copy backing (without redundancy) occurs.

• when HS<0

Notifies only when rebuilding or copy backing (without redundancy) occurs while available hot spare disk is "0".

*1: "Rebuild to hot spare disk is started", "Rebuild to hot spare disk failed" and "Copyback failed" are equivalent to "Without redundancy".

• Redundant

Description Select whether to notify when a redundant copy starts or ends abnormally for each condition shown below. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Any Time

Notifies always when a redundant copy starts or ends abnormally.

• when HS<0

Notifies only if a redundant copy starts or ends abnormally when the available hot spare disk is "0".

• Complete Redundant Copy

Description Select whether to notify when a redundant copy and isolation of the non-protected (nonshielded) drive from the ETERNUS DX/AF are complete. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Complete Redundant Copy of HDD Shield

Description Select whether to notify when a redundant copy and isolation of the protected (shielded) drive from the ETERNUS DX/AF are complete. When notifying, select the notification method.

When the SNMP trap setting is changed from "OFF" to "ON", a message is displayed in the ETERNUS SF event log.

• Complete rebuild

Description Select whether to notify when a bad sector (*1) is detected in the hot spare where rebuilding is completed. When notifying, select the notification method.

*1: A bad sector is the location information (address and length) where an error such as data reading error occurs during rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy.

1061

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Bad data

Description Select whether to notify when a bad sector is detected in the drive. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Pinned data

Description Select whether to notify when pinned data (*1) is detected or disappears. When notifying, select the notification method.

*1: "Pinned data" is the data left in the cache due to unsuccessful write-back to the drive from the cache area.

• Not Ready

Description Select whether to notify when the ETERNUS DX/AF is in the "Not ready" state (*1). When notifying, select the notification method.

*1: "Not ready" is the state in which the ETERNUS DX/AF cannot operate properly due to a cause such as failures in multiple parts.

• Remote Path Error during Data Transfer

Description Select whether to notify when an error occurs in a copy path and a copy session that is not suspended exists. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Remote Path Error of no Data Transfer

Description Select whether to notify when an error occurs in a copy path and a copy session that is in one of the following conditions exists. When notifying, select the notification method.

• No REC sessions exist

• All of the REC sessions are suspended

• REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)

Description Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by copy path error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

• REC Buffer Halt (Overload)

Description Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by overload occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

• REC Buffer Halt (Other Error)

Description Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by an error occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Copy Session Error

Description Select whether to notify when an error is detected in the Advanced Copy session or when a failed Advanced Copy session is recovered. When notifying, select the notification method.

1062

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Thin Provisioning Pool Rate

Description Select whether to notify when the TPP usage changes (*1). When notifying, select the notification method.

*1: Notify when the TPP usage (or DEDUP_SYS Volume usage for TPPs where the Deduplication/Compression setting is enabled) changes as follows:

For TPPs where the Deduplication/Compression setting is enabled

• From "Normal" or "Attention" to "Warning"

• The TPP capacity is exhausted

For the other TPPs

• From "Normal" to "Attention"

• From "Normal" or "Attention" to "Warning"

• The TPP capacity is exhausted

• SED Network Error

Description Select whether to notify when the communication between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the key server is disconnected. When notifying, select the notification method.

• NAS I/O Error

Description Select whether to notify when an I/O error is detected in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method. This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• NAS Snapshot Error

Description Select whether to notify when a snapshot acquisition error is detected in the NAS system.

When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Extended System Volume Error

Description Select whether to notify the error status of the NAS expanded system volume (such as the unmount state, access error, or out of capacity) for the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Disconnect Storage Cluster Controller

Description Select whether to notify when communication error with the paired storage system is detected if the Storage Cluster controller has been specified. When notifying, select the notification method. This item is only displayed when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

● Warning Level

Select whether to notify of a warning event for each event type.

The input conditions and the display contents for the warning level are as follows:

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkbox

• Selected

Notify

• Cleared

Not notify

• -

Not applicable to notification

1063

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Parts Warning

Description Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in a part other than the drive.

When notifying, select the notification method.

• Drive Warning

Description Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in a non-protected (non-shielded) drive for each condition that is described below. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Any Time

Notifies always when a warning level event occurs in the drive.

• when HS<0

Notifies only if a warning level event occurs in the drive when available hot spare disk is

"0" (*1).

*1: When rebuilding cannot be performed because there are no hot spares that can be used as a substitute for the failed drive.

• Drive Warning of HDD Shield

Description Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in a protected (shielded) drive for each condition that is described below. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Any Time

Notifies always when a warning level event occurs in a protected (shielded) drive.

• when HS<0

Notifies only when a warning level event occurs in a protected (shielded) drive failure while available hot spare disk is "0" (*1).

*1: When rebuilding cannot be performed because there are no hot spares that can be used as a substitute for the failed drive.

When the SNMP trap setting is changed from "OFF" to "ON", a message is displayed in the ETERNUS SF event log.

• Temperature Warning

Description Select whether to notify when a temperature warning status is detected by the sensor. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Battery life Warning

Description Select whether to notify a battery expiration in advance (*1). When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S4/

DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

*1: Advance notice of battery expiration is issued once "6 months before", once "a week before", and once a day during the period from "6 days before" to "the expiration date".

1064

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• NAS I/O Warning

Description Select whether to notify when a warning level I/O error (read error from or write error to the metadata area or the bitmap area) is detected in the NAS system.

When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• NAS Connection Error

Description Select whether to notify when a NAS connection error (receiving incorrect message or blocked file system) is detected in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Out of NAS Capacity

Description Select whether to notify when one of the events described below occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

• The capacity in the file system (or data area) that is assigned in NAS is insufficient

• The used capacity of the NAS user volume exceeds 95% or 98%

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• NAS Quota Limit Exceeded

Description Select whether to notify when the quota setting information (such as Drive Used Size or File

Count) for NAS user volumes or shared folders exceeds the threshold in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• The relevant event is notified when both the warning and limit values are specified and the status changes as described below.

Less than the warning value  Exceeds the warning value

Less than the warning value  Exceeds the limit value

More than the warning value and less than the limit value  Exceeds the limit value

• The relevant event is notified when only the limit value is specified and the status changes as described below.

Less than the limit value  Exceeds the limit value

• The relevant event is notified when only the warning value is specified and the status changes as described below.

Less than the warning value  Exceeds the warning value

• Extended System Volume Warning

Description Select whether to notify when used capacity of the NAS expanded system volume in the NAS system exceeds 90% or more. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

1065

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Informational Level

Select whether to notify of an informational event for each event type.

The input conditions and the display contents for the informational level are as follows:

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkbox

• Selected

Notify

• Cleared

Not notify

• -

Not applicable to notification

• Recovery module

Description Select whether to notify when the failed part is recovered by taking actions such as replacement. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Temperature restoration

Description Select whether to notify when a temperature error or warning status is recovered to the normal status. When notifying, select the notification method.

• User login/logout

Description Select whether to notify when a user login/logout is detected. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Operated RAID Group

Description Select whether to notify when the RAID group is created or deleted. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Added/Released Hot Spare

Description Select whether to notify when the hot spare disk is registered or released. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Operated Volume

Description Select whether to notify when the volume is created or deleted. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Power off/on Apply Firmware

Description Select whether to notify when the ETERNUS DX/AF is turned off/on or when the hot controller firmware upgrade is performed. When notifying, select the notification method.

• SDP Usage Rate Over Lv1

Description Select whether to notify when an SDP Policy Level 1 (Informational) event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

Threshold of SDP usage (SDP Usage Rate Over Lv1, SDP Usage Rate Over Lv2, SDP Usage Rate Over Lv3) can be specified using the procedure in

"Modify Copy Parameters" (page 607) .

1066

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SDP Usage Rate Over Lv2

Description Select whether to notify when an SDP Policy Level 2 (Warning) event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

• SDP Usage Rate Over Lv3

Description Select whether to notify when an SDP Policy Level 3 (Error) event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Copy Table Size Usage Rate Over

Description Select whether to notify when the copy table usage exceeds the threshold. When notifying, select the notification method.

Threshold of copy table size usage can be specified using the procedure in "Modify Copy Table Size" (page 602)

• Trial copy license expired

Description Select whether to notify when a copy trial license expiration event occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

• Remote Path Recovery

Description Select whether to notify when a remote path is recovered after a remote path error (*1) is notified. When notifying, select the notification method.

*1: The remote path error indicates "Remote Path Error during Data Transfer" or "Remote

Path Error of no Data Transfer".

• No Free Space on ODX Buffer Volume

Description Select whether to notify when an insufficient free space event for an ODX Buffer volume occurs. When notifying, select the notification method.

If free space of an ODX Buffer volume is insufficient, expand the volume capacity as required. For details, refer to the following sections:

•

"Expand Volume" (page 285)

•

"Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 292)

•

"Start RAID Migration" (page 307)

• SED Network Error Recovered

Description Select whether to notify when the communication between the ETERNUS DX/AF and the key server is recovered. When notifying, select the notification method.

1067

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• FC CA Port Link Status Changed

Description Select whether to notify when a link down occurs after an FC link is established and the link status is changed. When notifying, select the notification method.

Note that a change in the link status due to user operation is not notified.

A change in the link status for all FC ports is notified. The notification is reported regardless of the type (FC), the port mode (CA, RA, CA/RA, Initiator), and the transfer rate. The following FC link status types can be detected and notified:

• The link status between the ETERNUS DX/AF and a directly connected server

• The link status between the ETERNUS DX/AF and switches

The FC link status can be checked in the [Port Detail] screen. Refer to "Port Detail" (page 781)

for details.

• Link up and link down that occur due to the following user operations are not notified.

Rebooting of the ETERNUS DX/AF

Hot maintenance of a CA or a CM in which a CA is installed

Preventive maintenance of a CA or a CM in which a CA is installed

Chip reset due to a change in the FC port parameters

• If the occurrence of link down and link up repeats within a 10 second interval, the first two sets of link down and link up are notified. Notification of this event is suspended for 20 minutes after the notification.

• Note that the link status between a server and a switch cannot be detected.

• iSCSI CA Port Link Status Changed

Description Select whether to notify when a link down occurs after an iSCSI link is established and the link status is changed. When notifying, select the notification method.

Note that a change in the link status due to user operation is not notified.

A change in the link status for all iSCSI ports is notified. The notification is reported regardless of the port mode (CA, RA, CA/RA) and transfer rate. The following iSCSI link status types can be detected and notified:

• The link status between the ETERNUS DX/AF and a directly connected server

• The link status between the ETERNUS DX/AF and switches

The iSCSI link status can be checked in the [Port Detail] screen. Refer to

"Port Detail" (page

781) for details.

• Link up and link down that occur due to the following user operations are not notified.

Rebooting of the ETERNUS DX/AF

Hot maintenance of a CA or a CM in which a CA is installed

Preventive maintenance of a CA or a CM in which a CA is installed

Chip reset due to a change in the iSCSI port parameters

• Note that the link status between a server and a switch cannot be detected.

• Host Login Over

Description Select whether to notify when the number of connected hosts for each CA port exceeds the maximum value (256 hosts). When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is notified regardless of the CA type (FC, iSCSI, SAS, and FCoE).

1068

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• NAS Connection Status

Description Select whether to notify when the link status for a NAS connection is changed (such as mount, unmount, or recovery of the file system) in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Out of NAS Capacity

Description Select whether to notify when insufficient capacity in the file system (data area) that is allocated by the NAS is detected in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Out of NAS File Management Domain

Description Select whether to notify when insufficient capacity in the management area for the files and the directories of the NAS function is detected in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Succeed NAS Snapshot

Description Select whether to notify when a snapshot acquisition has succeeded in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Fall below NAS Quota Limit

Description Select whether to notify when the quota setting information (such as Drive Used Size or File

Count) for NAS user volumes or shared folders becomes less than the threshold in the NAS system. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• The relevant event is notified when both the warning and limit values are specified and the status changes as described below.

Exceeds the warning value  Less than the warning value

Exceeds the limit value  Less than the warning value

• The relevant event is notified when only the limit value is specified and the status changes as described below.

Exceeds the limit value  Less than the limit value

• The relevant event is notified when only the warning value is specified and the status changes as described below.

Exceeds the warning value  Less than the warning value

• NAS CPU Warning

Description Select whether to notify when the used rate of the whole CPU in the NAS system exceeds 90% or more. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• NAS CPU Recovered

Description Select whether to notify when the used rate of the whole CPU in the NAS system goes from

90% or more to less than 80%. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

1069

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Extended System Volume Recovered

Description Select whether to notify when the used capacity of the NAS expanded system volume in the

NAS system goes from 90% or more to less than 80%. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Multipath Status

Description Select whether to notify when the NAS port status in the Multipath configuration has changed. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Automatic Change Storage Cluster Active/Standby State

Description Select whether to notify when the Storage Cluster status is changed from "Standby" to "Active" or from "Active" to "Standby" with automatic failover or failback. When notifying, select the notification method. This item is only displayed when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• The following events have been changed from " Error Severity Level" to " Informational Level" in the [Setup

Event Notification] function of the controller firmware version V10L30 or later.

Automatic Change Storage Cluster Active/Standby State

Manual Change Storage Cluster Active/Standby State

• If the controller firmware version is updated from V10L2x to V10L30 or later, the event notification settings (whether to notify and the notification method) that were set in V10L2x are retained.

• Manual Change Storage Cluster Active/Standby State

Description Select whether to notify when the Storage Cluster status is changed from "Standby" to "Active" or from "Active" to "Standby" with manual failover or failback. When notifying, select the notification method. This item is only displayed when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

• Connect Storage Cluster Controller

Description Select whether to notify when communication with the paired storage system is recovered if the Storage Cluster controller has been specified. When notifying, select the notification method.

This item is only displayed when "Enable" is selected for the Storage Cluster function.

1070

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Initial setting list

The initial setting of event notification is described below.

Item

All Error Events

Host Sense Key

Code Qualifier

Selected/

Cleared

SNMP Trap

Selected/

Cleared

Notification method

E-Mail syslog

Selected/

Cleared

All Warning Events

All Informational Events

Selected

–

Selected

Selected/

Cleared

Yes

Selected

Selected/

Cleared

Yes Individual Settings within Severity Level

Yes

Selected: Notify

Cleared: Not notify

Selected/Cleared: Some events are notified and other events are not notified

– : Not applicable to notification

Cleared

Event

Blink Fault LED at warning

Turn on Fault LED when redundant copy is completed

Display parts (except drive) with error status on LCD

Display parts (except drive) with warning status on LCD

Display drives with error status on LCD Any Time when HS<0

Display drives with warning status on LCD Any Time when HS<0

Notification

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

REMCS

Selected/

Cleared

Yes

AIS Connect

Selected/

Cleared

Selected

Selected/

Cleared

Yes

Remarks

–

They are displayed for the ETERNUS

DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Level Event Notification method

E-Mail syslog REMCS AIS Connect

Parts Error

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

Selected

SNMP Trap

Selected Selected Cleared Selected

Drive Error Any Time Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

–

Selected

Cleared

Error when

HS<0

Drive Error of

HDD Shield

Any Time when

HS<0

Succeeded HDD Shield

Temperature Error

End of battery life

Cleared

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

–

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

Selected

Cleared Rebuild/Copyback w/ redundant

Rebuild/Copyback w/o redundant

Any Time when

HS<0

Selected

Cleared

–

Cleared

1071

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Error

Level

Warning

Event

Redundant Any Time when

HS<0

Complete Redundant Copy

Complete Redundant Copy of HDD Shield

Complete rebuild

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

Cleared

SNMP Trap

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Bad data

Pinned data

Selected

(*1)

Selected Not Ready

Remote Path Error during

Data Transfer

Remote Path Error of no

Data Transfer

REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)

REC Buffer Halt (Overload)

REC Buffer Halt (Other

Error)

Copy Session Error

Thin Provisioning Pool Rate

SED Network Error

NAS I/O Error

Selected

Cleared

–

NAS Snapshot Error

Extended System Volume

Error

Disconnect Storage Cluster

Controller

Parts Warning

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Drive Warning Any Time when

HS<0

Drive Warning of HDD Shield

Any Time when

HS<0

Temperature Warning

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Battery life Warning

NAS I/O Warning

NAS Connection Error

Selected

–

Selected

Notification method

E-Mail

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Selected syslog

Cleared

REMCS AIS Connect

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

–

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

–

Cleared

–

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

1072

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Level Event

Out of NAS Capacity

Warning

NAS Quota Limit Exceeded

Informational

Extended System Volume

Warning

Recovery module

Temperature restoration

User login/logout

Operated RAID Group

Added/Released Hot Spare

Operated Volume

Power off/on Apply Firmware

SDP Usage Rate Over Lv1

SDP Usage Rate Over Lv2

SDP Usage Rate Over Lv3

Copy Table Size Usage Rate

Over

Trial copy license expired

Remote Path Recovery

No Free Space on ODX Buffer Volume

SED Network Error Recovered

FC CA Port Link Status

Changed iSCSI CA Port Link Status

Changed

Host Login Over

NAS Connection Status

Out of NAS Capacity

Out of NAS File Management Domain

Succeed NAS Snapshot

Fall below NAS Quota Limit

NAS CPU Warning

NAS CPU Recovered

Extended System Volume

Recovered

Multipath Status

Automatic Change Storage

Cluster Active/Standby

State

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

–

SNMP Trap

Selected

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Notification method

E-Mail

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Cleared syslog

Cleared

REMCS AIS Connect

Cleared

–

Selected

Cleared

–

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

–

Cleared

–

Cleared

–

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

(fixed)

–

Selected

–

1073

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Level Event

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

SNMP Trap

Notification method

E-Mail syslog

Manual Change Storage

Cluster Active/Standby

State

– Selected Cleared Cleared

Informational

Connect Storage Cluster

Controller

– Selected Cleared Cleared

Selected: Notify

Cleared: Not notify

Selected (fixed): Always notify (This setting cannot be changed with this function.)

– : Not applicable to notification

*1: Host Sense Key Code Qualifier is not notified when pinned data disappears.

REMCS

Cleared

AIS Connect

Cleared

REMCS recommended setting list

The REMCS recommended setting of event notification is described below. For the notification methods indicated with "*", notification setting has been changed from the system default.

Item

All Error Events

All Warning Events

All Informational Events

Host Sense Key

Code Qualifier

Selected/

Cleared

Cleared *

–

SNMP Trap

Selected/

Cleared

Cleared *

Selected/

Cleared

Yes

Notification method

E-Mail syslog

Selected/

Cleared

Cleared *

Selected/

Cleared

Yes

Cleared

Individual Settings within Severity Level

Yes

Selected: Notify

Cleared: Not notify

Selected/Cleared: Some events are notified and other events are not notified

– : Not applicable to notification

Cleared

Event

Blink Fault LED at warning

Turn on Fault LED when redundant copy is completed

Display parts (except drive) with error status on LCD

Display parts (except drive) with warning status on LCD

Display drives with error status on LCD Any Time when HS<0

Display drives with warning status on LCD Any Time when HS<0

Notification

Disable *

Disable

Enable

Disable *

Enable *

Disable *

Disable

REMCS

Selected/

Cleared

Yes

AIS Connect

Selected/

Cleared

Cleared *

Selected/

Cleared

Yes

Remarks

–

They are displayed for the ETERNUS

DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

Level

Error

Parts Error

Drive Error

Event

Any Time

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

Selected

SNMP Trap

Selected

Cleared *

Notification method

E-Mail

Selected

Cleared * Cleared * syslog

Cleared

Cleared when

HS<0

Cleared Selected * Selected * Cleared

REMCS AIS Connect

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

–

Selected

Cleared *

Selected *

1074

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Error

Level Event

Drive Error of

HDD Shield

Any Time when

HS<0

Succeeded HDD Shield

Temperature Error

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

Cleared

SNMP Trap

Cleared

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

End of battery life Selected

Rebuild/Copyback w/ redundant

Rebuild/Copyback w/o redundant

Redundant

Any Time when

HS<0

Any Time when

HS<0

Complete Redundant Copy

Complete Redundant Copy of HDD Shield

Complete rebuild

Cleared *

Selected *

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Selected Bad data

Pinned data

Selected

(*1)

Selected Not Ready

Remote Path Error during

Data Transfer

Remote Path Error of no

Data Transfer

REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)

REC Buffer Halt (Overload)

REC Buffer Halt (Other

Error)

Copy Session Error

Thin Provisioning Pool Rate

SED Network Error

NAS I/O Error

Selected

Cleared

–

NAS Snapshot Error

Extended System Volume

Error

Disconnect Storage Cluster

Controller

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Notification method

E-Mail

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared syslog

Cleared

REMCS AIS Connect

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

–

Cleared

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

Cleared

–

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

–

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

1075

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Level

Warning

Event

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

Cleared *

SNMP Trap

Cleared *

Notification method

E-Mail

Cleared * syslog

Cleared Parts Warning

Drive Warning Any Time Cleared * Cleared * Cleared * Cleared when

HS<0

Drive Warning of HDD Shield

Any Time when

HS<0

Temperature Warning

Cleared

Cleared *

Cleared * Cleared *

Cleared

Cleared Battery life Warning

NAS I/O Warning

Cleared

–

Cleared * Cleared *

Cleared

Cleared NAS Connection Error

Out of NAS Capacity –

–

Cleared * Cleared *

Selected Cleared *

Cleared

Cleared NAS Quota Limit Exceeded

Informational

Extended System Volume

Warning

Recovery module

Temperature restoration

User login/logout

Operated RAID Group

Added/Released Hot Spare

Operated Volume

Power off/on Apply Firmware

SDP Usage Rate Over Lv1

SDP Usage Rate Over Lv2

SDP Usage Rate Over Lv3

Copy Table Size Usage Rate

Over

Trial copy license expired

Remote Path Recovery

No Free Space on ODX Buffer Volume

SED Network Error Recovered

FC CA Port Link Status

Changed iSCSI CA Port Link Status

Changed

Host Login Over

NAS Connection Status

–

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

REMCS AIS Connect

–

Cleared

Cleared *

Cleared

–

Cleared

Cleared *

Cleared

Cleared *

–

Cleared

–

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

–

Cleared

–

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Selected

(fixed)

Cleared

(fixed)

–

1076

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Level

Informational

Event

Out of NAS Capacity

Out of NAS File Management Domain

Succeed NAS Snapshot

Fall below NAS Quota Limit

NAS CPU Warning

NAS CPU Recovered

Extended System Volume

Recovered

Multipath Status

Automatic Change Storage

Cluster Active/Standby

State

Manual Change Storage

Cluster Active/Standby

State

Host Sense

Key Code

Qualifier

–

SNMP Trap

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Notification method

E-Mail syslog

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Selected

Cleared

Connect Storage Cluster

Controller

– Selected Cleared Cleared

Selected: Notify

Cleared: Not notify

Selected (fixed): Always notify (This setting cannot be changed with this function.)

– : Not applicable to notification

*1: Host Sense Key Code Qualifier is not notified when pinned data disappears.

REMCS AIS Connect

Cleared

Export/Delete Log

For details about this function, refer to "Export/Delete Log" (page 171)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Export/Delete Log" (page 1300) .

● Option

• Export Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the collection target of the CM log from "All" or "Only Disk Drive Log".

• All

• Only Disk Drive Log

–

Selected

Cleared

–

Selected

1077

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Specify Time Range

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify a time range for exporting logs.

• Yes

Specify a time range for exporting logs.

• No

Do not specify a time range for exporting logs.

• Last 24 hours

Export logs from the last 24 hours.

• Last week

Export logs from the last one week.

• Last month

Export logs from the last one month.

• Start Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to start exporting logs.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year, MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 -

23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• End Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to finish exporting logs.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year, MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour (00 -

23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

• Include I/O Module log

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When exporting the I/O module logs, select "Yes". When not exporting, select "No".

• Yes

• No

• Include NAS Engine log

Description When exporting the NAS Engine logs, select "Yes". When not exporting, select "No".

Input condition/

Display contents

If "Yes" is selected for "Delete of Customer Information", this item is fixed to "No".

This item is only displayed in a Unified Storage environment.

• Yes

• No

• Log File Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the log file size (segment size) when saving the exported log.

• Non-segmentation

• 4.27 MB

• 1.44MB (Floppy Disk)

• 640KB (E-Mail)

1078

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Delete of Customer Information

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When deleting the customer information (information to identify the customer such as; user name, box ID, and IP address) from the exported log, select "Yes". When not deleting, select

"No".

• Yes

• No

Export/Delete Panic Dump

For details about this function, refer to "Export/Delete Panic Dump" (page 174)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Export/Delete Panic Dump" (page 1300) .

● Panic Dumps

• Panic Dumps

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a checkbox for the panic dump to be exported (only one panic dump can be selected).

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Option

• Dump File Segment Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the file size (segment size) when saving the exported panic dump.

• Non-segmentation

• 4.27 MB

• 1.44MB (Floppy Disk)

• 640KB (E-Mail)

Audit Log Management

Setup Audit Log

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Audit Log" (page 179)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Audit Log" (page 1301) .

● Syslog Server1, Syslog Server2

• Send Audit Log

Description Select the audit log sending parameters.

Input condition/

Display contents

Logs are sent in the selected RFC message format.

• on (RFC3164)

• on (RFC5424)

• off

1079

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Domain Name / IP Address

Description Input the domain name or the IP address of the Syslog server.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is

displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• For domain name

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number used to send an audit log.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 65535

• LAN Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the LAN port number that is used to send an audit log.

• MNT

• RMT

Key Management

Setup Key Management Machine Name

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Key Management Machine Name" (page 181)

● Key Management Machine Name Setting

• Key Management Machine Name

Description Input the name of the device that is to be used to connect to the key server.

Input condition/

Display contents

The key management device name corresponds to "Machine ID" in the key server.

If a key management device name is not used or if the current setting is deleted, leave this item blank.

• Alphanumeric characters

• Symbols (underscore "_")

• The first letter must be an alphabetic character

• 0 to 48 characters

1080

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add Key Server

For details about this function, refer to "Add Key Server" (page 182)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Key Server" (page 1301)

● Key Server Setting

• Domain Name / IP Address

Description Input the domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the key server.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is

displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation (Setup Network Environment)" (page 133)

for details.

• For domain name

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number used to communicate with the key server.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 65535

• LAN Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the LAN port used to communicate with the key server.

• MNT

• RMT

Modify Key Server

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Key Server" (page 184)

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Add Key Server" (page 1081)

1081

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Create Key Group

For details about this function, refer to "Create Key Group" (page 185)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Key Group" (page 1301)

● Key Group Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a key group name.

The key group name corresponds to "Serial Number", which is managed in the key server.

• Alphanumeric characters

• Symbols (underscore "_")

• The first letter must be an alphabetic character

• Up to 32 characters

Specify a unique key group name that is different from the other storage systems that use the same key server.

Do not change the key group name after the key status changes to "Normal". The key status can be checked on the [Key

Group] screen. Refer to

"Key Group" (page 675)

for details.

• Storage System Group Name

Description Input the storage system group name.

Input condition/

Display contents

The storage system group combines the key management device (Key Management Machine) name that is managed by the user with the key group. The storage system group name corresponds to "Device Group Name", which is managed in the key server. If the default setting is used, input "ETERNUS_DX". The "default setting" uses the factory default device group name for "ETERNUS SF KM" (key management software).

• Alphanumeric characters

• Symbols (underscore "_")

• The first letter must be an alphabetic character

• Up to 16 digits

• "ETERNUS_DX" (When using the default setting)

For the storage system group name, specify the same name as "Device Group Name", which is registered in the key server.

Do not change the storage system group name after the key status changes to "Normal". The key status can be checked on the [Key Group] screen. Refer to

"Key Group" (page 675) for details.

1082

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

• Security Level

Description

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the security level of the key group.

"Security Level" indicates the handling level when application of the SED key to the target

RAID group fails. If the key for the relevant RAID group cannot be obtained from the key server due to a communication error and the SEDs that configure the RAID group are changed to hot spares or changed to new SEDs due to failure or maintenance, the ETERNUS DX/AF performs operations according to the selected security level.

• High

Rebuilding to hot spares for which the key cannot be changed after SED failure is not performed. The RAID group loses its redundancy (" Exposed" or " Partially Exposed"

(only for High Reliability (RAID6)), " Exposed (Fast)" (only for High Reliability (RAID6-

FR)), or " Partially Exposed (Fast)" (only for High Reliability (RAID6-FR))).

"Modifying" may be displayed for the key status for few minutes even though the SED key has already changed. After changing the key, maintenance of the SEDs is complete.

• Low

Rebuilding or maintenance is performed by using the common key if changing of the key in the key server fails due to a network error.

• Recovery Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the recovery mode of the key group.

*1: A blocked status that occurs when the key of the RAID groups cannot be obtained.

• Automatic

This mode recovers locked RAID groups or SEDs when the communication error with the key server is resolved.

• Manual

Use the [Recovery SED] function of ETERNUS Web GUI to recover the locked RAID groups or

SEDs when the communication error with the key server is resolved.

• Key Valid Period

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a key expiration period that is based on the date when the key from the server is obtained for the first time (beginning of use).

When the key expires, a new key is obtained from the key server and the expired key is automatically replaced. The key expiration period is checked every eight hours.

• Unlimited

The same key is used until exactly 20 years elapses since the key was first used.

• 1 month - 12 month

The same key is used until the date and time in the specified month elapses since the key was first used. If the same date does not exist in the specified month (such as April 31st), the expiration date of the key becomes the last date of the specified month.

1083

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If the key expiration period is changed, the same key is used until the date and time of the specified month elapses since the key was first used. Note that the expiration period starts when the key is first used (not when the key expiration period is changed).

• Key Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the key server ID that is assigned for the master or slave server.

"None" and the registered key server ID are displayed as options.

• Master

None

• Slave

None

• The same server ID (except for "None") cannot be selected for both the master and slave servers. Note that "None" cannot be selected for both of the servers when RAID groups are registered in the key group.

• If "None" is selected for both master and slave servers, the key cannot be managed by the key server.

•

The key can only be updated when the master server is specified. Refer to "Update SED Authentication Key" (page

188)

for details.

• To perform maintenance of the key server, the key server setting parameters must be released temporarily. Select

"None" for the target key server before starting maintenance. After maintenance is complete, set the key server parameters again.

To assign a key server ID to the key group, key servers must be registered in advance. Refer to

"Add Key Server" (page

182) for details.

Modify Key Group

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Key Group" (page 187) .

For details on the parameters for this function, refer to "A. Create Key Group" (page 1082)

Update SED Authentication Key

For details about this function, refer to "Update SED Authentication Key" (page 188) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Update SED Authentication Key" (page 1301) .

● Current SED Authentication Key Setting

• Current Key

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable ("Enabled Key") or disable ("Disabled Key") the current key.

• Enabled Key

• Disabled Key

1084

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Import SSL/KMIP Certificate

For details about this function, refer to "Import SSL/KMIP Certificate" (page 190)

● SSL/KMIP Certificate Setting

• SSL/KMIP Certificate File

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the SSL/KMIP certificate file.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the SSL/KMIP certificate file

Storage Migration Management

Start Storage Migration

For details about this function, refer to "Start Storage Migration" (page 192) .

● Storage Migration

• Storage migration setting file

Description Input the location where the Storage Migration setting file is stored.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location

External Drive Management

Create External Drives

For details about this function, refer to "Create External Drive" (page 203) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create External Drive" (page 1301) .

● External Drive Setting

• External LU Information

Description Select whether External Drives inherit volume information (External LU Information) from the external storage system when created.

Input condition/

Display contents

To inherit the External LU Information, select the "Inherit" checkbox. This setting is applied to all External Drives that are created by this operation.

"Inherit" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

To use the data migration destination volume for the Storage Cluster function, clear the "Inherit" checkbox.

1085

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Select External Storage

• Radio button to select an external storage system

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the radio button of an external storage system for the migration source.

External storage system

● Select LUs of the External Storage

• Checkbox to select External LUs

Description Select a checkbox for a volume that transfers the External LU Information to the local storage system.

Input condition/

Display contents

To select all the displayed volumes, select the checkbox to the left of "LUN".

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

LUNs with the same UID as the External Drives that are already created in the local storage system are not displayed in this list.

Remote Support Management

Setup Remote Support

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Remote Support" (page 1302)

● Information File

• Customer Information File

Description Import the "Customer Information File", which was created using the REMCS ESAT, to the ETER-

NUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Customer Information File".

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Customer Information File"

• Communication Environment Information File

Description Import the "Communication Environment Information File", which was created using the

REMCS ESAT, to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Communication Environment Information File".

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Communication Environment Information File"

When importing Remote Support settings to the ETERNUS DX/AF all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button.

1086

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

● Customer Information

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

"Update Customer Information" (page 211)

● Communication Environment Information

"Update Communication Environment Information" (page 213)

● Detailed Configuration Information

• Data Transmission Method

Description Select whether to "Split" or "Do not Split" into the specified size.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Split large E-Mail into multiple E-Mails" or "Split large data into multiple E-Mails", and specify the segment size, when segmenting outgoing mail.

If the mail server does not allow the sending of segmented mail using "Split large E-Mail into multiple E-Mails", select "Split large data into multiple E-Mails" or "Do not Split".

• Split

Outgoing mail is segmented.

Split large E-Mail into multiple E-Mails

Outgoing mail is segmented into the specified size (64 - 6400KB).

Split large data into multiple E-Mails

The file attached to the E-mail is segmented into several pieces, turned into one Email in the specified size (64 - 512KB), and sent in several transmissions.

• Do not Split

The message is sent as one E-mail without being segmented.

• Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending E-Mail

Description Select "Specify" or "Do not specify" for the ETERNUS DX/AF name for HELO/EHLO announcement when sending mail.

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Specify" is selected, input the domain.

The domain of the HELO/EHLO Announcement must be specified in the mail protocol.

If "Do not specify" has been selected, E-mails are sent using the strings after the "@" of the sender mail addresses as domains.

If the mail server does not allow using the section after the "@" of the sender mail address as the domain, select "Specify" and input the appropriate domain.

• Specify

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Do not specify

1087

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Use S/MIME

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether or not to use S/MIME.

S/MIME is a standard relating to encryption of E-mails and electronic signatures. Using S/

MIME prevents E-mails from being sniffed, spoofed, and falsified. This item is available when one of the following conditions applies:

• "Do not Split" is selected for the data transmission method

• "Split" is selected for the data transmission method and "Split large data into multiple E-

Mails" is specified

• Use

• Not use

● Result Notification Information

• Administrator

Description Select "Notification" or "Not Notification" for your administrator of the setting confirmation result at the REMCS center.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Notification" for the "Administrator" or the "Connection check operator" and confirm the result.

• Notification

• Not Notification

• Connection check operator

Description Select "Notification (Standard E-Mail format)", "Notification (Simple E-Mail format for cell phone)" or "Not Notification" for the connection check operator of the setting confirmation result at the REMCS center.

Input condition/

Display contents

If notifying, input the "Connection check operator E-Mail Address".

Specify the "Connection check operator" if there is another person who needs to be notified of the setting confirmation result, other than the administrator.

• Notification (Standard E-Mail format)

Input the "Connection check operator E-Mail Address"

• Notification(Simple E-Mail format for cell phone)

Input the "Connection check operator E-Mail Address"

• Not Notification

• Connection check operator E-Mail Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If notifying the connection check operator of the setting confirmation result at the REMCS center, input the E-mail address.

Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

● Time Information

The timer parameter settings do not normally require modification.

If changing the default value, select the "Change following Timing Parameter items" checkbox.

1088

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

• SMTP Connection Timeout

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the timeout limit when using SMTP connection.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 600 sec.

• SMTP Response Timeout

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the timeout limit for SMTP response.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 3600 sec.

• SMTP Retry Count

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the retry number of SMTP.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 60

• SMTP Retry Interval

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the intervals for retrying SMTP.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 3600 sec.

• HTTP Timeout

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the timeout limit when using HTTP connection.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 3600 sec.

• HTTP Retry Count

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the retry number of HTTP.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 60

• HTTP Retry Interval

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the intervals for retrying HTTP.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 3600 sec.

• Queue Time before Sending E-Mails (only when POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the waiting time for sending mail.

• Numeric characters

• 1 - 3600 msec.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1089

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Update Customer Information

For details about this function, refer to "Update Customer Information" (page 211) .

● Information File

• Customer Information File

Description Import the "Customer Information File", which was created using the REMCS ESAT, to the ETER-

NUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Customer Information File".

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Customer Information File"

When importing customer information to the ETERNUS DX/AF all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the customer information file has been stored, and click the [Import] button.

■ Customer Information

● Detailed Settings

• Checkbox

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If the "Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the 'REMCS Center'." checkbox is selected, customer information saved on the

ETERNUS DX/AF is deleted after transmitting the information to the REMCS center.

"Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the 'REMCS Center'." checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Company Name (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the company name that owns the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Department/Division

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Address (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Building Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the department or division that owns the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 40 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Input the address of the company that owns the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Input the building name where the company that owns the ETERNUS DX/AF is located.

Up to 40 alphanumeric characters and symbols

1090

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Administrator Name (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the system administrator's name that manages the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 40 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Administrator E-Mail Address (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the E-mail address of the system administrator who manages the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Postal Code (Zip Code)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the postal code for the company that owns ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Phone Number (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the phone number for the company that owns the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 20 numeric characters and symbols (except space)

• FAX Number

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the FAX number for the company that owns the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 20 numeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Storage System Unique Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the nickname for the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Country of Installation (ISO3166 A2) (required) [Example] JP, US, DE, etc.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the country code for the country where the ETERNUS DX/AF is located.

• Two fixed letters

• Capital letters or "99"

● Installation Location

• Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the address where the ETERNUS DX/AF is located.

Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Building Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the building name where the ETERNUS DX/AF is located.

Up to 40 alphanumeric characters and symbols

1091

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Information filled by Field Engineers

• Installation Date

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the date when the ETERNUS DX/AF is installed.

YYYY-MM (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12))

• Field Engineer E-Mail Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the E-mail address for the field engineer who installed the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Customer Code

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the customer code.

Up to 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

Update Communication Environment Information

For details about this function, refer to "Update Communication Environment Information" (page 213)

● Information File

• Communication Environment Information File

Description Import the "Communication Environment Information File", which was created using the

REMCS ESAT, to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Communication Environment Information File".

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the "Communication Environment Information File"

When importing Remote Support settings to the ETERNUS DX/AF all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button.

■ Communication Environment Information

● Connection

• Connection Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the connection type when using the REMCS operation.

• Internet Connection

• Internet Connection (E-Mail only)

• P-P Connection

• P-P Connection (E-Mail only)

• P-P Connection (VPN Connection)

• P-P Connection (VPN Connection E-Mail only)

1092

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• LAN Port used for Remote Support

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the LAN port of the ETERNUS DX/AF that is used for REMCS operation.

• MNT

• RMT

● Service

• Scheduled Connection Time (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the time for scheduled REMCS connection.

• Numeric characters

• Hour (00 - 23)

• Minute (00 - 59)

• Scheduled Connection Period (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the term for scheduled REMCS connection.

• everyday

• Every Day (except Sunday)

• Every Day (except Saturday and Sunday)

• Once per Week

• Specify the Day of the Week

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Once per Week" is selected for "Scheduled Connection Period", select the day of the week to execute scheduled REMCS connection.

• Sunday

• Monday

• Tuesday

• Wednesday

• Thursday

• Friday

• Saturday

● Proxy Server

• Proxy Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address or the domain name of the proxy server that is used for REMCS operation.

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number of the proxy server.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 65535

1093

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• User Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the user name when using the proxy server.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Password

Description Input the password of the user name when using the proxy server.

The password entered is displayed with a series of symbols to hide the specified values.

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space) Input condition/

Display contents

● SMTP Server

• SMTP Server (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address or the domain name of the SMTP server that is used for REMCS operation.

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Port No. (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the port number used by the SMTP server.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 65535

• Sender E-Mail Address (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the sender E-Mail address of mails sent by the ETERNUS DX/AF for REMCS operations.

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• SMTP over SSL

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the SMTP over SSL method.

• None

• STARTTLS

• SSL/TLS

● SMTP Authentication Information

• Authentication Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the SMTP authentication type.

• No SMTP Authentication

• POP Before SMTP Authentication

• AUTH SMTP Authentication

1094

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Authentication Method

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "AUTH SMTP Authentication" is selected for "Authentication Type", specify the SMTP authentication method.

• Automatic

• CRAM-MD5

• PLAIN

• LOGIN

• POP Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When the "Authentication Type" is "POP Before SMTP Authentication", input the domain name or the IP address of the POP server that is used for SMTP Authentication.

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

Input the port number that is used when communicating with the POP server.

• Numeric characters

• 0 - 65535

• User Name

Description Input the user name that is used when communicating with the POP server.

This setting is enabled when selecting "POP Before SMTP Authentication" or "AUTH SMTP

Authentication" for the "SMTP Authentication Type".

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space) Input condition/

Display contents

• Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the password that is used when communicating with the POP server.

The password entered is displayed with a series of symbols to hide the specified values. This setting is enabled when selecting "POP Before SMTP Authentication" or "AUTH SMTP Authentication" for the "SMTP Authentication Type".

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

1095

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

● REMCS Center

• REMCS Center (required)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the REMCS center (in each country) where the ETERNUS DX/AF is connected.

• *Blank

• Fujitsu America

• Australia

• Brazil

• Hong-Kong

• China

• Indonesia

• Korea

• Malaysia

• Philippine

• Singapore

• Taiwan

• Thailand

• Vietnam

• Individual support in Hawaii

• OSC

• Direct Input Setting

If "Direct Input Setting" is displayed, the center cannot be changed to another location.

● Detailed Configuration Information

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

"Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

● Result Notification Information

"Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

● Time Information

"Setup Remote Support" (page 209)

1096

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setup Log Sending Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Log Sending Parameters" (page 215) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Log Sending Parameters" (page 1303) .

● Send Log based on Events

• Send Log when Errors Occur

Description To send logs automatically in the case of a failure, select the "Send" checkbox.

Input condition/

Display contents

The default state of "Send Log when Errors Occur" setting will be changed to "Send" if the

Remote Support setting using the [Setup Remote Support] function has been completed.

"Send" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Send Log Periodically

• Periodical Transmission of Log

Description To send log periodically, select the "Enable" checkbox.

Input condition/

Display contents

The default state of "Periodical Transmission of Log" will be changed to "Enable" if the Remote

Support setting using the [Setup Remote Support] function has been completed.

"Enable" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the time when sending logs periodically.

A time between "10:00" and "15:00" is set for the default setting. (*1)

*1: Different days and times are specified in the factory settings in order to disperse the load on the REMCS center.

• Numeric characters

• 00 - 23

Hour

• 00 - 59

Minute

• Undefined (10:00 - 15:00)

Different times are specified in the factory settings.

• Period

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the period when sending logs periodically.

• Once per Week

• everyday

1097

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Day of the Week

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the day of the week when sending logs periodically.

The day of the week can be specified only when "Once per Week" has been specified as the period when sending logs periodically. A day between "Monday" and "Friday" is set for the default setting. (*1)

*1: Different days and times are specified in the factory settings in order to disperse the load on the REMCS center.

• Sunday

• Monday

• Tuesday

• Wednesday

• Thursday

• Friday

• Saturday

• Undefined (any day from Monday to Friday)

Different days are specified in the factory settings.

● Manual Transmission

• Incident Number

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the incident number that is to be added to the log to be sent.

Up to 15 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except space)

• Include I/O Module log

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When exporting the I/O module logs, select "Yes". When not exporting, select "No".

• Yes

• No

• Time Range Specified

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to specify the time range to collect logs.

To specify the time to send log, select the "Specify" checkbox, and specify the start and end time.

If the time range has been specified, some of the logs just before and after the specified time range may also be collected.

"Specify" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

An error screen appears when "Specify" is selected for this item and the date specified for start time is earlier than the specified end time.

• Start Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Specify" has been selected for "Time Range Specified", specify the start time for collecting logs.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour

(00 - 23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

1098

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• End Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Specify" has been selected for "Time Range Specified", specify the end time for collecting logs.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss (YYYY: Year (AD), MM: Month (01 - 12), DD: Date (01 - 31), hh: Hour

(00 - 23), mm: Minute (00 - 59), ss: Second (00 - 59))

Setup AIS Connect Environment

For details about this function, refer to "Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 220) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup AIS Connect Environment" (page 1303) .

● AIS Connect Environment Setting

• AIS Connect

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable the AIS Connect function.

• Enable

• Disable

• Country of Installation (Country Code : Country Name)

Description Select the country name to which the ETERNUS DX/AF is shipped (where the storage system locates).

Input condition/

Display contents

Options for this item are displayed in "Country code : Country name" format. The country name is listed in English alphabetical order. "ISO 3166-1 numeric" is used as the country code.

"Country Code : Country Name"

• Use LAN Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the LAN port that is to be used for communication with the AIS Connect server.

• MNT

• RMT

• SSL Server Certification

Description To use SSL server certification for communication with the AIS Connect server, select "Use". To not use SSL server certification, select "Not use".

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Use" is selected, server certification is performed with the root certificate that is registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF for AIS Connect server communication. When there is no appropriate root certificate that authenticates server certification that is received from the AIS Connect server or when the root certificate has expired, communication with the AIS Connect server fails. The expiration date of the root certificate can be checked from the [Root Certificate]

screen. Refer to "Root Certificate" (page 672)

for details.

• Use

• Not use

1099

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Automatic Log Transmission

Description Select whether to enable or disable the automatic log transmission.

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Automatic Log Transmission" is enabled and notification of Error Severity Level or

Warning Level occurs, a log is collected and sent to the AIS Connect server in approximately five minutes. The maximum size of a log is 1.44MB. Note that I/O Module logs are not included.

If a send log request is already performed once log collection is complete, send log requests are not performed. If a communication error occurs and a connection to the AIS Connect server cannot be established, logs cannot be sent. A log that fails to be sent is not resent.

• Enable

• Disable

• Proxy Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv4 address or the FQDN of the proxy server.

Make sure to input "Proxy Server" and "Port No." together.

If a proxy server is not used, this item does not need to be set.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For FQDN

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("." (dot), ":" (colon), "-" (hyphen), and "_ "

(underscore) can be used)

• Port No.

Description Input the port number of the proxy server.

Make sure to input "Proxy Server" and "Port No." together.

If a proxy server is not used, this item does not need to be set.

0 - 65535 Input condition/

Display contents

• Connection Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the communication method for the proxy server.

• HTTP

Basic/NTLM HTTP authentication

• SOCKS

SOCKSv5 authentication

• User Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the user name for the proxy server authentication.

If a proxy server is not used, this item does not need to be set.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols

1100

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Change Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To change the proxy server authentication password, select the checkbox.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Authentication Password

Description Select the "Change Password" checkbox and then input the password for proxy server authentication.

Input condition/

Display contents

When inputting the password, "*" is displayed to hide the specified value.

If a proxy server is not used, this item does not need to be set.

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols

• Confirm Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the "Change Password" checkbox and then input the password for proxy server authentication again.

When inputting the password, "*" is displayed to hide the specified value.

If a proxy server is not used, this item does not need to be set.

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Setup Remote Session Permission

For details about this function, refer to "Setup Remote Session Permission" (page 222)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Setup Remote Session Permission" (page 1303)

● Remote Session Permission Setting

• Remote Session

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Permit" or "Forbid" a remote session from the AIS Connect server.

• Permit

• Forbid

• Remote Session Timeout

Description Select the timeout limit for remote session connection.

Input condition/

Display contents

When not setting the timeout limit, select "Unlimited".

When "Permit" is selected for "Remote Session", monitoring of the remote sessions starts. If the time exceeds the specified value without a remote session connection, remote session permission is automatically disabled and the set state changes to "Forbid". If a remote session connection is detected while monitoring is being performed, the timer is suspended during connection. After connection is complete, the timer is reset to "0" and monitoring starts again.

Selecting the timeout limit is only available when "Permit" is selected for "Remote Session".

• 1 - 24 hours

• Unlimited

1101

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Import Root Certificate

For details about this function, refer to "Import Root Certificate" (page 225)

● Root Certificate Setting

• Root certificate file

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the root certificate file.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the root certificate file

Firmware Management

Apply Controller Firmware

For details about this function, refer to "Apply Controller Firmware" (page 227) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Apply Controller Firmware" (page 1304)

● Controller Firmware Archive Settings

• Controller Firmware Archive

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the controller firmware archive.

• Latest Version

Select the latest controller firmware archive. This item is displayed only when the controller firmware archive newer than the currently active firmware exists in BUD.

• Set File

Select the controller firmware archive that is stored in the setting PC.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location of the archive.

The specified controller firmware archive is stored in the BUD.

● Schedule Settings

• Apply Date

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select which application method is used for the controller firmware archive.

• Apply Now

Start application of the controller firmware immediately.

• Set Date

Set the date and time to start application of the controller firmware.

YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm (YYYY: 2001 - 2037, MM: 01 - 12, DD: 01- 31, hh: 00 - 23, mm: 00 or

30)

• When "Set Date" is selected, the reservation may be automatically canceled if the storage system status before or at

the specified time does not allow the application to be performed. Refer to "Delete Controller Firmware Schedule"

(page 234)

for details.

• An error screen appears when "Set Date" is selected and a date that is earlier than the current date is entered in this item.

1102

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Apply Mode Check

• Apply Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to allow the application of a controller firmware that is older than the current one.

To allow the application of an older controller firmware, select the "Permit firmware downgrade" checkbox and then click the [Apply] button. This checkbox is only displayed when applying an older controller firmware.

"Permit firmware downgrade" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1103

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Component Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Component Management

This section provides information on the parameters of the following action for component management.

•

Add Drive Enclosure

•

Add Channel Adapter Port

Add Drive Enclosure

For details about this function, refer to "Add Drive Enclosure" (page 245)

● Target Drive Enclosure

• Type

Description Select the DE type that is to be added.

Input condition/

Display contents

When the DE is not a target to be added, select "-" (hyphen).

For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250, "2.5" 24DE" can be selected.

• 2.5"24DE

• 3.5"12DE

• 3.5"60DE

• "-" (hyphen)

Add Channel Adapter Port

For details about this function, refer to "Add Channel Adapter Port" (page 250) .

● Add Channel Adapter Port

• License Key

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the license key.

16 capital letters and numeric characters

1104

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volume Management

This section provides information on the parameters of the following actions for volume management.

•

Create Volume

•

Rename Volume

•

Expand Volume

•

Expand Thin Provisioning Volume

•

•

For details about this function, refer to "Create Volume" (page 257) .

•

Start RAID Migration

•

Modify Cache Parameters

•

Set ALUA

•

Set Volume QoS

•

Set Volume QoS Pattern

•

Set Snapshot

Create Volume

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Volume" (page 1305) .

● New Volume

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the volume name.

An existing volume name cannot be specified. Volume names starting with "$SYSVOL",

"$VVOL_META", or "$DEDUP" cannot be used.

When creating multiple volumes at the same time, the new volumes are named automatically.

Refer to

"Basic Size for each RAID Group" (page 1379)

for details.

• Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Capacity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the volume capacity and select the unit of capacity.

• For Standard volumes, WSVs, or TPVs

24 MB - 128 TB

• For SDPVs

1 GB - 2 TB

• For NAS

400GB - 128TB (When the NAS FS block size is "256KB" or "32KB")

400GB - 32TB (When the NAS FS block size is "8KB")

• MB/GB/TB

1105

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• An error screen appears if the free space in the RAID group is insufficient.

• If "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected when creating volumes manually, inputting the capacity is not required. The specified value and unit are not used.

• When using SnapOPC or SnapOPC+, create any of the following types of volumes.

SDV and SDPVs (the SDV is created with the minimum necessary capacity)

TPV

• The NAS user volume uses 300GB of the specified capacity as the system area. Take the system area in consideration and specify the capacity.

• When a NAS user volume is created, three system volumes ($SYSVOL1 - 3) are automatically created in the same TPP for each storage system. If free space for $SYSVOL 1 - 3 (17GB) is not available in the TPP, a NAS user volume cannot be created. If $SYSVOL1 - 3 have already been created in the ETERNUS DX, free space for creating new $SYSVOL1 - 3 is not required.

• The maximum logical capacity of Deduplication/Compression Volumes (or the total logical capacity of Deduplication/

Compression Volumes in a TPP) varies depending on the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume in the relevant

TPP. If the efficiency of the Deduplication/Compression function cannot be estimated, setting the maximum logical capacity of the Deduplication/Compression Volumes smaller than the logical capacity of the DEDUP_SYS Volume is recommended.

• The maximum capacity of NAS user volumes varies depending on the selected "NAS FS Block Size".

• When creating multiple volumes in a RAID group, the maximum number of volumes that can be created for the user capacity may be reduced. To use the entire user capacity, the volume size must be an exact multiple of the basic size

(stripe size). Refer to

for details.

• If all of the following conditions are satisfied, the capacity cannot be entered.

"Standard" is selected for "Type"

The "Enable" checkbox in the "Use External Drive" field is selected

• To create a volume that is larger than the largest free space, concatenate the free spaces in the RAID group to the

existing volume. These volumes cannot be created by only using this function. Refer to "Expand Volume" (page 285)

for details.

• When creating an SDV, 24 (MB) + "Capacity of source volume only SDV" x 0.001 (0.1%) is automatically secured in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Specifying a "Capacity" value is not required. "24MB" is the smallest volume capacity. "Capacity of source volume only SDV" x 0.001 (0.1%) is the capacity that is used for the controlling information area in the

SDV.

• The same input condition as the TPVs for SAN is applied for the Deduplication/Compression Volume capacity.

• Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

1106

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the volume type.

When the [Create Volume] function is executed from the RAID group list, "Standard", "Snap

Data Volume", or "Snap Data Pool Volume" is displayed. If the selected RAID group type is

"High Reliability (RAID6-FR)", only "Standard" volumes are displayed.

When the [Create Volume] function is executed from the Thin Provisioning Pool list, only "Thin

Provisioning Volume" is displayed.

When the Advanced Copy function license has been registered, "Snap Data Volume" is displayed.

When the Advanced Copy function license has been registered or when the ETERNUS DX/AF is being used in the Unified Storage environment, "Snap Data Pool Volume" is displayed.

"NAS Volume" is displayed only when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

• The ETERNUS DX is used in the Unified Storage environment.

• The logged in (current) user has the "NAS Management" policy.

• The maximum number of NAS volumes has not been created in the ETERNUS DX.

Note that a NAS user volume can be created when only the NAS backup volume exists in the storage system.

• Standard

• Wide Striping Volume

• Thin Provisioning Volume

• Snap Data Volume

• Snap Data Pool Volume

• NAS Volume

To create a volume in the External RAID Group, select "Standard".

• Capacity of source volume only SDV

Description Specify the copy source volume capacity and select the unit of capacity.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item can only be specified when the volume type is "Snap Data Volume".

• 24 MB - 128 TB

• MB/GB/TB

• Use External Drive

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To create a volume using an External Drive, select the "Enable" checkbox.

This checkbox can be selected or cleared only when "Standard" is specified for "Type".

If the "Enable" checkbox is selected, the External RAID Group List is displayed.

This item is displayed only if the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

"Enable" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

•

One External RAID Group consists of one External Drive. Refer to "Create External RAID Group" (page 549) for details.

• One External Volume is created in one External RAID Group. If multiple External RAID Groups are selected to create volumes, the number of External Volumes that are created is equal to the number of External RAID Groups.

1107

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Deduplication

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to use the volume as a Deduplication target volume.

This item is only displayed when the Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

This item can only be specified when "Thin Provisioning Volume" is selected for "Type".

For details about the Deduplication/Compression Volumes that are created according to this

item and about the TPPs where the volumes can be created, refer to "Volumes that are created depending on the selection of "Deduplication" and "Compression", and the Deduplication/

Compression setting for TPPs where the target volumes can be created" (page 1125) .

• Enable

Deduplication target Deduplication/Compression Volumes are created.

• Disable

Non-Deduplication target TPVs for SAN are created.

• Compression

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to use the volume as a Compression target volume.

This item is only displayed when the Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

This item can only be specified when "Thin Provisioning Volume" is selected for "Type".

For details about the Deduplication/Compression Volumes that are created according to this

item and about the TPPs where the volumes can be created, refer to "Volumes that are created depending on the selection of "Deduplication" and "Compression", and the Deduplication/

Compression setting for TPPs where the target volumes can be created" (page 1125) .

• Enable

Compression target Deduplication/Compression Volumes are created.

• Disable

Non-Compression target TPVs for SAN are created.

• Allocation

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the allocation method of the volume.

This item can only be specified when all the following conditions are met.

• "Type" is "Thin Provisioning Volume" or "NAS Volume"

• Both "Deduplication" and "Compression" are "Disable"

• Thin

Physical area is allocated to the target area of the volume when a write I/O is received.

• Thick

Physical area is allocated to the whole area of the volume when volumes are created.

• NAS FS Block Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the block size of the NAS file system (NAS user volume).

By selecting an appropriate "NAS FS Block Size" for the user data size (file size) to be created, the storage efficiency of the NAS user volume improves. This item is displayed only when "NAS

Volume" can be selected as the volume type.

• 256 KB

• 32 KB

• 8 KB

1108

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The maximum NAS user volume capacity varies depending on the selected "NAS FS Block Size". Refer to

"Maximum

NAS user volume capacity and the maximum file size of each "NAS FS Block Size"" (page 270) for details.

• If backing up the NAS user volumes, the NAS backup volumes are set with the same "NAS FS Block Size" as the NAS user volumes.

• If restoring the NAS backup volumes, the NAS user volumes are set with the same "NAS FS Block Size" as the NAS backup volumes.

• "NAS FS Block Size" cannot be changed after the NAS user volume is created. To change "NAS FS Block Size", delete the

NAS user volume and create it again.

• Multiple NAS user volumes with different "NAS FS Block Size" settings can exist in the same TPP.

• "NAS FS Block Size" for the NAS user volumes that are created with the controller firmware versions V10L2x and earlier is "256KB" (fixed).

• RAID Group / TPP Selection

Description Specify the selection method for the RAID group or the Thin Provisioning Pool.

Input condition/

Display contents

When the [Create Volume] function is executed from the RAID group list or the Thin Provisioning Pool list, only "Manual" is displayed.

• Automatic

The RAID group or Thin Provisioning Pool in which the volume is to be created is selected automatically.

• Manual

The RAID group or Thin Provisioning Pool in which the volume is to be created is selected manually.

For the conditions described below, "Manual" is automatically selected for this item. Note that "Automatic" cannot be selected.

• "Wide Striping Volume" is selected for "Type"

• "Standard" is selected for "Type" and the "Enable" checkbox in the "Use External Drive" field is selected

• Data Integrity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the volume protection method.

This item can only be specified when meeting all the following conditions.

• "Standard" is selected for "Type"

• The "Enable" checkbox in the "Use External Drive" field is cleared

• Default

Data is protected within the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• T10-DIF

Data is protected with a T10-DIF compatible method in the ETERNUS DX/AF and the host paths. This method is available only when the host interface is FC.

• The data protection method cannot be changed after the volume is created.

• "T10-DIF" is supported in Oracle Linux 6 and later.

1109

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Automatic Setting

• Drive Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the drive type.

The installed drive determines the selectable drive types that are displayed as options.

If "Enable" is selected for "Deduplication" or "Compression", the drive types of the TPPs with the same Deduplication/Compression setting are displayed.

If "Disable" is selected for "Deduplication" and "Compression", the drive types of all the TPPs that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

• Online

• Nearline

• SSD

• Online SED

• Nearline SED

• SSD SED

• When "Online" is selected, volumes are created in a RAID group that is configured with only "Online" type drives, or in a RAID group that is configured with both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives.

• When "Online SED" is selected, volumes are created in a RAID group that is configured with only "Online SED" type drives, or in a RAID group that is configured with both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives.

• When "SSD" is selected, volumes are created in a RAID group that is configured with SSDs regardless of the SSD type

(SSD-M/SSD-L/SSD).

• When "SSD SED" is selected, volumes are created in a RAID group that is configured with SSD SEDs regardless of the

SSD type (SSD-M SED/SSD-L SED).

• RAID Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the RAID level.

The specified volume type and drive type determine the selectable RAID levels that are displayed as options.

If "Enable" is selected for "Deduplication" or "Compression", the RAID levels of the TPPs with the same Deduplication/Compression setting are displayed.

If "Disable" is selected for "Deduplication" and "Compression", the RAID levels of all TPPs that are registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

• High Performance (RAID1+0)

• High Capacity (RAID5)

• High Reliability (RAID6)

• High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

• Reliability (RAID5+0)

• Mirroring (RAID1)

• Striping (RAID0)

1110

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Key Group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When creating volumes in the RAID group that configures the key group (*1), select "Enable".

When creating volumes in a RAID group that is not registered in the key group, select "Disable".

This setting is available if the volume type is "Standard", "SDV", or "SDPV", and if the drive type is "Online SED". Only the available setting (Enable or Disable) is displayed as an option. For other drive types, the field is blank.

*1: The key group combines all of the RAID groups that use the same SED authentication key.

• Enable

• Disable

• Number of Volumes

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the number of volumes to be created.

The following shows the maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model.

The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

The maximum numbers of volumes

1024

2048 (4096) (*1)

4096 (8192) (*1)

16384

65535

3072

12288

1536

*1: Values in parentheses indicate the maximum number of volumes when "Expand Volume Mode" is "Enable".

• If the volume is not "NAS Volume"

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

1 - 1024

For the other models

From 1 to "the maximum number of volumes" (*1)

• If the volume is "NAS Volumes"

1 (fixed)

*1: For details on the maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model, refer to

"The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model" (page

1111) .

Subsystem Parameters] function. If the setting is changed, reboot the ETERNUS DX.

If the ETERNUS DX is not rebooted, the increased number of volumes cannot be created. If the ETERNUS DX is not

rebooted, a system message appears in the [Overview] screen. Refer to "Overview" (page 24)

for details.

1111

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, up to 1024 volumes can be created at a time. Note that this limitation does not apply to other models.

• Only one NAS user volume can be created at a time.

• Start of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the suffix starting number to be added to the name of volumes that are to be created.

This item must be set if the default value "0" is changed.

If "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes", "Start of Suffix" cannot be selected.

This item is not displayed when "NAS Volume" is selected for "Type".

0 - 99999

• Digits of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the number of digits to be added to the name of volumes that are to be created.

This item must be set if the default value "1" is changed.

If "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes", "Digits of Suffix" cannot be selected.

This item is not displayed when "NAS Volume" is selected for "Type".

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

1 - 4

• For the other models

1 - 5

• Encryption by CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the encryption status of new volumes.

When the encryption mode is disabled, "On" cannot be selected. When the drive type is

"Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED", "On" cannot be selected.

The combination of the "Encryption by CM" setting and the "Drive Type" setting defines the

RAID group or TPP in which the volumes are created.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

• When the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED":

Volumes are created in the RAID group or the TPP configured by the relevant SED type.

• If other drive types are selected:

When "On" is specified

Volumes that are encrypted by CM are created. When creating a TPV, the volume is created in the TPP that is encrypted by CM.

When "Off" is specified

Volumes that are not encrypted are created. When creating a TPV, the volume is created in the TPP that is not encrypted.

• On

Volumes that are encrypted by using a CM are created or volumes are created in a TPP that was encrypted by a CM.

• Off

Volumes that are not encrypted by a CM are created or volumes are created in a TPP that has not been encrypted by a CM.

1112

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Manual Setting

• Use all Largest Free Space

Description Select the "Enable" checkbox to create the specified number of volumes with the largest available free space in the RAID group.

Input condition/

Display contents

This checkbox can be selected or cleared only when "Type" is "Standard" or "SDPV".

If "Enable" is selected, the specified number of volumes in the "Number of Volumes" field are created in the free space that is displayed as "Largest Free Space" for each RAID group.

"Enable" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• If volumes are created with a controller firmware V10L6x or earlier, and the "Enable" checkbox for this item is selected, Advanced Copy may fail.

• When the "Enable" checkbox is selected, the input capacity and the selected unit for "New Volume" become unavailable.

• An error screen appears for the following conditions when the "Enable" checkbox is selected for this item.

The capacity of the created volume is 23MB or less

The capacity of the created volume is larger than the maximum capacity

• The capacity for volumes that are to be created is not displayed. Use the [Volume] screen to check the volume capacity after volume creation is complete.

• If all of the following conditions are satisfied, this item cannot be set.

"Standard" is selected for "Type"

The "Enable" checkbox in the "Use External Drive" field is selected

• Start of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the suffix starting number to be added to the name of volumes that are to be created.

"Start of Suffix" cannot be selected in the following conditions.

• "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes"

• "Number of Volumes" is fixed to "1" (number of volumes cannot be specified)

• The number of selected checkboxes for the External RAID Group is "0" or "1"

This item is not displayed when "NAS Volume" is selected for "Type".

0 - 99999

1113

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Digits of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the number of digits to be added to the name of volumes that are to be created.

"Digits of Suffix" cannot be selected in the following conditions.

• "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes"

• "Number of Volumes" is fixed to "1" (number of volumes cannot be specified)

• The number of selected checkboxes for the External RAID Group is "0" or "1"

This item is not displayed when "NAS Volume" is selected for "Type".

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

1 - 4

• For the other models

1 - 5

• Volume No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When specifying the volume number for a new volume, select the "Set Value" checkbox and input the volume number.

• "Set Value" checkbox

Selected

Cleared

• Volume No.

Numeric characters (decimal)

The following volume numbers can be used for each model:

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

0 - 1023

For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

0 - 2047 (0 - 4095) (*1)

For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 4095 (0 - 8191) (*1)

For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

0 - 16383

For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

0 - 16383

For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3 and the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

0 - 65534

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

0 - 3071

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

0 - 12287

ETERNUS DX200F

0 - 1535

*1: Values in parentheses indicate the available Volume No. when "Expand Volume

Mode" is "Enable".

An existing volume number cannot be specified.

1114

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Encryption by CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the encryption status of new volumes.

When the encryption mode is disabled, "On" cannot be selected.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

• On

Volumes that are encrypted by a CM are created.

• Off

Volumes that are not encrypted by a CM are created.

• When creating volumes (specifying a number greater than or equal to 1 for "Number of Volumes") for a RAID group with "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED" as the drive type, select "Off" for this item.

• If all of the following conditions are satisfied, this item cannot be selected.

"Standard" is selected for "Type"

The "Enable" checkbox in the "Use External Drive" field is selected

• Number of Volumes

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the number of volumes to be created.

• When creating "Standard", "SDV", or "SDPV" type volumes

Specify the number of volumes to be created in each RAID group.

Click the [Recalculation of Max Count] button to display the maximum number of volumes that can be created in each RAID group with the specified capacity. When the volume capacity is not specified (including when "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected), the maximum number of volumes that can be created for each RAID group is displayed.

When "Encryption by CM" is "On", volumes cannot be created in a RAID group with "Online

SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED" for the drive type.

• When creating "TPV" type volumes

Specify the number of volumes to be created in each TPP.

If "Enable" is selected for "Deduplication" or "Compression", the number of volumes can only be specified for TPPs with the same Deduplication/Compression setting.

• For Standard volumes, SDVs, or SDPVs

1 - 128

• For TPVs

From 1 to "the maximum number of volumes"

For details on the maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model, refer to

"The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model" (page 1111)

• When "Volume No." is specified, only one volume can be created at a time. Input "1" for "Number of Volumes".

• This item is not displayed when "NAS Volume" is selected for "Type". Only one NAS user volume can be created at a time.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the total number of the volumes that can be created at a time is 1024. Note that this limitation does not apply to other models.

1115

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Checkbox to select an External RAID Group

Description Select the checkbox for the External RAID Group for creating volumes.

One External Volume is created in one External RAID Group. If multiple External RAID Groups are selected to create volumes, the number of External Volumes that are created is equal to the number of External RAID Groups. Select the checkbox to the left of "RAID Group Name" to select all External RAID Groups.

The maximum number of External Volumes that can be created for each model

Input condition/

Display contents

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

The maximum numbers of

External Volumes

512

2048

4096

8192

16384

3072

8192

1536

External RAID Groups in which an External Volume has already been created are not displayed in the External RAID Group list.

● Volume Information

• Use all Largest Free Space

Description Select the "Enable" checkbox to create the specified number of WSVs with the largest available free space in the selected RAID group.

Input condition/

Display contents

WSVs are created by concatenating spaces with the same capacity in multiple RAID groups. If

"Enable" is selected, the specified number of WSVs in the "Number of Volumes" field are created using the smallest "Largest Free Space" value in the concatenated RAID groups.

"Enable" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1116

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• If volumes are created with a controller firmware V10L6x or earlier, and the "Enable" checkbox for this item is selected, Advanced Copy may fail.

• When "Enable" is selected, the capacity and the unit that are specified for "New Volume" are not available.

• An error screen appears for the following conditions when the "Enable" checkbox is selected for this item.

The capacity of the created volume is 23MB or less

The capacity of the created volume is larger than the maximum capacity

• The capacity for WSVs that are to be created is not displayed. Use the [Volume] screen to check the volume capacity after volume creation is complete.

• Number of Volumes

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the number of volumes to be created.

Note that "1" is displayed when "Manual" is selected for "Concatenation Order". In this case, the number of volumes cannot be specified.

For details on the maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model, refer to

"The maximum number of volumes that can be created for each model" (page 1111)

1 - 128

When "Volume No." is specified, only one volume can be created at a time. Input "1" for "Number of Volumes".

• Start of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the suffix starting number to be added to the name of volumes that are to be created.

This item must be set if the default value "0" is changed.

If "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes", "Start of Suffix" cannot be selected.

This item is displayed when "Automatic" is selected for "Concatenation Order".

0 - 99999

• Digits of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the number of digits to be added to the name of volumes that are to be created.

This item must be set if the default value "1" is changed.

If "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes", "Digits of Suffix" cannot be selected.

This item is displayed when "Automatic" is selected for "Concatenation Order".

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

1 - 4

• For the other models

1 - 5

• Volume No.

Refer to "Volume No." (page 1114)

"Manual Setting" for details.

1117

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Wide Stripe Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Wide Stripe Size for the volumes.

"Wide Stripe Size" is the size of the WSV Unit that is allocated to each RAID group in series. It is not necessary to change the default setting (Normal) for normal use.

• Normal

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID level (*1). The maximum size is 16MB or smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member drives, and Stripe Depth.

Select "Normal" to improve random write access performance.

• Small

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID level. The maximum size is 2MB or smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member drives, and Stripe Depth.

Note that because the segment size of the volume is small and many host accesses among multiple RAID groups occur, the performance may be reduced according to the amount of host I/O.

*1: The basic size (stripe size) when creating a volume. Refer to

"Basic Size for each RAID

Group" (page 1379) for details.

• If the basic size of the RAID group is 2MB or more, the basic size is specified for Wide Stripe Size even when "Small" is selected.

• This function cannot be used to change the "Wide Stripe Size" setting after WSVs are created. To change the "Wide

Stripe Size" value, use the [Start RAID Migration] function. Refer to "Start RAID Migration" (page 307) for details.

• Concatenation Order

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the concatenation order of RAID groups.

It is not necessary to change the default setting (Automatic) for normal use.

• Automatic

The concatenation order of RAID groups is specified automatically.

If multiple WSVs are already registered, the next available RAID group that enables the

Controlling CM allocation to be distributed evenly is selected as [1] for the concatenation order. If multiple RAID groups satisfy this condition, the RAID group with the smallest RAID group number is selected as [1] in the concatenation order. RAID groups are concatenated starting from [1] (first) in ascending order. The last RAID group is concatenated to the first

RAID group.

Volumes that belong to the RAID group that is first in the concatenation order are called

"representative volumes".

• Manual

The concatenation order of the RAID groups is specified manually.

• Encryption by CM

Refer to "Encryption by CM" (page 1115) in

"Manual Setting" for details.

1118

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Select RAID Group Information

• Drive Type

Description Select the type of drive that configures a RAID group.

Input condition/

Display contents

The installed drive determines the selectable drive types that are displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

• Online

• Nearline

• SSD

• Online/Nearline

• Online SED

• Nearline SED

• SSD SED

• Online SED/Nearline SED

• When "Online" is selected, a RAID group that is configured with only "Online" type drives, or a RAID group that is configured with both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives is specified.

• When "Online SED" is selected, a RAID group that is configured with only "Online SED" type drives, or a RAID group that is configured with both "Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives is specified.

• When "SSD" is selected, the RAID groups that are configured with SSDs are specified regardless of the SSD type (SSD-

M/SSD-L/SSD).

• When "Online/Nearline" is selected, a RAID group that is configured with only "Online" type drives, a RAID group that is configured with only "Nearline" type drives, or a RAID group that is configured with both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives is specified.

• When "Online SED/Nearline SED" is selected, a RAID group that is configured with only "Online SED" type drives, a

RAID group that is configured with only "Nearline SED" type drives, or a RAID group that is configured with both

"Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives is specified.

• RAID Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the RAID level.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

• High Performance (RAID1+0)

• High Capacity (RAID5)

• High Reliability (RAID6)

• Reliability (RAID5+0)

• Mirroring (RAID1)

• Striping (RAID0)

• Number of Member Drives

Description Select the number of member drives in the RAID group.

The selectable number of member drives, which is determined by the specified RAID level, is displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

1119

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• For High Performance (RAID1+0)

4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

• For High Capacity (RAID5)

3 - 16

• For High Reliability (RAID6)

5 - 16

• For Reliability (RAID5+0)

6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

• For Mirroring (RAID1)

• For Striping (RAID0)

2 - 16

• Stripe Depth

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Stripe Depth of the RAID group.

The selectable Stripe Depth varies depending on the specified RAID level. Refer to

"Available

Stripe Depth value (for RAID group)" (page 1231) for details.

If "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected as the RAID level, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

• 64 KB

• 128 KB

• 256 KB

• 512 KB

• 1024 KB

• "-" (hyphen)

● Select RAID Groups

• Checkbox to select RAID groups

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox for the RAID group to be selected.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Automatic"

Setting items Standard Block-TPV NAS-TPV

New Volume Name

Capacity

Type

Capacity of source volume only SDV

Deduplication (*1)

Compression (*1)

Allocation (*2)

NAS FS Block Size

RAID Group / TPP

Selection

Data Integrity

✓

–

Automatic

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

Dedup-

TPV

✓

–

✓

–

SDV

✓

–

✓

–

– –

SDPV

✓

–

1120

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setting items Standard Block-TPV NAS-TPV Dedup-

TPV

SDV SDPV

Automatic

Setting

Drive Type

RAID Level

Key Group (*3)

Number of Volumes

Start of Suffix (*4)

Digits of Suffix (*4)

✓

–

✓

–

"1" (fixed)

–

✓

–

✓

Encryption by CM (*5)

✓ : Required settings

Blank: Settings that are not required

-: N/A

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

*1: This item is only displayed when Deduplication/Compression is enabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

*2: This item is only available when both "Deduplication" and "Compression" are "Disable".

*3: This item is available if the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED".

*4: This item cannot be selected if "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes".

*5: "Off" (fixed) when the encryption mode is disabled or when the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED".

✓

Setting items for each volume type when selecting "Manual"

• Setting items for normal use

Setting items

New Volume Name

Capacity

Type

Capacity of source

Standar d

✓

External -

Standard

(*1)

✓

–

✓

Block-

TPV

✓

– – –

SDV

Use External

Drive (*3)

Deduplication

(*4)

Compression (*4)

Allocation (*5)

NAS FS Block Size

RAID Group /

TPP Selection

Data Integrity

–

Manual

✓

–

✓

–

Manual

–

NAS-

TPV

✓

–

✓

–

Dedup

-TPV

✓

–

✓

–

SDV

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

SDPV

–

✓

–

WSV

(*2)

✓

–

1121

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setting items Standar d

External -

Standard

(*1)

Block-

TPV

NAS-

TPV

Dedup

-TPV

SDV SDPV WSV

(*2)

Manual

Setting or

Manual

Setting

(Volume

Information)

Use all Largest

Free Space

Volume No.

Start of Suffix

(*6)

Digits of Suffix

(*6)

Encryption by CM

(*7)

Number of

Volumes

(RAID group)

Number of

Volumes (TPP)

(*8)

Number of

Volumes (WSV)

Checkbox to select an External

RAID Group

Drive Type

RAID Level

Number of

Member Drives

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

Manual

Setting

(Select RAID

Group

Information)

–

✓

✓ : Required settings

Blank: Settings that are not required

-: N/A

*1: External Volumes that are created in the External RAID Groups. It is referred to as "External-Standard" in this section.

*2: The following items are advanced settings. It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

• "Wide Stripe Size" and "Concatenation Order" under the "Manual Setting (Volume Information)" field.

• "Stripe Depth" under the "Manual Setting (Select RAID Group Information)" field.

*3: This item is only displayed when the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

*4: This item is only displayed when Deduplication/Compression is enabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

*5: This item is only available when both "Deduplication" and "Compression" are "Disable".

*6: This item cannot be selected in the following conditions.

• For "External-Standard" type volumes

The number of selected checkboxes is "0" or "1" for the External RAID Group

• For the other volumes

If "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes"

*7: "Off" (fixed) when the encryption mode is disabled or when the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED"

*8: Select a creation destination TPP for NAS-TPVs. The number of volumes cannot be specified.

1122

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Setting items when "Volume No." is specified

Setting items

New Volume Name

Capacity

Type

Capacity of source volume

only SDV

Standard External -

Standard

(*1)

✓

–

✓

– –

Block-

TPV

✓

–

NAS-

TPV

✓

–

Dedup

-TPV

✓

–

SDV

✓

–

✓

SDPV

✓

–

WSV

(*2)

✓

–

Manual

Setting or

Manual

Setting

(Volume

Information)

Use External

Drive (*3)

Deduplication

(*4)

Compression

(*4)

Allocation (*5)

NAS FS Block Size

RAID Group / TPP

Selection

Data Integrity

Use all Largest

Free Space

Volume No.

Start of Suffix

(*6)

Digits of Suffix

(*6)

Encryption by CM

(*7)

Number of

Volumes (RAID group)

–

Manual

✓

–

✓

"1"

(fixed)

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

Manual

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

✓

"1"

(fixed)

–

✓

–

✓

"1"

(fixed)

–

✓

–

✓

–

Number of

Volumes (TPP)

(*8)

Number of

Volumes (WSV)

Checkbox to select an

External RAID

Group (*9)

Drive Type

–

Select one checkbox.

"1"

(fixed)

–

"1"

(fixed)

–

"1"

(fixed)

–

Manual

Setting

(Select RAID

Group

Information)

RAID Level

Number of

Member Drives

–

✓

✓ : Required settings

Blank: Settings that are not required

-: N/A

*1: External Volumes that are created in the External RAID Groups. It is referred to as "External-Standard" in this section.

*2: The following items are advanced settings. It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

• "Wide Stripe Size" and "Concatenation Order" under the "Manual Setting (Volume Information)" field.

• "Stripe Depth" under the "Manual Setting (Select RAID Group Information)" field.

1123

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

*3: This item is only displayed when the Non-disruptive Storage Migration License has been registered.

*4: This item is only displayed when Deduplication/Compression is enabled in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

*5: This item is only available when both "Deduplication" and "Compression" are "Disable".

*6: This item cannot be selected in the following conditions.

• For "External-Standard" type volumes

The number of selected checkboxes is "0" or "1" for the External RAID Group

• For the other volumes

If "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of Volumes"

*7: "Off" (fixed) when the encryption mode is disabled or when the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED"

*8: Select a creation destination TPP for NAS-TPVs. The number of volumes cannot be specified.

*9: To specify "Volume No.", select one checkbox for External RAID Group.

• Setting items when "Use all Largest Free Space" is specified

Setting items

New Volume Name

Capacity

Type

Capacity of source

Standard

✓

–

✓

SDPV

✓

–

✓

WSV (*1)

✓

–

✓

Remarks

– – –

Manual

Setting or

Manual

Setting

(Volume

Information)

SDV

Allocation

RAID Group / TPP

Selection

Data Integrity

Use all Largest

Free Space

Volume No.

Start of Suffix

Digits of Suffix

Encryption by CM

–

Manual

✓

–

✓

–

✓

If "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of

Volumes", "Start of Suffix" cannot be selected.

If "0" or "1" is specified for "Number of

Volumes", "Digits of Suffix" cannot be selected.

"Off" (fixed) when the encryption mode is disabled or when the drive type is "Online

SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED"

Number of

Volumes (RAID group)

Number of

Volumes (TPP)

Number of

Volumes (WSV)

✓

–

✓

–

✓

Manual

Setting

(Select RAID

Group

Information)

Drive Type

RAID Level

Number of

Member Drives

–

✓

✓ : Required settings

Blank: Settings that are not required

-: N/A

*1: The following items are advanced settings. It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

• "Wide Stripe Size" and "Concatenation Order" under the "Manual Setting (Volume Information)" field.

• "Stripe Depth" under the "Manual Setting (Select RAID Group Information)" field.

1124

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volumes that are created depending on the selection of "Deduplication" and "Compression", and the

Deduplication/Compression setting for TPPs where the target volumes can be created

• Volumes that are to be created

Condition

Deduplication Compression

Enable Enable

Volumes that are to be created

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Deduplication/Compression Volumes where both Deduplication and Compression are enabled

Deduplication/Compression Volumes where only Deduplication is enabled

Deduplication/Compression Volumes where only Compression is enabled

TPVs for SAN where both Deduplication and Compression are disabled

• Deduplication/Compression setting for TPPs where the volumes can be created

Condition

Deduplication Compression

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Available: Volumes can be created

N/A: Volumes cannot be created

Only

Deduplication/Compression setting for the destination TPP

Deduplication is enabled

Only Compression is enabled

Both

Deduplication and

Compression are enabled

Both

Deduplication and

Compression are disabled

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

Rename Volume

For details about this function, refer to "Rename Volume" (page 281)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Rename Volume" (page 1306) .

● Rename Volume

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a new volume name.

When one volume is selected, an existing volume name cannot be used. Volume names starting with "$SYSVOL", "$VVOL_META", or "$DEDUP" cannot be used.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Start of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the suffix starting number to be added to the new volume name.

When changing multiple volume names, the suffix number is added to the volume names with consecutive numbers in ascending order starting with the selected suffix number. Refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Expand Volume" (page 285)

for details. When changing only one volume name, "Start of Suffix" is not displayed.

0 - 99999

1125

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Digits of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the number of digits to be added to the new volume name.

When changing only one volume name, "Digits of Suffix" is not displayed.

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F

1 - 4

• For the other models

1 - 5

Expand Volume

● Capacity

• Capacity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the capacity that is to be concatenated and select the units of capacity (MB/GB/TB).

• 1GB - The "Largest Free Space" of the relevant RAID group

• Numeric characters

• MB/GB/TB

If the same capacity is entered in the same format (digits and units (GB/TB)) as a RAID group's "Largest Free Space", a capacity corrected to use all of the RAID group's largest free space is added. To add the capacity without adjustments, input the capacity in units of MB.

Refer to "Note" of this setting for details.

• In the "Largest Free Space" field for the RAID group, the largest free space that is managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed after rounding off to two decimal places.

For example, if "10.00GB" is displayed for "Largest Free Space", the actual largest free space managed in the ETERNUS

DX/AF may be between "9.995GB" and "10.004GB". The ETERNUS DX/AF replaces (adjusts) the value entered by the user to the actual largest free space value managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF. This adjustment enables the use of the largest free space with minimal waste.

However, if the value is entered in a different format (unit or digits) for the "Largest Free Space", the capacity is not adjusted. Depending on the largest free space managed on the ETERNUS DX/AF, there may be situations when adding a specified capacity may not be possible.

[Example 1] If the "Largest Free Space" is "10.00GB" and the largest free space managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is

"9.995GB", the following situations occur.

When entering "10.00GB" for the capacity, "9.995GB" is added.

When entering "10.000GB" or "10240MB" for the capacity, an input error occurs.

[Example 2] If the "Largest Free Space" is "10.00GB" and the largest free space managed in the ETERNUS DX/AF is

"10.004GB", the following situations occur.

When entering "10.00GB" for the capacity, "10.004GB" is added.

When entering "10240MB" for the capacity, "10240MB (10.00GB)" is added.

• Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

1126

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Select RAID Groups

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the RAID group to obtain free space from.

RAID group

When the drive type is "Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED", selecting a RAID group with the same key group setting

(Enabled Key Group/Disabled Key Group) as the RAID group to which the concatenation source volume belongs is recommended.

Expand Thin Provisioning Volume

For details about this function, refer to "Expand Thin Provisioning Volume" (page 292)

● Volume Setting

• Volume Capacity after expand

Description Input the TPV capacity after expansion and select the units of capacity (MB/GB/TB).

Input condition/

Display contents

• For ODX Buffer volumes

1025MB - 1TB

• For DEDUP_SYS Volumes

8388609MB - 128TB

• For NAS user volume where the NAS FS version is "2"

409601MB - 128TB

• For NAS user volume where the NAS FS version is "3"

409601MB - 16TB (when the NAS FS block size is "32KB")

409601MB - 4TB (when the NAS FS block size is "8KB")

• For NAS user volume where the NAS FS version is "4"

409601MB - 128TB (when the NAS FS block size is "256KB" or "32KB")

409601MB - 32TB (when the NAS FS block size is "8KB")

• For other volumes

25MB - 128TB

• MB/GB/TB

• Current TPV capacity < TPV capacity after expansion

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

Modify Thin Provisioning Volume Threshold

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Thin Provisioning Volume Threshold" (page 295) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Modify Thin Provisioning Volume Threshold" (page

1306)

1127

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Threshold Setting

• New Threshold

Description Set a new threshold (%) for the TPV.

If the TPV usage ratio exceeds the threshold, a Host Sense Key Code Qualifier is notified.

1 - 100% Input condition/

Display contents

Set Allocation

For details about this function, refer to "Set Allocation" (page 301)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Allocation" (page 1306) .

● Allocation Settings

• Allocation

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the allocation method.

• Thin

• Thick

Regardless of the allocation method (Thin or Thick) of the selected volume, "Thin" is selected when this function starts.

Start RAID Migration

For details about this function, refer to "Start RAID Migration" (page 307) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Start RAID Migration" (page 1307)

● Setting Volume

• Migration Destination

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the migration destination of the volume.

• RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool

• Wide Striping Volume

• In the following conditions, select "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool" for "Migration Destination".

An ODX Buffer volume is selected as a migration source volume.

A NAS user volume, a NAS backup volume, or a NAS system volume is selected as a migration source volume

(only "Thin Provisioning Pool" can be selected as the migration destination.)

A migration source FTV usage is "System"

(only "Flexible Tier Pool" can be selected as the migration destination.)

• For the volume used by the Storage Cluster function, the type (Standard/WSV/TPV/FTV) cannot be changed. Select the migration destination to match the migration source volume type.

1128

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Volume Capacity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

The capacity of the migration source volume is displayed as the initial state.

When expanding the volume capacity after migration, enter the volume capacity and select the unit (MB/GB/TB) of capacity.

When this function starts, the capacity of the migration source volume is displayed.

When the migration destination volume type is "Standard", "TPV", or "FTV"

Migration source volume capacity  Volume capacity  The maximum free space in the migration destination

When the migration destination volume is "WSV"

Migration source volume capacity  Volume capacity

• Numeric characters

• MB/GB/TB

• The ODX Buffer volume capacity can be expanded up to 1TB.

• For migrations where the migration source volume is an External Volume (or a volume whose "Usage" is "Migration"), setting the same capacity as the migration source volume for the migration destination volume is recommended.

• Volume capacity cannot be expanded in the following conditions:

"TPV" or "FTV" is selected as the migration source volume

The migration source volume is used for the Storage Cluster function

"Thin Provisioning Pool" or "Flexible Tier Pool" is selected as the migration destination

• An error screen appears if this item is blank.

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

• FTSP Priority

Description Select either "Automatic" or the FTSP number that belongs to the migration destination FTRP for the FTSP number to which priority is given.

When FTRP is not selected from the migration destination list, only "Automatic" is displayed as the available option. If FTRP is specified, "Automatic" and the FTSP numbers that belong to the migration destination FTRP are displayed. If "FTSP number" is selected and the specified

FTRP is changed, the "FTSP Priority" setting returns to the default value ("Automatic").

"FTSP Priority" indicates the FTSP number to which priority is given for allocating physical capacity as the volume migration destination when multiple FTSPs exist in the migration destination FTRP.

1129

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• When FTRP is not selected from the Select Migration Destination list

Automatic

• When FTRP is selected from the Select Migration Destination list

Automatic

The FTSP number that belongs to the migration destination FTRP

• When "Automatic" is selected, the physical area is allocated to an FTSP for which the drive type is "Online". If no free space exists in "Online" type disks and migration is not available, the physical area is allocated to an FTSP for which the drive type is "Nearline". If "Nearline" is also not available for migration, the physical area is allocated to an FTSP for which the drive type is "SSD". Migration to an FTRP cannot be performed if "SSD" is not available for migration.

"Online SED", "Nearline SED", and "SSD SED" type FTSPs are treated as follows.

"Online SED" type FTSPs are used as "Online" type FTSPs

"Nearline SED" type FTSPs are used as "Nearline" type FTSPs

"SSD SED" type FTSPs are used as "SSD" type FTSPs

• When "FTSP number" is selected, the physical area is allocated to the selected FTSP. If there is no free space in the selected FTSP and migration is not available, the migration destination FTSP number is determined as having the same priority ("Online"  "Nearline"  "SSD") as when "Automatic" is selected.

• The drive type for FTSPs can be checked from the [Flexible Tier Pool Detail] screen (Flexible Tier Sub Pool). Refer to

"Flexible Tier Pool Detail (Flexible Tier Sub Pool)" (page 940) for details.

• Encryption

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the encryption status of the volume after migration.

When this function starts, the encryption status of the migration source volume is displayed.

There are no limitations for the encryption status of migration source and destination volumes. Note that when migrating an encrypted volume to an unencrypted volume, the user must have the "Security Setting" policy. Refer to

"Combinations of encryption conditions for which migration is available" (page 310)

for details.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

• None

• by CM

• use SED (Disabled Key Group)

• use SED (Enabled Key Group)

• When "use SED (Disabled Key Group)" or "use SED (Enabled Key Group)" is specified for "Encryption", select "Online

SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED" for the migration destination.

• When "None" or "by CM" is specified for "Encryption", select "Online", "Nearline", or "SSD" for the migration destination.

• When the encryption mode is disabled, "by CM" cannot be selected.

1130

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

• Deduplication

Description

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" Deduplication for the volume after the migration.

When this function starts, information that indicates whether the migration source volume is a target for Deduplication is displayed.

This item is displayed only when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

• The Deduplication/Compression function of the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled

• The migration source volume is not a Veeam Snapshot Volume (when Veeam copy sessions exist)

• The migration source volume is not a copy source volume of the Veeam copy session

(SnapOPC+) (when Veeam copy sessions exist)

This item is only available when "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool" is selected for "Migration Destination". The selectable migration destination changes depending on whether this setting is enabled or disabled. Refer to

"Combinations of the Deduplication and Compression settings for which migration is available" (page 309) for details.

• Enable

Use the migration destination volume as a Deduplication target Deduplication/Compression Volume

• Disable

Use the migration destination volume as a non-Deduplication target volume

• Compression

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" Compression for the volume after the migration.

When this function starts, information that indicates whether the migration source volume is a target for Compression is displayed.

This item is displayed only when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

• The Deduplication/Compression function of the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled

• The migration source volume is not a Veeam Snapshot Volume (when Veeam copy sessions exist)

• The migration source volume is not a copy source volume of the Veeam copy session

(SnapOPC+) (when Veeam copy sessions exist)

"Combinations of the Deduplication and Compression settings for which migration is available" (page 309) for details.

• Enable

Use the migration destination volume as a Compression target Deduplication/Compression Volume

• Disable

Use the migration destination volume as a non-Compression target volume

• Allocation

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the allocation method of the volume after migration.

This item can only be specified when all the following conditions are met.

• Both "Deduplication" and "Compression" are "Disable"

• "Migration Destination" is "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool"

• "Select Migration Destination" is "Thin Provisioning Pool" or "Flexible Tier Pool"

• Thin

Physical area is allocated to the target area of the volume when a write I/O is received.

• Thick

Physical area is allocated to the whole area of the volume when volumes are created.

1131

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

If the migration source FTV usage is "System", this item is fixed to "Thick".

• Data Sync after Migration

Description Select how to stop the data synchronization between the migration source volume and the migration destination volume.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is displayed only if the External Volume (or a volume whose "Usage" is "Migration") is selected as the migration source volume.

• Automatic Stop

The data synchronization is automatically stopped when the migration is completed.

The migration source External Volume is automatically deleted. Select "Automatic Stop" if the data synchronization between the migration source and migration destination volumes can be stopped every time a data migration of the Non-disruptive Storage Migration is completed.

• Manual Stop

The data synchronization is manually stopped when the migration is completed.

If the data must be synchronized between the migration source and migration destination volumes until all data migrations of the Non-disruptive Storage Migration are completed, select "Manual Stop".

Up to 32 RAID migration processes can be performed simultaneously. If "Manual Stop" is selected, the total number of

External Volumes to be migrated must be 32 or less.

If "Manual Stop" is selected, the migration source volume is not deleted even if the migration is completed. Migration source volumes and migration destination volumes are displayed in the volume list.

Item

No.

Name

Type

Usage

Migration source volume

Standard

Migration

Migration destination volume

Migration source volume number Temporary volume number (smallest unused number)

Migration source volume name Temporary volume name (volume names that start with "RMIG")

Standard

Block

If the data synchronization is stopped after all migrations are completed, the migration source External Volume is deleted. At that time, the volume number and the volume name of the migration destination is changed to the volume number and volume name of the migration source. Refer to

"Stop External Volume Data Synchronization" (page 322) for

details.

• Start Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity after migration

Description Select "Enable" or "Disable" for the capacity optimization of source volumes after migration is complete.

When Start Optimizing TPV/FTV Capacity after migration is enabled, the destination volume will be reserved for capacity optimization.

"Capacity optimization" is a function that releases the physical area when data in the block

(*1) that is allocated to a TPV or an FTV is filled with zeros.

*1: Volume allocation unit

This item can only be specified when all the following conditions are met.

• Both "Deduplication" and "Compression" are "Disable"

• "Allocation" is "Thin"

• "Migration Destination" is "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool"

• "Select Migration Destination" is "Thin Provisioning Pool" or "Flexible Tier Pool"

1132

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• Enable

• Disable

• Do not select "Enable" if the migration source is a NAS user volume, a NAS backup volume, or a NAS system volume.

• An error screen appears for the following conditions when "Enable" is selected for this item.

Capacity optimization is being performed in the migration source volume

The migration source volume is an ODX Buffer volume

• Data Integrity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the data protection method of the volume after migration.

When this function starts, the data protection method of the migration source volume is displayed.

This item can only be specified when all the following conditions are met.

• The selected migration source volume is a volume other than the External Volume (or a volume whose "Usage" is not "Migration")

• Both "Deduplication" and "Compression" are "Disable"

• "Migration Destination" is "RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool"

• "Select Migration Destination" is "RAID Group"

If this item is disabled, "Default" is set for the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Default

Data is protected within the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• T10-DIF

Data is protected with a T10-DIF compatible method in the ETERNUS DX/AF and the host paths. This method is available only when the host interface is FC.

• When "T10-DIF" is selected for "Data Integrity", a migration to WSV, TPV, or FTV cannot be performed.

• "T10-DIF" is supported in Oracle Linux 6 and later.

● Select Migration Destination

• Select Migration Destination

Description Specify the destination RAID group, the TPP, or the FTRP.

Input condition/

Display contents

The selectable RAID groups, TPPs, or FTRPs for the migration destination are displayed. The

RAID groups, TPPs, or FTRPs that are displayed depend on the volume capacity and encryption status. The following are not displayed as a migration destination

• RAID groups, TPPs (*1), or FTRPs where the migration source volume belongs

• External RAID Groups

*1: If the migration source or migration destination is a "Deduplication/Compression Volume", there are cases when the same TPP as the migration source volume can be selected. Refer to

"Requirements for a migration destination TPP" (page 312) for

details.

The RAID groups, the TPPs, or the FTRPs that are available as the migration destination

1133

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Wide Striping Volume Setting

● Volume Information

• Wide Stripe Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Wide Stripe Size for the migration destination WSV.

"Wide Stripe Size" is the size of the WSV Unit that is allocated to each RAID group in series. It is not necessary to change the default setting (Normal) for normal use.

• Normal

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID group (*1). The maximum size is 16MB or smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member drives, and Stripe Depth.

Select "Normal" to improve random write access performance.

• Small

An integral multiple of the basic size for each RAID group. The maximum size is 2MB or smaller.

The actual size varies according to the RAID group type, the number of member drives, and Stripe Depth.

Note that because the segment size of the volume is small and many host accesses among multiple RAID groups occur, the performance may be reduced according to the amount of host I/O.

*1: The basic size (stripe size) when creating a volume. Refer to

"Basic Size for each RAID

Group" (page 1379) for details.

• If the basic size of the RAID group is 2MB or more, the basic size is specified for Wide Stripe Size even when "Small" is selected.

• When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, select the same "Wide Stripe Size" as the migration source

WSV. For procedure to check "Wide Stripe Size" for the migration source WSV, refer to "Remarks" in

"When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page 317) .

"Wide Stripe Size" for an existing WSV can be changed by using the migration function.

• Concatenation Order

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the concatenation order of RAID groups.

It is not necessary to change the default setting (Automatic) for normal use.

• Automatic

The concatenation order of RAID groups is specified automatically.

If multiple WSVs are already registered, the next available RAID group that enables the

RAID group.

Volumes that belong to the RAID group that is first in the concatenation order are called

"representative volumes".

• Manual

The concatenation order of the RAID groups is specified manually.

1134

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

When changing the number of concatenations for a WSV, specify the same concatenation order as the migration source

WSV. For the procedure to check the concatenation order of migration source WSVs, refer to "Remarks" in "When the migration destination volume is "WSV"" (page 317) . When "Manual" is selected for "Concatenation Order", the concatena-

tion order can be changed. It is not necessary to change the default setting (Automatic) if the concatenation order after migration can be changed.

● Select RAID Group Information

• Drive Type

Description Select the type of drives that configure the RAID groups in the migration destination WSV.

Input condition/

Display contents

The installed drive determines the selectable drive types that are displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

• Online

• Nearline

• SSD

• Online/Nearline

• Online SED

• Nearline SED

• SSD SED

• Online SED/Nearline SED

• When "Online" is selected, a RAID group that is configured with only "Online" type drives, or a RAID group that is configured with both "Online" and "Nearline" type drives is specified.

• When "SSD" is selected, the RAID groups that are configured with SSDs are specified regardless of the SSD type (SSD-

M/SSD-L/SSD).

• When "Online SED/Nearline SED" is selected, a RAID group that is configured with only "Online SED" type drives, a

RAID group that is configured with only "Nearline SED" type drives, or a RAID group that is configured with both

"Online SED" and "Nearline SED" type drives is specified.

• RAID Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the RAID group type that configures the migration destination WSV.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

• High Performance (RAID1+0)

• High Capacity (RAID5)

• High Reliability (RAID6)

• Reliability (RAID5+0)

• Mirroring (RAID1)

• Striping (RAID0)

1135

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Number of Member Drives

Description Select the number of member drives that configure the RAID groups in the migration destination WSV.

Input condition/

Display contents

The selectable number of member drives, which is determined by the specified RAID level, is displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

• For High Performance (RAID1+0)

4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

• For High Capacity (RAID5)

3 - 16

• For High Reliability (RAID6)

5 - 16

• For Reliability (RAID5+0)

6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

• For Mirroring (RAID1)

• For Striping (RAID0)

2 - 16

• Stripe Depth

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Stripe Depth of the drives that configure the RAID groups in the migration destination WSV.

The selectable Stripe Depth varies depending on the specified RAID level. Refer to

"Available

Stripe Depth value (for RAID group)" (page 1231) for details.

If "Mirroring (RAID1)" is selected as the RAID level, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

If there are no RAID groups in which volumes can be created, the field is blank.

• 64 KB

• 128 KB

• 256 KB

• 512 KB

• 1024 KB

● Select RAID Groups

• Checkbox to select RAID groups

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox for the RAID group to be selected.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1136

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Cache Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Cache Parameters" (page 326)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Cache Parameters" (page 1307) .

● Parameters Setting

• Cache Page Capacity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the cache capacity that is used by volumes.

When "-" (hyphen) is selected, the cache capacity is not limited. It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed for the field.

If volumes with a high I/O load exist, data in a low I/O load volume may not stored in the cache memory and the cache hit rate for the low I/O load volume is reduced. By limiting the cache capacity that is used by high I/O load volumes, a reduction in performance when low I/O load volumes are accessed can be prevented.

The cache hit rate for high I/O load volumes is lowered and the access performance for the volumes may reduced.

• "-" (hyphen)

• 32.50 MB

• 65.00 MB

• 130.00 MB

• 260.00 MB

• 520.00 MB

• 1040.00 MB (Not available for the ETERNUS DX60 S4 and the ETERNUS DX60 S3)

• 2080.00 MB (Not available for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4 and the ETERNUS DX60 S3/

DX100 S3)

• Note that this parameter is not used to specify the capacity of dedicated cache for the relevant volume. This parameter limits the cache capacity that can be used for the relevant volume. Although a volume with this parameter cannot use a cache memory that exceeds the specified value, other volumes can use the entire cache, which includes the specified capacity.

• The cache page capacity must be changed when the I/O load of the volume is low.

• If write data in the cache memory exceeds the specified cache page capacity for a volume, the cache page capacity cannot be changed.

• The cache page capacity cannot be changed for concatenated volumes that are created by the LUN concatenation function.

• If the cache page capacity is set, EXC and EXCP of the specified volume is not used (the enabling/disabling of the EXC and EXCP settings is not changed).

• When selecting volumes that cannot use this parameter as the target of this function, the "Cache Page Capacity" and

"Current Cache Page Capacity" settings are not displayed on the screen.

• The specified cache page capacity includes the mirror area. Note that the maximum available cache memory size used by read I/O is a half the specified value.

• When the cache page capacity is limited, the capacity cannot be expanded for the relevant volume. Reset the cache page capacity to the default value before expanding the volume capacity.

1137

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Prefetch Limit (PL)

Description Specify the prefetch limit of the volume.

The default PL value is "8". If "0" is specified, data prefetch is not performed. It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

When specifying larger PL, the amount of data that is read from a drive for a single read process is increased. As a result, the number of times that data needs to be read (Staging) from the drive is reduced. When a large "Prefetch Limit" value is specified, the amount of data that is read from a drive for a single read process is increased. As a result, the amount of data that is read (Staging) from the drive for a single read process increases and requested data may not be read before the next read or write request from the host is issued.

0 - 64 Input condition/

Display contents

• Force Prefetch Mode (FP)

Description Select whether to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the Force Prefetch Mode to forcibly fetch the cache in advance.

Input condition/

Display contents

The default FP value is "OFF". It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, "OFF" is selected for the field.

This setting is required to improve the sequential read access performance.

When a number of sequential accesses are performed for one volume, the ETERNUS DX/AF may regard as random accesses occurs. By selecting "ON" for "Force Prefetch Mode", prefetching is forcibly performed in such a case.

For random read access, unnecessary data is read from the drive and random read access performance may be reduced.

• ON

• OFF

• Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Description Specify the value of the Multi Writeback Count.

Input condition/

Display contents

It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use. The Multi Writeback Count cannot be specified for volumes that are concatenated by the LUN concatenation function.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

When specifying larger MWC, sequential write access performance is improved. Note that this is not effective when a number of random write accesses occur.

Depending on the ratio of read access and write access, read access performance may be reduced.

0 - 16

The setting values available for Multi Writeback Count vary depending on the RAID level and drive configu-

ration. Refer to "Input Conditions for MWC" (page 1391)

for details.

1138

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Prefetch Sequential Detect Count (PSDC)

Description Specify the Prefetch Sequential Detect Count.

Input condition/

Display contents

The default PSDC value is "5". It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

If the host splits data into multiple pieces and performs read access in succession, the access may be determined as sequential access even if it is actually random access. When specifying larger PSDC, the required number to detect sequential data for determining sequential data access is increased and a reduction in performance due to incorrect prefetch can be avoided.

Depending on the amount of sequential data, a large PSDC slows the determination of sequential data access and performance may be reduced.

1 - 255

• Sequential Dirty Detect Count (SDDC)

Description Specify the value of the Sequential Dirty Detect Count.

Input condition/

Display contents

The default SDDC value is "5". It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

If the host splits data into multiple pieces and performs write access in succession, the access may be determined as sequential access even if it is actually random access. When specifying larger SDDC, the required number to detect sequential data for determining sequential data access is increased and a reduction in performance due to incorrect prefetch can be avoided.

Depending on the amount of sequential data, a large SDDC slows the determination of sequential data access and performance may be reduced.

1 - 255

• Sequential Slope (SS)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the value of the Sequential Slope.

If the following equation is true for sequential data access (Read I/O), the access is determined as sequential access. The default SS value is "128". It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

(End LBA of the previous I/O + 1) + SS (Sequential Slope)  Start LBA of the current I/O

The following conditions can be also determined as sequential access.

• A sequential access that does not have successive LBAs.

• A sequential access that issues multiple host I/Os at the same time and is unable to be received in the order of LBAs.

A larger SS may cause random access to be determined as sequential access, resulting in reduced performance due to incorrect prefetching.

0 - 4096

1139

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Sequential Dirty Slope (SDS)

Description Specify the value of the Sequential Dirty Slope.

If the following equation is true for sequential data access (Write I/O), the access is determined as sequential access. The default SDS value is "128". It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

(End LBA of the previous I/O + 1) +

SDS (Sequential Dirty Slope)  Start LBA of the current I/O

Input condition/

Display contents

The following conditions can be also determined as sequential access.

• A sequential access that does not have successive LBAs.

• A sequential access that issues multiple host I/Os at the same time and is unable to be received in the order of LBAs.

A larger SDS may cause random access to be determined as sequential access, resulting in reduced performance due to incorrect prefetching.

0 - 4096

• Sequential Parallel Multi I/O Count (SPMC)

Description Specify the value of the Sequential Parallel Multi I/O Count.

Input condition/

Display contents

It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use. If multiple volumes with different settings are selected and [Modify Cache Parameters] is clicked, the field is blank.

For asynchronous I/O (I/O is issued at once regardless of the order), the I/O process in the CM may be switched and discontinuity may occur. SPMC is used to determine the sequential data access (Read I/O and Write I/O) by using the start address for the previous I/O and the start addresses for specified number of I/Os before and after the previous I/O. Compared with "SS" and "SDS" which determines the sequential access by LBA numbers, SPMC can be used for large I/Os.

A larger SPMC may cause random access to be determined as sequential access, resulting in reduced performance due to incorrect prefetching. Also, SPMC is not expected to have an effect on data access with multiple I/O sizes.

0 - 32

• Extreme Cache Pool

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the EXCP.

It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use.

If multiple volumes are selected when starting this function and different EXCP settings have been specified for each volume, "Enable" is selected for this item. This item is displayed when

EXCP is enabled for the ETERNUS DX.

• Enable

• Disable

1140

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The ETERNUS DX60 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, the ETERNUS AF250/AF650, and the

ETERNUS DX200F do not support the Extreme Cache Pool. In this case, "Extreme Cache Pool" and "Current Extreme

Cache Pool" are not displayed.

• When selecting volumes that cannot use this parameter as the target of this function, this item is not selected and cannot be specified.

• The EXCP setting for the following volumes are fixed to "Disable" and cannot be changed.

Volumes (Standard type volumes, Standard (LUN Concatenation) type volumes, and WSVs) that are created in a

RAID group configured with SSDs or SSD SEDs

Volumes (TPVs) that are created in a TPP configured with SSDs or SSD SEDs

ODX Buffer volumes

Set ALUA

For details about this function, refer to "Set ALUA" (page 333) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set ALUA" (page 1308)

● ALUA Settings

• New ALUA

Description Select the ALUA (access type from the host to the volume) that is specified for volumes.

• Follow Host Response

Use the same "Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access" setting as the host response for the host group or the host.

• ACTIVE / ACTIVE

If multiple paths are used to access the volume, use all of the paths with the same priority.

• ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH

If multiple paths access the volume, use the recommended paths. Even though volumes can be accessed by non-recommended paths, the responses to the host may require a longer period of time.

Set Volume QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set Volume QoS" (page 335) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Volume QoS" (page 1308)

● Volume QoS Setting

• New Bandwidth Limit

Description Select a new bandwidth limit.

When not setting the performance limit, select "Unlimited".

1141

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• Unlimited

• 15000 IOPS (800 MB/s)

• 12600 IOPS (700 MB/s)

• 10020 IOPS (600 MB/s)

• 7500 IOPS (500 MB/s)

• 5040 IOPS (400 MB/s)

• 3000 IOPS (300 MB/s)

• 1020 IOPS (200 MB/s)

• 780 IOPS (100 MB/s)

• 600 IOPS (70 MB/s)

• 420 IOPS (40 MB/s)

• 300 IOPS (25 MB/s)

• 240 IOPS (20 MB/s)

• 180 IOPS (15 MB/s)

• 120 IOPS (10 MB/s)

• 60 IOPS (5 MB/s)

The bandwidth limit can be changed using the procedure in

"Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 337) or the "set qos-band-

width-limit" ETERNUS CLI command. If the value is changed, that value is displayed as an option for this item.

Set Volume QoS Pattern

For details about this function, refer to "Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 337) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Volume QoS Pattern" (page 1308) .

● QoS Pattern Settings

• IOPS

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the maximum performance (IOPS).

Note that "No.0" (Unlimited) cannot be changed.

The current value is displayed when this function starts.

• No.0

"Unlimited"

• No.1 - No.15

60 - 65535

• Throughput (MB/s)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the maximum performance (throughput value).

Note that "No.0" (Unlimited) cannot be changed.

The current value is displayed when this function starts.

• No.0

"Unlimited"

• No.1 - No.15

1 - 65535

1142

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set Snapshot

For details about this function, refer to "Set Snapshot" (page 339) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Snapshot" (page 1309)

● Snapshot Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a snapshot destination SDV name.

If the "Use the volume name to setup snapshot" checkbox is cleared, a "Name" can be specified.

If the "Use the volume name to setup snapshot" checkbox is selected, the selected NAS user volume name for the snapshot destination SDV is used. In this case, a "Name" cannot be specified.

The following names are automatically set for SDVs in proportion to the specified number of generations.

"Name" + "$snap_N" (N: Number of generations between 1 - 128)

If the volume name that is appended with "$snap_N" exceeds 32 characters, the excess num-

ber of characters is deleted from the volume name. Refer to "Naming Conventions of Volumes"

(page 1376) for details. The snapshot name can be set only when the snapshot setting is per-

formed for the first time.

• "Use the volume name to setup snapshot" checkbox

Selected

Cleared

• Name

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

Spaces

• Number of Generations

Description Specify the number of snapshot generations.

SDVs are automatically created in proportion to the specified number of generations.

The maximum number of generations for each model is as follows.

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4

64 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4

128 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4

128

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4

256

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S3

16 (*2) or 64 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S3

64 (*2) or 128 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S3

128

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S3

256

1143

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4

1 - 64 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4

1 - 128 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4

1 - 128

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4

1 - 128

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S3

1 - 16 (*2)

1 - 64 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S3

1 - 64 (*2)

1 - 128 (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S3

1 - 128

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S3

1 - 128

*1: The maximum number of generations when "Memory Extension" described below is installed.

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

16GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L53 or later)

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

32GB/CM (the controller firmware version is V10L33 or later)

*2: The maximum number of generations when "Memory Extension" described below is installed.

ETERNUS DX100 S3

8GB/CM

ETERNUS DX200 S3

16GB/CM

• Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the collection mode for the snapshot.

The collection mode can be set only when the snapshot setting is performed for the first time.

• Automatic

Snapshots are collected automatically according to the acquisition schedule that is set from ETERNUS Web GUI, ETERNUS CLI, or ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser.

• Manual

This setting is not used for normal operation.

Snapshots are collected from VMware vSphere Web Client in environments where ETER-

NUS vCenter Plug-in is used. All snapshot operations are performed from VMware vSphere

Web Client.

• Note that "Automatic" and "Manual" cannot be set at the same time for a single NAS user volume.

• To change the collection mode, delete the snapshots for the relevant NAS user volume and then reconfigure to the desired mode.

1144

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Day of the Week (Schedule)

Description Select the checkboxes of the days to acquire snapshots.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is only available when "Automatic" is selected for "Mode".

Checkboxes for Monday to Sunday

• Selected

• Cleared

• Time (Schedule)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the acquisition time for snapshots.

This item is only available when "Automatic" is selected for "Mode".

• Time Interval

Every Hour

Acquire snapshots every hour from 0:00 (0:00, 1:00, 2:00, 3:00, 4:00, 5:00, 6:00, 7:00,

8:00, 9:00, 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, 13:00, 14:00, 15:00, 16:00, 17:00, 18:00, 19:00,

20:00, 21:00, 22:00, 23:00).

Acquire snapshots every two hours from 0:00 (0:00, 2:00, 4:00, 6:00, 8:00, 10:00,

12:00, 14:00, 16:00, 18:00, 20:00, 22:00).

Acquire snapshots every three hours from 0:00 (0:00, 3:00, 6:00, 9:00, 12:00, 15:00,

18:00, 21:00).

Acquire snapshots every four hours from 0:00 (0:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00, 20:00).

Acquire snapshots every six hours from 0:00 (0:00, 6:00, 12:00, 18:00).

Acquire snapshots every eight hours from 0:00 (0:00, 8:00, 16:00).

Acquire snapshots every 12 hours from 0:00 (0:00, 12:00).

Acquire snapshots every 24 hours from 0:00 (0:00).

• Advanced Setting

Click the [Browse...] button to display the [Schedule Time Settings] screen.

Select the time to acquire snapshots between 0:00 - 23:00 (multiple selections can be made).

Selected

Cleared

Setting a different acquisition time for each day is not possible.

● Select RAID Group

• Radio button to select a RAID group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the radio button for a RAID group to create the snapshot destination SDVs.

Radio button

• Selected

• Cleared

1145

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Connectivity Management

This section provides information on the parameters of the following actions for connectivity management.

•

Host Affinity Management

•

Host Group Management

•

CA Port Group Management

•

LUN Group Management

•

Host Response Management

•

Host-LU QoS Management

•

NAS Management

Host Affinity Management

Create Host Affinity

For details about this function, refer to "Create Host Affinity" (page 350) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Host Affinity" (page 1310)

● Target Connection Setting

• Target Connection

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the connection target from "Host Group - CA Port Group" or "Host - CA Port".

• Host Group - CA Port Group

Specify a "Host Group", a "CA Port Group", and a "LUN Group" to create a host affinity.

• Host - CA Port

Specify a "Host", a "CA Port", and a "LUN Group" to create a host affinity.

■ When "Host Group - CA Port Group" is selected for "Target Connection"

● Select Host Group

• Target Connection

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the connection target from "Host Group" or "All".

Note that "All" can be selected only when all of the following conditions are satisfied.

• LUNs are not specified from LUN#512 onward in the selected LUN group.

• The selected CA port group is in any of the following conditions.

The CA port group is not being used

Member ports in the CA port group do not belong to other CA port groups

• Host Group

Specify a specific host group as the connection target.

• All

Specify any host as the connection target.

1146

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

• Host Group

Description Select a host group to configure a host affinity.

Select this item only when "Host Group" is selected for "Target Connection".

A host group to configure a host affinity.

Input condition/

Display contents

• Host Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the host response that is assigned to any hosts.

Select this item only when "All" is selected for "Target Connection".

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Default

● Select CA Port Group

• CA Port Group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a CA port group to configure a host affinity.

A CA port group to configure a host affinity.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1147

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Select LUN Group

• LUN Group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a LUN group to configure a host affinity.

A LUN group to configure a host affinity.

• The LUN range that can be referenced from a host depends on the "LUN Addressing" and "LUN Expand

Mode (Peripheral Device Addressing)" settings of the host response that is applied to the selected "Host

Group" (specific host group), "Host" (specific host), or "All" (any hosts). Refer to "Referable number of

LUNs from a host" (page 1148) for details. LUN groups that use LUNs from LUN#256 onward cannot con-

figure the host affinity with a host group or a host for which the referable LUNs is "256 LUN" host response. Also, LUN groups that use LUNs from LUN#256 onward cannot configure the host affinity when "Connection Target" is "All" and referable LUNs is "256 LUN" host response.

• If LUNs from LUN#512 onward are allocated to the selected LUN group, the number of connectable hosts per CA port is reduced.

Referable number of LUNs from a host

LUN Addressing

PRHL

Host response

LUN Expand Mode

(Peripheral Device Addressing)

Disable (Default)

PRHL

FLAT

Enable

Disable (Default)

Enable

Referable number of LUNs from a host (range of LUNs)

When "Host Group" or

"Host" is selected

When "All" is selected

256 LUN

LUN#0 - LUN#255

4096 LUN

LUN#0 - LUN#4095

4096 LUN

LUN#0 - LUN#4095

256 LUN

LUN#0 - LUN#255

512 LUN

LUN#0 - LUN#511

512 LUN

LUN#0 - LUN#511

The referable number of LUNs varies depending on the recommended pattern of the host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

● Select CA Port

• Checkbox to select a CA port

Description To enable the paths between hosts and ports, select the port checkboxes. To disable the paths, clear the checkboxes.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select this item only when the connection target is "Host Group - CA Port Group".

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1148

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ When "Host - CA Port" is selected for "Target Connection"

● Select Host

• Target Connection

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the connection target from "Host" or "All".

Note that "All" can be selected only when all of the following conditions are satisfied.

• LUNs are not specified from LUN#512 onward in the selected LUN group.

• The selected CA port is in any of the following conditions.

The CA port is not a member port of CA port groups

The affinity mode of the CA port is not "ON"

• Host

Specify a specific host as the connection target.

• All

Specify any host as the connection target.

• Host

Description Select a host to configure a host affinity.

Select this item only when "Host" is selected for "Target Connection".

A host to configure a host affinity.

Input condition/

Display contents

• Host Response

Refer to "Host Response" (page 1147)

"When "Host Group - CA Port Group" is selected for "Target Connection"" for

details.

● Select CA Port

• CA Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a CA port to configure a host affinity.

A CA port to configure a host affinity.

● Select LUN Group

• LUN Group

Refer to "LUN Group" (page 1148)

in "When "Host Group - CA Port Group" is selected for "Target Connection""

for details.

Modify Host Affinity

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Host Affinity" (page 361) .

Refer to "Create Host Affinity" (page 1146) for details about the setting items of this function.

1149

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host Group Management

Add FC/FCoE Host Group

For details about this function, refer to "Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 372)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 1311) .

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be used. (Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface types.) Refer to

"Naming Conventions

When Adding Hosts" (page 1377)

for details.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Host Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a host response that is to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Default

The number of LUNs that can be referenced from the host is determined by the "LUN Addressing" settings and the "LUN

Expand Mode (Peripheral Device Addressing)" settings for the host response. When a host that has the host affinity setting is added to a new host group, check the LUN setting state. If a LUN that is LUN#256 onward is used for the host, the relevant host cannot be added to a host group with "256 LUN" for the host response. Refer to

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

Host response and referable number of LUNs

• Recommended Patterns of Host Responses

Item Default Solaris

MPxIO

Host

Response

LUN

Addressing

(*1)

LUN Expand

Mode

(Peripheral

Device

Addressing)

Referable number of LUNs

PRHL

Disable

(Default)

PRHL

Disable

(Default)

256 LUN 256 LUN

HP-UX

FLAT

4096

LUN

AIX

FLAT

4096

LUN

AIX

VxVM

FLAT

4096

LUN

VS850/

SVC

PRHL

Disable

(Default)

Disable

(Default)

Disable

(Default)

Disable

(Default)

256 LUN

BS 2000

PRHL

Enable

4096

LUN

1150

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Item

LUN settings for LUN groups with host affinity settings

LUN#0 -

LUN#255

LUN#0 -

LUN#4095

OK: Available, N/A: Not available

Default

N/A

Solaris

MPxIO

N/A

HP-UX

AIX

VxVM

VS850/

SVC

BS 2000

N/A OK

• If the referable number of LUN is "256 LUN", 256 LUNs (LUN#0 - LUN#255) can be referenced

(LUN#256 - LUN#4095 cannot be referenced).

• If the referable number of LUN is "4096 LUN", 4096 LUNs (LUN#0 - LUN#4095) can be referenced.

• Example of host responses in the ETERNUS DX/AF

Item

LUN

Addressing

(*1)

Host

Response

LUN Expand

Mode

(Peripheral

Device

Addressing)

Referable number of LUNs

LUN settings for LUN groups with host affinity settings

LUN#0 -

LUN#255

LUN#0 -

LUN#4095

HR 1

PRHL

Disable

(Default)

256 LUNs

N/A

HR 2

PRHL

Enable

4096 LUNs

HR 3

FLAT

Disable

(Default)

4096 LUNs

OK: Available, N/A: Not available

*1: "PRHL" indicates "Peripheral device addressing (Default)" and "FLAT" indicates "Flat space addressing".

• Checkbox to select a host

Description Select the corresponding host checkbox in the FC host list, to add a host. Clear the corresponding host checkbox in the FC host list, to delete a host.

Input condition/

Display contents

The checkbox for the FC host that is already registered in the host group is selected by default.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

FC hosts that are set for the host affinity of which the Virtual Volume function is enabled are not displayed.

● Host Setting

• WWN

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the WWN for the FC host.

The registered WWN cannot be used.

• Hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

• 16 digits (using "F (f)" or "0" in entire 16 digits is not allowed)

1151

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add iSCSI Host Group

For details about this function, refer to "Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 379)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 1311) .

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be used. (Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface types.) Refer to

"Naming Conventions

When Adding Hosts" (page 1377)

for details.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Host Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a host response that is to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Default

The number of LUNs that can be referenced from the host is determined by the "LUN Addressing" settings and the "LUN

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

1152

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Checkbox to select a host

Description Select the corresponding host checkbox in the iSCSI host list, to add a host. Clear the corresponding host checkbox in the iSCSI host list, to delete a host.

Input condition/

Display contents

The checkbox for the iSCSI host that is already registered in the host group is selected by default.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• If the Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) server has not been configured in

"Modify iSCSI Port Parameters" (page

437)

, the iSCSI host cannot be automatically acquired.

• The following restrictions in the environment that is described below apply for the automatic acquirement of host information (*1) even when the iSNS server is specified.

*1: "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP Address", and "Alias Name"

When one of the following OSs is used and there are multiple hosts that have the same iSCSI name but different

IP addresses, only the information of one host can be acquired.

• Windows Server 2008

• Windows Server 2008 R2

• Windows Server 2012

• Windows Server 2012 R2

• Windows Server 2016

• Windows Server 2019

• Oracle Solaris 10

When the host OS is Oracle Solaris 11, "IP Version" and "IP Address" cannot be acquired.

• The following items can be specified only for the iSCSI hosts that are selected by checkboxes; "IP Version" "IP Address",

"Alias Name", "CHAP User ID", "Change CHAP Password", "CHAP Password", and "Confirm CHAP Password".

iSCSI hosts that are set for the host affinity of which the Virtual Volume function is enabled are not displayed.

• IP Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the IP version of the iSCSI host.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the host group, the IP version is displayed. To change this item, select the checkbox for the iSCSI host and then select the IP version.

• IPv4

• IPv6

To register an iSCSI host without using an IP address, perform IP version selection as follows:

• Select "IPv4" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv4 (when using an IPv4 host)

• Select "IPv6" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv6 (when using an IPv6 host)

• If the IP address format of the iSCSI host cannot be checked (when either an IPv4 host or an IPv6 host is used), register two hosts. Select "IPv4" for one host, and select "IPv6" for the other host. Specify the same iSCSI name, CHAP user

ID, and CHAP password for each host.

1153

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the host group, the IP address is displayed. To change this item, select the checkbox for the iSCSI host and then specify the IP address.

There are two methods to specify an IP address; "IPv4" and "IPv6". The IP address must be specified with the selected IP version (IPv4 or IPv6). The following IPv6 addresses can be used;

"link local address", "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is displayed, the IPv6

address is displayed as an abbreviation.

It is not necessary to specify this item if IP address is not used.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• Alias Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the Alias name of the iSCSI host.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the host group, the Alias name is displayed. To change this item, select the checkbox for the iSCSI host and then specify the Alias name.

It is not necessary to specify this item if Alias name is not used.

An existing Alias name cannot be specified.

• Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• CHAP User ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the user ID for the CHAP Authentication.

If the iSCSI host has already been registered in the host group, the CHAP User ID is displayed.

To change this item, select the checkbox for the iSCSI host and then specify the CHAP User ID.

It is not necessary to specify this item if the CHAP Authentication is not used.

Make sure to set the user name and password together.

• Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Change CHAP Password

Description To register or edit the CHAP Authentication password, select the checkbox.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is available only when the checkbox for the iSCSI host is selected.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1154

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• CHAP Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the password for the CHAP Authentication.

If the iSCSI host is already registered in the host group and CHAP Authentication is used, the password is displayed with "*" (asterisks). To change this item, select the checkbox for the iSCSI host and the checkbox for "Change CHAP Password", and then specify the password.

Make sure to set the user name and password together.

It is not necessary to specify this item if the CHAP Authentication is not used.

• 12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Confirm CHAP Password

Description Input the CHAP password again for confirmation.

Input condition/

Display contents

It is not necessary to specify this item if the CHAP Authentication is not used.

• 12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

● Host Setting

• iSCSI Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the iSCSI name of the iSCSI host (required).

An iSCSI Name that has already been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF cannot be used.

• 4 - 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('-', '.', ':')

• The name starts with "iqn." or "eui."

For setting items, refer to "Host Group Setting" (page 1152)

Add SAS Host Group

For details about this function, refer to "Add SAS Host Group" (page 384) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add SAS Host Group" (page 1311)

● Host Group Setting

• Host Group Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the host group name.

An existing host group name cannot be used. (Host group names cannot overlap with any other host group names, irrespective of the interface types.) Refer to

"Naming Conventions

When Adding Hosts" (page 1377)

for details.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

1155

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Host Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a host response that is to be assigned to a host group.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX

• Default

The number of LUNs that can be referenced from the host is determined by the "LUN Addressing" settings and the "LUN

"Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

• Checkbox to select a host

Description Select the corresponding host checkbox in the SAS host list, to add a host. Clear the corresponding host checkbox in the SAS host list, to delete a host.

Input condition/

Display contents

The checkbox for the SAS host that is already registered in the host group is selected by default.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Host Setting

• SAS Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the SAS address for the SAS host.

A SAS address that has already been registered in the ETERNUS DX cannot be used.

• Hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

• 16 digits (using "F (f)" or "0" in entire 16 digits is not allowed)

Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Host Group (FC/FCoE)" (page 389) .

Refer to "Add FC/FCoE Host Group" (page 1150)

for details about the setting items of this function.

Modify Host Group (iSCSI)

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Host Group (iSCSI)" (page 393) .

Refer to "Add iSCSI Host Group" (page 1152)

for details about the setting items of this function.

1156

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Modify Host Group (SAS)

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Host Group (SAS)" (page 398)

Refer to "Add SAS Host Group" (page 1155) for details about the setting items of this function.

Add FC/FCoE Host

For details about this function, refer to "Add FC/FCoE Host" (page 403) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add FC/FCoE Host" (page 1311) .

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

● Host Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

Description Select the checkbox of the FC host that is to be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

The host name and host response can only be specified for the selected FC host.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Name

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "Name" (page 1160) in "Modify FC/FCoE Host" for details.

• Host Response

Refer to "Host Response" (page 1161)

"Modify FC/FCoE Host"

for details.

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

● Host Setting

• WWN

Refer to "WWN" (page 1161) in

"Modify FC/FCoE Host"

for details.

1157

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add iSCSI Host

For details about this function, refer to "Add iSCSI Host" (page 406) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add iSCSI Host" (page 1311) .

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

● Host Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox of the iSCSI host that is to be registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• If the iSNS server has not been configured in

"Modify iSCSI Port Parameters" (page 437) , the iSCSI host cannot be

automatically acquired.

• The following restrictions in the environment that is described below apply for the automatic acquirement of host information (*1) even when the iSNS server is specified.

*1: "iSCSI Name", "IP Version", "IP Address", and "Alias Name"

When one of the following OSs is used and there are multiple hosts that have the same iSCSI name but different

IP addresses, only the information of one host can be acquired.

• Windows Server 2008

• Windows Server 2008 R2

• Windows Server 2012

• Windows Server 2012 R2

• Windows Server 2016

• Windows Server 2019

• Oracle Solaris 10

When the host OS is Oracle Solaris 11, "IP Version" and "IP Address" cannot be acquired.

• The following items can be specified only for the iSCSI hosts that are selected by checkboxes; "Name", "Host

Response", "IP Version", "IP Address", "Alias Name", "CHAP User ID", "CHAP Password", and "Confirm CHAP Password".

• Name

Refer to "Name" (page 1161) in "Modify iSCSI Host" for details.

• Host Response

Refer to "Host Response" (page 1162)

"Modify iSCSI Host"

for details.

• IP Version

Refer to "IP Version" (page 1162) in

"Modify iSCSI Host" for details.

1158

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

• IP Address

Refer to "IP Address" (page 1162)

in "Modify iSCSI Host" for details.

• Alias Name

Refer to "Alias Name" (page 1163) in

"Modify iSCSI Host" for details.

• CHAP User ID

Refer to "CHAP User ID" (page 1163)

"Modify iSCSI Host"

for details.

• CHAP Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the password for the CHAP Authentication.

It is not necessary to specify this item if the CHAP Authentication is not used.

Make sure to set the user name and password together.

• 12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Confirm CHAP Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the CHAP password again for confirmation.

• 12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

● Host Setting

• iSCSI Name

Refer to "iSCSI Name" (page 1161) in "Modify iSCSI Host" for details.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1159

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Add SAS Host

For details about this function, refer to "Add SAS Host" (page 411)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add SAS Host" (page 1311)

■ When registering a host by selecting from the host list

● Host Setting

• Checkbox to select a host

Description Select the checkbox of the SAS host that is to be registered in the ETERNUS DX.

Input condition/

Display contents

The host name and host response can only be specified for the selected SAS host.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Name

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "Name" (page 1164) in "Modify SAS Host" for details.

• Host Response

Refer to "Host Response" (page 1164)

"Modify SAS Host"

for details.

■ When registering a host by manually specifying the host

● Host Setting

• SAS Address

Refer to "SAS Address" (page 1164)

"Modify SAS Host"

for details.

Modify FC/FCoE Host

For details about this function, refer to "Modify FC/FCoE Host" (page 416) .

● FC/FCoE Host Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify a new FC host name.

An existing host name cannot be specified. (Host names cannot overlap with any other host names, irrespective of the interface types.)

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

1160

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• WWN

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify a new WWN.

The registered WWN cannot be used.

• Hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

• 16 digits (using "F (f)" or "0" in entire 16 digits is not allowed)

• Host Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a new host response that is to be assigned to the FC host.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

This item is available only when an FC host is not registered in the host group.

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Default

Modify iSCSI Host

For details about this function, refer to "Modify iSCSI Host" (page 418) .

● iSCSI Host Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify a new iSCSI host name.

An existing host name cannot be specified. (Host names cannot overlap with any other host names, irrespective of the interface types.)

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• iSCSI Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify an iSCSI name of the iSCSI host.

An iSCSI Name that has already been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF cannot be used.

• 4 - 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('-', '.', ':')

• The name starts with "iqn." or "eui."

1161

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Host Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a new host response that is to be assigned to the iSCSI host.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

This item is available only when an iSCSI host is not registered in the host group.

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX/AF

• Default

• IP Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the IP version of the iSCSI host.

• IPv4

• IPv6

To register an iSCSI host without using an IP address, perform IP version selection as follows:

• Select "IPv4" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv4 (when using an IPv4 host)

• Select "IPv6" when the IP address format of the iSCSI host is IPv6 (when using an IPv6 host)

ID, and CHAP password for each host.

• IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host.

There are two methods to specify an IP address; "IPv4" and "IPv6". The IP address must be specified with the selected IP version (IPv4 or IPv6). The following IPv6 addresses can be used;

"link local address", "global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting is displayed, the IPv6

address is displayed as an abbreviation.

It is not necessary to specify this item if IP address is not used.

• For IPv4 address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

1162

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Alias Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the Alias name of the iSCSI host.

It is not necessary to specify this item if Alias name is not used. An existing Alias name cannot be specified.

• Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• CHAP User ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• "Change CHAP Password" checkbox

Description To change the CHAP Authentication password, select the checkbox.

Input condition/

Display contents

Only when the "CHAP User ID" is registered, the field is available.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• CHAP Password

Description

Specify the user ID for the CHAP Authentication.

It is not necessary to specify this item if the CHAP Authentication is not used. Configure a user

ID and a password as a pair.

• Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the password for the CHAP Authentication.

It is not necessary to specify this item if the CHAP Authentication is not used.

Configure a user ID and a password as a pair.

Only when the "Change CHAP Password" checkbox is selected, the field is available.

• 12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Confirm CHAP Password

Description Input the CHAP password again for confirmation.

Input condition/

Display contents

Only when the "Change CHAP Password" checkbox is selected, the field is available.

• 12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

1163

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify SAS Host

For details about this function, refer to "Modify SAS Host" (page 419)

● SAS Host Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify a new SAS host name.

An existing host name cannot be specified. (Host names cannot overlap with any other host names, irrespective of the interface types.)

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• SAS Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify a new SAS address.

The registered SAS address cannot be used.

• Hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

• 16 digits (using "F (f)" or "0" in entire 16 digits is not allowed)

• Host Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a new host response that is to be assigned to the SAS host.

The host response list created in the ETERNUS DX is displayed.

This item is available only when a SAS host is not registered in the host group.

• Solaris MPxIO

• HP-UX

• AIX

• AIX VxVM

• VS850/SVC

• BS2000

• Host responses created in the ETERNUS DX

• Default

1164

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

CA Port Group Management

Create FC Port Group

For details about this function, refer to "Create FC Port Group" (page 421) .

● CA Port Group Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the port group name.

An existing port group name cannot be used. (Port group names cannot overlap with any other port group names, irrespective of the CA types.)

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Checkbox to select a port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox of the port to be registered in a port group.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• When a port in the affinity mode enabled (On) is selected, ports in the affinity mode disabled (Off) cannot be selected.

• When a port in the affinity mode disable (Off) is selected, ports in the affinity mode enable (On) cannot be selected.

• Up to eight ports can be selected.

Create iSCSI Port Group

For details about this function, refer to "Create iSCSI Port Group" (page 423) .

Refer to "Create FC Port Group" (page 1165) for details about the setting items of this function.

Create SAS Port Group

For details about this function, refer to "Create SAS Port Group" (page 425)

Refer to "Create FC Port Group" (page 1165) for details about the setting items of this function.

Create FCoE Port Group

For details about this function, refer to "Create FCoE Port Group" (page 427)

Refer to "Create FC Port Group" (page 1165) for details about the setting items of this function.

1165

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Modify CA Port Group

For details about this function, refer to "Modify CA Port Group" (page 429)

● CA Port Group Setting

• Name

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "Name" (page 1165) in "Create FC Port Group" for details.

• Checkbox to select a port

Description Select the port checkbox to be added to a CA port group. Clear the port checkbox to be deleted from a CA port group.

Input condition/

Display contents

The checkbox of the port, which has been registered in the CA port group, is selected.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• If the CA port group's affinity mode is "On" (the affinity mode of all the selected ports is "On"), the port, of which affinity mode is "OFF", cannot be selected.

• If the CA port group's affinity mode is "Off" (the affinity mode of all the selected ports is "Off"), the port, of which affinity mode is "On", cannot be selected.

• Up to eight ports can be selected.

Modify FC Port Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Modify FC Port Parameters" (page 431) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to the following sections:

•

"B. Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")" (page 1311)

•

"B. Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA")" (page 1312)

•

"B. Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "Initiator")" (page 1312)

● Port Settings

• Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the target port or select the copy source port.

The selectable port locations (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) are displayed as options.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

• For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

1166

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Connection

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the connection type for the target port.

When "FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port.

• Fabric

A connection type that enables simultaneous communication among multiple nodes through a Fibre Channel switch.

• FC-AL

A connection type that connects multiple nodes in a loop.

*1: Configuration Guide -Server Connection- (Fibre Channel) ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series Hybrid Storage Systems,

ETERNUS AF series, ETERNUS DX200F All-Flash Arrays Settings

• Set Loop ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When the connection type is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Automatic" as the specification method for the Loop ID.

"Loop ID" is an identification number of a node in a loop.

• Manual

• Automatic

• Loop ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", input the Loop ID.

When "Set Loop ID" is "Automatic", select "Ascending" or "Descending".

The Loop ID must have a value that is different from the values of all the ports.

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Manual"

0x0 - 0x7D

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Automatic"

Ascending

Descending

1167

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Transfer Rate

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the transfer speed for the target port.

The available transfer rate varies according to the FC type, the SFP type, and the connection topology.

32G FC

Type

16G FC

8G FC

Other

SFP Type

32G SFP+(MMF)

16G SFP+(SMF)

16G SFP+(MMF)

SFP+(MMF)

Unknown

Unmount

Connection

Fabric

FC-AL

Fabric

FC-AL

Fabric

FC-AL

Transfer Rate

Auto-negotiation

8 Gbit/s

16 Gbit/s

32 Gbit/s

Auto-negotiation

8 Gbit/s

Auto-negotiation

4 Gbit/s

8 Gbit/s

16 Gbit/s

Auto-negotiation

4 Gbit/s

8 Gbit/s

Auto-negotiation

4 Gbit/s

8 Gbit/s

• Auto-negotiation

• 4 Gbit/s

• 8 Gbit/s

• 16 Gbit/s

• 32 Gbit/s

"Auto-negotiation" is selected for the transfer rate when the transfer rate is "16 Gbit/s" or "32 Gbit/s" and the connection type is changed from "Fabric" to "FC-AL".

• Frame Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the frame size (bytes) of the target port.

"Frame Size" specifies the length of the communication information.

• 512

• 1024

• 2048

• Reset Scope

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the reset scope of the target port.

Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is performed, when the target port is connected to multiple servers.

• I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset request.

• T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)

Reset (cancel) the command request from all of the servers that are connected to the port.

1168

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the reserved status of the volume when the target port (chip) is reset.

• Enable

• Disable

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

• REC Line No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the REC line number of the target port.

The REC line number is used to switch the communication path when a line fails. The REC line number is used to recognize failed lines. Set different REC line numbers for each physical communication path. When lines are in normal status, an REC can be performed regardless of the

REC line number (specifying the same REC line numbers is allowed) in the same way as conventional REC operations. Note that no priority applies to REC line numbers.

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy license has been registered.

0 - 127

• This item is displayed only when the port mode is "CA/RA" or "RA".

• When a line fails, the communication path is switched according to the REC line number of the copy source storage system. For normal operation, set the same REC line number for the copy source and the copy destination storage systems to recover data.

• If the port mode has been changed from "CA/RA" or "RA" to the other mode, the REC line number returns to the default setting ("0"). When the port mode has changed from "CA/RA" to "RA" or changed from "RA" to "CA/RA", the cur-

rent REC line number setting is retained. Refer to "Modify Port Mode" (page 446) for details.

• REC Transfer Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select which REC transfer mode is enabled or disabled for the target port.

• Sync (synchronous transfer mode)

• Async Stack (asynchronous stack mode)

• Async Consistency (asynchronous consistency mode)

• Async Through (asynchronous through mode)

For example, specify different ports for Consistency and Stack to perform data transfers without any interference. The current setting is retained even when an REC path is changed. When

"Enable" is selected for all of the REC transfer modes, a conventional REC is performed.

This item is displayed only when the Advanced Copy license has been registered.

• Enable

An REC is performed in the selected transfer mode for the target port.

• Disable

An REC is not performed in the selected transfer mode for the target port.

1169

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This item is displayed only when the port mode is "CA/RA" or "RA".

• The REC transfer mode can be changed without suspending a copy session even when an REC is being performed in the target port. The changed settings are applied immediately to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• If specific REC transfer modes for all the RA ports and the CA/RA ports are disabled, a copy session with a disabled REC transfer mode fails because the REC paths for all the RA ports and the CA/RA ports are regarded as being blocked.

When the REC transfer mode for a copy session that is being performed is disabled, this copy session is halted.

• When "Async Consistency" is disabled for all the RA ports and the CA/RA ports, the REC buffer status changes to "INAC-

TIVE".

• For normal operations, set the same REC transfer mode for the copy source and the copy destination storage systems to recover data. When the REC transfer mode is specified for a copy source storage system, the specified REC transfer mode is performed even if one of the following storage systems is used as a copy destination.

Older models (ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2, ETERNUS DX90,

ETERNUS DX410/DX440, or ETERNUS DX8100/DX8400/DX8700)

Storage systems without the "REC Transfer Mode" setting

• If the port mode is changed from "CA/RA" or "RA" to the other mode, the REC transfer mode returns to the default setting ("Enable"). When the port mode has changed from "CA/RA" to "RA" or changed from "RA" to "CA/RA", the current

REC line number setting is retained. Refer to "Modify Port Mode" (page 446) for details.

• WWN (Port Name)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When the offline storage migration is performed, the ETERNUS DX/AF (destination device) is regarded as a server connecting to the migration source device. Specify WWPN for the server that was connected to the FC-CA port of the migration source device.

The default "WWN (Port Name)" is displayed with parentheses on the right side of the

[Default] button. Click the [Default] button to set the default value.

WWPN (16-digit hexadecimal)

• This item is displayed only when the port mode is "Initiator".

• Specifying the WWPN of the server is only required when the host affinity setting is configured between the server and a migration source FC-CA port.

If LUN mapping is configured for a migration source FC-CA port, the default value does not need to be changed.

• If the FC-Initiator port is used for an online storage migration or the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function, the default value does not need to be changed.

• WWN (Node Name)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When the offline storage migration is performed, the ETERNUS DX/AF (destination device) is regarded as a server connecting to the migration source device. Specify WWNN for the server that was connected to the FC-CA port of the migration source device.

The default "WWN (Node Name)" is displayed with parentheses on the right side of the

[Default] button. Click the [Default] button to set the default value.

WWNN (16-digit hexadecimal)

1170

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• This item is displayed only when the port mode is "Initiator".

• Specifying the WWNN of the server is only required when the host affinity setting is configured between the server and a migration source FC-CA port.

If LUN mapping is configured for a migration source FC-CA port, the default value does not need to be changed.

• If the FC-Initiator port is used for an online storage migration or the Non-disruptive Storage Migration function, the default value does not need to be changed.

● Destination

• Checkbox to select copy destination port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox of the copy destination port.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Modify iSCSI Port Parameters" (page 437) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to the following sections:

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")" (page 1313)

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA")" (page 1314)

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA/RA")" (page 1315)

•

"B. Modify iSCSI Port Parameters ([Send Ping] screen)" (page 1316)

● Select Port

• Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the target port.

The selectable port locations (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) are displayed as options.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

• For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

● General Information

• iSCSI Settings

iSCSI Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the iSCSI name of the target port.

Click the [Default] button to set the default iSCSI name.

• 4 - 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('-', '.', ':')

• The name starts with "iqn." or "eui."

The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports except the device iSCSI name.

1171

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Alias Name

Description

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• TCP/IP Settings

IP Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the alias name of the target port (can be omitted).

While the iSCSI name is a formal nomenclature that specifies the target iSCSI port, an alias name is used as nickname.

An alias name that is the same as another port cannot be specified.

Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols ("-" (hyphen), "." (period), ":" (colon), "+"

(plus), "@" (at sign), "_" (underscore), "=" (equal), "/" (slash), "[" (left square bracket), "]"

(right square bracket), "," (comma), "~" (tilde))

Select the IP address version for the target port.

• IPv4

Specify the IPv4 address. When "IPv4" is selected, input "IP Address" (required), "Subnet Mask" (required), and "Gateway".

• IPv6

Specify the IPv6 address. When "IPv6" is selected, input "IPv6 Connect IP Address"

(required), "IPv6 Global Address", and "IPv6 Gateway".

• IPv4/IPv6

Specify both the IPv4 address and the IPv6 address. The input items for IPv4 and IPv6 can be specified.

IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv4 address of the target port (required when "IPv4" or "IPv4 / IPv6" is selected).

Click the [Test Connection (ping)] button to display the [Send ping] screen. Specify the IP address to check the connection status of the remote storage system and the number of transmissions. Click the [Send] button. When the "ping" command is sent, the settings of the IP address and the connection path for the remote storage system can be checked.

• Up to 3 numeric characters

• First text box: "1" - "255"

• Other text boxes: "0" - "255"

Subnet Mask

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the subnet mask of the target port (required when "IPv4" or "IPv4 / IPv6" is selected).

• Up to 3 numeric characters

• 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.252

Input the gateway IP address of the target port when "IPv4" is selected.

• Up to 3 numeric characters

• All text boxes: "0" - "255"

1172

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

IPv6 Link Local Address

Description Input the IPv6 link local address of the target port (required when "IPv6" or "IPv4 / IPv6" is selected).

Input condition/

Display contents

Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133)

for details. Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

Click the [Default] button to set the default IPv6 link local address.

• fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

IPv6 Connect IP Address

Description Input the IPv6 connect IP address of the target port.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address" can be input for the IPv6 address. Refer to

"Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the current setting

is displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

"IPv6 Connect IP Address" corresponds to "IP Address" for IPv4.

"IPv6 Connect IP Address" can be directly input or created automatically.

Click the [Discovery] button to display the [Select IPv6 Prefix] screen. Up to five "IPv6 Prefix" can be obtained. Select "IPv6 Prefix" to create an IPv6 connect IP address automatically from the selected IPv6 prefix and the input IPv6 link local address (interface ID). Click the [OK] button to specify the created IPv6 address in the entry field.

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

IPv6 Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the gateway IPv6 address of the target port.

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "link local address", "global address", "unique

local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

"IPv6 Gateway" can be directly input or created automatically.

Click the [Discovery] button to display the [Select IPv6 Gateway] screen. Up to three "IPv6

Gateway" can be obtained. Select "IPv6 Gateway" and click the [OK] button. The selected

IPv6 address is specified in the entry field.

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

1173

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

TCP Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the TCP port number of the target port.

Click the [Default] button to set the default TCP port number.

0 - 28671

Do not change the TCP port number from 3260 (default value). REC can only be performed when "TCP Port No." is

"3260".

TCP Window Scale

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the TCP Window Scale of the target port.

"TCP Window Scale" is a parameter that is used to specify the TCP window size. When the I/

O load is high, the expected performance may not be achieved even if "0" or "1" is specified for TCP Window Scale. Even if "8" or higher is specified, the ETERNUS DX/AF performs as though "7" is specified for TCP Window Scale.

Specify the "TCP Window Scale" in powers of two (when the value is n-th to the power of two, "n" indicates the "TCP Window Scale"). The relationship between the setting value and the TCP Window Scale is as follows:

TCP Window Scale

32 KB

64 KB

128 KB

256 KB

512 KB

1024 KB

2048 KB

4096 KB

8192 KB

16384 KB

32768 KB

65536 KB

131072 KB

262144 KB

524288 KB

TCP Window size

0 - 14

1174

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

iSNS Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable the use of an iSNS server with IPv4 or IPv6, or disable the use of an iSNS server for the target port.

When "IPv4" or "IPv6" is selected, input the IP address of the iSNS server.

iSNS is almost equivalent to DNS for the Internet. iSNS server is used to convert the iSCSI name to the IP address on the iSCSI network.

• IPv4

• IPv6

• Disable

• This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

• When "IP Version" is "IPv4", "IPv4" and "Disable" can be selected.

• When "IP Version" is "IPv6", "IPv6" and "Disable" can be selected.

• When "IP Version" is "IPv4 / IPv6", "IPv4", "IPv6", and "Disable" can be selected.

iSNS Server (IPv4 Address)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "iSNS Server" is "IPv4", input the IPv4 address for the iSNS server.

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

iSNS Server (IPv6 Address)

Description When "iSNS Server" is "IPv6", input the IPv6 address for the iSNS server.

Input condition/

Display contents

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "link local address", "global address", "unique

local address", or "6to4 address". Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details.

Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

iSNS Server Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "iSNS Server" for the target port is "IPv4" or "IPv6", input the port number of the iSNS server.

Click the [Default] button to set the default iSNS server port number.

0 - 65535

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

1175

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

VLAN ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the VLAN ID for the target port.

When "Enable" is selected, input the VLAN ID.

• Enable

Specify the VLAN ID between 0 and 4095

• Disable

When specifying the VLAN ID, confirm the VLAN setting values of the LAN switch and the VLAN tagging configuration of the server LAN card.

Jumbo Frame

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Jumbo Frame.

Select "Enable" when using the Jumbo Frame to transfer data via the target port. When not using the Jumbo Frame, select "Disable".

Enabling Jumbo Frame increases the amount of data to be transferred per Frame, making data transfer more efficient.

Confirm that the connected device (*1) supports the Jumbo Frame before enabling the

Jumbo Frame.

*1: When the ETERNUS DX/AF and server are connected directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX/AF and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch.

• Enable

• Disable

• This item is displayed only when the port mode is "CA".

• The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports except the device iSCSI name.

MTU

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the MTU size of the target port.

"MTU" is the maximum amount of data that can be transmitted at the one time over the communication network.

• When "IP Version" is "IPv4"

576 - 9000 bytes

• When "IP Version" is "IPv6" or "IPv4 / IPv6"

1280 - 9000 bytes

This item is not displayed when the port mode is "CA".

1176

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

• Security Settings

CHAP

Description

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

CHAP User ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" (CA)

Specify "ON" to use the unidirectional CHAP authentication or bidirectional CHAP authentication for the target port, and specify "OFF" not to use both unidirectional

CHAP authentication and bidirectional CHAP authentication.

For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the

ETERNUS DX/AF receives from the host is sent, and connection possibility is judged on the server side.

• When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA" (RA)

Select "ON "to enable CHAP Authentication for the target port. Select "OFF" to disable

CHAP Authentication.

For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the

ETERNUS DX/AF receives from the remote storage system of REC is sent, and connection possibility is judged on the remote storage system of REC.

• ON

• OFF

• When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" (CA)

When using the bidirectional CHAP authentication, enter the user ID to access the target port.

When using the unidirectional CHAP authentication, it is not necessary to enter a user

ID. Make sure to set the user name and password together.

• When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA" (RA)

When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", enter the user name to access the target port.

Make sure to set the user name and password together.

• When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" (CA)

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Spaces

• When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA" (RA)

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Spaces

1177

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

New Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" (CA)

When using the bidirectional CHAP authentication, enter the password to access the target port.

When using the unidirectional CHAP authentication, it is not necessary to enter a password. Make sure to set the user name and password together.

• When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA" (RA)

When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", enter the password to access the target port.

Make sure to set the user name and password together.

• When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" (CA)

12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Spaces

• When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA" (RA)

12 - 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Spaces

Confirm New Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the same password as that entered in the New Password field.

• When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" (CA)

12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Spaces

• When the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA" (RA)

12 - 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols

Spaces

Header Digest

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "OFF" not to add the Header Digest of the target port. Select "CRC32C" to add the

Header Digest.

Header Digest is a check code to be added to the header part of the iSCSI port detailed information.

Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is the algorithm that is used to create a check code.

• OFF

• CRC32C

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

1178

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Data Digest

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "OFF" not to add the Data Digest of the target port. Select "CRC32C" to add the Data

Digest.

Data Digest is a check code to be added to the data area of the iSCSI port detailed information.

Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is the algorithm that is used to create a check code.

• OFF

• CRC32C

• This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

• Data transmission might fail when "Header Digest" or "Data Digest" is enabled. In this case, select "OFF" for

"Header Digest" and "Data Digest".

• General Settings

Transfer Rate

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the transfer speed for the target port.

This item is displayed only when "10G Base-T iSCSI" is selected for the port type.

• Auto-negotiation

The transfer rate is automatically selected from "1 Gbit/s" or "10 Gbit/s".

• 1 Gbit/s

The transfer speed is 1Gbit/s.

• 10 Gbit/s

The transfer speed is 10Gbit/s.

Reset Scope

Refer to "Reset Scope" (page 1168)

"Modify FC Port Parameters"

for details.

Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

Refer to "Release Reservation if Chip is Reset" (page 1169) in

Refer to "REC Line No." (page 1169) in

1179

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

CmdSN Count

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Change the number of commands that can be accepted from the host to the target port at the same time.

It is not necessary to change the setting from "Unlimited" for normal use.

• Unlimited

• 180

• 100

• 80

• 40

• 20

This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

• REC Settings

REC Line No.

Refer to "REC Transfer Mode" (page 1169)

REC Transfer Mode

in "Modify FC Port Parameters"

for details.

● Additional IP Address Information

• Additional IP Address Settings

Multiple VLAN

Description Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Multiple VLAN settings for the target port.

Input condition/

Display contents

When the Multiple VLAN setting is enabled, multiple IP addresses can be specified for a single iSCSI-CA port. This enables concurrent connection to multiple hosts that belong to different VLANs via a single iSCSI-CA port.

• Enable

• Disable

• This item is displayed when the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA".

• If the Multiple VLAN setting is changed to "Disable", all of the added IP address information is deleted.

When the port mode is "CA" or "CA/RA" and Multiple VLAN is enabled, multiple IP address information can be specified.

1180

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

VLAN ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the VLAN ID for IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

When "Enable" is selected, input the VLAN ID.

• Enable

Specify the VLAN ID between 0 and 4095

• Disable

IP Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the IP version for IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

• IPv4

Specify the IPv4 address. When "IPv4" is selected, input "IP Address" (required), "Subnet Mask" (required), and "Gateway".

• IPv6

Specify the IPv6 address. When "IPv6" is selected, input "IPv6 Connect IP Address"

(required), "IPv6 Global Address", and "IPv6 Gateway".

• IPv4/IPv6

Specify both the IPv4 address and the IPv6 address. The input items for IPv4 and IPv6 can be specified.

IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv4 address of IP#n (n: 1 - 15) (required when "IPv4" or "IPv4 / IPv6" is selected).

For details about parameter settings, refer to

• Up to 3 numeric characters

• First text box: "1" - "255"

• Other text boxes: "0" - "255"

Subnet Mask

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the subnet mask of IP#n (n: 1 - 15) (required when "IPv4" or "IPv4 / IPv6" is selected).

• Up to 3 numeric characters

• 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.252

Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the gateway IPv4 address of IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

• Up to 3 numeric characters

• All text boxes: "0" - "255"

IPv6 Link Local Address

Description Input the IPv6 link local address of IP#n (n: 1 - 15) (required when "IPv6" or "IPv4 / IPv6" is selected).

Input condition/

Display contents

For details about parameter settings, refer to

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

1181

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

IPv6 Connect IP Address

Description Input the IPv6 connect IP address of IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

Input condition/

Display contents

For details about parameter settings, refer to

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

IPv6 Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the gateway IPv6 address of IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

For details about parameter settings, refer to

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

TCP Port No.

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the TCP port number of IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

Click the [Default] button to set the default TCP port number.

0 - 28671

TCP Window Scale

Description Select the TCP Window Scale of IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

For details about parameter settings, refer to

0 - 14 Input condition/

Display contents

iSNS Server

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable the use of an iSNS server with IPv4 or IPv6, or disable the use of an iSNS server for IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

When "IPv4" or "IPv6" is selected, input the IP address of the iSNS server.

For details about parameter settings, refer to

• IPv4

• IPv6

• Disable

• When "IP Version" is "IPv4", "IPv4" and "Disable" can be selected.

• When "IP Version" is "IPv6", "IPv6" and "Disable" can be selected.

• When "IP Version" is "IPv4 / IPv6", "IPv4", "IPv6", and "Disable" can be selected.

1182

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

iSNS Server Port No.

Description When the iSNS server for the IP#n (n: 1 - 15) is "IPv4" or "IPv6", input the port number of the iSNS server.

Click the [Default] button to set the default iSNS server port number.

0 - 65535 Input condition/

Display contents

Jumbo Frame

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Jumbo Frame for IP#n (n: 1 - 15).

For details about parameter settings, refer to

address", or "6to4 address". Refer to "Available IPv6 Address" (page 133) for details. When the

• Enable

• Disable

The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports except the device iSCSI name.

● Send ping (IP address)

• IP Address

Description Input the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the storage system that is used to check the connection status of the target port.

Input condition/

Display contents

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "link local address", "global address", "unique local

current setting is displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

• For IPv4 address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

Class must be A, B, or C

• For IPv6 address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

• Send Number

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the transmission count of the "ping" command.

1 (Default) - 10

• Result

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Send] button to display the results of the "ping" commands that are sent.

• success

All were sent successfully.

• failed

At least one failure occurred.

1183

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Modify SAS Port Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Modify SAS Port Parameters" (page 442)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify SAS Port Parameters" (page 1316)

● Port Settings

• Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the target port or select the copy source port.

The selectable port locations are displayed as options.

CM#x CA#y Port#z (x: CM number, y: CA number, z: Port number)

• Transfer Rate

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the transfer speed for the target port.

• When the SAS type is "6G SAS"

Auto-negotiation

1.5 Gbit/s

3 Gbit/s

6 Gbit/s

• When the SAS type is "12G SAS"

Auto-negotiation

3 Gbit/s

6 Gbit/s

12 Gbit/s

• Reset Scope

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "Reset Scope" (page 1168) in

Refer to "Release Reservation if Chip is Reset" (page 1169)

• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

"Modify FC Port Parameters"

for details.

1184

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify FCoE Port Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Modify FCoE Port Parameters" (page 444)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify FCoE Port Parameters" (page 1316)

● Port Settings

• Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the target port or select the copy source port.

The selectable port locations (x: CE number, y: CM number, z: CA number, w: Port number) are displayed as options.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

CE#x CM#y CA#z Port#w

• For the other models

CM#y CA#z Port#w

• Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Set VLAN ID

Description

Set the transfer speed of the target port.

10 Gbit/s

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify "Automatic" to enable the automatic setting for the VLAN ID of the target port. Specify

"Fixed" to enable the fixed setting.

When "Automatic" is specified, VLAN ID is automatically obtained and no need to specify the

VLAN ID.

When "Fixed" is specified, input the VLAN ID.

• Automatic

• Fixed

• VLAN ID

Description Input the VLAN ID for the target port.

Make sure to set the same value for the VLAN ID as the VLAN ID of the FCoE switch that is to be connected to.

0 - 4095 Input condition/

Display contents

• Set Fabric Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify "Automatic" to enable the automatic setting for the fabric name of the target port.

Specify "Fixed" to enable the fixed setting.

When "Automatic" is specified, the fabric name of the connected FCoE switch is automatically obtained and does not need to be specified.

When "Fixed" is specified, input the fabric name.

"Automatic" should be set for normal operation. When "Fixed" is specified, connection to any switch other than the specified FCoE switch cannot be performed.

• Automatic

• Fixed

1185

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

• Fabric Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• FC Frame Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the fabric name (WWN of FCoE) of the target port.

WWN of FCoE (16-digit hexadecimal)

Select the FC frame size (bytes) of the target port.

"FC Frame Size" specifies the length of the communication information.

• 512

• 1024

• 2048

• Reset Scope

Refer to "Reset Scope" (page 1168) in

Refer to "Release Reservation if Chip is Reset" (page 1169)

• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset

"Modify FC Port Parameters"

for details.

● Destination

• Checkbox to select copy destination port

Refer to "Checkbox to select copy destination port" (page 1171) in

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Port Mode" (page 446) .

Modify Port Mode

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Port Mode" (page 1316)

● Port List

• Port Mode(After)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the changed port mode.

"Initiator" is displayed only for FC ports.

The current port mode is displayed by default.

• CA

• RA

• CA/RA

• Initiator

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1186

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

LUN Group Management

Add LUN Group

For details about this function, refer to "Add LUN Group" (page 450)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add LUN Group" (page 1316)

● LUN Group Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the LUN group name.

An existing LUN group name cannot be specified.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

● Define LUN Group

• Checkbox to select a volume

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkboxes for the volume allocation information of the host LUNs that is to be deleted from the LUN group.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● LUN Setting

• Start Host LUNs

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the host LUN from which volume allocation is to be started.

The smallest LUN among the available host LUNs is displayed as a default value. Host LUNs that are already allocated to the volume cannot be specified.

0 - 4095 (decimal)

If the allocation of the host LUN is started from an "External Volume", specify the host LUN that is allocated to the relevant volume in the external storage system. The host LUN for the External Volume is displayed in the [External Drives] screen. Refer to

"External Drives" (page 690) for details.

• Number of LUNs

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

• Select Volume

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the number of host LUNs to which the volumes are allocated.

1 - 4096 (decimal)

Select the volume number from which allocation is to be started.

Volume number from which allocation is to be started

1187

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• If any volumes that cannot be used for allocation exist within the range specified by the LUN number, these volumes are skipped and the next volume is allocated.

• Volumes that have already been registered in relevant LUN groups are not displayed.

Modify LUN Group

For details about this function, refer to "Modify LUN Group" (page 454)

● LUN Group Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Modify the LUN group name.

An existing LUN group name cannot be specified.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

● Define LUN Group

Refer to "Define LUN Group" (page 1187) in "Add LUN Group"

for details.

● LUN Setting

Refer to "LUN Setting" (page 1187) in "Add LUN Group"

for details.

1188

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host Response Management

Add Host Response

For details about this function, refer to "Add Host Response" (page 457) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Host Response" (page 1316)

For more details on setting the host response parameters, refer to "Configuration Guide -Server Connection-" for each OS type.

● Host Response Name

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the host response name.

An existing host response name cannot be used.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

● LUN Setting

• LUN Addressing

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the appropriate LUN addressing for each OS.

• Peripheral device addressing (Default)

This mode enables mapping to 256 LUNs.

• Flat space addressing his mode enables mapping to 4096 LUNs.

• LUN Expand Mode

(Peripheral Device Addressing)

Description Select the LUN expand mode.

Input condition/

Display contents

When expanding the maximum LUNs that can be mapped to 4096, select "Enable".

When the maximum LUNs that can be mapped are not expanded, select "Disable (Default)".

• Enable

• Disable (Default)

The number of LUNs that can be referenced from the host is determined by the "LUN Addressing" settings and the "LUN

Expand Mode (Peripheral Device Addressing)" settings for the host response. When changing a host response that is already allocated to a host group with the host affinity setting or a host with the host affinity setting, check the LUN setting state. If LUNs that are LUN#256 onward are used, the referable LUN setting cannot be changed to "256 LUN" (*1).

Refer to "Host response and referable number of LUNs" (page 1150)

for details.

*1: "Peripheral device addressing (Default)" is specified for LUN addressing and "Disable (Default)" is selected for the

LUN Expand Mode (Peripheral Device Addressing).

This parameter is available only when the LUN addressing setting is "Peripheral device addressing (Default)".

1189

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

1190

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● ALUA Settings

• Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access

Description Select the access type from the host to a volume.

Input condition/

Display contents

• ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH

There are recommended paths and non-recommended paths for each volume. By using a

CA port in the Controlling CM of a RAID group in which the volume belongs for the recommended paths (other ports are regarded as non-recommended paths), data migration between CMs (cross access) can be reduced.

• ACTIVE / ACTIVE

All of the paths to the volume are regarded as being recommended paths. The multipath driver decides which paths are used.

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, and the

ETERNUS DX200F:

ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH (Default)

ACTIVE/ACTIVE

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

ACTIVE-ACTIVE/PREFERRED_PATH

ACTIVE/ACTIVE (Default)

• This parameter is only available when the TPGS mode is "Enable (Default)". Note that this parameter is enabled regardless of the TPGS mode setting when the ETERNUS Multipath Driver is used.

• For storage systems other than the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, when setting "ACTIVE/ACTIVE", a data migration occurs between CMs and there may be a reduction in performance.

• TPGS Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Enable (Default)" or "Disable" for the Target Port Group Support (TPGS) mode.

TPGS is a standard that is used to achieve ALUA for multipath control. By notifying the path status (recommend or non-recommend) of each volume, the selection conditions of paths for multipath control can be determined. If the TPGS mode is "Disable", the multipath driver that is being used decides which ports are used.

• Enable (Default)

• Disable

• TPG Referrals Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Enable" or "Disable (Default)" for the TPGS referrals setting.

The TPG Referrals function determines the priority path for each block when accessing volumes via the ETERNUS Multipath Driver in order to prevent cross access.

• Enable

• Disable (Default)

• The TPG Referrals function is performed when "Enable" is selected and all of the following conditions apply:

The ETERNUS Multipath Driver supports the TPG Referrals function

"Enable (Default)" is selected for "TPGS Mode"

• This parameter is available for Standard type volumes, WSVs, TPVs, FTVs, and Standard (LUN concatenation) type volumes.

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Inquiry Command Settings

• Peripheral Device Type (Peripheral Device Addressing)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If the LUN addressing setting is "Peripheral device addressing (Default)", select a Peripheral

Device type for unconnected LUNs.

• No Device Type (3Fh) (Default)

• Not Supported (7Fh)

• Not Connected (20h)

This parameter can only be specified when the LUN addressing setting is "Peripheral device addressing (Default)".

• Peripheral Device Type (Flat Space Addressing)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When the LUN addressing setting is "Flat space addressing", select the Peripheral Device type for LUN0.

• No Device Type (3Fh) (Default)

• Controller Device (0Ch)

This parameter can only be specified when the LUN addressing setting is "Flat space addressing".

• SCSI Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the version of the SCSI specification that is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Version6 (Default)

• Version5

• Version4

• Version3

• NACA

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Enable" or "Disable (Default)" for the Normal Auto Contingent Allegiance (NACA) bit.

• Enable

• Disable (Default)

• Device ID Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the format of the volume identification information.

• Type3 (Default)

• Type1

• Type1 + Type3

• Product ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Default" or "Respond as ETERNUS DX S2" for the product ID that is responded to the host.

• Default

• Respond as ETERNUS DX S2

1191

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Test Unit Ready Command Settings

• Reservation Conflict Response

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the response status when a command to the volume is received while the relevant volume is reserved by another host.

• GOOD (Default)

• RESERVATION CONFLICT

● Sense Settings

• Notify Change of Volume Mapping

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether the host is notified ("Enable (Default)") or not notified ("Disable") when volumes are added to LUN groups set with host affinity.

• Enable (Default)

• Disable

• Notify Change of Volume Expansion

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the host is notified ("Enable (Default)") or not notified ("Disable") when the volume capacity is changed.

• Enable (Default)

• Disable

• Notify Vendor Unique Sense

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether asynchronous sense reports module disconnection in the storage system to the host ("Enable") or does not report module disconnection in the storage system to the host

("Disable (Default)").

• Enable

• Disable (Default)

A vendor unique sense code is used for sense data that is to be notified. Do not select "Enable" for this item if status monitoring of the ETERNUS DX/AF is not performed from the host.

1192

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Sense Data Conversion

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether or not to send the unconverted sense data to the host.

• No Conversion (Default)

Sense data is sent to the host without any conversion.

• Customize

Customized sense data is sent to the host.

Select "Customize" to display the sense data conversion setting field.

From SK/ASC/ASCQ

To SK/ASC/ASCQ

Customize the sense data.

Click the [Add] button. Enter SK/ASC/ASCQ of the conversion target in the "From" field, and SK/ASC/ASCQ of the conversion destination in the "To" field. Specify "From SK/ASC/ASCQ" and "To SK/ASC/ASCQ" values in pairs.

The sense data that matching the "From SK/ASC/ASCQ" value is changed to the specified "To SK/ASC/ASCQ" value.

"*" indicates a wild-card, and targets all values. The maximum number of sense data conversions is eight patterns.

Click each link to change the setting contents.

SK: SK indicates sense keys included in the sense information.

ASC: ASC indicates sense codes included in the sense information.

ASCQ: ASCQ indicates additional sense code qualifier included in the sense information.

(Example 1) The sense information (4/f1/0) is converted to (4/f1/1) before responding to the host.

From SK/ASC/ASCQ: 4/f1/0

To SK/ASC/ASCQ: 4/f1/1

(Example 2) The sense information (4/f1/0 - ff) is converted to (6/f1/0 - ff) before responding to the host.

"*" indicates all patterns from "0" to "ff". The "*" part is not converted.

From SK/ASC/ASCQ: 4/f1/*

To SK/ASC/ASCQ: 6/f1/*

● Mode Sense Command Settings

• Reservation Conflict Response (Write Exclusive)

Description Select the response status when the "Mode Sense" command to the volume is received while the relevant volume is reserved with "Write Exclusive" by the host.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Write Exclusive" is a reservation type. Refer to "Reservation" (page 815)

for details.

• GOOD

• RESERVATION CONFLICT (Default)

To use Veritas InfoScale (formerly known as Symantec Storage Foundation), select "GOOD" for this item.

● Other Settings

• Command Monitor Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select one of the following options for command timeouts.

• Default (25sec.)

Specify 25 seconds.

• Customize

Input a value between 10 and 255 seconds.

1193

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Load Balance Response Status

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the response status for the load balancing function.

• CHECK CONDITION / UNIT ATTENTION (Default)

• BUSY

• TASK SET FULL

This item is only available when "Enable" is selected for "Load Balance" in the subsystem parameter.

• iSCSI Discovery Reply Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the response mode for iSCSI Discovery requests.

• All - Reply All Ports (Default)

Replies to the server with the information for all the iSCSI ports (iSCSI names and IP addresses).

• Port - Reply Target Port Only

Replies to the server with only the information for the specified iSCSI ports (iSCSI names and IP addresses).

• iSCSI Reservation Range

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the reservation management unit of the iSCSI connection.

• Storage System (Default)

The reservation status of volumes is managed for each storage system.

• CA Port

The reservation status of volumes is managed for each CA port.

Default values for recommended patterns of host responses

Host response name

Host response

Default

Solaris

MPxIO

HP-UX AIX AIX VxVM VS850/SVC BS2000

LUN Settings

LUN Addressing (*1)

LUN Expand Mode

(Peripheral Device

Addressing)

ALUA Settings

PRHL (Default)

Disable (Default)

FLAT PRHL (Default)

Asymmetric / Symmetric

Logical Unit Access

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600

S3, and the ETERNUS DX200F

ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH (Default)

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

ACTIVE/ACTIVE (Default)

Enable (Default) TPGS Mode

TPG Referrals

Mode

Inquiry Command Settings

Peripheral Device Type

(*2)

(Peripheral Device

Addressing)

Disable (Default)

No Device Type (3Fh) (Default)

Not Connected

(20h)

Enable

ACTIVE/

ACTIVE

No Device

Type (3Fh)

(Default)

1194

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Host response name

Host response

Default

Solaris

MPxIO

HP-UX AIX AIX VxVM VS850/SVC BS2000

Peripheral Device Type

(*3)

(Flat Space Addressing)

SCSI Version

NACA

Device ID Type

No Device Type (3Fh)

(Default)

Version 6 (Default)

Disable (Default)

Type3 (Default)

Controller

Device

(0Ch)

Enable

No Device Type (3Fh) (Default)

Disable (Default)

Type1

Type1 +

Type3

Product ID Default

Test Unit Ready Command Settings

Reservation Conflict

Response

GOOD

(Default)

RESERVA-

TION CON-

FLICT

Sense Settings

Notify Change of Volume

Mapping

Notify Change of Volume

Expansion

Notify Vendor Unique

Sense

Enable (Default)

Disable (Default)

Sense Data Conversion

No Conversion

(Default)

Mode Sense Command Settings

Customize

SK4->SK6

SKB->SK6

Reservation Conflict

Response (Write Exclusive)

Other Settings

Command Monitor Time Default (25sec.)

GOOD

(Default)

RESERVA-

TION CON-

FLICT

No Conversion (Default)

RESERVATION CONFLICT (Default)

Load Balance Response

Status iSCSI Discovery

Reply Mode iSCSI

Reservation Range

CHECK CONDITION / UNIT ATTENTION (Default)

All - Reply All Ports (Default)

Storage System (Default)

GOOD

(Default)

RESERVATION CONFLICT

*1: "PRHL (Default)" indicates "Peripheral device addressing (Default)" and "FLAT" indicates "Flat space addressing".

*2: This parameter is ignored when the LUN addressing setting is "FLAT".

*3: This parameter is ignored when the LUN addressing setting is "PRHL (Default)".

Modify Host Response

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Host Response" (page 460)

● Host Response Name

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Renames a host response.

An existing host response name cannot be used.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

1195

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

● LUN Setting

Refer to "LUN Setting" (page 1189) in "Add Host Response"

for details.

● ALUA Settings

Refer to "ALUA Settings" (page 1190) in

Refer to "Inquiry Command Settings" (page 1191)

for details.

● Inquiry Command Settings

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "Test Unit Ready Command Settings" (page 1192)

for details.

● Test Unit Ready Command Settings

in "Add Host Response" for details.

● Sense Settings

Refer to "Sense Settings" (page 1192) in

Refer to "Mode Sense Command Settings" (page 1193) in

for details.

● Mode Sense Command Settings

Refer to "Other Settings" (page 1193)

for details.

● Other Settings

"Add Host Response" for details.

Host-LU QoS Management

Set Host-LU QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set Host-LU QoS" (page 467)

● Select LU QoS Group

• Select LU QoS Group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

This function selects an LU QoS group number to assign to a "Host - CA port - LUN group".

LU QoS Group No.

1196

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Set Host QoS Pattern

For details about this function, refer to "Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 472) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 1317) .

● QoS Pattern Settings

• IOPS

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the maximum performance (IOPS).

Note that "No.0" (Unlimited) cannot be changed.

The current value is displayed when this function starts.

• No.0

"Unlimited"

• No.1 - No.15

60 - 65535

• Throughput (MB/s)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the maximum performance (throughput value).

Note that "No.0" (Unlimited) cannot be changed.

The current value is displayed when this function starts.

• No.0

"Unlimited"

• No.1 - No.15

1 - 65535

Set Port QoS Pattern

For details about this function, refer to "Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 473) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 1318) .

● QoS Pattern Settings

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "QoS Pattern Settings" (page 1197)

"Set Host QoS Pattern" for details.

Set LU QoS Pattern

For details about this function, refer to "Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 475)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 1318)

● QoS Pattern Settings

Refer to "QoS Pattern Settings" (page 1197)

"Set Host QoS Pattern" for details.

1197

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Set FC/FCoE Host QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set FC/FCoE Host QoS" (page 476)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set FC/FCoE Host QoS" (page 1318) .

● FC/FCoE Host QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Description Select the maximum performance in IOPS (throughput value).

Input condition/

Display contents

When not setting the performance limit, select "Unlimited".

• Unlimited

• 15000 IOPS (800 MB/s)

• 12600 IOPS (700 MB/s)

• 10020 IOPS (600 MB/s)

• 7500 IOPS (500 MB/s)

• 5040 IOPS (400 MB/s)

• 3000 IOPS (300 MB/s)

• 1020 IOPS (200 MB/s)

• 780 IOPS (100 MB/s)

• 600 IOPS (70 MB/s)

• 420 IOPS (40 MB/s)

• 300 IOPS (25 MB/s)

• 240 IOPS (20 MB/s)

• 180 IOPS (15 MB/s)

• 120 IOPS (10 MB/s)

• 60 IOPS (5 MB/s)

The bandwidth limit can be changed using the procedure in

"Set Host QoS Pattern" (page 472) or the

"set qos-bandwidth-limit" ETERNUS CLI command. If the value is changed, that value is displayed as an option for this item.

Set iSCSI Host QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set iSCSI Host QoS" (page 477)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set iSCSI Host QoS" (page 1318) .

● iSCSI Host QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Refer to "FC/FCoE Host QoS Setting" (page 1198)

"Set FC/FCoE Host QoS"

for details.

1198

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Set SAS Host QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set SAS Host QoS" (page 478) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set SAS Host QoS" (page 1318)

● SAS Host QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "FC/FCoE Host QoS Setting" (page 1198)

"Set FC/FCoE Host QoS"

for details.

Set FC Port QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set FC Port QoS" (page 480) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set FC Port QoS" (page 1319) .

● FC Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the maximum performance in IOPS (throughput value).

When not setting the performance limit, select "Unlimited".

• Unlimited

• 27000 IOPS (1000 MB/s)

• 21000 IOPS (850 MB/s)

• 15000 IOPS (700 MB/s)

• 10020 IOPS (600 MB/s)

• 8040 IOPS (500 MB/s)

• 6000 IOPS (400 MB/s)

• 5040 IOPS (300 MB/s)

• 4020 IOPS (250 MB/s)

• 3000 IOPS (200 MB/s)

• 2040 IOPS (160 MB/s)

• 1020 IOPS (125 MB/s)

• 720 IOPS (90 MB/s)

• 480 IOPS (60 MB/s)

• 240 IOPS (30 MB/s)

• 120 IOPS (15 MB/s)

The bandwidth limit can be changed using the procedure in

"Set Port QoS Pattern" (page 473)

or the

"set qos-bandwidth-limit" ETERNUS CLI command. If the value is changed, that value is displayed as an option for this item.

1199

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

Set iSCSI Port QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set iSCSI Port QoS" (page 481) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set iSCSI Port QoS" (page 1319) .

● iSCSI Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Refer to "FC Port QoS Setting" (page 1199) in "Set FC Port QoS"

for details.

Set SAS Port QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set SAS Port QoS" (page 482) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set SAS Port QoS" (page 1319)

● SAS Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Refer to "FC Port QoS Setting" (page 1199) in "Set FC Port QoS"

for details.

Set FCoE Port QoS

For details about this function, refer to "Set FCoE Port QoS" (page 483)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set FCoE Port QoS" (page 1319)

● FCoE Port QoS Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Refer to "FC Port QoS Setting" (page 1199) in "Set FC Port QoS"

for details.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1200

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add LU QoS Group

For details about this function, refer to "Add LU QoS Group" (page 485)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add LU QoS Group" (page 1319)

● LU QoS Group Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the maximum performance in IOPS (throughput value).

When not setting the performance limit, select "Unlimited".

• Unlimited

• 15000 IOPS (800 MB/s)

• 12600 IOPS (700 MB/s)

• 10020 IOPS (600 MB/s)

• 7500 IOPS (500 MB/s)

• 5040 IOPS (400 MB/s)

• 3000 IOPS (300 MB/s)

• 1020 IOPS (200 MB/s)

• 780 IOPS (100 MB/s)

• 600 IOPS (70 MB/s)

• 420 IOPS (40 MB/s)

• 300 IOPS (25 MB/s)

• 240 IOPS (20 MB/s)

• 180 IOPS (15 MB/s)

• 120 IOPS (10 MB/s)

• 60 IOPS (5 MB/s)

The bandwidth limit can be changed using the procedure in

"Set LU QoS Pattern" (page 475) or the

"set qos-bandwidth-limit" ETERNUS CLI command. If the value is changed, that value is displayed as an option for this item.

Modify LU QoS Group

For details about this function, refer to "Modify LU QoS Group" (page 486)

● LU QoS Group Setting

• Bandwidth Limit

Refer to "LU QoS Group Setting" (page 1201)

"Add LU QoS Group"

for details.

1201

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

NAS Management

Create Shared Folder

For details about this function, refer to "Create Shared Folder" (page 488) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Shared Folder" (page 1319) .

● Shared Folder Settings

• Usage

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the usage of the shared folder.

• File Sharing

Create a regular shared folder.

• Home Directory

Create a home directory.

• Shared Folder Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the shared folder name.

• If "File Sharing" is selected for "Usage"

Enter the shared folder name. An existing shared folder name cannot be specified.

• If "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage"

"homes" is displayed for this item.

• If "File Sharing" is selected for "Usage"

Up to 76 alphanumeric characters and symbols (in the US-ASCII format)

Note that the following symbols and characters cannot be used.

Symbols

Backslash (0x5C), slash (0x2F), colon (0x3A), asterisk (0x2A), question mark (0x3F), double quotation (0x22), less-than sign (0x3C), greater-than sign (0x3E), vertical line

(0x7C), equal (0x3D), comma (0x2C), semicolon (0x3B), left square bracket (0x5B), right square bracket (0x5D), plus (0x2B), and percent (0x25)

Spaces (0x20)

Reserved words

".", "..", ".snap", "global", "homes", "printers", and "IPC$" (Entered letters are not casesensitive.)

"$bak" and strings ending with "$bak"

"@GMT" and strings starting with "@GMT"

(Entered letters are not case-sensitive.)

• If "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage" homes

1202

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Protocol

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If "File Sharing" is selected for "Usage", select a protocol that is used by the file system.

• CIFS

Use the Windows CIFS protocol.

• NFS

Use the UNIX NFS protocol.

• CIFS/NFS

Use the Windows CIFS or the UNIX NFS protocol.

If "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage", "CIFS" is selected for this item.

• Owner

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the owner of the shared folder.

Enter the user name for the domain to which the ETERNUS DX belongs.

If "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage", the "Owner" setting is used when the following functions are executed.

• Backup

• Restoration

The user specified as the owner can access shared folders ("$homes" or "homes$bak") that are available when restoring or mounting backups that include home directories.

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

Note that the following symbols and characters cannot be used.

• Symbols

Slash (0x2F), left square bracket (0x5B), right square bracket (0x5D), colon (0x3A), semicolon (0x3B), vertical line (0x7C), equal (0x3D), comma (0x2C), plus (0x2B), asterisk

(0x2A), question mark (0x3F), less-than sign (0x3C), greater-than sign (0x3E), double quotation (0x22), and at sign (0x40)

• The following reserved words

"shareuser$", "bin", "daemon", "adm", "lp", "sync", "shutdown", "halt", "mail", "uucp", "operator", "games", "gopher", "ftp", "nobody", "vcsa", "rpc", "nscd", "ntp", "saslauth", "mailnull",

"smmsp", "rpcuser", "nfsnobody", "sshd", "nslcd", "tcpdump", and "oprofile"

1203

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the group of the shared folder.

Enter the group name for the domain to which the ETERNUS DX belongs.

If "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage", the "Group" setting is used when the following functions are executed.

• Backup

• Restoration

The specified group can access shared folders ("$homes" or "homes$bak") that are available when restoring or mounting backups that include home directories.

Note that BUILTIN groups cannot be specified.

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

Note that the following symbols and characters cannot be used.

• Symbols

Slash (0x2F), left square bracket (0x5B), right square bracket (0x5D), colon (0x3A), semicolon (0x3B), vertical line (0x7C), equal (0x3D), comma (0x2C), plus (0x2B), asterisk

(0x2A), question mark (0x3F), less-than sign (0x3C), greater-than sign (0x3E), double quotation (0x22), and at sign (0x40)

• The following reserved words

"shareuser$", "bin", "daemon", "sys", "adm", "tty", "disk", "lp", "mem", "kmem", "wheel",

"mail", "uucp", "man", "games", "gopher", "video", "dip", "ftp", "lock", "audio", "nobody",

"users", "utmp", "utempter", "floppy", "vcsa", "rpc", "nscd", "cdrom", "tape", "dialout", "ntp",

"saslauth", "mailnull", "smmsp", "rpcuser", "nfsnobody", "sshd", "ldap", "tcpdump", and

"oprofile"

• SMB Encryption of Data Access

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When performing SMB encryption for data while accessing the shared folder, select "Enable".

When not encrypting, select "Disable".

• Enable

• Disable

• This item can be set when "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS" is selected for "Protocol".

• If a client does not support SMB3.0 or SMB3.1, accessing a shared folder where "Enable" is set for "SMB Encryption of

Data Access" is not available.

• Note that the system performance may be reduced when "Enable" is selected for this item.

• Access Based Enumeration

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To hide the shared folders and directories that cannot be accessed according to the access control list (ACL function), select "Enable". To display inaccessible shared folders and directories, select "Disable".

• Enable

• Disable

• This item can be set when "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS" is selected for "Protocol".

• If "Home Directory" is selected for "Usage", "Disable" is set for this item.

1204

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• CIFS Allowed Hosts

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input all of the hosts that are allowed access to the shared folder by using the CIFS protocol.

When this parameter is omitted, access from all hosts are allowed. To specify multiple hosts,

separate each input value with a comma (0x2C). Refer to "Method for inputting hosts" (page

1206) for details.

• IP address, FQDN, or host name

• Alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

• Up to 1023 characters

Note that any commas (0x2C) that are used to separate the values are also included in the number of characters.

• This item can be set when "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS" is selected for "Protocol".

• If both "CIFS Allowed Hosts" and "CIFS Denied Hosts" are omitted, access from all hosts is allowed.

• If the same host is specified for both "CIFS Allowed Hosts" and "CIFS Denied Hosts", access from the relevant host is allowed because the "CIFS Allowed Hosts" setting has priority.

• Specify all the hosts that have already been allowed access, and hosts that will be allowed access.

• CIFS Denied Hosts

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input all of the hosts that are denied access to the shared folder by using the CIFS protocol.

To specify multiple hosts, separate each input value with a comma (0x2C). Refer to "Method for inputting hosts" (page 1206) for details.

• IP address, FQDN, or host name

• Alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

• Up to 1023 characters

Note that any commas (0x2C) that are used to separate the values are also included in the number of characters.

• This item can be set when "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS" is selected for "Protocol".

• If both "CIFS Allowed Hosts" and "CIFS Denied Hosts" are omitted, access from all hosts is allowed.

• If the same host is specified for both "CIFS Allowed Hosts" and "CIFS Denied Hosts", access from the relevant host is allowed because the "CIFS Allowed Hosts" setting has priority.

• Specify all the hosts that have already been denied access, and hosts that will be denied access.

1205

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• NFS Allowed Hosts

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input all of the hosts that are allowed access to the shared folder by using the NFS protocol.

When this parameter is omitted, access from all hosts are allowed.

To specify multiple hosts, separate each input value with a comma (0x2C). Refer to "Method for inputting hosts" (page 1206) for details.

• IP address, FQDN, or host name

• Alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

• Up to 1023 characters

Note that any commas (0x2C) that are used to separate the values are also included in the number of characters.

• This item can be set when "NFS" or "CIFS/NFS" is selected for "Protocol" and "File Sharing" is selected for "Usage".

• Specify all the hosts that have already been allowed access, and hosts that will be allowed access.

● CIFS Permissions

• Checkbox to permit CIFS access

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox for the CIFS access permissions that are to be deleted (multiple selections can be made).

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Select Volume

• Radio button to select a volume

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a NAS user volume to assign the shared folder.

Radio button

• Selected

• Cleared

Method for inputting hosts

Specify CIFS Allowed Hosts, CIFS Denied Hosts, or NFS Allowed Hosts by using one of the following formats. If a value other than an IP address is specified, the value is regarded as being an FQDN.

• Specifying a single host

[Example 1] 192.0.2.1

• Specifying multiple hosts

Separate each input value with a comma (0x2C).

Specify the hosts by using IP addresses.

[Example 2] 192.0.2.1, 192.0.2.2, 192.0.2.3

Specify the IP address and the subnet mask.

[Example 3] 203.0.113.0/255.255.255.0

[Example 4] 203.0.113.0/24

1206

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Add CIFS Permission

• Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the type for setting the CIFS access permissions.

To select all authorized users and groups in the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series, select "Everyone".

• User

• Group

• Everyone

User and group are user information that is managed in the Active Directory authentication server.

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the CIFS access permission target user name or group name.

Up to 2048 alphanumeric characters and symbols (in the US-ASCII format) (Entered letters are not case-sensitive)

Note that the following symbols and characters cannot be used.

• Backslash (0x5C), slash (0x2F), colon (0x3A), asterisk (0x2A), question mark (0x3F), double quotation (0x22), less-than sign (0x3C), greater-than sign (0x3E), vertical line (0x7C), equal (0x3D), comma (0x2C), semicolon (0x3B), left square bracket (0x5B), right square bracket (0x5D), plus (0x2B), and at sign (0x40)

• This item is available when "User" or "Group" is selected for the CIFS access permission type.

• "Everyone" cannot be entered as the name. (Entered letters are not case-sensitive.)

• The user names and group names which have already been used cannot be entered.

• Authority

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the CIFS access permissions for shared folders.

The setting conditions for each CIFS access permission type are as follows.

• If "User" or "Group" is selected for the CIFS access permission type, the CIFS access permission is set only for the specified users or groups. Note that other users and groups cannot access the relevant shared folder.

• If "Everyone" is selected for the CIFS access permission type, the CIFS access permission is set for all users and groups.

• "Read/Write"

Allows reading and writing to.

• "Read Only"

Allows reading only.

• Both "Read/Write" and "Read Only" cannot be set to a single user at the same time.

• Both "Read/Write" and "Read Only" cannot be set to a single group at the same time.

1207

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

"Read/Write" is given priority over "Read Only" as described below.

• If "Read Only" is specified for UserA and "Read/Write" is specified for GroupA in which UserA is a part of, "Read/Write" is set for all users in GroupA including UserA.

• If "Read/Write" is specified for UserA and "Read Only" is specified for GroupA in which UserA is a part of, "Read/Write" is set for UserA and "Read Only" is set for all other users in GroupA excluding UserA.

• If "Everyone" is selected for the CIFS access permission type, the authority is set with the same conditions as when

"Read/Write" or "Read Only" is set to all authorized groups in the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

Modify Shared Folder

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Shared Folder" (page 494)

● Modify Shared Folder Settings

• Writable

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To set the write permission for the shared folder, select "Yes". To not set a write permission, select "No".

• Yes

• No

• If "Usage" is "File Sharing", this item can be set.

• If "Usage" is "Home Directory", "Yes" is set for this item.

• Oplocks

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To use the Oplocks function to avoid conflicts between files by locking the files in the shared folder, select "Enable". To stop use of this function, select "Disable".

• Enable

• Disable

This item can be set when "Protocol" is "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS". However, selecting "Enable" for this item is not recommended when "Protocol" is "CIFS/NFS".

• Owner

Refer to "Owner" (page 1203)

Refer to "Group" (page 1204) in

• Group

"Create Shared Folder"

for details.

1208

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• SMB Encryption of Data Access

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When performing SMB encryption for data while accessing the shared folder, select "Enable".

When not encrypting, select "Disable".

• Enable

• Disable

• This item can be set when "Protocol" is "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS".

• If a client does not support SMB3.0 or SMB3.1, accessing a shared folder where "Enable" is set for "SMB Encryption of

Data Access" is not available.

• Note that the system performance may be reduced when "Enable" is selected for this item.

• If this setting is changed for existing shared folders, sessions that have access to relevant shared folders are temporarily disconnected. However, if sessions that have already been accessing shared folders exist, the ETERNUS DX waits for these sessions to complete.

• Access Based Enumeration

Description To hide the shared folders and directories that cannot be accessed according to the access control list (ACL function), select "Enable". To display inaccessible shared folders and directories, select "Disable".

Input condition/

Display contents

This setting becomes available when the protocol is "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS".

• Enable

• Disable

• This item can be set when "Protocol" is "CIFS" or "CIFS/NFS".

• If this setting is changed for existing shared folders, sessions that have access to relevant shared folders are temporarily disconnected.

If "Usage" is "Home Directory", "Disable" is set for this item.

• CIFS Allowed Hosts

Refer to "CIFS Allowed Hosts" (page 1205) in

"Create Shared Folder"

for details.

• CIFS Denied Hosts

Refer to "CIFS Denied Hosts" (page 1205)

Refer to "NFS Allowed Hosts" (page 1206) in

• NFS Allowed Hosts

"Create Shared Folder"

for details.

1209

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

● CIFS Permissions

• Checkbox to permit CIFS access

Refer to "Checkbox to permit CIFS access" (page 1206)

in "Create Shared Folder"

for details.

● Add CIFS Permission

• Type

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Refer to "Type" (page 1207)

Refer to "Name" (page 1207)

• Name

in "Create Shared Folder"

for details.

• Authority

Refer to "Authority" (page 1207)

For details about this function, refer to "Create NAS Interface" (page 498) .

Create NAS Interface

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create NAS Interface" (page 1320)

● NAS Interface Settings

• Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the port in which the NAS interface is to be created.

Only the NAS ports that are not configured in a NAS interface are displayed as options in the list box. Note that bonding ports (or member ports for Bonding) are not displayed.

The NAS ports that are not configured in a NAS interface (CM#x CA#y Port#z)

• RIP Setting

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to receive the routing information with the target port.

To receive the routing information with the target port, select "Enable". To stop receiving the routing information, select "Disable".

RIP is used to share the routing information between routers, and to simplify the network settings.

• Enable

• Disable

1210

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Redundant Port

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select which redundant port is used for the multipath configuration of the target port. If a multipath configuration is not used, select "None".

When a multipath configuration is not used for the target port, "single ports with NAS interface settings" and "None" are displayed as options. Ports in a different CM from the target port are displayed as redundant ports. Note that bonding ports (or member ports for Bonding) are not displayed.

If a multipath configuration is already used for the target port, a redundant port is displayed.

This item is available when a port is specified.

When a multipath configuration is not used for the port:

• Single ports with NAS interface settings (CM#x CA#y Port#z)

• None

When a multipath configuration is used for the port:

• Redundant ports (CM#x CA#y Port#z)

• IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv4 address of the target port.

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• Class must be A, B, or C.

• Subnet Mask

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the subnet mask of the target port.

192.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.252

• Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv4 gateway address of the target port.

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 0 - 255 for all the text boxes (decimal)

• Class must be A, B, or C.

• IPv6 Link Local Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv6 link local address of the target port.

fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

• IPv6 Connect IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv6 connect IP address of the target port.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

1211

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• IPv6 Gateway

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv6 gateway address of the target port.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Modify NAS Interface" (page 500) .

for details.

• IPv6 Prefix length

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv6 prefix length of the target port.

3 - 128

Modify NAS Interface

Refer to "Create NAS Interface" (page 1210) for details about the setting items of this function.

Change NAS Server Name

For details about this function, refer to "Change NAS Server Name" (page 502)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Change NAS Server Name" (page 1320)

● NAS Server Settings

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the NAS server name for the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

Up to 15 alphanumeric characters and symbols (in the US-ASCII format)

The following list shows the available characters:

• 0 (0x30) - 9 (0x39)

• A (0x41) - Z (0x5A), a (0x61) - z (0x7A)

• A hyphen (0x2D) except as the first and/or the last character

Set DNS Server

For details about this function, refer to "Set DNS Server" (page 503) .

● DNS Server Settings

• Primary IP Address

Primary IP Address

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the primary IP address of the DNS server that is used for operation LAN. Specify the IP address with the IPv4 format.

Note that the IPv4 address cannot be the same as the secondary IP address.

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

1212

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Secondary IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the secondary IP address of the DNS server that is used for operation LAN. Specify the IP address with the IPv4 format.

Note that the IPv4 address cannot be the same as the primary IP address.

When specifying the secondary IP address, the primary IP address settings cannot be omitted.

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx: 1 - 255 for the top field (decimal) xxx: 0 - 255 for other fields (decimal)

• IPv6 Primary IP Address

Description Input the primary IP address of the DNS server that is used for operation LAN. Specify the IP address with the IPv6 format.

Input condition/

Display contents

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "global address" or "unique local address". Refer to

for details. When the current setting is displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

Note that the IPv6 address cannot be the same as the secondary IP address.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

for details.

• IPv6 Secondary IP Address

Description Input the secondary IP address of the DNS server that is used for operation LAN. Specify the IP address with the IPv6 format.

Input condition/

Display contents

The following IPv6 addresses can be used; "global address" or "unique local address". Refer to

for details. When the current setting is displayed, the IPv6 address is displayed as an abbreviation.

Note that the IPv6 address cannot be the same as the primary IP address.

When specifying the IPv6 secondary IP address, the IPv6 primary IP address settings cannot be omitted.

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Set Authentication Server" (page 504) .

for details.

Set Authentication Server

● Active Directory Authentication Settings, LDAP Authentication Settings

• Domain Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the domain name of the authentication server.

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

1213

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Domain Administrator

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the administrator name for authentication server management.

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

If the domain administrator's name is changed, the password must also be changed.

• Change Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To change the administrator password for authentication server, select the checkbox.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Domain Administrator's Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the administrator password for the authentication server management.

When the domain administrator's password is specified, select the "Change Password" checkbox.

• Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

• When the domain administrator's password is specified

Select the "Change Password" checkbox.

• Confirm Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the same password as the "Domain Administrator's Password" field for the authentication server.

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

• Authentication Server (1) - (3)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or the FQDN of the authentication server.

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (in the US-ASCII format)

The following list shows the available characters:

• 0 (0x30) - 9 (0x39)

• A (0x41) - Z (0x5A), a (0x61) - z (0x7A)

• Hyphen (0x2D), period (0x2E), comma (0x3A)

1214

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Add Local User

For details about this function, refer to "Add Local User" (page 506)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Local User" (page 1320)

● Local User Settings

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter a local user name.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (in the US-ASCII format)

• The following list shows the available characters:

A hyphen (0x2D), an underscore (0x5F), and a dollar sign (0x24) can be used.

Alphanumeric characters or an underscore (0x5F) can be used for the first character.

A dollar sign (0x24) can only be used for the last character.

• Note that the following reserved words cannot be used.

"adm", "audio", "bin", "cdrom", "cgred", "daemon", "dialout", "dip", "disk", "floppy", "ftp",

"games", "gopher", "halt", "kmem", "ldap", "lock", "lp", "mail", "mailnull", "man", "mem",

"nfsnobody", "nobody", "nscd", "nslcd", "ntp", "operator", "oprofile", "root", "rpc", "rpcuser",

"saslauth", "shutdown", "smmsp", "sshd", "sync", "sys", "tape", "tcpdump", "tty", "users",

"utempter", "utmp", "uucp", "vcsa", "video", "wheel", and "everyone"

• An existing local user name cannot be used.

• The name that was registered as the NAS Engine login user name (for audit log FTP or for investigation log FTP) cannot be used. The NAS Engine login user name is created with the "create nas-engine-user" ETERNUS CLI command.

• Entered letters are not case-sensitive.

• User ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter a local user ID for the local user.

If this item is omitted, an unused number is assigned in ascending order starting from "500".

• 450

• 500 - 999

• If "shareuser$" is entered for "Name", only "450" can be set for this item.

• An existing user ID cannot be used.

• Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter a password for the local user.

8 - 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

• Confirm Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the same character string as the value entered in the "Password" field for confirmation.

8 - 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

1215

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Member group selection ([Primary Group] Tab)

• Radio button to select a primary group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

To change the primary group from "sharegroup$" (default), select a radio button for primary group to which the local user will belong.

Local groups registered in the ETERNUS DX that can be used as primary groups

The same group as the secondary group cannot be selected.

● Member group selection ([Secondary Group] Tab)

• Checkbox to select a secondary group

Description Select the checkboxes for the secondary groups to which the local user will belong and clear checkboxes for the secondary groups to which the local user will not belong.

Input condition/

Display contents

The local user can belong to a maximum of 16 secondary groups or the local user may not belong to any secondary group.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

The same group as the primary group cannot be selected.

Special group

Local group

Local group name Description

450

451

1002

1003

1004 shareuser$ sharegroup$

BUILTIN_Administrators

BUILTIN_Users

BUILTIN_BackupOperators

The local user "shareuser$" belongs to this group.

The initial primary group to which the created local users belong.

This group is automatically created when local users are created. If all local users that belong to this group are deleted, this group is automatically deleted.

If the local user "shareuser$" is deleted and then added again, the recreated "shareuser$" belongs to this group.

One of the BUILTIN groups (*1). Users who belong to this group can execute all operations for all domain controllers within the domain.

One of the BUILTIN groups (*1). Users who belong to this group can execute most of the general operations.

Available groups

Primary group

Secondary group

N/A

1216

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

OK: Affiliation possible

N/A: Affiliation not possible

Modify Local User

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Local User" (page 508)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Local User" (page 1320)

● Local User Settings

• Change Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Only when changing the password, select the "Change Password" checkbox.

When the "Change Password" checkbox is selected, enter a new password in "Password" and

"Confirm Password".

"Change Password" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Password

Refer to "Password" (page 1215) in "Add Local User"

for details.

• Confirm Password

Refer to "Confirm Password" (page 1215) in "Add Local User"

for details.

● Member group selection ([Primary Group] Tab)

• Radio button to select a primary group

Description To change the primary group, select the radio button for the primary group to which the local user will belong.

Input condition/

Display contents

The radio button for the primary group to which the specified local user currently belongs is selected by default.

Local groups registered in the ETERNUS DX that can be used as primary groups

The same group as the secondary group cannot be selected.

1217

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Member group selection ([Secondary Group] Tab)

• Checkbox to select a secondary group

Description Select the checkboxes for the secondary groups to which the local user will belong and clear checkboxes for the secondary groups to which the local user will not belong.

Input condition/

Display contents

The checkboxes for the secondary group to which the specified local user currently belongs are selected by default.

The local user can belong to a maximum of 16 secondary groups or the local user may not belong to any secondary group.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

The same group as the primary group cannot be selected.

Add Local Group

For details about this function, refer to "Add Local Group" (page 510) .

● Local Group Settings

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter a local group name.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (in the US-ASCII format)

• The following list shows the available characters:

A hyphen (0x2D), an underscore (0x5F), and a dollar sign (0x24) can be used.

Alphanumeric characters or an underscore (0x5F) can be used for the first character.

A dollar sign (0x24) can only be used for the last character.

• Note that the following words cannot be used.

The following reserved words:

"adm", "audio", "bin", "cdrom", "cgred", "daemon", "dialout", "dip", "disk", "floppy", "ftp",

"games", "gopher", "halt", "kmem", "ldap", "lock", "lp", "mail", "mailnull", "man", "mem",

"nfsnobody", "nobody", "nscd", "nslcd", "ntp", "operator", "oprofile", "root", "rpc",

"rpcuser", "saslauth", "shutdown", "smmsp", "sshd", "sync", "sys", "tape", "tcpdump",

"tty", "users", "utempter", "utmp", "uucp", "vcsa", "video", "wheel", and "everyone"

The following special group names:

"sharegroup$", "BUILTIN_Administrators", "BUILTIN_Users", and "BUILTIN_BackupOperators"

• An existing local group name cannot be used.

• Entered letters are not case-sensitive.

• Local group names that consist of only numbers cannot be used.

1218

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Group ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter a local group ID for the local group.

If this item is omitted, an unused number is assigned in ascending order starting from "500".

• 450

• 500 - 999

• If "shareuser$" is entered for "Name", only "450" can be set for this item.

• An existing group ID cannot be used.

Add Quota Setting

For details about this function, refer to "Add Quota Setting" (page 513)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Add Quota Setting" (page 1320) .

● Select Volume

• Radio button to select a NAS user volume

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a quota target NAS user volume.

A quota target NAS user volume

When performing a quota setting for the shared folder, if the NAS user volume to which the relevant shared folder belongs is unknown, skip the selection of the NAS user volume.

If "Share" is selected for the quota target type in the [Add Quota Target] screen, a radio button becomes available for the

NAS user volume to which the relevant shared folder belongs. In this case, other NAS user volumes cannot be selected.

● Quota Target

• Checkbox to select a quota setting information

Description Select a quota setting information to be deleted.

Input condition/

Display contents

Only the quota setting information that was added can be deleted. Multiple quota setting information can be selected at the same time.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Add Quota Target

• Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a type for the quota target.

• User

• Group

• Share

1219

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If "User" or "Group" is selected for the quota target type, enter the user name or the group name of the quota target.

If "Share" is selected for the quota target type, select the shared folder name of the quota target.

If the quota setting information with the same "Type" and "Name" already exists, that quota cannot be specified.

• If "User" or "Group" is selected for the quota target type

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols (0x20 - 0x7E in the US-ASCII format)

(except the question mark (0x3F) and the backslash (0x5C))

• If "Share" is selected for the quota target type

Shared folder name

homes

If the NAS user volume is selected in the initial screen, only the shared folders that belong to the relevant NAS user volume are displayed as options. If the NAS user volume is not selected, all the shared folders that are registered in the

ETERNUS DX are displayed as options.

• Warning (Drive Space)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the warning value for the drive usage in the quota target.

If "0" is entered or no values are specified, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the

ETERNUS DX.

• 0 - 128TB

• MB/GB/TB

• Limit (Drive Space)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the limit value for the drive usage in the quota target.

If "0" is entered or no values are specified, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the

ETERNUS DX.

• 0 - 128TB

• MB/GB/TB

If both the warning and limit values are specified, the limit value must be larger than the warning value.

• Warning (File Count)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the warning value for the number of files in the quota target.

If "0" is entered, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the ETERNUS DX.

0 - 134217723

1220

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Limit (File Count)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the limit value for the number of files in the quota target.

If "0" is entered, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the ETERNUS DX.

0 - 134217723

If both the warning and limit values are specified, the limit value must be larger than the warning value.

Modify Quota Setting

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Quota Setting" (page 517) .

● Quota Settings

• Warning (Drive Space)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Change the warning value for the drive space.

When this function starts, the current warning value for the drive space is displayed.

If "0" is entered or no values are specified, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the

ETERNUS DX.

• 0 - 128TB

• MB/GB/TB

When this function starts, the warning value is displayed with the largest unit (TB/GB/MB) after rounding down to the nearest whole number. For example, if the warning value in the ETERNUS DX is "1572864000 KB", "1500 GB" is displayed.

• Limit (Drive Space)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Change the limit value for the drive space.

When this function starts, the current limit value for the drive space is displayed.

If "0" is entered or no values are specified, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the

ETERNUS DX.

• 0 - 128TB

• MB/GB/TB

If both the warning and limit values are specified, the limit value must be larger than the warning value.

When this function starts, the limit value is displayed with the largest unit (TB/GB/MB) after rounding down to the nearest whole number. Refer to note for

"Warning (Drive Space)" (page 1221)

for details.

1221

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Connectivity Management

• Warning (File Count)

Description Change the warning value for the file count.

The current warning value for the file count is displayed when this function starts.

If "0" is entered, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the ETERNUS DX.

0 - 134217723 Input condition/

Display contents

• Limit (File Count)

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Change the limit value for the file count.

The current limit value for the file count is displayed when this function starts.

If "0" is entered, "Not Specified" (unlimited) is registered in the ETERNUS DX.

0 - 134217723

If both the warning and limit values are specified, the limit value must be larger than the warning value.

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1222

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

RAID Group Management

This section provides information on the parameters of the following actions for RAID group management.

•

Create RAID Group

•

Rename RAID Group

•

Change Controlling CM

•

Expand RAID Group

•

Modify RAID Group Parameters

•

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

•

Set Key Group (RAID Group)

•

External RAID Group Management

Create RAID Group

For details about this function, refer to "Create RAID Group" (page 524) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create RAID Group" (page 1322) .

● New RAID Group

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a RAID group name that is to be created.

When creating a single RAID group, an existing RAID group name cannot be used.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

● Automatic Setting

• Number of RAID Groups

Description Input the number of RAID groups that are to be created.

Input condition/

Display contents

When creating multiple RAID groups at a time, the new RAID groups are named automatically.

Refer to

Several restrictions apply to RAID groups and volumes in the "RAID6-FR" type RAID group. For details, refer to "Restrictions for RAID6-FR" (page 524)

for details.

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

1 - 48

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

1 - 72

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

1 - 132

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

1 - 264

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

1 - 528

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

1 - 48

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3

1 - 768

• For the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

1 - 2304

1223

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

(Cont’d)

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

1 - 24

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

1 - 96

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

1 - 12

• Drive Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the type of drive that configures a RAID group from the list box.

• Online

• Nearline

• SSD

• Online SED

• Nearline SED

• SSD SED

• RAID Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the level of RAID group that is to be created.

• High Performance (RAID1+0)

• High Capacity (RAID5)

• High Reliability (RAID6)

• High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

• Reliability (RAID5+0)

• Mirroring (RAID1)

• Striping (RAID0)

•

• Several restrictions apply to RAID groups that are created with "RAID5+0". For the details, refer to

"Restrictions for

RAID5+0" (page 525) .

• Select Drives

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the requirements that are given priority when creating a Fast Recovery RAID group with automatic drive configuration.

This item is available only when the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)".

• Minimize number of using drives

Minimize the number of drives in the RAID group to achieve high-speed rebuilding. Refer to

"Drive configuration for Fast Recovery RAID groups" (page 1228) for details.

• Prioritize rebuild rate

Use more drives in a RAID group and distribute data to achieve high-speed rebuilding.

Refer to "Drive configuration for Fast Recovery RAID groups" (page 1228) for details.

1224

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• RAID Group Capacity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the RAID group capacity that is to be created and select the units of capacity.

A RAID group is automatically created with a capacity of the entered value or higher.

• Numeric characters

• TB/GB/MB

● Manual Setting

• RAID Level

Refer to "RAID Level" (page 1224)

in "Automatic Setting"

for details.

• Controlling CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the Controlling CM of the RAID group to be created.

"Automatic" and the normal CM number ("CE#x CM#y" or "CM#y") that is installed are displayed as options (x: CE number, y: CM number).

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the Controlling CM

that is to be allocated is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Automatic Controlling CM setting" (page 1229) for details.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

Automatic

CE#x CM#y

• For the other models

Automatic

CM#y

1225

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Fast Recovery Configuration

Description Select the drive configuration for a Fast Recovery RAID group.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the drive configuration from "No. of drives in the configuration", "capacity efficiency", and "rebuilding speed" according to your environment. Refer to

"Drive configuration for Fast

Recovery RAID groups" (page 1228) for details. The more redundant sets there are, the faster

the rebuilding becomes. This item is blank when the RAID level is not "High Reliability (RAID6-

FR)".

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

(3D+2P)x2+1HS

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(9D+2P)x2+1HS

Blank

• For the other models

(3D+2P)x2+1HS

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(9D+2P)x2+1HS

(12D+2P)x2+1HS

(5D+2P)x4+1HS

(13D+2P)x2+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

(3D+2P)x6+1HS

Blank

D: Data drives, P: Parity drives, HS: Hot Spares

• RAID Group Capacity

Description The RAID group capacity is displayed.

The "RAID Group Capacity" is automatically calculated from the selected RAID level and drives.

Capacity of RAID group that is to be created Input condition/

Display contents

● Drive Selection ([Tabular] Tab)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1226

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Drive Selection ([Graphic] Tab)

• DE selection list box

Description Select the DE group.

Options are displayed in the list box when at least one CE or DE in the DE group is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The options and DE groups for each model are as follows:

Options and DE groups for each model

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

DE#6x

DE#7x

DE#8x

DE#9x

DE#Ax

DE#Bx

DE#0x

DE#2x

DE#3x

DE#0x

DE#1x

DE#2x

DE#3x

DE#4x

DE#5x

DE#1x

DE#2x

DE#3x

DE#2x

DE#3x

DE#0x

DE#1x

DE#2x

DE#3x

DE#0x

DE#1x

Option

DE#0x

DE#1x

DE#0x

DE#1x

DE#20 - DE#2F

DE#30 - DE#3F

DE#00 - DE#0F

DE#10 - DE#1F

DE#20 - DE#2F

DE#30 - DE#3F

DE#40 - DE#4F

DE#50 - DE#5F

DE#60 - DE#6F

DE#70 - DE#7F

DE#80 - DE#8F

DE#90 - DE#9F

DE#A0 - DE#AF

DE#B0 - DE#BF

CE, DE#01

DE#00, DE#01

DE#10, DE#11

DE#20, DE#21

DE#30, DE#31

DE group

CE, DE#01 - DE#03

CE, DE#01 - DE#05

CE, DE#01 - DE#0A

DE#00 - DE#0A

DE#10 - DE#1A

DE#00 - DE#0A

DE#10 - DE#1A

DE#20 - DE#2A

DE#30 - DE#3A

DE#00

DE#10

DE#20

DE#30

DE#00 - DE#0F

DE#10 - DE#1F

Input condition/

Display contents

DE#Xx (X: 0 - B)

1227

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

Checkboxes are displayed for unused drives. The drive location of each DE is described below.

Input condition/

Display contents

Drive location

For 2.5" DEs, drives are displayed from left to right in ascending order of the slot number. For

3.5" DEs or 3.5" high density DEs, drives are displayed from bottom left to top right in ascending order of the slot number.

Placing the mouse pointer on the icon displays the detailed information of the drive.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

Drive configuration for Fast Recovery RAID groups

The drive layout in the ETERNUS DX/AF is the same as "RAID6". When using automatic configuration, the drive configuration that satisfies the specified capacity is determined according to the following order.

No. of drives in the configuration

(per RAID group)

Redundant sets +

HS (*1)

(3D+2P)x2+1HS

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(9D+2P)x2+1HS

(12D+2P)x2+1HS

(13D+2P)x2+1HS

(3D+2P)x6+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

(5D+2P)x4+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

Capacity efficiency

(*2) (%)

54.5

61.5

70.6

78.3

82.8

83.9

58.1

64.5

70.0

77.4

Rebuilding speed (*3)

(Rate)

2.20

2.17

2.13

2.09

2.07

2.06

6.20

5.17

4.14

3.10

Number of data drives

Selection order when configuring automatically

"Minimize number of using drives" is selected

"Prioritize rebuild rate" is selected

Not selected

*1: Fast Recovery RAID groups are described as "Redundant sets + HS".

RAID6((No. of data drives (D) + No. of parity drives (P)) x No. of redundant sets + No. of Hot spares (HS))



Redundant sets

(Example) "RAID6 ((3D+2P)x2+1HS)" is described as "(3D+2P)x2+1HS".

*2: The ratio of the user capacity to physical drive capacity.

*3: Rate when the rebuilding speed for the basic "RAID6 (D+P)" configuration is "1". The rate varies depending on the workload of the ETERNUS DX/AF and system environment.

1228

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Automatic Controlling CM setting

The Controlling CM is determined by the value of the remainder when the RAID group number is divided by the number of controllers. If CMs are not installed or if a failed CM exists, the controlling CM is assigned to balance the load in the normal CMs.

• When using the ETERNUS DX/AF storage systems other than the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, all CMs are installed, and all CMs are in a normal state

RAID group number

Even numbers

Odd numbers

Controlling CM assignment

CM#0

CM#1

• When using the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, all CMs are installed, and all CMs are in a normal state:

The number of CMs is 2 (1CE) to 12 (6CEs)

Remainder when dividing the RAID group number by the number of CMs

2 (1CE) 4 (2CEs)

Number of CMs (Number of CEs)

6 (3CEs) 8 (4CEs) 10 (5CEs) 12 (6CEs)

–

CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1 CE#1 CM#1 CE#2 CM#1 CE#3 CM#1 CE#4 CM#1 CE#5 CM#1

–

CE#1 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1

CE#1 CM#0

CE#1 CM#1

CE#1 CM#0

CE#2 CM#1

CE#1 CM#0

CE#3 CM#1

CE#1 CM#0

CE#4 CM#1

–

CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1 CE#1 CM#1 CE#2 CM#1 CE#3 CM#1

–

CE#3 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1

CE#3 CM#0

CE#1 CM#1

CE#3 CM#0

CE#2 CM#1

–

CE#4 CM#0 CE#4 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1 CE#1 CM#1

–

CE#5 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1

–

1229

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The number of CMs is 14 (7CEs) to 24 (12CEs)

Remainder when dividing the RAID group number by the number of CMs

14 (7CEs) 16 (8CEs)

Number of CMs (Number of CEs)

18 (9CEs) 20 (10CEs) 22 (11CEs) 24 (12CEs)

–

CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0 CE#0 CM#0

CE#6 CM#1 CE#7 CM#1 CE#8 CM#1 CE#9 CM#1 CE#A CM#1 CE#B CM#1

CE#1 CM#0 CE#1 CM#0 CE#1 CM#0 CE#1 CM#0 CE#1 CM#0 CE#1 CM#0

CE#5 CM#1 CE#6 CM#1 CE#7 CM#1 CE#8 CM#1 CE#9 CM#1 CE#A CM#1

CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0 CE#2 CM#0

CE#4 CM#1 CE#5 CM#1 CE#6 CM#1 CE#7 CM#1 CE#8 CM#1 CE#9 CM#1

CE#3 CM#0 CE#3 CM#0 CE#3 CM#0 CE#3 CM#0 CE#3 CM#0 CE#3 CM#0

CE#3 CM#1 CE#4 CM#1 CE#5 CM#1 CE#6 CM#1 CE#7 CM#1 CE#8 CM#1

CE#4 CM#0 CE#4 CM#0 CE#4 CM#0 CE#4 CM#0 CE#4 CM#0 CE#4 CM#0

CE#2 CM#1 CE#3 CM#1 CE#4 CM#1 CE#5 CM#1 CE#6 CM#1 CE#7 CM#1

CE#5 CM#0 CE#5 CM#0 CE#5 CM#0 CE#5 CM#0 CE#5 CM#0 CE#5 CM#0

CE#1 CM#1 CE#2 CM#1 CE#3 CM#1 CE#4 CM#1 CE#5 CM#1 CE#6 CM#1

CE#6 CM#0 CE#6 CM#0 CE#6 CM#0 CE#6 CM#0 CE#6 CM#0 CE#6 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1 CE#1 CM#1 CE#2 CM#1 CE#3 CM#1 CE#4 CM#1 CE#5 CM#1

–

CE#7 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1

CE#7 CM#0

CE#1 CM#1

CE#7 CM#0

CE#2 CM#1

CE#7 CM#0

CE#3 CM#1

CE#7 CM#0

CE#4 CM#1

–

CE#8 CM#0 CE#8 CM#0 CE#8 CM#0 CE#8 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1 CE#1 CM#1 CE#2 CM#1 CE#3 CM#1

–

CE#9 CM#0

CE#0 CM#1

CE#9 CM#0

CE#1 CM#1

CE#9 CM#0

CE#2 CM#1

–

CE#A CM#0 CE#A CM#0

CE#0 CM#1 CE#1 CM#1

–

CE#B CM#0

CE#0 CM#1

● Advanced Setting

Stripe Depth should be set only when advanced tuning needs to be performed for each RAID group. It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

Specifying a larger value for the Stripe Depth can reduce the number of drives to access. For "High Performance

(RAID1+0)", reducing the number of commands issued to drives improves the performance of access to the specified RAID group. For "High Capacity (RAID5)", however, specifying a larger value for the Stripe Depth might decrease the sequential write performance. In addition, several restrictions apply to a RAID group whose Stripe

Depth has been changed and volumes created for such RAID group. Refer to "Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification (for RAID group)" (page 1231)

for details.

• Stripe Depth

Description Select the Stripe Depth of the RAID group that is to be created.

Input condition/

Display contents

Available Stripe Depth value varies depending on the RAID level. Refer to "Available Stripe

Depth value (for RAID group)" (page 1231) for details.

• 64 KB

• 128 KB

• 256 KB

• 512 KB

• 1024 KB

1230

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Available Stripe Depth value (for RAID group)

The following table shows the available Stripe Depth value for each RAID level.

RAID level

Mirroring (RAID1)

High Performance (RAID1+0)

Striping (RAID0)

Drive configuration (*1)

1D+1M

Any

High Capacity (RAID5)

2D+1P – 4D+1P

5D+1P – 8D+1P

9D+1P – 15D+1P

Any Reliability (RAID5+0)

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

*1: D: Data drives, M: Mirror drives, P: Parity drives

Available Stripe Depth value

–

64KB, 128KB, 256KB, 512KB, 1024KB

64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB

64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB

64 KB, 128 KB

64 KB

Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification (for RAID group)

The following restrictions are applied for the RAID groups and volumes in the RAID group of which Stripe Depth value is changed.

• Stripe depth for the existing RAID group cannot be changed.

• When selecting drives automatically to create a RAID group, the Stripe Depth cannot be changed.

• Capacity expansion (Logical Device Expansion) for the RAID group of which Stripe Depth was changed is not available.

• Encryption of the RAID group of which Stripe Depth was changed is not available.

Rename RAID Group

For details about this function, refer to "Rename RAID Group" (page 532) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Rename RAID Group" (page 1322) .

● Rename Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify a new RAID group name.

When changing the name of a single RAID group, an existing RAID group name cannot be used.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Start of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the starting number of the suffix that is to be added to the new RAID group name.

When changing multiple RAID group names, the suffix number is added to the RAID group names with consecutive numbers in ascending order starting with the entered suffix number.

Refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Change Controlling CM" (page 533) .

for details. When changing only one

RAID Group name, the "Start of Suffix" field is not displayed.

• Numeric characters (0 - 99999)

• Decimal number

• 1 - 5 digits

1231

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Change Controlling CM

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Change Controlling CM" (page 1322)

● Change Controlling CM Setting

• New Controlling CM

Description Select the new Controlling CM.

Input condition/

Display contents

"Automatic" and the normal CM number ("CE#x CM#y" or "CM#y") that is installed are displayed as options (x: CE number, y: CM number).

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the Controlling CM

that is to be allocated is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Automatic Controlling CM setting" (page 1229) for details.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

Automatic

CE#x CM#y

• For the other models

Automatic

CM#y

Expand RAID Group

For details about this function, refer to "Expand RAID Group" (page 535)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Expand RAID Group" (page 1322) .

● Manual Setting

• RAID Level after expand

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the RAID level after expansion is performed.

• High Performance (RAID1+0)

• High Capacity (RAID5)

• High Reliability (RAID6)

• Striping (RAID0)

● Drive Selection ([Tabular] Tab)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive that is to be used after expansion.

Input condition/

Display contents

The checkbox for the drive being used in the selected RAID group is selected.

Clear the checkbox for the drive that is not used after expansion.

When selecting drives, refer to

"Delete RAID Group" (page 531)

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1232

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Drive Selection ([Graphic] Tab)

• DE selection list box

Description Select the DE group.

Input condition/

Display contents

Options are displayed in the list box when at least one CE or DE in the DE group is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Refer to

"Options and DE groups for each model" (page 1227) for details.

DE#Xx (X: 0 - B)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive that is to be used after expansion.

Clear the checkbox for the drive that is not used after expansion.

Input condition/

Display contents

The checkbox for the drive being used in the selected RAID group is selected.

Refer to

"Delete RAID Group" (page 531)

for details about drive location for each DE.

Placing the mouse pointer on the icon displays the detailed information of the drive.

When selecting drives, refer to

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

Modify RAID Group Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Modify RAID Group Parameters" (page 540)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify RAID Group Parameters" (page 1323)

● Parameters Setting

• Rebuild Priority

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the rebuild priority.

It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use. When not changing the setting, select "Do not change".

When host access is not performed, rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy to RAID groups that are not registered as REC Disk Buffers are performed with "High" priority regardless of the

"Rebuild Priority" setting.

The rebuild priority of a RAID group cannot be changed if it is registered as an EXCP.

Rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy performance may be improved by specifying a larger

"Rebuild Priority" value. Note that specifying larger "Rebuild Priority" may cause the degradation of RAID group performance (throughput) when rebuild, copyback, or redundant copy is being performed in the target RAID group.

• Do not change

• Low

Perform rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy with a normal priority.

• Middle

Give the same priority as the host access to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy.

• High

Give priority to rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy over host access.

1233

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Advanced Settings

• DCMF

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Change" and specify the DCMF.

It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use. The maximum number of commands issued to a drive is changed to a multiple represented by the specified value. (If

"DCMF" is "2", the number of commands is doubled. If "DCMF" is "3", the number of commands is tripled.) When not changing the setting, select "Do not change".

The higher the DCMF value is, the more drive throughput is available, improving sequential performance. Note that high DCMF value may result in a high load on the drive, decreasing performance.

• Do not change

• Change

1 - 10

• Drive Access Priority

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the drive access priority.

It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use. When not changing the setting, select "Do not change". This item is not displayed when a RAID group that is configured with SSDs or SSD SEDs is selected. For SSDs and SSD SEDs, this item is fixed to "Response".

The throughput for all of the drives is improved when "Throughput" is selected because data is collectively written to the same drive. However, the performance of each command response may be reduced because queuing processes for host I/O are not performed by using the FIFO

(first in, first out) method.

• Do not change

• Response

Commands are issued in order during drive access to speed up a response to the host.

• Throughput

The command issuance order is changed and data is collectively written to the same drive during drive access to improve the throughput for all of the drives.

• Drive Tuning Parameter Setting

Description Specify whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the following drive tuning parameters.

• Throttle

• Ordered Cut

Input condition/

Display contents

It is not necessary to change the default setting for normal use. When not changing the

"Throttle" and "Ordered Cut" setting values, select "Do not change".

Note that "Do not change" is always selected when this function is started.

• Do not change

• Enable

• Disable

When selecting multiple RAID groups as the target of this function and "Enable" is specified for the "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting", the "Throttle" and "Ordered Cut" values set in this screen are applied to the target RAID groups.

1234

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Throttle

Description Select "Enable" for "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting" and specify "Throttle".

"Throttle" is the proportion of the number of commands that are to be issued to a drive at the same time to the maximum number of command issuance. It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use. If a single RAID group is selected to start this function, the value that is currently set in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. If multiple RAID groups are selected to start this function and the same value is specified for all the RAID groups in the ETERNUS DX/

AF, that value is displayed. If a RAID group with a different "Throttle" exists in the ETERNUS DX/

AF, "100 %" is displayed.

Specifying a smaller number can limit the number of commands to be issued to a drive at the same time, resulting in reduction of the load onto the specific RAID group (drive). This setting can be used when the response performance of the specific RAID group (drive) is decreased due to a conflict between host I/Os or batch processes.

Specifying a smaller throttle value decreases the number of commands processed by the drive at the same time, which might cause a longer queue time.

100 % - 10 % Input condition/

Display contents

If "Enable" is selected for "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting", not only is the "Throttle" value changed but the "Ordered Cut" value is changed as well. To keep the "Ordered Cut" value unchanged, specify the current parameter displayed in the "Current Settings" field.

• Ordered Cut

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select "Enable" for "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting" and specify "Ordered Cut".

"Ordered Cut" is the number of commands to optimize drive access processing (priority control). When "Ordered Cut" is "x", the order is changed for every x commands based on the priority settings of the commands. It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

If a single RAID group is selected to start this function, the value that is currently set in the

ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed. If multiple RAID groups are selected to start this function and the same value is specified for all the RAID groups in the ETERNUS DX/AF, that value is displayed.

If a RAID group with a different "Ordered Cut" exists in the ETERNUS DX/AF, "0" is displayed.

When "Ordered Cut" is "0", the number of commands for controlling the priority cannot be specified. All of the commands issued to the drive are processed according to their priority settings. The "Ordered Cut" value cannot be used for SSDs and SSD SEDs.

Specifying a smaller value for "Ordered Cut" reduces the number of commands for priority control. Commands with lower priority are processed without delay.

Specifying a smaller value for "Ordered Cut", priority control of commands is performed in increments for the specified number, which might cause a delay in processing commands with a higher priority.

0 - 65535

If "Enable" is selected for "Drive Tuning Parameter Setting", not only is the "Ordered Cut" value changed but the "Throttle" value is changed as well. To keep the "Throttle" value unchanged, specify the current parameter displayed in the "Current

Settings" field.

1235

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

For details about this function, refer to "Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" (page 542)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)" (page 1323)

● Eco-mode Schedule Setting

• Eco-mode Schedule

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Eco-mode schedule.

• Do not change

Do not change the current assignment.

• Disable

Disable the Eco-mode.

• Eco-mode schedule name

Assign the selected Eco-mode schedule.

• Eco-mode Action

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Eco-mode action.

• Do not change

Does not change the Eco-mode action (only the Eco-mode schedule can be changed).

• Drive power off

Enables the Eco-mode action and turns off the drives power during time periods outside the specified schedule.

• Drive motor off

Enables the Eco-mode action and stops the drives motors during time periods outside the specified schedule.

• Drive always on

Disables the Eco-mode action and the drive operates continuously regardless of the specified schedule.

Set Key Group (RAID Group)

For details about this function, refer to "Set Key Group (RAID Group)" (page 546)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Key Group (RAID Group)" (page 1323) .

● Key Group Setting

• Key Group

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to add (Enable) or delete (Disable) the RAID groups in the key group.

If multiple RAID groups are selected, all the selected RAID groups are added or deleted in a single process.

• Enable

• Disable

1236

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

External RAID Group Management

Create External RAID Group

For details about this function, refer to "Create External RAID Group" (page 549) .

● New External RAID Group

• Name

Description Input an External RAID Group name that is to be created.

Input condition/

Display contents

If one External Drive is selected and an External RAID Group is created, existing External RAID

Group names cannot be used.

If multiple External Drives are selected and multiple External RAID Groups are created, the suffix number starting with "0" is added to the input name. Refer to

"Naming Conventions of

External RAID Groups" (page 1377) for details.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

● External Drive List

• Checkbox to select External Drives

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the checkbox for the External Drive that is to be used to create the External RAID Group.

Select the checkbox to the left of "No." to select all External Drives.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1237

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Thin Provisioning Management

This section provides information on the parameters of the following actions for Thin Provisioning management.

•

Set Thin Provisioning

•

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Set Deduplication/Compression

•

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

•

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Set Thin Provisioning

For details about this function, refer to "Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Thin Provisioning" (page 1324) .

● Thin Provisioning Settings

• Thin Provisioning

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Thin Provisioning function.

• Enable

• Disable

• Maximum Pool Capacity

Description Select the maximum pool capacity that is specified for the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Input condition/

Display contents

ETERNUS DX/AF storage systems can expand the maximum pool capacity gradually according to the used pool capacity. Because the maximum pool capacity is not fixed, memory can be more effectively used. Note that if the chunk size is changed depending on the expanded

"Maximum Pool Capacity", a calculation different from the existing method is used to obtain the pool capacity that can be created.

This item is only available when "Thin Provisioning" is enabled. Note that a capacity that is smaller than the current capacity cannot be selected.

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

32 TB

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

1024 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3 and the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

32 TB

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

1024 TB

2 PB

1238

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

Input condition/

Display contents

(Cont'd)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

384 TB

768 TB

1.5 PB

3 PB

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

768 TB

1024 TB

2 PB

4 PB

8 PB

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

1024 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3 and the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

256 TB

512 TB

768 TB

1024 TB

1.5 PB

2 PB

4 PB

8 PB

16 PB

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

32 TB

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

1024 TB

2 PB

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

768 TB

1024 TB

2 PB

4 PB

8 PB

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

32 TB

64 TB

128 TB

256 TB

512 TB

1024 TB

2 PB

1239

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• The maximum pool capacity that is set by this function is used as a virtual logical capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

When the Thin Provisioning function is enabled, the ETERNUS DX/AF allocates capacity to the physical drives proportionate to the amount of data that is written to the virtual volume. Therefore, the actual available capacity is limited depending on the maximum physical capacity of the drives that can be installed in the storage system or the maximum pool capacity, whichever is smaller. For example, when using an ETERNUS AF250 S2 that is configured only with

400GB SSDs, the actual capacity that can be used is approximately 18TB even if the maximum pool capacity is

"32.00TB".

• If the chunk size is changed due to the expansion of the maximum pool capacity and the maximum pool capacity has already been used up before the expansion, new pools cannot be created. For example, if the current maximum pool capacity in the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3 is "2PB" or "4 PB", the capacity that can be used to create new pools is calculated with the following formula.

Current maximum pool capacity

(Chunk size a (*1)) [A]

Used pool capacity

(Chunk size b (*2)) [B]

Capacity that can be used to create new pools [C]

Description

2 PB (21 MB)

4 PB (42 MB)

1 PB (21 MB)

2 PB (21 MB)

1 PB (21 MB)

2 PB (21 MB)

1 PB (42 MB)

2 PB (42 MB)

1 PB

0 PB

(New pools cannot be created)

2 PB

0 PB

(New pools cannot be created)

3 PB

2 PB

The capacity that can be used to create new pools

[C] is calculated with the following formula.

[C] = [A] - [B] × (Chunk size a / Chunk size b)

*1: This indicates the chunk size that is determined according to the "Maximum Pool Capacity" that is to be set

with this item. Refer to "The maximum number of pools, maximum pool capacity, and determined chunk size for each model" (page 557)

for details.

*2: This indicates the chunk size that is determined by the "Maximum Pool Capacity" that had been specified in the

ETERNUS DX/AF when TPPs were created. The value can be checked on the [Thin Provisioning Pool] screen.

Refer to "Thin Provisioning Pool (Basic Information)" (page 922)

for details.

To reduce the maximum pool capacity, disable "Thin Provisioning". After performing this action, restart this function to enable "Thin Provisioning", and then set a new "Maximum Pool Capacity".

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

For details about this function, refer to "Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 557) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1325) .

● New Thin Provisioning Pool

• Name

Description Input a TPP name.

Input condition/

Display contents

An existing TPP name cannot be specified.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

1240

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Create Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

● Automatic Setting

• Drive Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a create mode of a TPP.

• Automatic

• Manual

Select the type of drive that configures the TPP.

• Online

• Nearline

• SSD

• Online SED

• Nearline SED

• SSD SED

• RAID Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the level of RAID group that configures the TPP from the list box.

• High Performance (RAID1+0)

RAID1+0 (2D+2M, 4D+4M, 8D+8M, 12D+12M) configuration is available.

• High Capacity (RAID5)

RAID5 (3D+1P, 4D+1P, 6D+1P, 7D+1P, 8D+1P, 12D+1P) configuration is available.

• High Reliability (RAID6)

RAID6 (4D+2P, 6D+2P, 7D+2P, 8D+2P) configuration is available.

• High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

RAID6-FR ((4D+2P)x2+1HS, (6D+2P)x2+1HS, (8D+2P)x3+1HS, (4D+2P)x5+1HS) configuration is available (*1).

• Mirroring (RAID1)

RAID1 (1D+1M) configuration

• Striping (RAID0)

RAID0 (4D) configuration

*1: "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)" groups that configure TPPs are called "Fast Recovery RAID groups".

• RAID0 has no data redundancy. Select "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity (RAID5)", "High Reliability

(RAID6)", "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)", or "Mirroring (RAID1)" for the RAID level.

• The number of RAID groups that configure a TPP is automatically determined by the selected drive type, the RAID level, the selected drives (only for RAID6-FR), the specified total capacity of the Thin Provisioning Pool, and the drives that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Select Drives

Description Select the requirements that are given priority when creating Fast Recovery RAID groups in the

TPP with automatic drive configuration.

This item is available only when the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)".

1241

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• Minimize number of using drives

Minimize the number of drives in the RAID group to achieve high-speed rebuilding.

Refer to "Drive configuration for Fast Recovery RAID groups (TPP)" (page 1244)

for details.

• Prioritize rebuild rate

Use more drives in a RAID group and distribute data to achieve high-speed rebuilding.

Refer to "Drive configuration for Fast Recovery RAID groups (TPP)" (page 1244)

for details.

• Thin Provisioning Pool Total Capacity

Description Specify the volume capacity and select the unit (PB/TB/GB/MB) of capacity.

Input condition/

Display contents

A TPP is automatically created with a capacity of the input value or higher. For the maximum

capacity, refer to "The maximum number of pools, maximum pool capacity, and determined chunk size for each model" (page 557)

The maximum capacity that can be used to create new TPPs is displayed to the right of the setting field for this item in the "Max: xx.xx [PB/TB/GB/MB]" format.

• Numeric characters

• PB/TB/GB/MB

• Encryption by CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the encryption status of TPPs.

When the encryption mode is disabled, "On" cannot be selected. When the drive type is

"Online SED", "Nearline SED", or "SSD SED", "On" cannot be selected.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3, this item is not displayed.

• On

TPPs that are encrypted by a CM are created.

• Off

TPPs that are not encrypted by a CM are created.

• Alarm

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity.

There are two types of threshold: "Warning" and "Attention". Specify the threshold so that

"Warning" is larger than "Attention". The "Attention" threshold can be omitted. When omitting the "Attention" threshold, clear the checkbox.

• Warning threshold

5 - 99

• Attention threshold

5 - 80

• When omitting the "Attention" threshold

Clear the checkbox

• Deduplication

Description Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" Deduplication for the TPP.

This item is only displayed when the Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

For details about the TPPs that are created depending on the selected items, refer to

"TPPs created depending on the selection of "Deduplication" and "Compression"" (page 1243)

1242

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• Enable

Deduplication target TPPs are created.

• Disable

Non-Deduplication target TPPs are created.

• Compression

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" Compression for the TPP.

This item is only displayed when the Deduplication/Compression for the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled.

For details about the TPPs that are created depending on the selected items, refer to

"TPPs created depending on the selection of "Deduplication" and "Compression"" (page 1243)

• Enable

Compression target TPPs are created.

• Disable

Non-Compression target TPPs are created.

TPPs created depending on the selection of "Deduplication" and "Compression"

Deduplication

Enable

Disable

Compression

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

TPPs that are to be created

TPPs where both Deduplication and Compression are enabled

TPPs where only Deduplication is enabled

TPPs where only Compression is enabled

TPPs where both Deduplication and Compression are disabled

• If Deduplication or Compression for a TPP is enabled, two RAID groups are created in the TPP. An error occurs if the RAID groups cannot be created.

• To change the Deduplication/Compression setting for the existing TPP, after disabling both the Deduplication

and Compression settings for the TPP, reconfigure the parameters. Refer to "Set Deduplication/Compression"

(page 575) for details.

• When Deduplication or Compression for the TPP is enabled, the DEDUP_SYS Volume and DEDUP_MAP Volume are automatically created in the relevant TPP. Refer to

"Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 575) for details.

• The display content for "Chunk Size" varies depending on the "Deduplication" setting or the "Compression" setting. If the chunk size information cannot be obtained, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

Displayed content for "Chunk Size" Deduplication

Enable

Disable

N/A

Compression

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

N/A

21 MB

Chunk size that is determined according to the maximum pool capacity (*1)

*1: The maximum pool capacity that is specified by using the procedure in

"Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554) . The current

value can be checked in the [Settings] screen. Refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)" (page 948) for details.

1243

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Drive configuration for Fast Recovery RAID groups (TPP)

No. of drives in the configuration

(per RAID group)

Redundant sets

+ HS (*1)

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

Capacity efficiency

(*2) (%)

61.5

70.6

77.4

64.5

Rebuilding speed

(*3)

(Rate)

2.17

2.13

3.10

5.17

Number of data drives

Selection order when configuring automatically

"Minimize number of using drives" is selected

"Prioritize rebuild rate" is selected

Not selected

*1: Fast Recovery RAID groups are described as "Redundant sets + HS".

RAID6((No. of data drives (D) + No. of parity drives (P)) x No. of redundant sets + No. of Hot spares (HS))



Redundant sets

(Example) "RAID6 ((4D+2P)x2+1HS)" is described as "(4D+2P)x2+1HS".

*2: The ratio of the user capacity to physical drive capacity.

*3: Rate when the rebuilding speed for the basic "RAID6 (D+P)" configuration is "1". The rate varies depending on the workload of the ETERNUS DX/AF and system environment.

● Manual Setting

• Drive Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the type of drive that configures the TPP.

Only the drives that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF are displayed.

Refer to

"Requirements for selecting drives" (page 561) for details.

• Online

• Nearline

• SSD

• Online SED

• Nearline SED

• SSD SED

1244

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• RAID Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the level of RAID group that configures the TPP from the list box.

The installed drives determine the selectable RAID levels that are displayed as options.

• High Performance (RAID1+0)

RAID1+0 (2D+2M, 4D+4M, 8D+8M, 12D+12M) configuration is available.

• High Capacity (RAID5)

RAID5 (3D+1P, 4D+1P, 6D+1P, 7D+1P, 8D+1P, 12D+1P) configuration is available.

• High Reliability (RAID6)

RAID6 (4D+2P, 6D+2P, 7D+2P, 8D+2P) configuration is available.

• High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

RAID6-FR ((4D+2P)x2+1HS, (6D+2P)x2+1HS, (8D+2P)x3+1HS, (4D+2P)x5+1HS) configuration is available (*1).

• Mirroring (RAID1)

RAID1 (1D+1M) configuration

• Striping (RAID0)

RAID0 (4D) configuration

*1: "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)" groups that configure TPPs are called "Fast Recovery RAID groups".

•

For details on the number of member drives in each RAID level, refer to "The number of member drives in each RAID group" (page 557) .

• RAID0 has no data redundancy. Select "High Performance (RAID1+0)", "High Capacity (RAID5)", "High Reliability

(RAID6)", "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)", or "Mirroring (RAID1)" for the RAID level.

• Fast Recovery Configuration

Description Select the drive configuration for Fast Recovery RAID groups in the TPP.

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the drive configuration from "No. of drives in the configuration", "capacity efficiency", and "rebuilding speed" according to your environment. Refer to

"Drive configuration for Fast

Recovery RAID groups (TPP)" (page 1244)

for details. The more redundant sets there are, the faster the rebuilding becomes. This item is blank when the RAID level is not "RAID6-FR".

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

Blank

• For the other models

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

(6D+2P)x2+1HS

(8D+2P)x3+1HS

(4D+2P)x5+1HS

Blank

D: Data drives, P: Parity drives, HS: Hot Spares

• Encryption by CM

Refer to "Encryption by CM" (page 1242) in

"Automatic Setting" for details.

1245

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Alarm

Refer to "Alarm" (page 1242)

in "Automatic Setting"

for details.

• Chunk Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the "Deduplication/Compression Ready" checkbox to use the TPP for Deduplication/

Compression.

To enable Deduplication/Compression for a TPP, the chunk size of the relevant TPP must be "21

MB".

This item is displayed only when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

• The Deduplication/Compression function of the ETERNUS DX/AF is enabled

• The chunk size that was determined according to the maximum pool capacity is not "21

MB"

A TPP with a chunk size of "21 MB" is created if this checkbox is selected.

"Deduplication/Compression Ready" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

The display content for this item varies depending on the following conditions.

• When the "Deduplication/Compression Ready" checkbox is selected

21 MB

• When the "Deduplication/Compression Ready" checkbox is cleared

Chunk size that is determined according to the maximum pool capacity (*1)

• When the chunk size information cannot be obtained

"-" (hyphen)

*1: The maximum pool capacity that is specified by using the procedure in

"Set Thin Provisioning" (page 554) . The cur-

rent value can be checked in the [Settings] screen. Refer to "Settings (Thin Provisioning)" (page 948) for details.

● Advanced Setting

Stripe Depth should be set only when advanced tuning needs to be performed for each RAID group configuring the TPP. It is not necessary to change the default value for normal use.

Specifying a larger value for the Stripe Depth can reduce the number of drives to access. For "High Performance

Depth has been changed. Refer to

"Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification (for TPP)" (page 1247)

for details.

• Stripe Depth

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Stripe Depth of the RAID group that is to be created.

Available Stripe Depth value varies depending on the RAID level. Refer to "Available Stripe

Depth value (for TPP)" (page 1247)

for details.

• 64 KB

• 128 KB

• 256 KB

• 512 KB

• 1024 KB

1246

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Available Stripe Depth value (for TPP)

The following table shows the available Stripe Depth value for each RAID level.

RAID level

Mirroring (RAID1)

High Performance (RAID1+0)

Striping (RAID0)

High Capacity (RAID5)

Drive configuration (*1)

1D+1M

Any

Available Stripe Depth value

–

64KB, 128KB, 256KB, 512KB, 1024KB

High Reliability (RAID6)

High Reliability (RAID6-FR)

3D+1P

4D+1P, 6D+1P, 7D+1P

8D+1P, 12D+1P

Any

64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB

64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB

64 KB, 128 KB

64 KB

Restrictions for Stripe Depth modification (for TPP)

The following restrictions are applied for RAID groups for which the Stripe Depth value is changed.

• Stripe depth for RAID groups that configure the existing TPPs cannot be changed.

• When selecting drives automatically to create a TPP, the Stripe Depth cannot be changed.

● RAID Group

• Controlling CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Controlling CM of the RAID group that is to be created.

"Automatic" and the normal CM number ("CE#x CM#y" or "CM#y") that is installed are displayed as options (x: CE number, y: CM number).

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the Controlling CM

that is to be allocated is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Automatic Controlling CM setting" (page 1229) for details.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

Automatic

CE#x CM#y

• For the other models

Automatic

CM#y

● Drive Selection ([Tabular] Tab)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

Input condition/

Display contents

When selecting drives, refer to

"Options and DE groups for each model" (page 1227) for details.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1247

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Drive Selection ([Graphic] Tab)

• DE selection list box

Description Select the DE group.

Input condition/

Display contents

Options are displayed in the list box when at least one CE or DE in the DE group is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Refer to

DE#Xx (X: 0 - B)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkboxes are displayed for unused drives.

Refer to

for details about drive location for each DE.

Placing the mouse pointer on the icon displays the detailed information of the drive.

When selecting drives, refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Rename Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 566)

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Rename Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1325) .

● Rename Setting

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a new TPP name.

When changing the name of a single TPP, an existing TPP name cannot be used.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

• Start of Suffix

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the starting number of the suffix that is to be added to the new TPP name.

When changing multiple TPP names, the suffix number is added to the TPP names with consecutive numbers in ascending order starting with the entered suffix number. Refer to

"Naming Conventions of Volumes" (page 1376) for details.

When changing only one TPP name, the "Start of Suffix" field is not displayed.

• Numeric characters (0 - 99999)

• Decimal number

• 1 - 5 digits

1248

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

For details about this function, refer to "Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 567)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Expand Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1325) .

● Setting Thin Provisioning Pool

• Expand Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a expand mode of a TPP.

• Automatic

Select a drive to expand a TPP automatically.

• Manual

Select a drive to expand a TPP manually.

● Automatic Setting

• Total Capacity after expand

Description Input the total capacity of the TPP after expansion and select the unit (PB/TB/GB/MB) of capacity.

Input condition/

Display contents

Drives are automatically selected according to the existing RAID group specifications, and the

TPP capacity is expanded to the entered value or higher. For the maximum capacity of TPP,

refer to "The maximum number of pools, maximum pool capacity, and determined chunk size for each model" (page 557) .

The maximum capacity that can be used to expand the TPP is displayed to the right of the setting field for this item in the "Max: xx.xx [PB/TB/GB/MB]" format. "Total Capacity after expand" includes the current TPP capacity.

The value in this item must be larger than the existing capacity. The current TPP capacity is displayed in "Total Capacity ".

• Numeric characters

• PB/TB/GB/MB

● RAID Group List

• Controlling CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Controlling CM of the RAID group that is to be created.

"Automatic" and the normal CM number ("CE#x CM#y" or "CM#y") that is installed are displayed as options (x: CE number, y: CM number).

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the Controlling CM

that is to be allocated is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Automatic Controlling CM setting" (page 1229) for details.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

Automatic

CE#x CM#y

• For the other models

Automatic

CM#y

1249

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Drive Selection ([Tabular] Tab)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

Input condition/

Display contents

When selecting drives, refer to

"Options and DE groups for each model" (page 1227) for details.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Drive Selection ([Graphic] Tab)

• DE selection list box

Description Select the DE group.

Input condition/

Display contents

Options are displayed in the list box when at least one CE or DE in the DE group is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Refer to

DE#Xx (X: 0 - B)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive to be selected.

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkboxes are displayed for unused drives.

Refer to

for details about drive location for each DE.

Placing the mouse pointer on the icon displays the detailed information of the drive.

When selecting drives, refer to

For details about this function, refer to "Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 575)

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

Set Deduplication/Compression

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Deduplication/Compression" (page 1326) .

● Deduplication/Compression Settings

• Deduplication

Description Select whether to enable or disable Deduplication for the selected TPP.

Input condition/

Display contents

If multiple TPPs are selected, the same setting is applied as a single process.

For the available Deduplication setting, refer to "Available Deduplication/Compression settings" (page 1251)

• Enable

• Disable

1250

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Compression

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to enable or disable Compression for the selected TPP.

If multiple TPPs are selected, the same setting is applied as a single process.

For the available Compression setting, refer to

"Available Deduplication/Compression settings"

(page 1251)

• Enable

• Disable

Available Deduplication/Compression settings

Current Deduplication Current Compression Deduplication

Enable Disable

N/A Available

Compression

Enable Disable

N/A Available

Enable

Error

"-" (hyphen)

Enable

Error

"-" (hyphen)

Enable

Error

"-" (hyphen)

Disable

Available: Available settings

N/A: Not available

Enable

Error

"-" (hyphen)

Disable

N/A

Available

N/A

Available

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 579) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool" (page 1326)

● Threshold Setting

• Warning

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Change the warning threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity.

Specify the warning threshold so that the "Warning" threshold is the same or larger than the

"Attention" threshold.

5 - 99

• Attention

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the attention threshold (%) for monitoring the TPP used capacity.

Specify the Attention threshold so that the "Warning" threshold is the same or larger than the

"Attention" threshold.

The "Attention" threshold can be omitted. When setting the "Attention" threshold, select the checkbox.

Checkbox

• Selected

5 - 80

• Cleared

1251

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 581) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

"Input Conditions for MWC" (page 1391)

● Parameters Setting

• Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Description Specify the value of the Multi Writeback Count.

Input condition/

Display contents

When specifying larger MWC, sequential write access performance is improved. Note that this is not effective when a number of random write accesses occur.

Depending on the ratio of read access and write access, read access performance may be reduced.

1 - 16

The setting values available for Multi Writeback Count vary depending on the RAID level and drive configuration. Refer to

for details.

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

For details about this function, refer to "Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)" (page 583)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to

"B. Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)"

Refer to "Eco-mode Schedule" (page 1236) in "Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)"

● Eco-mode Schedule Setting

• Eco-mode Schedule

for details.

• Eco-mode Action

Refer to "Eco-mode Action" (page 1236) in "Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)"

for details.

1252

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Advanced Copy Management

This section provides information on the parameters of the following actions for Advanced Copy management.

•

Modify EC/OPC Priority

•

Modify Copy Table Size

•

Modify Copy Parameters

•

•

Measure Round Trip Time

•

•

•

•

•

For details about this function, refer to "Register Advanced Copy License" (page 594) .

Register Advanced Copy License

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Register Advanced Copy License" (page 1327) .

● License Settings

• Registration Method

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the registration method for the Advanced Copy license.

"Use Free License" can only be selected when an Advanced Copy license has not been registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

This item is only displayed for the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60

S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS

DX200F.

• Use License Key

• Use Free License

• License Key

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the Advanced Copy license key.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the

ETERNUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETERNUS DX200F, a license key can only be entered when "Use License Key" is selected for "Registration Method".

16 capital letters and numeric characters

1253

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Register Veeam Storage Integration License

For details about this function, refer to "Register Veeam Storage Integration License" (page 597) .

● License Settings

• License Key

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the license key for Veeam Storage Integration.

16 capital letters and numeric characters

Modify EC/OPC Priority

For details about this function, refer to "Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 600)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 1327) .

● EC/OPC Priority

• EC/OPC Priority

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Set the EC/OPC priority.

• Automatic Priority

This mode changes the EC/OPC priority automatically in response to the operating load status.

• High Priority

This mode operates by making maximum use of internal resources.

This mode greatly affects host access performance, thus should not be used during normal operation. Use when the operation load is low.

• Middle Priority

This mode operates slightly slower than the High Priority mode.

Select this mode when performance is greatly affected by the High Priority mode, but the copy speed is too slow with the Low Priority mode.

• Low Priority

This mode reduces the effect on host access.

Select this mode when using EC and/or OPC during operation.

• Very Low Priority

This mode operates slower than the Low Priority mode.

Select this mode when performance is affected (such as when the performance of host response is reduced) by the Automatic Priority or Low Priority mode.

1254

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Advanced Setting

• Copy Schedule Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the schedule mode for EC, OPC, and Quick OPC.

It is not necessary to change the default setting (Session Balancing) for normal use.

Setting the schedule mode for SnapOPC and SnapOPC + is not required.

Use the procedure in

"Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 647) to specify the REC schedule mode.

• Session Balancing

Copy sessions are scheduled evenly to each Controlling CM for a copy source RAID group (a

RAID group to which the copy source volume belongs).

• Destination RAID Group Balancing

Only one copy session can be performed for each copy destination RAID group. This method prevents unequal loading on a specific RAID group. This may improve the copy performance when a copy destination RAID group is configured by Nearline disks or when

"High Priority" is set for EC/OPC.

Copy performance is not improved by selecting "Destination RAID Group Balancing" in the following conditions:

• When the type of the copy destination volume is not "Standard"

• When the copy destination volume "Standard" and concatenated

Modify Copy Table Size

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Copy Table Size" (page 602) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Copy Table Size" (page 1328)

● Advanced Copy Table Size Setting

• Resolution

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the resolution for the copy table.

• x 1

• x 2

• x 4

• x 8

• x 16

• x 32

• x 64

1255

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Table Size

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the copy table size.

The copy table size can be set up to the maximum size that is calculated from the installed memory capacity and the usable cache memory capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF (excluding the currently used capacity such as assigned size to the REC Buffers).

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

0 - 128MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3 and the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 512MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

0 - 1024MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

0 - 4096MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

0 - 1024MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3 and the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

0 - 12288MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

0 - 512MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

0 - 4096MB (integral multiple of 8)

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

0 - 512MB (integral multiple of 8)

In the ETERNUS DX100 S3, a total size of 512MB of memory is reserved for the copy table and REC Buffer. If an REC Buffer is created, 256MB (REC Buffer size, 128MB x 2) of the total memory size is used. Therefore, the maximum table size is

256MB. Note that an REC Buffer cannot be created if the copy table size is larger than 264MB.

• Table Size Threshold

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the threshold for monitoring the used capacity of the copy table (%).

1 - 100

•

Refer to "How to calculate the copy table size" (page 1258) for detailed procedure to calculate the copy table size.

• Refer to "Estimated Advanced Copy Source Capacity" in "Configuration Guide (Web GUI)" for the maximum copy source capacity.

1256

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Calculation Parameters

• Total Copy Capacity

Description • Restore OPC is not used

Input the total copy capacity (*1) when Restore OPC is not used (unit: GB).

The applicable Advanced Copy types are as follows:

REC

OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ without using Restore OPC

Input condition/

Display contents

• Restore OPC is used

Input the total copy capacity (*1) for using Restore OPC (unit: GB).

The applicable Advanced Copy types are as follows:

OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ using Restore OPC

*1: For details about the total copy capacity, refer to

"Respective total values for "Total Copy

Capacity" and "Sessions"" (page 1260) .

Numeric characters (decimal)

• Session Count

Description • When Restore OPC is not used

Input the total number of sessions (*1) for not using Restore OPC.

The applicable Advanced Copy types are as follows:

REC

OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ without using Restore OPC

• When Restore OPC is used

Input the total number of sessions (*1) for using Restore OPC.

The applicable Advanced Copy types are as follows:

OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, and SnapOPC+ using Restore OPC

*1: For details about the total sessions, refer to "Respective total values for "Total Copy

Capacity" and "Sessions"" (page 1260) .

1257

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

0 - 1024

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

0 - 1024 (2048) (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

0 - 2048 (4096) (*1)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

0 - 8192

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

0 - 8192

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3 and the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

0 - 32768

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

0 - 2048

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

0 - 8192

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

0 - 2048

*1: Values in parentheses indicate the number of sessions when "Expand Volume Mode" is

"Enable".

How to calculate the copy table size

A dedicated memory area is required for Advanced Copy management and is allocated as a table size. The table size and resolution settings are determined by the copy capacity and the number of sessions (volumes) that will be run simultaneously.

(Table size (S)) [MB] = (S1) + (S2)

S1: Refers to the table size (MB) for EC/REC and for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC Restoration.

S2: Refers to the table size (MB) for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration.

• Round the derived value up to the next multiple of 8 to obtain the correct setting for the copy table size.

• A copy table of the appropriate size (as derived above) is created in each CM.

• If the total table size value (S) exceeds the maximum size allowed, adjust the resolution (M) upward until the maximum table size is no longer exceeded. The resolution (M) should be as small as possible. Maximum allowed table sizes are as follows:

Model

ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

ETERNUS DX8100 S3

ETERNUS DX8700 S3

ETERNUS DX8900 S3

ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

ETERNUS DX200F

Maximum copy table size (per CM)

128 MB

512 MB

1024 MB

4096 MB

1024 MB

12288 MB

512 MB

4096 MB

512 MB

1258

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The same resolution (M) must be used by both the copy source and copy destination storage systems for REC.

If the resolution (M) settings for the copy source and copy destination storage systems are different, REC cannot be performed. Note that the copy table sizes (S) do not need to be the same. If different recommended resolutions (M) are calculated for the copy source and copy destination storage systems, use whichever resolution (M) is greater for both storage systems. If the resolution (M) is changed, recalculate the copy table size (S) setting for the storage system with the new resolution.

• The calculated parameters are "Resolution (M)" and "Table Size (S)". It is assumed that almost 100% of the copy table size is used.

• Allowance should be made for possible increases in the copy capacity.

• If the resolution is changed when a copy session exists, calculate the copy table size with the previous resolution for the copy session that is being executed. For copy sessions that are created after the resolution has been changed, calculate the copy table size with the new value.

● The table size for EC/REC and for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC Restoration (S1)

M: Resolution (The same value is used in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Set "x1" if possible.)

C1: The total copy capacity (GB) for EC/REC, and OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC Restoration (*1)

N1: The number of sessions EC/REC, and OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ without OPC Restoration.

S1 [MB] = ((2 x C1 / M) + N1) x 8 [KB] / 1024 (Round up decimal point)

● The table size for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration (S2)

M: Resolution (The same value is used in the ETERNUS DX/AF. Set "x1" if possible.)

C2: The total copy capacity (GB) for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration in the volume (*1)

N2: The number of sessions for OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC/SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration

S2 [MB] = ((2 x C2 / M) + N2) x 2 x 8 [KB] / 1024 (Round up decimal point)

*1: For EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, and REC copy sources, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX/AF that are defined as copy sources. For REC copy destinations, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all the volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX/AF that are defined as copy destinations.

If the ETERNUS DX/AF is used for both the " EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, or REC copy source" and the " REC copy source", the copy capacity is the total capacity of both.

For multi-copy sessions, the copy capacity is the total capacity of multi-copy source volumes (slices or partitions), multiplied by the number of multi-copy destinations for each copy source. The copy capacity for generation management by SnapOPC+ sessions is the total capacity of copy source volumes (slices or partitions) multiplied by the number of generations in the copy destination volumes for each copy source.

Example for multi-copy sessions:

A B

1259

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Copy area in the copy source logical volume A: 200 MB, Number of multi-copy destinations: 4

Copy area in the copy source logical volume B: 500 MB, Number of multi-copy destinations: 8

Add 200 x 4 / 500 x 8 = 4800 MB to the copy capacity (C1).

Note that "4" and "8" in this example correspond to the number of generations when calculating the copy table size for SnapOPC+ sessions.

The number of sessions (N1) for multi-copy and SnapOPC+ is 4 + 8 = 12.

When executing OPC Restoration from a copy destination with multi-copy and SnapOPC+ multi-generation enabled, select one copy destination and apply the above formula. Other copy destinations are calculated as being normal multi-copy and SnapOPC+ multi-generation.

Respective total values for "Total Copy Capacity" and "Sessions"

For "Total Copy Capacity" and "Sessions", input the respective total values.

[Example 1]

When executing 10GB OPC (Restore OPC is not used) with 20 sessions and 5GB QuickOPC (Restore OPC is not used) with 10 sessions

Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is not used)

= Copy capacity for OPC (10GB x 20 sessions) + Copy capacity for QuickOPC (5GB x 10 sessions)

= 200GB + 50GB = 250GB

Sessions (Restore OPC is not used)

= The number of OPC sessions (20 sessions) + The number of QuickOPC sessions (10 sessions)

= 30 sessions

[Example 2]

When executing 10GB OPC (Restore OPC is not used) with 20 sessions and 5GB QuickOPC (Restore OPC is used) with

10 sessions

Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is not used)

= Copy capacity for OPC (10GB x 20 sessions) = 200GB

Sessions (Restore OPC is not used)

= The number of OPC sessions (20 sessions) = 20 sessions

Total Copy Capacity (Restore OPC is not used)

= Copy capacity for QuickOPC (5GB x 10 sessions) = 50GB

Sessions (Restore OPC is not used)

= The number of QuickOPC sessions (10 sessions) = 10 sessions

Modify Copy Parameters

For details about this function, refer to "Modify Copy Parameters" (page 607)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify Copy Parameters" (page 1329)

● Policy of Snap Data Pool

• Policy Level 1 (Informational) Threshold

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If the usage of SDP exceeds the specified threshold, the ETERNUS DX/AF notifies that effect as the Policy Level 1 (Informational).

1 - 97

1260

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Policy Level 2 (Warning) Threshold

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If the usage of SDP exceeds the specified threshold, the ETERNUS DX/AF notifies that effect as the Policy Level 2 (Warning).

2 - 98

• Policy Level 3 (Error) Threshold

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

If the usage of SDP exceeds the specified threshold, the ETERNUS DX/AF notifies that effect as the Policy Level 3 (Error).

3 - 99

● SDPE Setting

• SDPE

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select SDPE (GB).

• 1

• 2

• 4

Set Copy Path

For details about this function, refer to "Set Copy Path" (page 610) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set Copy Path" (page 1329)

● Operation Mode Selection

• Operation Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the operation mode.

• Create Copy Path

Create a copy path and apply to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

• Apply Copy Path

Apply the existing copy path information file to the ETERNUS DX/AF.

● Base Information Selection

• Base Information

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the registration method for storage system information.

• Backup Path File

The copy path information file previously applied is used.

• Path File

The copy path information file that is saved in the setting PC is used.

• Not use

Copy path is newly created.

1261

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Copy Path Information File Selection

• Copy Path Information File

Description Input the location where the copy path information file is stored.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location

● Registered Storage System List

• Checkboxes for selecting a storage system

Description Select the ETERNUS storage system to create a copy path.

Input condition/

Display contents

A list of the storage system information specified in the copy path information file previously applied or stored in the ETERNUS DX/AF is displayed.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Copy paths cannot be created when the same ETERNUS storage system is set for the local storage system and the remote storage system.

• Copy paths cannot be created between the following ETERNUS storage systems.

ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series (*1) and ETERNUS6000

ETERNUS DX90 and ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

ETERNUS DX90 and ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000

*1: Except the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3.

● Storage System Configuration Settings

• Port Type

Description Specify the port type to set the copy path.

Input condition/

Display contents

The displayed contents vary depending on the storage system type.

When the target port is not used, select "-" (hyphen).

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4 and the ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3

FC 2-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 and the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

FC 2-Port

FC 4-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

FC 2-Port

FC 4-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

1262

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

Input condition/

Display contents

(Cont'd)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2 and the ETERNUS AF250

FC 2-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2 and the ETERNUS AF650

FC 2-Port

FC 4-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

FC 2-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS DX90 S2

FC 1-Port

FC 2-Port

iSCSI 1-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

FC 1-Port

FC 2-Port

FC 4-Port

iSCSI 1-Port

iSCSI 2-Port

iSCSI RA (for older storage system connection)

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS DX90

FC 4-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700 or for the ETERNUS4000/ETER-

NUS8000

FC 1-Port

FC 2-Port

FC 4-Port

iSCSI-RA 1-Port

iSCSI-RA 2-Port

"-" (hyphen)

• For the ETERNUS6000

FC 2-Port

FC 4-Port

"-" (hyphen)

1263

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Different types of interfaces (FC, iSCSI 1Gbit/s, or iSCSI 10Gbit/s) cannot exist together on the same copy path (the path between the local storage system and the remote storage system).

• Copy path information files cannot be applied to the ETERNUS storage system when the port mode of the port that is specified in the copy path information does not match the port mode of the adapter installed in the ETERNUS storage system to which the copy path information file is to be applied. Modify the copy path information or switch the port mode on the storage system in advance using the procedure in

"Modify Port Mode" (page 446) .

• Copy path information files cannot be applied to the ETERNUS storage system when the port type (FC or iSCSI) that is specified in the copy path information does not match the port type of the adapter installed in the ETERNUS storage system to which the copy path information file is to be applied. Applying copy path information is not available under the following conditions:

If the port type is FC, the WWN in the copy path information differs from that of the adapter in the target ETER-

NUS storage system

If the port type is iSCSI, the IP address and the iSCSI Name in the copy path information differ from those of the adapter in the target ETERNUS storage system

• Check to use as RA

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Regardless of whether a copy path is applied or not, select all of the RA ports and CA/RA ports.

The port number is displayed at right side of the checkbox. When "iSCSI RA (for older storage system connection)", "iSCSI-RA 1-Port", or "iSCSI-RA 2-Port" is selected in the "Port Type" field, all ports are automatically selected.

This item is displayed when the model is other than ETERNUS6000.

• #x: Port number (0 - 3)

• When "FC 1-Port" is selected as the port type (#1, #2 and #3 cannot be selected)

• When "FC 2-Port" is selected as the port type (#2 and #3 cannot be selected)

#0, #1

• When "FC 4-Port" is selected as the port type

#0, #1, #2, #3

• When "iSCSI 1-Port" is selected as the port type (#1 cannot be selected)

• When "iSCSI 2-Port" is selected as the port type

#0, #1

• When "iSCSI-RA" is selected as the port type (All ports are selected)

#0, #1

• When "iSCSI-RA 1-Port" is selected as the port type (#0 is selected)

• When "iSCSI-RA 2-Port" is selected as the port type (All ports are selected)

#0, #1

• Initiator / Target Setting

Description Select the mode for a port which requires the copy path to be set as RA.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is displayed when the model is ETERNUS6000.

• Initiator

• Target

1264

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Port Settings

• WWN

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the WWN for the FC port.

A unique WWN in the ETERNUS storage system is required.

The following content is displayed as the default setting:

• When the "Storage System Information File" or "Path Information File" has been read, the

FC port WWNs that were specified in each file are displayed.

• When the storage system information is manually specified, the FC port WWNs that were created from the WWN of the ETERNUS storage system are displayed.

• Hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

• 16 digits (using "F (f)" or "0" in entire 16 digits is not allowed)

For screens in which FC port WWNs are displayed, refer to

"Display screen of the FC port WWNs" (page 1269)

• IP Version

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the IP version of the iSCSI port.

If the copy path is already specified for the port when the copy path information file is being loaded, the IP version that is set for the port is selected as the default setting. For other ports,

"IPv4" is set as the default setting. This item is displayed only when the port type is "iSCSI 1-

Port" or "iSCSI 2-Port".

• IPv4

• IPv6 (Link Local)

• IPv6 (Connect IP)

For a single iSCSI port, one of the following IP versions can be used; IPv4, IPv6 (Link Local), or IPv6 (Connect IP). A copy path can be created between iSCSI ports that are the same IP version.

• IP Address

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the IP address of the iSCSI port.

This item is required when "Port Type" is "iSCSI RA" (for older storage system connection),

"iSCSI-RA 1-Port", or "iSCSI-RA 2-Port" or when "IP Version" is "IPv4". If not specified, the field is blank.

• Numeric characters

• First text box: "1" - "255"

• Other text boxes: "0" - "255"

• IPv6 Link Local Address

Description Input the IPv6 link local address of the iSCSI port.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is required when "IP Version" is "IPv6 (Link Local)". Refer to

"Available IPv6 Address"

(page 133) for details. Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

This item is displayed only when the port type is "iSCSI 1-Port" or "iSCSI 2-Port".

If not specified, the field is blank.

• fe80::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

1265

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• IPv6 Connect IP Address

Description Input the IPv6 connect IP address of the iSCSI port.

Input condition/

Display contents

This item is required when "IP Version" is "IPv6 (Connect IP)".

"Global address", "unique local address", or "6to4 address" can be input for the IP address.

Refer to

Refer to "IPv6 Address Notation" (page 384) for details.

for details. Note that the current setting is displayed by an abbreviation.

This item is displayed only when the port type is "iSCSI 1-Port" or "iSCSI 2-Port".

If not specified, the field is blank.

• xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx xxxx: 0 - ffff (FFFF) (hexadecimal, alphanumeric characters)

• iSCSI Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the iSCSI name of the iSCSI port (required).

If not specified, the field is blank.

Specify a unique iSCSI Name in the same storage system.

• 4 - 223 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('-', '.', ':')

• The name starts with "iqn." or "eui."

• Alias Name

Description Input the Alias Name of the iSCSI port (can be omitted).

If not specified, the field is blank.

Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols ('-', '.', ':', '+', '@', '_', '=', '/', '[', ']', ',', '~') Input condition/

Display contents

• User Name

Description Input the user name to access the iSCSI port (can be omitted).

Make sure to set the user name and password together. If not specified, the field is blank.

Up to 255 alphanumeric characters and symbols Input condition/

Display contents

• Password

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the password to access the iSCSI port (can be omitted).

Make sure to set the user name and password together. The entry is displayed with "*" or similar characters. If not specified, the field is blank.

12 - 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols

1266

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Operation Method Selection

• Operation Method

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to continue the storage system registration.

• Finish of registration by file reading

• Registration from file

When selecting "Registration from file", specify a file in the "Storage System Information

File Selection" field. When 128 storage systems are already registered, "Registration from file" cannot be selected.

● Storage System Information File Selection

• Storage System Information File

Description Input the location where the device information file is stored.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location

● Operation Method Selection

• Operation Method

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select whether to continue the storage system information registration.

• Registration by manual operation

When selecting "Registration by manual operation", specify parameters in the "Storage

System Information Setting" field. When 128 storage systems are already registered, "Registration by manual operation" cannot be selected.

• Finish of registration by manual operation

● Storage System Information Setting

• Storage System Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the storage system type that is to be registered.

• ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4/AF650 S2

• ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX200 S4/AF250 S2 (*1)

• ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

• ETERNUS DX8100 S3

• ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3/AF650

• ETERNUS DX100 S3/DX200 S3/DX200F/AF250 (*1)

• ETERNUS DX8700 S2

• ETERNUS DX8100 S2

• ETERNUS DX90 S2

• ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2

• ETERNUS DX90

• ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700

• ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000 MODEL400/600/800/1200/2200

• ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000 MODEL300/500/700/900/1100/2100

• ETERNUS6000

*1: ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3 is displayed only when the local storage system is purchased outside Japan.

1267

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Box ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the Box ID of the storage system that is to be registered.

Box ID that is already registered in the ETERNUS storage system cannot be specified.

• Capital letters

• Numeric characters

• Spaces

• "#" (hash keys)

• 40 characters (fixed)

• WWN

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the WWN of the ETERNUS storage system that is to be registered.

A WWN that is already registered in the ETERNUS storage system cannot be specified.

• Hexadecimal numbers (0 - 9, A - F, a - f)

• 16 digits (using "F (f)" or "0" in entire 16 digits is not allowed)

• For the ETERNUS DX/AF (other than the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3), the storage system WWN is displayed in the

[System] screen. Refer to "System (Basic Information)" (page 657)

for details.

•

For older models, the storage system WWN is created from the FC port WWN. Refer to "How to obtain the storage system WWNs" (page 1268)

for details.

•

For screens in which FC port WWNs are displayed, refer to "Display screen of the FC port WWNs" (page 1269) . Note

that the same storage system WWN is obtained from any FC port in the ETERNUS storage system.

• If only an iSCSI interface is installed in the ETERNUS storage system, a storage system WWN cannot be created. In this

case, use the procedure in "Export Storage Information" (page 609) in older models to create the storage system

information file. After this file is created, use the obtained file to register the storage system information with this function.

How to obtain the storage system WWNs

Create the storage system WWN from a FC port WWN.

• For ETERNUS DX8100 S2/ETERNUS DX8700 S2, ETERNUS DX8700 S2/ETERNUS DX8100 S2,

ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, ETERNUS DX90 S2, or ETERNUS DX90

(Example 1)

When the FC port WWN is "500000E0D4445884", the storage system WWN is "500000E0D4445800".

The underlined value indicates bit7 - 0 in the following example:

Byte position bit position

FC port WWN

(bit format)

Storage system

WWN (bit format)

63 – 56

55–48

47–40

39–32

31–24

23–16

15–8

500000E0D4445884

(0101 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 1101 0100 0100 0100 0101 1000 1000 0100)

500000E0D4445800

(0101 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 1101 0100 0100 0100 0101 1000 0000 0000)

7–0

1268

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• For ETERNUS DX410/DX440/DX8100/DX8400/DX8700,

ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000 model 400/600/800/1200/2200,

ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000 model 300/500/700/900/1100/2100, or ETERNUS6000

Convert the FC port WWN to bit format and change the bit60 - 48 values to "0".

(Example 2)

When the FC port WWN is "2040000B5D6A0000", the storage system WWN is "2000000B5D6A0000".

The underlined value indicates bit60 - 48 in the following example:

Byte position bit position

FC port WWN

(bit format)

Storage system

WWN (bit format)

63 – 56

55–48

47–40

39–32

31–24

23–16

15–8

2040000B5D6A0000

(0010 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 1011 0101 1101 0110 1010 0000 0000 0000 0000)

2000000B5D6A0000

(0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1011 0101 1101 0110 1010 0000 0000 0000 0000)

7–0

Display screen of the FC port WWNs

The FC port WWNs are displayed in the following screens:

• For the ETERNUS DX/AF (other than the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3)

 Port information (FC) of the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen

• For the ETERNUS DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2

 Port information (FC) of the [Channel Adapter Detail] screen

• For the ETERNUS DX90

 Port status (FC) of the [Storage System Status] screen

• For the ETERNUS DX410/DX440, the ETERNUS DX8100/DX8400/DX8700, or the ETERNUS4000/ETERNUS8000

 CA Detailed Information screen (FC) of the [Storage System Status] screen

• For the ETERNUS6000

 WWN list (FC) of the [Storage System Status] screen

● Set Copy Path

• Copy Path Information

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a copy path. Up to eight copy paths can be selected.

Checkboxes are displayed only for the combinations when all the following conditions are met

(combinations to which a copy path can be set):

• The same port type (FC, iSCSI, or iSCSI-RA) is used for both the local storage system and remote storage system.

• The same IP version (v4, v6L, or v6C) is specified for the iSCSI ports that are used for both the local and remote storage systems.

• The port type is RA or CA/RA.

• For the ETERNUS6000, the local storage system and the remote storage system have different port usages (Initiator/Target).

When the copy path is specified

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1269

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Line Setting

• Connection Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the connection type for the remote storage system.

• Remote

Connecting the local and remote storage systems via a line.

• Direct

Connecting the local and remote storage systems without a line.

Even in connection via a switch, select "Direct" when not using a line.

• Link Speed

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the link speed (*1) for connection with the remote storage system. This item can be set when the "Connection Type" is "Remote".

*1: For the "Link Speed" field, specify the WAN bandwidth (a total of multiple lines, if used) that can be actually used for REC. For some cases such as using the bandwidth control device, the WAN bandwidth that can be used for REC is designated. In this case, specify the designated value. To control WAN bandwidth, using the bandwidth control device is required.

When using a carrier equipment with the compression function, specify the bandwidth

(a total of multiple lines, if used) that can be used after compression. In the ETERNUS storage systems, data compression is unavailable. To compress data, using a carrier equipment with the compression function is required.

Example 1: When the bandwidth control device is not used

Line bandwidth (*2): 200Mbit/s (All available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 4 (200Mbit/s for all)

Link speed = 200 (Mbit/s) x 4 = 800 (Mbit/s)

Example 2: When the bandwidth control device is used

Line bandwidth with bandwidth limit (*2): 100Mbit/s (100Mbit/s out of 200Mbit/s line bandwidth is available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 2 (100Mbit/s for all)

Link speed = 100 (Mbit/s) x 2 = 200 (Mbit/s)

Example 3: When the line device has no compression function

Line bandwidth (*2): 200Mbit/s (All available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 2 (200Mbit/s for all)

Compression ratio: 0 (%) (No compression)

Link speed = 200 (Mbit/s) x 2 / (1 - 0 (%)) = 400 (Mbit/s)

Example 4: When the line device has the compression function

Line bandwidth (*2): 200Mbit/s (All available for REC)

The number of lines (*3): 2 (200Mbit/s for all)

Compression ratio: 20 (%) (20% for all)

Link speed = 200 (Mbit/s) x 2 / (1 - 20 (%)) = 500 (Mbit/s)

*2: The line bandwidth that the user has signed up to be used for REC

*3: The number of lines that the user has signed up to be used for REC

• Up to 5-digit decimal number

• 1- 65535 (Mbit/s)

To change the link speed, create a copy path with a new link speed by using this function, and apply the created copy path to the related storage systems.

1270

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Copy Path Information File Selection

• Copy Path Information File

Description Input the location where the copy path information file is stored.

Input condition/

Display contents

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location.

Click the [Browse...] button to specify the location

● Remote Device Information

• Checkbox to select a Box ID

Description Select the checkbox of the path information that is to be applied to the ETERNUS storage system.

Input condition/

Display contents

This checkbox is only displayed when the path information that is created by this function does not match the path information that is already applied.

The Box ID in the path information that is created by using this function is selected by default.

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• Result of applying

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

The results of comparing the path information that is created by using this function and the path information that is already applied to the ETERNUS storage system are displayed.

When the checkbox for selecting a Box ID is selected, the path information after applying the created path information to the ETERNUS storage system is displayed. When the checkbox for selecting a Box ID is cleared, the path information before applying the created path information to the ETERNUS storage system is displayed.

• When the path setting is not to be changed, "Do not Change" is displayed

• When the path is to be added, "Add" is displayed

• When the path is not to be added, "Do not Add" is displayed

• When the path setting is to be changed, "Change" is displayed

• When the path is to be deleted, "Delete" is displayed

Refer to

"Specification for applying result" (page 1273)

and "Display example of an applying result and an actual applying result" (page 1274)

for details. When applying the copy path information file to the ETERNUS storage system, the paths with the "Add", "Change", and

"Delete" states are updated.

The results of comparing the path information that is created by using this function and the path information that is already applied to the ETERNUS storage system

If the created path information and the path information in the ETERNUS storage system do not match and some of the copy paths to the ETERNUS storage system are not selected to be applied (clear the Box ID checkbox), the actual path

information after the application does not correspond to the backed up path information file. Refer to "Specification for applying result" (page 1273)

for details.

1271

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Even when "Result of applying" is "Delete" for the path, the applying result is changed to "Do not Change" when the checkbox for selecting the Box ID is cleared. If the created path information is applied under this condition, the relevant path is not deleted. The path information is merged in the ETERNUS storage system.

• When "Result of applying" is "Do not Change" for a path, the checkbox for selecting a Box ID is selected. In this case, the checkbox cannot be cleared.

● Bandwidth Limit Settings

• Setting Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a bandwidth setting mode.

• Set the same Bandwidth Limit for all paths

• Set the Bandwidth Limit for each path

• Bandwidth Limit

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Set the same Bandwidth Limit for all paths" is selected for the setting mode, enter the bandwidth limit.

When "0" is entered, the bandwidth limit is "Unlimited".

When "Set the Bandwidth Limit for each path" is selected for the setting mode, the field is blank. Set the bandwidth limit for each path in the "Advanced Copy Path" field.

• 0 - 65535 [Mbit/s]

• Blank

● Advanced Copy Path

• Bandwidth Limit

Description Enter the bandwidth limit for each path.

When "0" is entered, the bandwidth limit is "Unlimited".

0 - 65535 [Mbit/s] Input condition/

Display contents

● Remote Device Information

• Checkbox to select the measuring target

Description Select the checkbox of the remote storage system to measure the round trip time.

Input condition/

Display contents

This checkbox is only displayed for the remote storage system of which connection type is

"Remote".

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

1272

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Adding new copy paths

The following example describes how to add new copy paths to the existing copy path configuration.

[Example] Adding a new copy path between "Storage system 1" and "Storage System 3" while a copy path already exists between "Storage system 1" and "Storage system 2".

Storage system 1 Storage system 2

Storage system 3

(newly added storage system)

Storage system 1 and Storage system 2: ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series or older storage systems

Storage system 3: ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series

: Existing copy path

: Copy path that is to be added

(1) Perform basic settings such as registering the Advanced Copy license and setting copy table size in order to use

REC in "Storage system 3".

(2) Use this function in "Storage system 3" and register the storage system information for "Storage system 1", "Storage system 2", and "Storage system 3".

(3) Create a copy path information file that includes all the following copy path information.

Copy path between "Storage system 1" and "Storage system 3"

Copy path between "Storage system 1" and "Storage system 2"

(4) Apply the copy path information file that is created in

Step (3)

to "Storage system 3" and "Storage system 1".

Specification for applying result

Comparison result (*1)

The Box ID information exists in both storage systems

The path information is the same

The path information is different

The Box ID exists only in the created path information

The Box ID information exists only in the path information in the ETERNUS storage system

Display item in the "Result of applying" field

Status of the checkbox for selecting a Box ID

Selected

(Apply the information)

Cleared

(Do not apply the information)

Default

Do not Change Do not Change Do not Change

Change

Add

Delete

Do not Change (*2)

Do not Add

Change

Add

Do not Change (*2) Do not Change

*1: The comparison result between "created path information" and "path information in the ETERNUS storage system" is displayed.

*2: If the path information file is applied to the ETERNUS storage system under this condition, the contents of the path information in the ETERNUS storage system and the backup path file do not match.

1273

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Display example of an applying result and an actual applying result

[Example 1] When applying the created path information to the ETERNUS storage system (all of the checkboxes for selecting the Box IDs are selected)

Storage system 4

Created path information

Path c Path b

Storage system 1

Storage system 3

Created path information is applied

Path information in the storage system

Storage system 2

Path a

Storage system 1

Path b

Storage system 3

Checkbox to select a Box ID Storage system 2: Selected, Storage system 3: Selected (*1), Storage system 4: Selected

Result of applying

How the path information in the storage system is to be changed if the created path information is applied is displayed.

Path a: Delete, Path b: Do not Change, Path c: Add

Application result

Path information in the storage system (actual result of applying)

Storage system 4

Path c Storage system 1

Path b Storage system 3

All the path information ("path information in the storage system", "backed up path information", and "downloaded path information") are the same.

Storage system 4

Obtained path information

Backed up path information (*2)

Path c Storage system 1

Path b Storage system 3

Storage system 4

Downloaded path information (*3)

Path c Storage system 1

Path b Storage system 3

*1: Because there are no differences between "created path information" and "path information in the storage system", the checkbox is selected and cannot be changed.

*2: When the copy path information file is applied to the ETERNUS storage system, a backup path file is created. The backup path file can be downloaded by using the [Export All Copy Path] function.

*3: The copy path information file that is saved in the setting PC by clicking the [Save] button in this function.

1274

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

[Example 2] When applying the created path information to the ETERNUS storage system (the checkbox for selecting Box ID is cleared)

Storage system 4

Created path information

Path c

Storage system 1

Path b

Storage system 3

Created path information is applied

Path information in the storage system

Storage system 2

Path a

Storage system 1

Path b

Storage system 3

Checkbox to select a Box ID Storage system 2: Cleared, Storage system 3: Selected (*1), Storage system 4: Cleared

Application result

Result of applying

How the path information in the storage system is to be changed if the created path information is applied is displayed.

Path a: Do not Change, Path b: Do not Change,

Path c: Do not Add

Path information in the storage system (actual result of applying)

Storage system 2

Path a Storage system 1

Path b

The copy path information in the ETERNUS storage system is not changed after the copy path information file is applied.

Storage system 3

Obtained path information

Backed up path information (*2)

Storage system 1

Path b Storage system 3

In the backed up path information, only the part of the "created path information" that is applied to the ETERNUS storage system is saved.

In this case, the backed up path information does not match "path information in the storage system".

Downloaded path information (*3)

Storage system 1

Path b Storage system 3

The downloaded path information is the same as the backed up path information.

*1: Because there are no differences between "created path information" and "path information in the storage system", the checkbox is selected and cannot be changed.

*2: When the copy path information file is applied to the ETERNUS storage system, a backup path file is created. The backup path file can be downloaded by using the [Export All Copy Path] function.

*3: The copy path information file that is saved in the setting PC by clicking the [Save] button in this function.

1275

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

[Example 3] When applying the created path information to the ETERNUS storage system (the checkbox for selecting Box ID is selected or cleared)

Storage system 4

Created path information

Path c

Storage system 1

Path b

Storage system 3

(Increase the number of ports for Path b)

Created path information is applied

Path information in the storage system

Storage system 2

Path a

Storage system 1

Path b

Storage system 3

Checkbox to select a Box ID

Storage system 2: Cleared, Storage system 3: Selected, Storage system 4: Selected

Result of applying

How the path information in the storage system is to be changed if the created path information is applied is displayed.

Path a: Do not Change, Path b: Change,

Path c: Add

Application result

Path information in the storage system (actual result of applying)

Storage system 4

Path c Storage system 1

Path b

Storage system 3

Storage system 2

Path a

Path a between Storage systems 1 and 2 is merged in the path information that is applied to the ETERNUS storage system.

Obtained path information

Backed up path information (*1)

Storage system 4

Path c Storage system 1

Path b Storage system 3

Some parts of the backed up path information that is applied in the ETERNUS storage system (in this example, all of "created path information") is retained. The merged parts (Path a between Storage systems 1 and 2) are not backed up. In this case, the backed up path information does not match

"path information in the storage system".

Downloaded path information (*2)

Storage system 4

Path c Storage system 1

Path b Storage system 3

The downloaded path information is the same as the backed up path information.

*1: When the copy path information file is applied to the ETERNUS storage system, a backup path file is created. The backup path file can be downloaded by using the [Export All Copy Path] function.

*2: The copy path information file that is saved in the setting PC by clicking the [Save] button in this function.

1276

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Measure Round Trip Time

For details about this function, refer to "Measure Round Trip Time" (page 634) .

● Measure Round Trip Time

• Round Trip Time

Description The round trip time (msec) measurement result between the source device and the remote storage system is displayed.

Input condition/

Display contents

If a measurement error has occurred, the field is blank. The value can be changed. The following describes the recommended round trip time.

• Asynchronous copy within 100 msec.

• Synchronous copy within 50 msec.

Numeric characters between 1 - 65535 (decimal)

Modify REC Buffer

For details about this function, refer to "Modify REC Buffer" (page 635)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify REC Buffer" (page 1330)

● REC Buffer Setting List

• Usage

Description Specify the usage of the REC Buffer.

Input condition/

Display contents

When setting the REC Buffer for sending, select "Send". When setting the REC Buffer for receiving, select "Receive". To delete the REC Buffer, select "Unused".

• Send

• Receive

• Unused

• Remote Box ID

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Box ID for the remote storage system.

If the copy path information is deleted after the REC Buffer creation, "???" is displayed. Note that REC Buffers with "???" cannot be used. Delete any REC Buffers with this status. If "Unused" is selected for the usage, "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Remote storage System Box ID

• "-" (hyphen)

• Size

Description Select the REC Buffer size.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

The REC Buffer size can be set up to the maximum size that is calculated from the installed memory capacity and the usable cache memory capacity in the ETERNUS DX/AF (excluding the currently used capacity such as assigned size to the copy tables).

1277

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

128 MB

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

128 MB

256 MB

512 MB

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3 and the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

128 MB

256 MB

512 MB

1024 MB

2048 MB

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3, the ETERNUS DX8700 S3, and the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

128 MB

256 MB

512 MB

1024 MB

2048 MB

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

128 MB

256 MB

512 MB

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

128 MB

256 MB

512 MB

1024 MB

2048 MB

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

128 MB

256 MB

512 MB

• If "Unused" is selected for the usage

"-" (hyphen)

256MB. Note that an REC Buffer cannot be created if the copy table size is larger than 264MB.

• Forwarding Interval

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the data transfer intervals.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

1 sec., 2 sec., 4 sec., 8 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 45 sec., 60 sec., 75 sec., 90 sec., 105 sec., 120 sec.,

"-" (hyphen)

1278

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Monitoring Time

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the monitoring time, before transition to the " Halt" state for a copy session when an REC Buffer shortage occurs.

If the REC Buffer is in a high-load state for the specified monitoring time, the copy session is automatically changed to " Halt" state. When "0 min." is specified in this field, REC Buffer shortage monitoring is not performed.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

0 min., 1 min., 2 min., 3 min., 4 min., 5 min., 6 min., 7 min., 8 min., 9 min., 10 min., 11 min.,

12 min., 13 min., 14 min., 15 min."-" (hyphen)

• HALT Wait Timer

Description Specify the maximum non-response time. During the non-response time, the host I/O response is stopped to give priority to performing REC transfers in a high-load state.

If the non-response time exceeds the specified value, response to host I/O is restarted. However, the copy session is changed to the " Halt" state. When "0 sec." is specified for this field, the ETERNUS DX/AF gives priority to the host I/O, and the copy session is immediately changed to the " Halt" state.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

0 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec."-" (hyphen) Input condition/

Display contents

● Advanced Setting

"I/O Priority Mode", "Immediate HALT Mode", and "High Bandwidth Mode" can only be set when setting a copy operation or host I/O tuning for each REC Buffer. It is not necessary to change the default setting ("Enable") for normal use.

• I/O Priority Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select either "Enable" or "Disable" for the "I/O Priority Mode" of the REC Buffer.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

"I/O Priority Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O when an initial copy for starting, restarting, or recovering the copy function is performed.

• Enable

• Disable

• "-" (hyphen)

• This mode should only be used by users who want to maintain host I/O performance as much as possible during REC.

• If "Enable" is selected and host I/O with a high load continues, it may take an extended period of time for the data to reach an equivalent state. Reduce throughput by as much as possible to avoid exceeding the line bandwidth of REC during initial copying.

• Immediate HALT Mode

Description Select either "Enable" or "Disable" for the "Immediate HALT Mode" of the REC Buffer.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

"Immediate HALT Mode" reduces the effect on host I/O because of the insufficient of REC Buffer when "HALT Wait Timer" is set to "0 sec.". Enable this item when the response to host I/O is reduced even if "0 sec." is selected for the "HALT Wait Timer".

1279

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Input condition/

Display contents

• Enable

• Disable

• "-" (hyphen)

• This mode should only be used by users who want to maintain host I/O performance as much as possible during REC.

• Items that are set for this mode are only applied when "0 sec." is selected for "HALT Wait Timer".

• When "Enable" is selected, the ETERNUS DX/AF changes the sessions using the target REC Buffers to " Halt" if the capacity of an REC Buffer is insufficient. If this occurs, the initial copy starts every time when recovering from the "

Halt" state and the time required for the order of data transfers cannot be guaranteed, resulting in this process taking an extended period of time.

• High Bandwidth Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select either "Enable" or "Disable" for the "High Bandwidth Mode" of the REC Buffer.

If "Unused" is selected for the usage, "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

This item is displayed only when using the controller firmware version V10L4x or later.

• Enable

• Disable

• "-" (hyphen)

If the controller firmware version is V10L4x or later, this mode is also enabled for the existing REC Buffers. To keep the existing transfer speed specified with a controller firmware version V10L3x or earlier, select "Disable" for this mode.

Create REC Disk Buffer

For details about this function, refer to "Create REC Disk Buffer" (page 639)

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create REC Disk Buffer" (page 1330)

● New RAID Group

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input a RAID group name to be created.

An existing RAID group name cannot be used.

• Up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Spaces

1280

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

● Manual Setting

• Controlling CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the Controlling CM of the RAID group to be created.

"Automatic" and the normal CM number ("CE#x CM#y" or "CM#y") that is installed are displayed as options (x: CE number, y: CM number).

Select "Automatic" for normal operations. When "Automatic" is selected, the Controlling CM

that is to be allocated is determined by the RAID group number. Refer to "Automatic Controlling CM setting" (page 1229) for details.

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

Automatic

CE#x CM#y

• For the other models

Automatic

CM#y

• Encryption by CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the RAID group encryption status with the radio button.

When the encryption mode is disabled, "On" cannot be selected.

When "On" is specified for "Encryption by CM", select Online, Nearline, or SSD type drives.

• On

Use a CM to perform encryption

• Off

Perform encryption without using a CM

● Drive Selection ([Tabular] Tab)

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive that is to be used.

Input condition/

Display contents

When selecting drives, refer to

"Requirements for selecting drives" (page 640)

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Drive Selection ([Graphic] Tab)

• DE selection list box

Description Select the DE group.

Input condition/

Display contents

Options are displayed in the list box when at least one CE or DE in the DE group is installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

Refer to

"Options and DE groups for each model" (page 1227) for details.

DE#Xx (X: 0 - B)

1281

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Checkbox to select drives

Description Select the checkbox for the drive that is to be used.

Input condition/

Display contents

Checkboxes are displayed for unused drives.

Refer to

"Requirements for selecting drives" (page 640)

for details about drive location for each DE.

Placing the mouse pointer on the icon displays the detailed information of the drive.

When selecting drives, refer to

Checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

● Advanced Setting

Stripe Depth should be set only when advanced tuning needs to be performed for each RAID group configuring the REC Disk Buffer. It is not necessary to change the default value (64KB) for normal use.

• Stripe Depth

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the Stripe Depth of the RAID group that is to be created.

• 64 KB

• 128 KB

• 256 KB

• 512 KB

• 1024 KB

Modify REC Multiplicity

For details about this function, refer to "Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 647) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 1330)

● Remote Box ID List

• Priority Level

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the priority level.

When the "Connection Type" is "Remote", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Automatic

REC is performed using the priority level (Automatic Priority/High Priority/Middle Priority/

Low Priority/Very Low Priority) that is specified in "Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 600)

• 1 - 8

Specify from "1" to "8" for the REC priority level. "1" corresponds to "Very Low Priority", and

"8" corresponds to "High Priority" in "Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 600)

• "-" (hyphen)

• Specification Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the specification mode for multiplicity.

When the "Connection Type" is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• Automatic

• Manual

• "-" (hyphen)

1282

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Multiplicity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When the specification mode is "Manual", specify multiplicity.

When the specification mode is "Automatic", or when the connection type is "Direct", a "-" (hyphen) is displayed.

• 1 - 1024

• "-" (hyphen)

● Advanced Setting

• Copy Schedule Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the REC copy schedule mode for each remote storage system.

It is not necessary to change the default setting (Session Balancing) for normal use.

• Session Balancing

Copy sessions are scheduled evenly to each Controlling CM for a copy source RAID group (a

RAID group to which the copy source volume belongs).

• Destination RAID Group Balancing

Only one copy session can be performed for each copy destination RAID group. This method prevents unequal loading on a specific RAID group. This may improve the copy performance when the copy source storage system and the copy destination storage system are connected by direct connection and the copy destination RAID group is configured by Nearline disks.

• Copy performance is not improved by selecting "Destination RAID Group Balancing" in the following conditions:

When the type of the copy destination volume is not "Standard"

When the copy destination volume "Standard" and concatenated

• Specify the same copy schedule mode for copy source and copy destination storage systems. If different modes are specified, the copy performance may not improve as expected.

Set REC Bandwidth Limit

For details about this function, refer to "Set REC Bandwidth Limit" (page 648) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Set REC Bandwidth Limit" (page 1331) .

● Bandwidth Limit Settings

• Setting Mode

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select a bandwidth setting mode.

• Set the same Bandwidth Limit for all paths

• Set the Bandwidth Limit for each path

1283

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Bandwidth Limit

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

When "Set the same Bandwidth Limit for all paths" is selected for the setting mode, enter the bandwidth limit.

When "0" is entered, the bandwidth limit is "Unlimited".

When "Set the Bandwidth Limit for each path" is selected for the setting mode, the field is blank. Set the bandwidth limit for each path in the "Advanced Copy Path" field.

• 0 - 65535 (Mbit/s)

• Blank

● Advanced Copy Path

• Bandwidth Limit

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Enter the bandwidth limit for each path.

When "0" is entered, the bandwidth limit is "Unlimited".

0 - 65535 (Mbit/s)

Create ODX Buffer Volume

For details about this function, refer to "Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 651) .

For the factory default settings for this function, refer to "B. Create ODX Buffer Volume" (page 1331)

● ODX Buffer Volume

• Name

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Input the ODX Buffer volume name.

An existing volume name cannot be specified. Volume names starting with "$SYSVOL",

"$VVOL_META", or "$DEDUP" cannot be used.

Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols (except "," (comma) and "?")

• Capacity

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Specify the ODX Buffer volume capacity and select the unit of capacity.

• 1 GB - 1 TB

• TB/GB/MB

If "Use all Largest Free Space" is selected, inputting the capacity is not required. The specified value and unit are not used.

Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

1284

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Type

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the ODX Buffer volume type.

If the Thin Provisioning function is disabled, "Standard" is displayed in this field.

• Standard

Volumes that are created in RAID groups.

• Thin Provisioning Volume

Volumes that are created in TPPs.

• Use all Largest Free Space

Description Select the "Enable" checkbox to create an ODX Buffer volume with the largest available free space in the RAID group.

Input condition/

Display contents

This checkbox can be selected or cleared only when "Type" is "Standard".

If the "Enable" checkbox is selected, an ODX Buffer volume with the maximum capacity is created with the available space displayed in the "Largest Free Space" field for the selected RAID group.

"Enable" checkbox

• Selected

• Cleared

• When the "Enable" checkbox is selected, the capacity and the unit are not available.

• An ODX Buffer volume cannot be created if the "Largest Free Space" is less than 1 GB or larger than 1 TB.

• The capacity for the created ODX Buffer volume is not displayed. Use the [Volume] screen to check the volume capacity after volume creation is complete.

• ODX Buffer volumes are used as buffers for saving old data and cannot be used as a copy source or a copy destination. Therefore, even if "Use all Largest Free Space" is enabled, a similar restriction is not applied when creating Standard type volumes, SDPVs, and WSVs.

• Up to 15 numbers can be used. If a decimal point is included in the input value, up to 14 numbers can be used.

[Example] 0.1234567890123 (14 numbers and a decimal point)

• Encryption by CM

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the encryption status of the ODX Buffer volume.

This item is not displayed in the following conditions.

• Encryption mode is disabled

• The ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3 is being used

• On

Volumes that are encrypted by CM are created.

• Off

Volumes that are not encrypted are created.

• When "Thin Provisioning" is selected for "Type", selecting on or off for "Encryption by CM" is not available.

• When "Encryption by CM" is "On", a RAID group that is configured with SEDs cannot be selected. When creating an

ODX Buffer volume in a RAID group that is configured by SEDs, select "Off".

1285

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

A. Parameter List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

• Allocation

Description

Input condition/

Display contents

Select the allocation mode for the ODX Buffer volume.

This item is available only when the "Type" is "Thin Provisioning Volume".

• Thin

Physical area is allocated to the target area of the volume when a write I/O is received.

• Thick

Physical area is allocated to the whole area of the volume when volumes are created.

● Target RAID Group/Thin Provisioning Pool

• Target RAID Group/Thin Provisioning Pool

Description • When "Type" is "Standard" (select RAID group)

Select RAID groups to which the ODX Buffer volume is created.

Input condition/

Display contents

• When "Type" is "Thin Provisioning Volume" (select TPP)

Select TPPs to which the ODX Buffer volume is created.

RAID group or TPP

• When "Type" is "Standard" (select RAID group)

When "Encryption by CM" is "On", a RAID group that is configured with SEDs cannot be selected.

RAID groups in the following conditions are not displayed in the target RAID group list:

• RAID groups that are registered in TPPs

• RAID groups that are registered in FTRPs

• RAID groups that are registered as REC Disk Buffers

• RAID groups that are registered as EXCPs

• RAID groups in which 128 volumes are already created

• RAID groups for which "Usage" is "Temporary"

• RAID groups with free space that is less than 1GB

• External RAID Groups

• When "Type" is "Thin Provisioning Volume" (select TPP)

FTRPs and FTSPs are not displayed in the target Thin Provisioning Pool list.

1286

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

B. Factory Default List

This appendix describes the default settings for the following management functions.

•

System Management

•

Volume Management

•

Connectivity Management

•

RAID Group Management

•

Thin Provisioning Management

•

Advanced Copy Management

The following sections describe the factory default values. Note that functions and setting items that do not have default settings are not listed.

System Management

This section provides information on the default parameters of the following actions for system management.

•

Smart Setup Wizard

•

Set Deduplication/Compression Mode

•

Modify Date and Time

•

Change Box ID

•

Setup Subsystem Parameters

•

Setup Encryption Mode

•

Setup SMI-S Environment

•

Setup Power Management

•

Setup Extreme Cache

•

Setup Exclusive Read Cache

•

Setup Disk Drive Patrol

•

Setup Debug Mode

•

Backup Configuration

•

Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

•

Clear Cache

•

Modify Eco-mode General Setting

•

Create Eco-mode Schedule

•

•

•

•

•

•

Setup Firewall

•

•

•

•

•

•

Setup E-Mail Notification

•

Download MIB File

•

•

Setup Syslog

1287

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

•

Setup SSH Server Key

•

Create Self-signed SSL Certificate

•

Create Key/CSR

•

Setup SSL Version

•

Setup Event Notification

•

Export/Delete Log

•

Export/Delete Panic Dump

•

•

•

•

•

Update SED Authentication Key

•

Create External Drive

•

Setup Remote Support

•

Setup Log Sending Parameters

•

Setup AIS Connect Environment

•

Setup Remote Session Permission

•

Apply Controller Firmware

■ Smart Setup Wizard

Screen

CA Type Selection CA Type

Setting item

FC connection topology selection

Connection

Host Selection (Register Host) Checkbox to select a host

Setting Host NickName Name

Host Selection

New Volume

Volume Selection

Checkbox to select a host

Number of Volumes

Checkbox to select a volume

Default value

The default value varies depending on the CA type installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

The priority of the CA types is as follows:

FC > iSCSI > SAS

Fabric

Cleared

• For FC host

"FC"

• For iSCSI host

"iSCSI"

• For SAS host

"SAS"

Cleared

1288

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Set Deduplication/Compression Mode

Screen

Deduplication Mode Settings

Setting item

Deduplication/Compression

Default value

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2 and the ETERNUS AF250/AF650

Enable

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

Factory default setting

• When "Memory Extension" is installed

Enable

• When "Memory Extension" is not installed

Disable

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S3 and the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

Factory default setting

• When "Memory Extension" is installed

Enable

• When "Memory Extension" is not installed

Disable

When the existing controller firmware is upgraded to V10L60 or later

Disable

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4

Disable

■ Modify Date and Time

Screen

Date/Time Settings Date

Setting item

Time Zone Settings Time Zone

Daylight Saving Time Settings Daylight Saving Time

Range

Start

End

Default value

The current date and time that is specified in the ETER-

NUS DX/AF.

(When the ETERNUS DX/AF is installed in Japan, the local time for Japan is displayed)

• When the ETERNUS DX/AF is shipped from Japan and shipped to Japan (GMT+09:00) Tokyo, Osaka,

Kyoto, Fukuoka, Sapporo

• When the ETERNUS DX/AF is shipped from Japan to regions other than Japan (GMT+00:00) Dublin, London, Manchester, Lisbon

The default value depends on the shipment information.

• When selecting "Manually" in the "Time Zone" field

+00:00

Disable

By day of the week

• When "Range" is "By day of the week"

January 1st Sunday 00 : 00

• When "Range" is "By Date"

January 01 00 : 00

• When "Range" is "By day of the week"

January 1st Sunday 00 : 00

• When "Range" is "By Date"

January 01 00 : 00

1289

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

NTP Settings

Screen Setting item

Synchronize with NTP Server

Primary NTP Server

LAN Port used for NTP

Secondary NTP Server

LAN Port used for NTP

Disable

MNT

Default value

■ Change Box ID

Set Box ID

Screen

Box ID

Setting item

Device ID

Default value

■ Setup Subsystem Parameters

Screen

Setup Subsystem Parameters

Setup Host

Setup Disk Drive

Setting item

Thin Provisioning Allocation

Mode

Flexible Write Through

TPP balancing

Default value

Turbo Mode

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2, the ETERNUS AF250/AF650, and the ETERNUS DX200F

When the ETERNUS DX/AF is shipped from the factory

Enable

When the existing controller firmware is upgraded to V10L30 or later

Disable

• For the other models

Disable

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4 and the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF650 S2

Enable

• For the other models

Disable

512

Disable

Enable

Disable

Writeback Limit Count

Expand Volume Mode

Load Balance

Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host

Optimize for Advanced Format

SSD

Expand Host Mode

Checkcode Enforcement

Copybackless

• When the ETERNUS DX/AF is shipped from the factory

Enable

• When the existing controller firmware is upgraded to V10L30 or later

Disable

Enable

1290

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Screen

Web GUI Settings

Deduplication/Compression

Settings

Setting item

Function to Add Host

Use "Add Host Group"

Use "Add Host"

Data Compare when hash collision occurs

Selected

Cleared

Disable

■ Setup Encryption Mode

Screen

Encryption Mode Setting

Setting item

Encryption Mode Disable

Default value

■ Setup SMI-S Environment

Screen

SMI-S Settings SMI-S

Setting item

SSL Certificate

Performance Information

Default value

• When the ETERNUS DX/AF is shipped to EMEA and

North America

Enable

• When the ETERNUS DX/AF is shipped to regions other than above

Disable

SMI-S Self-signed SSL Certificate

Disable

■ Setup Power Management

Screen

Power Control by External

Device

Setting item

RCIL

Auto Power

Power Resume

PWC

Disable

Cleared

Default value

Connection Module Settings

(*1)

PWC Connection Settings Connection CM

Delay until Shutdown

Set management unit interface

Power Failure Signal

Low Battery Signal

UPS Shutdown Signal

Cleared

0 min.

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

Manual

• For the other models

PMAN

Positive

• Cleared

• When the "Enable" checkbox is selected

"Positive"

*1: This item is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3.

1291

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

■ Setup Extreme Cache

Screen

Extreme Cache Setting

Extreme Cache Memory Size

Setting

Extreme Cache Pool Memory

Size Settings

Tuning Parameters Settings

Setting item

Cache Used

New Memory Size

Select Drives

Encryption by CM

Initial Caching Threshold

Caching Threshold

Default value

Not Used

0 (GB)

All cleared

Off

• 5

• "Not replace Cache Data" checkbox

Cleared (relocate)

10 (Fastest)

Read

Caching Priority

Monitoring I/O

■ Setup Exclusive Read Cache

Screen

Cache Size Settings

Setting item

Exclusive Read Cache 0%

Default value

■ Setup Disk Drive Patrol

Screen

Setup Disk Drive Patrol

Setting item

Disk Drive Patrol

■ Setup Debug Mode

Screen

Master Trace Level Settings

Trace Level by Group

Panic

Setting item

Master Trace Level

Level

Collection Mode

Enable

Default value

■ Backup Configuration

Screen Setting item

Select Configuration Definition Configuration Definition Data

Select Backup Slot Configuration Definition Data

Default value

Configuration (Latest)

Backup #1

■ Start/Stop Performance Monitoring

Screen

Performance Monitoring

(when starting performance monitoring)

Interval

Setting item

Standard

0x06

Nose and Tail Mode

Default value

30 sec.

Default value

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1292

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

■ Clear Cache

Screen

Target Cache Settings

Setting item

Target Cache

*1: This item is only displayed when EXC is enabled.

*2: This item is only displayed when EXCP is enabled.

■ Modify Eco-mode General Setting

Screen

Eco-mode General Settings Eco-mode

Setting item

Disable

Default value

• CM

Selected

• Extreme Cache (*1)

Selected

• Extreme Cache Pool (*2)

Selected

Default value

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1293

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

■ Create Eco-mode Schedule

Set Event

Screen Setting item

Event Type

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Setup User Account

Screen

Add New User Account

Setting item

Role

Account

Password Policy

Lockout Policy

1294

Monitor

Enable

Disable

Default value everyday

• When the event type is "everyday"

From Time

00:00

To Time

00:00

• When the event type is "Every week"

Period (start day)

Monday

Period (end day)

Monday

From Time

00:00

To Time

00:00

• When the event type is "Specific days"

Month

Every Month

Period (start date)

Period (term)

One day only

From Time

00:00

To Time

00:00

• When the event type is "Specific week"

Month

Every Month

Period (nth week)

1st

Period (start day)

Monday

Period (end day)

Monday

From Time

00:00

To Time

00:00

Default value

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

■ Modify User Policy

Screen

Password Policy

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Setting item

Minimum Password Length

Password Complexity

Password History

Minimum Password Age

Maximum Password Age

Lockout Threshold

Lockout Duration

Default value

Disable

0 (A history of the passwords used is not managed)

0 (The password can be changed at anytime)

0 (The password can be used indefinitely)

0 (The lockout function for the user account is disabled)

30 min.

Lockout Policy

■ Modify RADIUS

Screen

RADIUS Setting

Primary Server,

Secondary Server

Setting item

RADIUS Authentication

Recovery Mode

Port No.

LAN Port

Authentication Mode

Retry Out Time

Default value

Disable

Yes (Communication error / Authentication error)

1812

MNT

CHAP

30 sec.

■ Add Role

Target Role

Screen Default value Setting item

Status Display

RAID Group Management

Volume - Create / Modify

Volume - Delete / Format

Host Interface Management

NAS Management

Advanced Copy Management

Copy Session Management

Storage Migration Management

Storage Management

User Management

Authentication / Role

Security Setting

Maintenance Information

Firmware Management

Maintenance Operation

All cleared

1295

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Setup Network Environment

LAN

IPv4 Settings

Interface

IPv6 Settings

Interface

Screen Setting item

Speed and Duplex

Wake on LAN

Master IP Address

Slave IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

Master IP Link Local Address

Master Connect IP Address

Slave IP Link Local Address

Slave Connect IP Address

Length of Subnet Prefix

Gateway

Auto-negotiation

Disable

Default value

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the

ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETER-

NUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETER-

NUS DX200F

MNT port

IP address that is assigned by the DHCP server

RMT port

192.168.1.1

• For the other models

MNT port

IP address that is assigned by the DHCP server

FST port

192.168.1.1

Not specified

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4, the

ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3, the ETER-

NUS AF250 S2, the ETERNUS AF250, and the ETER-

NUS DX200F

MNT port

Subnet mask that is assigned by the DHCP server

RMT port

255.255.255.0

• For the other models

MNT port

Subnet mask that is assigned by the DHCP server

FST port

255.255.255.0

Not specified

The link local address that is based on the storage system WWN

Not specified

1296

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Setup Firewall

Screen

Firewall Settings

Acceptable Protocol

Setting item Default value

HTTP • MNT Selected

• RMT Selected

• FST (*1) Selected

HTTPS

Telnet

• MNT Selected

• RMT Selected

• FST (*1) Selected

• MNT Selected

• RMT Selected

• FST (*1) Selected

SSH

ICMP

• MNT Selected

• RMT Selected

• FST (*1) Selected

• MNT Selected

• RMT Selected

• FST (*1) Selected

Maintenance-Secure

SNMP

• MNT Selected

• RMT Selected

• FST (*1) Selected

• MNT Selected

• RMT Selected

• FST (*1) Selected

RCIL

ETERNUS DX Discovery

• MNT Cleared

• MNT Selected

*1: FST is displayed when using the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4, the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3, the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/

DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3, the ETERNUS AF650 S2, and the ETERNUS AF650.

■ Setup SNMP Agent Basic Interface

Screen

Basic Interface

Setting item

SNMP Function

LAN Port used for SNMP

Authentication Failure

Engine ID

MIB-II RFC Version

Disable

MNT

Send SNMP Trap

Default

RFC1213

Default value

■ Setup SNMP Manager

Manager

Screen

IP Version

Setting item

IPv4

Default value

1297

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Setup SNMP Agent MIB Access View

Screen

MIB Access View

Setting item

View Name

Subtree#1 - Subtree#10

■ Setup SNMP Agent User

Screen

Setup SNMP Agent User

Setting item

MIB View Setting

Authentication

Authentication Method

Encryption

Encryption Method

■ Setup SNMP Agent Community

Screen Setting item

Setup SNMP Agent Community View Name

Allowed SNMP Manager List

■ Setup SNMP Agent Trap

Screen

Setup SNMP Agent Trap

Setting item

Manager No.

SNMP Version

Community Name

User Name

Port No.

■ Download MIB File

Screen

Download MIB File Option

Setting item

Version

ViewALL

Inclusion

ViewALL

Disable

MD5

Disable

DES

ViewALL

Cleared

Default value

Manager01 v1

The first community name in the list box

The first user name in the list box

162

Default value

"The ServerView control code is added to the comment line of the MIB definition file" checkbox

Cleared v1

1298

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

■ Setup E-Mail Notification

Screen

Notification E-Mail

E-Mail Server Settings

Advanced Settings

Setting item

Notification E-Mail

LAN Port used for SMTP Connection

SNMP Port No.

SMTP over SSL

SMTP requires authentication

Authentication Method

"Change following Timing

Parameter items" checkbox

Connection Timeout

Response Timeout

Maximum Retries

Retry Interval

Disable

MNT

None

Automatic

Cleared

5 (sec.)

0 (count)

1 (sec.)

■ Setup Syslog

Screen

Syslog Server1, Syslog Server2 Send Log

Setting item

Port No.

LAN Port off

514

MNT

■ Setup SSH Server Key

Screen

SSH Server Key Setting

■ Create Key/CSR

Screen

Create Key/CSR Setting

Setting item

Key Length

■ Create Self-signed SSL Certificate

Screen

Create Self-signed SSL Certificate Setting

Setting item

Key Length

Setting item

Key Length

2048 bit

Default value

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1299

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Setup SSL Version

Screen

SSL Version Settings

Setting item

Protocol

HTTPS (GUI)

Default value

HTTPS (SMI-S)

Maintenance-Secure

• TLS1.0 Selected

• TLS1.1 Selected

• TLS1.2 Selected

• TLS1.0 Selected

• TLS1.1 Selected

• TLS1.2 Selected

• TLS1.0 Selected

• TLS1.1 Selected

• TLS1.2 Selected

■ Setup Event Notification

Screen

Setting based on Severity

Error Severity Level

Warning Severity Level

Informational Level

Setting item

Checkbox to select the notification method

Default value

Refer to "Initial setting list" (page 1071) for details.

■ Export/Delete Log

Screen

Option

Setting item

Export Mode

Specify Time Range

Include I/O Module log

Include NAS Engine log

Log File Size

Delete of Customer Information

All

Yes

Non-segmentation

Default value

■ Export/Delete Panic Dump

Panic Dumps

Screen

Option

Setting item

Panic Dumps

Dump File Segment Size

Cleared

Non-segmentation

Default value

■ Audit Log

Screen

Enable Audit Log

Disable Audit Log

Setting item

Operation mode Disable (*1)

Default value

*1: The Audit log function is disabled by default and only the [Enable Audit log] function is available.

1300

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

■ Setup Audit Log

Screen Setting item

Syslog Server1, Syslog Server2 Send Audit Log

Port No.

LAN Port

■ Add Key Server

Screen

Key Server Setting Port No.

LAN Port

Setting item

■ Create Key Group

Screen

Key Group Setting

■ Create External Drive

Screen

External Drive Setting

Setting item

Security Level

Recovery Mode

Key Valid Period

Key Server

Master

Slave

■ Update SED Authentication Key

Screen

Current SED Authentication

Key Setting

Setting item

Current Key

Setting item

External LU Information off

514

MNT

5696

MNT

High

Automatic

Unlimited

None

Default value

Enabled Key

Default value

"Inherit" checkbox

Selected

Default value

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1301

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Setup Remote Support

Screen

Customer Information

Detailed Settings

Setting item

Information filled by Field

Engineers

Installation Date

Communication Environment Information

Connection Connection Type

LAN Port used for Remote Support

Service

Proxy Server

SMTP Server

Scheduled Connection Time

Scheduled Connection Period

Specify the Day of the Week

Port No.

SMTP Authentication Information

Port No.

SMTP over SSL

Authentication Type

Authentication Method

REMCS Center

Detailed Configuration Information

Port No.

REMCS Center

Data Transmission Method

Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending E-Mail

Use S/MIME

Result notification information

Detailed Settings Administrator

Connection check operator

Time Information

Detailed Settings SMTP Connection Timeout

SMTP Response Timeout

SMTP Retry Count

SMTP Retry Interval

HTTP Timeout

HTTP Retry Count

HTTP Retry Interval

Queue Time before Sending E-

Mails

(only when POP Before SMTP authentication is enabled)

Internet Connection

MNT

Default value

"Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the 'REMCS Center'." checkbox

Country of Installation

(ISO3166 A2)

Cleared

• When logged with "Japanese" as the selected language

• When logged with "English" as the selected language

Blank

2001-01

Undefined (10:00 - 15:00) (*1)

Every Day

Sunday

None

No SMTP Authentication

Automatic

110

Blank

Split (*2)

Do not specify

Use

Notification

Not Notification

60 sec.

5 count

30 sec.

5 count

5 sec.

1000 msec.

1302

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

*1: Different times are specified in the factory settings in order to disperse the load on the REMCS center.

*2: The default value when "Split" is selected is "Split large data into multiple E-Mails" and "512KB".

■ Setup Log Sending Parameters

Screen

Configure Automatic Log Transmission

Setting item

Send Log based on Events Send Log when Errors Occur

Send Log Periodically Periodical Transmission of Log

Time

Period

Day of the Week

Immediately Send Log Manually

Manual Transmission Include I/O Module log

Time Range Specified

Yes

"Specify" checkbox

Cleared

Default value

• When the [Setup Remote Support] setting has not been completed in advance

Cleared

• When the [Setup Remote Support] setting has been completed in advance

Selected

• When the [Setup Remote Support] setting has not been completed in advance

Cleared

• When the [Setup Remote Support] setting has been completed in advance

Selected

Undefined (10:00 - 15:00) (*1)

Once per Week

Undefined (Monday - Friday) (*2)

*1: Different times are specified in the factory settings.

*2: Different days are specified in the factory settings.

■ Setup AIS Connect Environment

Screen

AIS Connect Environment Setting

Setting item

AIS Connect

Use LAN Port

SSL Server Certification

Automatic Log Transmission

Connection Type

Change Password

Disable

MNT

Use

Enable

HTTP

Cleared

Default value

■ Setup Remote Session Permission

Screen

Remote Session Permission

Setting

Setting item

Remote Session

Remote Session Timeout

Forbid

1 h

Default value

1303

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

System Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Apply Controller Firmware

Screen

Controller Firmware Archive

Settings

Schedule Settings

Apply Mode Check

Setting item

Controller Firmware Archive

Apply Date

Apply Mode (Permit firmware downgrade)

Latest Version

Default value

• Apply Now

• When "Set Date" is selected

The current time, which is rounded up to the nearest hour or half-hour, is displayed.

Cleared

1304

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Volume Management

This section provides information on the default parameters of the following actions for volume management.

•

Create Volume

•

Rename Volume

•

•

Refer to "Allowed input for MWC when using the default

•

Start RAID Migration

•

Modify Cache Parameters

•

Set ALUA

•

Set Volume QoS

•

Set Volume QoS Pattern

•

Set Snapshot

■ Create Volume

New Volume

Screen

Automatic Setting

Manual Setting (When creating Standard type volumes,

SDVs, or SDPVs)

Manual Setting (When creating TPVs or NAS Volumes)

Setting item

Use External Drive

Deduplication

Compression

Allocation

NAS FS Block Size

RAID Group / TPP Selection

Data Integrity

Drive Type

RAID Level

Key Group

Number of Volumes

Start of Suffix

Digits of Suffix

Encryption by CM

Use all Largest Free Space

Start of Suffix

Digits of Suffix

Volume No.

Encryption by CM

Number of Volumes

Checkbox to select an External

RAID Group

Start of Suffix

Digits of Suffix

Volume No.

Number of Volumes

Default value

"Enable" checkbox

Cleared

Disable

Thin

256 KB

Automatic

Default

Online (*1)

High Performance (RAID1+0) (*1)

Enable

Off

"Enable" checkbox

Cleared

"Set Value" checkbox

Cleared

Off

Cleared

"Set Value" checkbox

Cleared

1305

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Volume Management

Screen

Manual Setting (When creating WSVs)

Setting item

Volume Information

Use all Largest Free Space

Default value

Manual Setting (When creating WSVs)

Number of Volumes

Start of Suffix

Digits of Suffix

Volume No.

Wide Stripe Size

Concatenation Order

Encryption by CM

"Enable" checkbox

Cleared

"Set Value" checkbox

Cleared

Normal

Automatic

Off

Select RAID Group Information

Drive Type Online (*1)

RAID Level High Performance (RAID1+0) (*1)

Number of Member Drives 4 (*1)

Stripe Depth 64KB

*1: The default value varies depending on the RAID groups registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

■ Rename Volume

Screen

Rename Setting

Setting item

Start of Suffix

Digits of Suffix

Default value

■ Modify Thin Provisioning Volume Threshold

Screen

Threshold Settings

Setting item

New Threshold

■ Set Allocation

Screen

Allocation Settings Allocation

Setting item

80 (%)

Thin

Default value

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1306

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Start RAID Migration

Screen

Setting Volume

Select Migration Destination

Wide Striping Volume Setting

Select RAID Groups

Setting item

Migration Destination

Volume Capacity

FTSP Priority

Encryption

Deduplication

Compression

Allocation

RAID Group / Thin Provisioning Pool / Flexible Tier Pool

Migration source volume size

Automatic

Encryption status of the migration source volume

Deduplication status of the migration source volume

Compression status of the migration source volume

Thin

Default value

Data Sync after Migration

Start Optimizing TPV/FTV

Capacity after migration

Data Integrity

Automatic Stop

Disable

Data protection method of the migration source volume

Cleared Select Migration Destination

Volume Information

Wide Stripe Size

Concatenation Order

Select RAID Group Information

Drive Type

RAID Level

Normal

Automatic

Online (*1)

High Performance (RAID1+0) (*1)

Number of Member Drives 4 (*1)

Stripe Depth 64KB

Checkbox to select a RAID group

Cleared

*1: The default value varies depending on the RAID groups registered in the ETERNUS DX/AF.

■ Modify Cache Parameters

Screen

Parameters Setting

Setting item

Cache Page Capacity

Prefetch Limit (PL)

Force Prefetch Mode (FP)

Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Prefetch Sequential Detect

Count (PSDC)

Sequential Dirty Detect Count

(SDDC)

Sequential Slope (SS)

Sequential Dirty Slope (SDS)

128

Default value

Unlimited ("-" (hyphen))

OFF

Stripe Depth value (Volume)" (page 1391)

"Allowed

Input for MWC When Using the Default Stripe Depth

Value"

and "Allowed input for MWC when the Stripe

Depth value is tuned (Volume)" (page 1393)

"Allowed Input for MWC When the Stripe Depth Value is

Tuned"

for details.

1307

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Screen

Parameters Setting

Setting item

Sequential Parallel Multi I/O

Count (SPMC)

Default value

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3

• For the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

Enable Extreme Cache Pool

■ Set ALUA

Screen

ALUA Settings

■ Set Volume QoS

Screen

Volume QoS Setting

New ALUA

Setting item

New Bandwidth Limit

■ Set Volume QoS Pattern

Screen

QoS Pattern Settings

Setting item

IOPS

Throughput (MB/s)

Follow Host Response

Default value

Unlimited

Default value

Refer to "The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

Refer to "The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")

1308

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Volume Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings"

No.

780 IOPS

600 IOPS

420 IOPS

300 IOPS

240 IOPS

180 IOPS

120 IOPS

60 IOPS

IOPS

15000 IOPS

12600 IOPS

10020 IOPS

7500 IOPS

5040 IOPS

3000 IOPS

1020 IOPS

Throughput (MB/s)

800 MB/s

700 MB/s

600 MB/s

500 MB/s

400 MB/s

300 MB/s

200 MB/s

100 MB/s

70 MB/s

40 MB/s

25 MB/s

20 MB/s

15 MB/s

10 MB/s

5 MB/s

■ Set Snapshot

Screen

Snapshot Setting Name

Setting item

Number of Generations

Mode

Schedule

Day of the Week

Time

Default value

• "Use the volume name to setup snapshot" checkbox

Selected

• Name

Blank (*1)

Automatic

All selected

• When "Time Interval" is selected for "Time"

• When "Advanced Setting" is selected for "Time"

All cleared

*1: For the snapshot destination SDVs, "Selected NAS user volume name" + "$snap_N" (N: Number of generations between 1 -

128) is automatically specified.

1309

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Connectivity Management

This section provides information on the default parameters of the following actions for connectivity management.

•

Create Host Affinity

•

Add FC/FCoE Host Group

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA")

•

Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "Initiator")

•

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")

•

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA")

•

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA/RA")

•

Modify iSCSI Port Parameters ([Send Ping] screen)

•

Modify SAS Port Parameters

•

Modify FCoE Port Parameters

•

Modify Port Mode

•

Add LUN Group

•

Add Host Response

•

Modify CA Reset Group

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Change NAS Server Name

•

Add Local User

•

Modify Local User

•

Add Quota Setting

•

Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

■ Create Host Affinity

Screen

Target Connection Setting

Select Host Group

Setting item

Target Connection

Host Response

Default value

Host Group - CA Port Group

Default

1310

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

■ Add FC/FCoE Host Group

Screen

Host Group Setting

Setting item

Host Response

■ Add iSCSI Host Group

Screen

Host Group Setting

Setting item

Host Response

IP Version

■ Add SAS Host Group

Screen

Host Group Setting

■ Add FC/FCoE Host

Host Setting

Screen

■ Add iSCSI Host

Host Setting

Screen

Setting item

Host Response

Setting item

Host Response

Setting item

Host Response

IP Version

■ Add SAS Host

Host Setting

Screen Setting item

Host Response

Default

IPv4

Default

IPv4

Default value

Default

■ Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")

Port Settings

Screen Setting item

Connection

Set Loop ID

Loop ID

Transfer Rate

Frame Size

Reset Scope

Release Reservation if Chip is

Reset

Default value

FC-AL

Manual

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Manual"

0x0

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Automatic"

Ascending

Auto-negotiation

2048 (bytes)

I_T_L

Disable

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1311

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

■ Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA" or "CA/RA")

Port Settings

Screen Setting item

Connection

Set Loop ID

Loop ID

Transfer Rate

Frame Size

REC Line No.

REC Transfer Mode

Sync (synchronous transfer mode)

Async Stack (asynchronous stack mode)

Async Consistency (asynchronous consistency mode)

Async Through (asynchronous through mode)

Enable

Default value

FC-AL

Manual

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Manual"

0x0

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Automatic"

Ascending

Auto-negotiation

2048 (bytes)

■ Modify FC Port Parameters (when the port mode is "Initiator")

Port Settings

Screen Setting item

Connection

Set Loop ID

Loop ID

Transfer Rate

Frame Size

WWN (Port Name)

WWN (Node Name)

Default value

FC-AL

Manual

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Manual"

0x0

• When "Set Loop ID" is "Automatic"

Ascending

Auto-negotiation

2048 (bytes)

WWPN of the ETERNUS DX/AF

WWNN of the ETERNUS DX/AF

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1312

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA")

Screen iSCSI Settings

TCP/IP Settings

Setting item iSCSI Name

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale iSNS Server iSNS Server Port No.

VLAN ID

Default value iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternusxxxx:00yyyyyy (*1)

IPv4

192.168.xxx.xxx

255.255.255.0

Not specified

Address that is obtained from the WWN of the ETERNUS

DX/AF

Not specified

3260

Disable

3205

Security Settings

General Settings

Additional IP Address Settings

Jumbo Frame

CHAP

Header Digest

Data Digest

Transfer Rate

Reset Scope

Release Reservation if Chip is

Reset

CmdSN Count

Multiple VLAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

• Disable

• When the "Enable" checkbox is selected

Disable

OFF

Auto-negotiation

I_T_L

Disable

Unlimited

Disable

Not specified

*1:

The default value varies depending on the factory setting. Refer to "The default value for "iSCSI Name"" (page 1321) for

details.

1313

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "RA")

Screen iSCSI Settings

TCP/IP Settings

Setting item iSCSI Name

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale

VLAN ID

Default value iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternusxxxx:00yyyyyy (*1)

IPv4

192.168.xxx.xxx

255.255.255.0

Not specified

Address that is obtained from the WWN of the ETERNUS

DX/AF

Not specified

3260

Security Settings

General Settings

REC Settings

MTU

CHAP

Transfer Rate

REC Line No.

REC Transfer Mode

Sync (synchronous transfer mode)

Async Stack (asynchronous stack mode)

Async Consistency (asynchronous consistency mode)

Async Through (asynchronous through mode)

• Disable

• When the "Enable" checkbox is selected

1300 bytes

OFF

Auto-negotiation

Enable

*1:

The default value varies depending on the factory setting. Refer to "The default value for "iSCSI Name"" (page 1321) for

details.

1314

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Modify iSCSI Port Parameters (when the port mode is "CA/RA")

Screen iSCSI Settings

TCP/IP Settings

Setting item iSCSI Name

IP Version

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

TCP Port No.

TCP Window Scale iSNS Server iSNS Server Port No.

VLAN ID

Default value iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternusxxxx:00yyyyyy (*1)

IPv4

192.168.xxx.xxx

255.255.255.0

Not specified

Address that is obtained from the WWN of the ETERNUS

DX/AF

Not specified

3260

Disable

3205

• Disable

• When the "Enable" checkbox is selected

Security Settings

General Settings

REC Settings

MTU

CHAP (CA)

CHAP (RA)

Header Digest

Data Digest

Transfer Rate

Reset Scope

Release Reservation if Chip is

Reset

CmdSN Count

REC Line No.

REC Transfer Mode

Sync (synchronous transfer mode)

Async Stack (asynchronous stack mode)

Async Consistency (asynchronous consistency mode)

Async Through (asynchronous through mode)

• When changing the port mode from "CA" to "CA/RA"

1500 bytes

• When changing the port mode from "RA" to "CA/RA"

1300 bytes

OFF

Auto-negotiation

I_T_L

Disable

Unlimited

Enable

*1:

The default value varies depending on the factory setting. Refer to "The default value for "iSCSI Name"" (page 1321) for

details.

1315

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

■ Modify iSCSI Port Parameters ([Send Ping] screen)

Screen

CM#x CA#y Port#z

Setting item

Send Number 1

■ Modify FCoE Port Parameters

Port Settings

Screen Setting item

Transfer Rate

Set VLAN ID

VLAN ID

Set Fabric Name

Fabric Name

Frame Size

Reset Scope

Release Reservation if Chip is

Reset

10 Gbit/s

Automatic

2048 (bytes)

I_T_L

Disable

Default value

■ Modify SAS Port Parameters

Port Settings

Screen Setting item

Transfer Rate

Reset Scope

Release Reservation if Chip is

Reset

Auto-negotiation

I_T_L

Disable

Default value

■ Modify Port Mode

Screen

Port List

■ Add LUN Group

LUN Setting

Screen

Setting item

Port Mode(After)

Setting item

Start Host LUNs

Number of LUNs

Default value

■ Add Host Response

LUN Settings

Screen Setting item

LUN Addressing

LUN Expand Mode (Peripheral

Device Addressing)

Default value

Peripheral device addressing (Default)

Disable (Default)

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

1316

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Screen

ALUA Settings

Inquiry Command Settings

Test Unit Ready Command Settings

Sense Settings

Mode Sense Command Settings

Other Settings

Setting item

Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access

TPGS Mode

TPG Referrals Mode

Peripheral Device Type

(Peripheral Device Addressing)

Peripheral Device Type

(Flat Space Addressing)

SCSI Version

NACA

Device ID Type

Product ID

Reservation Conflict Response

Enable (Default)

Disable (Default)

Version6 (Default)

Disable (Default)

Type3 (Default)

Default

GOOD (Default)

Default value

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

ACTIVE/ACTIVE (Default)

• For the other models

ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH (Default)

No Device Type (3Fh) (Default)

Notify Change Volume Mapping

Notify Volume Capacity Expansion

Notify Vendor Unique Sense

Sense Data Conversion

Reservation Conflict Response

(Write Exclusive)

Enable (Default)

Disable (Default)

No Conversion (Default)

RESERVATION CONFLICT (Default)

Command Monitor Time Default (25 sec.)

Load Balance Response Status CHECK CONDITION / UNIT ATTENTION (Default) iSCSI Discovery Reply Mode iSCSI Reservation Range

All - Reply All Ports (Default)

Storage System (Default)

■ Modify CA Reset Group

Select Ports

Screen Setting item

"Port" checkbox

Default value

All checkboxes are selected

■ QoS

Screen

Enable/Disable QoS

Setting item

Operation mode Disable (*1)

*1: The QoS function is disabled by default and only [Enable QoS] in [Action] is available.

Default value

■ Set Host QoS Pattern

Screen

QoS Pattern Settings

Setting item

IOPS

Throughput (MB/s)

Default value

Refer to "The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

Refer to "The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

Refer to "The default value for "Port QoS Pattern Settings"" (page 1318)

1317

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Set Port QoS Pattern

Screen

QoS Pattern Settings

Setting item

IOPS

Throughput (MB/s)

The default value for "Port QoS Pattern Settings"

No.

IOPS

27000 IOPS

21000 IOPS

15000 IOPS

10020 IOPS

8040 IOPS

6000 IOPS

5040 IOPS

4020 IOPS

3000 IOPS

2040 IOPS

1020 IOPS

720 IOPS

480 IOPS

240 IOPS

120 IOPS

Throughput (MB/s)

1000 MB/s

850 MB/s

700 MB/s

600 MB/s

500 MB/s

400 MB/s

300 MB/s

250 MB/s

200 MB/s

160 MB/s

125 MB/s

90 MB/s

60 MB/s

30 MB/s

15 MB/s

■ Set LU QoS Pattern

Screen

QoS Pattern Settings

Setting item

IOPS

Throughput (MB/s)

Default value

for the default value.

Refer to "The default value for "Port QoS Pattern Settings"" (page 1318)

for the default value.

Default value

Refer to "The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

Refer to "The default value for "QoS Pattern Settings""

Modify RAID Group Parameters

■ Set FC/FCoE Host QoS

Screen

FC/FCoE Host QoS Setting

■ Set iSCSI Host QoS

Screen iSCSI Host QoS Setting

■ Set SAS Host QoS

Screen

SAS Host QoS Setting

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

1318

Unlimited

Default value

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Set FC Port QoS

Screen

FC Port QoS Setting

■ Set iSCSI Port QoS

Screen iSCSI Port QoS Setting

■ Set SAS Port QoS

Screen

SAS Port QoS Setting

■ Set FCoE Port QoS

Screen

FCoE Port QoS Setting

■ Add LU QoS Group

Screen

LU QoS Group Setting

■ Create Shared Folder

Screen

Shared Folder Settings

Select Volume

Add CIFS Permission

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

Setting item

Bandwidth Limit

Unlimited

Default value

Setting item Default value

Usage

Protocol

Writable

File Sharing

CIFS

Yes

Oplocks

Owner

Disable root

Group root

SMB Encryption of Data Access Disable

Disable Access Based Enumeration

Radio button to select a volume

• When only one NAS user volume exists:

The checkbox for the relevant volume is selected

• When multiple NAS user volumes exist:

All the checkboxes are cleared

Type

Authority

User

Read/Write

1319

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Create NAS Interface

Screen

NAS Interface Settings

■ Modify Local User

Screen

Local User Settings

Setting item

RIP Setting

Redundant Port

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

IPv6 Link Local Address

IPv6 Connect IP Address

IPv6 Gateway

IPv6 Prefix length

Enable

None

Not specified

Default value

■ Change NAS Server Name

Screen

NAS Server Settings Name

Setting item

DXyyyyyyyyyy (*1)

Default value

*1: "DX" is fixed and "yyyyyyyyyy" indicates the serial number of the ETERNUS DX S4/S3 series.

■ Add Local User

Screen

Primary Group

Secondary Group

Setting item

Radio button to select a primary group

Checkbox to select a secondary group sharegroup$

All cleared

Default value

Setting item

Change Password

Radio button to select a primary group

Checkbox to select a secondary group

Default value

Cleared

A radio button for the current primary group to which the selected local user belongs is selected

Checkboxes for the current secondary groups to which the selected local user belongs are selected

■ Add Quota Setting

Screen

Select Volume

Setting item

Radio button to select a NAS user volume

Default value

• If only one NAS user volume exists

The relevant volume is selected

• If two or more NAS user volumes exist

No volumes are selected

1320

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Connectivity Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Screen

Add Quota Target

Setting item

Type

Drive Space

Warning

User

Default value

Limit

File Count

Warning

Limit

• Blank (unlimited)

• GB

• Blank (unlimited)

• GB

0 (unlimited)

■ Automatic Meta Cache Distribution

Screen

Enable Automatic Meta Cache

Distribution

Disable Automatic Meta Cache

Distribution

Setting item

Operation mode Disabled (*1)

Default value

*1: The "Automatic Meta Cache Distribution" setting is disabled by default and only [Enable Automatic Distribution] is available in [Action].

The default value for "iSCSI Name"

The default "iSCSI Name" varies depending on the factory setting. The setting for "iSCSI Name" is as follows: iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-xxxx:00yyyyyy

• xxxx

The following character strings are specified for each model.

For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX100 S4/DX200 S4

"dxl"

For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX600 S4

"dxm"

For the ETERNUS DX60 S3/DX100 S3/DX200 S3

"dxl"

For the ETERNUS DX500 S3/DX600 S3

"dxm"

For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3/DX8700 S3/DX8900 S3

"dxh"

For the ETERNUS AF250 S2

"dxl"

For the ETERNUS AF650 S2

"dxm"

For the ETERNUS AF250

"dxl"

For the ETERNUS AF650

"dxm"

For the ETERNUS DX200F

"dxl"

• yyyyyy

"Model ID + unique number" for WWN is specified.

1321

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

RAID Group Management

This section provides information on the default parameters of the following actions for RAID group management.

•

Create RAID Group

•

Rename RAID Group

•

Change Controlling CM

•

Expand RAID Group

•

•

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

•

Set Key Group (RAID Group)

■ Create RAID Group

Screen

New RAID Group

Automatic Setting

Manual Setting

Setting item

Create Mode

Drive Type

RAID Level

Select Drives

RAID Level

Controlling CM

Fast Recovery Configuration

Default value

Automatic

Online (*1)

High Performance (RAID1+0)

Minimize number of using drives

High Performance (RAID1+0)

Automatic

Advanced Settings

Checkbox to select a drive

Stripe Depth

• When the RAID level is "RAID6-FR"

(3D+2P)x2+1HS

• When the RAID level is not "RAID6-FR"

Blank

All cleared

64 KB

*1: The default value varies depending on the type of drives that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF and that can be used to create new RAID groups.

■ Rename RAID Group

Screen

Rename Setting

Setting item

Start of Suffix 0

Default value

■ Change Controlling CM

Screen Setting item

Change Controlling CM Setting New Controlling CM

■ Expand RAID Group

Screen

Manual Setting

Setting item

RAID Level after expand

Automatic

Default value

High Performance (RAID1+0)

1322

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

RAID Group Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Modify RAID Group Parameters

Screen

Parameters Setting

Advanced Settings

Setting item

Rebuild Priority

Default value

• When the RAID level is not "High Reliability (RAID6-

FR)"

Low

• When the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)"

High

DCMF

Drive Access Priority

Response

Drive Tuning Parameter Setting Enable

Throttle 100%

Ordered Cut 400

■ Assign Eco-mode Schedule (RAID Group)

Screen

Eco-mode Schedule Settings

Setting item

Eco-mode Action

Default value

• When no Eco-mode schedules are registered

Drive always on

• When Eco-mode schedules are registered

Do not change

■ Set Key Group (RAID Group)

Screen

Key Group Setting Key Group

Setting item

Enable

Default value

1323

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Thin Provisioning Management

This section provides information on the default parameters of the following actions for Thin Provisioning management.

•

Set Thin Provisioning

•

Create Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Set Deduplication/Compression

•

Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

•

Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

•

Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

■ Set Thin Provisioning

Screen

Thin Provisioning Settings

Setting item

Thin Provisioning

Maximum Pool Capacity

Default value

Disable

• For the ETERNUS DX60 S4/DX60 S3

32 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX100 S4/DX100 S3

32 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX200 S4/DX200 S3

32 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX500 S4/DX500 S3

64 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX600 S4/DX600 S3

128 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX8100 S3

64 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX8700 S3

256 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX8900 S3

256 TB

• For the ETERNUS AF250 S2/AF250

32 TB

• For the ETERNUS AF650 S2/AF650

128 TB

• For the ETERNUS DX200F

32 TB

1324

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Create Thin Provisioning Pool

Screen

New Thin Provisioning Pool

Automatic Setting

Setting item

Create Mode

Drive Type

RAID Level

Select Drives

Encryption by CM

Alarm

Default value

Automatic

Online (*1)

Striping (RAID0)

Minimize number of using drives

Off

Manual Setting

Deduplication

Compression

Drive Type

RAID Level

Fast Recovery Configuration

• Warning

90 (%)

• Attention

70 (%)

Disable

Online (*1)

Striping (RAID0)

• When the RAID level is "High Reliability (RAID6-FR)"

(4D+2P)x2+1HS

• When the RAID level is not "High Reliability (RAID6-

FR)"

Blank

Off

Add RAID Group

Encryption by CM

Alarm

Chunk Size (*2)

Controlling CM

Checkbox to select a drive

Stripe Depth

• Warning

90 (%)

• Attention

70 (%)

"Deduplication/Compression Ready" checkbox

Cleared

Automatic

All cleared

64 KB Advanced Setting

*1: The default value varies depending on the type of drives that are installed in the ETERNUS DX/AF and that can be used to create new TPPs.

*2: This item is displayed only when the chunk size that was determined according to the maximum pool capacity is not "21

MB".

■ Rename Thin Provisioning Pool

Screen

Rename Setting

Setting item

Start of Suffix 0

Default value

■ Expand Thin Provisioning Pool

Screen Setting item

Setting Thin Provisioning Pool Expand Mode

Manual Setting

(Add RAID Group)

Controlling CM

Automatic

Default value

1325

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Thin Provisioning Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

■ Set Deduplication/Compression

Screen

Deduplication/Compression

Settings

Setting item

Deduplication

Compression

Default value

• If "Current Deduplication" is "Enable", "Error", or "-"

(hyphen)

Disable

• If "Current Deduplication" and "Current Compression" are "Disable"

Enable

• If "Current Compression" is "Enable", "Error", or "-"

(hyphen)

Disable

• If "Current Deduplication" and "Current Compression" are "Disable"

Enable

■ Modify Threshold Thin Provisioning Pool

Screen

Threshold Setting Warning

Attention

Setting item

90 (%)

75 (%)

Default value

■ Modify Cache Parameters (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Screen

Parameters Setting

Setting item

Multi Writeback Count (MWC)

Default value

Refer to "Allowed input for MWC when using the default

Stripe Depth value (TPP)" (page 1392) in

"Allowed

Input for MWC When Using the Default Stripe Depth

Value"

and "Allowed Input for MWC when the Stripe

Depth value is tuned (TPP)" (page 1394) in

"Allowed

Input for MWC When the Stripe Depth Value is Tuned"

for details.

■ Assign Eco-mode Schedule (Thin Provisioning Pool)

Screen

Eco-mode Schedule Settings

Setting item

Eco-mode Action

Default value

• When no Eco-mode schedules are registered

Drive always on

• When Eco-mode schedules are registered

Do not change

1326

ETERNUS Web GUI User’s Guide

B. Factory Default List

Advanced Copy Management

P2X0-1260-25ENZ0

Advanced Copy Management

This section provides information on the default parameters of the following actions for Advanced Copy management.

•

Modify EC/OPC Priority

•

Modify Copy Table Size

•

Modify Copy Parameters

•

•

•

•

•

•

ODX

•